SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

OF ENERGY, WATER AND

ENVIRONMENT SYSTEMS
Volume 111
This page intentionally left blank
 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
OF ENERGY, WATER AND
ENVIRONMENT SYSTEMS
Volume 111

Proceedings of the 3rd Dubrovnik Conference

Dubrovnik, Croatia 5 - 10 June 2005

editors
Naim H, Afgan
lnstituto Superior Tecnico, Portugal

Zeljko Bogdan + Neven DuiC + Zvonimir GuzoviC

University of Zagreb, Croatia

r pWorld Scientific
N E W JERSEY - LONDON * SINGAPORE * BElJlNG SHANGHAI * HONG KONG * TAIPEI * CHENNAI
Published by
World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd.
5 Toh Tuck Link, Singapore 596224
USA office: 27 Warren Street, Suite 401-402, Hackensack, NJ 07601
UK office: 57 Shelton Street, Covent Garden, London WC2H 9HE

British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library.

SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF ENERGY, WATER AND ENVIRONMENT SYSTEMS

Volume III
Copyright © 2007 by World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd.
All rights reserved. This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording or any information storage and retrieval system now known or to
be invented, without written permission from the Publisher.

For photocopying of material in this volume, please pay a copying fee through the Copyright Clearance Center,
Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, USA. In this case permission to photocopy is not required from
the publisher.

ISBN-13 978-981-270-640-9
ISBN-10 981-270-640-2

Printed in Singapore.
 FOREWORD

Sustainability is a new discourse aimed at promoting a new strategy in the development of

energy, water and environmental (EWE) systems. It is becoming increasingly clear that
the quest for sustainable development requires integrating economic, social, cultural,
political, and ecological factors. It requires grassroots initiatives, as well as simultaneous
consideration of the local and global dimensions, and of the ways by which they interact.
It also requires broadening of the space and time horizons to accommodate the need for
intra-generational as well as international equity. The behavior and properties of a EWE
system arise not merely from the properties of its component elements, but to a large
degree also from the nature and intensity of their dynamic interlinkages. It has become
evident that the complexity of these problems requires enhancement and deepening of the
understanding of the implications of the different aspects of sustainability. Resources,
economy and environment are the key components that affect the quality of life on our
planet. It has also been recognized that the social aspect, including information exchange,
is of fundamental importance in understanding sustainable development. In this respect
the 3rd Dubrovnik Conference on Sustainable Development of Energy, Water and
Environment Systems held in 2005 have offered the best opportunity for the
dissemination, exchange and promotion of new ideas for interdisciplinary, multi-cultural
and multi-criteria evaluation of EWE systems.
Consequently, the main objectives of the conference were:
• Development of new methods for the analysis and evaluation of EWE systems (such
as emergy and exergy analysis, life cycle assessment, ecological footprint, MIPS,
etc.).
• Analysis of potential scientific and technological processes addressing the
interactions between energy, water and environment.
• Promotion of a new field of sustainability science that seeks to understand the
fundamental character of interactions between EWE systems and society.
• Development of inter-disciplinary partnerships bringing together leading experts in
physical, life, and environmental sciences, engineering, economics, and social
sciences and informatics.
• Development of models of energy, water, and environmental systems, and their
evaluation.
• Enhancement of methodologies for assessing the comparative sustainability of
different EWE systems options, taking into account economics, environmental
resource use, and social validation.
Among the number of the presented papers those which have met the standard of the
reviewing procedure adapted for this volume are selected.

v
vi

The Proceedings comprises of the following chapters:

• Sustainability Science.
• Energy Policy and Planning.
• New Renewable Energy Sources and Energy Efficiency.
• Energy Cogeneration.
• Water Management.
• Water Desalination and Treatment.
• Environment Assessment and Evaluation.
• Environment Managment.
The leading articles in each chapter are contributions from important authors in field.
It has to be recognized that without support of UNESCO this volume will not be
available. In this respect the editors of the Proceedings of the Third Dubrovnik
Conference on the Sustainability Development of Energy, Environment and Water
Systems are very pleased to express our admiration to the His Excellency Mr. Koichira
Matsuura, the Director General of UNESCO for his effort in supporting sustainable
development on our planet.
The support of European Commission INCO programme, of Hrvatska
elektroprivreda d.d. – Zagreb and of Ministry of Science, Education and Sports of the
Republic of Croatia is acknowledged.
The editors of this volume would like to express high appreciation to the Members of
the Scientific Advisory Board of the Conference in promotion of the Conference.
It is the great pleasure of editors to recognize active role of the Members of
International Scientific Committee in promotion and reviewing papers. The authors of the
papers deserve high appreciation for their cooperation in the preparation of the
manuscript of this volume. It is our obligation to recognize great contribution of the
Organizing Committee.
Editors:
Naim H. Afgan, Željko Bogdan, Neven Duić, Zvonimir Guzović
 CONTENTS

Foreword v

Sustainability Science 1

Sustainability and Safety Evaluation of Energy System 3

Naim H. Afgan & Maria G. Carvalho

Standardisation, Environmentally Friendly Technologies

and Sustainable Development 16
Dimitrij Najdovskij, Robert Blinc, Sadik Bekteshi, Skender Kabashi,
Ivo Šlaus & Aleksander Zidanšek

Sustainable Technology Trends 22

Dora Marinova

Analysis of Sustainability Indicators Using Data-Driven Space Models 33

Adriano Moreira, Maribel Yasmina Santos & Sofia Carneiro

Enhancing the Indicators of Sustainable Development of the Coastal Zone 45

Lidija Runko Luttenberger

Using Entropy for Quantifying Sustainability in Agricultural Systems:

A Case Study in Torogh Research Station 55
Mohamad AsghariPour & Alireza Kocheki

Energy Policy and Planning 67

Large-Scale Heat Pumps in Sustainable Energy Systems: System and Project

Perspectives 69
Morten Boje Blarke & Henrik Lund

CDM in Africa – An Analytical Framework for Action 79

Marcos Alexandre Teixeira, Luis Manuel Alves, Sérgio Teixeira Santos,
Joao Sarmento Cunha & Maria da Graça Carvalho

Strategy of Popularizing Wood Windows for Energy Saving House:

Standardization and Development of Fire-Proof Wood in Japan 93
Yoshihiro Obata, Kazutoshi Takeuchi, Fumie Abe & Kozo Kanayama

Towards a Sustainable Transportation Energy Supply 105

Robert L. Evans

Urban Windfarms and the Pursuit of Sustainable Development 115

Caroline Gallagher & Gholam Jamnejad

vii
viii

The Numerical Modeling as Alternative to Physical Model of Wind Flow

over the Complex Terrain 124
Željko Tuković, Stanislav Sviderek & Jasenko Josipović

Biodegradable Plastic Substitute from Bamboo 133

Osamu Yamashita, Hideyuki Yokochi, Hiroshi Imanishi & Kozo Kanayama

New Renewable Energy Sources and Energy Efficiency 141

Hydrogen for Sustainable Development 143

Frano Barbir

Renewables and Hydrogen for Developing Countries: A Case-Study of Peru 155

Daniel Marcelo & Fabio Orecchini

Financing Projects Related to Environment Protection and Energy Efficiency 167

Daniel Rolph Schneider

An Energy Integration Tool for Batch Processes 175

Ana C. Pires, Cristina M. Fernandes & Clemente Pedro Nunes

The Effect of Water Objects on Summer Microclimate in Dry Regions 186

Robert Vukić & Vesna Lacković

Energy Cogeneration 195

First Micro Combined Heat and Power System in a Swimming Pool in

Portugal: Techno-Economical Evaluation and Policy Framework 197
Eliseu Monteiro & Nuno Afonso Moreira

Incorporating Environmental and Economic Objectives in the Design of

Distributed Generation and District Heating Plants Through Externalities:
Dealing with Uncertainty 206
Damiana Chinese, Gioacchino Nardin & Patrizia Simeoni

Analytical Prediction of Spread Scenarios for Small Scale CHP Systems 221
Ennio Cardona, Antonio Piacentino & Fabio Cardona

Mathematical Modeling of a Heating System for a SnO2 CVD Reactor

and Computational Fluid Dynamics Simulations (3D-CFD) 233
Dino Novosel, Alaide P. Mammanaa & Željko Tuković

Water Management 245

The Water Framework Directive and Mediterranean Agriculture 247

José Albiac & Mithat Mema
 ix

Sustainable Alternatives of Water Management in Urban Areas of

Mediterranean Coastal Cities: The Example of Barcelona Metropolitan
Region (BMR) (NE Spain) 261
Narcis Prat & Antonio Estevan

The Professional and Intellectual Challenges of Sustainable Water Management 270

Brent M. Haddad

A Sustainability Synthetic Territorial Index (ISST) to Assess the Sustainable

Management of Water Resources 282
Giacomo Martirano, Mario Maiolo, Daniela Pantusa, Pietro Morrone &
Giuseppe Bruno

Water Resources - Croatian Comparative Advantage 296

Božidar Biondić & Ranko Biondić

Sustainable Water Resources Management in Lithuanian Industrial Companies 312

Jolanta Dvarioniene & Zaneta Stasiskiene

Decentralized Wastewater Treatment Technology: A Promise for the Future 322

Shashi K. Gupta

Sustainable Development of Water Management in Croatia 331

Dragutin Gereš

Quantity and Quality Changes of Water Resources on the Landslides of

‘Danube Type’ 341
Zorana Zrnić, Milica Stojiljković & Dragica Stojiljković

Water Desalination and Treatment 349

Multi-Effect Boiling System MEB: An Energy Viewpoint 351

M. A. Darwish, Faisal Al Juwayhel & Hasan Kamal

Desalination as a Sustainable Source of Fresh Water Provision? 373

Luis Serra, Javier Uche & Gemma Raluy

Removal of Chlorobenzenes from Groundwater Using a Combined Solar

Photocatalytic/Stripping Reactor 393
György Mink, László Horváth, György Méder, Karoly Welther, Imre Hazi,
Francesco Floris & Pierro Mulas

Reliable Transport of Sewage Water with Centrifugal Pumps – All Technical

Problems Solved 407
Friedrich-Karl Benra
x

Environment Assessment and Evaluation 427

Improvement of Regional Sustainability Assessments: An Ecological-Economic

Framework Integrating Trade and Multi-media Pollutants Transfers 429
Friot Damien, Blanc Isabelle & Olivier Jolliet

Corporate Attitudes to Environmental and Sustainable Technology Strartegies 438

Margaret Gollagher & Dora Marinova

About the Environmental Impact of Buildings: Analysis of Buildings Use

Incidence in the Energy Consumption 450
Fabian López PLazas & Albert Cuchí Burgos

Implementation of Kyoto Protocol and Emission Trading 463

Ana Ćurković, Ivan Andročec & Ante Ćurković

Regulating Animal Manure to Reduce Pollution and Ensure Sustainable

Practices 478
Terence Centner

Heating Plant Air Pollution Reduction: The Case of Kragujevac Town 486
Predrag Radovanović, Marina Jovanović, Milić Erić, Dejan Milošević &
Biljana Stefanović

Environment Managment 495

Environmental Sustainability Measured through Social and Environmental

Responsibility 497
Manuela Sarmento, Diamantino Durão & Manuela Duarte

Simulation of Soot Formation and Analysis of the “Advanced Soot Model”

Parameters in an Internal Combustion Engine 508
Marko Ban, Eter Priesching & Neven Duić

Exergy Analyse of CHP Plant TE-TO Zrenjanin 518

Predrag Rašković, Svetislav Cvetković & Sreten Stoiljković

Development of Environmental Guidelines for the Region of Western Balkans 531

Dimitrios Sanopoulos & Neven Duić

High Efficiency Heat and Material Recovery of Plastic Waste Including

Polyvinyl Chloride by Using Sumitomo Metals’ Waste Gasification and
Smelting System 536
Takaiku Yamamoto, Hirotaka Sato, Yoshinori Matsukura, Atsuya Kasai,
Yutaka Ujisawa, Hiroaki Ishida & Ryunosuke Kikuchi
 xi

The Statistical Analysis of Human Being — Environment Relation 548

Daniela-Emanuela Dănăcică

Phytoremediation New Technology for Sustainable Development 558

Mara Vlajkovic & Bojka Blagojevic

Determination of Lubricant Oil Quality in Vehicles Using Neural Network

for Environmental Issues 568
Siti Norul Huda Sheikh Abdullah, Khairuddin Omar, Mohammad
Syarif Afriansyah, Lee Chin Sin, Norsalina Harun, Kamsuriah Ahmad,
Mohd Zakree Ahmad Nazri, Mohamad Faidzul Nasrudin,
Abdul Sahli Fakhrudin, Siti Rozaimah Sheikh Abdullah,
Che Hassan Che Haron & Mohd Esa Baruji

Air Quality Control in Bor 583

Viša Tasić, Dragan R. Milovojević & Novica Milošević
SUSTAINABILITY SCIENCE

1
This page intentionally left blank
 SUSTAINABILITY AND SAFETY EVALUATION OF
ENERGY SYSTEM

NAIM H. AFGAN
Instituto Superior Técnico, Technical University of Lisbon, Av. Rovisco Pais
Lisbon, P-1049-001, Portugal

MARIA G. CARVALHO
Instituto Superior Técnico, Technical University of Lisbon, Av. Rovisco Pais
Lisbon, P-1049-001, Portugal

In the assessment of long term behavior of the complex system we have to introduce notion of
sustainability as the measure for the quality of the system. It is defined as the quality which is
measuring the ability of our society to secure and not compromise the ability of future generation to
have quality of the life at least the same as our generation. The safety property of complex system is
immanent to any system. It reflects quantitative merit for degradation of the system. Also, it includes
rate of changes for any process leading to degradation of the system. Environmental degradation is
among the most pressing global issues confronting modern society. Sustainability and safety are
linked with the similar essential idea to prevent degradation of the quality of the system. The
sustainability is defined as the aggregation function of physical, social, technological, environmental
and resources parameters. The safety is time derivative of the sustainability index. Demonstration
examples of application of the multi-criteria in evaluation Sustainability Index and Safety Index of
the system proves that the evaluation of complex system is involved in sustainable development
research with associate uncertainty suggesting that the research should move toward the search for
general principle and guiding questions for new investigation.

1 Introduction
The vulnerability of modern world is an important issue to our humanity. For this reason
it is of great importance to understand the state of system which may lead to the
hazardous degeneration of any life support systems [1]. We now live in the world with
treats that most of our sophisticated man made systems may become source of the
hazardous species which may effect human lives. Fundamental safety consciousness is a
challenge for understanding the need for the development of appropriate methodology for
the assessment and evaluation of potential standard for safety. We are witnessing
everyday that the safety notion is a key issue in human life. It has effects with individual
and collective consequences in long term and short term span of time.
The development of sustainability science has become ultimate goal of modern
society [2]. Like any other knowledge the safety science is cumulative resource of human
history. Number of hazardous events is increasing which may be justified as consequence
of the need for the better understanding individual events as much as the notion of
collective properties of life support systems. It is immanent to any life support system to
be described with the respective properties representing collective set of individual

3
4

indicators. Relation between the safety properties of complex system and any other
property of complex system is the fundamental quality indicator of the system.
In the assessment of long term behavior of the system we have to introduce notion of
the sustainability as the measure for the quality of the system [3,4]. It is defined as the
quality which is measuring the ability of our society to secure and not compromise the
ability of future generation to have quality of the life at least the same as our generation.
This measurement is aimed to facilitate control of the steady state of our systems. The
safety of any system is closely linked to the change of quality of the system. It is known in
thermodynamics that any change of the entropy of the system is directed to its maximum.
If we look at the global scale of complex systems the maximum entropy will mean the
death of the system. If we consider complex system defined with sustainability as the
indicator of its quality, it is logical to assume that the time change of sustainability of the
system may be used as the measure for the potential changes of safety of the system. Even
it was accepted that present science is not in position to allow us to explain or model the
complex system in the world, in the past number of years the attention was focused to
study phenomena that seemed to be governing the spontaneous appearance of novel
structure and their adoption to the changing environment [5]. Most of the life support
systems are convoluting to the formation of the new structure and require a new approach
in the evaluation of the system. The complexity of the systems is increasing in current
decade. There are many reasons. Among those are: ontological changes, epistemological
changes and changes in the nature of decision making. Sustainability development
requires integrating economic, social, cultural, political and ecological factors. From the
scientific viewpoint there are two basic tasks: one of the most important is the
identification and understanding the linkages between different factors and different
scales that originate the possible changes in one component of the system into other parts
of the system. Other task is understanding the dynamic of the system.
Environmental degradation [6] is among the most pressing global issues confronting
modern society. Investigation of the potential capacity of the complex system to cause
environmental degradation is an important goal of modern science. Study of these
problems has imposed the demand for the assessment of safety properties of complex
system [7]. In this respect definition of the safety property of the system is the essential
parameter which define the adaptability of the system to its surrounding. Since
sustainability of the complex system is by itself its property of the system, it is acceptable
to take the sustainability change as the property indicator for the safety of the system.
Sustainability and safety are linked with the similar essential idea to prevent
degradation of the quality of the system. As sustainability is defined as the aggregation
function of the physical, social, technological, environmental and resources parameters it
can be defined that the safety is time derivative of the sustainability indicators. Abrupt
change of the sustainability will lead to the disastrous degradation of the system.
Similarly, it can be taken that any adverse change in the sustainability indicator as the
respective measure for the safety degradation of the system.
 5

2 Sustainability
Sustainability comprise complex system approach in the evaluation of the system state.
By its definition sustainability include definition of quality merits without compromising
among different aspect of system complexity. It is of paramount importance for any
system as the complex system to quantify elements of complexity taking into a
consideration various degree of complexity. As regards complexity elements of the
system it can be codified as the specific structure reflecting different characteristics of the
system as shown in Figure 1.
Any process is characterized by the entropy production as the measure of the
irreversibility of the processes within the system. So, the complexity element of the
system is reflecting internal parameter interaction can be defined by the entropy
production in the system. In the complexity definition of system one of the element is
entropy generation on the system or exergy losses in process [8].
Complexity elements of the economic indicators are structured in different levels are
intrinsic to the specific levels and are measured in different scale. In the classical
evaluation of system the economic merits are of primary interest. Since the economic
quality is reflecting optimization function imposing minimum finale product cost, there
are a number of parameters which are of interest to be taken into a consideration in the
mathematical model for the determination of the optimized values of required for its
evaluation.
Mutual interaction between the system and its surrounding is immanent for any life
support system. As it is known the system is taking material resources from the
surrounding and disposing residual to the environment. Among those residuals are the
most important those which are in gaseous form and are dissipated to the environment.
Also, most of the energy system is disposing low entropy heat to the environment.
The social element of complexity of the system is property of the complex system. In
the social aspect of the system is included risk of environmental changes, health and
nuclear hazards and may have to deal with a compounding of complexity at different
level. Also, under social constrain reflecting social aspect of complexity of energy system
are added values which improve the quality of the human life.
The technology quality of the system is the element of the complexity of the system.
It may be defined and qualified as the potential upgrading of the individual part of the
system and also as the interrelation among the elements. In the language of complex
system this property can be understood as the inherent creativity of spontaneous
appearance of novel structure. Thermodynamically, information introduced in the system
is the negentropy as the result of the change in the structure of system leading to the
better performance.
6

SUSTAINABILITY
INDEX

Social
Indicator
Technological
Indicator Environmental
Indicator

Economic
Resource Indicator
Indicator

Figure 1. Sustainability Index Structure.

3 Safety
In the decade from 1991-2000, natural disasters killed a reported 665,598 people,
probably an underestimate. And every year over 211,000 people are affected by natural
disasters - two-thirds of them from floods. The number of weather-related disasters
(droughts, floods and storms, for example) has doubled since 1996 while the number of
geophysical disasters (e.g. earthquakes and volcanic eruptions) has remained steady over
the last decade. And while floods cause the most damage, earthquakes run a close second,
causing nearly US$270 billion of damage in the decade from 1991-2000.
The risk of natural disasters is often known and some preventive measures can be
taken to protect human life, using selected materials and practices for building, avoiding
flood-prone areas, etc. But it is often impossible to protect historic monuments from
damage. Local authorities might also draw up a disaster action plan that could include
briefing emergency services on how to limit the damage.
The safety of complex system property is immanent to any system. It reflects
quantitative merit for the degradation of the system. Also, it includes rate of changes for
 7

any process leading to degradation of the system. It may be seen as the potential property
predicting total degradation of the system. It is commonly known that any degradation of
the system precede the changes of the main properties of the system. Since sustainability
is a complex property of any system the description of the sustainability change in time
scale will lead to the possibility to define those rates of changes which may have different
consequences. There are different disasters which are reflection of the specific causes. For
life support systems they are classified depending type of disasters. Figure 2 shows
participation of the type of disaster in the total number of disasters [9].

Disaster Statistics

40,00%
35,00%
30,00%
25,00%
20,00% Series1
15,00%
10,00%
5,00%
0,00%
t

Da r e
on ur e
d

Ha tal
re

ftw Fa r

g
Co ma ter
s

En e F e
ef

e
S o ms r ro
oo

al w ar k i n
ru

ar ilu r

u
ag
Fi
Th

en
s

l
vir ail
Vi

m nE

u s F ai
Fl

Hu isa

m
m
D

e
l
ra
tu

io
rd
Na

li c
Ha
M

Figure 2. Disaster Statistics.

Taking into a consideration the change of individual elements of complexity we can

design quantities which are of importance for definition of the potential states leading to
the degradation of the system. In this respect we can analyze all elements of the
complexity of the system and their change in the time scale.
Any process in the system is characterized with the entropy production as the
measure of the irreversibility of the processes within the system. The stationary state of
the process is characterized by the constant entropy production [15]. Non linearity of any
process leads to the very fast degradation of the system. Typical example of this type of
process is explosion. So, the rate of changes of entropy production in the system can be
taken as the characteristic quality of the system which describes safety of the system.
The change of economic elements of indicator is intrinsic to the specific
characteristic to be measured in the time scale. The time change of the economic
indicators is common to the classical evaluation of system. Any crises of the economic
system is preceded by corresponding changes in the economic indicator of the system.
Qualitative measurement of these indicator changes may lead to the forecast of the
8

economic crises which is only one element of the potential disastrous changes of the
system effecting its safety. Figure 3 shows schematic presentation of Safety Index.

SUSTAINABILITY
INDEX
at t0

SUSTAINABILITY
INDEX
at t1
SAFETY INDEX

Figure 3. Schematic presentation of Safety Index.

The mutual interaction between the system and its surrounding is immanent for any
system. The changes in the interaction rate will effect the safety of the system. If this
processes are in steady state it can be considered that the system safe. As good example
for this type of changes of indicators is the interaction of the system and its surrounding in
the case of radioactive leaks from the nuclear facilities, which may lead to the hazardous
consequences.
The change of social element of complexity of the system is property of the complex
system. The social aspect of the system includes the risk of environmental changes, health
and nuclear hazards and may have to deal with a compounding of complexity at different
level. It is of interest to notice that some of the social changes are an inherent
characteristic of the system. As example we can take any strike which is result of the
economic changes of the system. Similar example can be seen if there is sudden change in
the environment which will lead to the social disturbance.

4 Multi-criteria Evaluation of Sustainability and Safety

The complex system requires special methodology for the evaluation. Since complexity of
the system is closely related to the multi-dimensional space with different scale, the
methodology has to bear multi-criteria procedure in evaluation of the complex system.
The method for multi-criteria evaluation and assessment of complex system has
proved to be promising tool for the determination of quality of the system. Even it was
shown that there are some deficiencies in the presented method, it is a new route in
tracing future analysis of complex system.
 9

Sustainability comprises complex system approach in the evaluation of the system

state. By its definition, sustainability includes definition of quality merits [10, 11]. It is
important for the assessment of any complex system to quantify elements of complexity
taking into a consideration various degree of complexity. The complexity elements of the
system can be codified as the specific structure reflecting different characteristics of the
system [12, 13]. It should include description of the interaction of internal parameters of
the system and the system interaction with the different aspect of socio-economic-
environment of ecosystem. The adoption of system to its surrounding leads to the
physical, social and environmental interaction between the system and its surrounding. If
there are number of different systems to be compared taking into a consideration potential
behavior of individual system in the same surrounding there must be potential option
which will give quantified quality priority among the system under consideration.
In order to define quantities which are used as measuring parameters in evaluation of
the systems a following definition of qualities are adapted [14].

4.1. Resource Quality

Complex system is composed of number of elements which are connected with the aim to
perform specific function, The organization of the system elements is reflecting optimized
structure of the system following specific pattern. The material conversion
characterization is thermodynamically justified process with optimal internal parameters
of the system. In this respect the quantification of thermodynamic quality of the system is
reflecting number of parameters which are defining the design of the system. Otherwise, it
can be stated that the complexity element of internal processes in the system can be
defined as the quality of material conversion measured by the thermodynamic efficiency
of the system or any other parameter including integral parameters of thermodynamic
system [15]. The material conversion process is characterized by the entropy production
as the measure of the irreversibility of the processes within the system. So, the complexity
element of the system reflecting internal parameter change and can be defined by the
entropy production in the system [16]. Lately it is becoming popular to make exergy
analysis of the system as the tool for the quality assessment of the system as whole and
also determine exergy losses in individual elements of the system [8]. In this case the
complexity element is entropy generation on the system or exergy losses in conversion
process.

4.2. Economic Quality

Any complex system evaluation has to include economic validation of the product
and it has to be the basic building block of the assessment procedure [17]. Also, it is
indispensable element of the complex system. The quality of complex system has to
comprise the economic validation of the system as the element of complexity. The main
characteristic of the economic quality of the system is defined by the parameters
comprising individual sub-elements of complexity reflecting economics of the system
10

product. It is usually accepted to determine the economic indicator as the reflection of

those sub-elements of complexity which are in the different scale. For this reason
formation of fuzzy set of indicators for the consideration of energy system options is not
trivial and has to reflect different conception of the system. Complexity elements of the
economic indicators are structured in different levels are intrinsic to the specific levels
and are measured in different scale. Since the economic quality is reflecting the
optimization function imposing minimum finale product cost, there is a number of
parameters which are of interest to be taken into a consideration in the mathematical
model for the determination of the optimized values required for its evaluation [18].

4.3. Environment Quality

Mutual interaction between the complex system and its surrounding is immanent for any
life support system [19]. For the complex system there are number of interaction which
are defined by the respective parameters. On the first place, these interactions are the
effects of system on the environment. As it is known that every system is taking material
resources from the surrounding and disposing residual to the environment. Among those
residuals are the most important those which are in gaseous form and are dissipated to the
environment. Also, most of the complex systems are disposing low entropy heat to the
environment. So the interaction between the system and environment is defined by the
amount of material and energy transferred. The assessment of these interactions between
the system and environment leads to recognition of the new element of complexity of the
system. The basic components of environmental complexity element will be used in the
assessment of the quality of individual system among the number of options under
consideration. Every complex system is entity with the strong interaction with
environment. There are ontological changes i.e. human-induced changes in the nature
proceeding at unprecedented rate and scale and resulting in grooving connectedness and
inter dependency. Molecules of carbon dioxide produced in the energy system leads to the
global climate changes and adding new element to the complexity of energy system.

4.4. Technological Quality

The complex system structure organization is subject to the constant development in
order to improve its functionality and performance quality [20]. The adoption of the
system to the new requirement is complementary to the organization changes as the
property of the complex system. The assessment of technological development implies
adaptability of complex system to its evaluation. Information technology has
demonstrated that its application to any system can lead to the intelligent system with self
controlling ability. The potentiality for further improvement can be seen as the
potentiality for self-organization of the system. This can be achieved with the use of
information knowledge, organization and also introduction of new processes. It may be
defined and qualified as the potential of the individual part of the system and also as the
interrelation among the elements. In the language of complex system this property can be
 11

understood as the inherent creativity of spontaneous appearance of novel structure..

Thermodynamically, information introduced in the system is the negentropy as the result
of the change in the structure of system leading to the better performance [22].

4.5. Social Quality

Social aspect of the complex system is important factor to define the quality of the
system. Beside the adverse effect of the system on the environment, there may be another
driving force for the social changes in the region [21]. It can bring new jobs, new
investment, new infrastructure and many other advantages in the region. This quality of
the system must be defined as the elements of the complexity of the system. The
interactions of the system with society are properties of the whole, arising from the
interactions relationship among the system and surrounding. With a number of options
under consideration the social element of complexity of the system will comprise integral
parameters and their evaluation. The social aspect of the system includes risk of
environmental changes, health and nuclear hazards and may have to deal with a
compounding of complexity at different level. Also, under social constrain reflecting
social aspect of complexity of system are added values which improve the quality of the
human life.

5 Indicators
In order to develop appropriate tool for the quality presentation of complex system, it is
of interest to introduce the notion of the indicators which are measuring parameters of the
respective quality [22]. Before, we will introduce individual indicators the agglomeration
procedure is described.

5.1. Hierarchical Concept of Indicators

As it was shown different complexity elements are expressed as the integral property of
the system. For the determination of these elements respective model are used based on
the mathematical description of the processes within the system.
Recently it has become necessary to make assessment of any system taking into a
consideration the multiple attributes decision making method. It has been exercised in the
number of cases the evolution of systems with criteria reflecting resource, economic,
environment, technology and social aspect [23, 24, 25]. A complex (multi-attribute, multi-
dimensional, multivariate, etc.) system is the system, whose quality (resources,
economics, environment, technology and social) under investigation are determined by
many initial indices (indicators, parameters, variables, features, characteristics, attributes,
etc.). Any initial indicator is treated as the quality’s, corresponding to respective criteria.
It is supposed that these indices are necessary and sufficient for the systems’ quality
estimation [26].
An example of graph-representation of a 2-height pyramidal hierarchy of indices is
pictured on the Figure 4.
12

INDICATORS

Level -0 Level -1 Level - 2

Aggregation
Resources

S
U
S
COMPLEX Economic T
SYSTEM A
I
A N
G A
G B
Environment R I
E L
G I
A T
Date T Y
Base IO
Technology
N
I
N
D
E
X
Social

Figure 4. Graphical presentation of the algorithm for the sustainability evaluation of complex systems.
 13

5.2. Safety Index

If it assumed that the sustainability indicator is time dependent function , we can take
predefine time increment and determine Sustainability Index at the beginning and the end
of the time increment.
In this respect we can form respective data bases reflecting individual values of the
indicators for the specific time. Following the same procedure for the Sustainability Index
Increment for the specific time increment we will obtain change in the Sustainability
Index as measure of the Safety Index, Figure 5. If this procedure will be applied for the
different time increments the results obtained will give us possibility to justify Safety
Index as the property of the complex system. Introduction of block diagram is aimed to
show the procedure for the definition and determination of the safety index. As it can be
noticed the first step in this procedure is to define an increment of time for the collection
of the basic data to be used in determination indicators.

In AgIi

I
N AgI1
D
I Sustainability
Data C AgI2
base
Index 0
t0 A
T
O AgI3
R
S St0 - St1 SAFETY
COMPLEX INDEX
SYSTEM

I
N AgI1
D
I
Data C AgI2 Sustainability
base
A Index 1
t1
T
O AgI3
R
S

Figure 5. Block Diagram for Safety Index.

14

The safety in complex systems is an open question. We have described one approach
to achieving this goal that has been demonstrated on several real systems, including
energy environment and water systems [28, 29]. Safety, however, is not something that is
simply assessed after the fact but must be built into a system. By identifying safety-related
requirements and design constraints early in the development process, special design and
analysis techniques can be used throughout the system life cycle to guide safe software
development and evolution.

References

1. World Summit on Sustainable Development, Johannesburg 2002, Plan of

Implementation
2. Robert W. Kates at all, Sustainability Science, Science 27 April 2001, Vol.292,
pp.641-642
3. Report of United Nations Conference on Environment and Development, Rio de
Janeiro, 1992.
4. Agenda 21, Chapter 35, Science for Sustainable Development, United Nations
Conference on Environment and Development, 1992.
5. M. Leveson at.all,Demonstration of a Safety Analysis on a Complex System, Report
of Safeware Engineering Comp, Seatle, USA
6. M.B. Neance, Sustainable Development in 21st Century : making sustainability
operational, 2001, Ecosystems and Sustainable Development , Ed: Y.W. Esteve, A.
Brebbia, Wessex Inst. of Tech, UK, WIT Press
7. A. Vag, Simulating Environment Degradation caused Conflicts and Cooperation,
http:worldinfigures.org/eac.made/eac ver2.html
8. J. Szargut, The Exergy Method and its Application in Ecology, WIT Press , 2004
9. World Disaster Report 2001.
10. M. Gianpiero, K.Mayuari, G. Postar, Energy Analysis as a Tool for Sustainability :
Lessens for Complex System Theory. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences,
879, pp.344-367, 1999.
11. F. Heylighen, The Science of Self-organization and Adaptively, Free University of
Brussels, Belgium
12. “Epsilon” A Model for Environmental Sustainability Indicators for EU NUTS
Region, http://EnviroSystem.hydro.ntua.gr
13. M. Plank, Treatise on Thermodynamics, Doves Publications Inc, 1926.
14. N. Nakicenovic, P.V. Gilli, R. Kruz, Regional and Global Exergy and Energy
Efficiency, Energy, 1996,21,(3) pp.223-237
15. I. Progogine, Evaluation Criteria, Variational Properties and Fluctuations, Non-
equlibrium Thermodynamics Variational Techniques and Stability, Ed.
R.J.Donnely,R.Herman, I.Prigogine, The University of Chicago Press, Chicago,
1966.
16. I. Prigogine, D. Kondepudi, Modern Thermodynamics: From Heat Engine to
Dissipative Processes, John Wiley and son, Chichester, 1998.
17. K-H. Robert, J. Holinber, U. Lundquist, LCA from a Sustainability Perspective, Int.
Journal LCA, (2), pp.68/72, 2000.
 15

18. J.van Geldrop, C. Withangen. Natural capital and sustainability, Ecological

Economics. 32(3):445-455, 2000.
19. Knowledge for Sustainable Development An Insight Into The ENCYCLOPEDIA OF
LIFE SUPPORT SYSTEMS Volumes I,II,III,UNESCO Publishing-EOLSS
Publishers, Oxford, UK.
20. M. Binwanger, Technological Progress and Sustainable Development, Ecological
Economics, 36, pp.119-132, 2001.
21. J. Goldberg, Th. B. Johanson, Energy as the Instrument for Socio-economic
Development, UNDP Energy and Atmosphere Programme.
22. E. D’Angelo, G. Perrella, R. Bianco, Energy Efficiency Indicators of Italy, ENEA
Centro Ricerche Casaccia, Roma, RT/ERG/96/3
23. N.V. Hovanov, Analysis and Synthesis of Parameters under Information Deficiency,
St. Petersburg University Press, St. Petersburg, 1996 (In Russian).
24. N.V. Hovanov, Yu.V. Fedotov & V.V. Zakharov, The making of index numbers
under uncertainty, In: Environmental Indices. Systems Analysis Approach, ed. Yuri
A. Pykh et al., pp.83-99, EOLSS Publishers Co., Oxford, 1999.
25. N.V. Hovanov, Yu.V. Fedotov & V.V. Kornikov, General aggregation problem in
economics, pp.37-38, Abstracts of the Fourth International Workshop “Multiple
Criteria and Game Problems under Uncertainty”, Orehovo-Zuevo, Russia, 1996,
International Research Institute of Management Science, Moscow.
26. R. Dawes & B. Carrigan, Linear models in decision making, Psychol.Bull., 1974, 81,
95-106.
27. N.H. Afgan, M.G. Carvalho, A.N. Hovanov, Energy System Assessment with
Sustainability Indicators, Energy Policy, 28 (2000), pp.603-612.
28. L. Fugaro at all, Application of Emergy Analysis to Sustainable Management of
Water Resources, The Book of Proceedings of the 2002 Sustainable Development of
Energy, Water and Environment Systems, Eds. N. Afgan, Z. Bogdan, N. Duic,
Published by A.A Balkema, 2004.
29. M. Sarmento, M. Durao, D. Durao, Qualitative Aspects of Sustainability in a Green
Society, The Book of Proceedings of the 2003 Dubrovnik Conference of Sustainable
Development of Energy, Water and Environment Systems, Eds. N.H. Afgan, Z.
Bogdan, N. Duic, Z. Guzovic, Published by Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and
Naval Architecture, 2005.
 STANDARIDISATION, ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY
TECHNOLOGIES AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

DIMITRIJ NAJDOVSKI
X3data, Novi trg 6
Ljubljana, 1000, Slovenia

ROBERT BLINC
J. Stefan Institute and Jožef Stefan International Postgraduate School, Jamova 39
Ljubljana, 1000, Slovenia

SADIK BEKTESHI
Faculty of Mathematical and Natural Sciences, University of Prishtina, Rr. "Nëna Terezë" nr. 5
Prishtina, Kosovo

SKENDER KABASHI
Faculty of Mathematical and Natural Sciences, University of Prishtina, Rr. "Nëna Terezë" nr. 5
Prishtina, Kosovo

IVO ŠLAUS
R. Bošković Institute, Bijenička 54
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

ALEKSANDER ZIDANŠEK†
Jožef Stefan International Postgraduate School and J. Stefan Institute, Jamova 39
Ljubljana, 1000, Slovenia

Since the publication of »The limits to growth« as a report to the Club of Rome we know that we
have to adapt to living according to a new development paradigm: Instead of unlimited economic
growth which is appropriate for an open system with unlimited energy supply and natural resources
we have to develop a strategy of living in a »growth limited society«. This is so since we are at the
end of the »growth society« which started about 4000 years ago with the start of agriculture and
about 200 years ago with the »industrial revolution« and we are for the first time in history reaching
the ecological and other capacity limits of our planet. The realization of that is of a particular
importance now when Europe is entering a new development cycle. This cycle is on one hand driven
by demographic changes induced by an ageing population, globalization and the transfer of
production to countries with cheaper labour force and on the other hand by informatics, biosciences
and nanotechnology. The various possible scenarios of the future are shown and it is demonstrated
that a sustainable development and/or survival scenario is achievable if certain conditions are met.
Standardisation is important for sustainable development, because on one hand it assures quality of
measured data on environment and indicators of sustainable development and on the other hand it
helps in implementation of new environmentally friendly technologies.

†
Corresponding author: [email protected]

16
 17

1 Introduction
Since the introduction of the sustainable development concept by the Brundtland
commission in 1987 [1] and Agenda 21 as an action plan for sustainable development in
1992 [2] there have been many attempts to measure sustainability using various
sustainable development indicators [3]. Sustainability implies a balanced development of
economy, society and environment in such a way that development with current
generation leaves at least the same or better chances for development also to future
generations. Sustainability is measured by international organisations, such as United
Nations or European Union (EU), with economic, social, environmental and institutional
indicators [3]. There have been also many academic attempts to measure sustainability. A
comprehensive overview of sustainability has been performed by the Initiative of Global
Leaders of Tomorrow Environment Task Force, which created the Environmental
Sustainability Index (ESI) [4, 5] and the Environmental Performance Index (EPI) [6].
Current development of Europe is driven by demographic changes induced by an
ageing population, globalization and the transfer of production to countries with cheaper
labour force as well as by informatics, biosciences and nanotechnology. Indeed, EU has
declared that its goal is to build a knowledge-based competitive economy by 2010 and to
become a knowledge-based sustainable society by the year 2025.
The two critical issues are over use of resources on one side and environmental
pollution on the other side, and they are interconnected. One of the most serious
environmental pollution issue is the emission of green house gases (GHG) connected with
the over use of oil resources. The significance of the Kyoto protocol limiting and reducing
GHG emission is more political than scientific and practical. The CO2 emissions
reductions that it requires – an average of 5.4 % below 1990 levels by 2008 – 2012 - are
extremely modest. The biggest emitter of green house gasses, the USA, which produces
25% of global CO2 emissions, has no plans to take part in the Kyoto agreement. Fast
growing countries – China and India – have no emission limits. Also European countries
which signed the Kyoto protocol, can do significantly more to decrease the use of
resources and to decrease pollution. Standardization in European Union would
significantly decrease the over use and pollution.
There are two important effects of standardization. On one hand standardization
assures that measured data on environment are accurate, and on the other hand
standardization helps in introducing new practices, which are more sustainable. The first
issue has been intensively studied. The International Institute for Sustainable
Development for instance issued a comprehensive review [7] to the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO), which held a Social Responsibility Conference in
2004. This review focused on issues related to ISO’s role in standardization of sustainable
development and contained recommendations related to next steps in the standardization
process [7]. Another study was prepared by Natural Resources Canada, which
demonstrated the importance of Data Standardization for Generating High Quality Earth
Observation Products for Natural Resource Management [8].
18

In this contribution we focus on the second issue and try to answer the question how
standardization can help to introduce new and more sustainable practices. We discuss a
specific example of wind barriers and their use in transport. These wind barriers on one
hand reduce energy use and also provide other social, environmental and economic
benefits.

2 Case study example – multifunctional wind barriers

The current EU policy is insufficient to shift the current development trends toward
sustainability. We argue that standardization, and optimization using best practices and
policies that require implementation of environmental standards, such as IPPC, have to be
formulated as EU directives. Once they are accepted within EU, their success will
guarantee their spread elsewhere.
We discuss a specific example of good practice regarding wind barriers and their use
in transport. These wind barriers on one hand reduce energy use and provide other social,
environmental and economic benefits. The Ajdovščina-Vipava highway in Slovenia has
been selected for a pilot test, because strong pulsating wind causes this highway to be
closed for a significant part of the year. Figure 1 shows a map of the region where wind
barriers are proposed to be built. A design of the new wind barrier has been made, which
will allow the traffic to flow throughout the year, and at the same time serve as a source of
renewable energy.

Figure 1. Map of the region where wind barriers are proposed to be built.
 19

Figure 2. Wind pattern around the barrier.

Proposed design of a wind barrier is shown in Figure 2 as a cross section

perpendicular to the highway. The barrier is designed as a series of wings on the side,
from which the strong wind blows, and another wing on the other side for stabilization of
the wind pattern. The wing system is 1.3 m high, and the wing on the other side is 1,8 m
long. The system is designed so that the wind speed on the highway is reduced from the
nominal speed 35 m/s below 2 m/s. All these wings are designed to be adjustable, so that
they would move according to the wind pattern. Each wing would be equipped with
piezoelements and solar cells. During strong winds the wings would convert wind energy
into electrical energy using piezoelements. When there is no wind, the wings rotate
toward the sun, so that solar cells can be efficiently used.

3 Various scenarios
Current trends without a widespread implementation of new environmental standards are
unsustainable ecologically and socially as demonstrated at UN conferences in Rio de
Janeiro in 1992 and confirmed in Johannesburg 2002. The business as usual is
impossible. The world today is fundamentally different from the one in which the current
scientific enterprise has developed [9]. There are strong couplings among biological,
ecological, physical, economic, business, social, R&D and political systems. They each
have distinct value systems and have evolved in a regime of weak coupling. To avoid
catastrophic scenarios [9, 10] our approach has to be integrated emphasizing knowledge –
business – governance intertwining.
20

Meadows et al. [10] developed several quantitative scenarios of global development. We

tested their model with various assumptions regarding technological development and
implementation of technological solutions with new environmentally friendly
technologies as standards. All scenarios which don’t assume implementation of new
environmentally friendly technologies as standards predict a collapse of industrial
production and deterioration of environment already in the first half of this century. If the
current industrial civilization wants to survive without a complete breakdown of its
institutions and quality of life, it is therefore vital to:
• Develop, accept and implement new environmental standards, such as for example
the IPPC Directive of the European Union [11].
• Stimulate new scientific discoveries and technological implementations of ideas,
which can improve the state of environment, such as multifunctional wind barriers
described in the previous chapter.
• Standardize these new discoveries, so that they become common practice.
This standardization of new environmentally friendly technologies can either be achieved
due to their superior economical performance or as an international agreement, such as
European Union Directive or United Nations protocol.
Only if new discoveries can be standardized for global applications, there is a chance
that a collapse of industrial production can be avoided.

4 Conclusion
Using a specific example of multifunctional wind barriers we demonstrated the
importance of standardization for sustainable development. We further used quantitative
models of development in order to demonstrate that implementation of new
environmentally friendly technologies is vital for survival of current industrial civilization
and its transition to sustainability. Broad implementation of these technologies can either
be achieved because of their superior economic performance or with international
agreements for standardization of these technologies. The example of multifunctional
wind barriers demonstrates that creative ideas can lead to development of new
technologies, which are both economically competitive and environmentally sustainable.

References

1. World Commission on Environment and Development. Our Common Future. Oxford

University Press (1987).
2. D. Sitarz, Agenda Twenty-One: The Earth Summit Strategy to Save Our Planet.
Nova Publishing Company (1993).
 21

3. United Nations Division for Sustainable Development. Indicators of Sustainable

Development. See also:
http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/natlinfo/indicators/isdms2001/table_4.htm.
4. 2002 Environmental Sustainability Index. An Initiative of Global Leaders of
Tomorrow Environment Task Force. World Economic Forum, Annual Meeting 2002,
in collaboration with Yale Center for Environmental Law and Policy, Yale
University, Center for International Earth Science Information Network, Columbia
University. See also:
http://sedac.ciesin.columbia.edu/es/esi/ESI2002_21MAR02a.pdf.
5. D.C. Esty, M. Levy, T. Srebotnjak, A. de Sherbinin, 2005 Environmental
Sustainability Index: Benchmarking National Environmental Stewardship. New
Haven: Yale Center for Environmental Law & Policy (2005). See also:
http://www.yale.edu/esi.
6. D.C. Esty, M. Levy, T. Srebotnjak, A. de Sherbinin, C.H. Kim, B. Anderson, Pilot
2006 Environmental Performance Index. New Haven: Yale Center for Environmental
Law & Policy, (2006). See also: http://www.yale.edu/epi.
7. ISO Social Responsibility Standardization: An outline of the issues, International
Institute of Sustainable Development, 2004. See also: http://www.iisd.org/
8. P.M. Teillet, G. Fedosejevs, R.K. Hawkins, T.I. Lukowski, R.A. Neville, K. Staenz,
R. Touzi, J. van der Sanden, and J. Wolfe, Importance of Data Standardization for
Generating High Quality Earth Observation Products for Natural Resource
Management. Canada Centre for Remote Sensing Earth Sciences Sector Natural
Resources Canada (2006). See also:
http://ess.nrcan.gc.ca/2002_2006/gsdnr/projects/eo_report_e.php
9. G. Gallopin, Sustainable Development: Epistemological Challenges to Science and
Technology, Background paper prepared for the Workshop on “Sustainable
Development: Epistemological Challenges to Science and Technology”, ECLAC,
Santiago de Chile, 13 – 15 October 2004. See also:
http://sustsci.harvard.edu/ists/docs/gallopin_epistem0410_bgpaper.pdf
10. D.H. Meadows, J. Randers, D.L. Meadows, Limits to Growth: The 30-Year Update,
Chelsea Green Publishing Company, 2004.
11. The IPPC Directive, The European Commission, 1996. See also:
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/index.htm
 SUSTAINABLE TECHNOLOGY TRENDS

DORA MARINOVA
Institute for Sustainability and Technology Policy, Murdoch University, Murdoch
Perth, WA 6150, Australia

The environmental problems created by centuries of industrial development as well as the

elimination of social disparities triggered by a globalised market-driven economic order and the re-
evaluation of the western consumption patterns, require a new approach to the use of technology.
The emerging new sustainable technologies should not only have the required functionality but also
must be cleaner, environmentally friendly and socially acceptable. Their use should balance market
profitability with environmental considerations and social accountability. The paper examines the
formation of the notions of environmental and sustainable technologies which is then followed by an
analysis of trends and country rankings in four specific technological groups, namely anti-pollution,
environmental, renewable energy and nanotechnologies. Studies of patented technologies in the
USA are used to examine how different countries fare in the development of new technologies the
application of which can potentially lead to more sustainable economies.

1 Introduction
The rapid development during the industrialisation era not only created powerful
economies and widespread urbanisation, it also established the authority of modern
technology. For example, Engels in 1844 [1] conceptualised the power of science as the
third element in the traditional land-people relationship and argued that its potential and
capabilities are limitless and hence, humans can successfully resolve any resource scarcity
by the means of technology. Technological advancement became and continues to be a
major factor among others in making material production efficient, substituting for limited
or expensive resources (including human power), allowing enormous progress in our
understanding of human health and prolonging life expectancies, organising and
managing people’s livelihoods. The technological race was the main arena of competition
between the West and the former Eastern European economies, and now continues to play
a major part in the development of the North as well as in the economic aspirations of the
South.
The industrial development all over the world however was plagued with environmental
and social unsustainability. The deterioration of the natural environment, loss of
biodiversity, climate change are happening amidst a widespread acceptance of social
disparities, division of the world and concentration of power. Many see science and
technology as playing a panacea role in solving the environmental problems created by
centuries of industrialisation as well as in eliminating the gaps caused by a market driven
economic order, where the high consumption patterns of the elite dominate “rational”
behaviour and production. Irrespectively of whether you agree with the prowess of the
human genius to resolve the problems with technology, it is clear that there is a need for a
new type of technologies which can support the currently emerging culture of

22
 23

sustainability, based on a holistic view of the economic, social and environmental aspects
of human activities. These technologies must be economically viable, environmentally
friendly and socially acceptable. The paper examines the formation of the notions of
environmental and sustainable technologies and then follows with an analysis of trends
and country rankings in four specific technological groups believed to be representative
of these new technologies, namely anti-pollution, environmental, renewable energy and
nanotechnologies.

2 Sustainable Technologies
Some major changes in the last few decades gave raise to the understanding that
sustainable development can only be achieved through the use of sustainable
technologies. What are they and how can countries and companies position themselves
against this trend?
The upsurge in economic globalisation in the 1980s affected not only trade, labour and
financial markets but also impacted profoundly on the nature and rate of technological
change. Around about the same time, environmental issues became a major concern
across countries and industries. The opponents of globalisation have ample evidence of
worldwide increase in environmental degradation and economic inequality (see for
example Borghesi and Vercelli [2]), a major role in which has been played by technology
and technological developments, such as the Green Revolution (Shiva et al. [3] write
about its detrimental effect on village life in India and other developing countries) or the
large increase in greenhouse gas emissions from the fossil fuel based economies. The
proponents of economic globalisation, however, view it according to Tisdell [4] “as a
positive force for environmental improvement and as a major factor increasing the
likelihood of sustainable development through its likely boost to global investment” (p.
185), Studies, such as that by the OECD [5] claim that there are positive environmental
consequences from the interconnected world economy, from the opening of the domestic
markets, introduction of environmental legislation and subjecting firms to international
demand patterns (including green consumerism).
The development, implementation and use of technologies have been influenced largely
by the imperatives of the day and the values embedded in the organisations holding the
necessary resources. A significant component of this development has been new
technologies that have less impact on the environment and/or help restore environmental
health. The intent of these environmental technologies is to reduce the overall ecological
impact by humans and their advantages/benefits include a significant reduction in the
environmental impacts of the activities of companies, agencies or people using them [6].
Companies with strong R&D capabilities and the capacity to bring innovative products
and processes realised that good environmental performance can enhance market
performance [7] and started to generate ranges of clean technologies. Publicly funded
research, including universities, became another significant source of innovative solutions
that reduce the human impact on the environment. A positive outcome of the
24

interconnected world is the facilitated diffusion of these environmental technologies,

services and technological solutions across different markets as well as industries. They
became incorporated in new business practices, in the new way of marketing and
designing products and production processes. Examples include close loop water
collection for water recycling and reuse; photovoltaics for energy generation as a
renewable energy technology; systems allowing reuse of air and oil filters as material
recycling technologies; biodegradable chemicals as pollution control technology [8].
Against the debates about the Kantian principles of universal justice [9] and Foucault’s
reflections on centralisation of power [10], the care for the environment is seen as a
luxury that only the developed rich can afford.
The sustainability agenda of the 1990s and 2000s re-emphasised concerns raised earlier
during the appropriate technology movement about social responsibility in technology
development (eg Schumacher in 1973 [11]). Socially responsive and environmentally-
sound (benign or restorative) technological solutions are now expected to become more
mainstream on commercial markets. Their number, availability and coverage of sectors
and industries are increasing all the time. The renewable energy sector is seen as having
an enormous potential to deliver sustainable technologies and this perspective is shared
equally by government (eg Alber et al., [12] for a State of Hawaii government) and
private industry (eg Yang [13] for a business perspective from Shell). The housing
industry is another example of a large sector which offers opportunities for application of
sustainable technologies (eg AMA Research [14]). The applications of sustainable
technologies in the food market, land use, water management are other extremely
important and contested areas (eg the Western Australian State Sustainability Strategy
[15]). There is also a lot of hope associated with the new emerging frontier technologies
as nanotechnologies which are perceived as inherently green with high potential to
influence the way we do things today (eg Marinova and McAleer [16]).
While the notion and development of environmental technologies cross a wide range of
science and engineering disciplines and require multidisciplinary and interdisciplinary
knowledge, approach and skills, sustainable technologies are even more encompassing.
They are conceptualised in a sphere which joins together integrative analytical skills,
smart synthesis expressed in frontier technical solutions, and contextual understanding of
the problems and implications from the existence, removal, introduction and interactions
of new technologies, including environmental, social and economic dimensions. The
concept of sustainability also has the effect of engaging community, not just technological
experts and policy makers in value-loaded debates, as it affects the future and future
generations [17].
Sustainable technological innovation views technologies as means to achieve broader
aims than economic profit to include environmental restoration and conservation, social
justice as well as economic prosperity and improved quality of life [18]. The sustainable
technology approach also requires understanding of the interactions between technology
and the social, ecological and economic systems. For example, it is not possible to look
for waste management solutions without examining the nature of the goods, their
 25

production, the distribution networks, consumer choices, domestic and work practices,
government policies, legislation and environmental regulations. Similarly, it is impossible
to satisfy the demand for energy without analysing its nature as well as economic, social
and environmental costs and benefits.
Sustainable technologies are therefore technologies which can simultaneously and
synergistically include market profitability, environmental considerations and social
accountability. By balancing these three aspects, they allow for sustainable practices. The
market as well as society expects sustainable technology ventures to deliver in a
synergistic way economic, environmental and social benefits. These innovations need to
be socially acceptable and contribute to the appropriate natural resource management.
The sustainable technologies concept has enormous growth potential, both for each
country and globally, and also within each separate industry or across industries. Major
efforts are made specifically at a local level of governance as this is where the effect of
any changes – deterioration or improvement – in the social, natural and economic
environment are most immediately felt. Example of this are the efforts of the local
government in the US City of Portland [19] to facilitate the introduction of sustainable
technologies by establishing databases of best practices and setting up benchmarks.
Although the prevailing business attitude still is to continue with the business as usual
scenario that demonstrates almost unilateral preference for economic values, the changes
towards a more sustainable way of doing things are accelerating. The pressure is coming
from all directions, including civil society, government and non-government
organisations. It is a movement which can no longer be ignored. There is an emerging
consensus that the sustainability imperatives require new approaches and new ways of
thinking to respond to the current environmental and social concerns. The following are
some examples of strategies adopted and consequent changes:
• Some companies are at the forefront of environmental management and sustainable
technology implementation. For example, such companies have adopted the
voluntary international standards ISO 14000 (covering environmental management
systems, environmental auditing, environmental performance evaluation, eco-
labelling and life-cycle analysis), perform triple-bottom-line accounting, or are
endorsing the Factor 4 and industrial ecology principles.
• In many companies the importance of sustainability is reflected in establishing
sustainability managerial positions. Their role is to direct and be responsible for the
whole impact of the companies’ business.
• Companies are changing their perception of the area of business they are in by
adopting a long-term perspective and engagement with their clients rather than the
pursuit of immediate and fast profits.
• Innovative companies and research organisations are investing at the forefront of
sustainable technology development. This has resulted in intensive investment in
research and development and consequently in numerous new technologies that have
the potential to be sustainable.
The latter development is what constitutes the focus of interest for the rest of this paper. It
can be expected that in the future all technological development will be sustainable.
26

However, for the time being many traditional technologies have started to incorporate
environmental features which make them safer to use. There are also certain new groups
of technologies that are viewed as being more encouraging to sustainability than others.
These trends are discussed in the section to follow.

3 Trends in Selected Sustainable Technologies

Four representative technology groups have been chosen to examine to shed light on the
quantitative trends in the development of sustainable technologies. They are anti-
pollution, environmental, renewable energy and nanotechnologies. The approach used in
this analysis is based on previous studies of patented technologies in the USA (see
Marinova and McAleer [16], [20], [21]) and the data are derived directly from the US
Patent and Trademark Office (PTO). It should be noted that as the assigning of patents to
a particular group of technologies is done on the basis of keywords (rather than through a
thorough analysis of the patents’ descriptions and specifications), the actual numbers are
of informative value. They are however robust enough to outline trends and changes that
have happened over a 27-year period of analysis, namely between 1975 and 2002.
The patent data are by date of patent application, not date of issue which tends to distort
technological trends. It takes at least two years after an application is lodged for a patent
to be issued, and in some cases this delay can be as long as 10 years. The data for 1975-
1999 were extracted from the US PTO database on 8 April 2005, and for 2000-2002 on 1
July 2006. As time goes patent numbers for recent years are likely to slightly increase as
more delayed applications are being approved.
The first group, namely anti-pollution technologies, is traditionally perceived as a reaction
to fix the damage or restore environmental health. Figures 1 and 2 show that although the
overall number of anti-pollution technologies has been increasing since the mid 1980s
(see Figure 1) their share of all patented technologies has dropped (see Figure 2). Most
possible explanation of this is that pollution prevention has become a mainstream
requirement for technology development rather than end-of-the pipe solution.
The second group (as presented in Figures 3 and 4) covers broadly technologies that are
designed to benefit or restore the ecology. The absolute and relative numbers of these
environmental technologies have been steadily increasing until the mid 1990s and then
have levelled off. Some concern can be raised in relation to the issue that their relative
share in the overall patented technologies in the USA has remained low at below 2.5%
and has dropped to around 1.9% in most recent years. If a significant shift towards
sustainability is expected to occur, then more prominent technology development
activities should be observed. However, a possible explanation for the relatively low
levels of patenting of environmental technologies can be found in the fact that
sustainability often requires technological solutions which are locally grounded. Their
application is restricted to the specific conditions of the locality and linked to geo-,
climate, biodiversity and cultural factors and are not easily transferable; hence the
redundancy of the need for patenting.
 27

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

0
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
Figure 1. Annual US anti-pollution patents, 19752002.

3.00

2.50

2.00

1.50

1.00

0.50

0.00
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003

Figure 2. Share of anti-pollution to total US patents (%), 1975–2002.

The group of renewable energy technologies comprises the wide range of solar, wind,
wave, tide, geothermal, hydro and biogas patented energy solutions. During the 27-year
period, their absolute numbers have been slightly on the increase since the late 1980s (see
Figure 5), however their relative share has experienced a significant drop from 1.4% to
below 0.6% and only recently has slightly increased to the low 0.7% (see Figure 6).
The last group of technologies analysed, namely nanotechnologies, are very different in
nature as far as sustainability is concerned. These technologies are perceived to be
inherently ecological and to have a great future potential in many sectors such as
medicine, agriculture, manufacturing, construction, transport and communications among
others. They typically use few resources and, for example, can process all types of waste
or be used in preventive medicine [18]. The absolute number and relative shares of these
technologies has dramatically increased in recent years (see Figures 7 and 8). Currently
their share in new patented technology is just below 4%. Whether the use of
28

nanotechnologies by society, companies and individuals will lead towards a more

sustainable way of living is something yet to be seen and will depend on how deeply the
sustainability culture has been adopted as a main value system.

4000

3500

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

0
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
Figure 3. Annual US environmental patents, 1975–2 002.

2.50

2.00

1.50

1.00

0.50

0.00
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002

Figure 4. Share of environmental to total US patents (%), 1975–2 002.

4 Country Comparisons
It is also interesting to examine how different countries fare in the development of these
new technologies the application of which can potentially lead to more sustainable
economies. Table 1 presents comparative data on a national level for the four groups of
technologies for the top twelve foreign countries patenting in the USA. The USA itself is
not included due to disparities between comparing domestic and international patenting
(the US performance would be the best in all three categories but this country
 29

1600

1400

1200

1000

800

600

400

200

0
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
Figure 5. Annual US renewable energy patents, 1975–2002.

1.60

1.40

1.20

1.00

0.80

0.60

0.40

0.20

0.00
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002

Figure 6. Share of renewable energy to total US patents (%), 1975 – 2002.

also has the advantage of performing in a domestic market). The ranking of the countries
is based on their share of US patents – as a measure for their global presence,
technological specialisation index – as a measure of the national importance of the
technologies and proximity to the market – as a measure of commercialisation (for further
explanation, see Marinova [22]). It is estimated that around 50% of all patents registered
in the USA originate from foreign countries [23]. During the 1975-2002 period analysed,
the top twelve foreign countries cover 45% of all anti-pollution technologies, 29% in
nanotechnology, 27% in environmental technologies and 26% in renewable energy. This
is also indicative of the relative importance which foreign countries assign to the
implementation of the sustainability concept in the American market. Japan ranks first in
anti-pollution technologies, second in renewable energy and nanotechnologies and third
30

in environmental technologies. France is first in nano- and renewable energy technologies

and Germany is first in environmental technologies.

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
Figure 7. Annual US nanotechnology patents, 1975–2002.

4.50

4.00

3.50

3.00

2.50

2.00

1.50

1.00

0.50

0.00
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002

Figure 8. Share of nanotechnology to total US patents (%), 1975–2002.

5 Conclusion
The study reveals that although around for two decades, the practical adoption of the
concept of sustainable technologies has only just started. These technologies still
represent a very small share of the new patents. On the one hand, the type of technologies
patenting is very informative as to where the economically strong economies are going
and as to what their priorities are. However, it also raises very important issues about the
disparity between the ones who can afford to pay for a more sustainable way of living and
the ones who cannot.
 31

Table 1. Country rankings in technology development, 1975-2002

Anti- Environ
pollution mental Renewable Nano
Country technologies technologies energy technologies

Australia 9 3 3 5
Canada 6 5 6 5
France 2 10 1 1
Germany 3 1 3 3
Italy 3 8 9 10
Japan 1 3 2 2
Korea 5 10 10 8
Netherlands 7 2 11 4
Sweden 10 8 8 12
Switzerland 10 6 5 9
Taiwan 7 12 12 10
UK 12 7 7 7

The efforts of the global community to combat the problems of social justice, poverty and
environmental degradation in the pursuit of a better quality of life will be supported and
dramatically enhanced by smart and breakthrough technological developments. We are
witnessing the emergence of the new sustainable technologies which will contribute to the
development of the ethics, values and practices of the new sustainability culture but it will
be up to the global community to make the best use of them for the sustainability of all
people on the planet Earth.

Acknowledgement
The author acknowledges the financial support of the Australian Research Council.

References
1. F. Engels, Outlines of a Critique of Political Economy (1844),
http://csf.colorado.edu/psn/marx/Archive/1844-DFJ/outlines.htm (accessed 8/11/2003).
2. S. Borghesi and A. Vercelli, Sustainable Globalisation, Ecological Economics, 44(1):
77-89 (2003).
3. V. Shiva, H. Noeberg-Hodge, E. Goldsmith and M. Khor, The Future of Progress.
Reflections on Environment and Development, Natraj Publishers, Dehra Dun, India
(1994).
4. C. Tisdell, Globalisation and Sustainability: Environmental Kuznets Curve and the
WTO, Ecological Economics, 39(2): 185-196 (2001).
5. N. Johnstone, Globalisation, Technology and Environment, in Globalisation and
Environment: Preliminary Perspectives, OECD, Paris, 227-252 (1997).
32

6. D. Marinova and W. Altham, Environmental Management Systems and Adoption of

New Technology, in Technology Studies and Sustainable Development, A. Jamison, H.
Rohracher (eds), Profil, München, 199-220 (2002).
7. J. Skea, Environmental Issues and Innovation, in The Handbook of Industrial
Innovation, M. Dodgson, R. Rothwell (eds), Edward Elgar, Aldershot, UK, 421-
431(1994).
8. D. Marinova and W. Altham, ISO 14001 and Adoption of New Technology: Evidence
from Western Australian Companies, in ISO 14001 Case Studies and Practical
Experience, R. Hillary (ed.), Greenleaf Publishing, Sheffield, UK, 251-260 (2000).
9. L. Kant, On the Common Saying, ‘This May be True in Theory but it Does not Apply in
Practice, in Kant’s Political Writings, H. Reiss (ed.), Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge, 54-87 (1971).
10. M. Foucault, Discipline and Punish, Pantheon, New York (1979).
11. E.F. Schumacher, Small is Beautiful: A Study of Economics as if People Mattered,
Vintage, London (1973).
12. S. Alber, J. Bac, J. Dorian, E. Raman, J. Tantlinger and M. Tome, Hawaii Energy
Strategy 2000, Department of Business, Economic Development & Tourism, State of
Hawaii Honolulu, US (2000).
13. L.T. Yang, The Successful Market Introduction of Sustainable Technology, Speech by
Chairman, Shell Companies in Singapore at the National University of Singapore
(2003),
www.sde.nus.edu.sg/.../seminars/THE%20SUCCESSFUL%20MARKET%20INTROD
UCTION%20OF%20SUSTAINABLE%20TECHNOLOGY.pdf (accessed 8/10/2004).
14. AMA Research, New Sustainable Energy Technologies for Housing – UK 2003.
Cheltenham, UK (2003).
15. Government of Western Australia, Hope the Future: The Western Australian State
Sustainability Strategy, Department of the Premier and Cabinet, Western Australian
Government, Perth (2003).
16. D. Marinova and M. McAleer, Nanotechnology Strength Indicators: International
Rankings Based on US Patents, Nanotechnology, 14(1): R1-R7 (2003).
17.A. Davison, Technology and the Contested Meanings of Sustainability, State
University of New York Press, New York (2002).
18. D. Marinova, Development of Sustainable Technologies, in Rationality in an
Uncertain World, G. Banse, I. Hronszky, G. Nelson (eds), Verlag Edition Sigma, Berlin
275-285 (2005).
19. City of Portland, Sustainable Technologies & Practices, (2004), www.
sustainableportland.org/stp_home.html (accessed 7/11/2004).
20. D. Marinova and M. McAleer, Modelling Trends and Volatility in Ecological Patents
in the USA, Environmental Modelling and Software, 18(3): 195-203 (2003).
21. Marinova, D., McAleer, M., Anti-pollution Technology Strengths Indicators:
International Rankings, Environmental Modelling and Software, 21(9): 1257-1263
(2005).
22. D. Marinova, Eastern European Patenting Activities in the USA, Technovation, 21(9):
571-584 (2000).
23. Z. Griliches, Patent Statistics as Economic Indicator: A Survey, Journal of Economic
Literature, 28(4): 1661-1707 (1990).
 ANALYSIS OF SUSTAINABILITY INDICATORS USING
DATA-DRIVEN SPACE MODELS

ADRIANO MOREIRA
Department of Information Systems, University of Minho
Guimarães, 4800-058, Portugal

MARIBEL YASMINA SANTOS

Department of Information Systems, University of Minho
Guimarães, 4800-058, Portugal

SOFIA CARNEIRO
Department of Information Systems, University of Minho
Guimarães, 4800-058, Portugal

Space Models are new space geometries that are created to emphasize the particularities of the geo-
referenced data being analyzed. A Space Model integrates groups of regions that present similar
behavior attending to a specific characteristic. Each group represents a cluster aggregating regions
that are similar regarding to the analyzed characteristic, and regions in different clusters are as
dissimilar as possible. This paper proposes the creation of Space Models, through the STICH (Space
Models Identification Through Hierarchical Clustering) algorithm, as an alternative approach for
data visualization, where the geometry of the maps is created from the data itself. The achieved
results are illustrated through a set of examples that are compared with conventional representations,
showing that Space Models provide real added-value over conventional approaches, namely by
facilitating the identification of peculiarities in the data.

1 Introduction
Maps are used in many application areas to support the visualization of geo-referenced
data. However, the geometry explicit in each map is defined for or with a specific
purpose, being sometimes later used in applications for which it was not conceived. This
is often the case with maps representing administrative subdivisions of the geographic
space. Administrative subdivisions inside a country – parishes, municipalities, and
districts, for example – are defined following specific criteria and an accumulated number
of changes along the years, and not following a natural division of the space. They are
later used as a reference for data analysis, even when they are not the most suitable
resource for that. As an example, consider the ‘Emissions of greenhouse gases’ indicator
distribution across the 15 European countriesa represented in Figure 1, and collected at
NUTS II level.

a
These were the 15 European countries that integrated the European Union until April
2004.

33
34

In the map shown in Figure 1, the conventional method for data visualization was
used. Since the data is available at NUTS II level, the obvious choice for visualization is
to use a map with the NUTS II geometry, classify the data values within a given number
of classes (6 in this case), and paint the NUTS II regions accordingly to the class of the
data value associated to each region. Geographic Information System (GIS) tools provide
means to build these maps automatically, including the classification of the data values in
different classes using a few different methods (Equal Interval, Quantile, Natural Breaks
(Jenks), Standard Deviation).

Figure 1. ‘Emissions of greenhouse gases’ indicator across Europe.

The first problem with this approach is that the NUTS II regions are of very different
sizes: large regions in countries like Spain and Sweden, and very small regions in
countries like Germany and Belgium. The second problem is the choice for the number of
classes used to group the data values (and consequently the number of different colors
used to paint the regions). In this example, regions with data values between 367,20 and
8897,31 are classified within the same class (more than an order of magnitude between
the lower and upper limits). Therefore, the observation of the map does not provide any
information about what regions are close to the lower limit (performing better) or close to
the upper limit (performing worst). To observe these differences, a larger number of
classes must be used, probably turning the map very confusing and loosing the whole
picture. Finally, even with a considerable small number of classes (6 in this example), this
map does not clearly shows the best and worst regions in terms of the indicator under
analysis.
To overcome these limitations this work describes an approach for the identification
of Space Models - new space geometries that are created to emphasize the particularities
 35

of geo-referenced data. Each Space Model integrates groups of regions that present
similar behavior attending to a specific characteristic. Each group represents a cluster
aggregating regions that are similar regarding to the analyzed characteristic, and regions
in different clusters are as dissimilar as possible.
In order to identify Space Models the hierarchical clustering algorithm STICH –
Space Models Identification Through Hierarchical Clustering – was developed, allowing
the identification of sets of regions with similar behavior.
Space Models are of great importance for the analysis of indicators (environmental or
social, for instance) associated to regions and to understand the main differences between
these regions. This is the objective of the EPSILON (Environmental Policy via
Sustainability Indicators on a European-wide NUTS III Level) projectb, in which the
collected sustainability indicators are analyzed in order to identify regions with similar
behavior, and regions that exhibit different trends in data, in order to achieve a sustainable
development across Europe. This project contributed to the better understanding of the
European Environmental Quality and Quality of Life, by delivering a tool that generates
environmental sustainability indices at NUTS-III level. The work described in this paper
was developed as part of the EPSILON project and was integrated into that tool as an
added-value functionality for data analysis.
This paper is organized as follows. In the next section, the fundamentals of Space
Models are introduced and the algorithm used for their creation is described. Then, the
application of Space Models in the analysis of sustainability indicators is presented
through a set of examples. These examples compare the results obtained through the use
of Space Models with the results that are achieved by conventional visualization
approaches based on administrative maps. The following section is dedicated to the
description of the Space Models Tool implementation and its integration into the
EPSILON Tool. Finally, we present some concluding remarks.

2 Space Models
Human beings mentally use space models to simplify reality and to perform spatial
reasoning more effectively. When we look to the birth rate of the several districts of a
country and try to analyze the available data, our first thought is to group districts with
similar birth rate. This procedure allows us the creation of a space model.
Space Models are new geometries of the space that are created to emphasize
particularities of the analyzed data. A Space Model integrates groups of regions that
present similar behavior attending to a specific characteristic explicit in the data. Each
group represents a cluster aggregating regions that are similar regarding to the analyzed
characteristic. Regions in different clusters must be as dissimilar as possible. Besides the
role of Space Models in data analysis, their creation also allow their use as a mean for
data visualization when the available maps are not suitable or do not fit specific purposes.

b
A project founded by the European Commission through the IST program (contract IST-
2001-32389). More details can be found in http://www.sustainability4europe.org/.
36

2.1. Concepts associated to Space Models

The creation of Space Models [1, 2] through clustering techniques [3, 4, 5] allows the
identification of groups of regions that emerge from the analyzed data and not groups of
regions that are imposed by either analysis techniques or human constraints.
The process of creation of Space Models presented in this paper is completely
autonomous and automatic (its algorithm is resumed in the next subsection) and assumes
several assumptions that guarantee the quality of the obtained Space Models. The
principles are:
• Space Models must be created from the data values available for analysis, and no
constraints can be imposed for their identification.
• The created Space Models must be the same, independently of the order by which the
available data is processed in the clustering process.
• Space Models can include clusters of different shapes and sizes.
• Space Models must be independent of specific domain knowledge, like the
specification of the final number of clusters.

2.2. The identification of Space Models with the STICH algorithm

The STICH algorithm [1, 2] is based on an iterative process in which the several regions
are grouped according to their similarity with respect to a specific characteristic. In each
step of this process the clusters are formed joining the k most similar regions, being k a
value identified from the data and dependent of each cluster.
This iterative process starts with all regions in different clusters, i.e. each region
constitutes a cluster, and ends with all regions grouped into the same cluster. As a
hierarchical clustering algorithm it allows the identification of several Space Models, one
at each iteration of the clustering process.
The formal specification of STICH can be found in [1, 2]. Figure 2 depicts a simple
example in which the iterative process of STICH and the clusters identification is
exemplified. In this example, 5 steps were needed to aggregate all data into one final
cluster. At each step different data aggregations are obtained based on the calculation of
the Similarity Matrix of the regions. This matrix contains all the distances existing
between each pair of regions. After this calculation STICH identifies the k-nearest-
neighbors of each region, being k a value that can be different from one region to another
(for more details see [1, 2]). The average of the k-nearest-neighbors of each region is
calculated and the region is afterwards assigned to the cluster in which it appears with the
minimum k-nearest-neighbor average. At this point new clusters are obtained and new
centroids are calculated for them.
 37

Figure 2. The clustering process of STICH.

3 Space Models in Sustainability Development

The work described in this paper, including the STICH algorithm, was developed within
the framework of the EPSILON project with the aim of turning the analysis and
visualization of sustainability indicators easier and more powerful. Although Space
Models can be used in many application areas, in this section we present some examples
within the area of sustainability indicators analysis. With these examples, some of the
benefits of Space Models are demonstrated and compared with conventional approaches
based on administrative maps. However, note that conventional techniques continue to be
useful in many scenarios, and that Space Models approaches are, in many situations, a
complement to these techniques.
Space Models created by using the STICH algorithm have some characteristics that are
illustrated in the following examples, namely:
• They facilitate the identification of peculiarities in the analyzed data by highlighting
regions where the geo-reference data is considerably different from the average. This
allows the easy identification of regions with particular problems or regions that
perform much better than others for a given indicator.
• The same data can be visualized at different levels of aggregation, corresponding to
different Space Models, where the number of clusters and their limits are extracted
from the data itself. These different levels of aggregation allow the analysis of the
same data from a very detailed (although maybe confusing) level to a very broad
level (less detail) without hiding the most different regions.
• A Space Model created from a given indicator can be used to assist on the analysis of
another indicator.
38

To illustrate these characteristics, some data was extracted from the EPSILON database
and used to create Space Models examples. The selected datasets are described next.

3.1. The data available at the EPSILON project

One of the outputs of the EPSILON project is a database that stores a large amount of
information related to the sustainable development assessment across 15 European
countries. The data in this database reflects the sustainability model developed by the
project and is organized accordingly to a 4x4x4 structure: four pillars (Economic,
Environmental, Institutional and Social), four themes per pillar and four sub-themes per
theme. Each sub-theme is supported by a number of indicators and sub-indicators from
where the corresponding value is calculated. Additionally, the database includes a number
of quality assessment parameters that provide information about the quality of the data.
This structure is replicated at four levels of detail (NUTS 0 to NUTS III) with different
amounts of data for each level. For more information on the sustainability model
developed by the project see [6].
The data used in the examples described below was extracted from the EPSILON
database. The first selected dataset (dataset 1) is the ‘Soil Toxicity Index’ indicator
distribution across the 15 European countries collected at NUTS I level. This dataset has
a total number of 74 records. The second dataset (dataset 2) is the ‘Groundwater Quality’
indicator distribution across the 15 European countries collected at NUTS I level. This
indicator represents the quality of the groundwater by means of the level of hazardous
substances. This dataset has a total number of 74 records. The third example uses two
datasets (datasets 3 and 4): one with the indicator ‘Average number of units in all
economic activities’ (activities such as, mining, quarrying, manufacturing, electricity, gas,
transport, restaurants, etc.), and the other with the indicator ‘Emissions of greenhouse
gases’. These two dataset are available at NUTS II level and have 204 records each.

3.2. The Space Models obtained through the STICH algorithm

This section describes some examples of Space Models obtained with the STICH
algorithm for the datasets identified above.
Figure 3 presents a Space Model obtained by the STICH algorithm after grouping the
dataset 1 data values in 4 clusters. Note that the number of clusters is not an initial
parameter of the STICH algorithm – the Space Model with 4 clusters was chosen among
all the Space Models created by the STICH algorithm (this Space Model was obtained at
the 19th iteration of the clustering process).
This example shows that the Space Model obtained by the STICH algorithm
highlight a region (the one formed by two NUTS I regions, DK0 and DE3, marked with
two circles) where the average value of the ‘Soil Toxicity Index’ is much lower than the
same value in all other regions. This allows the easy and immediate identification of the
areas that perform much better than all others in terms of this indicator. In Figure 4, a
 39

conventional map, with the data values classified in 4 classes, is presented. With this
classification, some important information is lost.

Figure 3. Space Model obtained by STICH.

Figure 4. The same data using Natural Breaks classification of the map in 4 classes.
40

For example, note that the region DE3 belonging to the lower class in Figure 3, is
now (in Figure 4) aggregated to other regions for which the performance in terms of the
analyzed indicator is much worse. In this particular case, regions like DE3 are displayed
with the same performance as UKK. However, the first one has a value of 0 while the last
has a value of 0,376167. In summary, the map shown in Figure 3 allows a more easy
identification of the most relevant (best and worst) cases, therefore overcoming the
second problem identified in the map shown in Figure 1.
The next two figures (Figures 5 and 6) shows the same data (dataset 2) at different
levels of aggregation, that is, different Space Models with different number of clusters (11
and 3 clusters respectively) and different limits for each cluster. These two Space Models
correspond to the output of the clustering process at the end of two different iterations.
This example illustrates the versatility of the Space Models approach.

Figure 5. Space Model obtained by STICH at the 2nd iteration.

By choosing the appropriate iteration of the clustering process, the user is given the
opportunity to analyze the same data at different levels: from a very detailed analysis to a
broad view of the data. Moreover, with this approach, the regions that are more different
than the others are not hidden by the choice of a small number of clusters (broader view
in Figure 6). Note that, in this example, Spain stills highlighted as the best region, even
when only three clusters are considered.
 41

Figure 6. Space Model obtained by STICH at the 9th iteration.

The next example shows how a Space Model created from a given indicator – the
‘Emissions of greenhouse gases’ indicator at NUTS II level (shown in Figure 7) – can be
used to assist on the analysis of another indicator – the ‘Average number of units in all
economic activities’ indicator also at NUTS II level (shown in Figure 8).
In this example, the ‘Emissions of greenhouse gases’ indicator was used to create a
Space Model. Then, the data related to the ‘Average number of units in all economic
activities’ indicator was grouped exactly the same way (the same original regions) as the
STICH algorithm did for the first indicator. Finally, this aggregated data was shown on
top of the created Space Model.
The indicator analyzed in Figure 8 is related to the average units of all activities such
as, mining, quarrying, manufacturing, electricity, gas, transport, restaurants, etc. It is
therefore expected that the regions with more activities be more favorable to the
emissions of greenhouse gases. Actually, as seen in Figure 8, the darker regions (regions
with high number of activities) are closely related to the darker regions in Figure 7c
(regions with high emissions of greenhouse gases). In summary, this usage of the STICH
approach facilitates the cross analysis of related indicators.

c
The Space Model presented in Figure 7 can also be compared with the map in Figure 1
that represents the normal classification of the European Countries in 6 classes for the
same dataset.
42

Figure 7. Space Model obtained by STICH for the indicator ‘Emissions of greenhouse gases’.

Figure 8. Analysis of the indicator ‘Average number of units in all economic activities’ in the Space Model
obtained for the indicator ‘Emissions of greenhouse gases’.

4 Technological characterization
The results described in the previous section were obtained from an implementation of the
STICH algorithm called Space Models Tool – SM-Tool. The SM-Tool is a software
 43

module implemented in Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), the language embedded in
the ESRI ArcView 8.2 (the Geographic Information System adopted by the project). The
implementation of the STICH algorithm included in this module was developed as a set of
DLL’s (Dynamic Link Libraries) implemented in Visual Basic 6.0 (VB6). The result is a
functionality that can be easily added to the ArcView working environment to perform
data analysis. More detailed information about the implementation of the SM-Tool is
available in [7].
The same set of DLL’s, implementing the STICH algorithm, were integrated into the
EPSILON Web Tool being developed by the project. This Web tool, available in the
Internet (http://141.40.224.68/epsilonproject) using a simple browser, provide the
possibility for users to perform benchmarking between different countries regarding their
sustainable development. The benchmarking is supported by all the data available in the
EPSILON database.
Figure 9 presents the EPSILON Web Tool in a clustering task, using the SM-Tool. In
this figure it is possible to see the results of the data clustering in a specific iteration of
this process. The user has the possibility to indicate the Space Model that wants to see,
selecting a specific iteration in the iteration bar (each iteration is represented by a
rectangle in the right-up corner of the map).

Figure 9. The EPSILON Web Tool.

44

5 Conclusion
In this paper, a new technique for geo-referenced data analysis and visualization, based on
a clustering algorithm, was presented. This technique, available through a Space Models
Tool, was developed within the context of the EPSILON project and was integrated into
the EPSILON Web Tool developed by the project. The benefits of this technique were
demonstrated through a set of examples oriented towards the analysis and visualization of
sustainability indicators. These examples and other results have shown that the described
technique provides real added-value over conventional approaches.

Nomenclature

EPSILON – Environmental Policy via Sustainability Indicators on a European-wide

NUTS III Level
NUTS – Nomenclature of Terrestrial Units for Statistics
STICH – Space Models Identification Through Hierarchical Clustering

References

1. M. Y. Santos, A. Moreira and S. Carneiro, STICH – Clustering in the identification of

Space Models, in John Wang (editor), Encyclopedia of Data Warehousing and Mining,
Idea Group Publishing, (2006).
2. M. Y. Santos, A. Moreira and S. Carneiro, STICH – A Hierarchical Clustering
Algorithm, Proceedings of the Workshop “Data Gadgets 2004 – Bringing Up Emerging
Solutions for Data Warehousing Systems”, IX Conference on Software Engineering and
Database, Malaga, Spain, November 9 (2004).
3. V. Estivill-Castro and J. Yang, Fast and Robust General Purpose Clustering Algorithms.
Data Mining and Knowledge Discovery, 8 (2), 127-150 (2004).
4. J. Grabmeier, Techniques of Cluster Algorithms in Data Mining. Data Mining and
Knowledge Discovery, 6 (4), 303-360 (2002).
5. A. K. Jain, M. N. Murty and P. J. Flynn, Data Clustering: A Review. ACM Computing
Surveys, 31 (3), 264-323 (1999).
6. I. Blanc, D. Friot, M. Margni and O. Jolliet, How to assess the Environmental State of
EU regions with the global concept of sustainability, 18th International Conference
Informatics for Environmental Protection – EnviroInfo 2004, Geneva, October 21-23
(2004).
7. A. Moreira, M. Y. Santos and S. Carneiro, Delivery of the Clustering Model, s/w and
documentation, Epsilon project Report D42, December 9 (2004).
ENHANCING THE INDICATORS OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
OF THE COASTAL ZONE

LIDIJA RUNKO LUTTENBERGER

Komunalac d.o.o. Opatija, St. Lipovica 2
Opatija, 51410, Croatia

The paper analyses indicators of sustainable development in coastal zone. Indicators of the UN
Commission on Sustainable Development as well as regional indicators of the European
Environmental Agency are addressed. Implementation of indicators in the Republic of Croatia is
discussed, both at national and local level in the Littoral Mountain County. Furthermore, paper
reviews the application of indicators and the methods of reporting in the Republic of Croatia with
particular reference to the Littoral-Mountain County.

1 The Concept and Function of Indicators of Sustainable Development

Pollution in coastal zone is the result of unplanned development, the collapse of
traditional activities, coastal erosion and the lack of appropriate communication and
transport networks. Regional seas are confronted with various coastal pressures [1], and
at the same time the data concerning loads in the Mediterranean are insufficient [2].
In dealing with integrated coastal area management it is necessary to address the
interaction of coastal systems and the associated social benefit. Namely, coastal area
management in fact involves the analysis of a multitude of social, economic and
environmental data as well as the decision-making aimed at sustainable development on
the basis of complete information, in the process of open consultation with all parties
concerned.
Preliminary issue is the appropriate definition of the concept of an indicator, bearing in
mind that the terms such as measure, variable, parameter and index can be found in
literature. In that it is necessary to point out that an indicator is used to describe the effort
in building empirical approach to understanding the dynamics of coastal systems.
Therefore, the indicator is a statistical parameter which, traced in time, extends data
concerning the trends in development of the state of certain phenomenon, whereby its
significance lays even beyond the scope of the very statistics.
Therefore indicators may transmit the perception of natural and social science into
manageable information which facilitates the decision-making process.
A system of criteria [3] is, as a filter, used at each stage of selection and development of
key indicators. Therefore quality indicators are sensitive to change and are supported by
reliable and available data which users can understand and accept.
According to OECD [4] successful indicator should:
• reduce the number of measurements which would normally be necessary to
accurately present the state, and

45
46

• simplify the procedure of reporting to the management, shareholders and the

community.

2 Applying the Driver-Pressure-State-Impact-Response System in an

Integrated Coastal Zone
When applying the driver-pressure-state-impact-response system (DPSIR) to integrated
coastal zone management, the indicators may be classified as follows [5]:
• Drivers represent large-scale socio-economic conditions and sectoral trends such as
patterns of use of coastal land and its cover, or growth and development of coastal
industries.
• Pressure such as patterns of modification of coastal swamps, input of industrial
POPs/metal and fertilizer use in coastal watersheds may have a direct impact on the
quality of coastal environment.
• Indicators of state describe visible changes in dynamics of coastal environment and
functions describing the coastal environment.
• Impacts represent direct variations of the measured value of social benefit associated
with environmental conditions such as cost of the disease transmitted by the sea, lost
value of the beach for recreational bathing or losses of value in terms of commercial
fishing due to polluters load.
• Responses are defined as an institutional response to system changes (originally
actuated by changes in state and impact indicators).

3 Indicators of the UN Commission for Sustainable Development

UN Commission for sustainable development (CSD) projected the development of highly
aggregated indicators by engaging the experts from all sectors of the economy, social and
natural sciences and politics, as well as by involving non-governmental organisations and
considering the attitudes of native population.
In total 58 indicators are included in the core set of indicators of sustainable
development. The theme oceans, seas and coasts are divided into two thematic sub-
themes – coastal zone and fisheries. Indicators of the sub-theme coastal zone are algae
concentration in coastal waters and the percent of total population living in coastal
areas [6]. The alternative or supplementary indicator for the algae concentration in
coastal waters is the bacterial level in coastal bathing waters.
Said core set of indicators represent the basis for national governments to develop their
own programmes for indicators and for monitoring their development. The states shall
have to demonstrate the flexibility and judgement in their efforts to develop national
system of indicators of sustainable development.

4 Indicators of the European Environmental Agency (EEA)

Although the majority of EEA indicators [7] in the theme water are indirectly or directly
related to coasts area and the sea, coastal waters are particularly addressed by core indicators
 47

bathing water quality, chlorophyll in transitional, coastal and marine waters, nutrients
in transitional, coastal and marine waters, urban waste water treatment, and other
indicators accidental oil spills from marine shipping, chlorophyll-a concentration in
transitional, coastal and marine waters, classification of coastal waters, discharge of oil
from refineries and offshore installations, frequency of low bottom oxygen
concentrations in coastal and marine waters, hazardous substances in marine
organisms, illegal discharges of oil at sea, loads of hazardous substances to coastal
waters, nutrients in coastal waters, phytoplankton, algae in transitional and coastal
waters, saltwater intrusion, source apportionment and loads of nutrients to coastal
waters and trends in aquacultures production, and newly introduced cultured and
associated species in European Seas.
The system of EEA indicators in the theme coasts and seas [8] also includes core
indicators dealing with aquaculture and fisheries as well as other indicators hazardous
substances in mussels in north-east Atlantic and input of hazardous substances in
north-east Atlantic.
As from 2001, EEA in its regular annual issue Environmental Signals publishes the
indicators dealing with coastal sea [9,10].
Information system Eurowaternet for transitional, coastal and marine waters has been
implemented in 2002 with the purpose of acquiring fresh, targeted and reliable data.
Eurowaternet technical guidelines set out the data content and format required by the
European Environmental Agency from maritime conventions and national sources [11].
The activities within the framework of Coastal monitoring and management – COAST
Project focus on activities in further development and derivation of advanced environmental
indicators for monitoring and evaluating European coastal and marine eutrophication,
including the improvement of algorithms for processing of satellite data and adaptation and
application of numerical models for the provision of physical and biological data required for
indicator calculation [12].

5 Integrated Indicators and their Applicability

Besides the necessity to develop indicators in the theme eutrophication and hazardous
substances, the information on biological quality of the environment and effect of various
substances (multistress) on the quality of environment caused by human activity is
required. It is therefore necessary to develop integrated indicators of impact.
Current intensity of work on indicators leads to discussion about the danger of excessive
amount of data, so we agree with the opinion that sets of indicators should aggregate the
data contained in a variety of single environmental indicators. Namely, too many
indicators may only compromise the legibility of information and therefore the indicators
should focus upon interaction and not the environment itself. Opponents of such an
attitude hold that due to a series of assumptions that must be made in a process of
aggregation, the original datum gets lost. Little has been done to date on integration of
indicators [13].
48

6 The Problem of Karst Area

There is exceptionally high probability of obtaining irrelevant data in karst areas. When
accompanied by incautiousness those may erroneously interpret the state of an aquifer.
The problems of monitoring water in majority of karst terrains may be classified in 4
categories [14]:
1. Where to monitor for pollutants: At springs, cave streams, and wells shown by
tracing to include drainage from a facility to be monitored or at wells selected
because of convenient downgradient location, whereby it is sometimes necessary to
perform monitoring several kilometres away from the facility.
2. Where to monitor for background water quality: At springs, cave streams, and wells
in which the waters are geochemically similar to those to be monitored for pollutants
but which are shown by tracing not to include drainage from the facility.
3. When to monitor: Before, during, and after storms or meltwater events and also at
known base-flow conditions - rather than regularly with weekly, monthly, quarterly,
semi-annual, or annual frequency.
4. How to reliably and economically determine the answers to problems 1, 2, and 3:
Reliable monitoring of ground water in karst terrains can be done, but it is not cheap
or easy.

7 State of Indicator Development in the Republic of Croatia

7.1. The Obligation to Develop Indicators

As is the case in a number of other countries, especially those in transition, Croatia also
suffers from the lack of basic data concerning the environment and the information about
the data already in existence, as well as the lack of quality statistical data, particularly the
qualitative and quantitative data on interaction of development activities and state of the
environment – the indicators, as basis for the process of (political) decision-making.
Particular emphasis should be placed upon obligations resulting from the activities
related to EEA and the activities derived from various conventions as well as those
related to ensuring public access to information, based on Aarhus Convention [15].
Environmental protection in the Republic of Croatia has for years been the task of
various administrative and professional institutions. There are series of data concerning
the state of the sea, air, water and soil. Major problem arises from the fact that such data
are not mutually correlated, they are sometimes partial, often mutually incompatible, and
has until recently been hardly accessible to participants and the general public.
Environmental Protection Act [16] adopted in 1994 in its Article 41 provides for the
obligation of the former State Nature and Environmental Protection Directorate to
institute environmental information system in collaboration with the ministries and other
state administrative bodies: obligations of the institutions which should participate in
building such a system are governed by Regulation concerning the environmental
information system [17] laying down the content, methodological basis for environmental
information system, obligations, method of delivering data and the method of
administering the environmental data.
 49

Implementation of the Register of emissions in the environment in the Republic of

Croatia [18] has started in 1997 with only few subjects reporting the pollution. A
significant rise in the number of reported polluters has been recorded during subsequent
years [19].
There is a lack of correlation between environmental data and socio-economic
development or, more precisely, there are no indicators. For example the data related to
surface waters are collected and their administering is financed by Croatian Waters
(Hrvatske vode) or other state institutions that is companies, but they are not clearly
identified at national level nor compared with the existing EU indicators [20]. The data on
wastewaters and their treatment are procured from competent offices, that is companies who
manage sewerage systems and devices for wastewater treatment as well as from industrial
establishments who use and pollute water and discharge wastewaters. The data referring to
private systems for several households are not collected at all as those are outside the scope
of responsibility of municipal utility companies. Finally, in statistical processing of
environmental protection it is necessary to involve to greater extent the households as units
of natural consumption and pollution of water.

7.2. Dispersion and insufficiency in processing the indicators of coastal

environment in the Republic of Croatia
Collection, storing and usage of data and information concerning the sea, in connection
with indicators of pressure, state and impact on the environment and humans is not
satisfactory. There is no common national programme which would cover in an integral
manner the measuring and analysis of the state of the sea in Croatia nor all the types
(DPSIR) and kinds of indicators. For that reason there is no unique data bank, but on the
contrary [20]:
• Data on the state of quality of the sea, sediment and biota are mainly found in the
Institute for Oceanography and Fisheries Split-Dubrovnik and Ruđer Bošković
Institute Rovinj-Zagreb.
• Data related to pressures from urban infrastructure systems and water resources in
Croatian Waters.
• Data related to pressures from faecal pollution of beaches in the Institute of Public
Health.
• Data related to socio-economic pressures in coastal zone in State Bureau of
Statistics.
Pressures/impacts on eutrophication or total influx of nitrogen and phosphorus into the
sea have never been estimated on an integral basis. There are neither measurements of
atmospheric sedimentation nor measurements of loads which by surface flow from
coastal terrains – watersheds reach the sea. There is no document or report presenting
data on the quantity of nutrients discharged annually into the sea from single source or all
the sources nor has an effort been undertaken in defining the methodology to calculate
50

such values with regard to particular karst features of coastal belt and the islands in
Croatia.
The data concerning intensity of construction in littoral are not accessible although
they may be readily obtained using satellite or air views. Nobody has by now collected
such data nor is there an appropriate study assessing the magnitude of such an indicator.
There are no indicators for heavy metals as their concentration is not measured with
water flow.
Data on concentration of metals in seawater, sediment and in selected bioindicator
organisms do exist within the institutions that perform such measurement. There is no
integral report and state evaluation nor the trend of change for the entire Adriatic.
There are no data concerning pollution by oil and oil products, but one may find the
data on marine accidents and in that sense possibly assessed quantities of oil and oil
products discharged into the sea. Damages are recorded by surveyors of the Ministry of
environmental protection and by Port authorities so that the data concerning possible
figures may be obtained from those bodies.
Data on the intensity of annual faecal pollution load discharged into the coastal sea
in tons per year do not exist. The reason therefor is that the wastewaters flow of is not
measured so that the load may not be estimated on the basis of directly measured data.
In Croatia to date, the data have to major extent not been gathered or processed in
compliance with the method of reporting in the EU, apart from some which are mainly
linked to the state of seawater quality. That means that without further processing of
available raw data one may not obtain the necessary information adapted to the method
of reporting in EU documents. That refers in particular to indicators of pressure which are
particularly missing, that is, they have not till now been evaluated systematically and
integrally.
The major shortcoming of the data related to features of wastewaters from
communities, industry and watercourses, that is the sources of pollution is that no
measurement of flow is performed with the measurement of concentration of particular
indicators. Therefore all the data measured are useful only as indicators of relative state
and may not be used in calculation of pressures nor for assessment of nature of waters
pursuant to Croatian legislation.
The Environmental Agency which was established by virtue of Decision of the
Government of the Republic of Croatia [21] as central institution for gathering and
aggregating the environmental data on national level, data processing, administering
environmental database, monitoring the state of the environment and environmental
reporting aims to institute indicators listed in the Table 1. Values of some are being
reported on the Agency web page [23]. Special Croatian indicator is envisaged for karst
protection [24].
 51

Table 1. Draft list of national indicators for the sea [22].

Item Indicator
1 Classification of coastal sea
2 State of eutrophication
3 Biological seawater quality
4 Sources of inflow of nutrients into the sea
5 Pollution of the sea by hazardous substances
6 Phytoplankton algae in transitional and coastal waters
7 Concentration of chlorophyll-a in transitional, coastal and marine waters
8 Oxygen regime in coastal waters and the sea
9 Accidental discharge of oil into the sea
10 Beach water quality
11 Introduction and spread of “imported” species
12 Protected coastal zone
13 International cooperation in sea-related management

8 Reporting on Coastal Area at Local Community Level – Example of the

Primorje – Gorski Kotar County
In the Environmental state report of the Littoral-Mountain County [25], major sources of
water and sea pollution have been indicated in table form although they refer to industrial
polluters only. Furthermore total wastewater quantity in m3/year is presented, while the
section dealing with characteristics of technological wastewaters merely enumerates
hazardous substances registered in wastewater.
In the section dealing with quality of coastal water it is stated that in the area of
Croatian littoral a systematic testing of sanitary quality of coastal seawater is carried out
as well as the series of occasional surveys for specific purposes such as establishing
environmental state of the sea for the purpose of determining optimum location of
underwater discharges, establishing receptive capacity of the sea within bays and locating
the nautical and tourist facilities.
It also states that the Land-based pollution monitoring programme – LBA, in
implementation since 1994, makes part of systematic programmes related to the sea, but
not within the meaning of seawater quality, but for monitoring the introduction of
pollution from land into the sea.
The report furthermore refers to Internet pages of the Institute of Public Health which by
different colours indicates the presently valid assessment of seawater quality as high-
quality, suitable for bathing, moderately polluted and more heavily polluted on the basis
of [26]:
• Internal criteria for purity of seawater for bathing introduced on the basis of proper
experience and opinion in order to single out in assessing the areas with seawater
that is very clean and not only suitable for bathing.
• Regulation concerning the standards on beach seawater quality [27] prescribing more
stringent criteria than the corresponding European directive [28] as guideline values
laid down in European directive are adopted as binding in our Regulation.
52

• criteria of World Health Organization and Environmental Programme of the United

Nations.
In 2005 the national Environmental Agency published their first report on the sea, coastal
zone, fisheries and aquaculture [29] which is based on marine environmental indicators.
Data, principally on the state is, where available, reported for individual counties.

9 Conclusion
The review of international and regional indicators brings to evidence the existence of a
series of indicators which endeavour to present the state of littoral area and the sea for the
sake of decision-making, policy making and informing the public.
Croatia is distinguished by substantial quantity of data obtained for the sake of
internal monitoring of state from the part of competent institutions, scientific research
and participation in international projects, but such dispersed and non-aggregated data are
not presented in the form of indicators, simple or integrated, which would be easily
comprehensible and accessible to development decision-makers and the public.
On the basis of global and regional experience in Croatia, a system of sustainable
development indicators for coastal zones and the sea must be introduced which shall suit
the capabilities and particular features of our country with respect to karst characteristics
of our coast and the islands in which the process of pollution takes a course which differs
from that in other parts of the region. Croatia indicators must at the same time be more
stringent, but also specific and compliant with those of international community in order
to present the state on the territory of our country and integrate themselves into indicators
for the Mediterranean which must also be further developed.
Establishing of the Environmental Agency whose task is creation of common
environmental information system in the most expedient and most economical way and
the introduction of quality and representative indicators accessible to the public
represents a breakthrough that will significantly improve the methods of reporting used to
date, such as description of methods and presenting evaluation in text form without an
insight into historical patterns.
In the field of local community one must mention to activity of Littoral-Mountain
County which by elaborating its report on the state of environment identified the
existence and lack of particular data essential for the environment, and represents the first
step in creating environmental metabase.
On the basis of aforesaid and owing to particular position of the Adriatic as closed
sea within the closed Mediterranean sea it is necessary to apply all the international and
regional standards, reinforced by domestic standards which should in the sector of land-
based pollution and pollution from ships become even more stringent. In that respect the
development of separate indicators in areas having exceptional landscape value and of
sustainable development indicators in the areas of tourist infrastructure development is
proposed, especially the indicators of interaction of port and transhipment facilities with
 53

resources of certain specific industries such as tourism for which state of the environment
is of the prerequisites for its very operation.

References

1. Testing of indicators for the marine and coastal environment in Europe – Part 1:
Eutrophication and integrated coastal zone management, Technical report No. 84,
EEA, Copenhagen, 2004.
2. Europe’s water: An indicator-based assessment, EEA, Copenhagen, 2003.
3. Vandermeulen, H., The development of marine indicators for coastal zone
management, Ocean & Coastal Management 39 (1998) 63-71.
4. Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). Towards
sustainable development: environmental indicators. Paris, 1998.
5. R.E. Bowen, C. Riley, Socio-economic indicators and integrated coastal
management, Ocean & Coastal Management 46 (2003) 299-312.
6. Indicators of Sustainable Development: Framework and Methodologies, Background
paper no. 3, UN CSD, 2001.
7. EEA – Indicators, http://themes.eea.eu.int/Specific_media/water/indicators,
14.11.2006.
8. EEA – Hazardous substances in marine waters, http://themes.eea.eu.int/
Specific_areas/coast_sea/indicators, 14.11.2006.
9. Environmental Signals 2001, EEA Indicator Report, Copenhagen, 2001.
10. Environmental Signals 2002, EEA Indicator Report, Copenhagen, 2002.
11. Eurowaternet – Technical guidelines for implementation in transitional, coastal and
marine waters, Technical report, EEA, 2003.
12. Coastal monitoring and management (COAST) Activity Report 2001, EC Joint
Research Centre, Institute for Environment and Sustainability, http://www.ei.jrc.it/
report/2001/COAST.pdf
13. N. Jollands, J. Lermit, M. Patterson, The usefulness of aggregate indicators in policy
making and evaluation: a discussion with application to eco-efficiency indicators in
New Zealand, Technical Report, Economics and Environment Network, Australian
National University, 2003.
14. Ground-Water Monitoring in Karst Terrains, EPA, 1989.
15. UNECE Convention on access to information, public participation in decision-
making and access to justice in environmental matters, Aarhus, Denmark, 1998.
16. Zakon o zaštiti okoliša, Narodne novine 82/94 i 129/99.
17. Uredba o informacijskom sustavu zaštite okoliša, Narodne novine 74/99, 79/99.
18. Pravilnik o katastru emisija u okoliš, Narodne novine 36/96.
19. Izvješće o stanju okoliša u Republici Hrvatskoj, Ministarstvo zaštite okoliša i
prostornog uređenja, 2003, http://mzopu.hr/okolis/html/default.aspx?id=140.
20. Nacionalne mogućnosti skupljanja podataka o okolišu, Ministarstvo zaštite okoliša i
prostornog uređenja, Zagreb, 2001.
21. Uredba o osnivanju Agencije za zaštitu okoliša, Narodne novine 75/02.
22. Agencija za zaštitu okoliša, More i priobalje, http://baza.azo.hr/projekt_more/more-i-
priobalje.htm, 16.11.2006.
54

23. Agencija za zaštitu okoliša, Popis indikatora za tematsko područje more,

http://www.azo.hr/Default.aspx?art=567, 15.11.2006.
24. Agencija za zaštitu okoliša, Posebni hrvatski indikatori,
http://www.azo.hr/Default.aspx?art=536, 15.11.2006
25. Izvješće o stanju okoliša Primorsko-goranske županije, Službene novine – službeno
glasilo Primorsko-goranske županije, 7/2003.
26. Kakvoća mora na području Primorsko-goranske županije, www.zzjzpgz/more/index,
26.06.2004.
27. Uredba o standardima kakvoće mora na morskim plažama, Narodne novine 33/96.
28. Council Directive 76/160/EEC concerning the quality of bathing water (Official
Journal L31 of 05.02.1976).
29. More, priobalje, ribarstvo i marikultura 1996-2003, Agencija za zaštitu okoliša,
Zagreb, 2005.
 USING ENTROPY FOR QUANTIFYING SUSTAINABILITY IN
AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS : A CASE STUDY IN TOROGH
RESEARCH STATION

MOHAMAD ASGHARIPOUR
Scholl of Agriculture, Islamic Azad University of Shirvan
Shirvan, Iran

ALIREZA KOCHEKI
Scholl of Agriculture, Ferdowsi University of Mashhad
Mashhad, Iran

In this paper a method for quantifying sustainability of agro-ecosystems, based on over-production

of entropy, is suggested. It is demonstrated that how land management practices could change the
excess of entropy in an agro-ecosystem. Different crops have different value of over-production of
entropy. It is assumed that these differences are due to a varying, but in many cases an excessive, use
of high artificial energy and characteristics of the crop by itself plays a minor role. While the method
allows only for rough estimate of entropy in agro-ecosystems, it can be stated that, due to a reduction
of artificial energy input, sustainability could be improved. Also the results of barley and sugar beet
confirm this matter. Nevertheless, all the examined crops are far from reaching a sustainable state
from a thermodynamic point of view.

1. Introduction
The terms “sustainable” and “sustainability” have been variously defined and widely used,
but there is general agreement that it has an ecological basis. In the most general sense,
sustainability is a version of the concept of sustained yield, the condition of being able to
harvest biomass from a system in perpetuity because the ability of the system to renew
itself or be renewed is not compromised [10].
For agro-ecological, research to contribute to making agriculture more sustainable, it
must establish a framework for measuring and quantifying sustainability [8, 15]. Farmers
need to be able to assess a particular system to determine how far from sustainability it is,
which of its aspects are least sustainable, exactly how it can be changed to move it toward
sustainable functioning. And once a system is designed with the intent of being
sustainable, farmers need to be able to monitor it to determine if sustainable functioning
has been achieved. The methodological tools for accomplishing this task can be borrowed
from the science of ecology [10]. Ecology has a well-developed set of methodologies for
the quantification of ecosystem characteristics such as nutrient cycling, energy flow,
population dynamic, species interactions and habitat modification [1]. Using these tools,
agro-ecosystem characteristics, and how they are impacted by humans, can be studied
from a level as specific as that of an individual species to a level as broad as that of the
global environment. On approach is to analyze specific agro-ecosystems to quantify at

55
56

what level a particular ecological parameter or set of parameters must be at for sustainable
function to occur. A few researchers have already done work in this area, and some of
quantifiable ecological parameters that were used for quantification of sustainability are:
soil organic matter content [9], input : harvest loss ratio for each macronutrient [13],
biocide use index1 [13], ecosystem biophysical capital2 [7], soil enzyme activity [5], peak
standing crop [21] and plant species diversity [21].
Another kind of approach is to begin with the whole system. Some researchers, for
example, have been working on developing methods for determining the probability of an
agro-ecosystem being sustainable over the long-term [6, 11]. Using a systems framework
for measuring the carrying capacity of a particular landscape, they apply a methodology
for integrating the rates of change of a range of parameters of sustainability and determine
how quickly change is taking place toward or away from a specific goal. Such an analysis
is limited by the difficulty of choosing which parameters to integrate into the model, but
has the potential for becoming a tool allowing us to predict if a system will be able to
continue indefinitely or not. The paucity of this kind of data indicates that much research
of this kind still needs to be done.
But entropy (as an indicator of degradation) could be used as an index for quantifying
of sustainability in agro-ecosystems. A system, which accumulates entropy, can not exist
for a long time and will inevitably be self destroyed. In this assay thermodynamic
approach suggested by Svirezhev [22] and by Svirezhev and Svirejeva-Hopkins [23] was
used for estimation of the entropy balance of agro-ecosystems.

2. Materials and methods

In accordance with second law of thermodynamic the entire input convert to output with
defined efficiency. Nowadays, industrial cultural energy is used either directly or
indirectly in agriculture. Direct use occurs when industrial cultural energy is used to
power tractors and transport vehicles, run processing machinery and irrigation pumps, and
heat and cool greenhouses. Industrial energy use occurs when industrial cultural energy is
used off the farm to produce the machinery, vehicles, chemical inputs and other goods and
services that are then employed in the farming operation.
Pimentel supposed that the relation between the crop yield, y, and the input of the
artificial energy, W, is linear, y = ηW. The empirical coefficients of energy efficiency (η)
were calculated from different agro-ecosystems in many countries and various regions. In
fact, the coefficient η is a modification of the well-known thermodynamic efficiency
coeficient, which is a consequence of the first law. On the basis of first law of
thermodynamic this coefficient is usually less than 1, however, on the contrary, the
coefficient, η is may be more than 1 in agro-ecosystems. The point is that formally we

1
- Index based on several factors, including use rates, toxicity and area sprayed; values
above 50 are considered indicative of excessive biocide use.
2
-Defined as the capture of adequate solar energy to sustain cycles of matter in an
ecosystem.
 57

must take into account the solar energy (Es). Thus the correct form for the efficiency
coefficient will be, y = η (W + Es) or η = y / (W + Es).
In the case of Pimentel’s coefficient η we get y = f (W + Es), It is obvious that when
industrial energy input equal to 0, this mean that W=0,
y(W , E s) ≈ y (0, E s) + (∂y / ∂W)0 W. (1)
Here we assume that the first term is negligibly small in comparison to the second
one. If the artificial energy input trends to 0, then any cultural plant will be replaced by
wild vegetation. As a result the crop yield will be very low if W is small.
(∂y / ∂W)0 term is η, which relatively constant for current crop at a given climate.
Therefore, the intensification of agriculture (the increase of crop production) correlates
with an increase of artificial energy flow in the ecosystem. There are however limits,
determined by the second law, which prevent an infinite increase of crop production. In
other words, we pay for the cost of increasing productivity by degradation of environment,
in particular, soil degradation [22, 23]. In order to support these statements, the entropy
balance for an agro-ecosystem to be considered as an open system in thermodynamic
sense was calculated. In the open systems the total variations of entropy result from of two
items:
dS (t) = σ = diS(t) + deS(t). (2)
Where diS(t)= dQ(t) / T(t), dQ(t) is the heat production caused by irreversible processes
within the system and T(t) is the environmental temperature (in K) at a given point of the
earth’s surface, which is occupied by an agro-ecosystem. The term deS(t) corresponds to
the entropy of exchange processes between the system and its environment, i.e. the
entropy export out of the system. In accordance with the theory, developed by Svirzhev
[22] the annual total rate of entropy is equal to:
σ = 1 / T ( W + λP1 – P0). (3)
Where T is the mean temperature of a vegetative period and the value W is the annual
inflow of artificial energy. If the value λP1 is a part of the annual gross agro-ecosystem
production, P1, which remains on the field (respiration and residues), then diS = (W + λP1)
/ T. Additionally deS = - P0 / T, where P0 is the annual gross primary production (GPP) of
a successionally closed ecosystem.
It is obvious that the net production is equal to (1-r)P1, where r is the mean
respiration coefficient. The term rP1 then describes the respiration losses. The kth fraction
of the net production is being extracted from the system with the yield, so that the crop
yield equals to:
y = k (1 - r )P1. (4)
The residues are equal to (1 - k)(1 - r)P1. Then:
λP1 = (1 - k)(1 - r ) P1 residue + rP1 respiration = (1- k + kr) P1. (5)
58

Using Eq. (4) we express the value P1 by the known value of crop, y, and re-write Eq. (5)
in the form λP1= (1 – k + k r)P1 = ((1 - S) / S) y, where:
S = k (1 - r). (6)
And finally, the entropy balance of agro-ecosystems will be:
1 1− S (7)
σ = (W + y − Po ).
T S

Net primary production (NPP) one ecosystem at our research where supposed 2500
kg ha-1 (personal communication with natural research organization, 2004), since, the
annual GPP was used 35 GJ ha-1 (Table 5). When using the Pimentel relation y= ηW,
then:
1 η
σ = [W (1 −η + ) − Po ]
T S . (8)
1 1 1
= [ y ( + −1) − Po ]
T η S

It is obvious that if σ > 0, then a system accumulates entropy. Using the part of Eq.
(8) containing only W, we get from the condition σ = 0 an estimation for “limit energy
load”:
Po . (9)
W cr =
1 − η + (η / s )

It is obvious that if W > Wer, then σ > 0 and such an agro-ecosystem destroy its
environment, i.e. an agro-ecosystem cease to be sustainable. Note the “limit energy load”
concept is a typical empirical one and it refers to the maximum value of the total
anthropogenic impact (including tillage, fertilization, irrigation, grain transportation and
drying, etc.) on one area unit of agricultural land.
Using the part of Eq. (8) containing only y under the same condition “sustainable
crop”, i.e. the maximum crop production (in dry matter) for “sustainable agriculture” was
calculated:
Po , (10)
ycr =
(1 / s ) + (1 / η ) − 1"

where yer means sustainable crop.

2.1. Site experiment description

The data for the case study were collected at the agricultural Torogh research station of
Ferdowsi University of Mashhad (36° 38′ N and 59° 7′ E), Iran Long term (> 30 years)
mean annual rainfall in Mashhad is 282 mm and with a mean annual temperature of 12.7°
C (mean minimum 0.3° C in January; mean maximum 24.6° C in June). Soil of
 59

experimental site with 29.7 percent sand, 53.7 percent silt and 16.8 percent clay is placed
in loam silty class.

2.2. Measurement of cultural energy inputs and harvest outputs

In order to Measurement of cultural energy inputs and harvest outputs, the total output and
input that took place on the agricultural Torogh research station within 2003 year was
recorded, all calculation was adjusted according to available statistic. Input included
machinery, pesticides, fuel, seed and fertilizer. This included the kind of input as well as
the amount and date of application. The inputs were measured in kg per ha. To account
for the energetic loud of each component conversion factors are needed. For this we used
the method of Pimentel [19] with the modification of Trümpler [24]. The total energy
content (in Pimentel’s sense) of different inputs is shown in Table 1. In order to estimate
agro-ecosystem’s outputs (crop yield) information about total energy content of harvested
biomass, which comprises fruit and also a fraction of straw, was needed (Table 2).
Furthermore data was needed concerning the gross production of the crops. This was
calculated with straw/fruit and shoot/root ratios taken from the literature. Combined with
the energetic information about fruit and straw the factor k was calculated (Table 2). Note
that the unit, which the ratios refer to, is biomass. Since the energy content of fruits, straw
and roots are different (see Table 2); these ratios were recalculated in energy units. Zarea-
Fizabady [28] found that respiration coefficient for herbaceous plant communities
growing in the study site to be 0.3. This value was used to estimate GPP on the basis of
NPP.

3. Results and discussion

Results showed that inorganic fertilizer (30.8%) particularly nitrogen fertilizer, consist
the most proportion of the energy input. Fossil fuel for equipment (26.5%), irrigation
systems (24%) and energy invested in off the farm equipment (12.4%) are in the later step
(Figure 1).
Growing level of energy inputs to agricultural have played an important role in
increasing yield levels in many of the worlds agricultural ecosystems over the past several
decades. However, using the modern industrial technology result in increasing entropy. In
the other word high entropy in modern agricultural systems is the cost which human being
pays for alternating ecological relationship with industrial inputs.
In the agricultural Torogh research station, 51.5 % of energy use is direct, and 48.5 %
is indirect. The production of fertilizers special nitrogen fertilizer accounts for the great
majority of indirect energy use in agriculture. Nearly one third of all the energy used in
modern agriculture is consumed in the production of nitrogen fertilizer [14]. This energy
cost is high because nitrogen fertilizer is used so intensively and because a large amount
of energy is required to product it [19]. This energy input could be reduced greatly by
using manure, biological nitrogen fixation and recycling.
60

Table 1. Energy content for relevant agriculture inputs.

Product Energy content

Reference
[MJ kg-1]

Inorganic fertilizer

N
80 Average values of different studies ( Deleage [4];

P
14 Projektgemeinschaft Bioenergieträger [20])

K
9

Organic fertilizer
3.2 Palz and Chartier [18]

Pesticides
77-254 [MJ l-1] Special values for all different pesticides (Pimentel [19]; Trümpler [24])

Seed
2.99-5.67 Special values for all different crops (Burmeister [2])

Machinery
86.8 Bowers [3]
production

Transport
8.8 Loewer et al. [16]

Maintenance
47.7 Fluck [5]

Fuel
41[MJ l-1] Projektgemeinschaft Bioenergieträger [20]

Table 2. Gross energy content of different crops at an average water content of 20% (MJ kg-1) [14].

Fabaceae Beet Barley Wheat Grassland

Gross energy content of fruit 15.4 16.4 14.8 15.0 14.6

Gross energy content of straw 14.5 13.4 13.9 14.0 14
 61

Table 3. Land management, input and output of energy in the agricultural Torogh research station (2003).

Crop Cultivation Energy input W Energy output y

η (output/input)
area (ha) [GJ ha-1] [GJ ha-1]

Wheat 20 35.24 126.00 3.57

Irrigated barley
30 31.17 98.05 3.14

Dryland barley
24 22.39 48.35 2.16

Forage corn
7 31.67 120.41 3.80

beet
2 126.58 196.00 1.55

Table 4. Straw/fruit- and shoot/root-ratios for different crops [12, 25, 26, 27]

Fabaceae Beet Barley Corn Wheat Grassland

Straw/seed ratio 2 0.3 1 0.7 0.9 -

Shoot/root ratio 7.5 0.8 2.8 4 2.9 3.3
k 0.78 0.93 0.73 0.72 0.74 0.70

Table 5. k, S, T and r values for different [21].

crop k S T ( in K) r

Wheat 0.74 0.48 290 0.35

Barley 0.73 0.47 290 0.35
Corn 0.98 0.63 299 0.35
Beet 0.93 0.60 295 0.35

k = The fraction of the net production is being extracted from the system with the yield.
S = The fraction of the gross production is being extracted from the system with the yield.
T = Mean temperature of vegetation period (in K)
r = mean respiration coefficient.
62

35

30

25

Energy 20
(% of Total) 15

10

0
P ow e r Ino rg a nic
P e s tic ide s Seed Ir r iga tion Fue l M a c hin e r y
m an fe r tilize r

S e r ie s 1 2 .3 1 3 3 0 .8 24 2 6 .5 1 2 .4

Figure 1. Composition of the total agricultural energy input in the Torogh research station in 2003 in percent.


50 percent of total direct energy is consumed in irrigation systems, this energy is high
because world wide 65 percent of the water used in irrigation is wasted (evaporated or
transpired), meaning that only about 35 percent of applied irrigation water actually
contributed to crop growth [17].
Some wastage of water is inevitable, but a deal of waste could be eliminated if
agriculture practices were oriented towards conservation of water than maximum of
production. Another 26 percent of total the energy used in off the farm to produce the
machinery and farm equipment.
To set an example the scheme of further calculations will be demonstrated for wheat.
In order to calculate the entropy balance of a wheat field with Eq. (8). We have to know
the values of W or \6 N- r), P0 and T. The energy input for wheat field in 2003 is
equal to 35.26 GJ ha-1, the output, which is the crop production y (grain + the main part of
straw), is equal to 126 GJ ha-1 (see Table 3). Using these values the ratio= output/input
was calculated, =35.24/126 ≈ 3.5.
From Table 5 we get K= 0.74, and since r=0.3, then S= k (1-r) = 0.481. After Zarea-
Fizabady P0 is equal to 35 GJ ha-1 and the average temperature of air during vegetation
period is 290 °K. Substituting all these values into Eq. (8) we get:  *-KD-1 K-1
per year.
Using Eq. (9) and Eq. (10) the limit energy load and the sustainable crop production
per year was calculated: Wer = 7.21 GJ ha-1, yer = 25.75 GJ ha-1.
 63

In order to estimate the deviation of the system from a sustainable trajectory we

introduce the following criterion:

W − Wcr y − ycr . (11)

Sd = =
Wcr ycr

Using Eq. (11) we can estimate the deviation from a sustainable agriculture for wheat
in this year, Sd ≈ 0.79. ,Also these calculations is done for other culture in 2003 year (see
Table 6). The highest and less amounts of entropy was observed in sugar beet and barley,
especially rainfed barley, respectively (Table 6).
Low excess of entropy in barley field especially dryland barley, which is very similar
to a natural ecosystem, is expectable. Producing of entropy in agriculture is closely related
to the level of modification of natural ecosystem processes. The costs are small when
humans leave the basis structure of the ecosystem interact. But when a complex natural
ecosystem is replaced by a crop monoculture with a life form very different from that of
the native species producing of entropy rise steeply [22].
So, low entropy amount in rainfed barley is expected because of lower manipulating
by human being.

Table 6. Entropy excess, σ, and deviation of sustainability, Sd, in 2003 for different crops in the agricultural
Torogh research station.
Entropy
crop Wer Energy input yer Energy output
excess Sd
-1 [GJ ha-1] [GJ ha-1] [GJ ha-1] [GJ ha-1]
[GJ ha-1 K ]

Wheat
0.47 7.21 35.24 25.75 126.00 0.79

Irrigated
0.36 8.30 31.17 26.08 98.05 0.73
barley

Dryland
0.14 10.90 21.39 23.54 48.35 0.49
barley

Forage
0.45 6.58 31.68 25.00 120.41 0.79
corn

beet
0.75 17.38 126.58 26.94 196.00 0.86

yer = The sustainability crop production

Wer = The limit energy load
64

Substituting the term k (1-r) with S in Eq. (8), this Equation is re-written in the form:

1 1 (12)
σ= [W + ( − 1) y].
T k (1 − r )

In accordance with Eq. (12) some approach for designing sustainable system is:
1. Firstly reduced anthropogenic energy input, W; because of humans try to force on
the environment in the production of food, energy is needed in order to maintain
optimal growth and development of the crop organisms. Larger inputs of cultural
energy enable higher productivity. However, there is not a one-to-one relationship
between the two. When the cultural energy input is very high “return” on the
“investment” of cultural energy input is often minimal [2, 10].
2. Sustainable agro-ecosystems enable through decrease input of industrial cultural
energy and increase of biological cultural energy produce food with more energy
efficiency. Biological cultural energy is renewable and in facilitating the production
of harvestable biomass is efficient. Also, agro-ecosystems that rely mainly on
biological cultural energy are able to obtain the most favorable ratios of energy
output to input.
3. Secondly reduced crop production, y, but this of course would counteract the aims of
agriculture. Moreover, this is not suitable measure, as is the case with intensively
production of rice in southeast of Asia. Intensified biological systems, which have
low entropy, can keep yield in high level [1].
4. Thirdly, increase of export of biomass; this corresponds to the increase of k in Eq.
(11). For instance, by removing more straw with the harvest. But this could decrease
the soil organic carbon in the long run, which has a negative effect on soil fertility
and therefore can not be the aim of sustainable agriculture. Moreover, the process of
extraction of residues (straw and roots) requires a lot of additional energy. Therefore,
to increase k we must increase W. As a result, we do not only decrease σ, but it may
also increase. As a conclusion, the reduction of anthropogenic energy input seems to
be most useful strategy. The study in hand proves the effectiveness of this tool. On
the one hand the waste of fertilizer was reduced and on the other hand the yield
increased, which could, however, partly be a result of different weather conditions.
As suggested in this paper, the key to more sustainable use of energy in agriculture
lies in expanding the use of biological cultural energy. Biological input are not only
renewable, they have the advantages of being, and able to contribute to the ecological
soundness of agro-ecosystems.
5. The excess of entropy of a site depends on several parameters. In the following the
accuracy of the applied data will be discussed. Primary productivity was calculated
with accurate data about crop yield and empirical values for biomass ratio between
root, straw and harvested parts of the plant. In addition, a general respiration
coefficient was applied, which had been determined by Zarea-Fizabady [28] on
several herbaceous species of the study site. As plant cannot adopt both the
root/shoot ratio [25] and respiration coefficient [16, 28] to weather and soil
conditions, these values only allow an estimation of the real situation.
 65

6. The resulting excess of entropy significantly depends on the selected reference

system. To accord with the hypothesis, the reference system must be a mature natural
system, which is similar to the examined agro-ecosystem. Only in this case the
anthropogenic ecosystem still has the same property to export entropy to its
environment without degradation. Under the climate and soil conditions in Mashhad
district a natural succession would result in a pasture ecosystem (like on all pasture in
semiarid region of Iran). As a pasture is not successionally close to farmland, we
selected long-term fallow pasture as a reference, which produce 2500-kg ha-1 biomass
that seems to be a good compromise between the demands of maturity and similarity.

References
1. P. Allen and D.V. Dusen, Sustainable Agriculture: Choosing the Future. In P. Allen
and D.V. Dusen, (eds.), Global Perspectives on Agroecology and Sustainable
Agricultural Systems. Vol. 1, PP. 1-13. University of California: Santa Cruz, CA,
(1998).
2. M.A. Altieri, Agroecology: The Science of Sustainable Agriculture. 2nd ed. West
view Press: Boulder, CO, (1995).
3. W. Bowers, Agriculture fields equipment. In: B.A. Stout (Ed.), Energy in Word
Agriculture, Vol. 6. Elsevier, Amsterdam, pp.117-129, (1992).
4. Deleage, Eco-Energetics Analysis of an Agriculture System: the French Case in 1970.
Agro-Ecosystem 5, 345-365, (1970).
5. R.N. Dick, J. Paulus and M.M. Ludlow, Conservation of Traditional Agro-
ecosystems. Science, 37: 199-208, (1994).
6. P.M. Fearnside, Human Carrying Capacity of the Brazilian Rainforest. Columbia
University Press: New York, (1986).
7. M. Giampietro, S.G.F. Bukkens and D. Pimentel, Models of Energy Analysis to
Assess the Performance of Food Systems, 45: 19-41, (1994).
8. R.S. Gliesman (ed.), Agroecology: Researching the Ecological Basis for Sustainable
Agriculture. Springler-Verlag: New York, (1990).
9. S.R. Gliessman, M.R. Werner, S. Sweezy, E. Csswell, J. Cochran and F. Rosado-
May, Conversion to Organic Strawberry Management Changes Ecological Process.
California Agriculture, 50:24-31, (1996).
10. S.R. Gliessman, Agroecology: Ecological Processes in Sustainable Agriculture. Ann
Arbor Press 121 South Main Street, Chelsea, MI 48118, (1998).
11. J.W. Hanson and J.W. Jones, Systems frameworks for characterizing farm
sustainability. Agricultural Systems, 51: 185-201, (1996).
12. Hydro Agri Dülmen, A.G. (Ed.), Faustzahlen Für Land Writschaft und Gartenbau,
12th ed. Landwirtschaftsverlag, Münster-Hiltrup, (1993).
13. D.M. Jansen, J.J. Stoorvogel and R.A. Schipper, Using Sustainability Indicator in
Agriculture Land Use Analysis: An Example From Costa Rica. Netherlands Journal
of Agriculture Science, 43: 61-82, (1995).
14. H. Jeroch, Futtermittelkunde. In: G. Fischer (Ed.), Jena, pp. 510, (1993).
66

15. D.M. Liverman, M.E. Hanson, B.J. Brown and J.R.W. Meridth, Global
Sustainability: Towards Measurements. Environmental Management, 12:133-14,
(1988).
16. O.J. Loewer, G. Benock, N. Gay, E.M. Smith, S. Burgess, L.C. Wells, T.C. Bridges,
L. Springate, J.A. Boling, G. Bradford, D. Debertin, Beef: Production of Beef with
Minimum Grain and Fossil Energy Inputs, I, II, III. Report to NSF, Washington DC,
(1977).
17. G.T. Miller, Living in the Environmental: An Introduction to Environmental Science.
Belmont California Wadsworth Publishing Co, 1990.
18. C. Palz, Energy from Biomass in Europe. Applied Science Publishers, Barking,
p.234, (1980).
19. D. Pimentel, Energy Inputs in Production Agriculture. In: South, B. A. (Ed.), Energy
in World Agriculture: Energy in Farm Production. Vol. 6. Elsevier, Amsterdam, pp.
13-28. (1992).
20. Projektgemeinschaft Bioenergieträger. Ganzheitliche Bilanzierung von
Nachwachsenden Energeiträgen Unter Verschiedenen Ökologischen Aspecten.
Materialband 1: Energetifche Vorketten und Transporte, Materialband 2: Anbau
Nachwachsender Energeiträger, (1995).
21. P.G. Risser, Indicator of Grassland Sustainability: A first Approximation. In M.
Munasinghe and Shearer, W. (Ed.), Defining and Measuring Sustainability: The
Biophysical Foundation, pp. 310-319, Word Bank: Washington, D.C., (1995).
22. W. Steinborn and Y. Svirezhew, Entropy as an Indicator of Sustainability in
Agroecosystems: North Germany Case Study. Ecological Modelling, 133: 247-257,
(2000).
23. Y.M. Svirezhev, A. Svirejeva-Hopkins, Sustainable Biosphere: Critical Overview of
Basic Concept of Sustainability. Ecological Modelling, 106: 47-61, (1997).
24. D. Trümpler, Räumlich Hochauflösende Untersuchungen zum anthropogenen
Energiehaushalt im Bereich der Bornhöveder Seenkette. Geographical Institue,
University of Kiel, pp. 110. (1995).
25. H. Vetter, Menge und Zusammensetzung der Ernterückstände bei den Wichtigsten
Kulturpflanzen und Verschiedenen Fruchtfolgen auf Lehmboden und
Rohhumushaltigem Heidesand. Kiel University, diss., pp. 217, (1952).
26. C. Wachendorf, Eigenschaften und Dynamik der Organischen Bodensubstanz
Ausgewählter Böden Unterschiedlicher Nutzung Einer Norddeutschen
Moränenlandschaft, Ecosystems, 13: 130, (1995).
27. K. Weisheit, Kohlenstoffdynamik am Grünlandstandort: Untersucht an 4 Dominanten
Grasarten. Kiel University, Diss., pp. 141, (1995).
28. A. Zarea-Fizabady, Energy and Economic Efficiency of Some Different Conventional
and Ecological Cropping Systems in Different Rotation with Wheat, Ph.D. Telesis,
College of Agriculture, Ferdowsi University of Mashhad, Iran, (1998).
ENERGY POLICY AND PLANNING

67
This page intentionally left blank
LARGE-SCALE HEAT PUMPS IN SUSTAINABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS:
SYSTEM AND PROJECT PERSPECTIVES

MORTEN BOJE BLARKE †

Department of Development and Planning, Aalborg University, Fibigerstraede 13
Aalborg, DK-9220, Denmark

HENRIK LUND
Department of Development and Planning, Aalborg University, Fibigerstraede 13
Aalborg, DK-9220, Denmark

In this paper, it is shown that in support of its ability to improve the overall economic cost-
effectiveness and flexibility of the Danish energy system, the financially feasible integration of
large-scale heat pumps with existing CHP units, is critically sensitive to the operational mode of the
heat pump vis-à-vis the operational coefficient of performance (COP), which is set by the
temperature level of the heat source. When using only ambient air as the heat source, the total heat
production costs increases by about 10%, while the partial use of condensed flue gas from the CHP
unit as a heat source results in an 8% cost reduction. Furthermore, the operational analysis shows
that when a large-scale heat pump is integrated with an existing CHP unit, the projected spot market
situation in Nord Pool towards 2025, which reflects a growing share of wind power and heat-bound
power generation electricity, will reduce the operational hours of the CHP unit significantly, while
increasing the operational hours of the heat pump unit. In result, a heat pump unit at half heat
production capacity in combination with heat-only boiler represents as an alternative to CHP unit
operation, rather than a supplement to CHP unit operation. While such revised operational strategy
would have an impact on electricity markets, the result indicates that in a sustainable energy system,
either a large-scale heat pump should fully replace an existing CHP producer, or the size of the heat
pump to be integrated with an existing CHP unit should be much below half of the CHP unit’s heat
production capacity. The CHP with heap pump design should allow for both combined (CHP unit
and heat pump) and sole operation (heat pump only).

1 Introduction
Large-scale integration of intermittent renewable energy technologies such as wind power
and photovoltaics into existing energy systems represents a major opportunity for
increasing energy efficiency, reducing emissions, and optimizing the economic feasibility
of the energy system [1]. Such development will be requiring innovative solutions in the
design and operation of the overall energy system, in particular in order to regulate in
periods of excess power production, maintaining power quality, and increasing the
capacity value of small power producers.
In the case of Denmark, with about 20% of the total electricity supply coming from
wind power and plans for increasing the share of wind power to 25% by 2010, measures
are being developed for securing a continued efficient and cost-effective integration of
grid-connected wind power. Besides the large-scale penetration of wind power, the

†
Corresponding author.

69
70

Danish energy system is furthermore characterized by a continued policy strategy to

promote system energy efficiency in the form of distributed combined heat and power
production, which supplies about 50 of total heating demand and 50% of total electricity
demand in 2003.
In the Western part of the Danish electricity system, annual electricity production
from wind and CHP is currently matching annual electricity demand, and new off-shore
wind farms and the increasing demand for district heating, are giving rise to a situation in
which supply surpasses demand, and periodically results in critical excess supply. Figure
1 illustrates the increasing significance of this challenge [2].

Projected Electricity Production by Wind Power and CHP

In Denmark's Western Grid (Eltra)

30,000

25,000

20,000
GWh per year

Electricity Production from Wind

15,000 Electricity Production from CHP
Electricity Consumption

10,000

5,000

0
2005 2010 2015 2020

Projected Excess Power Production

In Denmark's Western Grid (Eltra)

30,000

25,000

20,000
GWh per year

Critical Excess Power Production

15,000
Exported Excess Power Production

10,000

5,000

0
2005 2010 2015 2020

Figure 1. The current and projected share of wind power and CHP-based power generation in Denmark’s
Western grid, and the resulting projected excess power generation.
 71

To avoid the foreseen problems in planning for extensive penetration of wind power in
Denmark’s Western grid, current plans suggests that new wind farms should better target
export markets. Such strategy will involve major investments in increasing transmission
capacities to neighboring countries Germany, Norway, and Sweden. Meanwhile other
strategies, which attempts to assess opportunities for allowing an even larger share of
intermittent renewables into the Danish energy system (50% or more of total annual
electricity production) might be more cost effective [3]. Such alternative strategies seeks
to increasing the flexibility of the existing supply and distribution network; strategies that
may be more cost-effective, while neutralizing the problems related to critical excess
production of electricity.
The strategy to limit excess electricity production by increasing the flexibility of the
national system, involves the design of sustainable energy systems which relies on the
integration of effective storage and relocation technologies. Figure 2 exemplifies the
overall principle for the integration of selected storage and relocation technologies.

Figure 2. Integration of storage and relocation technologies in the energy system.

But which options are more feasible, from a technical, environmental, economic, and
financial perspective? Heat pumps, hydrogen storage, or pumped storage? Comparative
techno-economic analyses of advanced system designs are required in order to assess the
comparative advantages and disadvantages, and possibly to identify those options which
could benefit from particular attention by policy makers and project developers.
Lund et. al [3] points to one most promising option in a short- to medium-term
perspective; integration of large-scale heat pumps at the site of existing CHP-plants. From
72

extensive system analyses using the model EnergyPLAN it is found that the levelized
economic benefit in the case of Western Denmark amounts to €2.5 mill. per year at
current wind power production levels. The analysis shows that it will be feasible to
integrate a total of 350 MWe heat pumps, equivalent to the installation of one 1 MWe
heat pump at the site of the average CHP-plant.
In fact, standard large scale compressor heat pumps are typically available up to
about 1 MWe, equivalent to 3-6 MW heat output, though the integration of heat pumps is
likely to be requiring a customized design process in most cases [4,5]. Issues related to
ozone-depleting and global warming contributing refrigerants is a problem of the past as
CFC and HCFC are being phased out, introducing natural working fluids like carbon
dioxide and water. Findings suggest that natural working fluids are introduced without
compromising the COP, however it is known that using carbon dioxide as a working fluid
in compression systems generate high pressure differences across the compressor as well
as large efficiency losses associated with the throttling process [6]. The Danish
Technological Institute is currently collaborating with the Centre for Positive
Displacement Compressor Technology to design and demonstrate a technology that
balances the rotor forces in twin screw compressors for high pressure applications,
thereby significantly improving the efficiency of large-scale heat pumps using carbon
dioxide as the working fluid.
A strategy intended to promote the integration of heat pumps suggests the emergence
of a new role for small power producers in the regulation of supply and demand for
electricity. Certain key conditions needs to be taken into account for this purpose; most
importantly the communication between the system authority and the individual plant
operator and the ability of the plant to react quickly to supply requirements. Research
projects indicate that starting and stopping plants currently may take from as little as 10
minutes to as much as 4-6 hours. Furthermore, the ability and willingness of the small
power producer to supply reactive power would increase the flexibility of the system and
allow the system authority to postpone certain investments in for example condensators
[7].
However, in order to establishing such new regime and role for small power
producers, regulators will be required to establish new conditions for grid-connection
under which investment and operational strategies will be reflecting the economic costs
and benefits.
In fact, in March 2005, 26 Danish CHP plants offered their combined capacity of 361
MWe to the Western grid authority, thereby suggesting a model for how it may become
financially attractive for small power producers to become providers of regulative
capacity [8]. Taking it a step further, small power producers may just as well also provide
an additional regulative option by allowing the central grid authority to bid for making
use of heat pumps at the site of the CHP plants for the purpose of taking excess power
production in situations of such.
 73

2 Objective and methodology

In this paper, it is assessed whether the suggested economic feasibility of system
integrated large-scale heat pumps is currently reflected in the market place, i.e. whether it
is financially attractive under the current market conditions for small power producers to
install and operate a large-scale heat pump.
The analyses are making use of a design and optimization model of a typical CHP-
plant with and without heat pump, on the basis of which a financial cost-benefit analysis is
prepared. The energyPRO software [9,10] is used to model and optimize the simulated
operation of the plant over the planning period. On the basis of the financially optimized
plant operation, a simple net present value approach is used as the key criteria for
assessing the comparative financial feasibility of the options included under the analysis.

3 Techno-economic assumptions
In the comparative analysis of the performance of large-scale heat pumps, 3 options are
compared:
Reference: Continued operation of an existing 4 MWe (3 MWe + 1 MWe) natural-
gas fired CHP plant with 1,200 m3 thermal storage (grid-connected, heat used for district
heating).
Alternative A: Reference plus cold source heat pump (ambient air is always used as
heat source).
Alternative B: Reference plus partial hot source heat pump (flue gas is condensed
and periodically used as heat source).
All options are optimized according to an operational strategy that allows demand at
any given hour to be met by the cheapest production component, shifting between or
combining the engine-generator, the heat pump, and the heat-only boiler, producing to the
thermal storage, whenever feasible.

3.1 General assumptions

With 2005 as the first full year of operation, the case options are analyzed over a planning
period of 20 years, equivalent to the assumed life time of the heat pump, furthermore
assuming that to be the remaining lifetime of the existing CHP unit; making all
investments fully depreciated within the planning period.
A nominal financial discount rate of 15% p.a. is applied in the calculation of the
financial net present value. While this discount rate may seem rather high, it is assumed to
mirror well the time preference for new investments among the stakeholders in focus.
Current fiscal premiums and taxes are assumed constant in nominal terms. Fixed and
variable O&M costs are assumed to increase at the rate of inflation, which is assumed to
be 2% p.a. A 70/30 debt-equity ratio is assumed, debt being financed over 10 years at 5%
p.a. effective. The results and conclusions are not particular sensitive to these
assumptions.
74

Table 1. Key techno-economic assumptions.

Reference Alternative A Alternative

B

Heating demand
Annual supply 24.5 MWh

Installed capacities
CHP-Heating 6.5 MW 3 MW 4 MW
CHP-Electricity 4.0 MWe

Efficiencies
CHP unit – thermal 39%
CHP unit – overall 90%
Heat-only boiler – overall 95%
Heat pump – COP 3 4

Investments
Heat pump 0.7 mill. € 0.9 mill. €

Var. annual O&M costs

CHP unit (€/MWh elec. prod.) 6.5 €/MWh
Heat-only boiler (€/MWh heat prod.) 1.5 €/MWh
Heat pump (€/MWh heat prod.) 4.0 €/MWh 4.0 €/MWh

Financial fuel costs and revenues from the sale of electricity are based on previous
year values (March 2004 to February 2005) projected to develop over the planning period
at rates similar to those projected for economic costs according to the Danish Energy
Authority [11]. The initial natural gas price is based on fixed monthly prices for large
consumers [12], and the electricity selling and purchase tariff is based on Nord Pool spot
market prices [13]. Electricity purchase taxes for heating purposes apply for electricity
used to feed the heat pump.

3.2 Case options

Table 1 holds the key techno-economic assumptions for the 3 options under analysis.
Particular uncertainty relates to the coefficient of performance (COP) of the heat pump,
which is highly sensitive to the temperature levels of the heat source as well as of the heat
sink. The average temperature level of the heat source is uncertain due to the various
conditions under which the heat pump will operate: in periods the engine-generator will
not operate and the heat pump will have to operate on the basis of a low temperature heat
source, perhaps ambient air, under which conditions the COP may be as low as 2, and is
unlikely to reach a COP higher than 4 (Alternative A). In other periods the heat pump
may operate in parallel with the engine-generator, possibly allowing for heat recovery by
 75

condensation of flue gasses, which will result in a relatively small temperature lift of the
heat pump, as a result of which a COP of between 3 and 5 may be achieved (Alternative
B). By including these two alternatives in the comparison, the aspect of this uncertainty is
partially explored.
The specific investment cost for large-scale heat pumps is not expected to change
towards 2030; however the COP for new heat pumps may be expected to improve by as
much as 20% by 2030 without any increases in investment and O&M costs (ref). The
potential increase is not considered under this analysis. The technical life time of the heat
pump is assumed to be 20 years at the specified O&M costing levels.

4 Results
Figure 3, 4 and 5 illustrates the operational characteristics of the 3 case options during a
week in November 2005. It appears from a review of this and other weeks over the
planning period that following the integration, the heat pump will significantly overtake
heat production from the CHP unit, Alternative B more so than Alternative A.
Table 2 shows the key financial results for the operation of the 3 case options. It
appears that the financial conclusion as to which option is the more feasible depends on
the operational mode of the heat pump. Alternative A, which uses ambient air as the only
heat source increases total costs of operation, while Alternative B, which is assumed
periodically to be using condensed flue gases as heat source, reduces total costs of
operation.

Table 2. Key financial results.

Reference Alternative A Alternative B

Net present value (¼ -6.3 mill. -7.0 mill. -5.7 mill.
Levelized production cost 41.1 45.7 37.7
(¼0:K-heat)

8
7,5
7
6,5
6
5,5
5
Heat [MW]

4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
1,5
1
0,5
0
Sat 26-11 Sun 27-11 Mon 28-11 Tue 29-11 Wed 30-11 Thu 01-12 Fri 02-12 Sat 03-12

Engine-Generator 3 MW Engine-Generator 1 MW Heat Only Boiler Heat consumption

Figure 3. Sample operation profile for optimized natural gas fired CHP plant without heat pump.
76

8
7,5
7
6,5
6
5,5
5
Heat [MW]

4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
1,5
1
0,5
0
Sat 26-11 Sun 27-11 Mon 28-11 Tue 29-11 Wed 30-11 Thu 01-12 Fri 02-12 Sat 03-12

Engine-Generator 3 MW Engine-Generator 1 MW Heat Pump Electricity Heat Only Boiler Heat consumption

Figure 4. Sample operation profile for optimized natural gas fired CHP plant with Alternative A heat pump.
Heat pump overtakes a significant share of heat production.

8
7,5
7
6,5
6
5,5
5
Heat [MW]

4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
1,5
1
0,5
0
Sat 26-11 Sun 27-11 Mon 28-11 Tue 29-11 Wed 30-11 Thu 01-12 Fri 02-12 Sat 03-12

Engine-Generator 3 MW Engine-Generator 1 MW Heat Pump Electricity Heat Only Boiler Heat consumption

Figure 5. Sample operation profile for optimized natural gas fired CHP plant with Alternative B heat pump.
Heat pump overtakes almost entirely heat production.

5 Conclusion
In conclusion, the results indicate that when a large-scale heat pump is integrated with an
existing CGP plant, the current and projected spot market situation in Nord Pool supports
a significant preference in the operation of the heat pump over the CHP unit. However,
uncertainties related to the performance of the heat pump under various operational
strategies must be further explored through tests and demonstration projects.
On the financial feasibility, the results indicate that when using only ambient air as
the heat source (Alternative A), the overall heat production costs increases by about 10%.
In an operational situation that allows a COP increase by 25% accompanied by an almost
30% increase in investment costs (Alternative B), the overall heat production costs are
reduced by about 8%.
 77

The financial results are obviously sensitive to the conditions for grid-connecting
small power producers. The recent move by small power producers teaming up to supply
firm capacity to the grid may benefit the CHP unit relatively if rewarded. Another
potential impact will be the combination of the increase in electricity demand due to the
use of heat pumps and the decrease in electricity produced by the CHP unit, which will
drive up market prices for electricity and thereby benefit the CHP unit relatively over the
heat pump. Analyses will be required in order to assess the feed-back effect on the Nord
Pool spot market from the possible increase in demand from heat pumps and the reduced
electricity production from the CHP units.
Possibly, financial instruments are required effectively to improve the financial
viability of large-scale heat pumps. Most importantly, it seems relevant to discuss which
options the market may reasonably introduce in order to introduce the option for
regulating electricity demand and supply by the use of heat pumps in order to avoid
critical excess power production and exports of excess power production, whenever
feasible. Also of current interest, will be the effects of introducing CO2-credits and RE-
certificates.
With construction periods of less than 1 year, the integration of large-scale heat
pumps with existing small power producers may be the key to allowing a large share of
intermittent renewables into the power grid in the short to medium-term. Such integration
would help to securing a flexible and cost-effective operation of the energy system and
policy strategies and market conditions should be developed accordingly.
However, while such revised operational strategy, based on a design that allowes for
both combined (CHP unit and heat pump) and sole operation (heat pump only), whould
have an impact on electricity markets, the results indicate that in a sustainable energy
system as the evolving Danish energy system, either a large-scale heat pump should fully
replace an existing CHP producer, or the size of the heat pump to be integrated with an
existing CHP unit should be much below half of the CHP unit’s heat production capacity.

Acknowledgments
The findings in this paper are part of the results of a Ph.D. project at Aalborg University,
which is supported financially by Energinet.dk, the TSO of Denmark. Moreover the
presentation is part of the EU-funded DESIRE-project (Dissemination Strategy on
Electricity balancing for large Scale Integration of Renewable Energy).

References

1. L. Nielsen et al., Vedvarende energi i stor skala til el- og varmeproduktion, Risø,
December 1994.
2. Danish Energy Authority, Rapport fra arbejdsgruppen om kraftvarme- og VE-
elektricitet, October, 2001.
3. H. Lund et al., Lokale Energimarkeder, Institut for Samfundsudvikling og
Planlægning, Aalborg Universitet, January 2004.
78

4. IEA’s heat pump centre, http://www.heatpumpcentre.org/.

5. Danish Energy Authority, Draft Technology Data Sheets, March 2005.
6. N. Stosic, I.K. Smith and A. Kovacevic, A Twin Screw Combined Compressor And
Expander For CO2 Refrigeration Systems, Centre for Positive Displacement
Compressor Technology, City University, London, 2002.
7. Energinet.dk (then Eltra), Decentral kraftvarme på markedsvilkår, F&U 2003 projekt
5227, Slutrapport, March 2004.
8. Energinet.dk (then Eltra), http://energinet.dk, Eltra Newsletter March 2005.
9. EMD, http://emd.dk, EnergyPRO software.
10. H. Lund, A. N. Andersen, Optimal Designs of Small CHP-Plants in a Market with
Fluctuating Electricity Prices, March 2004.
11. Danish Energy Authority, Appendiks: Beregningsforudsætninger for
samfundsøkonomiske beregninger på energiområdet, Høringsudkast, October 2004.
12. Dong, http://dong.dk, natural gas prices.
13. Nord Pool, http://nordpool.dk, spot market prices for electricity.
 CDM IN AFRICA - AN ANALYTICAL FRAMEWORK FOR ACTION ∗

MARCOS ALEXANDRE TEIXEIRA†

RGESD - Department of Mechanical Engineering, Instituto Superior Técnico,
Pv. de Mecânica I, 2º Andar
Lisbon, Portugal

LUIS MANUEL ALVES

RGESD - Department of Mechanical Engineering

SÉRGIO TEIXEIRA SANTOS

RGESD - Department of Mechanical Engineering

JOÃO SARMENTO CUNHA

TERRASYSTEMICS - Praça São Paulo, 19, 1 – Dto.
Lisbon, 1200 – 425, Portugal

MARIA DA GRAÇA CARVALHO

RGESD - Department of Mechanical Engineering

The implementation of CDM, as a market-based tool for sustainable development, is seen as a

critical tool for the African continent to achieve the Millennium Goals. Many years, initiatives and
projects have been implemented since the start of Kyoto´s negotiations, but few have been the
achievements in terms of the impacts in regional sustainable development. This paper carries out a
survey on the most recent CDM programmes and initiatives conducted in African countries
(especially in the Sub-Saharan Countries, as they are perceived to suffer the greatest impacts of
climate change). This survey was then used to analyse and identify particular trends, especially
when focusing in the achievements of those programmes and initiatives. A panel was also set-up for
comparing past and present scenarios. Based on the information collected and analysed, a strategy
was put forward to overcome the main weakness and propose possible steps for future action.

1 Introduction
Climate change is no longer a new topic in the international agenda. The key issue lies on
the general perception of public and private actors; some see it as a threat, others as an
opportunity, others still as business driver, while a few may actually perceive it as new
path for sustainable development (SD),. When climate change was first discussed in a
global forum [1], probably no one anticipated such a long and drawn-out process on this
matters (i.e. that it would take so many years for its ratification), and above all, most did

∗
This work was supported by EC, within the SYNERGY Programme Managed by the
DG TREM (Contract No. 7.623/D/02-001).
†
Corresponding author: [email protected].

79
80

not envisage the current state of affairs, namely the insufficient steps being taken and the
lack of political leadership demonstrated by the many of the institutions involved in the
process.
Furthermore, the Clean Development Mechanism (CDM), a forward-looking,
market-based tool for engaging poor countries in carbon abatement initiatives, was looked
upon to become one of the main drivers of SD in several of the less developed countries
(LDCs), but, at present (and now more than 10 years later), this is yet to become a reality.
This paper will, therefore, explore this issue in more detail, focusing on one of the regions
expected to benefit the most from CDM initiatives, the African Continent.
This paper is not only based on a survey of literature, publications and web-based
material, but also on two years of field experience in connection to the development of the
Project “CDM for Sustainable Africa - Capacity Building for Clean Development
Mechanism in Sub-Saharan African Countries”. The objective of this project was to
create an appropriate framework for CDM project implementation and facilitate CDM -
related investments in the SAHEL (meaning the Sahara desert boundary) and the SADC
(Southern Africa) regions a.

2 CDM as A Development Tool

Starting from the premise that combating climate change is a global endeavour, it was
agreed that action would have to be concerted at the international level; and from this
concept the idea of optimising emissions reductions in the most cost-effective way
naturally followed. The concept of developing projects that could reduce Green House
Gases (GHG) emissions anywhere in the world (possibly, where these were cheapest)
emerged from this framework, such that these credits could then be used in covering
carbon emissions in other countries, especially those subject to emissions ceilings. As said
in Article 12, paragraph 2 of the Kyoto Protocol:
“The purpose of the clean development mechanism shall be to assist Parties not
included in Annex I in achieving sustainable development and in contributing to the
ultimate objective of the Convention, and to assist Parties included in Annex I in
achieving compliance with their quantified emission limitation and reduction
commitments under Article 3…”1
This makes sense in a global business approach. But there are always pertinent issues
such as costs, available funds, risks, other more attractive projects, different
commitments, the respect for sovereignty, addressing the environmental aspects as well as
the global sustainable development objectives. Thus, a political and regulatory framework
needed to be established. It was against this scenario of different perspectives and
diverging goals that the foundations for CDM were established, at the first Conference of
the Parties (COP).
Although CDM initial ideas were quite clear, as time went by, it has been perceived
as not been able to achieve its initially proposed targets, for example, the Small Scale
CDM Projects were to be an important tool in addressing the sustainable development of

a
http://www.rgesd-sustcomm.org/CDM_AFRICA/CDM_AFRICA.htm
1
www.unfccc.int
 81

small communities, but those projects lack the critical mass to support the burden of the
fixed costs. The second wave of more promising projects involved the transfer of
appropriate technology to LDCs, but these often become constrained by the difficulty of
demonstrating their additionality. In poor countries with a severe technology gap, the
CDM Projects were expected to be a major push factor for sustainability in the industrial
sectors, however, government bureaucracy and the absence of a support structure made
such projects more difficult to implement [2].
Taking all of this into consideration, it is easy to conclude that CDM was not the
expected magic pill for tackling climate change. This article will attempt to further
develop and analyse some of the barriers that block CDM investments / actions and,
wherever possible, shed some light on ways to overcome them, with regard to the African
Continent.
As a final word, the authors would like to warn, that the growing feeling that CDM,
as a market-based tool is failing to achieve the promotion of its sustainable development
goals, makes it even more important to secure the benefits from carbon finance beyond its
purely monetary benefits, otherwise, there is a risk of political repercussions and the re-
evaluation of positions/attitudes by several donor organizations, as already alerted by the
WWF [3].

3 African Situation
Africa is indeed not a big contributor of GHG emissions, as it only accounts for 3.2% of
world emissions (1992 levels), mainly produced in the energy and land use sectors (32%
and 37 % respectively), as can be seen in Figure 1. Although, this may in itself reduce any
interest in this market for CDM projects, Africa is one of the most vulnerable continents
to the potential impacts of climate change. Furthermore, the low industrial base poses a
threat that economic growth, if a sustainable path is not chosen (i.e. less energy intensive
and with cleaner technology process), will lead to the exponential growth in carbon
emissions [4].
To accomplish this overarching objective, the proposed project takes the Kyoto
Protocol agenda as a general framework for implementing its specific objectives, in other
words, making proper use of the CDM to achieve sustainable development in Africa. This
continent has an enormous natural resource potential, including energy resources, but also
the world’s lowest economic and social indicators, thus facing major development
challenges at all levels.
The actions carried in the past within these countries had the intention of contributing
towards the creation of the greatest number of CDM activities, the identification of
barriers for investments, supporting actions for creating endogenous capacity to remove
such barriers, and to avoid or minimise future emissions by promoting environment-
friendly technology transfer.
On the surface, CDM has been regarded (by various players in developed and
developing countries) as a cooperative instrument to promote sustainable development
while achieving cost effective GHG mitigation. However, due to dissimilar economic,
political, social and technological conditions in developing countries, Africa has not been
able to attract sufficient investments through the CDM route. Of a total of 50 “Activities
Implemented Jointly” (AIJ), projects during the pilot phase, only two projects came to
82

Africa. Recently, under the Netherlands Carbon Purchase Programme (CERUPT), out of
a total of 20 projects approved, none has been approved for implementation in Africa.
Furthermore, out of over forty business methodologies submitted to the CDM Board of
Executives, of which eleven have been approved and six have gone as PDDs (project
Design Document) to the CDM Executive Board (EB), only one on landfill from South
Africa is under active consideration as the methodology is being approved (Source:
http://www.cdmwatch.org/).

Figure 1. Carbon Dioxide Emissions per continent [4].

4 Past Activities
Here are some of the past activities on CDM in African Countries, more specifically in
the area of capacity building and project portfolio building. The bellow list of actions
does not try to cover all experiences in the continent, but instead to provide a general
picture of the activities developed and the main outcomes achieved.
The Clean Development Mechanism and Africa. Regional Workshop. Accra, Ghana,
21 – 24 September, 1998 [5]. Main issues discussed:
• CDM Governance – Need for reduced bureaucracy and ensuring that the
developments goals of the hosting country are actually achieved. The International
Board composition should be of 11 members, out of which 6 from developing
countries.
• African Focal Points – no agreement on whether Africa should begin to establish
CDM agencies. Was suggested a partition of credits, 50% developed country partner,
20 host country partner, 20 % host country government, 4 % adaptation funds and 1
% for the CDM agency.
 83

• Baselines – It was clear that the lack of precise and reliable data makes it difficult to
build baselines. A combination of national (and or regional) and project-specific
baseline would be required for CDM projects in Africa.
• Additionality – Due Africa’s low level of emissions, additionality would be focused
in financial aspects, so CDM would improve attractiveness of projects to investors.
• Monitoring, verification and Certification –SD objectives are to be incorporated in
the process as an issue for further discussions to move from more short-term
objectives (i.e. infrastructure or job creation), to “poverty alleviation”. Capacity
Building Programmes should target the lack of competence to carry out such.
• Equity issues –Africa, as has been marginalised in international mechanisms in the
past, a quota system should be put in place to ensure enough CDM projects in Africa.
Another aspect is that it should not be constrained with emissions targets.
• Getting started – A fund should be set-up to assist the development of credible
projects and build confidence and overall understanding. This would support
countries to develop agencies; adaptation strategies; project portfolios; capacity
building, R&D and Demonstration programs.
• Other existing mechanisms – CDM must not be used as a substitute for other
mechanisms such as ODA and GEF
• Types of CDM projects – energy and sustainable transport projects are to be pursued.
UNIDO at the project “Engaging the Private Sector in Clean Development Mechanism
Project Activities”, a United Nations inter-agency project, focused on Brazil and South
Africa. One of the main features was the promotion of CDM projects by developing an
Investment and Technology Promotion Office (ITPOs). The program followed an agenda
of meetings between CDM Delegate Programme for South Africa and potential investors
in Japan (around 30 between 21st to 31st May, 2003, in Tokyo).
The project was related as success, with “bridge-building” effects between Japanese
investors and South Africa CDM Project Developers, and the presentation of a CDM
portfolio of 23 projects. Many questions were raised concerning the institutional
infrastructure, regulations, status of the Designated National Authority (DNA). The low
share of energy related projects indicated that more capacity-building work needed to be
done in this area. Many of the contact reports had parts of it made confidential as
requested by the participants.
CD4CDM Project (on going at the present date, www.cd4cdm.org). United Nations
Environment Programme (UNEP) launched the project “Capacity Development for the
Clean Development Mechanism” with financial support from the Dutch Government. The
UNEP Risø Centre (URC) is the supporting organisation contracted by UNEP to
implement the project.
The project has the target to establish GHG emission reduction projects, consistent
with national SD goals (especially in the energy sector), and also to prepare people in the
host countries to became capable of analysing the technical and financial merits of
projects and negotiating financing agreements with Annex 1 countries or investors.
84

The project aims at a broad understanding of the opportunities offered by the CDM,
and developing the necessary institutional and human capacities to allow them to
formulate and implement projects under the CDM framework. 12 countries, in 4
developing regions, have been selected to participate in the project: North Africa and
Middle East; Asia; Latin America and Sub-Saharan Africa - Côte d’Ivoire, Mozambique
and Uganda. The project has successfully implemented a series of 20 national and
regional workshops and 4 books.
BEA International – Bureau of Environmental Analysis International, three-day
workshop on Application of Climate Change and Energy Technologies: Opportunities and
Incentives for Investments in Africa [6].
In this event, CDM related issues were discussed such as: regional capacity
enhancement, public and private CDM initiatives, enhancement of partnerships between
national and international private and public entities, country CDM programmes, and
capacity building constraints (e.g. technical, information, institutional and financial
capacity). Some of the main considerations were:
• On public-private partnership on CDM, it was recommended a common strategy to
be developed in Africa.
• Capacity Building – general concerns were expressed regarding the skills and
expertise of environmental ministries and environmental officers and trainers. Was a
consensus that more training activities are needed to enable more CDM investments
• CDM awareness - international NGOs, regional offices, and CDM focal points must
increase their efforts to persuade the international community to invest in African
countries. Was also suggested the creation of a ‘CDM Desk for Africa’ or ‘Regional
Desks’ to serve as advisory bodies.
• Small Scale – these should receive special attention in building the CDM portfolio,
highlighting the community benefits.
Another special issue concerned small-scale projects. In creating a CDM portfolio, more
attention should be given to the specific community benefit of a project. Other key issues
discussed:
• The need to address the development criteria at country level (instead of adopting
universal principles) and the risk of a ‘race to the bottom’
• In the past, Africa’s position against the sink projects was in line with European
NGO’s but now there has been a clear shift in this issue. As such, there is a lack of
unity in the G77+ China Block and Africa’s voice is not being heard.
• Africa need to gain experience in implementing CDM projects. There has been work
in some baseline methodologies in the LULUCF at local level (Kenya), but yet some
institutional problems exist to sort-out contractual arrangements

CDM for Sustainable Africa - Capacity Building for Clean Development Mechanism
in Sub-Saharan African Countries. Project coordinated by the RGESD – IST, where,
during 18 months a Consortium with European and African Institutions took forward the
 85

objective of creating an appropriate framework for CDM project implementation and

facilitate CDM related investments in the SAHEL (meaning the Sahara desert boundary)
and the SADC (Southern Africa) regions. To accomplish this goal, the project foster the
understanding of CDM as a tool to achieve SD in Africa.
The “CDM for Sustainable Africa” project was therefore conceived to ensure
attainment of long-term sustainable development of environmentally friendly technologies
through capacity building. Feasibility studies for the most promising projects identified
were developed for exploring these potential projects in the Sub-Saharan Countries, as
well as a table of potential CDM Projects for the target region.

5 Current Situation
CDM is not a “common-sense” business and there are several barriers to its fulfillment as
a development tool and also as a business oriented activity. Worldwide, there are many
barriers and milestones within the CDM process, and all of them vary from project to
project and from site to site. Thus, one must be proactive to overcome them according to
each reality. Listed below are a few key points on the process that all participants must
consider when pursuing a CDM application [7]:
• The role of the key entities established to manage and monitor the CDM;
• Legal process involved in developing and registering the project and sales of CER;
• The legal requirements in the Hosting Country, i.e. eligibility and ‘additionality’ test;
• Complying with domestic law frameworks, particularly legal ownership of CER,
foreign investment restrictions, property law and security law issues;
• Project Finance and the various means of structuring and financing CDM projects
and how the CER are transferred in the international and domestic registry systems;
• How the project management team plans deal with the risks particular to CDM
projects and how to incorporate them into the negotiation of the CER; and
• The contracts, and compliance to the different perspectives that the project developer
in a developing country may hold on various clauses compared to the CER buyer.
The main risks remains in the lack of reliable information and the need of a secure
environment to promote the changes that must take place during the CDM life cycle (for
the enterprise as well as for others stakeholders). At the end, this is what CDM is made of,
changing towards a new framework for developing and securing their long term activities.
Within the “CDM for Sustainable Africa” project, an assessment was made to
analyse the present barriers to CDM projects in the target countries. It consisted on a
specific survey questionnaire with the leading questions/indicators related to policy,
technical, financial and legal issues.
This material was used within the local stakeholders in Botswana, Mozambique,
South Africa and Zambia and at Agrhmet Centre (that further administered those
questionnaires in their Sahelian member states namely Niger, Cape Verde and Gambia).
The list of barriers identified was:
86

• Policy Barriers: limited awareness of CDM in Government, NGOs and Private

Sector; impromptus response by governments to ratify the Kyoto Protocol; no fully
established CDM National Authority; lack of a formally functional SD criteria and
dedicated committee; limited awareness of benefits of CDM and its relationship to
business by Government, NGOs and Private Sector and limited fora at which CDM
issues are discussed.
• Technology Barriers: limited awareness on renewable and energy efficiency tech. as
potential CDM; limited and sometimes non-existence of knowledge on selection of
appropriate renewable energy and energy efficiency technologies as potential CDM
projects; very few countries have experience with developing CDM projects; limited,
and in some cases lack of assistance to the private sector by Government and NGOs
in resolving barriers; limited, and/or non-existence, of databases with information
related to CDM; limited, and at times non-existence, R&D facilities for development
and demonstration of CDM related technologies; limited human resource for the
PDD elaboration and for new methodologies; few support services for PIN (Project
Idea Note) and PDD elaboration and conducting feasibility studies, and formulation
of business plans related to CDM and problems faced by countries with projects
under development would include lack of: capacity to develop project, prompt
government support, project development assistance (funding), skilled human
resources to develop the PDD, finance to fund CDM work and men power to be
allocated for CDM work.
• Financial Barriers: lack of financial base from local investors to contribute for
project implementation, as there is limited to no awareness of local/regional
institutions in CDM projects; limited awareness of availability of international
investment sources and limited awareness of risks associated with CDM project
implementation and of the transaction costs in CDM implementation and CERs
selling on project economics.
• Legal Barriers: limited to no awareness of the Protocol as an international law
within NGOs and Private Sector, as well as the legal issues in the development of
CDM projects at all levels (Government, NGO and Privates Sector); limited, and for
private sector almost no, awareness of Legal arrangements during CDM development
and lack of capacity in most countries to negotiate for a CERPA.

6 Discussion
Looking to the list of barriers found, and also keeping in mind the conclusions and
achievements of the last actions mentioned, there are some obvious trends, namely the
following:
1. The lists of barriers continue to be more or less the same, despite the efforts of the
international community;
2. CDM is seen much more as a form of gaining access to international funds than to
build a Sustainable Development Agenda;
3. Private sector still lacks understanding of Kyoto related business opportunities;
 87

4. The CDM initiatives are more common among governments, then academia and
almost absent in the private and banking sectors.
Other issue frequently debated is the strong link between CDM projects and
sustainable development, and how those investments are to be important for the local
communities. However, with no clearly defined SD criteria (which are at the core of
CDM project design), this issue of great importance, has so far received little attention by
the main key players (as it was not to be expected).
CDM in Africa is mainly considered a source of foreign income, while other aspects
are being disregarded. The numbers, on the other hand, show that Africa is losing this
battle. The statistics reveal that Foreign Direct Investment (FDI), in the developing
countries are concentrated in more or less 10 countries, with Africa’s share of this capital
decreasing over time, from around 17% in 1960 to about 3% by 1999. The whole
continent (except South Africa) received only 0.6% of the world’s FDI in 2000, as can be
seen on Table 1 [8].
Also, these investments are not equally spread in the African economy, as they tend
to concentrate in the natural resource industries such as mining, oil, timber, coffee, tea,
cocoa; sectors where competitive advantages outweigh the negative factors [9].
From a CDM perspective, when considering the investments directly related to the
CDM in developing countries, Africa does not come at the top of the list of hosting
countries. Furthermore, when this information is cross checked – i.e. FDI and CDM
investments – it is evident that one does not follows the other, as demonstrated in [10].
Also, in this paper is stated that low income, agrarian economies with relatively poor
infrastructure have limited scope for attracting FDI inflows, regardless of whether their
policies are trade-friendly. This is in line with the declining shares in global FDI inflows
of low income countries in sub-Saharan Africa, despite their liberalization of trade and
investment regimes. FDI flows have remained very modest, compared with other regions,
such as Asia and Latin America.

Table 1: Distribution of World FDI inflows, 1986-2000 (in %). Source: [8].
Region 1986 - 1990 1993 - 1998 1999 – 2000
Developed Countries 82.4 61.2 80.0
Developing Countries 17.5 35.3 17.9
Africa 1.8 1.8 0.8
Latin America & Caribbean 5.0 12.3 7.9
Asia & Pacific 10.6 21.2 9.2
Central & Eastern Europe 0.1 3.5 2.0
Least developed countries (LDCs) 0.4 0.6 0.4

With regard to potential projects, although Africa lags behind in the preparation,
submission and implementation of CDM projects, various options are physically present
throughout Africa for the development of PDD and a large number of potential projects
have been identified, mostly Small Scale CDM projects. Some examples are:
5. Better use of wood resources (improved stoves and efficient charcoal making
processes);
6. Efficiency improvement in Coal based thermo-electrical facilities (optimization of
coal combustion process, via better process monitoring);
88

7. Energy efficiency project with technology transfer. Cases of revamp of industrial

units with technology transfer (i.e. insertion of bio-digestion plants on present units.
As the incorporation of 3 different technologies in a slaughter house in Botswana;
8. Energy efficiency improving project with business as usual technology. Appropriate
for CDM projects focused in industrial units revamp with BAU technology (i.e.
enhancing of cogeneration in sugar cane mill in Mozambique (one case studied);
9. Landfill gas-to-energy projects. These projects may be attractive to be developed as
CDM projects in regions where suitable landfills are available, such as South Africa.
Also, these projects rely on existing CDM background (with methodology already
approved. This was also the first CDM project registered);
10. Wind Mills (but not at all sites); and
11. Biodiesel and solar energy projects – alternative and / or renewable energy projects
to specific sites and situations.
The results of the case-studies have shown that there are feasible opportunities for
CDM projects in different areas of Africa and that, due to its heterogeneity and diversity,
it is difficult to speak in general terms about what type of CDM projects would be
feasible, as these potential projects are strongly related to local conditions and site
specificities (physical and structural conditions), and to each Country’s reality.
Nevertheless, some general observations on the feasibility of different types of projects
can be made, in a sectoral approach, as there is some homogeneity in technological levels
across the continent:
Meat Sector – countries with a relatively large meat production sector in Sub-
Saharan Africa: South Africa (1.8 Mton), Nigeria (1.1 Mton), Kenya and Tanzania. Meat
product exports mainly from Southern African countries (Namibia, South Africa,
Botswana, Zimbabwe and Swaziland). In the mentioned countries, there may be options
for development of CDM projects based on anaerobic digestion of meat processing
wastes, similar to what has been examined for Botswana.
Use of Agricultural residues – the northern and central African countries do not have
very large amounts of agricultural process residues, however in these countries it mainly
concerns field residues that are often hard to collect. Furthermore, utilization of these
residues may cause unwanted soil degradation. In countries where there is a large
population pressure on wood resources however, collecting and briquetting these field
resources may be an option. Examples of countries with high concentrations of
agricultural field residues (wheat and barley straw) are Egypt (10.6 Mton), Tunisia (1.1
Mtons), Morocco (3.0 Mtons), Ethiopia (5.3 Mtons), South Africa (4.2 Mtons) and
Algeria (3.6 Mtons). If this is machine-harvested and no real alternative use is available, it
could be feasible to generate power from this resource.
Sugar Cane Mills Cogeneration – the enhanced use of sugar cane bagasse in
cogeneration scheme is particularly attractive in Non-Tropical Southern Africa, and
particularly the small country of Swaziland (some 6 Mton of bagasse is available in this
region of which 1 Mton in Swaziland). And yet, if this is a common practice around the
globe, the present technological situation in African mills create an opportunity to, using
BAU technology, have an electric energy surplus that is not present in the baseline (as
energy generation is not considered in the mills’ strategic planning). At the same time,
better use of forestry residues, namely wood residue based power generation could be
further developed. Other main African areas where large amounts of bagasse are available
 89

in concentrated form are Mauritius (1.5 Mton) and Réunion Island (500 kton).
Most of the above mentioned ideas for CDM projects are based on the increased
utilisation of renewable resources for energy production. Another category of potential
CDM projects relates to efficiency improvements of existing supply chains, such as
improved charcoal production in (Niger and Mozambique case study), as well as grid
extension that is focused in displacing local energy generation based on diesel engines
(Zambia case study).
Furthermore, the local profile of the African private sector at present is mainly made-
up of micro, small and medium-scale enterprises that often operate in the informal
economy and, as such, most trade and investment promotion institutions do not reach
them and channels for financial intermediation are ill-adapted to their needs [11]. Those
that do not have access to information nor funding lines to undergo CDM projects.
This key support is critical in drawing a CDM strategy, as would it be difficult for
those enterprises to seek for the necessary resources (financial and technological) to go
through the CDM project cycle, as well as for reaching the international markets. Also it
is difficult to argue that such modest additional CDM financing is the needed final push to
make a project commercially viable, but it is still conceivable that the CDM could help to
overcome non-financial barriers to implementing some climate mitigation projects.
Another key issue is that the host countries need to adopt appropriate SD evaluation
methodologies that are transparent to potential investors, especially concerning the
important aspects of project evaluation. This ill-defined part of the cycle could be quickly
addressed if the methodology for approaching the issue were subject to a regional
consensus, such that the potential similarities and specific differences could be respected.
In this sense, the authors do recognise the potential of the methodology described by [12],
based in a two angle analysis:
First – Recognise that GHG emissions, and the human induced global warming, are
determined by general development pathways and by specific climate mitigation policies.
Thus lead us to start thinking of future options in a more holistic way, rather than just
focusing on individual energy supply, technology demand or adaptation measures. The
critical aspect is to place climate policy in the broader context of technological and socio-
economic policy development, rather than just being one among the many items of those
policies.
Second – Recognition of the linkages and potential synergies and trade-offs in each
concrete policy option. As the options were inventoried, it became clear that they are
focused in a certain issue within a specific sector. However, for a full economic appraisal
it is necessary to take into account the indirect impacts on climate (including mitigation
and adaptation), development targets and social goals. Policy options must not be guided
by sector-specific results but, instead, encompass the full spectrum of potential impacts.
And even if each country does define a set of criteria (and many are possible), this
has to be made with the contribution of local stakeholders. The lack of interaction
between knowledgeable technology partners and organisations representing local
stakeholders is also at the core of another serious problem: the significant probability that
the project design is suboptimal. This was, for example, observed in the development of a
bio-digestion project based on Methane recovery and substitution of fossil fuels with
biogas from abattoir waste (Botswana). The local organisation initially proposed to bottle
the produced biogas. After the discussions with the European partner, this proposal was
90

developed into a more flexible range of technical solutions to better suit local
stakeholders expectations. However, a number of project ideas suggested by the local
partners were deemed impossible to be converted into tangible CO2-mitigating projects.
Local partnerships are essential in preparing CDM project proposals to the PIN and
PDD level. However, it is commonly observed that some local consulting teams operating
in the region typically lack the technical background and adequate capacity to seek new
opportunities for CDM Projects and their development to PIN and PDD level. Through
international exchange programmes, local consulting organisations may gain increased
exposure to foreign solutions that might be appropriate at the local level. Meanwhile, it is
recommended that local CDM organisations are assisted in build expertise by contacting
external partners with sufficient technical expertise to develop more suitable projects
(developing CDM projects to PIN or PDD level).
Host countries need to promote the inclusion of CDM aspects in the financial
engineering of projects. As illustrated by some of the technical solutions proposed in this
project, there is a need to further develop capacity for sound financial project engineering.
Furthermore, the inclusion of CER sales in project finance can significantly increase the
feasibility of CDM projects. For many typical CDM projects, however, the major share of
the investment is typically provided by local stakeholders who often do not clearly
understand how to incorporate into the project finance possible benefits and additional
fixed costs associated with trading CER’s and the CDM.
Although this project has contributed to increased awareness among local
stakeholders through the workshops organised, additional actions are required to facilitate
the adoption of projects that are only feasible through the sales of CER’s.
As was shown in the CDM barriers assessment phase, the official support structure
for CDM in the African hosting countries (Focal Point and/or DNA) is considered rather
weak. Several countries have not even ratified the Kyoto Protocol, and information on the
definition of local SD criteria is often lacking. There is a clear need to develop local
partnerships to stimulate local on-site activities, which would speed up the process of
CDM project preparation and develop confidence with outside investors.
Difficulties to obtain accurate information from local sites for these specific projects
(case studies) were also experienced, as many of the final users of the proposed CDM
projects were not directly involved in the design process and did not clearly understand
what was expected from them.

7 Conclusions
Anyone reading the above comments may consider that the barriers for developing CDM
projects are insurmountable. At the moment, Africa has significantly less experience in
the adoption of CDM projects and is making slow progress along the learning curve.
There are, however, great CDM opportunities in different sectors of society.
In the political sphere, African countries need to ratify the Kyoto Protocol and
establish national DNA and/or focal points. In addition, opportunities need to be
identified and developed for projects that, indeed, present a strategic advantage in
incorporating the sales of CER’s, not only because of financial gains but also through
their positive impact on both climate change and local sustainable development.
One of the forms to proceed with this strategy is to combine creative thinking, local
 91

entrepreneurship and the promotion of linkages with technology suppliers and R&D
organisations in Europe.
As such, one option is to foster the understanding that it is necessary to develop a
new model for CDM capacity-building activities in Africa. This model must be closer to
the private sector, focused on relevant technical assistance to the project developers
(consulting and technology providers), and in partnership with the local financial
institutions (project finance). Only after these actors become fully aware of Kyoto
business (and related opportunities) can we proceed to further initiatives focused on the
local governments.
These actions are to be developed in a cluster approach, gathering players based on
their competence (by sector and area of expertise) instead of their geographical
disposition. By doing so, it is expected that CDM projects become closer to the local
realities, while also strengthening a more solid portfolio of business initiatives.
After this first phase has been completed, further actions should be focused on Small
Scale Projects and the definition of Sustainable Development criteria. This last aspect is a
key element in the process of engaging the government and public opinion in
consolidating the final elements of the CDM chain.
This method would allow, firstly, the creation of a set of solid projects, gathered by
business areas and/or sectors, capable of attracting foreign investment (one of the key
development issues at present). Secondly, the building of a framework to attain the
critical mass necessary to make the CDM process move forward in the African continent.
The first stage would entail disengaging the action from governments and placing the
emphasis on the private sector (not necessarily associated to geographical distribution).
Once this local CDM agenda gains momentum, it would be conveyed onto the local
stakeholders for the definition of SD priorities, and be realised in Small Scale CDM
projects most appropriate to local conditions (using the methodology suggested in the
text).

References

1. WCED. Our Common Future, Oxford: University Press (1987).

2. D. Rusnok, Where the Conditions are Right. Carbon Finance 11, Oct. 14-15 (2004).
3. L. Salter, A Clean Energy Future? The Role of the CDM in Promoting Renewable
Energy in Developing Countries. WWF International (2004).
4. IPCC. Climate change 2001 - Working group III – Mitigation. WMO & UNEP
(2001). Available @ http://www.grida.no/climate/ipcc_tar/wg3/index.htm.
5. UNEP. Regional Workshop: “The Clean Development Mechanism and Africa. New
Partnerships for Sustainable Development: The Clean Development Mechanism
under the Kyoto Protocol”. UNEP: Copenhagen, Accra, Ghana, 21-24th Sep. (1998).
6. L. Verchots, Workshop on Appl. of Climate Change and Energy Tech.: Op. and
Incen. for Invest. in Africa. ICRAF: Nairoby, 3 - 5 Sep. (2003).
7. UNEP. CDM Information and Guidebook. Roklide: Risø Centre, 2ed. 100 p. (2004).
8. UNCAT. World Investment Report. Genova: UNCAT (2002).
 92

9. M. M. IKIARA. Foreign Direct Investment (FDI), Technology Transfer, and Poverty

Alleviation: Africa’s Hope and Dilemma. Nairoby: ATPS (African Technology
Policy Studies Network), ATPS Special Paper Series no 16 (2003).
10. A. A. Niederberger & R. Saner, Exploring the relationship between FDI flows and
CDM potential. Transnational Corporations, 14, 1, April 2005.
11. OECD. Conclusions and proposals for action. At: Proceedings of the Int. Conf. on
Trade and Investment: Maximising the Benefits of Globalisation for Africa (2003).
12. R. Swart, J. Robinson & S. Cohenc. Climate change and sustainable development:
expanding the options. Climate Policy 3S1, S19–S40 (2003).
 STRATEGY OF POPULARIZING WOOD WINDOWS FOR ENERGY
SAVING HOUSE: STANDARDIZATION AND DEVELOPMENT OF
FIRE-PROOF WOOD IN JAPAN∗

YOSHIHIRO OBATA†
Materials Institute for Sustainable Development, National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science
and Technology,
Nagoya, 463-8560, Japan

KAZUTOSHI TAKEUCHI
Materials Institute for Sustainable Development, National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science
and Technology,
Nagoya, 463-8560, Japan

FUMIE ABE
Materials Institute for Sustainable Development, National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science
and Technology,
Nagoya, 463-8560, Japan

KOZO KANAYAMA
Materials Institute for Sustainable Development, National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science
and Technology,
Nagoya, 463-8560, Japan

The research of difference of window frames between Japan and Europe shows that aluminum sash
windows with higher thermal transmittance are popular in Japan and wood casement windows with
lower thermal transmittance are popular in Europe. Popularization of wood windows for energy
saving from houses is treated as one of the practical and effective means to reduce carbon dioxide
emission in the sectors of commercial and residence against global warming in the coming
commitment period of Kyoto Protocol. Standardization by Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) and
development of fire-proof wood are discussed as strategies to popularize wood windows. The
standards of wood windows in Europe seem to have been prepared with schedule for the
commitment period of the Kyoto Protocol aggressively and strategically for sustainable development.
Detail research of European Standards on wood windows reminds us the difference of climate and
wood used for windows between Japan and Europe. According to the information, the research for
standardization of wood windows in Japan has just started since 2004 with weather test. Fire-proof
five-plywood made of Japanese cedar, whose each veneer is impregnated with incombustible
chemicals, is developed. Fire test is made by cone calorimeter for four natural woods and the
developed plywood. Although the natural woods cannot clear the conditions for even Class 3 fire-
proof materials, the developed plywood clears conditions for Class 1 by Building Standards laws.

∗
This work is supported by research fund upgrading structures of energy demand and
supply of Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry in Japan.
†
Corresponding author, E-mail:[email protected]

93
94

1 Introduction
Japan must reduce emissions of greenhouse gasses by at least 6 per cent below 1990
levels in the commitment period 2008 to 2012 against the global warming, because the
Kyoto Protocol was brought into valid in February 16th, 2005. In fact, the emissions of
allocated carbon dioxide have gone up 12.3 per cent above 1990 levels until 2004 in
Japan. Although the industrial sector, among 7 sectors of energy industries, industries,
transportation, commercial, residence, industrial processes and waste, is the largest
emission source and accounted for 42.3 per cent of total emissions at 1990, the sector has
reduced the emission by 3.4 per cent until 2004. On the other hand, the increasing amount
of emissions from three sectors of transportation, commercial and residence is 149
megatons and is almost equivalent to the total increment of 140 megatons [1]. We should
promote to reduce emission of carbon dioxide in these three sectors strongly. There are
mainly three means to reduce atmospheric carbon dioxide; (1) Reduction of carbon
dioxide itself by the use of natural energies such as wind-power generation or
photovoltaic generation, or by the energy saving. (2) Fixing of carbon from carbon
dioxide by photosynthesis of forest. (3) Carbon dioxide capture and storage under ground
or in ocean. Energy saving is one of the effective and practical means in the coming
commitment period.
Increase of greenhouse gas emissions in the commercial and residential sectors
mainly has been caused by the increase of energy consumption for air-conditioning.
Energy dissipation from rooms to outside occurs through windows, ceilings, walls and
floors. The amount of energy loss from aluminum frame window, which is most popular
in Japan, is the largest among windows, ceilings, walls and floors. The use of windows
with low thermal transmittance can be effective to reduce energy loss in the sectors of
commercial and residential sectors. Wood window is a prospective candidate against the
global warming because of its two advantages; (1) it is effective for energy saving
because of the low thermal conductivity and (2) it keeps the fixed carbon for longer time
because wood is carbohydrate which trees had been fixed from atmospheric carbon
dioxide by photosynthesis. Unfortunately, almost window frames are aluminium sashes
and wood window is not so popular in Japan. Popularization of wood windows is needed
to promote energy saving from houses.
Standardization of wood windows is one of the effective means to popularize wood
windows. Our institute has a standardization section of Japanese Industrial Standards
(JIS). Our research group has handled standardization on a test method for wood windows
since 2004, because only our group has treated wood as research themes until now in our
institute. At first, we searched trendy of standardization on wood windows in Europe as
advanced area of wood windows. In this paper, the trendy in Europe and the current
situation in Japan are shown and compared. We will also show the orientation for
standardization of wood windows as a result of comparison between Europe and Japan.
Improvement of wood demerits is another effective means to popularize wood
windows. Wood has a demerit that it burns easily. In this paper, development of fire-proof
 95

wood is also treated. The developed fire-proof plywood is made of thinned Japanese
cedar. Such use of thinned wood can keep Japanese artificial forest young and active with
high ability of photosynthesis. The result of fire test will be shown.

2 Standardization of Wood Windows

2.1. Japanese Windows

There are two types of window frames; casement and sash as shown in Figure 1. The
former opens and shuts by pivot or hinge and is popular in Europe. On the other hand, the
latter opens and shuts by sliding and is popular in Japan. Such difference of window
frame popularization between Europe and Japan comes of the differences of construction
method and climate. Casement type has higher performances of airtight and heat
insulating because it can be pressed to an outer frame strongly. It has advantage against
severe winter in the north of Europe. Rooms in traditional Japanese houses are divided
with paper sliding-doors called “shoji” or “fusuma”, which can be removed easily from
doorsills to make wide space and to let fresh air into the rooms. Such sliding-doors has
advantage against muggy summer. Many recent rooms in Japan are westernized and have
casement type doors. But many windows keep also traditional style of paper sliding-
doors; sash frame.

(a) Casement (b) Sash

Figure 1. Window frame types.

Sash frame in Japan was made of wood in an early date. Wood has been replaced
with aluminium because of easy maintainability since about 1975. Now aluminium frames
account for 89 percent as shown in Figure 2. On the other hand, wood frames account for
only 1 percent [2] and are mainly used in the northern part of Japan. Although the
aluminium sash windows once had been popular in the northern part of Japan, many of
them have been replaced with wood casement windows since about 1980. Because
aluminium frame windows caused dew condensation and freeze in winter not letting them
open. Such use of wood windows against dew condensation showed another advantage of
96

energy saving for heating in winter in the northern part of Japan. Our strategy is to
popularize wood casement windows in urban areas for saving energy used for air
conditioning against muggy summer.
We thought that standardization of wood windows will help us to popularize them
widely in Japan. We have already standards on windows as JIS A4706 [3]. Although it
can be applied for even wood frame windows, it has been made for the request of Japan
Sash Manufactures Association, which mainly treats aluminium sash windows. So we
define the standard of wood windows apart from JIS A4706 as one of JIS for environment.
Figure 2 shows also shares of window frame materials in USA and Europe. For
example, wood windows account for 95 percent in northern Europe of Finland, Norway
and Sweden. The figure suggests that Europe is an advanced area of wood windows. We
investigate the trend of standardization of wood windows in Europe for reference to make
Japanese standards at first.

Figure 2. Comparison of materials for window frames among Japan, USA and Europe [2]

2.2. Trend of Standardization of Wood Windows in Europe

Europe has a long history of standardization of wood windows. For example, United
Kingdom has a standard of BS644 on timber windows [4]. The original one was
published at 1951. It was revised three times at 1958, 1989 and 2003. The current one
was revised as a result of the withdrawal of British Standards which have been replaced
by European Standards. It was also revised to make reference to enhanced security
performance for timber windows as given in BS7950. The assurance of safety is helpful to
popularize wood windows. The standard can be revised further more in the future,
because European Committee for Standardization (CEN: Comite Europeen de
 97

Normalisation) Technical Committee is currently preparing a series of European

Standards for the testing and classification of windows, including timber windows.
In fact, the 29 countries in Europe belong to CEN at June 1, 2006. The 25 countries
of them are European Union (EU) accession states, one is Romania which would be a
next EU accession state and the other three countries are the Swiss Confederation,
Norway and Republic of Iceland. Now the 29 countries in Europe have had the common
standards of European Standards or they have reflected European Standards on their
domestic standards. For example, Republic of Poland is one of new members of EU in
2004. The Polish committee for standardization was established in 1923. Although the
committee has a long history on standardization, almost of work items by them was
transposition of European standards before their accession to EU. The numbers of
transposition of European standards to the total number of work items were 7816 to 8679
in 2002 and 4679 to 5196 in 2003 before accession to EU. On the other hand, Republic of
Cyprus is also a new member of EU in 2004 but the Cyprus Organization for Promotion
of Quality was just established in 2002. It seems CEN’s strategy that many countries have
common standards. It means that the European Standards can become International
Standards easily with support of many countries.
Now we focus our attention to European standards on wood windows from viewpoint
of energy saving. They published of standard of EN ISO 12567-1 whose title is “Thermal
performance of windows and doors – Determination of thermal transmittance by hot box
method – Part 1: Complete windows and doors” in 2000 [5]. They also published the
similar standard only for frame as EN 12412-2 in 2003 [6]. Consequently, the standards
of timber and wood-based materials for windows as EN 14220 and 14221 were published
in 2004 [7, 8]. Such trend of European Standards suggests that they recognize wood
frame for windows as prospective one for energy saving. We should realize that these
standards were published in schedule to meet the commitment period of Kyoto Protocol
by CEN in spite of the uncertain effect of Kyoto Protocol. It seems that Europe uses
standardization effectively and aggressively for promotion of sustainable development.

2.3. Standardization of Wood Windows in Japan

Standardization of wood windows in Japan is very late in comparison with Europe. Only
EN ISO 12567-1 among the mentioned standards was reflected on Japanese Industrial
Standard of A4710 [9] in 2004, because the European Standard was also the International
Standard. We think that the European Standards on wood-based materials for windows as
EN 14220 and EN 14221 would be International Standards and then they would be
reflected on JIS. We review those European Standards on wood-based materials for
windows to find out problems which don’t fit Japanese actual condition. There are two
problems; (1) maximum moisture content is not greater than 18% for all elements and (2)
minimum density of softwood and hardwood are 350kg/m3 and 450kg/m3, respectively.
Generally, maximum moisture content of wood products is conditioned at 15% in Japan.
The difference of maximum moisture content of wood between Japan and Europe is
98

caused by the difference of climate. Almost Japanese artificial forests consist of soft
woods of Japanese cedar and Japanese cypress. Some of those Japanese soft woods do not
clear the condition that the minimum density is 350kg/m3 in European Standards.
Our research group determined our orientation for standardization of wood windows
with considering such problems found out in European Standards and the background that
wood has replaced with alminium because of easy maintainability. We will do weathering
test mainly, because the weather is very different not only between Europe and Japan but
also between Pacific side and the Japan Sea side in Japan. We selected 7 locations for
natural weathering test. Five kinds of wood will be tested; paulownia, Japanese cedar,
Japanese cypress, Scots pine and white oak. The former three woods are peculiar ones in
Japan or East Asia. We hope that those woods in Japan could be used as materials of
wood windows. Eight kinds of paints will be tested. Accelerated weathering test will be
executed for these samples. We will find out most appropriate paints that assure
maintenance free for certain fixed period. These data can help us to represent Japanese
condition when the International Standard of wood window will be made.

3 Development of Fire-Proof Wood

3.1. Revision of Building Standard Law

Land, Infrastructure and Transportation Ministry in Japan revised the Building Standard law
on fire-proof materials for structural parts of buildings in 1998. The specification of fire-
proof materials had been regulated until then; glasses and bricks could be used but wood
could not. The new Building Standard law allows any materials with the performance stated
in the law. The tests for fire-proof materials contain fire tests and hazard tests of combustion
gasses. The required performance in fire tests is classified into three categories as shown in
Table 1.
Table 1. Category of fire-proof materials and required performance in fire tests.

Category Required time [min] Performance

Class 1 20 1. Total heat released during the entire test is lower than 8
MJ/m2 for the required time.
2. There are no hazardous clacks or holes which penetrate into
Class 2 10
the reverse side.
3. Maximum value of the heat release rate per area is lower
Class 3 5 than 200kW/m2 for 10 and more consecutive seconds.

3.2. Production of Sample of Fire-proof Plywood

We tried to make fire-proof plywood. At first we impregnate incombustible chemicals
into 3mm thickness veneer of Japanese cedar. The chemicals are borax compounds,
which are developed and provided by Kohmix, Inc. Figure 3 shows the apparatus. There
 99

is a tank filled with incombustible chemicals in a sealed chamber. Some veneers are
immersed into the tank. The pressure in the sealed chamber is controlled according to the
procedure shown in Figure 4. Finally the veneers are took out from the chamber and
dried.

Figure 3. Schematic diagram of impregnating apparatus.

Figure 4. Schematic procedure of impregnating.

Five dried veneers are glued with incombustible adhesive, which is also developed
and provided by Kohmix, Inc. It is pressed at room temperature with 0.7MPa for 20
minutes and then at 130 oC for 10 minutes. Finally we obtain 15mm thickness five-
plywood as shown in Figure 5. The plywood is cut into 100mm x 100mm for the fire test
by cone calorimeter.
100

Figure 5. Fire-proof plywood.

Figure 6. Apparatus of cone calorimeter for fire test.

3.3. Fire Test

Fire test is executed for samples and natural woods with cone calorimeter whose test
method is defined in ISO 5660-1 [10]. Figure 6 shows the apparatus of cone calorimeter.
 101

The sample is heated by cone shape heater. The combustion gas is leaded to hood. Soot,
moisture and carbon dioxide are removed from the gas. The remaining oxygen is analyzed.
The heat release rate and total heat release are obtained according to the theories by
Thomton [11], Hugget [12] and Parker [13]. We can also obtain mass and smoke
temperature. Figure 7 shows an example data obtained by this apparatus for natural
Japanese cypress.

Figure 7. Example of obtained information from cone calorimeter.

3.4. Result and Discussion of Fire Test

Figures 8 show results of fire of (a) heat release rate and (b) total heat release for 4
natural woods; maple, Douglas fir, Japanese cedar and Japanese cypress. Only maple is a
hard wood and the others are soft woods. The heat release rate just after ignition is very
large for these natural woods. Then the heat release rate decreases and is stable for a
while. Finally it increases. In the case of Japanese cypress, the heat release rate increases
on the way because fire goes around to the back of the sample. Total heat releases of three
soft woods are almost same for about 6 minutes after ignition. Figures 8 show the
difference between soft wood and hard wood. The heat release rate and total heat release
of hard wood are much larger than soft wood. Generally, the density of hard wood is
larger than soft wood. The large mass per unit area exposed to fire of hard wood seems to
be the cause of the differences. This result shows that the maximum heat release rates of
these natural woods are not larger than 200kW/m2. We are afraid that natural woods cannot
clear the condition needed for the maximum heat release in other test samples, because this
maximum heat releases close in the 200kW/m2 just after the ignition. The horizontal gray
solid line shows the total heat release of 8 MJ/m2 in Figure 8 (b). The total heat releases of
these four natural woods exceed the line of 8 MJ/m2 until two minutes after ignition. This
result means that natural woods without incombustible chemicals cannot clear the
condition needed even as class 3 level fire-proof materials.
102

(a) Heat release rate

(b) Total heat release

Figure 8. Fire test for untreated natural woods.

Figure 9 shows the result of fire test for developed fire-proof plywood. The heat
release rate just after ignition is different from ones for natural woods and it is very small.
The developed fire-proof plywood clears the condition required class 1 fire-proof
materials on the heat release rate. The total heat release is smaller than 8 MJ/m2 for 20
minutes after ignition. Figures 10 show samples after heat test for 20 minutes. The
developed plywood looks to have no hazardous clacks or holes different from untreated
wood. The developed plywood with incombustible chemicals satisfies the conditions of
class 1 fire-proof materials defined in Table 1.
 103

Figure 9. Result of fire test for developed incombustible plywood.

(a) Untreated wood (b) Fire-proof plywood

Figure 10. Samples after heat test for 20minutes by cone calorimeter.

4 Conclusion
Standardization by Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) and development of fire-proof
wood are discussed as strategies to popularize wood windows. The trend of
standardization on wood windows in Europe is searched. The standards of wood windows
in Europe seem to have been prepared with schedule for the commitment period of the
Kyoto Protocol aggressively and strategically for sustainable development. Detail
research of European Standards on wood windows reminds us the difference of climate
and wood used for windows between Japan and Europe. According to the information, the
research for standardization of wood windows in Japan has just started since 2004 with
weather test.
104

Fire-proof five-plywood made of Japanese cedar, whose each veneer is impregnated

with incombustible chemicals, is developed. Fire test is made by cone calorimeter for four
natural woods and the developed plywood. Although the natural woods cannot clear the
conditions, the developed plywood clears following conditions by Building Standards
laws for 20 minutes; (1) Total heat released during the entire test is lower than 8 MJ/m2 for
the required time. (2) There are no hazardous clacks or holes which penetrate into the
reverse side. (3) Maximum value of the heat release rate per area is lower than 200kW/m2
for 10 and more consecutive seconds. The developed plywood can be certificated as Class 1
fire-proof materials by Building Standards laws.

Acknowledgments
We would like to acknowledge the provision of incombustible chemicals and adhesive by
Kohmix, Inc. to develop fire-proof plywood.

References

1. The GHGs Emissions Data of Japan from Home page of Greenhouse Gas Inventory
Office of Japan, http://www-gio.nies.go.jp/aboutghg/nir/nir-e.html.
2. Window materials in the world, http://www.osaco.com/mado/mado2.htm (in
Japanese).
3. Japan Standards Association, Windows, JIS A 4706, 2000.
4. British Standard, Timber windows – Factory assembled windows of various types –
Specification, BS644, 2003.
5. British Standard, Thermal performance of windows and doors – Determination of
thermal transmittance by hot box method – Part 1: Complete windows and doors, BS
EN ISO 12567-1, 2000.
6. British Standard, Thermal performance of windows and doors – Determination of
thermal transmittance by hot box method – Part 2: Frames, BS EN 12412-2, 2003.
7. European Standard, Timber and wood-based materials in external windows, external
door leaves and external doorframes – Requirements and specifications, EN 14220,
2004.
8. European Standard, Timber and wood-based materials in internal windows, door
leaves and internal doorframes – Requirements and specifications, EN 14221, 2004.
9. Japan Standards Association, Windows and door sets – Thermal resistance test, JIS A
4710, 2004.
10. International Standard, Fire tests – Reaction to fire – Part 1: Rate of heat release from
building products (Cone calorimeter method), ISO 5660-1, 1993.
11. W. Thomton, The relation of oxygen to the heat of combustion of organic
compounds, Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science, Vol. 33, No. 196, 1917.
12. C. Hugget, Estimation of the rate of heat release by means of oxygen consumption,
Journal of Fire and Flammability, Vol. 12, 1980.
13. W.J. Parker, Calculation of the heat release rate by oxygen consumption for various
applications, Journal of Fire Science, Vol.2, 380-395, 1984.
 TOWARDS A SUSTAINABLE TRANSPORTATION
ENERGY SUPPLY

ROBERT L. EVANS
Clean Energy Research Centre, University of British Columbia
Vancouver, Canada

Global warming has been identified as one of the most important problems facing mankind in the
21st century. Currently, some 6 gigatonnes of CO2 are emitted each year as a result of the
combustion of fossil fuels, and a large fraction of these emissions originate from the transportation
sector. By examining the complete energy conversion chain, the choice of primary energy source
for any particular application becomes easier to understand. A discussion of alternatives to the
internal combustion engine as the sole power source for vehicular propulsion is presented, and some
form of hybrid electric vehicle propulsion system is identified as being a likely choice to reduce
fossil fuel consumption, and therefore CO2 emissions from the transportation sector. The
demonstrated market success of grid-independent hybrid vehicles may, however, be followed by a
new generation of “plug-in hybrid” vehicles in which it is possible to travel for up to 100 km in an
all-electric mode, while maintaining the option of using an internal combustion engine when greater
range between charging cycles is required. A review of several different design concepts for the
plug-in hybrid vehicle is presented, and the way in which these vehicles can be used in conjunction
with a sustainable primary energy supply is described.

1 Introduction
The provision of clean, and sustainable, energy supplies to satisfy our ever-growing needs
is one of the most critical challenges facing mankind at the beginning of the 21st century.
The problem is made even more acute by the huge and rapidly growing appetite for
energy in the developing world, many of which are experiencing extremely high
economic growth rates, leading to equally high demands for new energy supplies. The
growing global demand for energy in all of its forms is naturally putting pressure on the
declining supplies of traditional fossil fuels, particularly crude oil and natural gas.
However, in recent years no major new production fields have been found, and the
exploration effort and cost required to maintain these ratios has been significantly
increased. Ultimately, of course, supplies of oil and natural gas will be depleted to such
an extent, or the cost of production will become so high, that alternative energy sources
will need to be developed. Global climate change, in particular the prospect for global
warming, has put the spotlight on our large appetite for fossil fuels. Although there is
considerable debate on the extent of the problem, there is little doubt that the atmospheric
concentration of CO2, one of the key “greenhouse gases”, is increasing quite rapidly, and
that this is likely due to mankind’s activities on earth, or “anthropogenic” causes. The
utilization of any fossil fuel results in the production of large quantities of CO2, and most
scientific evidence points to this as the main cause of increasing concentration levels in
the atmosphere. We must, therefore, develop new long-term methods of strategic thinking

105
106

and planning, and make sure that some of the best minds, with a wide-range of skills and
abilities, are given the tools to do the job. This paper summarizes the current “state of the
art” in balancing energy demand and supply, and tries to provide some insight into just a
few of the many possible scenarios to build a truly sustainable, long-term, energy future.

2 The Energy Conversion Chain

Every time we use energy, whether it’s to heat our home, or fuel our car, we are
converting one form of energy into another form, or into useful work. When we drive a
car we are using the engine to convert the chemical energy in the gasoline into mechanical
work to power the wheels. This is just one example of the “Energy Conversion Chain”
which is always at work when we use energy. In each case we can trace a source of
“primary energy” through several conversion steps into the final end-use form, such as
thermal energy for space heating or mechanical work to power a motor vehicle.
Unfortunately, many proposals to change the ways in which we supply and use energy
take only a partial view of the energy conversion chain, and do not consider the effects, or
the costs, that the proposed changes would have on the complete energy supply system. A
schematic of a generic “energy conversion chain” is shown in Figure 1. We can see that
this chain starts with just three possible “primary” energy sources, and ends with a very
few end-use applications. It can be clearly seen that hydrogen, which is sometimes
promoted as a fuel of the future through the so-called “hydrogen economy”, is not an
energy source at all, but only a potential “energy carrier”. In some cases, not all steps in
the chain are required, but energy end-use can always be traced back to a primary energy
source. For example, in most cases when electricity is the energy carrier it is used
immediately upon production, due at least in part to the difficulty of storing electricity.
An important feature illustrated in Figure 1 is the release of emissions, both in the
initial processing step and in the final end-use conversion step. Using a conventional
motor vehicle as an example, these are primarily carbon dioxide, CO2, carbon monoxide,
CO, unburned hydrocarbon gases, HC’s, and nitrogen oxides NOx. Some of these are
released in the refining process, but most of them are released during the final conversion
from chemical energy to useful work in the vehicle’s engine. This emission of pollutants
from both the primary energy processing step, and the end-use step, provides an
extremely important link between energy use and the environment. The reaction of
unburned hydrocarbons and NOx, in the presence of sunlight, for example, is responsible
for smog formation, which has become a major problem in urban centres. This has been
alleviated somewhat in the developed world by the introduction of stringent regulations to
limit emissions from vehicles and power stations, but will continue to be a very serious
problem with the growth in vehicle ownership, particularly in large developing
economies. The transportation sector continues, however, to be a major source of
greenhouse gas emissions, and the search for a viable source of non-fossil fuel energy for
the transportation sector is one of the most important scientific and engineering
challenges of the 21st century.
 107

Figure 1. The Energy Conversion Chain

3 Non-Fossil Fuel Energy for Transportation Applications

Liquid petroleum fuels are ideally suited to transportation applications because of their
inherently high energy density, and the ease of transportation and storage of these fuels.
The internal combustion engine has reached a high level of development, and this is now
almost universally used as the power source for all road vehicles. The concern with using
petroleum fuels, of course, is that they are derived from crude oil, a non-renewable
resource which will eventually be in very short supply. Also, the combustion process
produces emissions of nitrogen oxides, carbon monoxide, and unburned hydrocarbons, as
well as large quantities of CO2, the principal greenhouse gas. One way to reduce the
dependence of the transportation sector on petroleum based fuels is to switch from the use
of internal combustion engines fuelled by petroleum to a completely different form of
energy carrier. This has been done successfully for rail transportation by using electric
locomotives on lines with heavy traffic volumes which have been “electrified”. This is
possible for rail transportation since electrical power can be provided continuously to the
locomotive through overhead electrical cables, or through a “third-rail” placed adjacent to
the tracks. Although this provides a very clean source of energy at the point of end-use, if
the electricity is generated primarily from fossil fuels, then there may be no net reduction
of greenhouse gas emissions as a result of railway electrification. If, in the long term, the
electricity “carrier” is generated primarily from non-fossil fuel sources, such as renewable
energy or nuclear power, then there will be a direct benefit through the elimination of
greenhouse gas production from the railways. For road vehicles, however, it is not
108

practical to provide electrical power continuously to cars or trucks, and purely electric
vehicles must rely on energy stored in an on-board battery. Although electric cars were
common during the very early development of motor vehicles, the low energy capacity of
batteries made them uncompetitive with vehicles powered by internal combustion
engines, and they disappeared from the marketplace.
Proponents of the “hydrogen economy” claim that the use of hydrogen as a
transportation fuel would eliminate the production of any harmful exhaust emissions from
vehicles on the road. This is, of course, true for the vehicle itself, but as we have seen in
our discussion of the complete energy conversion chain, it only represents one part of the
complete energy use picture. Hydrogen would just be an energy carrier, like gasoline or
electricity is today, and it would need to be “manufactured” from one of the three primary
energy sources. If this primary source were to be a hydrocarbon fuel, such as natural gas
or coal, all of the carbon in the primary energy source would still end up as CO2 at the
point of hydrogen production. If, on the other hand, the hydrogen produced from a more
sustainable primary energy source, such as renewable energy or nuclear power, then there
would indeed be no production of greenhouse gases anywhere in the energy conversion
chain. The energy conversion chain for using hydrogen in this manner is illustrated by the
schematic diagram in Figure 2. This shows the primary energy source being some form of
renewable energy, represented by photovoltaic solar cells generating electricity in the
figure, but this could be wind-power, or any other source of renewable energy or nuclear
power. Following along the energy conversion chain, the electricity would then be used to
produce hydrogen by electrolysis of water, and the hydrogen would then be compressed,
or converted into liquid form, for storage on board the vehicle. The vehicle would utilize
all-electric drive, and a fuel cell would be used to generate electricity on-demand from the
hydrogen, which would then be supplied to an electric motor providing the mechanical
power to drive the vehicle.

Figure 2. Energy Conversion Chain for a Fuel Cell Vehicle

We can see from Figure 2, however, that the fuel cell is just one major component of
the hydrogen fuel-cell powered automobile. A very critical component of the vehicle
propulsion system is the fuel storage system on board the vehicle. For a conventional
motor vehicle, utilizing an internal combustion engine, this is the simple fuel tank, which
 109

stores either gasoline or diesel fuel, both of which conveniently exist as liquid fuels at
normal ambient temperature and pressure conditions. At these same ambient temperature
and pressure conditions, however, hydrogen is a gas, and this gas has a very low energy
density, i.e. one cubic metre of hydrogen gas has a much lower energy content than one
cubic metre of liquid fuel. In order to carry a significant quantity of energy on-board the
vehicle in the form of hydrogen, therefore, it would need to be highly compressed, or
perhaps even liquefied and stored in a “cryogenic” fuel tank at a temperature of around -
250ºC. In order to store enough hydrogen energy to provide a reasonable driving range,
engineers have proposed using compressed hydrogen at a pressure of 350 bar (5,000 psi),
or even 700 bar (10,000 psi). These very high pressures require heavy gas storage
cylinders, which would add considerable weight and volume to the vehicle compared to
the usual sheet metal container used for liquid fuels. In fact, the storage of hydrogen on
board vehicles is one of the most difficult challenges facing the successful
commercialization of hydrogen fuelled vehicles. There is also a substantial loss of
available energy from both the electrolysis process and the compression of hydrogen for
high-pressure storage.
One of the advantages claimed for fuel cell vehicles is the much higher energy
conversion efficiency of fuel cells, compared to internal combustion engines. The
efficiency of a fuel cell, at around 50%, is certainly much higher than can be expected for
the typical internal combustion engine used in motor vehicles. However, if the hydrogen
used as the energy carrier on board the vehicle were to be derived from fossil fuels, as it
will almost certainly be in any early stage of commercialization of such vehicles, then the
overall “well-to-wheels” efficiency is unlikely to be significantly higher than that of the
best available technology using a conventional internal combustion engine. This is the
conclusion found in comparative studies of vehicle powertrain efficiency by both the
Argonne National Laboratory of the U.S. Department of Energy [1], and by researchers at
the Massachusetts Institute of Technology [2]. For both of these studies the hydrogen was
assumed to be obtained from a refuelling station by reforming natural gas, which would
be the most likely source of primary energy, at least in the early phase of fuel cell
commercialization. For each vehicle the efficiency of converting the primary energy,
either crude oil or natural gas, into the on-board fuel, or the “well-to-tank efficiency”, is
just under 80% for gasoline, and just over that value for diesel fuel, while for obtaining
hydrogen from natural gas the efficiency is approximately 56%. The overall “well-to-
wheels efficiency” is then found by multiplying this efficiency by the end-use conversion
efficiency (or “tank to wheels” efficiency) of either the engine or fuel cell. The study
results show that the overall “well-to-wheels” efficiency for the complete energy
conversion chain is just about the same for the best internal combustion engine and hybrid
electric vehicle (HEV) configuration and for a simple hydrogen fuel-cell vehicle, starting
form the same primary energy source. For the case of a hydrogen fuel cell in a hybrid
electric vehicle configuration it is just slightly greater at 29% than the diesel powered
HEV at 26%. Also, if the primary energy source was a fossil fuel for both configurations,
as assumed in the study, the result would be almost identical levels of CO2 emissions. It
110

seems unlikely, therefore, that this small gain in overall vehicle efficiency would be
sufficient to overcome the much higher cost and complexity of the hydrogen storage
system and the fuel cell itself. Advocates of fuel cell vehicles, however, contend that in
the long term hydrogen will be produced from some form of renewable energy, as
illustrated in Figure 2, or perhaps from nuclear power, which would then result in no
emissions of CO2 for the complete energy conversion chain.
If we examine the case in which hydrogen is generated from a sustainable primary
resource, as illustrated in Figure 2, then the first step in the energy conversion chain is the
generation of electricity as an initial energy carrier. This carrier is then converted into
hydrogen as a secondary carrier, and this is stored on-board the vehicle. The final step in
the chain is then the conversion of the stored hydrogen back into electricity by the fuel-
cell, and this is then used to power the electric propulsion motor. A parallel situation is
used in a simple battery electric vehicle, in which a battery is used on-board the vehicle to
store the electricity, as shown by the simple energy conversion chain schematic in Figure
3. In this case there is no need to convert the electricity into a secondary carrier, since the
electricity generated as the primary carried is stored directly by the battery, and is then
used when needed to supply the electric propulsion motor. The only difference between
the scenarios depicted in Figure 2 for the fuel-cell vehicle, and in Figure 3 for the battery
electric vehicle, is that in the first case energy is stored in the form of hydrogen, and in the
second case in the form of electrical energy in the battery.

Figure 3. Energy Conversion Chain for a Battery Electric Vehicle

The difference in these two approaches can then be summarized graphically as

illustrated in Figure 4. This shows the two different approaches, starting from the point at
which the primary energy source produces electricity, and ending where electricity is
again used to power the vehicle’s electric motor. In other words, all of the equipment
illustrated by the conversion chain in the top half of the figure, consisting of hydrogen
production by electrolysis, compression, storage in high-pressure cylinders, and finally
conversion back into electricity by a fuel cell, is directly analogous to the electrical
battery in the lower half of the figure. By making a simple comparison it can be clearly
 111

seen that all of the equipment required for the fuel cell vehicle, including hydrogen
production and storage and the fuel cell, is really just an electrical energy storage device.
The only advantage of this approach over that of using a simple electrical storage battery,
therefore, is the hope that the energy storage capacity on-board the vehicle may be
greater, or more compact, by using the fuel-cell vehicle route.

Figure 4. Alternative Electrical Energy Storage Concepts

If electrical batteries were able to store sufficient energy to provide a range of up to

100 miles, then relatively simple battery electric vehicles, which would normally be re-
charged overnight, or when not in use for several hours, would likely be attractive to most
consumers. Such vehicles would be much less complex and likely much cheaper to
produce than the comparable fuel cell vehicles together with the necessary hydrogen
production and storage systems. Although hydrogen has a very high specific energy in
terms of energy stored per kilogram, because it is a gas it has a very poor energy density,
or energy per unit volume, even when stored at high pressure. This means that very large
(and therefore heavy) compressed gas cylinders must be used to store a significant
quantity of energy. Batteries are not yet able to compete with liquid fuels in terms of
either energy density or specific energy, and pure battery electric vehicles will likely be
suitable only in specialized short range applications for the near-term future. There
continues to be development work on batteries, however, and this has been driven
primarily by the successful introduction in the last few years of hybrid electric vehicles
(or HEV’s). These use a propulsion system consisting of a conventional internal
combustion engine, acting as the “prime mover”, in parallel with an electric motor and
storage battery. All of the energy to drive the vehicle still comes from the liquid fuel
(gasoline or diesel fuel) used by the internal combustion engine, but the engine is used to
either charge the battery via a generator, or to drive the wheels directly as in a
112

conventional vehicle, or in some combination of both of these approaches. During low-

speed operation, and particularly in stop-and-go driving in urban centres, the engine is
shut down, and all propulsion is provided by the electric motor being fed from the battery.
As the battery becomes discharged the engine is automatically started and again begins to
charge the battery, and may also provide some mechanical propulsion directly to the
wheels through a gearbox. One major benefit of this powertrain design is that the engine
can now operate at its most efficient design condition, independently of vehicle speed or
load, thus greatly increasing the overall fuel efficiency. Another significant feature of
hybrid vehicles is the use of “regenerative braking”, which utilizes the generator to absorb
much of the braking energy normally dissipated in the form of heat by the bakes, and then
uses this energy to re-charge the battery. As a result of these design features a hybrid
vehicle normally has better fuel mileage during city driving than on the highway, making
them particularly well suited to urban commuting. These two features have been
developed and refined by automotive engineers so that the hybrid vehicle has a fuel
efficiency about 50% greater than that of a conventional vehicle powered by an internal
combustion engine alone.
The current design of hybrid vehicles may be classed as “stand-alone”, or “grid-
independent” hybrids, because although they incorporate an electrical powertrain, and
storage battery, they obtain all of their primary energy from the fuel carried on-board the
vehicle, and do not need to be plugged in to the electrical grid to re-charge the battery.
However, with the expected advances in battery energy density, and the desire to
minimize the use of fossil fuels in vehicles, they may very well be the precursor to a
transition to the next generation of hybrid vehicles; the so-called “plug-in” hybrids,
sometimes also referred to as “grid-connected hybrids”. A simple schematic of this
concept, which incorporates the advantages of both battery electric vehicles and hybrid
vehicles, is shown in Figure 5. In this concept, the battery pack in an otherwise
conventional hybrid vehicle would be much larger, and could be fully charged when not
in use by being plugged into the electrical grid. The vehicle could operate for a
significant range, perhaps somewhere between 20 and 60 miles, as a completely electric
vehicle, but would still have a small engine to re-charge the battery only when necessary
to exceed this distance or perhaps when climbing very steep hills. For many drivers, and
certainly for most commuters, the vehicle would then be capable of operating as a pure
battery electric vehicle for most trips, and would be plugged in overnight and perhaps also
when not in use during the working day. The successful development and introduction
into the marketplace of the “plug-in” hybrid vehicle would mark the beginning of a
significant new transportation paradigm, that of disconnecting road vehicles from the
need to use petroleum fuels, at least for the majority of miles travelled. In considering the
complete energy conversion chain for this option, if electricity were to be generated
primarily by sustainable primary energy sources, such as renewable energy or nuclear
power, then road transportation would also become much more sustainable and would no
longer be a significant factor in contributing to greenhouse gas production.
 113

Figure 5. The “Plug-in Hybrid” Electric Vehicle

The Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) in the U.S. has recently published the
results of a study [3] comparing the performance of plug-in hybrid electric vehicles to a
stand-alone hybrid vehicle, (or “HEV 0”) and a conventional vehicle powered by a
gasoline engine. Two plug-in hybrid vehicle designs were considered, one with an all-
electric range of 20 miles (HEV 20) and one with an all-electric range of 60 miles (HEV
60). All of the HEV’s were assumed to use state-of-the-art nickel-metal hydride (NiMH)
batteries and regenerative braking, and to have similar performance, including a minimum
top speed of 90 mph and a 0-60 mph acceleration time of less than 9.5 seconds. All
vehicles were assumed to have sufficient gasoline storage to provide a range of 350 miles.
The power split between engine and electric motor is approximately equal for the HEV 0
and the HEV 20, while for the HEV 60 the electric motor has about twice the power of
the gasoline. In considering the overall energy consumption of all of the vehicles the
study took a “well-to-wheels” approach, and included the energy obtained from the
gasoline on-board the vehicle and the energy required to process the crude oil to produce
the gasoline, as well as the electrical energy required to re-charge the batteries for both of
the plug-in hybrid vehicles, the HEV 20 and the HEV 60. For the battery re-charging part
of the process, the study assumed that electricity would be generated from natural gas
using a combined cycle power plant, with an overall thermal efficiency of approximately
50%. Many different performance parameters were calculated during the simulation over
a standard driving cycle, but the main results of the study were that the complete “well to
wheels” CO2 emissions for the HEV 20 and the HEV 60 were approximately one-half,
and one-third, respectively, of that for the conventional vehicle. If, on the other hand, the
electricity supply was assumed to be from a sustainable source, with no CO2 emissions,
then the total well-to-wheels CO2 emissions over the driving cycle, compared to those of a
conventional vehicle, would be reduced by two-thirds for the HEV 20, and by some 87%
for the HEV 60 vehicle.

4 Conclusion
The need to move from the use of fossil fuels for nearly all transportation applications to
a more sustainable energy source will be one of the most important challenges facing
114

engineers in the 21st century. When the complete energy conversion chain for motor
vehicle transportation is examined, the use of hydrogen as a carrier does not appear to be
particularly attractive. If hydrogen is obtained from fossil fuels, such as crude oil or
natural gas, then all of the carbon in the primary source will still end up as CO2 in the
initial energy conversion stage, although there will be no emissions from the vehicle.
Only if the hydrogen is made by electrolysis using electricity from sustainable primary
resources, such as renewable energy or nuclear power, will there no production of
greenhouse gases. This scenario implies, however, that electricity will be used first to
produce a secondary carrier, hydrogen, and then this carrier will be returned to electricity
on-board the vehicle, using a fuel cell. In this case the complete on-board energy storage
and end-use conversion system simply acts like a battery, with electricity both coming in
and going out. A more attractive scenario appears to be development of the “plug-in”, or
“grid-connected” hybrid electric vehicle, which uses electricity from the grid to charge a
battery rather than to generate hydrogen, but maintains a small fossil-fuelled engine as a
“back-up” device. Recent studies have shown that using this approach for vehicle
propulsion, in which the battery would provide an “electric-only” range of some 60 miles
(100 km), would result in a reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by up to 87%
compared to those from a conventional fossil-fuelled vehicle.

References

1. Rousseau, A., et al., Well-to-Wheels Analysis of Advanced SUV Fuel Cell Vehicles,
SAE paper 2003-01-0415, 2003.
2. Weiss, M.A., et al., Comparative Assessment of Fuel Cell Cars, MIT LFEE Report
2003-001 RP, 2003.
3. Graham, R., et al., Comparing the Benefits and Impacts of Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Options, EPRI Report 1000349, 2001.
 URBAN WINDFARMS AND THE PURSUIT OF
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

CAROLINE GALLAGHER
Glasgow Caledonian University, Cowcaddens Road
Glasgow, G4 0BA, United Kingdom

GHOLAM JAMNEJAD
Glasgow Caledonian University, Cowcaddens Road
Glasgow, G4 0BA, United Kingdom

Sustainable Development, a buzzword of the late 20th century, needs to become a reality of the 21st
century. This poses challenges for the whole world – from government organisations to individual
citizens, we all have a part to play. To ensure that this concept becomes a reality, it requires changes
– change in government policies, change in public attitudes and change in the globalisation of the
economy. One such area that requires substantial change is that of the global energy production and
consumption. Past policies have placed a heavy reliance on the use of fossil fuels, which has proved
to be both unsustainable and environmentally polluting. Nuclear power, once thought to be a
suitable alternative to fossil fuels, brings its own unwanted legacy. The risks associated with
accidents and the problems of safe disposal of nuclear waste continue to cause problems and pose
uncertainty for future generations. This paper investigates the potential role that urban windfarms
can have in bringing about changes. The progress of the first community owned urban windfarm in
Britain is assessed. It will investigate the general publics’ attitude to such a project, in comparison
to attitudes prevalent towards rural windfarm settings. The analysis of collated data indicates that
urban windfarms may have a large part to play in the pursuing the goal of sustainable development.
Not only in terms of reducing greenhouse emissions, but they can also subscribe to the three
pillars of sustainable development: namely social empowerment, economic improvement and
environmental enhancement.

1 Introduction
In 2001 Kofi Annan announced that “Our biggest challenge in this century is to take an
idea that seems abstract – sustainable development – and turn it into a reality for all the
world’s people.” (1)Thus to make this concept a reality for all the world’s people requires
change – change in global strategies, change in government policies and change in
citizens’ attitudes. This poses difficult challenges as the needs for developing and
developed countries are very different, yet both need to be met in a sustainable way. It
also requires a shift in global governance to become more inclusive and make the actions
and wishes of individuals matter ensuring that they have a greater influence in the
decision making processes. Figure 1 illustrates traditional governance in comparison to
sustainable governance.
Until developing countries have access to a clean and safe water supply and that
poverty is greatly alleviated it is morally unfair to impose pollution and resource
restrictions on them. The developed world therefore has a responsibility to these counties

115
116

to curb their own emissions and resource use and promote good practice that can be
universally adopted. This is of particular importance in relation to the global energy
market and the adoption of renewable forms of energy.

Global Strategy Global Strategy

Government Policy

Individual Actions Individual Governm

Actions ent Policy

Non Sustainable Governance Sustainable Governance

Figure 1. Non sustainable versus sustainable governance in the 21st Century.

2 Global Energy Supply

About 80% of the global energy needs is currently met by fossil fuels (oil: 35%, coal:
23% and natural gas: 21%). Of the remainder, only 5% come form modern renewable
sources including hydro and wind power [2]. To become sustainable these proportions
need to change drastically. The supply of fossil fuels is not only dwindling, but they also
contribute to greenhouse gases and in particular CO2, the main gas attributed to climate
change. The uptake of renewable resources needs to be promoted on an international,
national and local scale.

2.1. Global Initiative

Global summits such as Rio in 1992 and Johannesburg in 2002 have all highlighted the
need for a global strategy and communication to ensure that sustainable development
becomes a reality. Despite this it is glaringly obvious that the absence of a mandatory
framework hampers the best intentions of many countries. The Kyoto Protocol and the
subsequent delay in its ratification, coupled with the obvious absentees have highlighted
the main problem associated with voluntary compliance. Sustainability will only be
achieved when global compliance is achieved and, until the needs of developing countries
are satisfied increased co-operation between developed countries is vital to success.
 117

Despite this drawback, many countries have set admiral targets for the reduction of
greenhouse gases, with Britain, and in particular Scotland setting themselves impressive
targets both for the reduction of CO2 and in relation to increased use of renewable
technologies to supply their energy requirements.

2.2. British Targets

Britain has set a number of targets for the reduction of CO2, with each country setting
their own goals. The Scottish Executive has set two main targets for renewable energy
generation. By 2010, 18% of electricity generation should come from renewables, with
this figure rising to 40% by 2040. At the moment, 11% of electricity generated comes
from large hydro projects, and it is estimated that the 7% necessary to reach the 18%
target by 2010 will come from wind projects [3]. Although the majority of these will be
large wind farms, it should not be underestimated that small scale projects and stand alone
sites can play a very significant part in this process.

3 Wind Power
The UK has the largest potential wind energy source in Europe, with a share of 40% of
the total. Despite this, the UK is almost bottom of Europe’s wind power league, both in
terms of manufacture and installation. In 2004 there were 1,043 onshore wind turbines,
covering 84 sites, supplying 0.5% of our energy needs for Britain. This needs to expand
rapidly if the goal of a sustainable energy supply is to be achieved, with a target of
1689.7MW set for the end of 2005 (accounting for 1.3% of supply: equivalent to ~ 1
million people) [4].
Scotland has the greater potential to expand both in terms of the actual siting and set
up of projects as well as in terms of research and development.
Denmark is home to the largest wind power industry in the world, and houses the
biggest wind turbine manufacturer, Vestas. The industry is a huge one, providing
employment for over 10,000 people. In 2000, 10% of the country’s energy requirements
came from wind, with targets for 2025 to increase this amount to over 50%.
Germany has the largest number of wind turbines in Europe and is Denmark’s biggest
importer of turbines (India is second). The wind industry in Germany provides about
45,000 jobs directly and indirectly and supplies the country with ~6% of its energy needs
(14,609MW) [5].
Figure 2 shows the wind turbine distribution in Europe.
The majority of windfarms found both on the continent and further a field are located
in rural environments. Due to the fact that these areas are associated with peace and
tranquillity there are frequent and often very vocal dissent in relation to any further
development plans in a particular area. There is little research carried out relating to
urban windfarm settings, mainly due to the fact that there are very few existing examples.
However the premise is that the principal objections relating to rural windfarms, namely
visual intrusion, effects on the landscape noise will not be applicable to a similar project
118

in an urban setting. This is mainly attributed to that fact that a feature of urban
environments is their ability to absorb and cope with change, especially in relation to
additions to the existing landscape.
A unique and innovation project is currently underway in Glasgow to investigate such
a project.

Figure 2. European wind turbine and energy supply in 2003 [5].

The majority of windfarms found both on the continent and further a field are located
in rural environments. Due to the fact that these areas are associated with peace and
tranquillity there are frequent and often very vocal dissent in relation to any further
development plans in a particular area. There is little research carried out relating to
urban windfarm settings, mainly due to the fact that there are very few existing examples.
However the premise is that the principal objections relating to rural windfarms, namely
visual intrusion, effects on the landscape noise will not be applicable to a similar project
in an urban setting. This is mainly attributed to that fact that a feature of urban
environments is their ability to absorb and cope with change, especially in relation to
additions to the existing landscape.
A unique and innovation project is currently underway in Glasgow to investigate such
a project.
 119

4 Initial Project
In 2001 a project was proposed to investigate the feasibility of an urban wind farm in the
Castlemilk area in Glasgow [6]. The aim of the project was to explore the concept of an
urban wind farm that would be owned and run by the local people. It was proposed that
the project would serve a dual purpose; that of regeneration of a socially disadvantaged
area, and provide an educational centre promoting renewable energy, and hence promote
the concept of sustainable development.

4.1. A Brief History of Castlemilk

Castlemilk, an area to the south of Glasgow has a population of around 14,000 people [7].
The area was built in the 1950’s to help solve the problem of overcrowding in the inner
city slum areas of the city of Glasgow. It was also hoped that Castlemilk would shorten
the waiting list for public sector housing. Traditional industry found a home in the area
and provided employment for the majority of the Castlemilk working population.
However following the recession of the late 1970’s many of these industries, which
had proved to be the backbone of the area were forced to close. The population of
Castlemilk was left demoralised and disheartened as the high unemployment levels forced
many to seek employment elsewhere. The area became increasingly run down and
socially deprived before prompting action to regenerate the area.
This long-term regeneration programme has “the common aim of developing and
jointly implementing a comprehensive, mutually agreed strategy.”
With this in mind it is hoped that the formulation and construction of a wind farm
energy co-op will help address this issue and serve the people of Castlemilk.

4.2. The Project

The findings of an initial study indicated that an urban wind farm in the area was in fact
possible and identified two possible sites for the farm. It also outlined possible benefits
for the local community. As a result of this a further feasibility study of the project was
carried out by two academics from the School of the Built and Natural Environment,
Glasgow Caledonian University in 2003 [8]. Further detailed study was conducted in
2004 and a wind monitoring mast has since been erected (May 2004) with a view to
analysing the wind speeds of the area throughout the year [9].
The Castlemilk community windfarm aims to be the first community owned urban
windfarm in the UK. It has been proposed that three 2.5MW wind turbines be erected on
the Cathkin Braes, located on the south side of Glasgow, between Castlemilk and the
conservation village of Carmunnock (see Figure 3).
120

Figure 3. The Castlemilk/Carmunnock area (source: Multimap.co).

4.3. Community Involvement

Many projects can attract adverse publicity based on the secrecy of the project. The
public object to the fear of disruption and loss of amenities as well as the fact that they
played no part in the decision making process. Subsequently if it is found that the site
selected is suitable for a wind farm, then the next stage is to consult public opinion. All
Castlemilk and Carmunnock residents have been informed of the project and have been
invited to attend public meetings where they had the opportunity to voice their concerns
and fears about the project. In addition to this there has also been a series of street
questionnaires whereby residents shopping in the local shopping centre were invited to
express their views on the project. For this particular project it is vital to realise that no
matter how technically feasible the project appears to be, it will not be possible unless the
people of Castlemilk and Carmunnock fully support it. It is therefore of paramount
importance to the success of the project that the views and opinions of the residents are
actively sought.

4.4. Public Opinion

Analysis of questionnaires obtained at both public meetings and face to face
questionnaires show a remarked support of the project. 80% of the responses were
extremely favourable, with the main comment being on how the project will directly
benefit the community [2]. This is a stark contrast to similar rural projects, where the
main concern is how a project may adversely affect the area. The residents of Castlemilk
and Carmunnock did not appear to have the same level of concerns as those found in rural
 121

areas. No one raised the issue of landscape or visual impact (the most common complaint
of these areas), with the main concern relating to increased road traffic. This will only
impact on the project at the construction stage, and if managed properly the impact should
only be minimal. Figure 4 shows a computer simulated image of the windfarm from a
view point in the centre of Castlemilk.

Figure 4. Photomontage showing wind turbines from a view point in the centre of Castlemilk (Entec UK Ltd.).

5 Benefits
The benefits of this project are manifold, but to be attractive to the people of Castlemilk
they need to be tangible. What will such a scheme mean in monetary terms for the
residents? Estimates from the feasible study indicate that the project will cost £5.2 million
to finance, with the most of this money coming from grants and sponsorships. Revenue
from the project is estimated to be £250,000 per annum, a profit that will be reinvested in
the community in accordance with residents’ wishes [9].
In addition to the financial rewards there are a number of additional benefits that the
project could bring:
• Community Ownership - The aim is for a community led and a community owned
urban wind farm that will bring cheaper and cleaner energy to the area. The
community will head the project with financial gains being reinvested into the area as
the residents see fit. Recent opinions show that the majority of residents feel that the
profits should be invested to improve facilities for children and younger people.
• Attraction of Business to the Area - The lure of cheaper electricity and the
possibility of tax rebates based on using energy from a renewable source may attract
businesses to the area. This will aid the economic development of the area and help
provide employment for the local residents.
• Blueprint for Energy co-ops Nation-wide - If this project is successful it will
provide the blue print for the development of similar projects elsewhere. This will in
turn give recognition to the area and aid in social regeneration. At the moment there
are a number of areas in and around Glasgow that would benefit from such a scheme
122

with Members of the Scottish Parliament giving the project their backing.
Additionally the principles of the project could be adopted on a global scale.
• Education and Environmental Awareness - A training and education centre, run
by the people of Castlemilk can be set up on site once the wind farm is established.
This centre will provide information and allow site visits for schools as well as being
the focal point for external parties who wish to know more about the project. Again
this will not only increase the environmental awareness of the area but also raise the
profile of the Castlemilk area.
• Visitors/Tourists - The number of visitors and tourists to the area will rise as word
of the uniqueness of the project spreads. This will provide a financial input to the
area, thus aiding in the regeneration of the area.

6 Conclusion
Sustainable development requires change and there is no greater area that needs more
change than the global energy market. Developed countries need to take the lead in this,
creating good practice that can be adopted by developing countries without adversely
impacting on the environment. In addition to this there needs to be a change in global
governance, with more communication at all levels. Central to this is people
empowerment, where individuals can exert a positive influence that affects national and
international policies. The concept of a community owned urban windfarm is innovation,
novel and exciting and serves as an excellent example for developing countries. In
particular it satisfies the principles of sustainability in that:
• People empowerment – giving individuals direct control of projects and active
involvement in the decision making process.
• Social inclusion – can regenerate a socially deprived area as well as giving a sense of
ownership.
• Economic Gain – any profits from the project will directly benefit the community and
not a private developer.
These principles are not unique to urban projects, but can be adapted to suit all
communities and promote a society where local residents can directly benefit from the
exploitation of a natural local resource (be it wind, solar or hydro). The global potential
for similar type projects is huge and should not be overlooked in the pursuit of sustainable
development.

References

1. Kofi Annan quoted in Dressner, S, Principles of Sustainability, Earthscan

Publications 2002.
2. A. Spearey, Public Attitudes to the Castlemilk and Carmunnock Wind farm
(unpublished dissertation 2004).
 123

3. Scottish Executive targets for Renewables Statement 2004.

4. Report from BWEA 2004 http://www.bwea.com/
5. Report from EWEA 2004 http://www.ewea.org/
6. C. Gallagher, Proposal for Student Projects on BSc. Environment Course 2001.
7. A. Castlemilk, History, online information provided by Castlemilk Economic
Development Agency (CEDA) (2002).
8. S. Burek, C. Gallagher, Preliminary Feasibility Study of the Castlemilk Wind farm
submitted to CEDA 2003.
9. Entec Consultancy, Feasibility Study of the Castlemilk Wind farm, 2004.
 THE NUMERICAL MODELING AS ALTERNATIVE TO PHYSICAL
MODEL OF WIND FLOW OVER THE COMPLEX TERRAIN

ä(/-.278.29,û

Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval Architecture, University of Zagreb

Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

STANISLAV SVIDEREK
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval Architecture, University of Zagreb
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

-$6(1.2-26,329,û

START-6 Consulting
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

This article presents the results of numerical simulation of wind flow over the complex terrain
model around the Maslenica bridge in Croatia. The simulation is part of the project whose goal is
the proposal of the bridge deck protection from the high wind speed. The Reynolds-averaged
Navier-Stokes equations and RNG k-} model of turbulence were numerically solved using the CFD
code FLUENT. It was considered the present terrain configuration without the protection and the
three different terrain configurations with the differently shaped trench rampart which should
protect the bridge deck from a high speed wind. In parallel with the numerical simulation the
physical modeling was also realized. The numerical and experimental results showed good
agreement.

1 Introduction
Maslenica bridge near the city of Zadar (Figure 1), at the Zagreb-Split highway has been
often closed for severe wind conditions. The bridge is subject to strong wind called bura,
cold and dry northeasterly wind that blows down from the mountains along the eastern
shores of the Adriatic Sea. Bura can achieve speeds in excess of 240 km/h in the bridge
area. Maslenica bridge dominant wind direction are at angles in range of 22 to 40 degrees
to the bridge axis. Usual wind protection schemes are used where strong winds are
perpendicular to bridge axis.
Numerical modeling of bura wind over Maslenica bridge was attempted in order to
predict efficiency of several wind protection systems. There were modeled and analyzed
three different types of dam as well as referent case without any protection system:
• Referent case without protection system.
• Dam variant A: four 100 m long dams upwind of the bridge at 45 degree angle to the
wind direction.

124
 125

• Dam variant B: a “boomerang” shaped dam of constant absolute height with base
perpendicular to the wind direction.
• Dam variant C: a dam of non constant absolute height.

Figure 1. Panoramic view of the Maslenica bridge.

For the analysis, a rectangular footprint of land was considered that is oriented in the
direction of the prevailing wind, with upstream distance of 2 km, downstream distance of
1 km and 500 m sidewards from the bridge. Terrain digital elevation model had 25 m
horizontal resolution. A computational grid of approximately 2.7 million hexahedral and
tetrahedral control volumes was generated. Dimensions of the control volumes varied
from 0.5 m in the bridge proximity to over 20 m in domain periphery. The mesh was also
progressively coarsened in the vertical direction.
Wind velocity profile at the inlet was unknown and therefore a constant velocity inlet
boundary condition of 50 m/s was used. For this particular reason, a large 2 km upstream
distance was chosen in order to allow velocity profile to naturally develop and therefore
hopefully eliminate impact of unnatural inlet boundary condition on solution accuracy in
the area of interest. Other boundary conditions were of “outflow” type. Thus, the domain
cross section area reduction in downstream direction did not affect the simulation results.
Numerical simulation was accomplished using Fluent 6 software [1]. Segregated 3d
pressure-based solver for incompressible stationary flow with RNG k-epsilon turbulence
model [2] was used.
126

2 Referent Case
Figures 2, 3 represent geometry view of the referent case i.e. surface computational grid
of referent case. Simulation results are visualized using velocity magnitude colored path

Figure 2. Geometry view of the referent case.

Figure 3. Surface computational grid of referent case.

 127

lines and velocity contour plots in horizontal plane, just above the bridge (traffic lane)
surface:
• Path lines graphics give good presentation of 3d flow structures and reveal secondary
flows introduced by natural and artificial obstacles.
• Velocity contour plots allow for comparative analysis of different wind protection
systems and referent case.
Figure 4 represents velocity colored path lines in Maslenica bridge for reference case,
without any artificial flow obstacles. There are visible secondary wind flows bellow the
bridge, in the Maslenica channel, represented by blue lines. Those secondary flows
partially rejoin with the primary flow at the Zadar end of the bridge and cause local
velocity peaks at the bridge end (red spot on the Figure 5). This point will prove itself
critical in the following text. Those particles that passed bellow the bridge arc continue
down the channel causing no visible flow disturbances.

Figure 4. Path lines coloured by velocity magnitude for referent case.

Velocity magnitude contours (Figure 5) reveal that velocity magnitude on the bridge
upper surface is generally lower then that of free stream except for the small peak spot
near the Zadar end. Also, the velocity field is quite homogenized along the bridge surface.

3 Dam Variant A
Figure 6 represents Dam Variant A. Results for Variant A (Figure 7) show smaller
velocities along the bridge surface then in reference case, though there remains peak spot
128

Figure 5. Velocity magnitude contours for referent case.

Figure 6. Dam Variant A.

 129

Figure 7. Dam Variant A velocity magnitude contours.

on the Zadar end of the bridge with velocities over 50 m/s (although of lower magnitude
then in reference case).

4 Dam Variant B
Figure 8 represents Dam Variant A. Results for Variant B (Figure 9) show big calm but
unstable zone behind the dam. There is significant peak spot on the Zadar end of the
bridge with velocities over 65 m/s.

5 Dam Variant C
Finally, Figure 10 represents Dam Variant A. Variant C also shows zone of small
velocities downstream of the dam (Figure 11). Flow is characterized by great vortices in
the slow zone. Peak at the Zadar end around 60 m/s.

6 Conclusion
As already clear from previous text, neither solution delivers acceptable results for not
eliminating dangerous velocity peak at the Zadar end of the bridge. Variant C even
amplifies velocity at the peak point (Figure 12). Flow behind variant B i C is also
characterized by unsteadiness and rotation (Figure 12).
130

Figure 8. Dam Variant B, boomerang shaped dam.

Figure 9. Dam Variant B velocity magnitude contours.

 131

Figure 10. Dam Variant C.

Figure 11. Dam Variant C velocity magnitude contours.

132

Figure 12. Comparison of velocity magnitude along span of the bridge.

Simultaneously to this numerical modeling, another team performed physical

modeling of the same cases experimentally, in the wind tunnel. Although they used
slightly different boundary conditions and worked on smaller physical domain and
therefore results of the two studies were not directly comparable, they came to the same
conclusions. This showed that results of numerical modeling can be accepted and
numerical methods used as a tool in engineering.

References

1. Fluent 6.1 User´s Guide, Fluent Inc., Lebanon NH (2003).

2. J.H. Ferziger and M. Peric, Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics, Springer
(1999).
 BIODEGRADABLE PLASTIC SUBSTITUTE FROM BAMBOO

OSAMU YAMASHITA†
Department of Biosphere Resources Science, Nagoya University, 1 Furo-cho,
Chikusa-ku, Nagoya, 464-8601, Japan

HIDEYUKI YOKOCHI
Department of Biosphere Resources Science, Nagoya University, 1 Furo-cho,
Chikusa-ku, Nagoya, 464-8601, Japan

HIROSHI IMANISHI
Materials Research Institute for Sustainable Development, National Institute of Advanced
Industrial Science and Technology, 2266 Anagahora, Shimo-Shidami, Nagoya, 464-8601, Japan

KOZO KANAYAMA
Materials Research Institute for Sustainable Development, National Institute of Advanced
Industrial Science and Technology, 2266 Anagahora, Shimo-Shidam Nagoya, 464-8601, Japan

The feasibility of applying injection molding method for the production of complex shapes from
bamboo was studied. It is necessary for the material to have enough fluidity in the process of
molding and bamboo culms were powdered in our early studies. In this study, we pointed out that it
was not necessary to grind the culms. It was possible to give bamboo culms enough fluidity to
perform injection molding without the powdering process.

1 Introduction
Plastics play a very important role in our lives. It is light, strong, easily molded and
durable. However some problems became evident as environmental awareness increases.
Plastics are sometimes too durable and once disposed of, it can take decades to break
down. Another problem is that traditional plastics are manufactured from non-renewable
resources such as oil. In an effort to overcome these shortcomings, many researchers have
long been seeking to develop biodegradable plastics that are made from renewable
resources. Under the circumstance, we are trying to produce biodegradable plastic
substitute from bamboo.
Bamboo takes as little as three years to grow up in controlled forests and considered
to be a rapidly renewable resource, which has environmental advantages over long-cycle
renewable resource extraction. Despite the advantage, bamboo was utilized only for
simple ware making for a long time.

†
Corresponding author. Tel: +81-52-736-7320; Fax: +81-52-736-7533.
E-mail address: [email protected]

133
134

In our earlier studies [1-2], we powdered bamboo culms and noted the feasibility of
the application of injection molding method and extrusion molding method to produce
complex shapes. However, the fiber structure of bamboo, which contributes to the
strength of bamboo culms, is lost in the process of grinding. In this study, to make the
most of the fiber structure, we examined the feasibility of applying injection molding
method without the powdering process.
Only bamboo culms were used as raw material throughout the following experiments.
No adhesion or additives were added.

2 Material and Method

1.1. Properties of Bamboo Culms

Figure 1 shows a transversal section of a culm wall with vascular bundles embedded in
ground parenchyma in Phyllostachys pubescens. Vascular bundles consist of protoxylem,
metaxylem, protopholem, metapholem and bundle sheaths (Figure 2). The bundle sheaths

Vascular Bundle

Parenchyma Cells

1mm

Figure 1. Transverse section of a culm wall with vascular bundles embedded in the ground parenchyma
(Phyllostachys pubescens).

bs
pp
mp
mx bs
mx
bs px

bs
Parenchyma cells
100µm

Figure 2. A vascular bundle with protoxylem (px), metaxylem (mx), protopholem (pp), metapholem (mp) and
bundle sheaths (bs) in Phyllostachys pubescens.
 135

are composed of sclerenchymatous fiber cells. Total culm comprises about 50%
parenchyma, 40% fibers and 10% conducting tissue. Figure 3 shows parenchyma cells
and fiber cells obtained by soda cooking. The length of the fiber cells is around 1.5mm
and the width is around 15µm. The parenchyma cells, forming the basal matrix, are much
shorter than the fiber cells with the length around 100µm and the width around 30mm.
Bamboo culm consists of about 50-70% holocellulose, 30% hemicellulose and 20-25%
lignin [4].

100µm 100µm

Figure 3. Parenchyma cells (left) and fibre cells (right) obtained by soda cooking.

1.2. Raw Materials

Disciform bamboo particles were prepared from air-dry three-year old bamboo
(Phyllostachys pubescens) culms. The diameter is 29mm, the thickness is about 10mm
(Figure 4). The moisture content of the air-dried particles ranged from 9 to 11 percent.
Oven-dried bamboo particles were prepared by drying the particles in an oven at 105°C.

Fibrous Direction

Cortex

10mm
10cm
Bamboo Culm

Figure 4. A bamboo particle cut out from a bamboo culm by a circle cutter.
136

1.3. Fluidity test of air-dried and oven-dried bamboo particles

Figure 5 shows the test method applied to estimate the flow properties of the bamboo
particles. The diameter of the gate is 2mm, the length is 10mm, the bore diameter of the
cylinder is 30mm. The extrusion ratio is 225. After heating the die assembly to the set
temperature of 180°C, a bamboo particle of room temperature was put into the cylinder
with the cortex side up. Then the piston was placed on the particle and pressed by a
pressing machine at 15mm/min. After reaching to the set value of 50kN (71MPa), the
load was maintained till the end of the test. The piston moves down as the particle
extruded through the gate. The flow properties were estimated by measuring the piston
position with a displacement gauge. The origin of the piston position was placed at the
point where the piston contacts with the gate. The die assembly was heated by electrically
heated platens put on the below the upper and above the lower platens of the press
machine. A band heater placed around the cylinder was also used. The temperature of the
die assembly was measured by a thermocouple put on the bottom surface of the die 5mm
away from the gate end.

Piston (φ30mm)

Piston Position (mm)

Cortex
71MPa
71MPa

Bamboo Particle

Cylinder
0

Gate
(φ2mm×10mm)
180oC
180oC
o
180 C Extrusion
Figure 5. Flow property test method.

1.4. Injection Molding of Bamboo Particles

Figure 6 shows the die assembly and the procedure for injection molding. After heating
the die assembly to the set temperature of 200°C, two air-dried bamboo particles of room
temperature were put into the cylinder with the cortex side up. Then the piston was placed
on the particles and pressed by a pressing machine at 15mm/min. After reaching to the set
value of 100kN (142MPa), the load was maintained so that the particles flow through the
gate and fill the gear-shaped cavity. Then, the die assembly was chilled. The pressure was
released after the die temperature reached to the room temperature. The gate size is the
same as mentioned in the flow property test.
 137

Piston (φ30mm)
Cortex

142MPa
142MPa

Bamboo Particle

Cylinder
Gate
(φ2mm×10mm) Molded
Cavity Piece

200oC 200oC Room Temperature

1. Softening 2. Injection 3. Chilling 4. Ejection

3 Result and Discussion

3.1. Flow property of oven-dried bamboo particles

Figure 7 shows the relationship between time and the piston position on the flow property
test of the oven-dried bamboo particle. The particle was compressed as the pressure
applied (A-B). No extruding was observed so far. The piston hardly moved for a while
(B-C). After about 30 minutes, the piston started to move down extruding the particle
through the gate (C-D).
The temperature of the particle is believed to be reached to the set temperature in 2
minutes [2]. Thus, the result that the oven-dried bamboo particle required about 30

12
A
10
Piston position (mm)

8
B C
6

4
D
2

0 30 60 90 120
Time (min)
Figure 7. Relationship between time and piston position on the flow property test of the oven-dried bamboo
particle (180°C).
138

minutes to start flowing is not because that the particle required time to reach to the set
temperature. The result of our last study [3] explains that this is due to the increase of
fluidity caused by thermal decomposition of hemicellulose. Figure 8 shows the extrusion.
The surface is flaky and dark indicating severe thermal damage was caused. Fiber cells
were observed on the surface and the cut surface of the extrusion while parenchyma cells
were hardly recognized (Figure 9).

10mm

Figure 8. An extrusion produced from the oven-dried bamboo particles.

Fiber Cells

Fiber Cells

100µm

Figure 9. Surface (left) and cut surface (right) of an extrusion produced from oven-dried bamboo particles.

3.2. Flow Property of Air-Dried Bamboo Particles

Figure 10 shows the relationship between time and the piston position on the flow
property test of the air-dried bamboo particle. The particle was compressed as pressure
applied (A-B). The particle started to flow in 2 to 3 minutes (C-D).
As we mentioned in the previous section, the oven-dried bamboo particle required
about 30 minutes to start flowing. The difference raises the possibility that water works as
a catalyst to decompose hemicellulose. In addition, we should point out that the softening
point of the main components of bamboo, namely cellulose, hemicellulose, and lignin are
believed to be lower with water. Further work has to be developed to determine the
mechanism of the improvement of flow character in the presence of water.
The surface of the extrusion is smooth and pale in colors (Figure 11). Not only fiber
cells, but parenchyma cells were observed on the surface and the cut surface (Figure 12).
Less damage on the cell structure was observed in comparison with the extrusion
produced from oven-dried particles.
 139

12
A
10
Piston position (mm)
8
B C
6

4
D
2

0
0 30 60 90 120
Time (min)

Figure 10. Relationship between time and piston position on the flow property test of an air-dried
bamboo particle (180°C).

10mm
Figure 11. An extrusion produced from the air-dried bamboo particles.

Fiber Cells Fiber Cells

Parenchyma Cells Parenchyma Cells

100µm 100µm

Figure 12. Surface (left) and cut surface (right) of the extrusion produced from air-dried bamboo particles.

3.3. Injection Molding of Bamboo Particles

Figure 13 (left) shows the gears produced from air-dried bamboo particles. The complex
gear-shaped cavity was completely filled. The surface was smooth with no visible defects.
Fiber structure was observed on the cut surface as shown in Figure 13 (right).
The properties of the gears, such as strength, water absorption are yet to be analyzed.
However, advantages over the moldings produced from powder are expected by the
presence of the fiber structure.
140

10mm 500µm

Figure 13. Gears produced from the air-dried bamboo particles by injection molding method (left) and the cut
surface of the gear (right).

4 Conclusions
1. It was possible to perform injection molding on bamboo culms without a powdering
process.
2. Oven-dried bamboo particles required a certain amount of time to start flowing. This
is probably because that it required its hemicellulose to decompose to obtain enough
fluidity.
3. Air-dried bamboo particle started to flow immediately.
4. Fiber cells and parenchyma cells were recognized on/in the extrusion produced from
air-dried bamboo particles while only fiber cells were recognized on/in the extrusion
produced from oven-dried bamboo particles. This indicates the difference of flow
mechanism between air-dried bamboo particles and oven-dried bamboo particles.
5. Fiber structure was observed on the cut surface of the gear produced from bamboo
particles by injection molding. The fiber structure is expected to improve the
mechanical properties of the molded pieces.

References

1. O. Yamashita, S. Kimura, H. Imanishi, K. Kanayama, Proc. Conf. Mokuzaigakkai,

Chubushibu, Shizuoka, August 29, 2003, pp. 58 (in Japanese).
2. O. Yamashita, S. Kimura, H. Yokochi, H. Imanishi, K. Kanayama, Proc. Conf.
Mokuzaigakkai, Sapporo, August 3-5, 2004, pp 243.
3. O. Yamashita, H. Yokochi, H. Imanishi, K. Kanayama, Proc. Conf. Mokuzaigakkai
Chubushibu, Mie, November 11, 2004, pp. 14-15. (in Japanese).
4. W. Liese, Research on Bamboo, Wood Science and Technology, Vol.21, No.3, pp.
194-201, 1987.
NEW RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES
AND ENERGY EFFICIENCY

141
This page intentionally left blank
 HYDROGEN FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELEOPMENT

FRANO BARBIR
UNIDO-ICHET, Sabri Ulker Sk. 38
Istanbul, 34015, Turkey

Our civilization is facing an unavoidable transition from convenient but environmentally not so
friendly, and ultimately scarce energy sources to less convenient, but preferably clean and
sustainable ones. Regardless on the energy sources, there will always be a need for convenient,
clean, safe, efficient and versatile energy carriers or forms of energy that can be delivered to the end
users. Both, hydrogen and electricity are energy carries that together may satisfy all the energy needs
of modern civilization. Hydrogen and electricity should not compete with each other, but rather
complement each other. With their complementary versatility, they can help in increasing the
acceptance and market penetration of renewable energy technologies. However, market penetration
of renewable energy sources cannot be left depending solely on market forces. The benefits of a
clean and permanent energy system based on renewable energy sources, and hydrogen and
electricity as the energy carriers, are reaching far beyond a horizon of an ordinary customer. They
are also beyond the horizon of a utility or energy company, and even the nation. The decision on
employing the renewable energy sources must be a conscious one, made on a national and
international level, and based on clear but far reaching benefits to the nation and to the global
environment. This paper attempts to identify and quantify those benefits, with the help of a global
energy/environment/economy model based on energy language diagram. Although all economic
models are based on growth, from a thermodynamic point of view it is clear that no system based on
finite sources can continue to grow forever. A system based on utilization of constant flow of
incoming energy (such as solar energy) will eventually reach a steady state. A steady-state level
which the human civilization can obtain, depends on the rate of utilization of available solar energy
and the effort required to convert solar energy into more useful forms of energy (hydrogen and
electricity being only the intermediary steps). The model has been used to predict the level at which
the renewable energy sources would be sustainable as a function of timing and net energy (emergy)
ratios.

1. Guidelines
Present global energy system is predominantly based on utilization of fossil fuels, coal,
oil and natural gas. These fuels make more than 85% of the primary world energy
production [1]. These fuels have been relatively easily accessible and have required
relatively little effort (or energy) to extract, process and be delivered to the users.
Because of that, they have been providing high net energy (or net emergy) to the
economic process where they are used, allowing unprecedented economic growth since
the industrial revolution. However, there are several problems with the present global
energy system, which will only become more pronounced with time:
1) Exploitation of fossil fuels creates pollution on local, regional and global scales. The
quality of air in big cities, particularly in developing countries is deteriorating due to
exhaust gases from transportation and is causing serious health problems. Most of
the scientific community and most of the world countries are now convinced that
increase of carbon dioxide and other so called greenhouse gases in the atmosphere is

143
144

a direct consequence of combustion of fossil fuels and that it causes global warming
with threatening consequences such as global climate change and sea level rise.
2) The reserves of fossil fuels are finite. The exact remaining amount of fossil fuels is
subject to vigorous debates but the fact that the reserves are finite is indisputable. In
addition, new discoveries do not keep up with increasing projected demand. The
world will eventually run out of oil and gas, quite possibly by the second half of this
century.
3) Demand for energy will continue to grow, particularly due to rapid economic
development in China, India and other developing countries. Energy consumption in
developed countries is slowing down due to rational use of energy, but mainly
because of shifting high energy intensity businesses and industries to the third world
countries. However, energy consumption in China for example is growing because of
rapid industrialization and because of increasing buying power of Chinese people.
Ever increasing energy demand will keep pressure on energy production and the
prices, particularly of oil, will continue to be volatile, and in general will continue to
increase.
4) The reserves of oil and gas are unevenly distributed and mainly concentrated in
politically very unstable geographic area – Middle East and Arab countries. This will
continue to create political tensions and possibly wars over the remaining reserves.
In short, the world will either run out of fossil fuels or will exceed the capacity of
environment to absorb the products of their combustion or their uneven distribution will
cause global wars over the remaining reserves or they will become unaffordable. The
present global energy system is simply unsustainable as illustrated in Figure 1.

useful energy
pollu
tants
combustion

CO
2
wat
fuels

er
fossil

ox
yg
en

fossil
fuel environment
reserves

Figure 1. System representation of the present unsustainable energy system based on fossil fuels (adapted from
[2]).
 145

2. Hydrogen as future solution of the present energy problems

Hydrogen is a fuel that is by many considered a future solution of the current energy
problems. Hydrogen itself is not toxic and its combustion does not create any pollution or
greenhouse gases. Hydrogen does not have to be combusted – electrochemical conversion
(in fuel cells) is a very efficient way of using hydrogen to provide useful energy.
Hydrogen is a synthetic fuel which can be produced from all and any energy sources
including fossil fuels, nuclear energy and renewable energy sources. Hydrogen may be
used as fuel in almost any application where fossil fuels are used today – particularly in
transportation, where it would offer immediate benefits in terms of reduced pollution and
cleaner environment.
Full benefits of hydrogen as a clean, versatile and efficient fuel may be realized only
if hydrogen is produced from renewable energy sources. A global system where
hydrogen replaces fossil fuels and where hydrogen is produced from renewable energy
sources would be in complete balance with the environment, and therefore sustainable, as
shown in Figure 2.

useful energy
utilization
hydrogen

wa
ity

ter
tric
gen
elec
hydro

ox
yg
en

oxygen
hy uc
pr
dr tio
od

environment
og n
ele duc

en
pr
ctr tio
o

ici n
ty

renewable
energy water
sources

Figure 2. System representation of a future sustainable energy system based on renewable energy sources and
hydrogen and electricity as energy carriers (adapted from [2]).

The most developed countries, such as U.S., Canada, EU and Japan have already
come up with strategies for transition to hydrogen economy and have already started its
implementation. U.S. Department of Energy published A National Vision of America's
Transition to a Hydrogen Economy — to 2030 and Beyond [3]. This document
summarizes the potential role for hydrogen systems in America's energy future, outlining
the common vision of the hydrogen economy. It was followed by The National Hydrogen
Energy Roadmap [4], which provides a blueprint for the coordinated, long-term, public
and private efforts required for hydrogen energy development. A comprehensive U.S.
DOE Hydrogen Posture Plan [5] outlines the activities, milestones, and deliverables DOE
146

plans to pursue to support America's shift to a hydrogen-based transportation energy

system. The Posture Plan integrates research, development, and demonstration activities
from the DOE renewable, nuclear, fossil, and science offices, and identifies milestones
for technology development over the next decade, leading up to a technology readiness
milestone in 2015. The plan also points out that the use of hydrogen as an energy carrier
can enhance energy security while reducing air pollution and greenhouse gas emissions.
Reducing greenhouse gas emissions, improving security of energy supply and
strengthening the European economy are the main drivers for establishing a hydrogen-
oriented energy economy in Europe. This is outlined in a High Level Group’s report to
European Commission [6], which was the starting point for European hydrogen activities
facilitated by The European Hydrogen and Fuel Cell Technology Platform (HFP). Series
of strategic documents have been created such as Strategic Overview [7], Strategic
Research Agenda [8], Deployment Strategy [9] and most recently the Implementation
Plan [10].
Several organizations initiate and coordinate hydrogen activities on international
level, such as International Partnership for Hydrogen Energy (www.iphe.net) which is
mainly focused on developed countries (although countries such as Brazil, China and
India are also the members) and UNIDO-International Centre for Hydrogen Energy
Technologies (www.unido-ichet.org), which is focused on activities in developing
countries.
Although transition to hydrogen economy has undoubtedly already begun, it is still
unclear what role hydrogen would play in the future global or regional energy supply.
Critiques of hydrogen or hydrogen economy often come from misunderstanding or
misconception of hydrogen’s role. Individual hydrogen technologies do not make much
sense when considered outside the entire energy system.

2.1. Hydrogen from fossil fuels

Most of hydrogen is today being produced from fossil fuels, particularly by steam
reforming of natural gas and in refineries by partial oxidation of heavier hydrocarbons.
However, hydrogen produced from fossil fuels would not solve any of the above listed
problems related to utilization of fossil fuels, except perhaps pollution, providing carbon
dioxide sequestration is applied at the hydrogen production sites. Arguably, carbon
dioxide sequestration could be applied even without hydrogen production (except in
transportation, where electricity or some other clean and/or renewable fuels could be
used).
Hydrogen produced from fossil fuels, particularly natural gas, as a fuel cannot
compete in today’s market with the very fuels it is produced from. Hydrogen production
from natural gas only makes sense in a transition period to help establish hydrogen
supply infrastructure and to help commercialize hydrogen utilization technologies, such
as fuel cells.
 147

2.2. Hydrogen from renewables

Full benefits of hydrogen as a clean, versatile and efficient fuel may be realized only if
hydrogen is produced from renewable energy sources. Hydrogen may be produced from
renewable energy sources through a variety of pathways and methods, (as shown in
Figure 3), but only a few of them are commercially viable today.

Figure 3. Various possible pathways from hydrogen production (from [7]).

Production of hydrogen from renewable energy sources in most cases involves

electricity as an intermediary step. Both, hydrogen and electricity are energy carries that
together may satisfy all energy needs of modern civilization. They should not compete
with each other, but rather complement each other. With their complementary versatility,
they can help in increasing the acceptance and market penetration of renewable energy
technologies. Wind energy and solar PV markets are growing at an incredible rate of
almost 30% per year. Today there is already 60 GW of installed wind turbine power all
over the world [11]. World-wide installed power of solar PVs is more than an order of
magnitude smaller but it is expected to reach 88 GW by 2020 [12].
The potential of renewable energy is more than sufficient to supply all energy
today’s world needs. Today, total primary energy consumption is in excess of 400 EJ/yr.
Solar energy received by Earth exceeds this demand by several orders of magnitude. The
potential of solar energy over the 1/10 of the World’s deserts is estimated at 2500 EJ of
electrical energy per year [13]. World hydro and wind energy potentials are much
smaller, estimated at 30 EJ/yr each, also expressed as electricity produced (calculated
from [14]).

3. Problems with renewable energy sources

It appears that the renewable energy sources have the potential to run the world and that
the technology needed to do so is available. Why is this potential only marginally
utilized? It is possible to envision world wide utilization of a variety of renewable energy
148

sources, solar, wind, hydro, biomass, and their conversion to heat, electricity and
hydrogen. This can be accomplished both locally in small plants and in large centralized
plants. Heat, electricity, hydrogen and biofuels generated this way could be produced in
quantities to completely replace fossil fuels. There will be no more pollution nor
greenhouse gas emissions from energy conversion. Renewable energy is much more
evenly distributed around the world and that would reduce the tensions over the
remaining reserves of oil and gas. What is stopping us from realizing this vision?
A common answer is: renewable energy is too expensive. This answer keeps open a
hope that future development could continue bringing down the cost of technology for
utilization of renewable energy. However, if the background of this high cost is analyzed
using emergy analysis, the outlook for renewable energy may look less promising. Fossil
fuels are a concentrated form of energy and therefore inexpensive because nature has
worked millions of years to create them. When we pay for coal and oil we do not pay for
this work done by nature – we only pay for human work needed to extract, process and
distribute these fuels. In emergy terms, fossil fuels have very high emergy ratio. As a
result, utilization of fossil fuels have enabled unprecedented growth of global economy.
The flow of renewable energy has very low emergy compared to fossil fuels. Fuels
and energy carriers produced from renewable energy need a lot more work to first
concentrate the flux of renewable energy and then to produce them. For this reason they
have relatively low net emergy ratio, and because of that, Odum did not believe that
renewable energy in general is capable of supporting the society’s need for energy [15].
Further studies are required to calculate more precisely the net emergy ratio of renewable
energy technologies. The results are expected to vary from technology to technology but
also from location to location as already shown in [16] and [17] respectively.

4. Future scenarios
Although utilization of fossil fuels has enabled unprecedented growth of global economy
over the last two centuries, this growth cannot continue into indefinite future. The system
that is fueling this growth is not sustainable and the growth will have to stop at some
point. This may be proved by a simple non-renewable source model using energy
systems diagram [18]. If timely transition to new and sustainable energy sources and
practices is not implemented the growth will be succeeded by a decline. Such scenarios
have been reported by several global models that use energy and the driver for the
economic activities [15,19-21].
Because of its low net emergy ratio, renewable energy would have never enabled
such growth. A system that is based on utilization of renewable energy eventually results
in a steady state. This again may be proved by a simple renewable source model using
energy systems diagram [18]. However, if the non-renewable sources are replaced by the
renewable energy sources the economic system may reach a steady state at a certain level
which depends on the net emergy ratio of these sources. High net emergy would result in
a slower growth eventually reaching a steady state at some higher level. Low net emergy
 149

would result in a decline, eventually reaching a steady state at some lower level.
However, if the human economic society is considered only as a part of a bigger self-
organizing system (our planet) with its own patterns, then its sustainability may not be
the level steady-state but the process of adapting to the global oscillations [22].
Of course the above mentioned simple models are a very aggregate way of
representing global economy and may only be used to conclude on the future trends.
Global economy is much more complex and it would require rather complex models to
make more accurate predictions. The degree of accuracy of the timescales and the levels
of economic activities will depend on the number of parameters taken into
considerations, accuracy of data and correctness of the assumptions.
These considerations, based solely on thermodynamics and energy systems diagram,
no matter how simple they are, lead to a very serious conclusion: utilization of renewable
energy does not support continuous growth. This fact will make any conscious decision
on transition extremely difficult. The fact that the present system is not sustainable is not
yet given deserving attention. There is a belief that in the future society will find a new
energy technology or energy source as it has done in the past, that will continue to
support the growth.
Nevertheless, it would be irresponsible to plan our future based on some unknown
technology or source. If we are to plan our future based on known energy sources than
the only long-term sustainable option are the renewable energy sources: solar radiation
and its derivatives wind, hydro and biomass. Hydrogen and electricity will be used to
allow utilization of renewable energy in all the sectors – industrial, residential and
transportation. With their complementary versatility, they can help in increasing the
acceptance and market penetration of renewable energy technologies. Yet, market
penetration of renewable energy sources cannot be left depending solely on market
forces. The benefits of a clean and permanent energy system based on renewable energy
sources, and hydrogen and electricity as the energy carriers, are reaching far beyond a
horizon of an ordinary customer. They are also beyond the horizon of a utility or energy
company, and even the nation. The decision on employing the renewable energy sources
must be a conscious one, made on a national and international level, and based on clear
but far reaching benefits to the nation and to the global environment.
The key parameter that will determine the inevitable transitions in energy use and the
future of our civilization is the net emergy ratio of the renewable energy sources. It is
indeed surprising that this has not been sufficiently studied and analyzed. For any
decision on local, regional, national and global transition to renewable energy sources
and hydrogen as an energy carrier (together with electricity) it will be absolutely critical
to analyze this net emergy ratio. Evaluation of net contributions to the economy that are
made by energy sources should account for all energy inputs including the environmental
services as well as high quality feedback – services from the economy itself. Emergy
accounting is the most comprehensive method that enables summarization of different
flows of energy, materials, services, etc., on a common basis. Emergy is a measure of the
150

global processes required to produce something expressed in units of the same energy
form.

5. A global model for predicting the future

In order to illustrate the above mentioned scenarios a global energy/environment/
economy model based on energy language diagram has been developed [13, 23]. The
model is essentially a two-source model, non-renewable and renewable, with a switch
that allows committed large scale utilization of renewable energy (Figure 4). The flows of
energy are shown as solid lines and the flows of money as dotted lines (note that money
is flowing in the opposite direction from energy). The total money flow is the Gross
World Product. The model has been used to predict the level at which the renewable
energy sources would be sustainable as a function of timing and net energy (emergy)
ratios.

Assets

Fossil fuels

CO2

Renewable

Figure 4. A global energy model (modified from [13]).

How soon the transition should start and how fast should it be implemented?
Transition should start before the economy reaches its peak, even if it means slowing
down. An early transition may prove to be beneficial in the long term, i.e., it may result
in a steady state at a higher level than in case of a transition that starts later (Figure 5).
Once the economy starts declining it will not be able to afford transition to a more
expensive energy system, and transition would only accelerate the decline.
The model was also used to analyze the effect of the net emergy ratio. Figure 6
shows the results for different cost indices, where the cost index was defined as the ratio
 151

of energy cost in the new energy system and that in the present one. Higher cost index
would mean lower net emergy ratio.

160 transition
started in
140
Gross World Product (trillion U.S.$)

2000
120

100
2025
80

60
no transition
40
actual data
20

0
1950 1975 2000 2025 2050 2075 2100

Figure 5. Effect of timeliness of transition to renewable energy/hydrogen energy system on global economy (in
2004 US $) (updated from [23,24]).

160

140
Gross World Product (trillion U.S.$)

Ci = 1.33
120
Ci = 2.0
100
Ci = 3.0
80

60 Ci = 4.0
no transition
40
actual data
20

0
1950 1975 2000 2025 2050 2075 2100

Figure 6. Effect of the energy cost in the renewable energy/hydrogen energy system on global economy (in
2004 US $) (updated from [23,24]).

The answer to question “how fast” is more complex. Major transitions in the past
took several decades. If a transition is too fast it may weaken and drain economy too
much and may result in a lower steady state. If a transition is too slow, global economy
152

may be weakened by the problems related to utilization of fossil fuels (such as global
warming and its consequences) and the result again would be a lower steady state.
Therefore, there must be an optimal transition rate, however its determination would
require very complex models and constant monitoring and adjustment of parameters.
Another difficulty is that such a transition must be conducted on a global level. Any
country that attempts to forcibly switch from fossil fuels may put itself in an inferior
economic position for decades. This is particularly a sensitive issue for developing
countries. It would be relatively easy to establish a new energy infrastructure in the
countries that a) need little energy b) do not have an energy infrastructure in place.
However, use of renewable energy sources may hinder their economic growth and would
only make the gap between the rich and poor countries even bigger.

6. Conclusion
Hydrogen is a fuel that is by many considered a future solution of the current energy
problems. The most developed countries have already come up with strategies for
transition to hydrogen economy and its implementation is already underway. However,
full benefits of hydrogen as a clean, versatile and efficient fuel may be realized only if
hydrogen is produced from renewable energy sources. A global system where hydrogen
replaces fossil fuels and where hydrogen is produced from renewable energy sources
would be in complete balance with the environment, and therefore sustainable.
Competitiveness of renewable energy sources and their carriers, including hydrogen, will
depend on the net emergy ratio of the production process. Renewable energy sources in
general have less emergy than the fossil fuels, and they will not be able to support
continuous economic growth, and will eventually result in some kind of a steady-state
economy. An early transition to renewable energy sources and hydrogen may prove to be
beneficial in the long term, i.e., it may result in a steady state at a higher level than in
case of a transition that starts later. Once the economy starts declining it will not be able
to afford transition to a more expensive energy system, and transition would only
accelerate the decline. Similarly, if a transition is too fast it may weaken and drain
economy too much and may result in a lower steady state. If a transition is too slow,
global economy may be weakened by the problems related to utilization of fossil fuels
(such as global warming and its consequences) before transition is completed and the
result again would be a lower steady state. Therefore, there must be an optimal transition
rate, however its determination would require very complex models and constant
monitoring and adjustment of parameters. The decision on employing the renewable
energy sources must be a conscious one, made on international level, and based on clear
but far reaching benefits to the global economy and to the global environment.
 153

References
1. World Energy Outlook 2004, International Energy Agency, Paris, 2004
2. U. Sprengel and W. Hoyer (Eds.). Solar Hydrogen - Energy Carrier for the Future,
DLR, ZSW, and Ministry of Economic Affairs and Technology for the State of
Baden-Wurttemberg, Stuttgart. 1990.
3. A National Vision of America's Transition to a Hydrogen Economy — to 2030 and
Beyond, U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable
Energy, Washington DC, February 2002
4. The National Hydrogen Energy Roadmap, U.S. Department of Energy, Office of
Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy, Washington DC, November 2002
5. Hydrogen Posture Plan, U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency
and Renewable Energy, Washington DC, February 2004
6. Hydrogen Energy and Fuel Cells, A Vision of Our Future, Final Report of the High
Level Group, European Commission (EUR 20719 EN), Brussels, 2003
7. Strategic Overview, European Hydrogen and Fuel Cell Technology Platform,
Brussels, June 2005
8. Strategic Research Agenda, European Hydrogen and Fuel Cell Technology
Platform, Brussels, July 2005
9. Deployment Strategy, European Hydrogen and Fuel Cell Technology Platform,
Brussels, August 2005
10. Draft Implementation Plan, European Hydrogen and Fuel Cell Technology
Platform, Brussels, October 2006
11. World Wind Energy Association (http://www.wwindea.org/home/index.php?option
=com_content&task=view&id=88&Itemid=43) September 2006
12. National Center for Photovoltaics, U.S. Department of Energy,
(http://www.nrel.gov/ncpv/06july_dec_hotline_archives.pdf), September 2006
13. F. Barbir, Analysis and Modeling of Environmental and Economic Impacts of Solar
Hydrogen Energy System Ph.D. Dissertation, University of Miami, Coral Gables,
FL, 1992.
14. V. Smil, General Energetics: Energy in the Biosphere and Civilization. John Wiley
& Sons, New York, 1991.
15. H.T. Odum and E.C. Odum, A Prosperous Way Down: Principles and Policies,
University Press of Colorado, 2001
16. M.T. Brown and S. Ulgiati, Emergy Evaluations and Environmental Loading of
Electricity Producing Systms, Journal of Cleaner Production, Vol. 10, pp. 321-334,
2002
17. S. Bastianoni and N. Marchettini, Ethanol Production from Biomass: Analysis of
Process Efficiency and Sustainability, Biomass and Bioenergy, Vol. 11, No. 5,
pp.411-418, 1996
18. H.T. Odum and E.C. Odum, Modeling for all Scales: An Introduction to System
Simulation, Academic Press, 2000
19. J.W. Forrester, World Dynamics, Wright-Allen Press, Cambridge, Mass. 1971.
20. D.H. Meadows, D.H. Meadows, J. Randers and W.W. Behrens, III. The Limits to
Growth, Universe Books, A Potomac Associates Book, New York. 1972.
21. D.H. Meadows, D.H. Meadows and J. Randers. Beyond the Limits. Chelsea Green.
Post Mills, Vermont. 1991.
154

22. H.T. Odum, The Emergy of Natural Capital. In A.M. Janson, M. Hamer, C. Folke
and R. Constanza, (Eds.). Investing in Natural Capital, Island Press, Covelo, CA,
pp. 200-212. 1994.
23. F. Barbir, H.J. Plass, Jr., and T.N. Veziroglu, Modeling of Hydrogen Penetration in
the Energy Market. Int. J. Hydrogen Energy, Vol. 18, No. 3, pp. 187-195. 1993.
24. F. Barbir, F. Solar Hydrogen Energy System – Real Possibility or Utopia, Proc. 2nd
Intl. Workshop on Advances in Energy Studies, Porto Venere, Italy, May 2000, pp.
3-13.
RENEWABLES AND HYDROGEN FOR DEVELOPING COUNTRIES: A
CASE-STUDY OF PERU

DANIEL MARCELO
CIRPS Interuniversity Research Centre for Sustainable Development
University of Rome “La Sapienzay”
Via della Polveriera 37 – 00184. Rome. Italy

FABIO ORECCHINI
Department of Mechanics and Aeronautics – Energy section.
University of Rome “La Sapienza”
Via Eudossiana 18 – 00184. Rome. Italy

The paper propose the sustainable energy use of sugar cane trash taking into consideration the
concept of Closed Cycles of Energy Resources – CCER, whose goal is to achieve zero consumption
in terms of non-renewable resources and no impact on the environment. The study is focalised to
illustrate that innovative bioenergy systems are thermodynamically possible and that its would reach
a very high efficiency. The suitably design and implementation of modern bioenergy system
contributes to sustainable development, due to integrate technical feasibility with environment and
socio-economic assessment. The proposed bioenergy systems are analysed for Pucalà sugar factory,
Chiclayo (Peru), starting from current situation to the modern technology. The technological power
plant is constituted by a indirect heating fluidised bed gasifier, a hot gas cleanup system and a
Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell (MCFC). This system presents the higher electrical efficiency for the
sugarcane trash. Furthermore, that is feasible the production of hydrogen rich gas from sugar cane
residues (leaves, tops and bagasse) to be used in fuel cell systems. The investment and operational
costs regarding the use of fuel cell, are higher than in other possible technological solutions if
related to the amount of processed biomass, but are the lowest if referred, as usual, to the produced
kWh. Moreover, since the technologies used are in the research and development phases, the costs
are expected to dramatically decrease in the near future.

1 Introduction
The accomplishment of energy cycles that use renewable energy sources and don’t create
any “pollution-waste” are required to insure the human sustainable development.
Currently, energy chains deplete resources that are not able to reform and release harmful
pollutants, creating local and global pollution and waste. Therefore, the target is that a
energy chain that begin from a renewable resource, be able to completely "close", with no
resource consumption and no impact on the environment. On this way, the research
activity of CIRPS is focalised in the assess of CCER, concretely hydrogen chain.
One of these renewable resources is the biomass. The biomass resources including
organic waste streams, agricultural and forestry residues, as well as crops grown to

155
156

produce heat, fuels, and electricity. Biomass contributes significantly to the world’s
energy supply. The modern use of biomass to produce electricity, steam and biofuels is
estimated at 7 exajoules a year.
The resource potential of biomass energy is much larger than current world energy
consumption. With agricultural modernised up to reasonable standards in various regions,
and given the need the preserve and improve the world’s natural areas, 700 to 1.400
million hectares may be available for biomass energy production well into 21st century.
The availability of land for energy plantations depends on the food supplies needed
and on the possibilities for intensifying agricultural production in a sustainable way.
Regarding the production of heat, in developing countries the development and
introduction of improved stoves for cooking and heating can have a big impact on
biomass use.
For the electricity production the application of fluid bed combustion and advanced
gas cleaning will allow the efficient production.

2 Biomass for energy use

Biomass is the fourth world-wide energetic source. The exploit of biomass energy
systems contributes to a positive social and economic impact (poverty alleviation,
creating opportunities for income generation, gender impacts, land use competition and
land tenure, etc.).

Energy Services

Heat and Power generation Social, Economic, SUSTAINABLE

and Environmental DEVELOPMENT
Impacts
Biomass Conversion Systems

Biomass Production

Figure 1. Biomass for energy use and sustainable development

Furthermore, about the environment impact, the use of biomass energy systems has
the potential to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, the net emission of carbon dioxide will
be zero as long as plants continue to be replenished for biomass energy purposes.
Then, the biomass energy systems support the sustainable development. The
energetic use of the refusals involves a careful study of the characteristics of the territory,
of the place where to settle the power plant (not distant from the biomasses to be used), of
the reliability of supplies and of the integration of the different phases: production,
 157

collection, transport, storing, pre-treatment, conversion and distribution should coexist in

a unique context (Energy Farm).
On the current situation biomass represents the 3% of primary energy consumption in
industrialized countries. However, much of the rural people in developing countries is
dependent on biomass, mainly in the form of wood, for fuel. In developing countries,
biomass signify the 35% of primary energy consumption.
Biomass differs from other alternative energy resources in that the resource is varied,
and it can be converted to energy through many conversion process.
Goods results about the sustainable use of the biomass for energetic purpose are in
Brazil (Alcohol Programme), Nicaragua, Sweden, Mauritius, etc.
A classification of biomass for energy purpose regards the modern biomass and
traditional biomass. The modern ones involve large scale uses and aims to substitute for
conventional energy resources (agricultural residues, urban wastes, biofuels, energy
crops). Traditional biomass is normally indicate for small scale use (domestic use, plant
residues, animal wastes).

3 Sugarcane, bagasse and sugarcane trash

The biomass in study is the sugarcane (see Figure 2). The sugarcane, herbaceous
cultivation with times of cultivation of six months, is one of the biomasses that more are
adapted to being used for energetic. The sugarcane has the highest rate of energy
produced for hectare between all the cultivation (productive ability 50-100 t/ha, CV 18
MJ/kg); a rich typologies of waste to high energetic content (bagasse and barbojo); no
production and transport costs, since that the waste are both produced and used in the
factory: the only cost is due to the collection of the barbojo; favourable conditions of the
enterprises (fallen and oscillations of the price of the sugar); favourable characteristics of
cultivation (warm-humid climates, small demand for pesticides and chemical fertilisers);
has an important potential for the human sustainable development and modernisation on a
larger scale in developing countries.
Today the bagasse (sugarcane by-product that is generated in quantities abundant in
the mill process).is used at mills as a fuel by combustion to generate combined heat and
power (CHP). The combined CHP systems generate the process steam and at least the
great part of the electricity for the mill.
Additionally, the tops and leaves (barbojo or sugarcane trash) have the energetic
potential for the use as a fuel, facilitating the operation of the plant around the year. This
“barbojo” is typically burned on the fields to facilitate harvesting and replanting.

4 The sugarcane process

The sugarcane is harvested by hand cutting method or by mechanical harvesters. After
cutting, the cane is loaded by hand, mechanical grab loaders, or continuous loaders and
then is transported to the mills using trailers, trucks, railcars, or barges, depending upon
the relative location of the cane fields and the processing plants.
158

Figure 2. The Sugarcane

Sugarcane processing is oriented on the production of sugar (sucrose) from

sugarcane. Other products of the processing include bagasse, molasses, etc. Bagasse in
several developing countries is used for fuel for the boilers and production of numerous
paper and paperboard products. Bagasse and bagasse residue are primarily used as a fuel
source for the boilers in the generation of process steam.
We are focused in the energetic analyses of the process: electricity and steam process
production. In the old mill plants the steam process is produced by the use of boilers with
low efficiency (50%, Chiclayo – Peru) so the electricity requirements are insured in part.
The deficit of energy is obtained buying from the grid. In modern mill plants the
configuration of the plant is determined by the use bagasse in high efficiency modern
boiler (70-80%, Mauritius, Brazil, etc.) and a condensing extracted steam turbine or back-
pressure turbine. This configuration normally permits a surplus of electricity that can be
gathered and sold to the grid. This kind of modern plant and the other possible technical
solutions will be considered in this paper.
For the case study that we assess, the sugar mill of Chiclayo – Peru has five boilers
for the steam generation with more than 50 years of operation and then, the performance
and efficiency is poor. The steam expands into back-pressure turbine and after that is
carried to the process. Then, is possible identify technical solutions to raise the efficiency
of the plant and optimise the use of bagasse and barbojo, according with the current
bioenergy systems and experience in other sugar plants. CIRPS has a scientific-cultural
cooperation programme with universities in Peru and realised the joint-study of this
possible technical solutions for this sugar plant.
But, in Peru as in other countries, the absence of regulations make it unattractive for
sugar industries to invest in more efficient power generation. Currently the economy of
 159

Peru is strongly based on the use of Camisea gas project and the promotion of
hydroelectric projects.
The Pucalà cane sugar production plant has 2,500 employees; produces 905,300 t of
sugar cane (80 t/h), 633,724 t (187 t/h) of worked cane, 64,640 t of produced sugar. The
plant, situated near Chiclayo in the north coast of Peru, currently burns the barbojo in the
fields and uses bagasse in low efficiency boilers for process steam production. This makes
that the plant is not energetically self-sufficient and buys energy from the grid. A general
view of the plant can be seen in the figures 3 and 4.

Figure 3. General View of the Pucalà plant

Figure 4. General View of the Pucalà plant

160

ENERGY FLOW OF THE PUCALA' PLANT

(Quantity are in ktep/year; 1ktep = 20 mm²)

Residual
Bagasse 53.10 0.67 Petrol

ELECTRIC
GRID

0.97
53.77

STEAM
η = 52 %
ELECTRIC S.

GENERATOR
W. WELL

0.09 1.75

27.96

Limite impianto

0.87 5.76

DISTILLERY
11.66 10.54
PLANT LIMIT

TURBINE CRUSHING
1.44

10.50 8.05

REFINEMENT

STEAM: T = 338°C; P = 27.6 bar ; H = 3094.696 kJ/kg STEAM: T = 160°C; P = 2.1 bar ; H = 2788.398 kJ/kg.

Figure 5. The energy flow of the Pucalà plant.

The production process of cane sugar shows that the mill has the main energy
requirements. The flow of energy of the plant is showed in the figure 5.
The plant only uses the bagasse in order to contribute the satisfaction of energy
needs. In the figure 6 the steam flow diagram are illustrated. Energy demand, and
temperature and pressure of the necessary process steam are shown.
The energy balance at current conditions is:
• Energy from bagasse 53.77 ktep
• Energy from residual petrol 0.67 ktep
• Efficiency of the boiler 52%
• Process steam production 27.96 ktep (378,352 t)
 161

• Steam to crushing 10.54 ktep (142,574 t)

• Steam to turbine 11.66 ktep (157,752 t)
• Steam to distillery 5.76 ktep (78,026 t)
• Electric energy use/year 1.84 ktep (21,339,200 kWh)
• Electric energy production/year 0.87 ktep (10,118,100 kWh)
• Electric energy from the grid 0.97 ktep (11,281,100 kWh)

STEAM CYCLE OF THE PUCALA' PLANT

DISTILLERY
CRUSHING

REFINEMENT

Reduction Valve

G TURBIN
PLANT LIMIT

Reduction Valve

Water Feeding
CONDENSATORE
Control Valve

Water 100 °C

Steam: T = 338°C; P = 27.6 bar ; H = 3094.696 kJ/kg

Vapore: T = 160°C; P = 2,1 bar ; H = 2788,398 kJ/kg.

Steam: T = 126.67°C P = 2 bar ; H = 2715.83 kJ/kg.

Figure 6. The steam cycle of Pucalà plant

162

5 Upgrading of the power plant

A sugar mill operating in the conditions previously described and analysed can be
modified to obtain a major efficiency. The upgrading of the plant consists in the change of
the old boiler with a boiler of current technology, similar at other mill plants in others
countries (Brazil, Mauritius, Hawaii) coupling to condensing extraction steam turbine
CEST. The process steam demands can be met using only a portion of the available steam
with the CEST, extracting the steam at one or more points along the expansion path for
meeting process needs. Steam that is not extracted continues to expand to sub-
atmospheric pressures, thereby increasing the amount of electricity generated per unit of
steam compared to the back-pressure turbine. The non-extracted steam is converted back
to liquid water. The condensing steam turbine generally is employed to maximize
electricity production. A typical Condensing Extraction Steam Turbine (CEST) operates
at 4.0 to 6.0 MPa. These systems produce enough steam to supply a typical sugar factory
and distillery and export 30 to 100 kWh of electricity per tonne of cane (kWh/tc) to other
users or to the national grid. CEST systems represent the state-of-the-art for bagasse
cogeneration in terms of mature technologies that are fully commercialized in the
marketplace.
Under this operation condition the bagasse and the barbojo are used as a fuel. The
bagasse and barbojo are drying with the exit combustion gases, first to begin the process,
decreasing the humidity of the biomass around to 15-20%. The CV of the biomass will be
about 17 MJ/kg.
The energy balance considering this upgrading is:
• Energy from bagasse 75.22 ktep
• Energy from barbojo 55.12 ktep
• Energy from fossil fuel 0.67 ktep (to ignition of the boiler)
• TOTAL Energy available 131 ktep (+77.23 ktep respect to current condition)
• Efficiency of the boiler 85%
• Process steam production 111.35 ktep
• Steam to grind 10.54 ktep
• Steam to turbine 95.05 ktep
• Steam to distillery 5.76 ktep
• Electric energy use/year 1.84 ktep
• Electric energy production/year 60.87 ktep
• Electric energy to the grid 55.99 ktep

6 Biomass Integrated Gasification Combined Cycle - BIGCC

Biomass integrated gasifier combined cycle (BIGCC) technology is a process with more
high conversion efficiency. Further the development of gasification technologies is also
 163

important for a production of hydrogen form biomass. The system includes a pressurized
circulating fluidized-bed gasifier, gas turbine, and steam turbine. Gasification involves
transforming of biomass into a gas that can be used in a gas turbine, for example, to
generate electricity. Gasification of biomass for use in a high efficiency gas turbine is a
more advanced approach to bagasse cogeneration.
The steam drives a turbine-generator. Drying of the biomass is not usually required
before combustion, but will improve overall efficiency if waste heat is utilised for drying.
Steam turbines are designed as either "back-pressure" or "condensing" turbines.
Energy balance:
• Energy from bagasse 75.22 ktep
• Energy from barbojo 55.12 ktep
• Energy from fossil fuel 0.67 ktep (to ignition of the boiler)
• TOTAL Energy available 131 ktep (+77.23 ktep respect to current condition)
• Electric energy use/year 5.91 ktep (considering all internal use)
• Electric energy production/year 65.5 ktep
• Electric energy to the grid 59.59 ktep

7 Biomass Integrated Gasification Fuel Cell BIGFC

The previous considerations lead to the choice of a system that can be defined BIGFC
(Biomass Integrated Gasification Fuel Cell), that produces hydrogen rich gas from sugar
cane waste and uses that gas in fuel cells for power generation. The BIGFC plant will
consist of an atmospheric pressure gasifier, warm cleanup and MCFC power generation
unit, being the choices motivated by the following:
• no need of sophisticated feeding system and pressurised vessels;
• no need of high pressure (MCFC work at low pressure);
• noxious substances content well tolerated by MCFC and compressors.
• no need of additional gas coolers;
• no production of polluted water;
• noxious substances content well tolerated by MCFC and blowers.

A careful analysis of these reviews shows that there are still two main problems: a
through systems approach to gasification facility and the gas cleaning. The Indirectly
Heated Fluidized Bed Gasifier (IHFBG) - also defined Twin Fluidized Bed (TFB), or
Fast Internally Circulated Fluidized Bed (FICFB) - represents the best gasification
164

method for the purpose in the case of sugar cane biomass, because of:
• Independency of gas quality from fuel humidity content.;
• Separation of gasification and combustion processes;
• High calorific value of the gas, nitrogen free, with a little content of char and tars and
a rich content of hydrogen;
• No need of pure oxygen;
• No moving part.

In a BIGFC system the analysis of the gasification process is an essential part, which
allows, through the choice of a model, to be able to calculate the composition and the
characteristics of the obtained gas. When insufficient data are available in order to obtain
valid experimental relations, the experimental model is not suitable.
Energy balance:
• TOTAL Energy available 131 ktep
• Electric energy production/year 69.43 ktep (with 53% efficiency of MCFC)
• Electric energy use/year 6.10 ktep (considering all internal use)
• Electric energy to the grid 63.33 ktep

8 CONCLUSIONS
The use of bioenergy systems, specifically sugarcane plant, with modern technology
contributes directly to a major electrical production with high efficiency. For the case of
sugarcane plant in Chiclayo we can conclude that changing the old boiler for a modern
boiler the production of electricity is bigger than requirements of the plant, then the
surplus could be selling to the grid. The other possible technical solutions are the similar
results, ensure the steam for the process, the electrical requirement and permit that the
exceeding of electrical energy could be sell to the national grid. Sugarcane is an example
of the potential for biomass modernisation on a larger scale. In developing countries grow
and process sugarcane, generating substantial quantities of a fibrous biomass by-product
(bagasse) that is used today at most mills as a fuel for combined heat and power (CHP)
generation. CHP systems typically generate just enough electricity (a few megawatts at an
average-sized facility) and process steam to meet the processing needs of the mill. The
tops and leaves used as a fuel, would enable a CHP facility to operate year-round. With
more efficient CHP systems and year-round operation, substantial amounts of electricity
could be generated in excess of the mill’s own requirements.
The emergence of new technologies to exploit valuable agricultural biomass residues
has created new opportunities to diversify and expand sugarcane use, while capturing its
environmental benefits as a renewable energy resource. As a result, the sugar industries in
developing countries can increase profits and reduce risk by diversifying their production
portfolios to include cane-based bio-energy products.
 165

Is important to have into consideration that for a successful implementation of a

bioenergy project, different institutional actors must be involved. These actors might
include Central government, industries, non-governmental organisations, financing
institutions, bilateral and multilateral organisations (World Bank, United Nations, etc). It
is necessary to elaborate a coherent bioenergy policy, coordinated at a high level will
more effectively promote and expand bioenergy than an uncoordinated set of disparate
local activities. For example a central institution would support this coordination in
many ways. A central coordinating institution could also develop and promulgate
socioeconomic and environmental guidelines for bioenergy projects, including rules
regarding access to project information and provisions for public participation.

REFERENCES

1. Naso V., Orecchini F., Arroyo M., Santiangeli A. Barbojo: a tool for greenhouse
gases reduction. Proceeding of Sixth International Conference on Technologies and
Combustion for a Clean Environmental, Clean Air. New Customs House, Oporto,
Portugal. July 2002.
2. Naso V., Orecchini F., Arroyo M., Santiangeli A, Zuccari F. Utilizzo degli scarti
della canna da zucchero per la produzione di idrogeno in Perù. Proceeding of X
Convegno Tecnologie e Sistemi Energetici Complessi. Genoa 2001.
3. Bocci E. Produzione ed utilizzo energetico dell’idrogeno dagli scarti della canna da
zucchero in Perù. Degree thesis – University of Rome “La Sapienza”. 2002.
4. Bocci E., Orecchini F., Santiangeli A.,. Zuccari F. Elettricità da fonti energetiche
rinnovabili: le potenzialità dell’Italia. La Termotecnica, n.1, 2004.
5. Orecchini F. Idrogeno da fonti energetiche rinnovabili: le potenzialità dell’Italia. La
Termotecnica, n.3, 2004.
6. Pochiero M. Impiego Delle Fonti Energetiche Rinnovabili In Un Processo
Industriale: Il Caso Dello Zuccherificio Di Pucala' (Peru'). Degree Thesis.
University of Rome “La Sapienza”. 2003.
7. Arroyo M., Hydrogen production in Peru from renewable resources: potentiality of
barbojo of sugarcane. Ph.D. Thesis. University of Rome “La Sapienza. 2002.
8. Igoe M., Welch M. Biomass gets BIG. Power Engineering International. September,
2004
9. Helena L. Chum, Ralph P. Overend. Biomass and renewable fuels. Fuel Processing
Technology 71 2001 pag.187–195.
10. McLellan B., Shoko E., Dicks A.L., Diniz da Costa J.C. Hydrogen production and
utilisation opportunities for Australia. International Journal of Hydrogen Energy 30
(2005) 669 – 679.
11. Junfeng L, Runqing H. Sustainable biomass production for energy in China.
Biomass and Bioenergy 25 (2003) 483 – 499
12. Sharachchandra L. Sustainable use of biomass resources: a note on definitions,
criteria, and practical applications. Energy for Sustainable Development Volume I
No. 4. November 1994.
13. Kartha S., Larson E. Modernised biomass energy for sustainable development.
United Nations Development Programme. 2000.
 166

14. Demirbas A. Biomass resources facilities and biomass conversion processing for
fuels and chemicals. Energy Conversion and Management 42 (2001). 1357 – 1378.
15. Smouse S., Staats G., Rao S., Goldman R., Hess R. Promotion of biomass
cogeneration with power export in the Indian sugar industry. Fuel Processing
Technology 54 1998 227–247.
 FINANCING PROJECTS RELATED TO ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AND ENERGY EFFICIENCY

DANIEL ROLPH SCHNEIDER*

Department of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Sources, Environmental Protection and
Energy Efficiency Fund, Vladimira Nazora 50
Zagreb, Croatia

*
Department of Energy, Power Engineering and Environment, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering
and Naval Architecture, University of Zagreb, Ivana Lucica 5
Zagreb, Croatia

Appropriate financing of programs and projects in the field of environmental protection, energy
efficiency and renewable energy sources (RES) is one of major barriers to their realization. The
existing financial sources, including state budget, local self-government budgets, commercial banks,
international investment projects in environmental protection and international aid programs, are
often insufficient or unattractive from the investors' viewpoint. Environmental Protection and
Energy Efficiency Fund (EPEEF) is a relatively new player in Croatian investment market and it is
basically first and only extra-budgetary fund dedicated to financing preparation, implementation and
development of programs, projects and similar undertakings in the fields of preservation, sustainable
use, protection and improvement of the environment, energy efficiency and use of RES.

1 Introduction
Appropriate financing of programs, projects and other measures in the field of
environmental protection, energy efficiency and renewable energy sources (RES) is one
of major barriers (apart from the legislative, administrative, institutional, informational,
market and other barriers) to their realization. Those barriers are specially expressed in
Central and Eastern European countries. The existing financial sources, including state
budget, local self-government budgets, commercial banks, international investment
projects in environmental protection and international aid programs, are often insufficient
or unattractive from the investors' viewpoint.
Environmental Protection and Energy Efficiency Fund (EPEEF) is a relatively new
player in Croatian investment market and it is basically first and only extra-budgetary
fund dedicated to financing preparation, implementation and development of programs,
projects and similar undertakings in the fields of preservation, sustainable use, protection
and improvement of the environment, energy efficiency and use of RES in the Republic of
Croatia.
Central and Eastern European countries have now many years of experience with
such funds. First dedicated fund in the region was Polish National Fund for
Environmental Protection and Water Management established in 1989. In 1991 it follows
Czech and Slovak State Environmental Fund. Hungary and Bulgaria introduced similar

167
168

funds in 1993. Primary goal of all mentioned funds is to conduct policies and strategies of
environmental protection in home countries.
Experience of transitional countries showed that founding of such dedicated funds is
most suitable solution in financing environmental protection during transition to market
economy. It is also the most effective way to prevail and mitigate market and institutional
barriers.

2 Environmental Protection and Energy Efficiency Fund

2.1 Establishment and Organization

Environmental Protection and Energy Efficiency Fund is a legal person vested with public
authority in which, on behalf of the Republic of Croatia, founder’s rights are exercised
and duties discharged by the Government. EPEEF is established in 2003 according to the
Act on Environmental Protection and Energy Efficiency Fund which finds its basis in
Environmental Protection Act and Energy Act [1]. It became operational in the summer of
2004.
In its work EPEEF acts in accordance with number of laws and acts, such as:
Environmental Protection Act, Energy Act and other laws concerning energy activities,
National Environmental Protection Strategy, National Environmental Action Plan,
National Energy Strategy, National Energy Programs, Stabilization and Association
Agreement between Republic of Croatia and European Union and other international
agreements.

2.2 Activities
Basically, EPEEF covers financing preparation, implementation and development of
programs, projects and similar undertakings in two main areas:
• preservation, sustainable use, protection and improvement of the environment and
• energy efficiency and use of renewable energy sources.
In more details that includes:
• implementation of national energy programs,
• promotion of use of RES,
• sustainable building,
• cleaner transport,
• protection, preservation and improvement of air, soil, water and sea quality,
• moderation of climate change,
• waste management,
 169

• cleaner production,
• protection and preservation of biological and landscape diversity,
• promotion of sustainable use of natural resources,
• sustainable development of rural areas,
• sustainable economic development,
• enhancement of the system of information, monitoring and assessment of the state of
the environment,
• introduction of environment management system, and
• promotion of educational, research and development studies, programs, projects and
other activities.

2.3 Financial Resources

Environmental Protection and Energy Efficiency Fund is an extra-budgetary fund whose
financial resources are secured from charges levied in accordance with the Act on EPEEF
(emission and waste charges), bilateral and multilateral cooperation, revenues from
management of available monetary assets of the Fund, budgets of units of regional and
local self-government, in accordance with jointly defined programs and grants. Projected
revenue in 2006 is 1.003 billion HRK (or 136.5 million EUR).

The charges include:

1. Special environmental charge levied on motor vehicles. It applies as from March 1,
2004 and it is nowadays major financial resource of the EPEEF.
2. Charges levied on polluters of the environment (atmosphere), on:
• SO2 i NO2 emissions (310 HRK/ton or 2.5 EUR/ton),
• CO2 emission (12 HRK/ton or 1.6 EUR/ton). The CO2 emission charge is not yet
introduced. The procedure for adoption of the Regulation is still undergoing and
the Government of the Republic of Croatia will decide when to begin enforcing
it.
3. Charges for burdening the environment with waste, on:
• dumping municipal and non-hazardous industrial waste (12 HRK/ton or 1.6
EUR/ton). This charge applies as from June 1, 2004 only for industrial waste,
• production of hazardous waste (100 HRK/ton or 13.7 EUR/ton).
4. Charge levied on environmental users e.g. for buildings or building complexes that
are subject to procedure for assessment of their environmental impact. Not yet
implemented.
5. Charges levied on packaging, started in 2005:
170

• recovery charge (according to material type and product unit),

• return charge (on packaging for drinks),
• subsidy charge (on packaging for drinks).
Total planed revenues in 2006 from the charges are shown in Table 1.

Table 1. Planed revenues in 2006.

mill HRK
Financial assets revenues 1.20
CO2 emission charge 53.30
NO2 emission charge 5.00
SO2 emission charge 11.00
Environmental users charges 67.00
Municipal waste charges and Non-hazardous Industrial waste 13.20
charges
Hazardous Industrial waste charges 0.90
Special motor vehicles charge 200.00
Packaging charges 570.00
Waste tires recovery charge 25.00
Total revenue 1003.60

2.4 Planned investments

In the recent past the Government’s and the Fund’s priority was the waste management
(particularly landfills remediation) but in the near future the importance of the energy
efficiency will certainly grow (that can be seen from the four-year’s Plan of EPEEF [2]).
Allocation of the Fund’s resources in 2006 related to environmental protection and energy
efficiency is given in Figures 1 and 2.
Around 100 million HRK is allocated for energy efficiency, according to the
percentages given on Figure 1, which includes: implementation of national energy
programs, promotion of use of RES, sustainable building, cleaner transport, and other
programs and projects.
 171

Educational, research
and development Other projects and
studies programs in energy
Cleaner transport 2% efficiency Implementation of
5%
2% national energy
programs
Sustainable building
44%
15%

Promotion of use of
RES
32%

Figure 1. Planned investments in energy efficiency in 2006.

For the environmental protection in 2006 is allocated almost three times as much as
for the energy efficiency. 298 million HRK will be invested in following areas:
protection, preservation and improvement of air, soil, water and sea quality, moderation
of climate change, waste management, cleaner manufacturing processes, protection and
preservation of biological and landscape diversity, promotion of sustainable use of natural
resources, sustainable development of rural areas, sustainable economic development,
enhancement of the system of information, monitoring and assessment of the state of the
environment, introduction of environment management system, promotion of educational,
research and development studies, programs, projects and other activities (Figure 2).
172

Promotion of sustainable use

of natural resources Promotion of sustainable
Protection and preservation of Promotion of sustainable economic development
0,2%
biological and landscape development of rural areas 0,3%
diversity 0,3%
0,5% Educational, research and
development studies
Cleaner production 0,7%
4,8%
Other projects and programs
in environmental protection
Protection, preservation and 0,3%
improvement of air, soil, water
and sea quality and
moderation of climate change
2,1%

Remediation of hazardous
Remediation of landfills
waste disposal sites
50,0%
13,7%

Recycling and recovery of

valuable properties of waste
5,1%

Dump site remediation

Mitigation and lowering of 1,4%
amount of waste produced
Waste management units 1,6%
18,9%

Figure 2. Planned investments in environmental protection in 2006.

Financial resources of the Fund shall be allocated to units of local self-government,

legal and natural persons, which invest their own financial resources in programs and
projects for which tenders are issued. Funds will be given on the basis of the public
invitation of applications announced by the Fund. The resources shall be disbursed as
"soft" loans (zero – interest rate), subsidies (of interest rate on commercial loans), grants
and financial aid.
Fund shall not invite applications when, as a contractual party, it directly co-finances
and participates in the realization of programs, projects and similar undertakings.

2.5 Recent Developments

Since the Fund has been operating for two and half years now, there are number of
activities which are finished or are in progress. The majority of financial resources is
disbursed for environmental protection, specially for the waste management:
• Two public invitations to units of local self-government for remediation of 163
landfills have finished; 1,300 million HRK will be disbursed in 3-5 years.
• Dump sites remediation, currently on 40 locations, for units of local self-government;
25.9 million HRK is planned.
• Remediation of hazardous waste disposal sites, on 9 locations of highly polluted
environment - “black” spots, 545,000 HRK realized.
• Old tires recycling and energy use, 400,000 HRK.
 173

• Garbage containers, 1.5 million HRK.

• Biodiversity, 332,000 HRK: island of Brač - Algae (Caulerpe racemose), island of
Cres – White-headed vulture (Griffon vulture), etc.
First EPEEF’s activity in the field of energy efficiency and RES was the public invitation
for financing of energy audits and demonstrational activities in 2004. There were 37
energy audits in different companies executed by 9 energy auditors and 54
demonstrational activities of RES use and energy efficiency improvement. 2.2 million
HRK was disbursed in total.
Other activities [3] included two public tenders for financing programs and projects of:
• energy efficiency (waste heat recovery, insulation, DSM, district heating systems,
cogeneration, etc.), use of renewable energy sources (small wind, PV and solar
thermal, small hydro, biomass, biofuel production, heat pumps, geothermal, hybrid
system) and sustainable building (energy saving house, zero energy house, active and
passive solar systems, insulation, micro - cogeneration, calorimeters, etc).
• reduction of emissions to the atmosphere (harmful emission reduction, GHG
reduction, automatic measuring and monitoring of emissions, etc.) and cleaner
production (clean technologies, waste and wastewater reduction, more efficient usage
of raw materials, clean water and energy, reduction of emissions from the process,
etc.).
In total, 34 projects of energy efficiency, use of renewable energy sources and sustainable
building were accepted, for which 29 million HRK was allocated: 17.5 million HRK for
energy efficiency (15.5 million HRK of loans, 0.4 million of subsidies, 1.6 million HRK
of financial aid), renewable energy sources: 7.5 million HRK (2.3 million HRK of loans,
1.9 million of subsidies, 3.3 million HRK of financial aid), sustainable building: 3.8
million HRK: (1.7 million HRK of loans, 2.1 million HRK of financial aid).
The Fund is involved in number of national and international projects and programs.
The most important development is the recent grant of the Global Environment Facility
Trust Fund (GEF) and the World Bank: "Croatia – Renewable Energy Resources Project"
in the amount of 5.5 million USD, for developing a rational policy framework for
renewable energy [4]. This project has two main objectives: to support the market
framework and other market conditions for renewable energy and to ensure an adequate
and sustainable supply of potential projects through investment in the early stage of
renewable energy project development. Use of biomass for energy production is priority
but other RES systems (like wind or small hydro power plants) are not excluded. The
Fund co-finances this project with additional 2.5 million USD in next 3-5 years.
The GEF grant and other EU funds will certainly help Croatia to fulfill the national
goals for implementation of renewable energy, based on a clear understanding of the costs
and technical issues related to financing and installing projects.
174

References

1. V. Mladineo, Environmental Protection and Energy Efficiency Fund, 2nd edition

(2006).
2. Plan and program 2005-2008. Environmental Protection and Energy Efficiency
Fund. (2005). http://www.fzoeu.hr/hrv/pdf/program_rada_05-08.pdf
3. Program guidelines. 2005-2010. Environmental Protection and Energy Efficiency
Fund. (2004). http://www.fzoeu.hr/hrv/pdf/smjernice_2005.pdf
4. Croatia - Renewable Energy Resources Project. Project Appraisal Document. World
Bank. (2005). http://www-wds.worldbank.org
 AN ENERGY INTEGRATION TOOL FOR BATCH PROCESS

ANA C. PIRES
Department of Chemical Engineering, Instituto Superior de Engenharia de Lisboa
R. Conselheiro Emídio Navarro, 1949-014 Lisbon, Portugal

CRISTINA M. FERNANDES*
Department of Chemical Engineering- Instituto Superior Técnico
Av. Rovisco Pais, 1049-001 Lisbon, Portugal

CLEMENTE P. NUNES
Department of Chemical Engineering- Instituto Superior Técnico
Av. Rovisco Pais, 1049-001 Lisbon, Portugal

Process integration is widely applied to continuous process. Among different methodologies, Pinch
Analysis, with a thermodynamic basis is generally used due to it is easy implementation. The basic
concepts of Pinch Analysis were therefore extended in this work to a batch process. The software
developed, BatchHeat, highlights the energy inefficiencies in the process and thereby enables to set
the scope for possible heat recovery, through direct heat exchange or storage. The BatchHeat, was
applied to a case study as a first tool to get the targets for the heat exchanger network design. The
results obtained show the enthalpy behaviour of the process and define an upper bound for direct
heat transfer, thus suggesting different energy recovery projects. These alternatives were further
compared and discussed.

1 Introduction
Batch process interest emerged since the 80’s but mainly in the areas of simulation,
design, and process stage scheduling to minimize operation unit investment and energy
costs. However, process integration is also very important to optimise this type of
process, though the results obtained by application of this methodology to batch
processes have smaller energy savings, when compared with the results obtained for
continuous processes [1]. Generally, batch process industrials are not prone to energy
integration since they fear loosing control and flexibility. Furthermore, the costs related
to yield and quality of the product are usually much more important than any energy
savings from Process Integration.
Process integration, PI, is widely used in continuous processes [2]. Among different
methodologies, Pinch Analysis, with a thermodynamic basis is widely used due to its
easy implementation. The intermittent nature of batch processes imposes a three-
dimensional data treatment in terms of enthalpy, temperature and time, which brings up
high complexity, making manual treatment very difficult. The basic concepts of Pinch
Analysis (PA) were therefore applied to batch processes [3, 4]. Different strategies can be

* Corresponding author

175
176

applied depending on different scenarios [5, 6]: repeated batch when a cycle composed of
various operations is repeated sequentially and single batch when the operations can not
be considered to be repeated in time.
Literature review shows that software that deals with process integration is very
recent. Softwares using Pinch analysis are Supertarget, and PinchExpress; Aspen Pinch;
PRO_PI; HEXTRAN; PinchLeni, etc. To study batch processes, the available software
concerning operation planning, scheduling, simulation and resources are for example:
gBSS; BATCH; VirtECS Design; VirtECS Scheduler and Superbatch. The aim of this
work was to develop a computational application, BatchHeat, applying Pinch Analysis to
batch processes. This program is an initial tool for a global energy analysis, for
continuous and batch processes, allowing the visualization of the enthalpy behaviour of
the process through the Composite Curves construction.

2 BatchHeat Software
BatchHeat software presented in this work enables the user to determine the minimum
energy consumption of continuous and batch processes, using different scenarios [7].
The first step to start working with BatchHeat is to select the type of process: continuous
or batch. Afterwards, the user should fill a table with the characteristic variables for each
stream:
• Ts - supply temperature – stream temperature before heat exchange.

• Tt - target temperature – desired stream temperature after heat exchange.

• m! Cp - heat capacity of the stream, constant in the temperature and time interval
considered.

• ts - starting time.

• tf - finishing time.

• ∆Tmin – minimum temperature difference between hot and cold stream’s temperature.
If heat transfer is internal, the temperature becomes time dependent and the user should
split that stream in several intervals to reflect real conditions.
To make process integration study easier, BatchHeat allows the user to change
previous data. This is very important to test operation-rescheduling hypotheses, to modify
starting and finishing time of each operation, or to remove a stream included in the first
analysis. BatchHeat could also be used to study the influence of different ∆Tmin values on
process energy integration.
Initially the program presents the easiest approach, using Time Average Model
(TAM) presented by [6], which ignores the time and considers the process as a whole.
Afterwards, BatchHeat generates a table, dividing the process at various time intervals
 177

and in terms of shifted temperatures (T’), calculated for hot or cold stream temperatures
according to ∆Tmin value. The table also shows the total enthalpy variation for each
process stream. Hot streams are those requiring cooling and cold streams are those
requiring heating.
After constructing the process enthalpy data table, the program presents infeasible
the heat cascade [8]. As a first step the heat balance for a time period and between two
temperature levels is given by:

 
Qkj = (Tk - Tk -1 ) 
 ∑ m! hCph − ∑ m! c Cpc  (t j -t j -1 ) (1)
h c k, j

where k = [1, …, N] is the temperature level and j = [1, …, M] the time level.
To obtain the heat cascade, for each time period, along the temperature we calculate
the cumulative enthalpy values for the different temperature levels:

I kj = Qkj + I k −1, j (2)

imposing the boundary condition:

I 0 j = 0, for j = [1,..., M ] (3)

If there is any negative Ikj value, the cascade is said to be infeasible since the heat
must always flow from high temperatures. To overcome this situation, BatchHeat
generates a feasible heat cascade, where the minimum consumption of hot utilities at
each time interval is obtained by:
( (
F0 j = − min I 0 j ,..., I kj ,..., I Nj )) (4)

and the cumulative enthalpy values are recalculated for each temperature:

Fkj = Qkj + Fk −1, j (5)

From the calculated heat cascades for each time interval, the program enables the
determination of the minimum heat consumption maximizing direct heat exchange and
the visualization of the Grand Composite Curves for each time interval. These curves are
a graphic representation of the cumulative enthalpy values, Fkj, obtained from the feasible
heat cascades as a function of temperature.
Allowing heat flows to be time and temperature cascaded, it is possible to identify
different possibilities for storing heat during the batch to be used in later time intervals.
To obtain the energy storage potential for a single batch scenario, the program generates
two separated cascades [7, 8]: one showing the available heat and the enthalpy needs at
each temperature and the time interval. Comparing the heat required in one time interval
with the available energy in the previous time interval, according to the temperature
level, BatchHeat calculates the energy storage value.
178

Finally, program presents a resume table with the minimum consumption of hot and
cold utilities for several scenarios: without integration and with integration (including or
excluding the storage option).

3 Case Study
The present study is based on a case study of an industrial production of antibiotics. This
multi-purpose plant is presently developing a relevant work of research and development,
aiming an improvement in their production, considering also the energetic concerns.
In the first stage of this study, an analysis was performed to detect the zones with
higher thermal energy consumptions since a major production cost in this type of
factories is the electrical energy. The target at this stage is to identify the production steps
where some investment on energy recovery would be justified. Thus, some material and
energy balances were carried out to characterize in energy terms the process streams
where energy integration might be applied. As in continuous processes, the most
important step during the energy analysis is the extraction of stream data. Wrong data
leads to misleading targets and missed opportunities.
The analysis of the collected data led to the conclusion that these energy
consumptions vary in a relevant way, not only along the day but also along the week and
the month, depending on the production schedule. Thus, after the graphs of steam
consumptions in the production process have been analysed, the apparently most frequent
and unfavourable profile was established. The fermentation zone is working all the time
on a three shifts base, since each fermentation is working along cycles of several days.
Each fermentation batch starts with the feeding of the nutrient media to the fermenter
followed by a sterilization cycle in which the first period is an heating period to raise the
temperature inside the fermenter and the second period is a cooling period until the
proper temperature for the inoculation is achieved. This final temperature is usually
around room temperature. This cooling operation is carried out in two stages. In the first
stage the cooling of fermentation medium is performed with cooling water from a cooling
tower circuit whereas in the second stage a brine mixture of ethylene glycol / water is
used until the fermentation temperature is achieved.
One should remind that in this production zone, steam is used not only as a utility but
it is also directly injected inside the fermentation medium to exclude contaminations.
The Solvent Recovery Plant (Distillery) working, as average, 16 hours per day (2
shifts), uses 3.6 bar steam in several distillation units. Although the condensates of this
steam may not be recovered directly to the system for safety reasons their enthalpy
content may be recovered. The cooling water from cooling tower circuit satisfies this the
cooling needs of the condensers in this process zone.
The global analysis identified other hot water and steam consumers, namely dryers,
but, since the consumptions were not relevant, these units have not been considered in
this study. Besides that, steam is also used in several points of the process such as
sampling points. The resulting condensates were not accounted because they should be
 179

recovered directly to the steam boiler, reducing in this way the consumption of energy
and of water to be treated.
In this work it was decided to study the enthalpy needs of only the Fermentation and
Solvent Recovery zones, stressing four major process streams with interest for the energy
integration study: heating of fermenter with steam (stream 1), cooling of fermenter
(stream 2, 3 and 4); cooling of condensers with cooling water (stream 5) and cooling of
the condensates from Solvent Recovery units (stream 6). Since the fermenter temperature
during cooling is time dependent the original stream was splitted in three (stream 2 ,3 and
4) to reflect real conditions.
In the last stage of the sterilization process of the fermenter the heating should be
carried out with direct steam injection and for this reason this step has not been included
in the present work. In this study, streams related to the utilities system were also
accounted since in this unit there is a preliminary heating of the total boiler feed water,
since no condensates recovery is performed (stream 7, 8, 9 and 10).
Figure 1 presents the input stream data window, where hot and cold streams are
characterized and a ∆Tmin value of 10 ºC is imposed.

Stream Data

Stream Data
Stream Nº
∆Tmin:10

Figure 1. Input stream data window.

Heat cascade analysis is used to obtain the minimum hot and cold utilities
consumption, requiring splitting the process streams in different time intervals. This
model allows following accurately the enthalpy variation along time, showing the
temperatures and time intervals, where it is necessary to use external heating and cooling.
Applying this model to the case study data, we obtain the feasible heat cascades
presented in Figure 2.
It should be noticed that the temperature axis is T`, which is a shifted temperature
considering the ∆Tmin approach imposed in this study. Hot streams are represented
∆Tmin/2 colder and cold streams ∆Tmin/2 hotter than they are in practice. These
cascades show, for each time period, the pinch temperature point (temperature
180

corresponding to a null enthalpy value), as well as the hot utility consumption (first line
values) and cold utility consumption (last line values). Therefore, from Figure 2 one can
conclude that the minimum consumption of hot and cold utility is 5 287.5 kWh and
4 261.3 kWh respectively.
Feasible Heat Cascade
Visualize

Feasible Heat Cascade, kWh

Time Intervals
Temperatures, T’

Figure 2. Feasible heat cascade for this case study.

Grand Composite Curves

Visualize

Grand Composite Curves

D.H.E. = 0.0 D.H.E. = 0.0 D.H.E. = 85.5 D.H.E. = 39.0 D.H.E. = 15.7

Figure 3. Grand Composite Curves for the first five time intervals.
 181

The program also presents the Grand Composite Curves, for different time intervals,
which were obtained by plotting the heat cascades presented previously. This cascade
analysis allows identifying what streams may directly exchange heat, the enthalpy
involved in these exchanges (D.H.E) as well as the storage potential (values above the
arrow). Figure 3 and Figure 4 exhibits the Composite Curves obtained through BatchHeat
for this case study.

Grand Composite Curves

Visualize

Grand Composite Curves

D.H.E. = 2264.0

Figure 4. Grand Composite Curve for the sixth time interval.

From Figure 3 we can also calculate a storage potential value in a single batch
scenario of 927 kWh which corresponds to a hot and cold utility consumption of
4 360.5 kWh and 3 334.3 kWh, respectively.
Table 1 summarizes the energy targets obtained for the different scenarios, showing
that process integration without storage gives a scope to reduce the hot utility
consumption by around 31 % and the cold utility by 36 %.
Table 1. Energy targets for this case study for three different integration scenarios
With Integration
Without
Integration With Storage,
Without Storage
in Single Batch
Total Storage, kWh - - 927.0
Hot Utility, kWh 7691.7 5287.5 4360.5
Cold Utility, kWh 6665.5 4261.3 3334.3
182

Based on Figure 3 and Figure 4 and considering the scenario of process integration
without storage a comparison of the direct heat exchange opportunities, for the different
time periods, was evaluated and presented in Table 2. This table enables the user to
decide the viability of each heat exchange and to choose to carry them out or not. In the
present case, and since the direct heat exchange of the sixth period between streams 5, 6
and 10 corresponds to 2 264 kWh and this enthalpy value is much higher than all the
other ones we decided to carry out the study of different heat recovery projects for the
last period of time (8 – 24 h). In this time period we have the distillery and the steam
boiler working.

Table 2. Comparison of the direct heat exchange opportunities for the different
time periods
D.H.E.
Time Interval Hot Stream Cold Stream
(kWh)
3rd 2 9 85.5
4th 3 9 39.0
5th 4 9 15.7
6th 5,6 10 2264.0

To achieve the targets predicted by the program three projects of heat recovery were
proposed. Project A and B use stream 5 (cooling of condensers) and stream 6 (cooling of
the condensates) to preheat the total boiler feed water. The remaining energy needs are
supplied by hot and cold utilities from the plant. Project C was created to reduce the number
of heat exchangers leading to the cooling of the condensates with a single exchanger and
using a cold utility.

Figure 5. Project A - parallel scheme for direct heat integration of stream 5, 6 and 10.
 183

Figure 6. Project B - series scheme for direct heat integration of stream 5, 6 and 10.

Figure 7. Project C - direct heat integration of stream 6 and 10.

Having set up the utility consumptions, the area and the number of heat exchangers
were calculated. The comparison of the different energy recovery projects were
performed by calculating for each scheme the total annualized cost. The investment for
double pipe heat exchangers and shell and tube heat exchangers were obtained using the
graphs presented in [9]. The costs of utilities were also estimated using the prices referred
in [9]: 0.08$/1000kg of cooling water and 4.4$//1000kg of saturated steam. The
investment was annualized for a five-year period and at a fixed rate of interest of 5%
using the annualized factor:

i (1 + i )n
Annualized capital cos t = capital cos t × (6)
(1 + i )n − 1
Table 3 presents the comparison of the three projects proposed, showing that A and
B projects have smaller energy consumption since the direct heat exchange is maximized.
Project C is a simpler one having higher utility consumption, but a smaller investment. In
this case, and as the capital cost is not very relevant, project A seems to be the optimal
choice because it presents the smaller total annual cost.
184

Table 3. Comparison of the three recovery heat projects.

Consumptions Annual Cost ($)
D.H.E. (kWh) Utilities
Projects
(kWh) Hot Capital Cold Total
Cold Utility Steam
Utility Water
A 2 264 1 704 1 800 1 053.25 4 542.49 4 092.63 9 688.37
B 2 264 1 704 1 800 1 298.08 4 542.49 4 092.63 9 933.20
C 1 664 2 304 2 400 789.93 6 141.96 5 456.84 12 388.73

4 Conclusion
Pinch analysis advantage is expressed by simple and easy application to real situations,
continuous or batch processes, through suggestion of process modifications in order to
reduce heat consumption and effluents.
Batch processes having a three-dimensional dependency of enthalpy, temperature
and time, make the application of Pinch Analysis to this type of process very complex.
BatchHeat software, using automatic calculation allows a global process view and
enables to identify exceeding and deficit enthalpy areas and therefore to obtain Heat
Exchanger networks corresponding to the minimum heat consumption. The Cascade
Analysis was applied to a case study to highlight the inefficiencies in the process and
thereby to set the scope for three possible heat recovery projects. These alternatives were
afterwards compared in term of the total annual cost. BatchHeat is therefore an initial
tool for a global energy analysis of all productive process, including continuous and
discontinuous process and utility system.

Nomenclature

Cp – specific heat capacity, kJ/kg K

F – heat flow for the feasible heat cascade, kWh
I – heat flow for the feasible heat cascade, kWh
m! – mass flow rate, kg/s
Q – heat load for a batch process, kWh
T – absolute temperature, K
t – time, s
Subscripts
j – time level
k – temperature level
min – minimum
h – hot
c – cold
 185

References

1. B. Linnhoff, and R. Smith, Chem Eng Res Des 66, 195 (1988).
2. T. Gundersen and L. Naess, Heat Recovery Systems & CHP 10, 301 (1990).
3. I.C. Kemp and A.W. Deakin, Chem Eng Res Des 67, 495 (1989).
4. I.C. Kemp and A.W. Deakin, Chem Eng Res Des 67, 510 (1989).
5. I.C. Kemp, and A.W. Deakin, Chem Eng Res Des, 67, 517 (1989).
6. I.C. Kemp, Heat Recovery Systems & CHP 10, 423 (1990).
7. A.C. Pires, M.Sc. Thesis, IST Mech. Eng. Dept., Lisboa, (1999).
8. A.C. Pires, M.C. Fernandes, H.A. Matos and C.P. Nunes, Proceedings of EPMESCIX,
Macao 641 (2003).
9. M.S. Peters, K.D. Timmerhaus and R.E. West, McGraw-Hill, New York, (2003).
 THE EFFECT OF WATER OBJECTS ON SUMMER MICROCLIMATE
IN DRY REGIONS

ROBERT VUKIĆ, VESNA LACKOVIĆ

Building Research Department, Civil Engineering Institute of Croatia, Janka Rakuše 1
Zagreb, HR-10000, Croatia

Air/water heat exchange can be used for natural cooling of open spaces and building interior.
Potential of open static and dynamic water objects for lowering air temperature is analysed through
simplified calculations. How building and open space features influence natural cooling with water
is shown on examples. Appropriate inclusion of open water objects in building ensembles can
improve microclimatic conditions and thus summer thermal comfort.

1. Summer Energy Efficiency of Buildings

Beside well-known mechanisms of winter energy efficiency of buildings, summer energy
efficiency has also become important topic for a number of years. Rise of standard of
living has brought the significant increase in use of air conditioning devices in southern
European regions, while unusually hot summers in the last few years had the same
consequence in some parts of central Europe. With the aim not to lose, by use of air
conditioning equipment, the funds saved by winter efficiency measures, to decrease
emission of greenhouse gases and to avoid adverse effects of air conditioning devices on
human psycho-physiological comfort, a number of natural cooling techniques in
buildings and adjacent open spaces have been developed.

1.1. Natural Cooling Techniques

The ways of cooling buildings without use of artificial air-conditioning are of course not
new, but well known for centuries. New, sometimes complex, and often simply neglected
and forgotten is the application of these cooling techniques in contemporary buildings.

1.1.1. Natural cooling of exterior place

Important role in natural cooling of buildings have cooling measures in the exterior, open
spaces, next to the building. The aim of these measures is to lower the load on, and to
contribute to, natural cooling of the interior, and to improve thermal comfort in open
spaces.
Natural cooling measures in exterior places can be particularly interesting in hotel
industry and restaurants (open terraces), same as on fairgrounds, urban open spaces (city
centres), etc. Basic means for exterior natural cooling are [1]:
• Plants;
• Shading;

186
 187

• Ventilation;
• Use of water;
• Thermal inertia of the ground;
• Systems of long-wave radiation;
• Filter organization;
• Strategy of use schedule, zone definition, psychological aspects, etc.

2. Use of Water for Natural Cooling

To be able to use water for natural cooling of open space and building interior, one has to
be familiar with heat transfer processes on open water surface [2]. In principle, these are:
• Radiation from the sun.
• Long-wave radiation from water to night sky.
• Direct heat transfer air/water (transfer of sensible heat).
• Evaporative heat transfer.
• Advective heat transfer (currents, vertical convection, turbulence).
There are also secondary processes that can have effect on thermal state of an open water
mass:
• Chemical/biological processes.
• Thermal processes in earth's interior and hydrothermal activity.
• Current friction.
• Radioactivity.
Mentioned processes can happen in any open water mass, though secondary processes are
more present in natural water masses such as rivers, lakes, seas and oceans. Through all
these processes the heat is either transferred to, or from, water mass. Secondary processes
are always source of heat.

2.1. Natural Cooling of Air by Means of Artificial Water Objects

If the purpose of inclusion of artificial water objects in a building ensemble is to cool air,
few principles have to be observed to be able to fully exploit positive characteristics of
water mass.
188

For the purpose of this paper we have introduced two types of artificial water objects:
• “Static” such as (swimming) pools, basins, small artificial lakes, etc.
• “Dynamic” such as waterfalls, cascades, fountains, canals, water curtains, etc.
Functioning of these types is based on two physical processes:
• Sensible heat exchange, i.e. direct heat transfer from air to water.
• Latent heat exchange, i.e. evaporation.

2.1.1. “Static” Water Objects

Thermal inertia, i.e. substantial specific heat of “static” water objects, is its major
property that makes it convenient for cooling of air. The air with lower, acceptable
temperature, around and in the building can be achieved by means of heat transfer from
air to water. For this to happen, basic assumption of water being cooler than air in the
process of heat transfer has to be fulfilled:
Twater < Tair. (1)
This temperature difference ∆T should be maintained during whole cooling period. To
prevent warming up of water as much as possible, there are few measures that should be
applied:
• Blocking radiation from the sun to water mass during day (shading), Figure 1.
• Enabling heat transfer from water to the ground (no thermal insulation).
• Encouraging long wave radiation from water surface to sky during night (no
shading), Figure 2.

Figure 1. Day-time regime of water object regarding cooling of air.

 189

Figure 2. Night-time regime of water object regarding cooling of air.

• Stimulating evaporation during night.

Evaporation from “static” water objects should be kept low during day, so that cooled air
still has acceptable humidity.

2.1.2. “Dynamic” Water Objects

Cooling of air through increased evaporation is characteristics of dynamic water objects
and two measures are necessary for achieving favourable microclimatic conditions and
continuous evaporation process:
• Combination with ventilation to control relative air humidity.
• Shading of “dynamic” water objects to achieve lower air temperature.
“Dynamic” water objects can function in closed cycles maintained by electric pumps
powered with photovoltaic panels.

3. Basic Equations for Heat Exchange Air/Water

To be able to estimate the essential parameter of the cooling process, i.e. temperature
difference between the air coming to and air leaving a water object, it is necessary to
know heat fluxes from air to water. Sensible heat flux jsens at different temperatures of air
Tair and of water surface Tsurf can be approximated from [3] by:

jsens = k Tair ρair cpair (Tair - Tsurf ) , (2)

190

air
where ρair denotes air density, cp specific heat of air and k Tair transfer velocities of heat
in air.
Phase change of water from liquid to gaseous phase requires latent heat of
evaporation Le = 2.344·10-6 J kg-1 from air/water interface. Relative air humidity h near
water surface is driving force of latent heat flux jlat that can be approximately determined
from [3] by:

jlat = - k qair Le cq (1 - h) , (3)

air
where Le denotes latent heat of evaporation, cq saturation vapour density and k q transfer
velocities of water vapour in air.
Temperature difference of water due to evaporation ∆T, in conditions without heat
exchange with the surroundings, is given by the relation between heat loss of water
necessary for evaporation, ∆Q and specific heat of water c and mass of water m from [4]:

∆Q . (4)
∆T =
cm

According to Eq. (4), temperature difference of 200 g of water, as consequence of

evaporation of 0.5 g water, is equal to ∆T = 1.35 °C. In Table 1 is shown previous
experience [1] regarding capability of water evaporation for cooling of air.

Table 1. Cooling of air through water evaporation.

Air Temperature T Relative humidity h

(°C) (%)
Input 35 40
Output 26.5 80
Heat transfer from air for evaporation of 1 g water q = 2428 J
Upper limit of psycho-physiological comfort h = 80 %

4. Analysis of Natural Cooling Air/Water on Two Examples

Two real buildings with nearby water objects are discussed with respect to possibility for
natural cooling using water as heat sink. First building with open swimming pool
represents example of use of “static” water object, while second one with the
flowing/falling water canal and partly sprinkling water represents example of use of
“dynamic” water object.
 191

4.1. Swimming Pool near the Building

A villa, situated on the east coast of the Adriatic Sea enjoys Mediterranean climate [5],
with high summer temperatures and low relative air humidity. An open swimming pool is
placed next to the south side of the building, Figure 3.

Figure 3. Villa with the swimming pool, cooling measures

Although a swimming pool positively influences summer microclimatic conditions

through water evaporation, it cannot be fully exploited for cooling purposes due to its
function. Water intended for cooling of air should be at lowest possible temperature to
retain its thermal capacity during whole day period. For this reason it should by all means
protected from sun radiation, through, e.g. reflective canopy, Figure 3.
If the purpose of natural water cooling is also to cool interior spaces, the path of the
cooled air into the building should be enabled, same as stimulation of its circulation by
means of convenient arrangement of interior and exterior spaces aiming at triggering of
physical process of warm air rising and replacing it with cooled outside air.

4.2. Water Canal and Small Waterfall near the Building

A small traditional water mill is situated in a continental region of southeast Europe [6].
An open canal delivers water to the mill, superfluous water being dissipated as small
waterfall. Due to the extremely hot summers in recent years, mentioned region
experiences high thermal stress during summer months. For this reason, it is useful to
consider cooling processes in this example, as model for more artificial building
situations, Figure 4.
192

Figure 4. Water mill as a model for urban applications.

Flowing of water is essential difference between “static” and “dynamic” water

object. Evaporation rate and heat loss rate to the ground of flowing water is higher than
with the “static” water, so that lower water temperature is easier retained. Basic principle
of protecting the water object from sun radiation was accidentally observed in this case,
where main process of cooling of air proceeds through evaporation. If penetration of
cooled air in the building were desired, additional provisions would have to be made in
this instance.

5. Requirements for Practice and Future Research

Efficiency of natural cooling techniques fundamentally depends on their purposeful
spatial integration with the buildings and open spaces, because they use and enhance
natural processes already present in the in the environment, Figure 5.
For this reason, city planers and architects should be familiar with the principles of
natural mechanisms described in the paper to be able to include them properly in urban or
architectural solutions, Figure 6. Natural cooling of air by means of open water objects
should be carefully planned, because of the rise of relative air humidity that can have
adverse effect on psycho-physiological comfort [7]. Planers should indeed be aware of
the whole year use cycle of building and open spaces and plan the use regimes of water
objects, or alternatively empty water containers, all year round.
Existing water objects near buildings, e.g. swimming pools or decorative basins and
lakes, can help alleviate summer thermal stress. However, they are predominantly not
suitable to be fully exploited for purpose of cooling of air, due to their primary function,
or to the inconvenient spatial relation to the building.
Beside effect of cooling, use of water in the summer environment also has other
advantages. Visual and aural characteristics of water positively influence psychological
well-being.
 193

Figure 5. Natural air movement near the water mass during the day.

Figure 6. Integration of design with the natural cooling solutions.

5.1. Future Research

If natural cooling techniques are to be convincing replacement for standard air-
conditioning and suitable for planning, their parameters have to be determined at least
approximately. In this sense, next step of research in the field of natural cooling of air by
194

means of water would be determination of parameters that influence effect of cooling in

both described models. Although various studies already exist, it would still be optimal to
conduct a case study with the foreseen duration of parameter monitoring of 30
uninterrupted days during summer period, due to specific microclimatic conditions in
different regions and various building and open space solutions and configurations.

Nomenclature
Twater water temperature; Le latent heat of evaporation;
Tair air temperature; h relative air humidity;
∆T temperature difference; jlat latent heat flux;
jsens sensible heat flux; cq saturation vapour density;
Tsurf water surface temperature; k qair transfer velocities of water vapour in air;
ρair air density; ∆Q heat loss;
cpair specific heat of air; c specific heat of water;
k Tair transfer velocities of heat in air; m mass of water;

References
1. S. Alvarez, E. Maldonado, M. Santamouris, S. Yannas, Building design for summer
comfort, European Commission ALTENER programme, 2000
2. F.J. Bueche, Introduction to physics for scientists and engineers, McGraw-Hill
Kogakusha Ltd., 1975.
3. EXPO'92 Sevilla, Cuaderno de trabajo 5 – Estudio Bioclimatico, Escuela Superior
de Arquitectura de Sevilla
4. C. S.Garbe, Measuring Heat Exchange Processes at the Air-Water Interface from
Thermographic Image Sequence Analasys, PhD Thesis, Rupertus Carola Unversity,
Combined Faculties for Natural Sciences and for Mathematics, Heidelberg, Germany
5. http://archiv.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/volltextserver/volltexte/2002/1875/
6. http://courses.eas.ualberta.ca/eas327/eas327exchg.html
7. http://www.auf.asn.au/meteorology/section1a.html
8. http://www.d.umn.edu/~rhasan/Chap8_psych_HT.htm
9. http://www.lovranske-vile.com/foto/bazen-+-vila2-360.jpg
10. http://www.thermexcel.com/english/program/pool.htm
11. http://www.tzzz.hr/novo/slikenovo/kultura/samobor%20vodenica.jpg
12. http://www.uwsp.edu/geo/faculty/ritter/geog101/textbook/energy/
energy_balance.html
13. http://www.valdosta.edu/~grissino/geog3150/lecture1.htm
14. http://www-das.uwyo.edu/~geerts/cwx/notes/chap04/penman.html
15. M. Tomczak, The Global Oceanic Heat Budget, 2000.
http://www.es.flinders.edu.au/~mattom/IntroOc/notes/lecture04.html
ENERGY COGENERATION

195
This page intentionally left blank
 FIRST MICRO COMBINED HEAT AND POWER SYSTEM IN A
SWIMMING POOL IN PORTUGAL: TECHNO-ECONOMICAL
EVALUATION AND POLICY FRAMEWORK

ELISEU MONTEIRO
R&D Department, Tecaprod, S.A.
Vila Real, 5000, Portugal

NUNO AFONSO MOREIRA

CETAV, University of TAD
Vila Real, 5000, Portugal

A micro combined heat and power (MCHP) system supplied by propane was studied and
implemented in a swimming pool. The study starts with the electric energy production Portuguese
policy framework and energy consumption analyses. The selected MCHP system has the power of
22 kWe and 45 kWth in order to fulfill with the limitations imposed by policy framework. The
electrical power generated is, intentionally, higher than the requirements to supply the exceeding
energy to the network. In the economic evaluation we studied and simulate different situations of
buying and selling electrical energy based on the Portuguese tariff. The system reveals to be
economic viable for the company as well as for the host. This project is the first of the kind
implemented in Portugal and represent a step forward for the country energy market.

1 Introduction
Combined heat and power (CHP), also known as cogeneration, means that both electrical
and thermal energy are generated simultaneously. The benefit is the overall efficiency,
which can be as much as 85–90% [1]. If only electricity is produced, an efficiency of only
40–45% can be achieved. When compared to conventional thermo-power generation, it
ensures lowest energy consumption and reduces pollutants emissions [2]. Additionally,
cogeneration plants could serve electricity markets with lower investments in the
transmission and distribution grids and with lower energy losses during transmission [3].
Thus, CHP can be regarded as an efficient way to produce energy. Conventionally, CHP
plants have been large-sized, centralized units. Steam and heat produced by these plants
can be utilized in industrial processes and district heating, provided that the steam
temperature is high enough. A new trend is towards distributed CHP, which means that
the energy production unit is situated close to energy consumers and large-sized,
centralized units are substituted by smaller ones. If the electrical power produced by the
plant is less than 1 MW or 50 kW, the terms small-scale distributed CHP and micro-CHP
are used, respectively [4]. It is expected that every residential boiler would be replaced by
a cogeneration unit in the near future resulting in an enormous potential. Furthermore
every swimming pool, rest home, apartment, school, etc. will be suitable for a small-scale
or micro cogeneration unit [5].

197
198

The relevant competing technologies in this regard are internal combustion engines,
micro-turbines, Stirling engines, and fuel cells. In the smallest size, fuel cells and Stirling
engines are regarded as the most applicable technologies being the internal combustion
engines and turbines applicable in the remaining cases.
Regarding the independent electric energy production policy framework, the entity
“producer-consumer” was created by the Decree-Law 68/2002 allowing the production of
electric energy in low tension. This paper shows the first application in Portugal of this
law.

2 Policy framework
In Portugal, the electric sector has been the object of profound changes since the end of
the 1980’s, when the production and distribution of electric energy was opened up to
private initiative through Decree-Law 449/88. In 1991, the restructuring of this sector
continued its evolution with Decree-Law 99/91, which established the general principles
of the legal regime for the activities of production, transmission and distribution of
electric energy.
The bases and principles of the organization and functioning of the National Electric
System, in its actual legislative framework, were set down in Decree-Law 182/95, of 27th
July, with the subsequent wording given by Decree-Laws 56/97 of 14th March, 24/95 of
24th January, and 198/2000 of 24th August.
The principals established by this legislative package were developed by Decree-
Laws 183/95, 184/95, 185/95 and 187/95 of 27th July, which approved the general legal
regimes of production, distribution and transmission of electric energy.
Directive 96/92/CE of the European Parliament and the Council resulted in
widespread changes to the legal and organizational panorama of the electric sector. The
National Electric System (SEN) has been subject to many alterations. Based on the
above-mentioned legal instruments, specific regulations were produced, and revised in
September 2001, of which special mention should be made to the Tariff Code, the
Commercial Relations Code, the Dispatch Code and the Access to the public grid and to
the Interconnections Code.
In 2002, the entity “producer-consumer” was created by the Decree-Law 68/2002
allowing the production of electric energy in low tension. At least 50% of the produced
electric energy must be self-consumed. The maximum power which can be delivered to
the grid is 150 kWe [6].
The remuneration for the electric energy delivered to the grid is defined by the
following equation [7]:
VRDm = VRD( BTE ) m + Ct × EECm × IPCdez ÷ IPCref , (1)

where:
- VRDm is the monthly remuneration;
 199

- VRD(BTE)m – is the electric energy value delivered to the network by the

installation in SLV (special low voltage) tariff excluding the fixed monthly
charge and the power fee;
- Ct – used technology coefficient, varying from 0.01 €/kWh (Otto engine cycle)
to 0.20 €/kWh (photovoltaic and fuel cells);
- EECm – electric energy delivered to the network;
- IPCdez – consumer prices index in December of the last year (equal to 107,
December 2005);
- IPCref – reference consumer prices index (equal to 98.1, December 2001).

3 Energetic Analysis
In order to evaluate the potential energy saving of a MCHP system it is important to
compare the primary energy used by the MCHP with that used in conventional systems
that supply the electric and thermal demands of the user; to this aim it is important to
underline that the energetic analysis, and then the efficiencies evaluation, must be defined
with reference to the energy actually used by the end-user and not with reference to a
control volume that includes the system only.
The existing heating system is composed by a boiler supplied by propane and electric
energy is supplied by the public grid. The annual consumption is showed in the Figure 1.

100

Electric ity
80
P ro pane

60

40

20

0
J an F eb M ar A pr M ay J un J ul A ug S ep Oct N o v D ec

Figure 1. Energy consumption of the conventional system.

The average value of electric energy consumption is about 9.000 kWhe per month. It
is possible to verify that there is no consumption of propane during three months (July,
August and September) which corresponds to the period where the swimming pool is
closed. The average value of thermal energy consumption per month is about 52.000
kWhth.
200

In order to have a better idea of the real energy consumption measurements were
made in typical the winter and summer days. These measurements are showed in the
Figures 2 and 3.

80
Thermal Energy

60 Electric Energy
Energy [kWh]

40

20

0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
Time [h]

Figure 2. Energy consumption on a typical winter day.

80

Electric Energy
60
Thermal Energy
Energy [kWh]

40

20

0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
Time [h]

Figure 3. Energy consumption in a typical summer day.

It’s possible to verify that the electric power consumption ranges about 10 to 15 kWe.
The thermal power consumption ranges about 20 to 70 kWth. The boiler efficiency is
78%.
 201

4 System dimensioning
The competing technologies in this regard are internal combustion engines (ICE), micro-
turbines, Stirling engines, and fuel cells. The last two technologies were not considered
because of the high investment costs. Between the engines and micro-turbines the features
are very similar. An ICE was chosen essentially because it high electrical power/heat flow
ratio [5,8].
According with the power consumption and the limitations imposed by the Decree-Law
68/2002, the selected MCHP system has the following characteristics:
1. Electric power: 22 kWe;
2. Thermal power: 45.5 kWth;
3. Fuel consumption: 77.5 kWc;
4. Efficiency: 87%.

5 Implementation
The introduction of the MCHP system in the swimming pool facility promotes some
changes that must be made. Figure 4 shows the energy flux between the MCHP system,
swimming pool and the electrical company.

Figure 4. Energy flux in the swimming pool.

The MCHP system produces heat and power that is supplied to the swimming pool
facility. The excess of electric energy is supplied to the public grid. For security reasons
the electric connection to the public grid was maintained which allows the use an
asynchronous generator. The electric installation was made like is showed in Figure 5.
202

Figure 5. Electric installation.

The installed power is 50 kVA, therefore according to the Portuguese electrical

company we are in the special low voltage (SLV) tariff, which means that the reactive
energy must be measured. The generator produces electric energy that is measured in a
meter, connected to an electrical panel for protection. Two meters serial coupled measure
the electric energy delivered and acquired to the network. These two systems are linked to
a general electrical panel, from where the end-user is supplied.

6 Economic evaluation
In order to find the best tariff of buying and selling electric energy to and for the public
grid some possible scenarios are study.
The old electric installation was supplied in normal low voltage (NLV) and new
electric installation is supplied in special low voltage (SLV). There are two different
situations on the SLV tariff: medium (SLV-MU) and long utilizations (SLV-LU). In both
cases the active energy is daily scheduled charged into three different values. The
interested reader can consult the reference [9] for further information.
The peak active energy has a high cost when considering medium utilizations,
whereas considering long utilizations is the power in peak hours that has a high cost. The
reactive energy is only charged in the off-peak hours and if the value is higher than 40%
of the active energy consumption. This situation never happens in the considered
installation, therefore this term is null.
Before simulating the annual performance of the MCHP system a critical situation must
be solved. When the swimming pool is closed no thermal energy is consumed, therefore
two cases are studied:
• Full stop (Table 1);
• Running only in peak hours (Table 2).
 203

Table 1. MCHP full stop economical evaluation.

Producer
Billing element Consumer (€)
(€)
Peak 148.2
Active energy Standard 258.8 761.4
Off peak 112.5
Peak hours 140.1
Power 0.0
Fee 61.5
Fixed monthly charge 18.6 91.6
Total 740 853

Table 2. Economic evaluation of the MCHP running only in peak hours.

Producer
Billing element Consumer (€) Network (€)
(€)
Peak 0 197
Active energy Standard 259 761.4 0.0
Off peak 112 0.0
Peak
0 - 62
Power hours
Fee 62 - 0.0
Fixed monthly charge 18.6 91.6 0.0
Propane 428 - 12
Total 879.6 853 271

From Tables 1 and 2 it is possible to conclude that the MCHP system should run in
peak hours whenever the swimming pool is closed.
The new energetic condition was simulated and the following graphics were
obtained.
Figure 6 shows that the electric energy produced is enough to the swimming pool
except in the months where the swimming pool is closed. The consumption is higher than
50% of the produced energy, which is in agreement with the Portuguese policy.
Figure 7 shows that the backup boiler will work only during six months per year with
a small contribution for the overall thermal energy consumption.
204

80

Consumption MCHPproduction

60
Energy [MW

40

20

0
Jan Feb Mar April May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec

Figure 6. New profile of the electric energy.

80

Backup boiler MCHP

60
Energy [MW

40

20

0
Jan Feb Mar April May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec

Figure 7. New profile of the thermal energy.

Table 3 shows the annual operational simulation where the maintenance costs were
considered to be 0.012 €/kWhe.

Table 3. Annual economic evaluation

Billing element Producer charge (€) Consumer charge (€) Network charge (€)
Propane 27.043 - -
Active energy 1.200 9.140 6.683
Fixed charge 223 1.099 -
Power 62 - -
Power peak hours - - 1.334
Ct × EECm × IPCdez ÷ IPCref - - 721
Thermal energy - 15.313 -
Maintenance costs 1.827 - -
Total 30.354 25.552 8.739
 205

This new condition of energy sources allows an annual operational result of 3.937 €.
The overall cost of the MCHP system was about 27.000 €, which allows a payback of
about 7 years.

7 Conclusion
A MCHP system supplied by propane was studied and successful implemented in a
swimming pool. The selected MCHP system does not have a higher power due to
Portuguese energy policy limitations. In the summer when the swimming pool is closed
no thermal energy is consumed, therefore the MCHP system should run only in the peak
hours. This situation eliminates the high cost of the active energy and mainly the value of
the power in peak hours. The economic simulation of the system functioning during one
year has shown the profit of about 4.000 €. The return of the investment is completed in
about seven years. We must be aware that this result would be more interesting if we use
natural gas, which will be possible in a near future.

References

1. K. Alane and A. Saari, Sustainable small-scale CHP technologies for buildings: the
basis for multi-perspective decision-making. Renewable & Sustainable Energy
Reviews, 8:401-431 (2004).
2. B.F. Kolanowski, Small-Scale Cogeneration Handbook, 2nd ed., Portland: Book
News, Inc. (2003).
3. A.S. Szklo and M.T. Tolmasquim, Strategic cogeneration - fresh horizons for the
development of cogeneration in Brazil. Applied Energy, 69:257-268 (2001).
4. Directive 2004/8/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council, 2004. Official
Journal of the European Union L 52 (50-60) 21.02.2004.
5. M. Dentice, d’Accadia, M. Sasso, S. Sibilio and L. Vanoli. Micro-combined heat and
power in residential and light commercial applications. Applied Thermal Engineering
23, 1247–1259 (2003).
6. Decree-Law 68/2002 of 25 of March. Available at www.dre.pt
7. Deliberation 764/2002 of 01 July. Available at www.dre.pt
8. An Introduction to Micro-Cogeneration. COGEN Europe Briefing 8 (1999).
9. Selling tariff of electric energy to final costumers. EDP. Available at: www.edp.pt
 INCORPORATING ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECONOMIC
OBJECTIVES IN THE DESIGN OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION AND
DISTRICT HEATING PLANTS THROUGH EXTERNALITIES:
DEALING WITH UNCERTAINTY.

DAMIANA CHINESE, GIOACCHINO NARDIN,

PATRIZIA SIMEONI
all at the DiEM Department of Energy Technology, University of Udine,
Via delle Scienze 208
Udine, 33100, Italy

Distributed generation (DG) appears to be the state of the art solution to meet growing energy
demand efficiently, especially if combined with heat recovery (cogeneration) and in urban areas,
where cogeneration systems can be optimized by the combination with district heating. Reduction in
overall fossil fuel consumption and associated global emissions – especially in terms of greenhouse
gases (GHG) – are most important benefits associated with district heating. However, in public
decision making concerns often arise as regards local air emissions, which are frequently neglected
in preliminary feasibility studies. Models adopted in early design stages, in fact, mainly aim at cost
optimisation and emissions are usually calculated afterwards, often focusing on GHG only. More
articulated approaches, typical of regional and national energy planning, are seldom used for local
small scale projects. In the present study, an extended model pursuing both economic and
environmental objectives by means of external costs is developed to support the synthesis of optimal
cogeneration and district heating systems in terms of economic, local and global environmental
performances. The approach is applied to a project of natural gas engine based cogeneration and
district heating in North-Eastern Italy. Optimal sizing and foreseen operation of the system,
including several cogeneration units and serving, among others, a large hospital, will be presented
and compared with the results of economic optimisation models, thus assessing the effect of
pursuing compromise solutions aiming at more satisfactory environmental performances. The issue
of uncertainty in externalities modeling is discussed, and a sensitivity analysis of optimization results
to ranges of external cost values is presented.

1 Introduction
International agreements and national commitments to abate greenhouse gases, rooted in
growing concerns about climate change and associated with various economical energy
policy measures (e.g. carbon taxes), made the reduction of CO2 and of its equivalents a
major motive, along with the reduction of primary energy use, for enhancing the use of
distributed cogeneration systems as an alternative to traditional, separate (remote)
production of power and (local) production of heat. Due to its recognised global effects,
CO2 is also considered a more credible index for environmental assessments than other
emissions [1]. For these reasons, assessing environmental impacts only in terms of
carbon dioxide equivalent emission reduction has become a common practice in
designing municipal cogeneration and district heating systems [2], especially when
economical objectives are pursued by decision support models based on optimization
procedures [3]. However, since small cogeneration and district heating systems are
conceived and authorized locally, and as local administrators have to cope with local

206
 207

pollution and air quality issues, it is rather opportune to support the design of such energy
systems with decision aid instruments taking also other causes of pollution into account.
This is – among others – the case of the pre-feasibility study on a distributed
cogeneration system which was performed by the authors on behalf of the Municipality
of Udine in year 2004. For that purpose, an economical optimization model was
developed, which is described in detail elsewhere [4] and summarized in following
paragraphs as far as necessary to understand the context of changes and of calculations.
CO2 equivalent emissions and primary energy savings were the only sustainability
indicators considered in that study; they were calculated after performing the
optimization procedure, while attention was centred on economical performance,
expressed as equivalent annual costs to form the single objective function. This choice
was justified by the necessity of attracting all potential stakeholders to support a project
which would, in any case, improve local energy efficiency, and of involving them in the
decision making process. Once the project encountered the approval of most involved
parties, as general economic and energy saving benefits were commonly recognized, the
discussion was gradually focused to technical solutions. Concerns from some
stakeholders on implications of the project and on environmental impacts beyond CO2
emissions still arouse in a unspecific manner. Additional work is then required to support
the development of a discourse, so that decision makers who will be further involved in
executive stages may act at a higher level of awareness: the study, which is presented in
this paper, has been developed for that purpose.
Hence, the aim of the present work is to include a wider range of pollution indicators
in the evaluation and in the very design of the system. We want to select and apply a
methodology that suits with a early development stage of the project and yet allows to
incorporate economical and environmental indicators within one evaluation framework,
as more desirable energy planning models do [5], [6], rather than regarding
environmental impacts as a secondary objective, to be described and quantified after
economical optimality is achieved. The remainder of this paper is thus organised as
follows: in the section 2, most relevant aspects of the case study are described and results
obtained by the authors using the economic optimisation models are summarized. In
section 3, the selected methodology, i.e. incorporation of external costs bound to air
emissions, is presented, while estimates obtained for emissions and associated
externalities are reported in section 4. Finally, section 5 compares new and former
optimal designs and operation strategies, trying to draw general indications.

2 The case study and the economic model

The system of concern embraces several public buildings located in the North-western
part of Udine, a town of about 90000 inhabitants situated in North-Eastern Italy. Among
the considered buildings, the Civic Hospital is the major one, both in terms of size and of
energy requirements: not only, in fact, it is the largest building of the group, but also, in
order to guarantee comfort conditions to in-patients, higher temperatures than in other
208

civil buildings should be maintained and hospital heating systems should operate 24
hours a day, unlike typical community buildings, such as schools or offices, having a
limited number of daily opening hours. Power demand is also large, due to medical
equipment and, in summer, to air conditioning. Since the hospital is now undergoing
major renovations, whereas oldest pavilions are being abated and substituted by new,
larger ones, also existing energy facilities are being refurbished and additional capacity
will be required: peak loads summarized in Table 1 are estimates of future requirements
as of year 2007. Currently, the hospital is served by natural gas boilers and steam
generators meeting the heat demand of existing buildings. As for power demand, the
hospital is, at present, totally depending on the national grid, apart from small oil based
power generators operating in case of blackouts only. The scientific pole of the
University, formed by three buildings, also belongs to the group of facilities of concern,
all located within an area of some 7 km2 centred around the headquarters of a local multi-
utility, currently engaged in natural gas and water distribution, which could be the
prospective leader of energy saving initiatives to be developed in the area. Especially
energy intensive are two swimming pools, placed in the area, respectively comprised
within a leisure and culture centre, and within a boarding-school complex.

Table 1. Technical features of the system of buildings of concern.

Heated Thermal Power peak Thermal Electrical
volumes peak load load [kW] energy energy
Centre [m3] [kW] consumption consumption
[kWh/year] [kWh/year]
Hospital (H) 520000 10212 3263 41898303 18183222
University building 150000 3461 944 3155747 3792845
block 1 (UB1)
University building 30000 939 153 746122 719065
block 2 (UB2)
University building 22600 818 130 782183 844000
block 3 (UB3)
Boarding school 70700 1042 132 2958264 556118
with swimming
pool (BS)
Utility – natural 45000 1307 180 973770 790724
gas distributor
(UT)
Culture center 20700 1067 80 6404179 570024
with swimming
pool (CC)

Several technical solutions have been proposed for a novel configuration of the
system. In particular, three configurations attracted the attention of most investors, and
have been therefore further investigated in this study. The first represents a minimal
configuration, corresponding to the installation of opportune cogeneration engines
meeting the hospital power demand all over the year; recent blackouts pressure the
 209

hospital to be independent from an energy viewpoint. For convenience and reliability

reasons, a boiler should be foreseen and dimensioned to meet heat demand by the
hospital not covered by heat recovery from the engines. Actually, hospital heating
requirements are so large, that larger cogenerators could be installed, selling surplus
produced power on the liberalized energy market. This activity should be clearly
undertaken by an external energy saving company, which would manage the hospital
thermal station, using it to collocate reciprocating engines having a higher capacity than
the power load of the hospital: this situation is studied as a second scenario. The third
scenario sees the hospital thermal station as a starting point for a district heating system
serving all the previously identified buildings in the area of concern; successive
expansion could lead to connect private homes to the network too. To size the systems
optimally in the three cases, a mixed integer programming time dependent model aiming
to systems cost minimization was conceived [4], which allows to consider energy
demand variations along the day and the year and hourly energy sale price differentiation
as currently proposed by Italian Energy Bureau. The model has been described in detail
elsewhere [4]; in the following, we just present most relevant variables and parameters
and the objective function in a simplified form.
The main variables of the model are:
• Thermal capacities CapTh [kWt] for each heat technology techTh and production
unit uThz selected in each center z.
• Electrical capacities CapEl [kWe] for each production unit uElz selected in each
center with electrical energy technology techEl (e.g. low or high rev. engines).
• Thermal power PowTh_prod [kWt] and electrical power PowEl_prod [kWe]
produced by each unit uThz and uElz in period t.
• Electrical power PowEl_sale [kWe] produced for sales by each unit uElz in period t.
• Thermal power PowTh_diss [kWt] which is dissipated in those periods where
electrical energy is conveniently cogenerated in absence of a related thermal
demand.
• Natural gas amounts GasQty(us) needed to produce energy flows for different uses
us. Different energy destinations (internal consumption, sales, etc.) imply different
gas prices due to current tax system, which encourages virtuous form of energy
production, such as cogeneration and district heating.
• Electrical energy ElQty purchased by hospital or AMGA center when cogenerators
don’t cover internal requirements because it results more convenient to sell electrical
energy rather than self consume it. Binary variables (bin) are introduced as needed to
model scale economies and Italian tax system.
Main parameters taken into account are:
• Investment costs, characterised by a variable component CostVarInv proportional to
facility sizes and a fixed component CostFixInv, which is instead size independent.
• Costs related to district heating: pipeline installation CostDHpipe and operation costs
CostDHop (pumping, personnel, maintenance) of the network.
210

• Fuel costs CostGas(us) dependent on final use us and purchased electrical energy
costs CostEl.
• Operation costs of energy electrical (El) and thermal (Th) facilities CostOp,
including personnel, administration and maintenance.
• Dissipation cost CostDiss, related to costs of electrical energy consumed by
dissipators.
• Electrical energy sale price PriceEl, function of each time periods t.
• Thermal and electrical energy demand of each center in every time period t,
calculated as the product of average required power PowTh_dem and PowEl_dem by
each center z in that period and its time length h(t) [h].
• Technical performance measures related to each technology such as efficiency,
power to heat ratio (α), dissipation coefficient and so on.
The objective function (equation 1) minimizes the total cost per year of the energy
system in each previously identified configuration; investment costs are expressed on a
yearly basis by introducing the annuity factor ann depending on expected life of each
facility:

 CostVarInv (uTh , techTh ) ⋅ Cap( uTh z , techTh ) +  

∑uTh , techTh ann (uTh z , techTh ) ⋅  binTh ⋅ CostFixInvz (uTh z , techTh )
 z
 +
 

  CostVarInv (uEl z , techEl ) ⋅ Cap( uEl z , techEl) +  
∑
 uEl z , techEl
ann ( uEl z , techEl) ⋅ 
 binEl ⋅ CostFixInv ( uEl z , techEl)
+
 
 
∑
 us, uTh z , techTh , t
CostGas (us, uTh z ) ⋅ GasQty (us, uTh z , techTh , t ) + 
 
∑
min  us, uEl z , techEl, t
CostGas (us, uEl z ) ⋅ GasQty ( us, uEl z , techEl, t ) + 
 
∑
 uEl z , techEl, t
CostDiss (t ) ⋅ PowTh _ diss (uEl z , techEl, t ) + 
 
∑
 uTh z , techTh , t ∑
CostOp ( uTh z , techTh , t ) +
uEl z , techE, tl
CostOp ( uEl z , techEl, t ) + 
 
∑
 t
CostEl ( t ) ⋅ ElQty( t ) +annDHpipe ⋅ CostDHpipe + ∑ t
CostDHop ( t ) −

∑

 uEl z , techEl, t
PriceEl ( t ) ⋅ PowEl (uEl z , techEl, t ) ⋅ h ( t ) 

(1)

To allow homogenous evaluation and for the sake of simplicity, the system is thus
seen as a new designed one, rather as an expansion or variation of an existing one. This
assumption is valid in that we assume that most considered boilers are anyway
approaching their expected duration: as a consequence, the design and installation of new
systems would be anyway required, rather than the simple refurbishment or conservation
of existing ones. Positive cash flows from electrical energy sales are then taken into
account by related incomes. A number of constraints is introduced to model energy flow
balances and to guarantee technical compatibility of selected solutions. In particular, we
model partialisation capabilities of the engines by introducing an additional binary
variable idPflow, function of site, unit, power generation technology and period,
equalling 1 if at site s the unit p generates power through technology y in period t. If any
power is produced, that is, if idPflow=1, this must be more than the product of maximum
 211

power generation capacity by the engine by the coefficient of partialisation. New features
added in the last version of model allow to previously fix the number of engines to be
installed in each site. Due to the fixed cost component in investments and to higher
efficiencies and smaller maintenance costs of bigger engines, in fact, cost minimization
would force the design to the selection of a minimum number of engines (typically one),
which appears undesirable for the sake of reliability, especially for hospitals. An
additional integer parameter has been introduced to set a lower bound to the number of
engines, corresponding to the requirements of capacity subdivision expressed by the
engineering staff of the hospital. Even though the objective function does not change, so
the system is considered always as a newly designed one and not as an expansion or
modification, the capacity of one of the engines and of one of the boilers at the hospital
has been also fixed, at 650 kWel and 6000 kWth respectively, since they have been newly
purchased as a temporary compensation in the transition between current and future
pavilion configuration and should be utilized in the following; the optimization system
was required to define the size of at least other two engines and – if opportune – of
further boilers. Results obtained with this economic optimization model for various
scenarios are outlined in Table 2.

Table 2. Optimal solutions and performances of various configurations under economic design criteria.
CHP engines Peak Net present Pay Primary Globally
installed at the load value of the back energy avoided
Scenario Hospital boiler investment period savings emissions of
( power capacity (€) (years) (TOE/ CO2
capacity, kWel) (kWth) year) (tons/year)

Scenario 1 650 kW 6100 kW 7610652 € 2.87 3113 6671 t/year

1600 kW 2000 kW years t/year
1050 kW
Scenario 2 650 kW 6100 kW 13563481 € 3.15 5833 t/year 12474 t/year
650 kW years
5700 kW
Scenario 3 650 kW 6100 kW 17998702 € 3.52 7109 t/year 14934 t/year
650 kW 800 kW years
8400 kW

If the environmental assessment of the project were based on primary energy savings
and avoided emissions only, the third scenario would result as the most beneficial one.
Also from an economic viewpoint, the light increase in the simple payback period is
abundantly compensated by the higher net present value. Thus, using these criteria the
best solution appears the installation of a very large (8400 kWel) gas engine, supported by
two small ones acting as a minimum safety equipment and integrated by the newly
acquired boiler and by an additional, smaller one.
212

3 Selected methodology
To incorporate environmental effects in the optimization procedure, two complementary
methodological streams are followed in literature, namely multicriteria analysis and
monetization [5,7]. For multi-criteria analysis and for the whole body of multi-criteria
decision making, hundreds of methods [6] have been proposed and applied to energy
planning. In particular, according to Hobbs [1], multi-criteria approaches can be grouped
into two classes, that is prior articulation methods and interactive methods. While prior
articulation methods the preferences of decision makers or of groups of individuals are
previously quantified within utility functions and then incorporated as objectives in
optimization models, or used to rank a discrete set of alternatives, interactive methods
offer to the user several trial alternatives, whose evaluation by decision makers then gives
information to iteratively develop additional alternatives. Due to time consumption and
group management implications of the latter class of methods, planning is dominated by
prior articulation methods, which, relying on utility functions, share many features with
the second methodological strand, that is monetization. Monetization is usually carried
out by incorporating in energy prices so called external costs, i.e. those costs imposed on
society by the impacts of energy production on human health and on the environment.
Monetization has inherent limitations, depending not only on lacking or evolving
scientific knowledge (e.g. in terms of epidemiological results), but mainly on the ethical
aspects of unavoidable value judgements (see the issue of using and determining the
value of statistical life in [8] and in [9]) and of the problem of boundary setting (see
[10]), in terms of considered impacts on creatures and human beings in space and time
(see the problem of discount rate in [9]). These problems limit the applicability of
externalities for the purposes they were originally meant to, such as supporting policy
makers in determining energy and pollution taxes or subsidies, and lead some authors to
argue that multi-criteria approaches still constitute the more rigorous means to
incorporate environmental concerns in energy decisions [10]. Nevertheless, it is
recognised also by authors inclined to multi-criteria decision making that monetization
has the advantage of “measuring values for the entire public, rather than for a subset of
perhaps unrepresentative stakeholders”[5]. In our view, notwithstanding the large
variability in the values of energy externalities, the fact that monetary values associated
with environmental damages from energy conversion derive from standardized
methodologies [7] and that some values are available beforehand certainly help in early
development stages of small projects, when concerns of stakeholders are not utterly
formulated and a base of discussion for the comparison of costs and benefits is necessary.
In fact, Krewitt [8] identifies in cost-benefit analysis an emerging and successful field of
application for externalities; yet, reviewing literature it can be observed that these
analyses are mostly performed for general assessments to support policy making [see 11].
The applications of these values to the engineering of municipal energy systems is, on the
contrary, quite rare[12]. In this case, applying monetization appears, thus, both adapt
 213

under a practical perspective and interesting for its scientific and engineering
implications.

4 Emission and externalities assessment

Monetization lends itself to cost-benefit and engineering evaluations in that they do not
need to quantify all external costs, but only those of interest for the system of concern.
For specific case studies, a limitation of the system, including only few impacts within
the system boundaries, can give sufficient indications to the engineer on how to proceed
and on which design options are most critical. As for cogeneration and district heating
studies, in particular, as all energy conversion technologies are based on fossil fuels,
focusing on the effects of airborne emissions is regarded as a meaningful choice, as
testified by existing specific studies[12], and by more general assessments of energy
externalities [13]. Coherently, also the ExternE methodology [8], produced by most
authoritative studies within the European Community for assessing externalities of
energy generation, changed its initial aims from the calculation of external costs per kWh
to the calculation of specific damage costs per unit of pollutant emitted, which can be
transferred more easily to a broader context. The methodological core of ExternE is
represented by the Damage Function approach, a “step by step analytical procedure
examining the sequence of processes through which burdens associated with a particular
polluting source result into environmental damage. This methodology has been
implemented within the EcoSense software, whose on-line version [14] has been used for
this study. Focusing on airborne emissions, the starting point to calculate the total
atmospheric burden are the characteristics of fuels and conversion technologies/activities,
allowing the determination of emission factors. According to the emission factors
method, total emission referred to a given area can be calculated by multiplying the
activity indicator (for instance fuel consumption) by the corresponding emission factor
FE, representing the emission per unit by the source. The choice of emission factors
represents a critical aspect: the effort to compile inventories of such factors dates back to
the late Seventies, as for the Usa and the EPA, and to the mid Eighties, as for Europe and
the CORINAIR project. Specifically, in the bounds of the CORINAIR project the SNAP
nomenclature was developed, which classifies human and natural emission generating
activities in macro-sectors, sectors and activities, embracing – in the latest versions [15] –
eleven macro-sectors, 260 activities and an extended group of pollutants. A more detailed
methodology was then developed within the European Environment Agency [15], taking
into account besides sector (fuel combustion for energy conversion pertains to the first
macrosector) and activity (domestic heating, district heating etc.) also the adopted
technology. In recent years, inventories and software packages for process or product life
cycle assessment have been developed, which adhere to EEA standards. In particular, the
GEMIS inventory [16] which was adopted for this study considers technologies in more
detail, taking into account plant size with a finest resolution than EPA [17] inventories.
Comparing mentioned inventories with the GEMIS database, a good level of consistence
214

can be observed as order of magnitude, whereas the capacities considered by the GEMIS
model better correspond to the small engine size in distributed generation than the wide
ranges (e.g. “up to 50 MW”) from general inventories. Thus, values derived from the
GEMIS inventory and displayed in Table 3 were finally assumed as emission factors.

Table 3. Emission factors and external costs for single pollutants.

Emission factors for engines Emission factors
[kg/kWh] for boilers External
[kg/kWh] costs per
Polluting Engine ≥1000 kW emission unit
Agents or Capacity up to [€/kg]
GHG 750 kWel
SO2 1,540 ⋅ 10-6 1,540 ⋅ 10-6 1,540 ⋅ 10-6 4.10
NOx 362,75 ⋅ 10-6 453,43 ⋅ 10-6 362,750 ⋅ 10-6 3.76
PM10 9,0687 ⋅ 10-6 9,0687 ⋅ 10-6 0,907 ⋅ 10-6 19
NMVOC 27,206 ⋅ 10-6 27,206 ⋅ 10-6 32,647 ⋅ 10-6 0.238
CO2 199000 ⋅ 10-6 199000 ⋅ 10-6 199000 ⋅ 10-6 0.019
CH4 21,765 ⋅ 10-6 27,206 ⋅ 10-6 32,647 ⋅ 10-6 0.437
N2O 9,0687 ⋅ 10-6 18,137 ⋅ 10-6 6,529 ⋅ 10-6 5.62

The on-line version of the EcoSense software [14] allows the calculation of specific
external costs associated to SO2, NOx, fine particulate (PM10) and non metallic volatile
organic compounds (NMVOC). These pollutants mainly impact on local air quality, as
NOx, along with NMVOC, react in the atmosphere to form ozone, whose strong
concentrations in urban areas may result in short term respiratory problems and irritation
of mucous membranes; similar impacts derive from SO2 emissions [13]. Fine particulate,
on the other hand, also operates as a vector of toxic substances on its surface: along with
NMVOC, PM10 may be bound to pathogenicity at respiratory level and cancerogenicity
in the long term. Beside such local impacts, SO2 and NOx also have geographically wider
impacts as they contribute to the formation of acid rain, which threatens ecosystems and
vegetation in particular. However, acid rain effects are not considered within the
EcoSense framework [8]: this fits well to the objectives of the study, as local effects on
human health represent the primary concern of local decision makers. The externalities of
greenhouse gases, on the other hand, can be also separately calculated with the EcoSense
model, obtaining the values also summarized in Table 3, where external costs associated
with damages to human health were considered. The EcoSense models distinguishes
between higher and lower stacks, which lead to wider or more local impacts. We
considered emissions from low stacks, as those of such relatively small municipal plants
are meant to be, thus the effects of concern will be mainly local. The focus of the
decision making being local, we neglected avoided externalities from CO2 equivalent
emission reduction. Thus, external costs of cogeneration and district heating systems are
calculated by adding externalities from various emissions (including CO2 equivalents) to
fuel costs. Basically, the cogeneration and district heating system is regarded, in the
 215

optimization perspective, as a new built one satisfying a new energy demand rather than
as an expansion or modification of existing subsystems, which is coherent with the
modelling approach previously used for economic optimization only.
As for power generation, distributed generation is not substitutive, that is to say, we
consider it an additional generation, which does not cause the outage of a corresponding
average remote capacity. For the analyzed system, the substitutive option has been
partially analysed for the present case study in [18]: it has been shown that optimized
system configuration are only marginally affected by incorporating externalities
reduction from remote power generation. For this reason and due to focus by decision
makers, we concentrate on the additional view in this investigation. Thus, externalities
are not incorporated in power purchase or wholesale prices, but only internalised among
fuel costs. The idea is, designers should select a system having minimum impact, both in
local and global terms. Hence, both externalities from CO2eq and from local pollutants
are added up to fuel costs.

4.1. Uncertainty in externalities estimation

A major criticism to the externalities approach lies in uncertainty of damage cost. Rather
than model and data uncertainty, the major cause of uncertainty is of an ethical and
human nature [19], in that damage cost estimation relies in turn on attributing a monetary
value to losing one year of human life. This applies especially to our study, since for
pollutants we only consider impacts on human health. External costs presented in Table
3, which are deemed as the most reliable estimates, presume a value of 75,000 € per year
of life lost. Methodological developments [19] indicate a minimum of 27,240 €/y and a
maximum of 225,000 €/y as boundaries for sensitivity analysis. External costs ranges for
various pollutants are have been calculated accordingly and are presented in Table 4. As
for GHG emissions, which were the second considered cause of damage, the value of the
external costs for CO2 equivalents depends on which possible damages connected to
climate change are taken into account, such as for instance extended floods or more
frequent hurricanes. In accordance with [19], we assume 9 €/kgCO2eq as a minimum
value and 50 €/kgCO2eq as a maximum for sensitivity analysis, while values displayed in
Table 3, associated with a cost of 19 €/kgCO2eq, are the most reliable estimates, which
leads to the values reported in Table 4 for single greenhouse gases.

Table 4. Ranges of external costs for sensitivity analysis.

Pollutant Minimum external cost [€/kg] Maximum external cost [€/kg]
SO2 2.38 9.53
NOx 2.16 8.78
PM10 9.67 48.2
NMVOC 0.201 0.353
CO2 0.009 0.05
N2O 2.66 14.8
CH4 0.207 1.15
216

5 Results and discussions

The model was implemented in AMPL® and solved with the commercial solver CPLEX
®. The yearly equivalent time horizon was subdivided in 41 sub-periods. This allows not
only to account for seasonality of heating requirements, but, above all, to model the
variation of power wholesale prices, which are higher in peak demand periods (morning
and early afternoon hours in summer and late afternoon hours in December), lower in
weekends and during the night. The system is assumed to have a lifetime of 15 years and
an interest rate of 7% is fixed in order to meet investors profitability expectations.
Actualisation factors are calculated accordingly.
In the following, result obtained for these two cases will firstly be compared with the
previously discusses base case of economic optimization only. Secondarily, we account
for ranges of external costs comparing design alternatives under various assumptions for
value of life and for climate change damages.

5.1. Results for most reliable estimates of external costs

Table 5 summarizes technical features of the energy systems obtained under various
assumptions. In particular, the original economic evaluation, non including externalities,
is presented as base case. The “standard externalities” case assumes the most reliable
estimates for year of life lost (75.000 €) and for climate change damage (19 €/t CO2eq)
and consequent values for external costs. It can be observed that including external costs
within the objective function substantially changes the optimal configuration of the
system only in the second and third scenario. As for the first, we concluded that the
constraint of constantly meeting hospital power demand is so narrow that it makes
optimal sizing practically insensitive to specific costs variations such as internalisation of
externalities. As for the second and third scenario, it can be observed that integrating
monetized environmental impacts into the objective function leads to a substantial
reduction in global engine size: in the third and most significant scenario, for instance,
the largest and slowest engine (750 rpm) has an optimal size of 8400 kW, if we strive for
economic optimisation, of 5900 kW if we take into account remote power generation
externalities too (substitutive distributed generation). This goes along with a significant
decrease in dissipated heat: dissipated heat amounts yearly to more than four thousand
MWh in the base case, to a little bit less than 2000 MWh considering externalities.
Correspondingly, power sales reduce almost by the half. In other words, if we would just
pursue profit maximisation we would operate the plant whenever sale prices are high,
aside from thermal energy demand; as marginal costs of larger gas engines are smaller, it
is also opportune to maximise the size in order to produce and sell as much power as
possible in peak demand periods. If we consider externalities, power generation is only
performed when an existing thermal energy demand justifies the generation of pollutant
emissions. In this context, it is interesting to observe that in the third scenario, under
externalities consideration, heat dissipation is lower than in the first, thanks to load
harmonization derived from district heating development. Paradoxically, theoretically
 217

avoided emissions and primary energy savings are lower when we take externalities into
account and avoid dissipating heat from CHP systems; it should be observed, however,
that this would be valid only under a substitution assumption. As for other emissions,
presented in Table 6, highest values are obviously achieved in the third scenario, which –
however - cannot be compared with the other two in absolute terms as the systems scope
– embracing district heating – is quite different.
A comparison can be nevertheless attempted by considering annual equivalent costs,
to which internal and external costs of fuel used in small scale boilers substituted by the
DH network in Scenario 3 have been added to equivalent systems cost in Scenario 1 and
2. In this way, we have an estimate of how much do various system cost to the local
community.
Local external costs have been isolated in the second column of Table 6: notably, a
small cogeneration system and a definitely larger one, which is however coupled with a
district heating system, create more or less the same damage to the local community,
whereas a larger benefit, both in terms of creating worth and services for the local
community and in saving primary energy and avoiding global emissions, can be achieved
in Scenario 3.

Table 5. Technical and energy results of externalities evaluations.

Local
Total power Total heat boilers of Primary
Power Dissipated
External cost generation generation potential Power sales energy
purchases heat
determinants capacity capacity network [MWh/year] savings
[MWh/year] [MWh/year]
[kW] [kW] uses [TOE/year]
[kW]

Scenario 1 All cases 3300 8100 8634 0 0 3,113 1975

Base case, no
external costs 7000 6100 8634 17880 0 5,833 3789
Standard
externalities 6600 6100 8634 16900 0 5,773 2890
Scenario 2 Low
externalities 6600 6100 8634 17050 0 5,776 3083
High
externalities 6300 6100 8634 15810 0 5,701 1847
Base case, no
external costs 9700 6900 0 30564 7,273 7,109 4330
Standard
externalities 7200 10000 0 17580 7,273 5,817 1954
Scenario 3 Low
externalities 8200 8800 0 26737 7,273 7,132 2660
High
externalities 6300 11200 0 9399 7,273 4,664 635
218

Table 6. Economic and emission indicators.

Annual Pollutants
equivalent Globally
Local Simple
cost, avoided
external payback
External cost including CO2eq SO2 NOx PM10 NMVOC
costs period
determinants local emission [kg/year] [kg/year] [kg/year] [kg/year]
[€/year] [years]
externalities [t/year]
[€/year]
Base case, no
external costs 3282323 0 2.87 6671 1.07E+02 2.53E+04 4.54E+02 2.02E+03
Standard
externalities 3465530 183207 2.87 6671 1.07E+02 2.53E+04 4.54E+02 2.02E+03
Scenario 1
Low
externalities 3381351 99028 2.87 6671 1.07E+02 2.53E+04 4.54E+02 2.02E+03
High
externalities 3728468 446145 2.87 6671 1.07E+02 2.53E+04 4.54E+02 2.02E+03
Base case, no
external costs 2765273 0 3.15 12474 1.34E+02 3.89E+04 7.84E+02 2.36E+03
Standard
externalities 3005459 236461 3.09 12386 1.31E+02 3.79E+04 7.64E+02 2.31E+03
Scenario 2 Low
externalities 2896787 129586 3.09 12383 1.31E+02 3.79E+04 7.67E+02 2.32E+03
High
externalities 3356628 561225 3.08 12277 1.27E+02 3.68E+04 7.40E+02 2.26E+03
Base case, no
external costs 3297420 0 3.52 14934 1.82E+02 5.31E+04 1.06E+03 3.23E+03
Standard
externalities 3537342 184069 3.31 12452 1.58E+02 4.46E+04 7.92E+02 2.89E+03
Scenario 3
Low
externalities 3423838 118888 3.37 15192 1.73E+02 5.02E+04 9.78E+02 3.09E+03
High
externalities 3813668 379598 3.32 10061 1.44E+02 3.94E+04 6.25E+02 2.70E+03

5.2. Dealing with uncertainty: the impact of external cost estimates

The point in uncertainty assessment is to observe, to what extent does the optimal
configuration and costs change when different values for externalities are assumed. As
for configuration, the first scenario is practically unsensitive. The second is quite robust:
cogenerator size reduction is just about 10% moving from zero to maximum externalities,
while substantial changes occur in operation, with a significant decrement of power
generation in dissipative mode. The district heating scenario is the most sensitive one:
reduction of optimal engine size moving from low to high external cost estimates is about
24%. With respect to sole local externalities, it is interesting to observe that by low and
average estimates of external costs Scenario 1 remains the one causing less additional
damage to local community, while if we assume higher external unit costs Scenario 3 is
the best performing. This is probably due to the weight of external costs within the
objective function in scenario 3,leading the optimization procedure to force systems to
operate at highest possible efficiency, reducing heat dissipation to minimum values.

6 Conclusions
The limits of externalities emerge even in small scale engineering application, in that
technical and emission values appear -to some extent –to be watered down in
 219

monetization. A general issue, which deserves further attention in its specific application
to energy systems design, is related, rather than to monetization, to the very problem of
setting the boundaries of the systems (e.g. considering local or global perspectives,
substitution or addition of new systems to the national power generation system).
Nevertheless, especially for small contexts, where decision makers rather have a local
scope and necessarily limited experience in dealing with complex and global issues of
energy planning, including externalities in cost analysis may be an useful starting point
for further discussion. Furthermore, this study demonstrated that incorporating
externalities into engineering design supports leads to a more rational design of energy
systems, avoiding oversizing and heat dissipation. Since sensitivity to external cost
values appears however quite important, further research is required to limitate the
variation of external costs values to be used for a project or to reduce its impact.
Direction for further research would then be towards participative approaches, creating
consensus on definite values for specific projects and towards more robust optimization.

References

1. B.F. Hobbs, Optimization methods for electric utility resource planning, European
Journal of Operational Research, 83, 1-20 (1995).
2. K. Holmgren and A. Gebremedhin, Modelling a district heating system: Introduction
of waste incineration, policy instruments and co-operation with an industry, Energy
Policy 32(16), 1807-1817 (2004).
3. D. Chinese, A. Meneghetti and G. Nardin, Diffused introduction of Organic Rankine
Cycle for biomass-based power generation in an industrial district: a systems
analysis, International Journal of Energy Research, 28(11), pp.1003-1021 (2004).
4. D. Chinese, A. Meneghetti, G. Nardin and P. Simeoni, La cogenerazione in un
contesto urbano: il caso Udine Nord, Proceedings of the XXXI National Congress of
Italian Plant Engineering Association, ANIMP, Monastier di Treviso (2004).
5. B.F. Hobbs and G.T.F. Horn, Building public confidence in energy planning: a multi
method MCDM approach to demand-side planning at BC gas”, Energy Policy, 3,
pp.357-375 (1997).
6. S.D. Pohekar and M. Ramachandran, Application of multi-criteria decision making
to sustainable energy planning – A review, Renewable and Sustainable Energy
Reviews, 8, pp. 365-381 (2004).
7. S. Mirasgedis and D. Diakoulaki, Multicriteria analysis vs. externalities assessment
for the comparative evaluation of electricity generation systems, European Journal
of Operational Research, 102, pp.364-379 (1997).
8. W. Krewitt, External costs of energy – do answers match the questions? Looking
back at 10 years of ExternE”, Energy Policy, 30(10), 839-848 (2002).
9. G. Sonnemann, F. Castells and M. Schuhmacher, Integrated Life-Cycle and Risk
Assessment for Industrial Processes”, Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, Florida (2003).
10. A. Stirling, ”Limits to the value of external costs”,Energy Policy, 25(5), 517-540
(1997).
220

11. W. Krewitt, T. Heck, A. Trukenmüller and R. Friedrich, Environmental damage

costs from fossil electricity generation in Germany and Europe”, Energy Policy,
27(3), pp. 173-183 (1999).
12. A. Gebremedhin and A. Carlson, Optimisation of merged district-heating systems –
benefits of co-operation in the light of externality costs, Applied Energy, 73, 223-235
(2002).
13. J. Carlin, Environmental Externalities in Electric Power Markets: Acid Rain, Urban
Ozone, and Climate Change, Energy Information Administration, November 1995.
14. IER, Ecosense – An integrated impact assessment model, http://www.ier.uni-
stuttgart.de/public/de/prodserv/tfu/ecosense/ecosense.html (2005).
15. EEA, The EEA indicator fact sheet model used for environmental signals 2000 and
2001, EEA, Copenhagen (2001).
16. U.R. Fritsche, Introducing the GEMIS model family, Öko-Institut,
http://www.oeko.de/service/gemis/en/ (2001).
17. EPA, Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors Stationary Point and Area
Sources, Volume I, Fifth Edition, AP-42. Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina (1995).
18. D. Chinese, G. Nardin and P. Simeoni, Pursuing environmental and economic
objectives in the design of distributed generation and district heating plants, CD
Proceedings of the 3rd Dubrovnik Conference of Energy, Water and Environment
Systems (2005).
19. European Commission, ExternE- Externalities of Energy, Methodology 2005 update,
EUR 21591 (2005).
 ANALYTICAL PREDICTION OF SPREAD
SCENARIOS FOR SMALL-SCALE CHP
SYSTEMS

ENNIO CARDONA
Dream-Department of Energetic and Environmental Researches, University of Palermo,
Viale delle Scienze
Palermo, 90128, Italy

ANTONIO PIACENTINO
Dream-Department of Energetic and Environmental Researches, University of Palermo,
Viale delle Scienze
Palermo, 90128, Italy

FABIO CARDONA
Dream-Department of Energetic and Environmental Researches, University of Palermo,
Viale delle Scienze
Palermo, 90128, Italy

In this paper the potential for penetration of small scale cogeneration is assessed at EU level, starting
from an overview of the present CHP market. The new EU Directive, representing a milestone in the
EU policy for the growth of cogeneration, requires further provisions and large financial efforts to
favour increases in the CHP installed capacity and to contribute in overcoming the main obstacles to
the spread of polygeneration. Targeting the incentives to all size plants is verified not to be an
effective approach, because of the different obstacles to the spread of CHP systems existing in small
and large applications. After identifying the main factors influencing the CHP potential in a
liberalized energy market, an original index expressing the opportunity for new profitable CHP
installations is introduced. Future scenarios for CHP penetration at EU and national level are
presented and the expected effects of different policy actions.

1 Introduction
The promotion of polygeneration has been representing for many years a pillar among the
EU policies for the rational use of energy (RUE), due to the benefits that these systems
produce in terms of primary energy saving and reduction in pollutants’ emissions.
Cogeneration is expected to play a primary role for the reduction in energy intensity and
the achievement of emission reduction targets, as evident when examining the two main
policy acts published in the last two decades:
• The communication from the Commission on “A community strategy to promote
combined heat and power (CHP) and to dismantle barriers to its development”,
where the objective is fixed for a doubling of the share of CHP from 9% (at 1994) to
18% of the total gross electricity generation of the Community produced by CHP by
the year 2010.

221
222

• The Directive 2004/8/EC on the promotion of cogeneration based on a useful heat

demand in the internal energy market, which fixes the criteria to assess a system for
the combined production of heat and power as high efficiency cogeneration.
Furthermore, many other EU acts introduce provisions in order to promote the spread of
combined production; among these, the Directive 2003/54/EC, allowing Member States
to give dispatching priority to CHP installations, and the Directive 2002/91/EC requiring
a technical, environmental and economic feasibility analysis for all new buildings with a
total useful floor area of over 1,000 m2 could be mentioned. The new legislative
framework at EU level empowered and harmonized different regulative approaches
which had been working for many years in most member states (in Italy, for instance, the
CHP legislation originated since eighties).
A large number of measures has been adopted, primarily at national level, in order to
drive the spontaneous equilibrium of energy markets toward a large spread of
cogeneration; from this perspective, the EU action has been weakened by the risk to
produce distorting effect in the free market. The above mentioned efforts at institutional
level have not produced the expected results yet; in the last two years a market stagnation
has been observed and, in some countries, CHP systems are even being shut down.
A main concern regards the need to make polygeneration a viable solution for energy
supply, from an economic viewpoint; in fact, the strategy of private operators is oriented
to the direct economic return, being the social effects of CHP (i.e. energy saving or CO2
reduction) an interest of the community and of institutional bodies. Further,
polygeneration is living distinct phases in different member states, as a consequence of
the local external factors; if the common energy market was actually operating since now,
unhomogeneity would be its main characteristic.
Public supply at 2004 Private autoproducers at 2004 18% CHP penetration at 2010
]

60
CHP/Twhtot

50
Market penetration of cogeneration [ %TWh

40

30

20

10

0
UE UK Sweden Spain Portugal Netherland Italy Greece Germany France Denmark Belgium Austria
Average

Figure 1. CHP penetration in different EU member states and expected growth in the 18% CHP penetration
scenario outlined by the EU Commission.

After a brief analysis of legislative and market conditions influencing the

attractiveness of polygeneration and of the current legislative and market provisions in
 223

different countries, an original indicator is defined in order to assess whether the external
conditions favour a complete exploitation of the local potential for small-scale CHP.
In order to simplify the analysis, only CHP system operating with fossil fuels will be
considered (where a large prevalence exists for natural gas systems).

2 An overview on cogeneration markets in Europe

According to the available informations, the total installed CHP capacity in Europe at
2004 slightly exceeded 80 GWe, with a total production in the order of 270–280 GWh
[1].
In order to reach the above mentioned 18% of total electricity production by CHP
systems, the capacity at 2010 should be at least 125–130 GWe; however, this target does
not represent a commitment.
In [1] the current CHP penetration in different national markets is presented, with the
expected contribute to the achievement of the EU Commission’s target at 2010 [2],
according to the current trends.
In terms of total CHP production, the largest contributes come from Germany (more
than 60 TWh), Netherlands (almost 45 TWh), Finland (27 TWh), Italy and UK (23 TWh
each). Splitting the overall installed capacity between public and private owned CHP
systems enables us to recognize the large differences existing in the CHP market among
the European countries; in most of cases the CHP capacity of private auto-producers is
much larger than the public owned CHP, but in Denmark and Netherlands where the
highest penetration of polygeneration is observed due to the significant contribute of
public energy utilities.
The above data include any kind of CHP production; however, a main distinction
must be introduced between large cogeneration plants and small-scale/micro CHP units.
In fact, two distinct markets for cogeneration exist, which are driven by different
legislative provisions, fare systems and scale factors in the cost of components; thus, in
many countries where a good integration of CHP production with industrial processes
may be observed, a large unexplored potential exists for small scale CHP or CHCP
applications for district heating/cooling or for single buildings (both in the tertiary and the
domestic sector).
In this paper the attention is focused on the potential for small-scale CHP or CHCP
systems, with a capacity below 2 MWe. The main applications are in the civil sector, and
in particular in the tertiary sector for customers like hotels, hospitals, offices or
commercial centres, where high energy consumption for electricity, heat and, eventually,
cooling make CHP auto-production an attractive option for energy supply.
The potential of small CHP/CHCP systems for buildings applications is a very
controversial issue, because of the high capital investment and the irregular demand
profiles, which allow the CHP group to operate for a part of the year only (usually, not
more than 4,000–5,000 hours/year) thus being harder to achieve an economic feasibility.
224

Further, these systems have harder access to favorable financing and fuel price; as a
result of the above factors, in most of European countries small-scale cogeneration only
accounts for a small percentage of the total installed CHP capacity.
Specific data on the incidence of small-scale CHP on the overall installed CHP capacity
can be hardly derived; however, the share of small-scale CHP capacity varies between 2
and 18% [3,4]. The analysis presented in the following of this paper aims to assess
whether or not the external conditions in different countries could favour a rapid growth
of the small-scale CHP market, by the light of two main factors:
• After the new EU Directive on cogeneration, it is expected that new provisions and
support mechanisms will be introduced. The common rules for the assessment of
high efficiency CHP only represented a preliminary condition for the implementation
of new and more market-sensitive actions;
• The liberalization of energy market has developed in a very inhomogeneous manner
all over the Europe; further, it was expected to favour the growth of CHP market, but
it has not due to the effects produced on energy prices and which will be examined in
the next section.

3 Structural and artificial factors influencing the CHP market: toward the
definition of an indicator
The penetration of polygeneration in European energy market has been continuously
growing, in particular in the last decade.
However it is common interest to accelerate this rate of growth and to promote the
combined production in some sectors where its economic feasibility is not easy.
Further, the liberalization of energy market has quickly changed the traditional
equilibrium between energy utilities and final costumers; from this perspective, CHP
represents one of the most competitive Distributed Generation Technologies (DGT) and
its growth is strictly related to the growing interest for decentralized power generation.
In this section the most relevant and controversial aspects related to the spread of
cogeneration are presented, which are deeply discussed ahead when analyzing the
singular member states and which may be classified in two main categories:
1. The opportunities for an integration of a large number of auto-production CHP units
in the liberalized energy market and all the provisions regulating the connection, the
energy exchange with the grid and its price.
2. The support mechanisms for the internalization of benefits produced by
polygeneration systems in terms of primary energy saving and reduction in
pollutants’ emissions.
However, a different classification is here proposed distinguishing among quantifiable
and non-quantifiable factors and oriented to the analytic definition of a synthetic gauge
expressing to which extent the national regulatory and market conditions favour a spread
of cogeneration.
 225

From a theoretical point of view, most of factors could be in some way quantified;
hence, in this paper the term “quantifiable” is used to indicate those parameters with a
quantitative nature which can be calculated unambiguously on the base of easy market
investigations.

3.1. Quantifiable factors

Four main factors influencing the potential market for small-scale CHP were recognized,
which are listed and analyzed below in logical order:
1. Energy price: the cost for purchasing electricity and natural gas and the selling price
for surplus electricity significantly influence the profitability of small-scale CHP
applications. In the definition of the indicator for CHP potential, this factor will be
intended as “average market-price of energy”; in fact, even if the energy price for
CHP system heavily differs from the average market-price, the difference is expressed
in terms of premiums for CHP electricity or de-taxation of CHP fuel and will be kept
into account by introducing another factor, which is examined below. This approach
allows not to make any distinction between purchasing and selling price of electricity,
because the aforementioned monetary support mechanisms only influence the selling
price. A non-dimensional parameter is used to express the energy price, namely
Spark-Spread (Sspread), defined as ratio between the local unit price of electricity and
the cost of the amount of natural gas to be consumed for the production of a unit of
electricity by CHP systems:
MPe
S spread = . (1)
1 3,600
⋅ ⋅ MPF
η e,CHP HLVF

The reference efficiency of CHP systems is assumed equal to 0.33, which is a

reasonable value due to the prevalence of reciprocate engines in the examined power
range (size up to 1 MWe). The spark-spread is a dimensionless parameter, usually
ranging from 0.5 to 2.0 (the CHP potential grows with the spark-spread);
2. Climate factor: the duration of the heating season is determinant for CHP applications
in buildings. In northern countries the feasibility of cogeneration system is favoured
by the high demand for space-heating, which lasts for a long period (up to 6 months
per year) ensuring a sufficient annual operation time of the system. In southern
countries, however, CHCP systems can achieve a similar or even higher annual
operation, due to the significant cooling demand during the summer period. Hence,
the indicator for the assessment of the potential for small-scale CHP/CHCP must
include a climate factor; it was decided to base the calculation on the number of
degree days. In order to extend the validity of the analysis to small-scale CHCP
applications, both the average heating and cooling degree days were considered for
each country, harmonized by using the same reference temperature [5]; thus, a Total
Degree Days index is introduced, sum of cooling and heating degree days where the
226

contribute of cooling degree days was increased by a 1.45 factor, to keep into account
the COP of commercial absorption chillers. Further, where sufficient data were
available, a weighted average of local degree days values was determined for each
country, based on the demographic intensity of each zone. Finally, in order to adopt a
dimensionless parameter, the average degree values for each country were normalized
using as a reference value the lowest number of total degree days, as represented in
Figure 2.

H eating degree day s C ooling degree day s Total degree day s

4500

4000

3500

3000
De gre e da ys

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

0
Spain Italy France Denmark Germany Greece

Countrie s

Figure 2. Average number of total degree days per country.

Thus, for each country a factor is introduced, calculated as follows:
TDD
TDD eq = . (2)
TDD min

3. Monetary support mechanisms: the spark-spread defined by Eq. 1 only gives a rough
information on the market conditions exploited by small-scale CHP or CHCP
systems. In fact, it is defined on the basis of average market prices and it does not take
into account the large number of monetary provisions working in each country and
targeted to CHP systems; among these, premiums for CHP electricity, de-taxation of
CHP fuel and white certificates can be enumerated. In order to introduce properly this
factor in the definition of a synthetic indicator, it was expressed in terms of
multiplying factor to the market-price-based spark spread:
MPe + ∑ û 03
03 03
e
S spread,CHP MPF − ∑ û MPF  ∑û 
. Sp -spread = = = ⋅ 1 + .
03
F e
 (3)
S spread MPe MPF − ∑ û F  MPe 
MPF
 227

Actually, two different values for this parameter must be introduced (which will be
indicated as αSp-spread,p and αSp-spread,s), to keep into account the differences between
purchasing and selling prices of CHP electricity; both values are referred to the same
MPe and MPF introduced in Eq. 1. The expected values for αspread,p are in the range
1–2, while αspread,s can assume values lower than 1, because the opportunity to sell
energy out of the free market with a dispatching priority and the safer supply from
large utilities frequently leads to selling price of small-scale CHP electricity lower
than the average market values (even considering any support mechanism).
Both support mechanisms increasing the selling price of CHP electricity or reducing
fuel cost by partial or total de-taxation, are inspired by environmental or energy
saving purposes; the values of α Sp -spread testifies the concrete efforts at institutional
level for the promotion of polygeneration technologies. In this sense, the EU position
is remarkable, encouraging independent support actions to be taken at national level
in respect of the transparency and neutrality principles the common energy market is
based upon;
4. CHP knowledge: one of the factors most influencing the short-medium term potential
for a capillary penetration of clean technologies is the common sense about it. This is
true for small-scale polygeneration systems in particular, due to the large capital cost
which often discourages the adoption of CHP solutions both for the conversion of
existing conventional plants and for new plants. Among the examined factors, this
could seem the hardest to be quantified; however the experience indicates the
presence of a high number of small-scale CHP applications as the best basis for a
positive approach to polygeneration. Then, the most comprehensive definition of a
parameter expressing this “cultural” factor can be given in terms of ratio between
installed small-scale CHP capacity and the estimated potential for polygeneration in
the building sector:

  C  
1 C s −s CHP   1-5⋅ TC 
s − s CHP

KH CHP = 0.7 + ⋅ ⋅ 5e build. 
− 1.7 . (4)
2.36 TC build.  
 

The parameter KHCHP is dimensionless. In its expression all coefficients were

determined in order to achieve a suitable behaviour of the parameter, which varies in
the range [0.7–1]; the expression between square brackets was introduced to take into
account the market-saturation effects.

3.2. Non- quantifiable factors

In this sub-section different factors influencing CHP are presented, which cannot be
easily quantified or have an ambiguous the relation with the potential for small-scale
CHP.
However, in order to introduce such factors in the explicit definition of the gauge, an
hypothesis on their impact on the CHP market must be made; hence, for each of the non-
228

quantifiable elements a multiplying factor is given, expressing the expected increase or

decrease that it provokes to the CHP potential (for instance, a 1.3 factor is equivalent to
an estimated 30% boost effect on the CHP market).
1. Liberalization of energy market: the stagnation of CHP all over Europe and the
ongoing liberalization of energy markets have opened a heavy debate on whether the
liberalization gives a positive or negative contribution to CHP growth. In theory
liberalization should provide new opportunities for cogeneration, through the
elimination of many barriers deriving from a monopolistic structure of the electricity
market which resulted in low tariffs for the purchase of surplus electricity, high tariffs
for stand-by periods and no possibility of wheeling. Actually, in the Member States
where liberalization have produced a significant fall in energy price, CHP has become
less and less competitive; in fact, the free market is often environmentally distorted
for the lack of monetary mechanisms supporting clean technologies, and the old big
coal or nuclear power plants, whose capital investment is totally amortized, exploit
their lower variable cost and grow in competitiveness. This controversial relation
between liberalization and CHP potential induced us to define an articulated
liberalization and CHP potential induced us to define an articulated parameter, which
is:
1
MK lib = 1 + ⋅ (L % ⋅ Π env ) ⋅ DP (5)
4
where:
L% represents the extent of market opening (depending on the number of large
electricity producers and on the percentage of costumers eligible to purchase
energy on the free market). Values in the range [0–1] are assigned;
Πenv indicates at what extent in the growing liberalized market reflects the efficiency
and the environmental implications, creating insuperable barriers for low-cost
but obsolete power plants. Its value varies in the range [-1–1];
DP this coefficient is introduced to consider the advantages for CHP systems over
the ordinary demand-supply balance system of the free market, in the countries
where a dispatching priority exists for CHP electricity (as allowed by Directive
2004/8/EC). DP assumes the value 1.1 in countries where a dispatching priority
was introduced, and 1 where no.
By introducing the coefficient ¼ we expressed the estimation for a maximum 25%
increase/decrease of the CHP potential due to the effects of the liberalization of
energy market. The values assumed by L% are derived from the results of several
investigations available in literature [6–8];
2. Grants and loans: a relevant contribute to the economic viability of CHP/CHCP
systems often derives from monetary support mechanisms not influencing the energy
price, and thus not included among those examined in section 3.1. In particular we
refer to public grants, which are usually expressed as a percentage of the capital cost,
and soft loans at favorable recovery rates and reimbursement plan. This factor could
seem easily quantifiable; however, in most cases the financial contributes have a very
 229

articulated structure, and it is not easy to assess to which extent any small-scale CHP
application could be supported. A parameter is introduced to keep account of financial
support, indicated as Ωgrant. Where a clear pattern for grants exists, these are taken into
account by a direct calculation of Ωgrant (a public funding accounting for 40% of the
capital cost leads us to assume a 1.4 factor); otherwise, its values is based on an
estimation of the contribute to the spread of small-scale CHP. Values higher or equal
to 1 are obviously expected;
3. Bureaucratic barriers: the presence of a long and controversial process to obtain the
required licenses for the auto-production of energy and for the connection to the grid,
as well as the lack of transparent criteria for the access represent significant obstacle
for the spread of small-scale polygeneration systems. The collection of detailed
informations about the difficulties encountered by private or public customers before
operating a CHP system is not an easy task; in this paper the results of many
investigations are used, based both on a brief analysis of the licensing procedure in
different countries and on informations about the complexity of these procedures as
perceived at market-operators level. Again, the factor is quantitatively expressed by a
dimensionless parameter, Ξbur, ranging from 0.5 to 1 (the higher Ξbur, the lower is the
barrier to the spread of small-scale CHP represented by the licensing and grid-
connecting procedure). The 0.5 value (50% percent reduction in CHP potential due to
the bureaucratic-normative obstacles) was assumed as minimum value for countries
where energy surplus could not be sold to the public grid; however, power selling is
not prohibited in any of the examined countries, and the adopted values for Ξbur in all
cases exceeded 0.7;
4. Uncertainty at normative level: the legislative framework about cogeneration has
been rapidly changing, and further provisions are expected in the short-medium term,
to be adopted both at EU and national level; on the other hand, project planning for
power or thermal systems with a life-cycle in the order of 12–15 years need a stable
and clear normative context. Hence, the lack of a reliable normative scenario for the
medium-long term represents an obstacle for the spread of small-scale CHP, and in
some countries it emerges as a decisive factor. A parameter is introduced to keep into
account this factor, Θ, to be used as a multiplying factor in the expression of a
synthetic indicator; as most of provisions will be adopted in an harmonized
framework at EU level, the value of Θ slightly changes by country, varying from 0.7
to 0.9 (respectively corresponding to 30% and 10% esteemed impact on the potential
for small-scale CHP);
5. Connection and transport cost: decentralized power production in small-scale systems
reduces the need for long distance power flows by more local balancing of demand
and supply; it is generally recognized that the way these avoided cost and advantages
are reflected in the connection and transport fees will strongly influence the
economics of cogeneration units. The EU Commission indicated that “the system of
regulated Third Party Access on the basis of published prices is the method of
permitting access to the network that will produce the most effective competitive
230

market”. A controversial argument concerns the transport fees system; in fact a

multitude of systems have been working in different countries, like the “stamp”
system, the “counter trade”, the “tariffs per zones” and the “point” systems. However,
it is widely recognized that any system cannot be considered as favorable or
detrimental for itself, and the effects on the decentralized production market primarily
depends on the way it is actually implemented. The connection of CHP auto-
producers with the grid is related to both the transparency of conditions for the
connection and the setting of fair access criteria, from an economic viewpoint. As
concerns the transparency, the electricity Directive 2003/54/EC (repealing the former
96/92/EC) only obliges the companies to maintain separate accounts of their
production, transport and distribution activity; this was revealed to be a weak
provision. Again, this factor is kept into account by introducing a parameter, Λc-t,
which varies in the range 0.8–1 growing with the fairness of the system for the
determination of transport and connection costs.

3.3. An expression for the indicator assessing the potential of small-scale CHP/CHCP
In the previous sub-sections the elements were presented, which will be considered in the
definition of an indicator to assess the potential of small-scale CHP/CHCP in the tertiary
sector. According with the contribute of each of the defined parameters, the proposed
expression is as follows:

Ψ = Sspread ⋅ α Sp −spread ⋅ TDD eq ⋅ KH CHP ⋅ MK lib ⋅ Ω grant ⋅ Ξ bur ⋅ Θ ⋅ Λ c − t . (6)

The defined parameter is obviously dimensionless; the potential penetration for

small-scale CHP in the j-th country can be expressed as:
PPCHP, j = RPCHP ⋅ Ψ j , (7)

where RPCHP is the penetration in the assumed reference scenario; according to the
definition of each of the parameters in Eq. 6, RPCHP is the potential for small-scale CHP
in a temperate climate country (like Italy, with TDDeq=1), where:
• No inner advantages or disadvantage exists for the production of electricity by CHP
systems (SSpread=1);
• No monetary support mechanisms are working (αSpark-spread=1);
• CHP covers the 10% of the total installed capacity in the tertiary sector ,which was
assumed as the best penetration share as concerns the factor indicated as CHP
knowledge (KHCHP = 1);
• The degree of market opening, the environment-oriented provisions and the eventual
dispatching priority for CHP electricity make liberalization not to empower nor to
weaken the spontaneous trend of growth of small-scale polygeneration (MKlib=1);
• No financial support mechanisms exist for starting CHP applications (Ωgrant);
• No bureaucratic barriers exist (Ξbur=1);
 231

• A clear and stable normative framework exists, as concerns small-scale CHP/CHCP

systems (Θ=1);
• The connection and transport cost properly reflect the inner advantages of
decentralized production systems and the benefits produced for the overall grid
balance (Λc-t=1).
Obviously, two different Ψp and Ψs values were obtained, respectively for power
purchasing and selling. Both these values provide information on the feasibility of small-
scale CHP/CHCP for application in buildings; however, the adoption of two distinct
values allows to recognize whether the spread of polygeneration systems oriented to base
load production or to energy selling could be expected.
The philosophy adopted for the definition of the above gauge shows the dynamic-
decisional purposes of the indicator; independently from the actual penetration of small-
scale CHP in a country, it allows to predict the effectiveness of any policy that could be
implemented through an analysis of the single elements on the right-hand member of
Eq. 6. In the next section a brief analysis for six European countries is presented, oriented
to the determination of the parameters introduced in this section; the analysis furnishes
basic instruments for a successive analysis of policy actions that could be undertaken.

4. Results
The parameters defined in the section three were calculated for different European
countries, and in this section the results are presented.
A very inhomogeneous set of countries was selected (composed by the countries
indicated in Figure 2), with the purpose to furnish a valid basis for an analysis of the
achieved results.
In Figure 3 the values of the indicator Ψ is represented, in two distinct series for
energy purchasing and energy selling modes.

Figure 3. Values assumed by the defined indicator in energy-purchasing and energy-selling periods, per
country.
232

5. Conclusions
An original indicator for the assessment of the potential small scale CHP market in
different countries was proposed, which is based on a set of factors most influencing the
spread of polygeneration systems.
The impact of each factor was expressed in analytic terms, with a distinction among
quantifiable and non-quantifiable factors; the second group of factors is kept into account
by introducing esteemed expressions for the market effects.
After collecting a sufficient set of data, the values assumed by the indicator was
calculated in six European countries, distinguishing between the energy-purchasing and
the energy-selling mode.
Reasonable values were obtained, which reflects sufficiently the current trend of
national small-scale CHP markets in the examined countries. The proposed method is
very flexible and suitable for adjustments depending on peculiar aspects of the energy
market and on different definition of the set of factors.

References

1. Data available on the website http://europa.eu.int/index_en.htm

2. S. Minett, Cogeneration in Europe: new policies should turn the market around,
Cogeneration and On-Site Power Production, Review Issue 2002–2003, pp. 29–39.
3. European Commission-DG TREN, OPET CHP/DH Cluster: Workpackage 2: Micro
and Small Scale CHP- Cross National report, Coontract n. NNE5/2002/52
4. IEA, Energy Efficiency update report, available on the website
http://spider.iea.org/pubs/newslett/eneeff/table.htm
5. World Climate Design Data 2001 ASHRAE Handbook
6. L. Hancher, Slow and not so sure: Europe’s long march to electricity market
liberalization, The electricity Journal vol. 10/9, pp. 92–101 (1997).
7. Data available on the website: www.europa.eu.int/comm/eurostat/newcronos
8. European Commission, DG TREN, Towards a competitive and regulated European
electricity and gas market, available on the website:
http://europa.eu.int/comm/energy/electricity/publications/
MATHEMATICAL MODELING OF A HEATING SYSTEM FOR A SnO2
CVD REACTOR AND COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
SIMULATIONS (3D-CFD)

DINO NOVOSEL†
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval Architecture, University of Zagreb, I. Lucica5
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

ALAIDE PELLEGRINI MAMMANA

Coordenadora da Mostradores de Informação, Centro de Pesquisas Renato Archer, Rodovia D.
Pedro I, km 143.6 — CEP 13082-120
Campinas, São Paulo, Brazil

ŽELJKO TUKOVIĆ
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval Architecture, University of Zagreb, I. Lucica5
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

This paper presents the study of the heat transfer of a continuous system that is being designed for
the deposition of tin oxide thin SnO2 films on soda-lime glass substrates of large dimensions (400
mm x 400 mm x 2 mm) in terms of Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) glasses production improvement.
This system will operate with infra-red heating (parallel mounted ceramics IR lamps in one unit)
and will substitute the present CVD system, which is used in the CenPRA display pilot plant to coat
substrates up to 150 mm x 150 mm x 2mm. In this system the substrates are heated by thermal
conduction and the deposition is done by a ´´in house´´ process called Vapor Decomposition Process
(VDP). Using numerical solver FLUENT, simulated was VDP process at atmospheric pressure,
taking in mind that the system consists of two parallelepiped-like chambers: the furnace containing
the IR lamps in which the glass is heated, and the chamber where the deposition occurs. FLUENT
helps us to obtain the resolution of the elementary differential equations for mass diffusivity, full
multi-component thermal diffusion effects and reactions on the heated substrate. The simulations
permitted to get a 3D perspective of the deposited layer along the substrate surface and also to
calculate the VDP process parameters as temperature, pressure, reaction rate for each species (O2, Cl
and HCl) and gas speed along the chamber.

1 Introduction
Brazil, the land of an internal sun! How to help the Brazilian population to increase
energy efficiency by decreasing heat load of household air condition systems? The answer
is INTELIGENT WINDOWS and it was given by CenPRA.
The CenPRA (Centro de Pesquisas Renato Archer) is an acronym for the major federal
researching institute for microelectronics located in Campinas, Sao Paulo, Brazil. It is
sponsored mainly from a government budget and therefore very often seeks the money for
the investments of the necessary researching equipment. By help of young students they
try to invent and design all necessary stuffs for the experiments.

†
The author had developed the model during the student internship in Brazil.

233
234

During my 7th months stay in CenPRA on internship, I was enrolled into department for
developing equipment and process improvement of the Liquid Crystal Displays.
There was existing old equipment for step-by-step producing of semi-conductive thin
layers of SnO2 on glass surfaces obtained with Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) of the
gasses (SnCl4, H2O). Furthermore, those glasses were mounted into ‘sandwiches’ due to
obtain semi-conductive polarized transparent layers. Connecting on those deposited
glasses a microcontroller we will obtain intelligent window which will be used for
reducing of income sun beams through the windows into houses.
Topic of the project was to invent, design and realize the new plant for continuously
producing (substrate placed on moving belt which will first pass through the furnace and
after while through the depositing chamber), by the deposition, of tin oxide thin films on
soda-lime glass substrates of large dimensions (400 mm x 400 mm x 2 mm).

2 Approach to the problem

Basically, I was confronted with studying of Chemical Vapor Deposition in general.
Theory says that CVD process is feasible under the following conditions: soda lime glass
(400x400x2 mm) has to be preheated up to approximately 400ºC and after heating is
prepared to be deposited under atmospheric pressure (p=101325 Pa) by gas mixture of
SnCl4 + 2H2O in depositing chamber. It was from crucial significance to determine the
time necessary for heating of the soda lime glass substrate. Using that time it was possible
to calculate constant velocity for moving belt on which was substrate placed. Finally it
has had to be synchronized time which glass spent under the infra red radiators - furnace
and in depositing chamber due to constant velocity of moving belt.
The main idea of problem simplification was to split CVD into two parts: heating and
deposition. In first part of problem determination was modeled time necessary for heating
of the substrate and in second part occurred 3D Compotation Fluid Dynamics (CFD)
simulations. Due to small velocity of moving belt, there appeared some assumptions.
There were ignored boundary conditions in heating process on the edges of the glass
substrate:
Dispersion of infra red beams – energy lost.
Non uniform heated surface – bad pattern for the intelligent window.
Length of substrate caught by deposition chamber after furnace is on constant temperature
during deposition.
The system consists of two parallelepiped–like chambers: the furnace containing the IR
lamps in which the glass is heated (1) and the chamber where the deposition occurs. In the
chamber (1) is used a mathematical model for determining the necessary time for heating
the substrate with IR radiators, while in chamber (2) are made 3D simulations of the CVD
process.
Basic chemical reaction which occurs on soda lime glass surface is given below:
SnCl4 + 2H2O → 4HCl + SnO2. (1)
Tin chloride SnCl4 appears in gas phase and H2O appears like water vapor. SnO2 tin
dioxide is finally wanted product of deposited semi –conductive layer and there is also
unwanted product of hydrogen chloride which has to be safely removed from depositing
chamber.
 235

Figure 1. Illustration of the heating system (furnace) and the deposition chamber for the continuous LCD
production.

3 Mathematical model of the heating system with IR-radiators

Adopted was “two parallel plates” model for radiation due to nearness of IR radiator
surface and soda lime glass surface which is also explained in Figure 2. Infra red radiators
IR were considered like a heating plane surface of a constant temperature 900ºC.

Figure 2. Description of the applied radiation model.

Basic equation for the heat flow from the IR’s to the substrate:
∆T
∆Θ12 = mc . (2)
t
236

The heat flow is given by the equation for radiation between two flat surfaces:

∆Θ12 =
(
Aσ T14 − T24
.
) (3)
1 1
+ −1
ε1 ε2
By equalizing these equations and transferring into infinitesimal form:

ρδc =
(
dT σ T14 − T24
.
) (4)
dt 1 1
+ −1
ε1 ε2
Final form of the basic integral equation for this system is given by Eq. (5):
t = t1
σ
T= ∫ (T )
− T24 dt .
4
1 (5)
1 1 
ρδc + − 1 t = 0
 ε1 ε 2 
Solving that equation from t = 0 up to 150 s time depended substrate temperature is
shown below (Figure 3).

Figure 3. Soda – lime glass heating curve.

 237

According to our model it is necessary to heat the substrate for approximately 23 s to

achieve 400ºC (soda-lime glass 2 mm thick), which is supposed to be an optimal
temperature for Chemical Vapor Deposition.

4 3D-CFD simulations of CVD process

Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) is complex process which at the same time includes
accurate modeling of time - dependent hydrodynamics, heat and mass transfer and
chemical reactions (including wall surface reactions).
Modeling the reactions taking place at gas-solid interfaces is complex and involves
several elementary physico-chemical processes like adsorption of gas-phase species on
the surface, chemical reactions occurring on the surface and desorption of gasses from the
surface back to the gas phase.

Methodology

• Creating basic geometry in Gambit.

• Splitting real, finite, volume into infinite derivable ´´control volumes´´, ´´meshing´´.
• Defining boundary zones (inlet, outlet, surface and wall).
• Exporting designed model into solver Fluent where the final model definitions
occurred.
• Applying numerically algorithm for solving system of differential equations assuming
a priori values for temperature, velocity, pressure, surface deposition ratio and
correcting them in each iteration.
• The system of equations is solved when the final difference, called ´´Residual´´,
between obtained results and input boundary condition is smaller then initial value
given by user.

Differential equation system

Continuity equation:
∂ρ ∂ (ρv j )
=− (6)
∂t ∂x j
Momentum conservation equations:

∂ (ρvi ) ∂ (ρv j vi ) ∂p ∂ ∑
+ ρf i −
ji
=− + (7)
∂t ∂x j ∂xi ∂x j
Energy conservation equation:

∂   v2  ∂   v2  (
δ ( pvi ) ∂ ∑ ji vi ) ∂  ∂T 
λ  (8)
 ρ  + u  = −  ρv j  + u  + ρf i vi − + +
∂t   2  ∂x j   2  ∂xi ∂x j ∂xi  ∂xi 
238

Eqs. (6)-(8) define only mass and heat transfer of the gasses along the chamber while Eq.
(9) presents conservation species transport equation:

∂ → →
( ρYi ) + ∇ ⋅ ( ρ v Yi ) = −∇ ⋅ J i + Ri + S i , (9)
∂t
where below is given explanation for each symbol in equation: Yi - the local mass fraction
of each species; Ri - the net rate of production of species i by chemical reaction, Si - the
rate of creation by addition from the dispersed phase plus any user-defined sources and
→
J i - is the diffusion flux of species i.

4.1. Problem definition for model No.1

As is it shown in Figure 4 the observed control volume of deposition chamber consists of
following significant surfaces: inlet, reactant and outlet surfaces. The mixture of reactant
gasses, SnCl4 + 2H2O, flows into deposit chamber, react on heated reactant surface and
goes out through the outlet surface. Model assumption which was applied is that
temperature of the reactant surface is constant along the width of the chamber and for first
simulation that velocity of reactant surface is 0.
The big significance in this researching work was determination of the material properties
of an exotic chemical species and reactions.

Figure 4. Design of the deposition chamber – Model 1.

4.1.1. Results of model No.1

Thanks to excellent graphic user interface of Fluent, interpretation of obtained results was
quite easy in colorized 3D perspective. From Figure 5 we can see that red color present
biggest surface deposition rate of SnO2 expressed in (kg/m2-s). That was expected data
 239

due to biggest concentration of species mixture on reactant surface edge where the gases
bypass the surface according to the outlet surface.

Table 1. The material properties of chemical species and reactions.

Parameter HCl SnCl4 SnO2
Name Hydrogen- Stannic-Chloride Stannic-Oxide
Chloride
Density (kg/m3) 1.5599 2234 6930
Cp (J/kgK) 0.00798 0.6345 0.3489
Thermal conductivity (W/mK) 0.0159 66.8 93.1295
Viscosity (kg/ms) 1.31e-05 0.00095 0.0075
Molecular weight (kg/kmol) 36.461 260.51 150.71
Standard state enthalpy (J/kg) -5.7763e+08 -5.113e+08 -5.7763e+08
Standard state entropy (J/kgK) 186900 250600 49040
Reference temperature (K) 298.15 298.15 298.15
L-J characteristic length 3.711 3.711 3.711
L-J energy parameter 78.6 78.6 78.6
Degrees of freedom 0 0 0
Reference:
“Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 77th Edition”, David R.Lide 1996-1997

Figure 5. SnO2 deposition among the soda - lime glass for the model No. 1.
240

Figure 6. 2D chart of surface deposition rate along the center line of the reactant surface.
As we can see, surface deposition rate of SnO2 along the substrate surface is not uniform
‘enough’ (deposition curve should be flat, not parabolic shaped). Main significance of siis
to obtain as much as it is possible uniform deposited layer along the soda - lime glass
substrate. Therefore, depositing chamber model geometry and positioning of observed
surfaces improvement should occur!

4.2. Problem definition for model No. 2

Basic idea to change chamber construction was to redirect gases flux above the substrate
surface in transversal direction instead of old, vertical and width of substrate is in total
caught by gases inlet so there is avoided possibility of local gases concentration in some
boundary areas above the substrate.

4.2.1. Results of model No2

From Figure 8 we can see that geometry redesign was helpful in terms of deposition
uniformity improvement. On coordination defined with vector (x {0.0025-0.403}, y=0.04,
z=0.0222), where is the most red color, obtained was uniform deposition along the
substrate width. Wanted aim of deposition uniformity was provided!
According to initial data from table 2, 2D chart of surface deposition rate is presented
in Figure 9.
For final simulation was again decreased velocity of moving substrate which just
justified better deposition rate of SnO2 along the soda lime –glass substrate.
 241

Figure 7. Design of the deposition chamber – Model No. 2.

Figure 8. SnO2 deposition among the soda - lime glass for the model No. 2.
242

Table 2. Operating and boundary conditions for the first iteration.

Operating Boundary conditions Boundary Boundary

conditions INLET conditions Con. OUTLET
SURFACE
Mass fractions
v T T vy
p (Pa) T
(m/s) (K) SnCl4 H2O (K) (m/s)
(K) Outflow

100000 303 0.08 573 0.4 0.3 673 -0.05

Figure 9. 2D Chart of SnO2 layer along the line defined with (x {0.0025-0.403}, y=0.04, z=0.0222).

Table 3. Operating and boundary conditions for the last iteration.

Operating Boundary conditions Boundary Boundary

conditions INLET conditions Con. OUTLET
SURFACE
Mass
v T T vy
T fractions
p (Pa) (m/s) (K) (K) (m/s)
(K) SnCl4 H2O
Outflow
100000 303 0.08 403 0.4 0.3 673 -0.12
 243

Figure 10. 2D Chart of SnO2 layer along the line defined with (x{0.0025-0.403}, y=0.04, z=0.0222).

5. Conclusion
Although it was used very simple chamber geometry, the simulation showed to be helpful
if we intend to optimize the uniformity of the deposited layer, throughput and the yield of
the coating glasses of large area. Further research will be focused on improving geometry
of the chamber and optimizing parameters of the process to get better uniformity of the
deposited layer along the substrate surface. Enhancement of the model could occur also
by modeling of inlet nozzles which were out of time for this project.

References

1. A.P. Mammana, T.E.A. Santos and M.H.M.O. Hamanaka and S.C. Trippe, Thermal
behavior of SnO2 thin films obtained by vapor decomposition, 16th International
Vacuum Congress (IVC-16), Venice, June 28th to July 2nd (2004).
2. A.F. Botaro, F.C. Reis, M.A. Schreiner end A.P. Mammana, Obtenção de SnO2 por
decomposição de vapores: estudo da cinética da reação, Anais do VI Seminário
Iberoamericano de Mostradores de Informação, Fortaleza, 29 de setembro a 3 de
outubro de 2003, pp. 28 (2003).
3. FLUENT & GAMBIT, Users manual and on-line tutorial guide, © Fluent Inc. 2003-
01-24.
4. Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 7th Edition, David R. Lide, 1996 – 1997.
244

5. A. Galovic, Thermodynamics I & II´, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval

Architecture, University of Zagreb, Croatia.
6. N. Serman, ´Regulation of the Process, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval
Architecture, University of Zagreb, Croatia.
WATER MANAGEMENT

245
This page intentionally left blank
 THE WATER FRAMEWORK DIRECTIVE AND MEDITERRANEAN
AGRICULTURE

JOSÉ ALBIAC
Unidad de Economía Agraria, CITA-DGA, P.O. Box 727
Zaragoza, 50080, Spain

MITHAT MEMA
Unidad de Economía Agraria, CITA-DGA, P.O. Box 727
Zaragoza, 50080, Spain

The high irrigation demand for water resources in Mediterranean countries, creates significant water
quality problems compounded by water scarcity. The reliance of the Water Framework Directive on
water pricing to solve water scarcity or improve water quality, may fail in Mediterranean countries.
Therefore, other Directive instruments need to be applied, such as control on aquifer abstractions,
ambient quality standards and emissions limits. These instruments require knowledge on local
biophysical processes and ecosystem damage costs that are far from available at present.

1 Introduction
Irrigated agriculture in Mediterranean countries is an essential factor for agricultural
production, while irrigation water is used only marginally in central and northern
European agriculture. There is a significant pressure on water resources and fluvial
ecosystems in Portugal and Greece, because of the large share of water extractions for
irrigation. However the pressure on water resources is much more important in Spain,
Italy and Turkey because of the very large acreage under irrigation, with a combined
water demand close to 80.000 hm3 (Table 1). Irrigation development in these three
countries has been driven by large and sustained public investments in waterworks to
store, transport and distribute water to irrigation fields.
Another aspect to consider in the case of Italy and Spain, is the development of
groundwater extractions in the second half of the twentieth century. The large escalation
in groundwater extractions has been driven by the falling costs of pumping technologies
in areas with profitable irrigated crops. In contrast to the large collective irrigation
systems, these private groundwater extractions are not subject to much control by the
water administration.
In Italy, pervasive aquifer overdraft and water quality problems are located in the Po
basin, Romagna and Puglia, and in the coastal plains of Campania, Calabria and
Sardegna. In Spain, the most severe scarcity and quality problems occur in the Júcar,
Segura and South basins, located in the southeastern Iberian peninsula.
The consequence is that there is a dual situation for water resources linked to
irrigation. The irrigation districts of inland Spain and southern Italy are based on

247
248

collective surface irrigation systems and low profit crops, and water resources
degradation is moderate.

Table 1. European countries with large water use for irrigation (2001).
Country Total water extractions (hm3) Irrigated land (1000 ha) Irrigation water (hm3)
Germany 40360 490 620
United Kingdom 15890 110 1900
France 29820 2200 3120
Greece 8910 1450 7700
Italy 56200 2700 25850
Portugal 9880 650 8770
Spain 26050 3650 21340
Bulgaria 5830 800 870
Hungary 5590 210 500
Poland 11600 100 1030
Romania 7340 2670 1020
Turkey 39780 4500 31000
Total Europe 291870 21170 109470
Source: EEA (2005) [6].

The reason is that basin authorities regulate water extractions, and there is some
degree of fluvial ecosystem protection by the enforcement of minimum ecological flows.
High profitable Mediterranean crops such as fruits and vegetables concentrate in the
coastal areas of Spain and Italy, which are based on individual pumping from aquifers.
There are two general policy approaches when dealing with quantity and quality
problems faced by Mediterranean irrigated agriculture. One is the traditional water policy
approach based on expanding water supply, and the other is the new emerging approach
based on water management initiatives. These emerging initiatives rely on measures such
water pricing, revision of water rights, abstraction limits on surface and subsurface
waters, development of regulated water markets, and water resources reuse and
regeneration. These management initiatives are better suited to solve irrigation scarcity
than new supply technologies such as desalination [7].
A very illustrative example of the conflict between these two approaches, is the type
of solutions that have been considered for solving water scarcity and degradation in
southeastern Spain. Two projects have been presented in the last four years; the Ebro
interbasin transfer and the new AGUA project designed to substitute for the Ebro transfer.
Both projects rely on the traditional approach of expanding supply with subsidized public
investments, and both are questionable on economic grounds.
However, new water management approach measures should be applied carefully and
need a reliable information base. The example presented here deals with agricultural
nonpoint pollution, and shows that nonpoint pollution control instruments cannot be
assessed accurately without a correct understanding of the key underlying biophysical
processes. Neglect of these processes may lead to wrong policy measures.
This paper examines quantity and quality issues of Mediterranean irrigated
agriculture, presenting empirical evidence from Spain on alternative policy options and
measures. Along the lines of the European Water Framework Directive, the measures
 249

examined cover two cases: the evaluation of alternatives to solve water scarcity in
southeastern Spanish basins, and ranking agricultural pollution control instruments by
their cost efficiency.

2 The Water Framework Directive and Mediterranean irrigated agriculture

The European Union has approved the Water Framework Directive to protect all
continental, coastal and subsurface waters. The Directive objectives are the improvement
of water quality and ecosystems conditions, the promotion of sustainable use of water,
and the reduction of emissions and discharges to water media. The economic aspects of
the Directive are addressed in article [5] (economics analysis of water use), article [9]
(cost recovery) and article [11] (programme of measures). Water pricing should
approximate full recovery costs to increase water use efficiency, by including extraction,
distribution and treatment costs, environmental costs and resource value costs. There are
also a combination of emission limits and water quality standards, with deadlines to
achieve good status for all waters.
The European Water Directive has a great potential to solve water scarcity and
nonpoint pollution in Mediterranean countries, and this initiative is supported by the
findings of the European Environmental Agency, which point to agricultural nonpoint
pollution as the primary cause of water quality deterioration in many European
watersheds [5]. However, the reliance of the Directive on water pricing to curb demand
may fail in Mediterranean countries such as Spain and Italy, with high irrigation demand
and quality problems compounded by water scarcity.
Water pricing will not solve scarcity or improve quality in the more degraded areas,
because rising water prices would reduce consumption in large irrigation districts of
inland Spain or southern Italy, based on collective systems and low-profit crops, where
degradation problems are moderate. But water demand will not respond to higher prices
in areas based on individual aquifer extractions with Mediterranean high-profit crops,
where pressure on water resources is pervasive and degradation is severe [12].
Water pricing fails as a workable policy for curbing irrigation demand for several
reasons. The first is that, after decades of mismanagement, the number of illegal private
wells is huge and there is no control over the volume pumped from either legal or illegal
wells. The consequence is that it is almost impossible to implement a tax on water
pumped from aquifers. A second reason is related to the water price level that is needed to
curb demand. In Spain, shadow prices of water in coastal areas under greenhouse
production can reach three to five euros per cubic meter, against 10-20 cents €/m3 in
inland Spain, while current water prices in coastal areas are between 6 and 21 cents €/m3
compared to 2-5 cents €/m3 in inland collective irrigation systems [3, 4]. With urban
prices in Spain close to or below one euro per cubic meter, and seawater desalination at
around 50 cents €/m3, it would seem unacceptable to set agricultural prices in water
scarcity areas above urban and desalination prices. Though a policy designed to control
aquifer overdraft would be quite difficult to implement, a water pricing policy that were
to drive prices above the three to five euros shadow price per cubic meter for private
250

extractions would be impossible to implement, both because of its technical and

administrative unfeasibility and the daunting prospect of social opposition from farmers.
These more degraded areas therefore require other Directive instruments, such as
controlling aquifer overdraft by reducing concessions, and enforcing ambient quality
standards and pollution emissions limits.
These facts seem to indicate that the Water Framework Directive would be difficult
to implement in Mediterranean countries. The question is the following, a water pricing
policy can be implemented easily at least in collective irrigation systems managed by the
basin water authorities, but instruments to control aquifer extractions, pollution emissions
and ambient quality are much more difficult to implement. The information needed by
policy decision makers on aquifers recharge and pumping by farmers, irrigation pollution
emissions from either surface or subsurface water, soils, pollutant transport and fate
processes, ambient pollution, and damage costs to ecosystems, is not available in
countries with significant irrigated agriculture such as Spain, Italy, Portugal and Greece.
Without this information base, it is impossible to design reasonable control measures to
prevent aquifer overdraft and abate nonpoint pollution. The consequence is that water
pricing measures suited to reduce industrial and urban demand, which are paramount in
northern and central European countries, would be implemented for irrigation in
Mediterranean countries instead of the measures that are really needed.
Even under the now binding Water Framework Directive, policy developments in
Spain show that the traditional approach of expanding water supply remains the essential
scheme underlying water policy initiatives. The recent Ebro water transfer project and the
new AGUA project, highlight the weaknesses of this traditional approach.

3 The rise and fall of the Ebro water transfer

The Ebro interbasin project was intended to solve the acute water scarcity and resource
degradation of southeastern Spanish basins. The Ebro project nominal costs were close to
5 billion euro, transferring 800 hm3 up to a distance of 750 km, from the Ebro basin to the
Júcar, Segura and South basins of southeastern Spain. The Ebro transfer met with strong
opposition from water resource experts, environmental and social organizations, and the
Aragón and Cataluña regions located in the Ebro basin, and the main argument against the
Ebro transfer was the need of new policy initiatives based on reasonable management
measures.
A research effort was undertaken to evaluate alternatives to the Ebro water transfer.
The evaluation is based on a model that incorporates a large quantity of technical and
economic information specified at the county level. The model is used to simulate several
water supply and demand policy scenarios, and details on the model building, parameter
estimation procedures, and simulation results are presented in Albiac et al. [1, 2, 3, 4].
The study covers thirty five southeastern counties of the Iberian Peninsula receiving water
from the Ebro transfer (Figure 1). The objective function maximizes quasi-rent from
irrigated cultivation activities, and the constraints represent land, water and labor resource
 251

availability, considering irrigation acreage by type of crop, and monthly irrigation and
labor.
The year of reference for all technical and economic data is 2001, and the baseline
data on acreage, water use and revenue are presented in Table 2.
The costs of the Ebro project at each delivery location have been calculated by Uche
[15]. The energy costs of pumping are an important cost component of the transfer
project, and the specific energy consumption at each section is closely related to the
channel’s elevation. Costs of diverted water are lower than seawater desalination (0.52
€/m3) up to the Tous outlet, but desalination costs beyond Tous are lower than transfer
costs, and transfer costs in Almería double the desalination costs.

Table 2. Acreage, water use and revenue in southeastern basins (2001).

Cereals, alfalfa Open air Greenhouse
Basins Total Fruit trees
and sunfower vegetables vegetables
Júcar
Acreage (1,000 ha) 212.7 18.5 173.6 19.5 1.1
Irrigation water (hm3) 1,450 242 1,081 121 6
Revenue (million €) 1,196 39 957 167 33
Segura
Acreage (1,000 ha) 154.9 8.1 107.7 34.2 4.9
Irrigation water (hm3) 863 62 654 125 22
Revenue (million €) 1,070 6 485 336 243
South
Acreage (1,000 ha) 54.5 1.1 18.7 6.5 28.1
Irrigation water (hm3) 232 10 96 24 102
Revenue (million €) 1,124 1 67 87 969

3.1. Water management scenario

The effects of several water management alternatives in the irrigated agriculture of
southeastern basins have been analyzed. Two alternatives involve water demand
management measures, two others are water supply expansion measures, and the last
alternative is a combined management alternative. In the first scenario, a strategy is
analyzed in which groundwater overdraft is forbidden, and there are no transfers of water
from external basins. In the second scenario, a price increase is considered in order to
find the price level that balances water demand with the available water resources in
southeastern basins. This scenario follows the full recovery cost principle of the Water
Framework Directive. The third alternative is to expand water supply with transferred
water from the Ebro, linked to water subsidies to maintain the present low irrigation water
prices. The fourth alternative combines water trading among counties with prohibition of
aquifer overdraft.
Water trades may take place along present conveying facilities of main rivers and
canals, allowing for additional supply of desalinated water. Desalinated water is
considered in coastal counties that exhibit very high shadow prices of water. The
elimination of aquifers overdraft reduces the availability of water for agriculture by 422
hm3, and the effects are concentrated in the counties where aquifers are located. In the
252

Júcar and Segura basins, the reduction of available water and cultivated acreage mainly
affects low profit crops.

Figure 1. Map of the water transfer path and counties in the receiving basins.
Source: Trasagua (2003) for the latest water transfer path [14].
 253

But in the South basin, the reduction of water and cultivated acreage affects highly
profitable greenhouse crops, since there are few low profit crops to be given up (Table 2).
Losses are quite substantial in the South where revenue and quasi-rent of farmers fall by
almost 50 percent, while losses in Segura and Júcar are moderate.
The increase in water prices for irrigation is a demand management instrument
advocated by the new Water Framework Directive. Agricultural water prices could be
maintained below prices paid by other users, but scarcity in Southeast could be solved
increasing prices by 0.12 €/m3. A 0.12 €/m3 increase in water prices reduces agricultural
water demand by 509 hm3, with a fall in farmers revenue and quasi-rent, due to the
decline in the acreage of cereal and woody crops which are less profitable. The impact on
quasi-rent is much greater in the Júcar and Segura basins than in Almería.
An increase of 0.18 €/m3 in water prices reduces water demand by 605 hm3, as a
consequence of abandonment of cereal cultivation and reduction in cultivation of woody
crops. The cost of this proposal to farmers is given by the decline in quasi-rent amounting
to a sizeable 24 percent.
Desalination of seawater is a measure complementary to increasing water prices, that
expands supply and balances water resources demand and supply in southeastern basins.
The cost of desalination is 0.52 €/m3 [15], and the effective water demand at this price in
the coastal counties from Safor to Campo Dalías is 387 hm3. Desalination cost is lower
than the costs of transferred water in the counties south of Safor. Water supply and
demand could be balanced by desalination coupled with an increase of 0.12 €/m3 in water
prices. Transferring water from the Ebro was the alternative of the National Hydrological
Plan Law, that has been cancelled by the new Spanish government. Diverted water would
have high costs which depend on the distance from the Ebro river [15], with a range of
prices between 0.20 €/m3 in Baix Maestrat county and 1.05 €/m3 in Campo Dalías county.
These prices are well above the low prices in the range 0.06-0.21 €/m3 that farmers pay
now, and at these prices the project water will only pay for itself in counties with highly
profitable crops. The volume of imported water that counties can absorb at the prices
shown in Table 3 is 761 hm3 in Júcar, 294 hm3 in Segura and 132 hm3 in South. These
quantities contrast with the planned water transfer targets for agricultural and
environmental use of 141 hm3 in Júcar, 362 hm3 in Segura and 58 hm3 in South. Thus, in
the Segura basin there is a significant problem of inconsistency in the Ebro project, since
this basin can only absorb 294 hm3 of water destined to agricultural use at the water
transfer price, which doesn’t cover the Ebro project assignment of 362 hm3 to end
groundwater overdraft.
The former central Spanish government asserted that farmers in the receiving basins
would pay for Ebro water the same price they are paying for water now. Therefore the
central government was intending to resolve the inconsistency in transfer allocation
targets by subsidizing the price of transferred water allocated to agriculture, and by
charging higher prices to urban and industrial water users.
Finally an alternative combining both demand and supply measures is considered.
This alternative combines banning groundwater overdraft, allowing water trades among
254

counties, and supplying desalinated seawater to selected coastal counties. Water trades
between counties occur along present conveying facilities of main rivers and canals,
bringing water where most valued according to shadow prices of water in each county.
Water shadow prices indicate that water transfers may occur along the Vinalopó, Segura
(including Argos and Quipar tributaries), Guadalentín, Almanzora and Andarax rivers,
and along the Canal Margen Izquierda and Canal Campo de Cartagena.
Results from the combined scenario show a significant reduction of 362 hm3 in water
use and moderate losses of 83 million € in quasi-rent (Tables 3 and 4). The gain in quasi-
rent when moving between the banning overdraft (-408 mill. €) and the combined
alternative (-83 mill. €) is 325 million €. This gain in welfare from water trading and
desalination is measured by the economic surplus or area between water excess supply
and excess demand functions in each county, so water trade and desalination flows are
calculated by maximizing welfare.

3.2. Ranking of water management alternatives

The results from each water management alternative are summarized in Tables 3 and 4.
Table 3 presents water demand scenarios under each alternative, and also the planned
allocation of water of the Ebro project. Table 4 shows farmers’ quasi-rent losses under
each alternative, and therefore the subsidies needed in order to maintain farmers’ quasi-
rent. Farmers’ quasi-rent losses are obtained by comparing the proposed alternative with
the current situation. Quasi-rent is 1,711 million € under the present baseline scenario,
which is reduced to 1,424 million € by rising water prices 0.12 €/m3, and to 1,306 million
€ by rising water prices 0.18 €/m3. Banning groundwater overdraft reduces quasi-rent to
1,303 million €. Under the combined alternative, quasi-rent is 1,628 million € which is
larger than quasi-rent under any other demand measure. The Ebro transfer project
maintains current quasi-rent of farmers, but needs 301 million € in subsidies to keep the
low water prices that farmers pay now.
A sharp reduction in water demand is achieved by raising irrigation water prices in
the range 0.12-0.18 €/m3. The current 2,550 hm3 of water demand for irrigation falls by
500-600 hm3, but the costs to farmers in quasi-rent losses are also quite high in the range
300-400 million €. Prohibition of groundwater overdraft is the worst solution because the
fall in water demand is only 400 hm3, considerably below the reduction achieved rising
prices, whereas costs to farmers are higher than under the water pricing alternatives. The
combined alternative of banning overdraft, water markets and desalination, reduces
irrigation demand by almost 400 hm3 at a much lower cost, less than 100 million € in
terms of farmers’ quasi-rent. The combined alternative also secures an end to aquifer
overdraft.
Some caveats should be emphasized about the difficulties of implementing demand
management measures. Decades of water resources mismanagement in the southeastern
basins of the Iberian Peninsula, have created pervasive pressures on water resources and a
severe degradation problem.
 255
Table 3. Water demand scenarios in southeastern basins and Ebro project allocation (hm3).
Júcar basin Segura basin South basin Total Levante
Current Water Demand 1,450 863 232 2,545
Water Demand Reduction
for Agricultural Use…
...by banning groundwater overdraft 139 213 70 422
...by increasing 0.12 €/m3 water prices 313 142 54 509
...by increasing 0.18 €/m3 water prices 350 181 74 605
...by combined alternative (banning
139 213 10 362
overdraft, water markets, desalination)
Ebro Project Allocation
All uses 300 420 100 820
agricultural and environmental use 141 362 58 561
urban and industrial use 159 58 42 259
Effective Demand of Water
for Agricultural Use…
...at prices for transferred water
761 294 132 1.187
(0.20 to 1.05 €/m3)

The measure of banning aquifer overdraft is very difficult to achieve since there
currently is no effective control on the number of wells or the volume of abstractions.
Water pricing measures are also difficult to implement because farmers will oppose price
increases and because basin authorities have no control on costs faced by individual
farmers pumping from aquifers.
Creation of water markets is also a difficult task. Although there are informal water
transactions, the possibility of formal water markets introduced by the reform of the water
law has not spurred any significant trades in the last five years. The reason is that farmers
distrust formal water markets.
Augmenting water supply by desalination with public financing is much more
straightforward, but the problem is the effective irrigation demand if water is not
subsidized and farmers face the high desalination prices. The potential of desalination is
given by the effective demand for desalinated seawater, that reaches 387 hm3 in coastal
counties from Safor to Campo Dalías, at the 0.52 €/m3 cost of desalinated seawater.
The problem for this effective demand to materialize is that farmers are extracting
water from aquifers at pumping costs around 0.09-0.18 cents €/m3. Since pumping costs
are considerably below desalination, farmers will not buy desalinated water. The public
investment is desalination plants are only reasonable under a strict enforcement by the
water authority of aquifer overdraft prohibition, that would force farmers to buy
desalinated water.
This last point summarizes the problem faced by the new AGUA project, that is
supposed to substitute for the Ebro transfer. As indicated above, there is an hypothetical
effective demand in these counties amounting to 387 hm3, but implementation of the
AGUA project requires the strict enforcement of aquifer overdraft prohibition, and this is
a daunting challenge for the water authority.
256

Table 4. Quasi-rent losses under alternative scenarios and subsidies (million € per year).

Júcar basin Segura basin South basin Total Levante

Current Quasi-rent 586 536 589 1,711
Quasi-rent Losses to Farmers...
... by banning groundwater overdraft 46 101 261 408
3
... by increasing 0.12 €/m water prices 166 94 27 287
... by increasing 0.18 €/m3 water prices 232 136 37 405
... by combined alternative (banning
39 49 -5 83
overdraft, water markets, desalination)
Subsidies Needed by the Ebro
Project…
… to cover the gap between costs of
transferred water (0.20 to 1.05 €/m3) 54 187 60 301
and present low water prices

4 Nonpoint pollution control instruments in agriculture

Agricultural nonpoint pollution is a complex issue requiring information on pollution
emissions at the source, transport and fate of pollutants, ambient pollution loads and their
damage costs. Moreover, the physical, economic and social dimensions of the problem
are such that they require multi-disciplinary and multi-scale approaches. In the case of
Spain, nonpoint pollution is addressed at present by the domestic National Hydrological
Plan and National Irrigation Plan, and by the European Union’s Common Agricultural
Policy, Water Framework Directive and Nitrates Directive. The consistency of these
policies to abate pollution is far from evident and difficult to assess.1 An example of their
inconsistency is the nonpoint pollution impact of higher water prices advocated by the
Water Directive, which is discussed below.
The results presented here are limited and do not cover the whole range of factors
affecting agricultural nonpoint pollution. The CAP reform of 2003 and further trade
liberalization by the EU will change land use patterns in irrigated agriculture at the
extensive and intensive margins. Both abandonment and a more intensive use of irrigation
are expected, depending basically on the availability of human and capital resources in
agricultural regions: more intensive irrigated agriculture is likely in Mediterranean coastal
areas of Spain, while inland collective irrigation areas are expected to stagnate. Another
limitation relates to the range of pollution instruments considered. This is the case of
wetland creation or recovery, which is an efficient instrument for large nitrogen
abatement reductions [13]. Among the different nonpoint pollution issues, the information
presented here tackles the question of the appropriate base instrument for nitrogen
pollution abatement, which requires information on the underlying biophysical processes.
This is a key question for the design of policy measures, and in particular for the design
of the Program of Measures [11] of the Water Directive.

1
Martínez and Albiac (2004) discuss the consistency of these polices [11].
 257
Table 5. Results of key variables under the baseline scenario by crop.
Production Water use Nitrogen use Nitrogen leaching Quasi-rent
(Tons/ha) (m3/ha) (kg/ha) (kg/ha) (€/ha)
Corn 14.1 6,220 325 140 1,180
Barley 6.0 2,200 180 29 375
Wheat 6.6 3,500 140 32 550
Sunflower 2.9 3,100 70 20 470
Alfalfa 17.3 7,800 70 15 740
Rice 5.6 12,000 170 57 797

The acute scarcity of information in Mediterranean agriculture, on the biophysical

processes involved in pollution and the associated damage costs means that measures
cannot be reliably assessed.
The effects of selected abatement measures have been examined through a dynamic
model, which includes six crops and one representative soil, in the Flumen-Monegros
irrigation district located in the Ebro basin of Spain (Table 5). Ranking the nitrogen
control instruments by their cost efficiency contributes to the information needed in the
policy decision process. The results obtained agree with previous literature, and indicate
that a fertilizer standard is the more efficient second best measure to control nitrogen
pollution (Table 6).
An increase in water prices only slightly reduces nitrogen discharges at very high
costs to farmers and society. A tax on nitrogen fertilization results in more significant
pollution reduction at much lower costs. A standard on nitrogen application curbs
emissions by more than half, with a very moderate impact on quasi-rent and gains in
welfare. The introduction of subsidies linked to the standard could be a good second best
instrument to achieve nitrogen pollution control.
The finding that higher water prices are very inefficient to abate emissions, questions
the reliance of the European Water Framework Directive on water pricing as a pollution
instrument to reach the “good status” target for all waters. The implication is that other
instruments included in the Directive, such as ambient quality standards and emissions
limits, need to be applied in order to curb pollution.
The results contribute with further evidence to the discussion on the choice of the
appropriate instrument base for nitrogen control. Horan and Shortle [9], using the
empirical results by Helfand and House [8] and Larson et al. [10], state that instruments
based on irrigation water are more cost efficient than instruments based on nitrogen
fertilization.
258
Table 6. Results of alternative policy measures in the district.
Welfare Quasi-rent Water Nitrogen Percolation Nitrogen
(106 €) (106 €) (hm3) (Tons) (hm3) leaching (Tons)
Base Scenario 22.3 24.1 190.7 4,525 66.1 1,459
Water 0.06 €/m3 21.2 18.8 86.4 4,367 43.3 1,381
price 0.09 €/m3 19.6 12.6 109.1 4,039 20.2 1,346
Nitrogen 0.90 €/kg 22.4 22.6 200.6 4,265 45.3 1,222
price 1.20 €/kg 22.7 21.5 186.6 3,976 56.2 990
Nitrogen standard 23.7 23.8 98.1 4,134 14.1 634
Emission tax 23.9 23.8 185.4 3,596 43.4 697

The reason given is that irrigation water is more highly correlated with nitrate
leaching, implying that the appropriate instrument base is not the nutrient responsible for
pollution but rather the input most highly correlated with pollution. This interpretation
appears inaccurate, because the dynamics of nitrogen in the soil are ignored. Neglect of
the dynamic aspects of nonpoint pollution may have serious consequences for the design
of policy measures.
An important question for the choice of the correct pollution control instrument, is
the implementation costs of the instruments. Measures that seem suitable may be
associated with implementation difficulties relating to their political acceptability or
transaction costs, and policy makers should evaluate the trade-off between cost-efficiency
and simplicity of implementation.

5 Conclusions
Mediterranean countries have a large irrigation demand for water resources, which creates
significant water quality problems compounded by water scarcity. The strong policy
debate that has been taken place in Spain to overcome water scarcity and resource
degradation, highlights the difficulties to attain a sustainable water resources
management, because of the conflicting interests of diverse stakeholders: regions,
economic sectors and political and environmental groups.
Two distinct general policy approaches to deal with Mediterranean water quantity
and quality problems, are the traditional approach of expanding water supply and new
emerging water management initiatives. Examples of the traditional approach are
interbasin transfers, seawater desalination, and to some degree subsidies to upgrade
irrigation systems. New emerging initiatives rely on measures such water pricing, revision
of water rights, abstraction limits on surface and subsurface waters, development of
regulated water markets, and water resources reuse and regeneration.
The effects of these measures on water quality is difficult to ascertain. It seems that
expanding water supply may have negative effects on nonpoint agricultural pollution,
because it favors the expansion of high profitable irrigation in Mediterranean coastal
agriculture, that can pay for this additional water supply.
Water pricing does not seem to be a good measure to improve water quality for two
reasons: i) it does not reduce water demand in coastal areas with high profitable crops and
severe pollution problems, and ii) in inland areas with low profit crops, it is not a good
 259

nonpoint pollution instrument to abate pollution. The implication is that other water
management initiatives are needed to abate pollution, such as ambient quality standards
and pollution emission limits at the source.
Several issues have been examined by presenting empirical evidence from Spain on
alternative policy options and measures. The measures examined cover two cases: the
evaluation of alternatives to solve water scarcity in southeastern Spanish basins, and
ranking agricultural pollution control instruments by their cost efficiency.
The first case is the recent Ebro transfer project and the new AGUA project designed
to substitute for this transfer. Both projects are very illustrative examples that highlight
the failure of approaches based on expanding water supply. Results from analyzing the
Ebro transfer, show that a combined alternative of banning aquifer overdraft, water
trading and a small volume of desalination, is by far a better alternative than building the
Ebro transfer.
Augmenting water supply by desalination with public financing is politically
appealing for the new Spanish government after canceling the Ebro transfer, and its
AGUA project seems a straightforward measure. But the problem with the AGUA project
is finding the effective irrigation demand if water is not subsidized, because farmers will
face high desalination costs. Farmers are extracting water from aquifers at pumping costs
considerably below desalination, and they will avoid buying desalinated water. Only a
strict enforcement by the water authority of aquifer overdraft prohibition, would force
farmers to buy desalinated water. This is a daunting challenge for the water authority, and
the risk of the AGUA project is that public funds are invested in desalination plants, but
then the irrigation demand does not materialize.
The second case examined, compares several measures to abate agricultural nonpoint
pollution. Selecting the right policy measure requires knowledge on the underlying
biophysical processes, and lack of information on these processes involved in pollution
and the associated damage costs to fluvial ecosystems means that measures can not be
reliably assessed.
Ranking nitrogen control instruments by their cost efficiency shows that a fertilizer
standard is a good abatement measure, in accordance with previous literature. In contrast,
rising water prices is very inefficient and this finding questions the reliance of the Water
Framework Directive on water pricing as a pollution control instrument.

References

1. J. Albiac, J. Tapia, J. Uche, A. Valero and A. Meyer, Las Alternativas de Gestión de

Demanda al Plan Hidrológico Nacional. Working Document 02/3. Unidad de
Economía Agraria. SIA-DGA..Zaragoza (2002).
2. J. Albiac, E. Calvo and J. Tapia, Revista Española de Estudios Agrosociales y
Pesqueros 196, 95 (2002).
3. J. Albiac, J. Uche, A.Valero, L. Serra, A. Meyer and J. Tapia, International Journal
of Water Resources Development 19, 437 (2003).
260

4. J. Albiac, M. Hanemann, J. Calatrava, J. Uche, J. Tapia and A. Meyer, Evaluating

Alternatives to the Spanish National Hydrological Plan. Working Document 04/4.
Unidad de Economía Agraria. CITA-DGA. Zaragoza (2004).
5. European Environmental Agency, Nutrients in European Ecosystems. Environmental
Assessment Report No 4. EEA. Copenhagen (1999).
6. European Environmental Agency, Sectoral Use of Water in Regions of Europe. EEA
data service. EEA. Copenhagen (2005).
7. Food and Agriculture Organization, Water Desalination for Agricultural
Applications. Committee on Agriculture. FAO. Rome (2005).
8. G. Helfand and B. House, American Journal of Agricultural Economics 77, 1024
(1995).
9. R. Horan and J. Shortle, Environmental Instruments for Agriculture. In J. Shortle and
D. Abler (Eds.) Environmental Policies for Agricultural Pollution Control. CABI
Publishing. Wallingford (2001).
10. D. Larson, G. Helfand and B. House, American Journal of Agricultural Economics
78, 1108 (1996).
11. Y. Martínez and J. Albiac, Water Resources Research 40,
doi:10.1029/2004WR003102 (2004).
12. A. Massarutto, La demanda de agua de riego en Europa: el impacto de la Agenda
2000 y la Directiva Marco del Agua. In J. Albiac (Ed.) Los Instrumentos Económicos
en la Gestión del Agua en la Agricultura. Mundi-Prensa. Madrid (2003).
13. M. Ribaudo, R. Heimlich, R. Claassen and M. Peters, Ecological Economics 37, 183
(2001).
14. Trasagua, Proyecto de las Transferencias Autorizadas por el Artículo 13 de la Ley
10/2001 de 5 de Julio (Plan Hidrológico Nacional) y Estudio de Impacto Ambiental.
Trasagua. Madrid (2003).
15. J. Uche, Anejo 2. Análisis de los costes del Proyecto de Transferencias. In J. Albiac
et al. Alegaciones al Proyecto de Transferencias Autorizadas por la Ley del Plan
Hidrológico Nacional y Estudio de Impacto Ambiental. Working document 03/3.
Unidad de Economía Agraria. Centro de Investigación y Tecnología
Agroalimentaria. Zaragoza (2003).
 SUSTAINABLE ALTERNATIVES OF WATER MANAGEMENT
IN URBAN AREAS OF MEDITERRANEAN COASTAL
CITIES: THE EXAMPLE OF BARCELONA METROPOLITAN REGION
(BMR) (NE SPAIN)

NARCIS PRAT
Department Ecologia, University Barcelona, Diagonal, 645
Barcelona, 08028, Spain

ANTONIO ESTEVAN
Fundación Nueva Cultura del Agua
Gandía, Spain

Here we studied water management strategies for the Barcelona Metropolitan Region (BMR, 4.5
million people) from the perspective of sustainability and the New Water Culture. These principles
advocate that options to provide water supply be analyzed following five criteria: capacity, guaranty,
monetary cost per unit of water obtained, water quality, and environmental impact. These criteria
were examined for several water management strategies suitable for the BMR, which were chosen
after interviews with experts and managers from the Catalan Water Agency. We conclude that up to
200 hm3/year could be obtained by combining 6 measures that provide additional water for human
consumption and 3 measures that improve the efficiency of water use. Consequently, the Ebro inter-
basin transfer proposed in the former Spanish National Hydrological Plan would be unnecessary.

1 Introduction
In Spain, as in many other countries, especially developing ones, current water
management is based mainly on the “hydraulic paradigm” [1]. From this standpoint,
water is a resource that should be available to cover human needs and should not be
subjected to restrictions. Therefore, water may be abstracted, transported and used like
any other resource, by means of hydraulic mechanisms as a main management strategy to
meet water demand. Until recently, the economic development of Spain has been given
more priority than the effects on aquatic ecosystems caused by the engineering works
required for this development. Following the hydraulic model, and during the 20th
century, technology and public funding allowed the construction of millions of hectares
of irrigation fields, thousands of kilometres of canals, hundreds of reservoirs and several
basin diversions. As a result, aquatic ecosystems have suffered deep environmental
impact. The flow of many rivers has decreased and in some cases completely dried up.
The input of millions of tons of domestic and industrial sewage, together with the diffuse
pollution from irrigation fields, have had a dramatic effect on aquatic ecosystems, as
summarized in the Spanish Government White Paper [2]. Many of the point-pollution
inputs have improved water quality in the last 15 years because of the construction of
sewage plants; however, the ecological status of aquatic environments in Spain remains

261
262

poor, with more than 50% of rivers polluted and more than 50% of the reservoirs
eutrophic [2, 3].
In spite of this situation, a National Hydrological Plan based on the hydraulic
paradigm was approved by the Spanish government in June 2001. This plan included the
building of more than 100 new reservoirs, the creation of more than 1 million hectares
additional new irrigation fields and a 25% increase in water use by industry and for
domestic purposes. The increase in water use is greater along the Mediterranean coast,
precisely the area in which resources are scarce and the ecosystems in worse condition.
To cover the increasing water requirements in this area, the plan proposes to transfer
water from the lower part of the Ebro river (close to the mouth) to the south (900
hm3/year) and to the north (190 hm3/year), mostly for meeting the needs of the Barcelona
Metropolitan Region (BMR). The transfer to the south is mainly for irrigation purposes,
while to the north it is generally for urban and industrial use. The effects of the plan on
the ecosystems of the Ebro and its environmental, social and economic impact will be
enormous and have been summarized elsewhere [4].
The approval of the plan in 2001 generated great social and environmental
contestation in the areas that were to be most negatively affected by the transfer (the Ebro
basin, particularly the lower part). In response, alternatives to this plan, following
sustainable development strategies, have been proposed. The general public and
numerous scientists have joined efforts to establish a platform for a “New Water Culture”
(NWC). Comprising people from a range of scientific disciplines (biologists, geologists,
chemists, economists, geographers, etc.) and social movements (environmental NGOs,
politicians, etc.), this movement has staged mass protests against the plan and organized
alternative scientific and social meetings to address a new strategy of water management
in Spain. The movement has established the Foundation for a New Water Culture
(FNWC), an organization that seeks to promote a new model of water management (the
NWC) as an alternative to the current system, which is based mainly on water balances
(the hydraulic paradigm).
The NWC demands respect for the structure and function of the ecosystems from
where water is used to support human activities (domestic, agricultural or industrial). The
social dimension of the NWC is one of its major attributes and the interdisciplinary of the
members of the FNWC is a guarantee of the multi-factorial comprehension of water
issues. The development of this new model of water management has been summarized
in [5]. Recently, the Foundation adopted the “European Declaration of the New Water
Culture”, signed by more than 100 scientists, which aims to extend this model to the rest
of Europe (see www.unizar.es/fnca).
Beyond a mere list of technical measures, the FNWC implies a radical change in
social perception of water and current management practices. This organization
endeavours to make society at large aware of the water it uses every day and consider its
origin and the environmental impact of its use. The efficient management of such a
valuable resource is essential for Mediterranean countries as in the future they will be
 263

affected by increases in water consumption and decreases in resource availability because

of climatic changes.
In March 2004, general elections were held in Spain and the government changed
hands. The newly elected president fulfilled one of his manifesto promises and halted the
Ebro inter-basin transfer. In the absence of this transfer, the BMR must develop new
water management practices to cover its requirements.
Here we define the future water management in Catalonia in a scenario without
further water transfers and under the principles of the NWC. For this reason, the Regional
Government set up a task-group in water administration, with the objective to produce a
strategic document to identify sustainable alternatives for water management for the
BMR. This group was coordinated by members of the FNWC and two managers from the
Catalonia Water Agency (CWA). Here we summarize the results of the document drawn
up by this group in 2004 and its present state of implementation.

2 Study area
Catalonia is a relatively small region in NE Spain. A large part of its territory lies along
the coast in a typical Mediterranean climate zone. More than 5.5 million people live in a
coastal strip occupying less than half of its territory; a common feature of many
Mediterranean areas. Several coastal, relatively short rivers drain this territory. These
rivers have been diverted, dammed and overexploited for many years (following the
hydraulic model) to provide water for urban, agricultural, tourist and industrial uses.
Consequently, aquatic ecosystems in the region, from rivers to wetlands, are plagued by
environmental problems caused by reduced flows and increased pollution. Water
abstraction and pollution are present from the upstream areas of river catchments to the
mouths of their Mediterranean rivers and streams. Until now, water management
practices have been limited to providing water for domestic use and to abating pollution
using end-pipe measures, such as sewage plants. Environmental flows have not been
implemented in the area and water conservation measures and pollution prevention
activities are scarce.

3 Methods

3.1. Principles of the analysis

The analysis of the strategic document on sustainable water management for the BMR
was made following the guidelines of the Water Framework Directive (WFD) and the
NWC. The WFD aims to maintain and restore aquatic ecosystems of the European Union
and achieve good ecological status of European waters by 2015. The main objective of
the NWC is to balance the needs of humans with those of the environment, thereby
maintaining the structure and function of aquatic ecosystems, objectives that are similar
to those of the Directive.
264

According to the WFD, the 4 principles on which the new model of water
management in Catalonia should be based are: sustainability, subsidiarity, efficiency and
public participation. Sustainability implies no further deterioration and greater protection
of aquatic ecosystems. The application of subsidiarity means that water management
decisions should be taken locally, as near as possible to where water is used or degraded.
According to the efficiency principle, the most beneficial combination of measures
(economic and ecological) should be applied. Finally, public participation assures
acceptance of the measures proposed.
The measures adopted to guarantee water supply and good ecological status of
aquatic environments must be evaluated following several criteria, including capacity
(quantitative supply potential); guaranty (availability of water); water quality for
domestic use; economical cost (to use or save water); environmental impact (local or
global); and social and political issues (which may impede the desired result). Here we
evaluate these criteria both qualitatively, for all the measures proposed, and
quantitatively, for those with relevant information available in the records of the CWA.

3.2. Data collection

The main objective of the strategic document has been to identify measures that may
provide (or save) enough water to guarantee adequate quality of water supply for the
BMR, without causing more environmental concern on the ecological status of the rivers
in the region, the Llobregat and Besòs, which flow though this area and cover 2/3 of
water requirements (surface and groundwater resources). The same is applicable to other
rivers which supply the BMR, because 1/3 of the water used in the area is from another
watershed located 100 Km to the north of the city of Barcelona, the river Ter. Without
this water transfer the BMR would face severe water shortages.
The CWA has extensive information on water consumption, water use and savings,
water quality, among others. As our analysis was solely to identify the basis for future
management and the deadline was short, no new studies were proposed and the strategic
document was produced from existing information. Over two months, we held meetings
with managers from several areas of the CWA at its headquarters and information was
collected and summarized by an executive committee in which the two authors of this
study were the coordinators. The information was compiled, and a series of discussion
articles were produced. The strategic document was later discussed with the members of
the CWA and the final document was made public for general discussion in a series of
meetings (The complete document in Catalan is available at www.gencat.net/aca).
The main conclusions of the strategic document were adopted by the Regional
Government (Generalitat de Catalunya) as a basis for its National Water Plan, to be
implemented in 2006-09 when planning of the WFD is scheduled to occur. Issues
concerning the ecological status of waters in Catalonia and the measures required to
restore them to a healthy status are currently being addressed by the CWA. In the
meantime, this agency will focus on the development of the managerial strategies
 265

proposed in the document. These measures should guarantee the BMR water resources of
adequate quality during the coming years.

4 Results
Several measures were discussed by the task group at the CWA. The list of measures
included two ways of increasing water availability: those that increase resources, and
those directed to saving water and therefore to decreasing water abstraction. In both
cases, the first step in the analysis was to identify all the measures that result in greater
water availability.
To increase water availability, the measures selected were as follows: improved
management of reservoirs and weirs; building new reservoirs; building desalination
plants; increasing water quality though better sewage treatment; water reuse; changes in
water use in agriculture; use of rain water; improved management of aquifers; and water
transfers from the Ebro or Rhone rivers. Measures considered useful to save water
included: domestic savings using more efficient taps and toilet flushing apparatus;
industrial savings; water conservation in agriculture; water markets; and more efficient
use of water in buildings belonging to public administration.
The qualitative analysis of these measures is presented in Table 1, in function of the
six criteria presented in the methods section. Given that the building of new reservoirs
and the realization of new transfers imply a very large environmental, economic and
social impact, these measures were discarded from further discussion.
Using the information collected by the CWA task-group, we next evaluated the
capacity of the remaining measures to obtain or to save water. Our preliminary results are
shown in Table 2, which offers a perspective of the water that can be obtained by each
measure in the short- (4-6 years) and long-term (more than 6 year from now). The true
values for several of the measures are now being studied in specific plans. Many of the
measures proposed were not previously considered by this agency (because the hydraulic
paradigm was the rule) and therefore few data are available for these (for example the
possibility of saving water in domestic use, official buildings or the collection of rain
water).
The criteria that may help authorities to select the best measures in Table 2, which
were evaluated quantitatively, are shown in Table 3. We obtained enough information for
only 4 of the measures. It was not possible to obtain data to apply and calculate the
criteria for agricultural uses. However, agricultural demand for water in the BMR is not
large and therefore potential savings in this field are not as great as in other parts of
Spain. According to this table, the best options are the use of polluted groundwater, by
applying advanced water treatment, and the reuse of treated wastewater. Furthermore, the
abatement of pollution is crucial to increase water quality both for supply and for
environmental reasons.
266

Table 1. Qualitative analysis of the measures selected to increase water availability for the Barcelona
Metropolitan Region. Each measure is classified into 5 ranks for the six criteria: VH = Very high H = high,
M = Medium, L = Low, VL = Very low.

Measure Capacity Guaranty Quality E. Cost Env. Impact Social& Political

Managing reservoirs M H M H H M
New reservoirs M M M VH VH VH
Desalination H VH VH H M M
Better sewage treatment L H M H L L
Water reuse H H M H L L
Water markets (Agric.) M M M M L M
Use of rain water L L H M L M
Aquifer efficiency H H M H L L
New water transfers H M L VH VH VH
Domestic savings L M M H L L
Industry efficiency M M M M L L
Agriculture efficiency M M M M M M
Water markets M M M M M M
Efficiency in public L L M M L L
administration buildings
Water pricing L M M H L H

Table 2. Summary of the potential increase in water supply and water

savings obtained using the measures identified as alternatives to water
transfer in Catalonia (data in hm3/year)
Measure 4-6 years > 6 years
Management of reservoirs 20 8?
Desalination 10+30+30=70 30
Better sewage treatment 8
Groundwater management 50 30
Water reuse 13 12
Water from agriculture 30
Domestic efficiency 10-17 20-32
Water pricing No data
Water network 4
Efficiency in industry 15
TOTAL AMOUNT OF WATER Up to 228 Up to 112

The study was performed during May and June 2004. Later on, and in response to a
request by the Spanish Government, the Regional Government of Catalonia produced a
document outlining the investments required in this region for securing water supply and
 267

as an alternative to the Ebro inter-basin transfer. The measures considered in the strategic
plan (Tables 1 and 2) were taken into consideration only in part for the investment
demands (see Table 4). We classified the future investments into three groups. 1:
Measures that will increase resource availability (all are considered in the strategic
document, see Table 2). 2: Measures to increase water quality (most are also included in
Table 2, although no new resource is provided). 3: Infrastructural measures, which, in
some cases, may increase water availability through efficiency.

Table 3. Evaluation criteria for alternative measures to increase water availability in the Barcelona Metropolitan
Region.

Criteria/Measure Improving water quality Water from aquifers Water reuse Desalination

Guaranty Indirect though quality 100% Up to 40 hm3 100% 100%

Water quality Large increase Very high using reverse Increase Increase
osmosis

Economic cost Low 0.10-0.25 €/ m3 0.15-0.20 €/ m3 0.4-0.5 €/ m3

including water
treatment

Use of Energy Not significant 0.5-1.5 kWh / m3 1-1.5 kWh / m3 3.5 kWh / m3

Environmental Positive for the whole No impact Positive Moderate.

impact ecosystem No affect on
Posidonia
beds

The table shows that almost one third of the investment will be for the conservation
and development of new infrastructure to maintain the present water supply and to
increase the interconnectivity of networks. Another third will be used to increase the
quality of present resources without involving further water production. Finally, a third
will be used for several of the measures identified in Table 2 in order to increase water
availability, partly through the production of new resources (desalination) or the
improved use of present resources, especially water from aquifers or by increasing the
efficiency of the system. These investments will lead to a total of 140 hm3/year of
additional water. This amount is similar to that reported in Table 2 for the same
measures. Therefore, the estimations included in the strategic document are consistent
with the future investments in water management planned by the Regional Government.
However, many measures in Table 2 are not included in investment previsions, and
therefore further opportunities to save and increase water resources remain.

5 Discussion
Water management in Mediterranean countries relies mainly on the building of large
reservoirs and the long-distance transfer of this water to cities located close to the coast,
268

or to irrigation fields. Although agriculture accounts for the most consumption of water
in the Mediterranean area, cities, such as Barcelona, use great amounts of water from
reservoirs. In a future of increasing demand and with the uncertainties of climatic change,
although the construction of more reservoirs is included in the Spanish National
Hydrological Plan, this measure will not solve the environmental and water supply
problems faced by the Mediterranean area of Spain.

Table 4. Future investments of the Regional Government of Catalonia (Generalitat de Catalunya) to increase
water availability and to ameliorate water quality.

Capacity Investment Unit cost

hm3/year Cost (106€) 106€/hm3
Measures that will increase resource availability
Efficiency in the use of present resources 23.8 97 1.04
Improvements in the present systems of water production 20 46 2.3
Water reuse 11 91 8.27
Aquifer improvements (quantitative and qualitative) 18 22 1.22
Desalination 70 201 2.87
Measures to increase water quality
Sewage plants (new or improvements of current facilities) 168
Abatement of salt inputs to the Llobregat 90
River restoration, including riparian areas 131
Infrastructure to maintain, interconnect and renew the present 314
water supply system
TOTAL INCREASE IN WATER SUPPLY 140

Therefore alternative measures to save and to increase the availability of water for
present and future requirements should be developed for Mediterranean countries. These
measures should be based on an integrated management strategy which focuses on
sustainability, as proposed for other Mediterranean streams [6]. Measures with low or
null environmental impact should be implemented rather than more structural works. The
use of non-conventional measures (water reuse, water from polluted aquifers,
desalination, etc.) is a central point of this alternative management. The main objective is
to guarantee water for domestic use while maintaining a good ecological status of
freshwater ecosystems, thereby complying with the regulations of the WFD.
Our study shows that more sustainable water management, based on the use of
available resources, together with some desalination and an increase in the efficiency of
present use, may meet the current water requirements of the area. A more detailed
analysis is currently being performed on the implementation of this plan, particularly its
economic feasibility and how it compares with inter-basin transfers. Indeed, desalination
 269

compares well with water transfers [7], and therefore alternatives to these transfers are, in
most cases, less expensive.
In our proposal, the water obtained through reuse and aquifers should be considered
as a strategic resource that will be crucial in the future, particularly in periods of drought
[8]. Therefore, to alleviate the pressures on the present main providers (the rivers Ter and
Llobregat), we recommend the building of a desalination plant in the area, which may
cover almost 15% of the present demand. This plant would make a considerable
contribution to increasing the ecological status of the river Llobregat (with high salt
content because of mining) and would improve the quality of water for domestic use in
Barcelona.
Until now, water management in the Mediterranean and in the BMR has followed
the hydraulic paradigm and the management of water quantity (water resource
management). In the future, integrated river basin management should be developed.
With this strategy, the conservation of ecological functions can be combined with water
resource development [9]. Furthermore, the management of water resources in the BMR
should involve cooperation between the authorities and the citizens [10]. Our analysis is
the first step to establishing a new water management strategy for the BMR following the
NWC and the principles of sustainability.

Acknowledgments

We thank the Department of Environment of the Regional Government of Catalonia

(Generalitat de Catalunya) and the Catalan Water Agency for their help. Thanks also go
to the members of the CWA who provided the data used for this study.

References

1. S.K. Jain, A. Sharma and R. Kumar, Intl. J. River Basin Management, 2, pp 259-270,
(2004).
2. Ministerio de Medio Ambiente. Libro Blanco del Agua en España. 637 pp. (2000).
3. N. Prat, Intl. J. River Basin Management. (submitted)
4. C. Ibañez and N. Prat, Water Resources Development, 19, 485-500. (2003)
5. N. Jimenez-Torrecilla and J. Martinez-Gil, European Water Management Online
20pp, (2005).
6. I.D. Manariotis and P.C. Yannopoulos, Environmental Management, 34, 261-269
(2004).
7. Y. Zhou and R.S.J. Tol, Water Resources Research, 41. (2005)
8. J.F. Brooker, A.M. Michelsen and F.A. Ward, Water Resource Research, 41. (2005)
9. R.T. Gilman, R.A. Abell and C.E. Williams, Intl. J. River Basin Management, 2,.
135-148 (2004).
10. E. Mostert, Intl. J. River Basin Management, 1, 267-278 (2003).
 THE PROFESSIONAL AND INTELLECTUAL CHALLENGES OF
SUSTAINABLE WATER MANAGEMENT

BRENT M. HADDAD
University of California
Santa Cruz, USA

Scholars and practitioners agree that water resources management is an interdisciplinary venture,
requiring expertise from multiple perspectives. Traditional fields of expertise in water management
have included chemistry, biology, engineering, and finance. In the 21st century, far broader
disciplinary engagement is needed if global water supply challenges are to be met, including better
integration of social sciences. This paper summarizes complex challenges facing today’s water
decision-makers and managers and then identifies the intellectual and professional requirements for
meeting the challenges. The paper calls upon the water industry to help build the intellectual
capacity needed to help them meet water challenges, while also identifying reforms in academic
organization that will facilitate productive research. Examples of innovative water resources
research efforts are provided.

1. Introduction
Society’s greatest and most enduring conflicts arise when the internal logic of rival claims
is indisputable. The subject matter of conflict can be far-reaching – claims on territory, on
when human life begins, on interpretation of religious texts, on the implications of
nationalism. Humans have a profound ability to commit themselves to their beliefs; thus
conflicts can drag on from year to year, simmering and boiling, passing from one
generation to the next. This may well be the fate of 21st-century conflicts over fresh water
resources, but it is not a certainty. Academic, political, and moral leaders of society
cannot create more water, but they have an opportunity to re-cast water issues in ways that
build bridges of understanding and identify broadly-acceptable management approaches.
This paper argues that innovative, collaborative approaches to water-resources
research are needed if society is to make good decisions regarding its fresh water
resources. Many more perspectives on water issues are needed both inside and outside of
academia. Within academia, water issues should be put squarely on the agendas of many,
indeed most, disciplines. Outside of academia, water professionals should become more
willing to engage with academia and the public. Members of the public should organize
and prepare themselves to take active part in what promises to be a very long dialogue.

1.1. The Confused Moral Landscape of Fresh Water Research

When engaging water issues, there are at least two starting points: the hydrologic and the
normative. The hydrologic starting point takes on the biogeophysical questions: for a
given region, how much water is there; where is it; when is it available; what is its quality;
what natural and human-caused features influence its availability and quality. The fields

270
 271

of ecology, hydrology, agronomy, and earth system sciences are contributing in this area.
One example of a new research program linking these areas is the Pajaro Valley/Pajaro
River, California, research program initiated by Andrew Fisher, a hydrogeologist
collaborating with agro-ecologists, soil scientists, social scientists, and surface-water
regulatory agencies to understand interconnections between river banks and groundwater
resources, including flow and nutrient exchange (briefly introduced at
http://www.steps.ucsc.edu/collabs.html).
The second starting point for fresh water research, the normative one, is concerned
with how a given society construes what good water practices. The term “good” hinges on
a broader vision of a just society. Both history and current-day experience show us that
there are many such visions, and some of them have the potential to collide with each
other and result in zero-sum competitions over resource use.
Consider the normative foundations and implications for action of the following two
widely-recognized sets of facts about the global water situation. The first set concerns
access to water for human use:
• (T)oday more than 2 billion people are affected by water shortages in over forty
countries: 1.1 billion do not have sufficient drinking water and 2.4 billion have no
provision for sanitation. […] Current predictions are that by 2050 at least one in four
people is likely to live in countries affected by chronic or recurring shortages of
freshwater (UNESCO-WWAP, 2003: 10).
The second set concerns water removal from natural systems:
• Globally, humanity now uses more than half of the runoff water that is fresh and
reasonably accessible, with about 70% of this use in agriculture. To meet increasing
demands for the limited supply of fresh water, humanity has extensively altered river
systems through diversions and impoundments. In the United States only 2% of the
rivers run unimpeded, and by the end of this century the flow of about two-thirds of
all of Earth's rivers will be regulated. […] Major rivers, including the Colorado, the
Nile, and the Ganges, are used so extensively that little water reaches the sea.
Massive inland water bodies, including the Aral Sea and Lake Chad, have been
greatly reduced in extent by water diversions for agriculture [16].
Both of these quotes paint pictures of deep concern with the management of the world’s
water resources. Each has its own conception of what constitutes good management of
water. The UNESCO quote frames the long-term challenge of global water management
in terms of improving access to water and sanitation services. The Vitousek et al. in [16]
quote frames the future in terms of retaining what is left of natural flow regimes. Each
vision for the future is built upon solid normative justifications. For the UNESCO quote,
the sanctity and primacy of human life, the moral imperative to alleviate poverty, and the
equity-based need to provide comparable opportunities for health and longevity to all
peoples drive to the conclusion that natural sources of water should be utilized for
purposes of human water consumption and sanitation needs. For Vitousek et al. [16], the
concern is with the maintenance of intact ecosystems both for their inherent value as well
272

as for their long-term ability to provide human society with a variety of important
services. The UNESCO approach is clearly anthropocentric (human-oriented) while the
Vitousek et al. [16] approach combines anthropocentrism and biocentrism.
These two approaches provide different ways of framing what constitutes good
management of water resources. While there is some overlap, they aim us toward
different futures. We cannot achieve both visions of the future. Good choices of
infrastructure projects and good management practices for one vision would be
problematic in the other. Solving the problem identified by UNICEF – making water
more accessible to over one billion people – would create its own environmental
catastrophe. Ready access increases consumption dramatically as the difficulties of
individually acquiring and transporting water are removed. If daily per-capita use
increased 75 liters as a result of universal access, the resulting new use of water would be
27 trillion liters per year, a volume of water carried only by the world’s largest rivers.
This additional draw, along with the required engineering interventions in the natural
systems, would likely result in massive extinctions of riverine and wetland-based species.
This general absence of a shared normative vision of the future management and
allocation of water resources is contributing to the slow progress achieved thus far on
global goals for improved water management. The gridlock over whether nations and
multilateral agencies should support dams and other large-scale infrastructure projects is
one example.

1.2. The Role of Academia in Fresh Water Research

The traditional disciplines of fresh water research – chemistry, biology, engineering, and
finance – are as important as ever. But fresh water issues have exploded beyond the
boundaries of these research areas, encompassing nearly all the natural, physical, and
social science disciplines, as well as research in professional schools. Table 1 presents a
partial list of disciplines and water-related topics that would benefit from scrutiny by
scholars trained in those disciplines. Although Table 1 is many lines long, readers will
most likely identify numerous other topics of importance at least equal to those listed.
This underlines the point that water issues increasingly demand the attention of the
scholarly community.
Table 1 also reveals another aspect of water research – it requires either individual
training in multiple disciplines or collaborative research, or both. Crucial issues related to
water management and allocation combine complexities, scale, and scope often too large
for one scholar to handle. Engineering training has traditionally been interdisciplinary and
problem-oriented. This style of training is needed across the social sciences so that young
scholars emerge with the tools needed to understand the many faces of water issues:
biogeophysical, engineering, social, and normative (see, e.g., [10]).
 273

Table 1. Academic Disciplines involved in Urban Water Supply (Note: many of the topics are
interdisciplinary but fundamentally require insights and tools from the discipline under which they are
listed).
Ethical issues (Philosophy)
Intergenerational distribution of benefits
Equitable reception of service
Trade-offs between mutually-exclusive benefits
Legal Issues
Extent of ownership/use rights
Ability of cities to secure new supplies beyond urban borders
Transboundary water flows
Economic Issues
Finance
Institutional efficiency
Engineering efficiency
Comparing alternative supplies/uses
Prioritizing sources, uses, and sinks
Psychological Issues
Communications strategy (individual use/health; public choice)
Human reactions to water reuse; history of water; naturalness of water; water
contamination
Political Issues
Political boundaries and water rights
Land-use planning
Decision-making processes
Links between water rights and land rights
Anthropological Issues
Links between water-use practices and culture
Sociological Issues
Environmental Justice/Equity
Gender differences in use/access
Ecological Issues
Watershed management
Wastewater/brine disposal (terrestrial, river, marine)
Aquifer and surface-water management
Disposal/use of biosolids
Climate change and water availability/timing
Public Health Issues
Drought planning
Water quality monitoring
Public advisory systems
Wastewater and biosolids management
Engineering Issues (chemical, biological, structural, civil, environmental)
System coverage
System reliability
Treatment technologies
Monitoring systems
Disposal systems
Chemistry/biology issues
Treatment technologies and protocols
Monitoring technologies and protocols
Computer Science issues
Remote sensing of flow, quality, and other parameters
274

2. An Example: the Challenge of Urban Water Supply

The practices of water planning, management, and regulation are growing in complexity.
There is better understanding of the role that water plays in natural systems, and the value
to human society of keeping the water in natural systems. There are new methods of
modeling the flow of underground water so that hydrologic links between groundwater
and surface water are better understood. Rapid transformations of land (especially
agricultural-urban transformations) are changing the location and types of use of water,
while the combination of economic growth and human demographic growth is putting
additional demand on water supply. Often, new understanding and trends in water supply
cause historical legal boundaries to become hindrances to good management, rather than
aids. Overlying these challenges are poorly-understood but serious issues surrounding
invasions of non-native species that can alter a region’s water balance or change a
region’s fire regime, and global warming that could change precipitation, runoff, and
water demand patterns.
Global society is responding to these new trends in many ways. New water treatment
technologies are available, lowering costs and making additional water resources
available from reclamation and desalination. New approaches to financing water projects
are being tested. And new approaches to public participation and the governance of water
at local, regional, and broader scales are being considered. At the same time, the
normative question of what constitutes good water management often has more than one
answer, with mutually-exclusive policy prescriptions emerging from each answer.
The following example brings into focus the complexity of one aspect of water-
management challenges, urban water management, and the many disciplines needed to
make headway. In many parts of the world, cities are experimenting with the institutional
structure of urban water supply and treatment. The popular discussion is broadly cast as
“government ownership vs. private ownership” of water supply and services. Neither of
these poles exists in reality. Below, I provide a framework intended to help sort out what
is unique about urban water supply and what options for institutional governance are
available. The framework integrates property rights theory, new institutional economics,
civil engineering, and biogeochemistry into a watershed perspective on urban water
supply. I draw on a case study from South America (Lima, Peru) to illustrate the vast
problems faced by many of the world’s cities with respect to water supply in the 21st
century.

2.1. The Misleading Polarity of “Public vs. Private”

Although the popular debate and some scholarly literature remain caught in the public vs.
private control of water controversy, researchers over the last half-decade have developed
more nuanced, though no less controversial perspectives. There are many examples. In
Australia, the term corporatization has come to mean a highly-regulated, thoroughly-
reformed water sector that has a “commercial orientation” [11]. While Martin [11] finds
promise for this model to deliver needed reforms to Australia’s rural water industry,
 275

Smith [13] is skeptical that corporatization can integrate private-sector elements with the
social-equity orientation that is crucial to managing urban water systems. Similarly,
Rodriquez [12], notes that the focus should be on financing of water systems, not on who
owns them. Consistent with Martin [11], he calls for public-private partnerships intended
to get the needed elements from each approach: cost control, access to capital, and
incentives for good performance from the private sector, and governance decisions and
regulation in the public interest with public oversight. And Braadbaart [4] points out that
privatization cannot deliver on its promise of improved economic efficiency in the
provision of urban water in the absence of substantial reform of public regulatory
oversight, underlining the co-determined public/private nature of outcomes in the water
sector. It is difficult to identify what the tipping point is in the mix of public and private
ownership and governance that switches a system from being “public” to being “private”.
Bakker [1] distinguishes between privatization (involving private firms in financing,
management, and other aspects of water supply and treatment) and commercialization
(invoking market mechanisms as a means of allocation). Privatization and
commercialization are both governance choices, but are different in their scope and
implication. This distinction overlays neatly and helps sort out on-going confusion
between privatization as it affects the governance and operation of urban water systems
and privatization as the concentration of rights to water to enable their transfer using
market mechanisms (e.g., [3, 8, 14]). This example focuses on the former: the governance
and operation of urban water systems.
Although the differences between industrialized and developing cities in terms of
challenges facing their water systems are immense almost to the point of non-
comparability, it is possible to find some common framing of the challenges and how one
might approach them. One such issue can be characterized as centralization vs.
decentralization of supply. Centralized systems include large-scale treatment facilities,
integrated piping systems, and single agencies that handle all or nearly all the steps in the
supply of water and treatment of wastewater. Decentralized systems are characterized by
multiple, competing suppliers, different kinds of supply services, point-of-use treatment,
and a partial- or full- de-coupling of sanitation services from water supply-services.
Wilderer [18] provides an overview of potential benefits of decentralized systems in
providing water and sanitation services in developing nations, noting that advanced
technology could improve the performance and efficiency of such systems. In most parts
of the world, hybrid centralized/decentralized systems exist. In the United States, this
takes the form of bottled water bought in stores or delivered to homes and businesses;
point of use water-treatment systems, and septic systems. In developing nations, this often
takes the form of water trucks delivering water to households and community latrines.

2.2. Characterizing Urban Water Supply

Sorting out the appropriate mix of public and private participation in urban water supply
is complex and, as Bakker [2] points out, dynamic. It is part of the larger challenge that
276

encompasses the governance and operation of urban water and hygiene systems. The
provision of urban water and sanitation services and wastewater treatment are multi-step
processes involving interfaces with and utilization of natural systems, and extensive
connections – physical, economic, political, emergency planning and response, and other
– with communities served, as well as with surrounding watersheds and broader
regulatory domains. Table 2 presents the physical stages of urban water use, each of
which is subject to the same array of broader questions of governance and use.

Table 2. The Physical Phases of Urban Water Supply.

A. Withdrawal from Natural Systems and Transportation to Treatment Plants
• Withdrawal from surface or groundwater systems
• Could involve movement of water vast distances
B. Treatment
• Prior to beneficial use
C. Delivery to end-users
• Involves piping to residences, businesses, and government facilities
D. End Use
• Residential, industrial, commercial, governmental
E. Collection
• Capture and re-concentration of waste flows and delivery to
wastewater treatment facility
F. Treatment
• Typically capital-intensive, highly-technical facilities

G. Disposal
• Reclamation and reuse of urban wastewater are growing trends
• Disposal of byproducts (biosolids) also required

Heller et al. in [9], discussing information technology needs of water utilities,

describe centralized urban water suppliers as “integrated businesses.” The public-private
polarity can be better characterized as a three-dimensional grid encompassing individual
steps in the provision of these services, who operates them, and how they are governed.
For example, in terms of water supply, processes involved begin with drawing water from
surface and/or groundwater systems and delivering it to treatment plants. Operations
include building, maintaining, and operating the physical infrastructure of reservoirs,
dams, wells, pumps, and pipelines. Governance includes water rights, environmental
protection regulations, acquisition of rights of way, and maintenance scheduling and
management. This first step clearly involves a combination of public and private action
since even a fully-public utility regularly purchases specialized engineering products and
services from private contractors. Even environmental protection activities can have
private-sector connections when private firms undertake restoration activities as
contractors to government agencies.
 277

Likewise, the treatment phase prior to beneficial use is subject to extensive

governance, ranging from cost control, long-term planning, supply/demand balancing,
water quality monitoring, plant maintenance and operations, disposal of byproducts from
treatment, to labor rules and practices. Straight through to disposal of wastewater, every
phase of water supply and sanitation services has ample opportunities for public and
private participation and governance. In reality, the provision of these services is
inescapably a mix of public and private ownership and oversight. Fehr et al. in [6] point
out that regulation of water quality for public heath purposes is essential no matter what
the ownership regime is.
In a special issue of Environment & Urbanization dedicated to urban water and
sanitation in the global south, Budds and McGranahan in [5] provide an overview of
global-south privatization activities. Their analysis underlines how unlikely it is that
large-scale private-sector firms will deliver water supply and sanitation services to the
global poor. They report on the reticence of private-sector actors to extend services to the
rural poor, in part due to the seeming impossibility of ever recovering the massive
financial investments needed to extend infrastructure from urban centers to impoverished
peripheries – roughly $100 billion over 25 years.
A key conclusion of this line of research is that new paradigms of urban water and
sanitation services need to be identified, studied, tested, and promoted. Solo [19]
describes one such paradigm: the “‘other’ private sector” of small-scale entrepreneurial
operators that provide water and sanitation services to the urban poor. Here, entrepreneurs
deal directly with customers with limited government oversight, ideally, though not
always, in competitive settings. Solo [19] estimates that this rapidly-growing sector now
supplies roughly 25% of urban water in Latin America and 50% of sanitation services. In
Africa, the figures are 50% and 85%. Thus, for an entire continent (Africa) and large
portions of the rest of the developing world, small-scale entrepreneurial operators provide
the dominant paradigm of water supply and sanitation services; the centralized systems
familiar to industrialized nations are little more than an add-on.
This brief discussion of how to frame challenges facing urban water managers
underlines the massive intellectual challenge the world faces, with human health and well-
being, economic prosperity, ecological sustainability, and billions of dollars of potential
investment hanging in the balance. Research is needed at every scale, from global to
microscopic. Both cross-training in multiple disciplines and collaboration across
disciplines are needed to summon the expertise needed to understand these issues and
advance professional practices.

3. The Water Industry as Research Funder/Collaborator

Historically, water agencies have sponsored both applied academic research and research
projects undertaken by private consulting firms. Agencies have taken a practical
approach, supporting the research they believe will best help them manage their systems.
These programs have typically fallen under the disciplines of chemistry, biology,
278

engineering, and finance. As shown above, these disciplines, while still crucial to water
management, are just part of the larger picture. Funding agencies are now recognizing this
and are moving in new directions with innovative research initiatives. The author is
directly involved in the following two initiatives.

3.1. Example: WateReuse Association and the Human Reaction to Water

Reclamation and Reuse
The WateReuse Foundation (Foundation), based in Alexandria, Virginia, is an
educational, nonprofit public benefit corporation that serves as a centralized organization
for the water and wastewater community to advance the science of water reuse, recycling,
reclamation, and desalination.1 The mission of the Foundation is to conduct and promote
applied research on the reclamation, reuse, and desalination of water. The Foundation's
primary sources of funding are its Subscribers and its funding partners, which include the
U.S. Bureau of Reclamation, the California State Water Resources Control Board, and the
Southwest Florida Water Management District. The Foundation's Subscribers include
water and wastewater agencies, and other interested organizations. The Foundation also
conducts research in cooperation with two water research coalitions, the Global Water
Research Coalition and the Joint Water Reuse Task Force, and other water research
organizations in the United States and abroad.
The Foundation's research provides information on the safety and quality of
reclaimed and recycled water, and provides water professionals with the tools and
knowledge to meet their commitment of increasing the reliability and quality of the
nation's water supplies. Historically, this mission focused the Foundation’s research
agenda squarely in the realms of biology, chemistry, and engineering. Over the past half-
decade, the Foundation has expanded its research interests to include management,
economics, and public communication.
In this latter case, the Foundation has sponsored research on human reactions to
water reclamation and reuse that have brought together water agency personnel and social
psychologists to discuss how society perceives risk and reacts to fears of contamination
and contagion [7]. It is a basic research program that could help identify new ways for
water agencies to communicate successfully with the public on water quality, supply,
infrastructure planning and investment, and other issues. The Foundation could invest as
much as $500,000 in this research program over a 3-5 year period. It is likely that
research teams will include combinations of academics (social psychologists),
consultants, water agencies, and public interest groups. The Foundation signaled its
commitment to expanded research in the social sciences by expanding its Research
Advisory Committee in early 2005 to include social scientists.

1
Introductory materials presented here can be found at
http://www.watereuse.org/Pages/foundation.html.
 279

3.2. Example: Costs and Benefits of Desalination in California

In 2002, the state of California passed Proposition 50, the "Water Security, Clean
Drinking Water, Coastal and Beach Protection Act of 2002." This initiative set aside
funding for competitive grants to study desalination of ocean or brackish waters.
Desalination plants remove salt from ocean water and brackish inland water by forcing it
through a series of membranes and filters. With more than 7,500 plants operating
worldwide, desalination is a proven technology. But it remains expensive and its
environmental and social impacts are poorly understood. Nearly all grants funded in
Proposition 50’s first funding cycle (2005; $25 million) went to pilot desalination projects
and technical research. One social-sciences project was funded, entitled “Developing a
Tool to Guide State and Local Desalination Planning.” The goal of this project is to
develop a comprehensive planning tool that communities, water planning agencies, and
water providers can use to assess the costs and benefits of desalination relative to other
options in their area.
This project takes into account environmental, environmental-justice, and other
concerns alongside traditional interests in system reliability and cost. The project will also
take a portfolio approach to water resources, building tools to evaluate the value of
alternative sources of water to a given region in light of alternative available sources.
A sign of the changing perspective that water agencies are gaining is the list of
collaborators and contributors to this project. Table 3 shows both the participants and in
many cases, the in-kind financial commitments made to this program. Participants come
from nearly every category of stakeholder in water management issues: water agencies,
public groups, equipment manufacturers, regulators, and private consultants. Three
universities also are involved.2

4. Conclusion
Water-management challenges are attaining new levels of importance and complexity.
Broad academic engagement is needed if they are to be understood and if ways forward
are to be found. Water agencies and regulators are starting to support research in new
areas that combine social sciences, natural sciences, and technology research in ways
oriented to problem-solving. Public participation, which brings additional information and
perspectives to decision-making and helps builds acceptance for outcomes, is also an
essential feature of 21st-century water management. This is a promising development in
water-related research.

2
U.C. Santa Cruz is the lead campus; U.C. Santa Barbara and U.C. Berkeley also are
participating.
280

Table 3.Participants in a State-Sponsored Research Project on the Benefits and Cost of

Desalination in California.
Public Water Agencies
Long Beach Water Department
Inland Empire Utilities Agency
Coachella Valley Water District
Private Consulting Firms
Stratus Consulting, Inc.
McGuire Consulting, Inc
Private Water Agencies
California American Water Company, Monterey Coastal Division
Regulatory Agencies
San Diego County Water Authority
California Regional Water Quality Control Board, San Diego Region
Non-governmental Organizations (citizen groups)
Surfrider Foundation (coastal protection)
California League of Conservation Voters Education Fund
Residents of Pico Rivera for Environmental Justice
Private, non-profit funding agencies
WateReuse Foundation
Manufacturing companies
Poseidon Resources Corporation
Participating Universities
University of California, Santa Cruz
University of California, Santa Barbara
University of California, Berkeley

References

1. K. Bakker, Archipelagos and networks: urbanization and water privatization in the

South, Geographical Journal 169: 328-341 (2003).
2. K. Bakker, From public to private to ... mutual? - Restructuring water supply
governance in England and Wales Geoforum 34(3): 359-374 (2003).
3. C. Bauer, Against the Current: Privatization, Water Markets, and the State in Chile.
Kluwer Academic Publishers, Boston (1998).
4. O. Braadbaart, Private versus public provision of water services: does ownership
matter for utility efficiency? Journal of Water Supply Research and Technology
51(7): 375-388 (2002).
5. J. Budds and G. McGranahan, Are the debates on water privatization missing the
point? Experiences from Africa, Asia and Latin America. Environment and
Urbanization. 15(2) 87-113 (2003).
6. R. Fehr, O. Mekel, M. Lacombe and U. Wolf, Towards health impact assessment of
drinking-water privatization - the example of waterborne carcinogens in North
Rhine-Westphalia (Germany). Bulletin of the World Health Organization 81(6):
408-414 (2003).
 281

7. B. Haddad, Research Needs Assessment Workshop: Human Reactions to Water

Reuse, Alexandria, VA: WateReuse Foundation (2004).
8. B. Haddad, Rivers of Gold: Designing Markets to Allocate Water in California.
Washington, D.C.: Island Press (2000).
9. M. Heller, E. Von Sacken and R. Gerstberger, Water utilities as integrated
businesses. Journal American Water Works Association 91(11): 72-83 (1999).
10. D. Ludwig, M. Mangel and B. Haddad, Ecology, Conservation, and Public Policy,
Annual Review of Ecology and Systematics 32: 481-517 (2001).
11. N. Martin, Corporatization as a means of improving water quality: The experience in
Victoria, Australia. Journal of Toxicology and Health, Part A – Current Issues 67:
1889-1899 (2004).
12. R. Rodriguez, The debate on privatization of water utilities: A commentary
International Journal of Water Resources Development 20(1): 107-112 (2004).
13. L. Smith, The murky waters of the second wave of neoliberalism: corporatization as a
service delivery model in Cape Town. Geoforum 35 (3): 375-393 (2004).
14. P. Trawick, Against the privatization of water: An indigenous model for improving
existing laws and successfully governing the commons. World Development 31(6):
977-996 (2003).
15. United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), Water
for People, Water for Life: The United Nations World Water Development Report.
New York: UNESCO Publishing; Berghahn Books (2003).
16. P.M. Vitousek, A.M. Harold, J. Lubchenco, and J.M. Melillo, “Human Domination
of Earth's Ecosystems,” Science 277: 494-499 (1997).
17. UNICEF/WHO, Meeting the MDG Drinking Water and Sanitation Target: A
Midterm Assessment of Progress. New York: United Nations (2004).
18. P. Wilderer, Applying sustainable water management concepts in rural and urban
areas: some thoughts about reasons, means and needs. Water Science and
Technology 49(7): 8-16 (2004).
 A SUSTAINABILITY SYNTHETIC TERRITORIAL INDEX (ISST) TO
ASSESS THE SUSTAINABLE MANAGEMENT OF WATER
RESOURCES

GIACOMO MARTIRANO
MiCE, Via Pasquali 79
Mendicino, 87040 (CS), Italy

MARIO MAIOLO
Department of Soil Conservation “V. Marone”, University of Calabria,
Arcavacata di Rende, 87036 (CS), Italy

DANIELA PANTUSA
Department of Soil Conservation “V. Marone”, University of Calabria,
Arcavacata di Rende, 87036 (CS), Italy

PIETRO MORRONE
Provincia of Cosenza, Via R. Montagna snc
Cosenza, 87100, Italy

GIUSEPPE BRUNO
Provincia of Cosenza, Via R. Montagna snc
Cosenza, 87100. Italy

The present work describes the in-progress activities devoted to the definition of a model to assess
the sustainable management of the water resources at local scale. These activities partly derive from
the EC research project EPSILON “Environmental Policy via Sustainability Indicators On a
European-wide NUTS-III level”. The objective of the model is to create Sustainability composite
indicators starting from elementary indicators of environmental, economic, social and institutional
nature. Thanks to proper hierarchical relationships, these indicators are then aggregated in sub-
themes, themes and pillars. By means of proper clustering techniques a Sustainability Synthetic
Territorial Index (ISST) is finally calculated for each of the regions to be assessed and the model
output visualised by means of WebGIS techniques.

1 Introduction and reference scenario

1.1. Sustainability measure

The introduction of the concept of sustainability contained in the report “Our common
future” [1] has stimulated the start of many studies dealing with the measure of the
sustainability.

282
 283

A system assessing the sustainability of the water resources was elaborated by the
Deft Hydraulics Laboratory in the Netherlands [2], that proposed a procedure that allows
to evaluate how much a particular planning decision can contribute to the sustainable
development. Such procedure foresees five criteria, each of them divided in sub-criteria.
Social, economic and environmental parameters related to the public health and to the
social welfare are taken into account and equally weighted. The sum of the values of each
parameter represents a sustainability index that allows the comparison among different
solutions.
Also the multiple risk criteria, measuring reliability, resilience and vulnerability, can
be used to assess the sustainability. In this case the sustainability index can be expressed
as weighted sum of reliability, resilience and vulnerability, measured for several
economic, social, environmental and ecological parameters. Such measurements of
reliability, resilience and vulnerability are made through the temporal series of the values
that the generic parameter will assume in future time intervals. Such method preliminarily
requires the attribution of thresholds of acceptability and not-acceptability of the values
assumed by the parameter, thresholds that must be fixed by the analyst and that therefore
suffer again of a certain subjectivity, like the discretion residing in the choice of the
weight to attribute to each parameter [2].
A different approach to the sustainability assessment is based on the concept of
entropy, as a measure to describe the reversibility of the processes, usable also in the
problems and in the choices inherent the water resource management. Such approach,
proposed by Nachtnebel [3], uses the thermodynamic laws for the assessment of the
energy quantity required to bring a system under the initial conditions. Such value can be
seen as a useful indicator for the evaluation of the sustainable development.

1.2. Sustainability indicators

From several years different bodies and institutions are engaged worldwide to identify a
proper set of indicators for the sustainable development.
A first activity consisted in comparing in a synthetic and systematic way the consistent
number of indicators defined by the different organizations engaged in this intent:
• To this end, the most important reference is constituted by the international research
project EPSILON “Environmental Policies through Sustainability Indicators at
European NUTS-III level”, a Shared-cost RTD contract awarded in the frame of the
“Information Society Technologies” Action of the 5-th Framework Programme of the
European Commission. One of the Epsilon project objective was to obtain a synthetic
sustainability indicator, foreseeing a hierarchical structure of the indicators, so-called
4x4x4, based on the four dimensions of sustainability, named pillars: environmental,
economic, social and institutional. Each pillar is then divided in 4 themes, each theme
in 4 sub-themes and finally each sub-theme in one or more elementary indicators and
sub-indicators.
• Regarding the data structure of the UN-DSD (United Nations–Division for
Sustainable Development) [4], operational structure of the CSD (Commission for
284

Sustainable Development) active from the Rio de Janeiro Conference of 1992, it is

comparable to that of the Epsilon environment pillar.
• Regarding the ECI (European Common Indicators) [5], the EEA (European
Environmental Agency) attempts to identify a core set of environmental indicators in
which, besides the three themes named air, earth and water, it is present a series of
indicators covering from the transports to the energy and also analysing other sectors
with a strong impact on the quality of the environment.
• In Italy the Strategy of Environmental Action (SAA) [6], elaborated by the
Environment Ministry and approved by the CIPE with Deliberation n. 57 of August
2nd 2002, identifies three sectors of indicators: Nature and Bio-diversity, Natural
Resources and Quality of life.

Regarding the structure of the groups or sectors of indicators above mentioned, it is to be

pointed out that the number of elementary indicators and sub-indicators related to each
group/sector is variable, since each organisation has a different availability of data and a
related philosophy of aggregation.
Therefore, it is to be considered that the identification of the indicators is a still open
process.
With reference to the scenario just depicted, the present work describes the in-
progress activities devoted to the definition of a model to assess the sustainable
management of the water resources at local scale, with particular reference to an Optimal
Territorial Ambit (ATO). In Italy the ATO is the territorial entity – identified by the
National Law 36/94 known as “Legge Galli” from the author’s name – properly set for an
optimum management of the Integrated Water System.
According to the Law 36/94, each Italian Regional Government has identified a
certain number of ATOs in its own territory of jurisdiction and in the Calabria Region –
in Southern Italy – there are 5 ATOs, each of them corresponding to the territory of the 5
Calabrian Provinces. The present case study is relevant to the Calabria ATO-1, having its
territory of jurisdiction coincident with the whole territory of the Province of Cosenza,
with a surface of about 6,600 square Km, encompassing 155 Municipalities and about
750,000 inhabitants, with a very complex systems of natural water resources and artificial
water-related infrastructures.

2 The model philosophy

The universal concept of sustainable development that does not “consume” the available
resources, but profitably uses them without reaching their irreversible impoverishment,
can be tailored to the sustainable management of the water resources, attempting to define
a model that optimises their use, minimises the collectings and the wastes and promotes
both the multiple uses and the recovery and the consequent reuse in the agricultural and
industrial productive cycles.
Such a complex matter needs to be managed not only in terms of environmental and
socio-economical points of view, but also taking into account both the natural systems
 285

(the different types of water resources existing in nature) and the artificial systems (those
systems artificially set in order to manage the use of the natural resources).
On the counterpart, there are several National Laws (like, in Italy, the Law 319/76,
the Law 183/89, the Legislative Decree 152/99, the Law 36/94) and European Directives
(like the Framework Directive 2000/60/EC establishing a framework for Community
actions in the field of water policy) that have defined a reference framework for all the
actors involved in the management of the water resources.
In virtue of the above mentioned considerations, a proper structure for the indicators
has been adapted to the sector of the management of the water resources, starting from
those described in the previous section.
The number of the sustainability dimensions has been set to three, compared to the
original four dimensions of the 4x4x4 model of the Epsilon project and of the 4-spheres
model of the UN-DSD. The corresponding three pillars of the sustainable management of
the water resources are:
• 1ST PILLAR:ARTIFICIAL SYSTEMS (ASA).
• 2ND PILLAR:NATURAL SYSTEMS (ASN).
• 3RD PILLAR:SOCIO-ECONOMIC-INSTITUTIONAL (SEI).
The corresponding structure is shown in Figure 1, in which the ISST (Sustainability
Synthetic Territorial Index) is subdivided into the three above mentioned pillars, each
pillar in themes, each theme in sub-themes and, finally, each sub-theme in elementary
indicators.

Figure 1. A collapsed structure of the sustainability model.

2.1. The ASA (Artificial Systems) pillar

The structure of the ASA (Artificial Systems) pillar, entirely shown in the Figure 2, is
based on the Italian Law 36/94, that re-organises the Integrated Water System.
286

Figure 2. The ASA (Artificial Systems) pillar whole structure.

2.2. The ASN (Natural Systems) pillar

The structure of the ASN (Natural Systems) pillar, schematically shown in the Figure 3,
has been derived from a cross-comparison between the Framework Directive 2000/60/EC
and the Italian Legislative Decree 152/99, analysing the common parts of the two
documents relevant to the definition of the policies and the quality objectives for all the
water bodies and the identification of proper monitoring procedures. It is to be pointed
out that some of the indicators shown in the Figure 3 are further subdivided in sub-
indicators. In order to avoid to include the full list of the 99 indicators + 70 sub-indicators
and in order to give an example of the nature of some of them, the indicators/sub-
indicators relevant to chemical and bacteriological elements consist of the concentration
of the pollutant substances, whilst the indicators/sub-indicators relevant to physical and
 287

hydro-morphological elements consist mainly of temperature, salinity, pH, transparency,

conductibility, dissolved oxygen, depth.

Figure 3. The ASN (Natural Systems) pillar schematic structure.

2.3. The SEI (Socio-Economic-Institutional) pillar

The socio-economic-institutional pillar dimension has been deduced by the study [7]
carried out by the Working Group 2.6 “Wateco”, one of the ten working groups
established by the European Parliament and the European Commission with the objective
to define a Common Strategy of Implementation for the Waters Directive 2000/60. In
particular, the Wateco Working Group is dealing with the economic aspects of the
Directive.
Starting from the results of this study, a further re-tuning of the pillar structure has
been made, as, for instance, the suppression of some of the “Wateco” elementary
indicators, due to their inapplicability to a local geographical context (effects of the trends
of macro-economics policy at national level or higher) or simply to avoid redundancy
with very similar indicators already present in the ASA pillar. At the end of this process,
37 elementary indicators have been grouped into 12 sub-themes and finally into the 3
themes. The corresponding structure is shown in the following Figure 4 and Table 1.

Figure 4. The SEI (Socio-Economic-Institutional) pillar schematic structure.

288

Table 1. The SEI pillar structure with all the elementary indicators.
Sub-
Theme Theme Sub-theme Indicator
theme Indicator name
code name name code
code
SEI.1.1.01 Total cropped area
SEI.1.1.02 Cropping pattern
SEI.1.1 Agriculture SEI.1.1.03 Livestock
SEI.1.1.04 Gross production
SEI.1.1.05 Income
SEI.1.2 Industry SEI.1.2.01 Employm. for key sub-sectors
SEI.1.3.01 Installed power capacity
SEI.1.3 Hydropower
SEI.1.3.03 Electricity production
N° of boats through key points
SEI.1.4.01
per year
SEI.1.4.02 Employm. linked to navigation
Economics
Analysis of Quantity and value of goods
Navigation/ SEI.1.4.03
SEI.1 SEI.1.4 transported
key water Transport
uses Quantity and value of goods
SEI.1.4.04
through key harbours
Employment linked to harbour
SEI.1.4.05
activities
SEI.1.5 Gravel extract. SEI.1.5.01 N° of extracting companies
SEI.1.6 Fish farming SEI.1.6.01 Number of fish farms
SEI.1.7.01 Total number of tourist-day
Water-related
SEI.1.7 Total employment and turnover
tourism SEI.1.7.02
in the tourism sector
SEI.1.8.01 Total population protected
SEI.1.8 Flood control Total turn-over of protected
SEI.1.8.02
economic activities
SEI.2.1.01 Population growth
Changes in economic
Trends in SEI.2.1.02
development (DGP change)
SEI.2.1 exogenous
Changes in water pricing
variables SEI.2.1.03
policies
SEI.2.1.04 Technological changes
Proposed invest. in water
SEI.2.2.01
supply and wastewater treatm.
Assessing Proposed invest. in pollution
trends and SEI.2.2.02 reduction programmes for
SEI.2
baseline agriculture
scenario Proposed investments in flood
Planned SEI.2.2.03
protection
SEI.2.2 policies and
Proposed investments in
investments SEI.2.2.04
wetland restoration
Proposed investments in
SEI.2.2.05
improved technology
Proposed investment in water
SEI.2.2.06
supply enhancement
SEI.2.2.07 Other program. and measures
Prices for SEI.3.1.01 Current water price level
SEI.3.1
Assessing water services SEI.3.1.02 Current water price structure
SEI.3 cost- Financial SEI.3.2.01 Capital costs
recovery SEI.3.2 costs of water SEI.3.2.02 Operation and maintenance
services SEI.3.2.03 Administrative costs
 289

The total number of indicators for the three dimensions of the sustainable
management of the water resources is synthetically shown in the Table 2.

Table 2. Number of indicators for a sustainable management of the

water resources.
ASA ASN SEI
Theme 3 4 3
Sub-themes 6 13 12
Indicators 34 101 37

Even though a detailed description of all the indicators is beyond the scope of this
work, it is to be underlined that the whole structure of the adopted sustainability model
has been derived from proper legal frameworks and therefore benefits, from one side, of
an increased robustness in terms of scientific rationale and concrete applicability and,
from the other side, of a potentially increased availability of the data, thanks to the
procedures and the instruments institutionally defined in order to operationally comply
with the legal prescriptions.

3 The aggregation technique

A composite index is a synthetic index obtained from a set of different elementary
indicators, aggregated through more or less complex mathematical relationships allowing
to resolve multidimensional problems. The use of composite indexes allows to have a
complete and synthetic picture of the phenomenon that is being analysed, facilitating its
analysis and supporting the comparison and the classification of different realities.
The study of composite indicators has received an increasing attention in recent years
and several methodologies have been developed to handle different aspects of the issue.
An exhaustive insight into the subject is given in [8] and [9].
According to the adopted model structure, the construction of a composite indicator
necessarily has to be done following different levels of aggregation, taking into account a
horizontal dimension, in which the parameters are normalized, and a vertical dimension,
in which the normalized data are weighted and composed, as shown in the following
Figures 5 and 6.
With reference to the Figure 6, the data pre-processing consists of three main steps:
1) a quality check on the data, disregarding those with evident errors; 2) a detection of the
missing data, filtering out the corresponding records; 3) a rectification of the indicator
direction, assigning – before the normalisation and aggregation steps – a multiplication
factor of -1 to those indicators moving in a direction opposed to sustainability (for
instance, the indicator of the losses in a water distribution network has to be rectified,
since higher values – i.e. high losses – move away-from and not toward-to sustainability).
290

Figure 5. Building a composite indicator.

Figure 6. Composite indicator flow-chart.

 291

4 The normalisation methodology

Among different normalisation methods available in literature (multiple linear regression
models, Z-scores, min-max, Principal components analysis and factor analysis, Cronbach
alpha, Neutralization of correlation effect, Efficiency frontier, Distance to targets, Experts
opinion (budget allocation), Public opinion, Analytic Hierarchy Process), in the present
work the distance-to-target method has been selected, because a careful definition of the
different targets, even though is a difficult tasks, it allows to directly measure the
effectiveness of the adopted sustainability policies.
As an example, in the following Table 3 are shown the 22 targets defined in
correspondence of the 22 elementary indicators of the ASA1 theme “Aqueducts”.
Table 3. Name, code and target value of indicators for the ASA1 theme “Aqueducts”.
Indicator Measurement
Indicator name Target
code unit
available mc > 100% daily
ASA.1.1.01 Storage capacity mc
average volume delivered
260 if population < 5000
280 if 5000 < pop. < 10000
l / inhabitant /
ASA.1.1.02 Water gross daily availability 300 if 10000 < pop. < 50000
day
320 if 50000 < pop. <100000
340 if pop. > 100000
ASA.1.1.03 Service coverage % 100%
Potabilization plants: age of civil
ASA.1.2.01 year < 40 years
buildings
ASA.1.2.02 Potab. plants: condition of civil buildings poor / suff./ good Sufficient
Potabilization plants: age of electro-
ASA.1.2.03 year < 10 years
mechanical install.
Potabilization plants: condition of electro-
ASA.1.2.04 poor / suff./ good Sufficient
mechanical installations
ASA.1.2.05 Potab. plants: tele-management availabil. yes / no yes
ASA.1.2.06 Pumping plants: age of civil buildings year < 40 years
ASA.1.2.07 Pumping plants: condition of civil build. poor / suff./ good Sufficient
Pumping plants: age of electro-
ASA.1.2.08 year < 10 years
mechanical installations
Pumping plants: condition of electro-
ASA.1.2.09 poor / suff./ good Sufficient
mechanical installations
Pumping plants: tele-management
ASA.1.2.10 yes / no Yes
availability
ASA.1.2.11 Age of storage tanks year < 60 years
ASA.1.2.12 Condition of storage tanks poor / suff./ good Sufficient
ASA.1.2.13 Storage tanks: tele-management availabil. yes / no Yes
ASA.1.2.14 Water-meter installed along water systems % water-meter for each consum.
Absolute average losses for distribution
ASA.1.2.15 l / sec / Km 0,25 l / s / Km of network
water systems
Average losses in % for distribution water
ASA.1.2.16 % 20%
systems
ASA.1.2.17 Age of distribution water systems year < 60 years
Conservation of distribution water
ASA.1.2.18 poor / suff./ good Sufficient
systems
Distribution water system: tele-
ASA.1.2.19 yes / no Yes
management availability
292

The above mentioned targets have been taken directly from the most binding
available document in terms of water policies at local level, the ATO-1 Calabria Ambit
Plan [10]. According to the legal framework of the Law 36/94, this Strategic Plan, based
on a very detailed inventory of all the water-related infrastructures, identifies the planning
for future investments and intervention and outlines the management and organisational
model together with the financial-economic plan.

5 Results
In this section are shown the preliminary results of the first case study, relevant to the
Calabria Optimum Territorial Ambit ATO-1. Its territory of jurisdiction is coincident with
the whole territory of the Province of Cosenza in Southern Italy, shown in Figure 7, with a
surface of about 6,600 square Km, encompassing 155 Municipalities and about 750,000
inhabitants.

Figure 7. Optimum Territorial Ambit Calabria ATO-1.

Due to the very time-consuming and effort-consuming activities relevant to the data
collection, this first model application is now limited to the ASA pillar.
Nevertheless, even though this application is now limited to only few indicators, it is
fully representative of the conceptual model and it will be extended to other and/or
updated indicators as soon as the corresponding data will become available.
The data source is represented by an inventory of the water related infrastructures of
the Calabria ATO-1 and the data are relevant to the year 1998.
With reference to the previous Figure 2, the data relevant to the elementary indicators
ASA1.1.02 (water gross daily availability), ASA1.2.15 (absolute average losses for
distribution water systems) and ASA1.2.16 (average losses in percentage for distribution
water systems) have been collected and processed according to the procedure outlined in
 293

the Figures 5 and 6, using the proper targets defined in the Table 3 and unitary weights in
the first two aggregation steps.
The composite values for the ASA1 theme have then been clustered in the following 5
categories:
• Very low (-1 ≤ values < -0,6).
• Low (-0,6 ≤ values < -0,2).
• Medium (-0,2 ≤ values < 0,2).
• High (0,2 ≤ values < 0,6).
• Very high (0,6 ≤ values ≤ 1).
The mathematical processing has been implemented in a MS Access RDBMS (Relational
Data Base Management System) and the GIS has been developed in ArcGIS 9.0
environment.
In the following Figure 8 is shown the GIS output map of this test application, in
which 18 of the 155 Municipalities have been filtered out from the final categorisation,
due to partial data unavailability or due to poor quality data.

Figure 8. GIS output map of ASA1 theme “Aqueducts” test application.

294

The developed tool exhibits high versatility, being able to generate different user-
driven scenarios according to the availability of new and/or updated data and/or targets or
simply varying the weights in the aggregation steps.
Remarkable is also for instance the possibility, shown in Figure 9, to obtain output
maps and related geographical information of single elementary indicators which are
above/below the corresponding target.

Figure 9. GIS output map of Municipalities having ASA1102 indicator above/below target.

6 Perspectives and conclusions

Despite the completeness of the sustainability model above described, its application and
validation in ATO-1 Calabria is still in progress, due to the very time-consuming
activities related to gathering all the data. Nevertheless, it represents an advancement in
comparison to the state of the art, for three main reasons:
• It sensitively reduces the characteristic limit of the previous models related to the
analyst’s subjectivity, since the measurement unit of the single indicators is given by
its distance to the corresponding target, being the latter properly and objectively fixed
according to the national and international legal frameworks of the sector.
• It is well applicable to a local scale of Optimal Territorial Ambit.
 295

• The social-economic dimension of the sustainability, being strongly correlated with

the Waters Directive 2000/60, exhibits a strong link with the social-economic
implications of the European waters policies.
In virtue of the previous considerations, the most interesting perspectives are certainly
related to the possibility that the managers of the Integrated Water Systems can use the
model as a decision support tool able to measure the effectiveness of the adopted
sustainability policies, as well as a scientific tool to build-up validated parametric
structures, acknowledged by different planning institutional organizations. In particular,
the characterization of sustainability indicators referred to the management of the water
resources allows a quick evaluation of the management actions to be activated for the use
and the reuse of the waters with reference to the different uses and the different scenarios
of the Integrated Water System.

References

1. WCED (World Commision on Environment and Development), Our common

future, (The Brundtland Report ), Oxford University Press, New York (1997).
2. D. P. Loucks, Quantifying system sustainability using multiple risk criteria,
Risk, Reliability, Uncertainty, and Robustness of Water Resources Systems.
Internarional Hydrology Series – Cambridge University Press (2002).
3. H. P. Nachtnebel, Irreversibility and sustainability in water resources systems,
Risk, Reliability, Uncertainty, and Robustness of Water Resources Systems.
International Hydrology Series – Cambridge University Press (2002).
4. United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs – Division for
Sustainable Development, CSD (Commission for Sustainable Development)
Theme Indicator Framework, 24 March 2003 (2003).
5. European Environmental Agency, EEA core set of indicators, Technical Report
(2003).
6. Italian Ministry for the Environment, Environmental Strategy Action for the
sustainable development in Italy, Delibera CIPE n°57 of 2/8/2002. Supplemento
ordinario n°205 alla G.U. n°255 30/10/2002 (2002).
7. Working Group 2.6 – WATECO, Economics and the environment - the
implementation challenge of the Water Framework Directive. Common
Implementation Strategy for the Water Framework Directive (2000/60/EC)
Guidance document n.1 (2003).
8. I. Blanc, and O. Jolliet, EPFL (Ecole Politechnique Federal Lousanne) Working
Document on Composite Indicators Analysis (2003).
9. Institute for the Protection and Security of the Citizen Technological and
Economic Risk Management - Joint Research Centre of European Commission,
ISPRA (VA), Italy, State-of-the-art Report on Current Methodologies and
Practices for Composite Indicator Development (2002).
10. Optimum Territorial Ambit ATO-1 Calabria, Optimum Territorial Ambit Plan
for ATO-1 Calabria (2001).
 WATER RESOURCES –
CROATIAN COMPARATIVE ADVANTAGE

BOŽIDAR BIONDIĆ
Faculty of Geotechnical Engineering, University of Zagreb
Varaždin, 42000, Croatia

RANKO BIONDIĆ
Department of Hydrogeology and Engineering Geology, Institute of Geology
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

Water resources get the growing importance in development projects in Republic of Croatia, partly
because of the general trend around the world, where the drinking water gets strategic values, and
also because of consciences of all participants in the use of space on the home scene about the
importance of water resources in the future development of the country. Croatia is generally talking
rich with surface and ground waters, but the large part of water reserves inflow and run out by large
rivers. Long summer dry periods bring the problems of available water quantities, especially in the
Adriatic area. Consequently, in spite of water wealth, Croatia just with the good knowledge about
water resources and efficient management can consider about the water as the comparative
advantage in future development. Researchers more and more work on defining of water reserves,
which as the surplus on the necessary reserves can get economic values and have been included in
the future water business. This paper presents the situation with water resources in Croatia,
problems how to ensure quantity and quality and some ideas how can water resources become
advantage in future development of the country.

1 Introduction
Republic of Croatia enters in the order of European countries, which can be considered as
the rich with the water resources, especially from the reason that water resources are
generally of very good quality. According to different UN declarations ‘’water is public
good’’ and uses foremost for the water supply of own population and covering the needs
of energy production, irrigation etc in the country where are located. However, world so
and Croatia increasingly consider about the commercialisation of part of water resources
and export of water in areas where it lacks. Anyway the water becomes more and more
comparative advantage of countries with the quantities, which overpass the need of own
development. Due to present knowledge Croatia has a chance to transform a part of water
resources in comparative advantage within the development of whole Mediterranean,
which has a lot of problems with the insurance of sufficient quantities of potable water.
How does seem the general picture of the ‘’water wealth’’ of Croatia? Due to water
balance from Water Management Plan, Croatia has at its disposal in total about 5000 m3/s
of renewable water reserves. This is the average yearly quantity, which outflow from the
territory of Croatia, including the transboundary water of divided management. In total
this is around 35.000 m3 yearly per capita. In this quantity are includes and renewable

296
 297

groundwater reserves, which Croatia has around 2.050 m3 yearly per capita. Consumption
of Croatian population is relatively low in respect to total renewable reserves, and brings
out only 3,8% of total own water resources, and due to available groundwater reserves
around 11%. For the production of electricity was engaged in total about 27% of water
resources, but this water returns in the natural system without larger quality changes.

Figure 1. The average water balance of Croatia for the period 1961-1990 (towards WMP).

Quoted total water reserves are fascinating for so small country such as Croatia, but
the situation nevertheless is not so simple, because climatic conditions and requirements
of keeping up stable ecologic state in the space does not enable the use of total water
reserves. In total reserves are include high water waves (floods) which create large
problems, which all want to get rid of as fast as possible. Consequently, water resources
management is the multi layer problem, which demands exceptional knowledge about
natural system, and every intervention in water resources needs to be observed through
possible changes of entire ecosystem. This is more complex approach than used earlier,
when decisions about the interventions in water resources have brought mainly with one-
sided interest decisions. Such approach has brought on one side the benefit, but in many
cases long term problems in the space.
In the Introduction needs stress that Croatia considering water resources is generally
divided in two parts. Firstly are the water resources of north Croatia, which belong to the
large Pannonian basin, with largest Croatian rivers Sava and Drava and Danube, which is
mainly the border river between Croatia and Serbia and Montenegro. In the part of Crotia,
which belongs to the Pannonian basin in the geologic structure prevails the complex of
Neogene mostly clastic rocks, which is the reason of prevailing surface outflow, and
along the rivers Sava and Drava forming of relatively deep alluvial basins, in which
prevail gravel layers rich with water [2]. South from Karlovac depression towards
Adriatic Sea extend the karst area of Dinarides. Surface streams are not so well branch
298

out as in the Pannonian basin, because the largest part of precipitations infiltrate in karst
underground. Different types of aquifers require different accesses and knowledge in the
research and water resources management. Water divide between Adriatic and Black Sea
catchments extends through the mountain area of Dinarides, so the part of karst areas
belong to Balck Sea catchment and the largest part to Adriatic catchment [4].
Needs stress that the large part of water resources are in the underground and this is
the reason that almost 90% of the public water supply in Croatia has been connected on
groundwater. Research of water resources in Croatia have followed the happenings on the
scientific scene in Europe, especially during the period when Croatia had been the part of
Austria-Hungary monarchy, so the first organized forms of water supply in Croatia were
established in second part of 19th century, when started gradual industialization of towns
and when towns had come out from the middle century walls. This primarily had been
connected for large towns and city as Zagreb, Rijeka, Pula, Šibenik, Split, Varaždin etc. It
is known that Split has had the water supply system from the Roman time (Diocletian)
and Dubrovnik a little bit later. On Skradin Buk has been built one from the oldest
hydroelectric power stations in the world (1985), what also shows how our people have
thought about the use of water resources in the development of the country. Especially
interesting area for researchers have been karst, where numerous Austrian, German,
Hungarian and Croatian researchers had created the world terminology for karst
environments, which is still used in the literature. However, neither separation from
Austria-Hungary morachy has not brought the decrease of research activities in our space,
because regardless on certain loosing connections with the develop part of the Europe, it
was necessary to organize the life of growing towns. It is specially related on the period
after II. World War, when many of hydroelectric power plants have been built, and when
growing towns needed to be covered with quality water supply systems. Maybe the largest
standstill in the research and water works emerged during and after Croatian War of
Independence, because all the financial possibilities were directed on reconstructions of
war destroyed objects. We think that in next three years will happen the important change,
because the development requires special attention in the field of water resources
protection, surely the most significant part of water resources management. Adjustment of
our regulations about water with EU Directives for water [11] requires certain
restructuring of existing management system and additional knowledge, which will enable
efficient usage and water resources protection in Croatia. Aside of that, in next period can
be expected commercialisation of the part of Croatian water resources and including of
Croatia in world water business. For these steps Croatia is preparing by on going project
for definition of free ‘’water capacities’’, evaluation of the quality of these capacities,
protection and way of including on the water market at the Mediterranean level.

2 Climatic Characteristics
Croatia has been placed in the moderate climatic belt, but with expressed influence of
Mediterranean climate in the Adriatic coastal area, and typical continental climate in the
 299

continental part of Croatia. For development of water resources the most significant
parameters are precipitations, air temperature and direction and intensity of wind.

Figure 2. Presentation of different types of aquifers in Croatia.

From the precipitation map is visible that the Adriatic coastal area and islands have
yearly between 800 and 1200 mm of precipitation, that quantity in high mountainous area
of Dinarides, especially in the north Adriatic area grow over 3500 mm, and that towards
inland of the country quantity of precipitation gradually diminish on below of 1000 mm
yearly. Such distribution of precipitation clearly shows that the main concentration of
water is connected for karst area of Gorski Kotar and Lika, and that the highest water
quantities in southern part of Dinarides are binded for high mountainous area in the
neighbouring states (Bosnia and Hercegovina). Needs mention that it is in the same time
300

the area of water divide between Adriatic and Black Sea catchments, and that these large
water reserves are drained on surface or underground towards one and other catchment.

Figure 3. Average yearly precipitations (1961-1990, towards WMP).

The map of temperature changes shows the similarities with the precipitation map,
but with negative mark. With altitude growth the average yearly temperature diminish to
the level of about 2oC on the highest mountain area of Gorski Kotar and Lika. Coastal
area and islands are in the range from 14 to 18oC, and continental part in Pannonian basin
around 10oC.
Wind is also one of the most significant climatic elements, which influence on water
resources. Foremost is the size of evapotranspiration, which considerably influences on
total water quantity in the space. Croatian territory is marked with large diversity. While
in the Adriatic area and part of mountain area along the coast prevails Mediterranean and
 301

local conditions with dominating South winds and “bura’’, in the continental area are the
typical middle European conditions with west, south and northeast winds.

Figure 4. Average yearly air temperature (1961-1990, towards WMP).

3 Water Resources Guidelines

3.1. Pannonian Basin

In the Pannonian area dominate the Drava, Sava and Slavonian depressions, in which are
deposited thick sediments of porous loos and semi consolidated layers of Quartenary
ages. Depression of Drava river has been filled with the large mass of layers formed by
erosive activities of Drava river with the characteristic enlargement of grain size towards
the surface, what have had the influence on the improvement of hydrogeological
characteristics of layers in the zone of potential intervention in groundwater.
302

Drava river with the left tributary Mur river has characteristics of north Alpine
rivers, stabile flow during summer periods, when melt the large amount of snow and ice
in Alps. The average yearly flow rate at Belišće gage station is 558 m3/s. On the river
Drava in Croatia were built 3 hydroelectric power plants (Varaždin, Čakovec and
Dubrava), which partly have been regulated downstream part of river. Planned HPP Virje
is under the design and waits agreement with Hungary.
Public water supply has absolute advantage in the use of water resources and all other
activities, which multi purposely include public water supply. When speaking about water
resources in Croatia the special attention has to be given to groundwater, which in Croatia
covers around 90% of public water supply. Important underground aquifers are formed
along Drava river, which looking from the surface give the impression of the uniqueness,
but research of underground shows the diversity, which has the direct influence on a way
and quantity of water usage.
From the cross section is visible that that the whole aquifer can be divided in two
parts. Firstly is the Varaždin aquifer of maximal depth around 100 m, which is formed
after entry of Drava river in Croatia, and becomes thinner on the threshold by Koprivnica.
After the threshold aquifer again becomes deeper up to the mouth of Drava river in
Danube river. The aquifers are lithologically essentially differ. In the Varaždin aquifer
prevail course grain sediments (gravel), and after crossing the threshold by Koprivnica
begin prevailing of fine grained components (sand and dust). It means that the Varaždin
aquifer has exceptional hydrogeologic characteristics with the possible high specific
yield, and aquifer downstream Koprivnica is much more poor. This is the main reason
that town of Osijek must for its public water supply use treated water from Drava river.
Needs to stress that the Varaždin aquifer is exceptionally rich with water, but with
considerable negative influence of agriculture on the quality of water because of very thin
cover impermeable sediments.
Similar is the situation with the aquifer along Danube river in Croatia, where were
sedimented large mass of low permeable eolic layers. Groundwater exploitation has been
connected for limited aquifers inside fine grained complex of sediments of large
thickness. Danube river influence on groundwater is not significant.
Sava is longest and largest Croatian river, which at Bregana enters in the Croatian
territory, and from Jasenovac is the border river with Bosnia and Hercegovina. For the
illustration of the size of river it is necessary to point out that the yearly average flow at
Zagreb is 323 m3/s and before excite from the state at Županja is 1169 m3/s. Consequently
the river from Zagreb to Županja increase the flow rate for about 3,5 times, mostly from
the area of Dinarides in Croatia (Kupa, Una) and Bosnia and Hercegovina (Vrbas,
Bosna). On the Sava river in Croatia there is no built any hydroelectric power plant, but
exist plans for the construction of 3 steps in the wider area of Zagreb (Podsused, Prečko
and Drenje). Quoted storages have the multiple purpose, basic are the production of
electricity and the regulation of Sava river in the city of Zagreb, which would enable the
urban development of the city along the river. The important advantage of planned dams
 303

are related to the improvement of hydrogeological values of underground aquifers along

the river, from which city gets the potable water.
Along the Sava river are as well as along Drava river formed aquifers, which
hydroulic values are diminished going downstream because of enlargement of fine
grained components in aquifers. From Slovenian border to Sisak has been formed the
deep underground aquifer on both sides of river, differentiated in the Samobor aquifer up
to the threshold in Podsused, from where gradually increase the depth to the area of
Črnkovec near Zagreb (around 100 m), and again decrease the depth towards Sisak
(Figure 6). At the area of Sisak river again over flow threshold and aquifer towards
Županja holds the depth of about 50 m. Needs emphasize that for aquifer along Sava river
is connected the water supply system of the city of Zagreb (around 5 m3/s). In the wider
are of the city of Zagreb are present a lot of problems with insurance the quality of water
because of urban and industrial extension of the city on the aquifer. Numerous former
extraction sites are because of the disrupted quality abandoned, and we have situation of
constantly opening of new sites in marginal parts of city. Unfortunately, neither these
areas are not anymore sure, so former potential groundwater extraction sites are today
inside urban areas. Solutions could be in the investigation of deeper parts of aquifers.

Figure 5. Longitudinal cross section along Drava river from Slovenian boundary towards the mouth in Danube
river.
304

Figure 6. Longitudinal cross section along Sava river from Sovenian border to Sisak (LEGEND: 1 - very high
permeable layers, 2 -high permeable layers, 3 -permeable layers, 4 -impermeable layers, 5 - fault, 6 – borehole).

3.2. Karst Area and Dinarides

More than half part of the country has been built from karstified carbonate rocks. This is
mainly the mountain area of Dinarides, the area of specific development of karst forms
and significant reserves of high quality of potable water [9,10]. The whole mountain area
is very rich with precipitation, but with expressed problem of the irregular seasonal
distribution and relatively low retention abilities of karst aquifers, what causes on one
hand long summer dry seasons, and on the other hand fast out flow of large quantities of
surface and underground water. Consequences are the problems with water quantity even
on present level of demand and very often floods in rainy seasons. Decrease of draining
towards karst springs in coastal areas provoke the effects of sea influence on many
locations along the coast, and some potable water springs are salinized and completely
out from water supply systems [1,6]. In spite of natural difficulties needs to emphasize
that karst aquifers in Croatia are mainly of exceptionally high quality and present the
value, which in the future can bring considerable economic advantages in respect to other
European countries.
 305

Figure 7. Water resources in karst area in Croatia.

It is important to mention that in the natural system have the smallest amount of
water, when because of tourism consumption is the largest. According to data from
hydrogeological investigations, today from karst aquifers in Adriatic catchment have been
exploited in total around 9 m3/s or 2,5% of total water resources in karst areas. Certain
water reserves are still out of usage, especially in karst part of Black Sea catchment. Far
larger quantity of dynamic reserves in karst areas have been used for production of
electricity, but those are retained high water waves in storage basins. Nevertheless still
large water quantity freely out flow towards Sava river or Adriatic sea, and those reserves
present potential, which can be efficiently used in the future development of the country
[8].
The large problem in water resources management in karst areas is the special
distribution of water bodies on the distance of nearly 1000 km from Piran bay on north to
Prevlaka peninsula on south. It is lack that water resources are distributed in such a way
that in present time can cover water consumption of particular regions. So Istria has its
306

own water resources, Croatian Littoral their, than very rich with water Lika region, which
cover water consumption of tourist developed islands Rab and Pag, than Ravni Kotari,
catchment of Cetina river, and in south part of Adriatic region rich with water Neretva
river valley and Dubrovnik area with strong karst springs (Ombla). Part of Black sea
catchment which depends to karst areas of Dinarides is also rich with water, and springs
of rivers Kupa, Dobra, Mrežnica, Korana and Una have the status of strategic reserves for
future development of the country [3]. Croatia has important water resources on some
islands as Cres, Krk, Hvar, Korčula, Vis and some others, but these are mainly aquifers of
limited possibilities [5], and more and more islands their water supply connect for
continental resources.
Basic characteristics of surface flows in karst areas are relatively short flows
extended out flow range of torrent type. Numerous short rivers in karst fields are the
largest part of year completely without of water, but with frequent floods during rainy
seasons. Floods of karst fields have very important function in retaining water mass in
high parts of karst catchments, but in the same time bring a large problems for the
agriculture of local inhabitants. Hydrotechnic engineers have seen the solutions in
artificial fast drainage of karst fields by hydrotechnical tunnels, but such fastening of the
natural drainage have had the influence on the prolongation of dry periods, and in such
way all negative effects of drying the area, especially in coastal areas. Storage basins built
for the electricity production can have a positive influence on out flow effects from karst
catchments, because the technically acceptable lost of water from storage basins can
increase the basic out flow on karst springs during dry periods.
Obviously is that water resources require the large attention if somebody wants to put
water in the order of important element of development of karst areas and whole country.
Formula is generally simple, but difficult to be realized. It is necessary to have good water
resources management based on knowledge about natural systems according to principles
of sustainable development.

4 Water Resources Protection

Water resources protection is today very complex question, because there are less and less
quality potable water in the world just thanks to contaminations, which permanently
damage available water resources. Croatia is one from rare European countries, which has
high quality water resources, foremost because of relative inferiority of development in
past period, and also because of the early including in the processes of protection its water
resources [10]. However, it is not the equally good situation with water resources
protection. Richer by water north part of state in Pannonian basin has much more
problems with the keeping water quality from naturally higher vulnerable karst areas.
In Pannonian basin is located city of Zagreb and numerous other towns and
industrial centres, Sava and Drava rivers and developed agriculture production, which
usually create large problems to open porous aquifers. In the north part of Croatia is
located the largest consumer of potable water, and this is the city of Zagreb with the
 307

consumption of around 5 m3/s, which because of the inappropriate protection practically

‘’runs’’ after its potable water reserves, and numerous water extraction sites inside the
city are abandoned because of the disrupted quality. Downstream from Zagreb increase
the problem of natural content of iron in water, but this is relatively easy soluble problem.
Needs to stress that there is no to much problems with nitrates in Sava river catchment,
which is the general problem of groundwater all over the world because of negative
influence of agriculture production. Pumping stations have protection zones and
protection measures, however the space becomes more and more expensive and
protection measures increasingly overpass in domain of technical interventions in function
of protection. In the catchment of Drava river is more expressed the problem of
groundwater pollution with nitrates, especially in upstream Varaždin aquifer. The reason
is for sure developed agriculture production, and also storage basins, which retained the
natural out flow from the area of aquifer. Regardless of existing protection zones for the
pumping sites, nitrate problem is possible to be solved by rational usage of fertilizers and
pesticides in combination with technical interventions, which can enable faster out flow of
surface water from entire area. Recently is very actual research of deeper parts of aquifer,
which has the smaller pollution influence from the surface. Water capturing from deeper
parts of aquifers should insure future supply with healthy potable water in Pannonian
area. New research methods enable better defining of intrinsic aquifers water dynamics,
time of water exchange in aquifers and many other parameters, which enable more
efficient use and protection of aquifers.
The large problem of water protection in Pannonian basin is the water quality of Sava
and Drava rivers, which directly influence on groundwater reserves, by quantity and
quality. Needs to emphasize that the quality of water in two rivers are generally improved,
because there are less dirty industries in catchments, and the treatment of waste water are
the obligation of all states in catchments. Consequently, the regional negative impact is
generally decreased, but there are more and more local pollutions because of growing use
of area.
In karst area of Dinarides the situation with water resources is completely different
from Pnnonian basin, because it is naturally higher vulnerable water resource because of
the fast groundwater flows and openness of karst aquifers towards fast influences from the
surface [7]. Karst aquifers are in the exceptional state because of the lower development
of the mountainous area of Dinarides. If we speak about vulnerability than needs to
mention large towns in coastal area, which influences expand on some places deep inland.
First measures and protection zones of karst aquifers have been established already by the
end of 1970s, what was of exceptional importance for the preservation of water quality.
Although the knowledge of researchers about thirty years ago were on lower level than
present, have been made the documents, which have focused the attention of space users
on the value of karst potable water springs and need of rational use of space in zones of
high risk. Those documents have been meritorious for the avoiding mistakes, which
already were done in developed European countries. Special attention from very
beginning of the investigations, designing and construction of infrastructural objects was
308

given to the locating of high risk objects according to the water protection scheme. It is
for sure that with karst aquifers needs to be very careful, because uncontrolled
interventions and impropriate protection can essentially change natural relation rock –
water, what can have incalculable consequences for the whole environment.

Figure 8. Protection zones of karst potable water springs in Croatia.

New Book of Regulations in Croatia about water resources protection has

professionally and organizationally solved earlier problems of different approaches and
direct the reconstruction of existing protection zones according to the experiences in
Croatia and other European countries. The basic idea of new Book of Regulations is
active approach to the protection with as small as possible protection zones and as much
as possible efficient protection measures. Methodologically it means the defining of
 309

natural vulnerability level, hazard and risk analyses by using GIS for every single
catchments.
Criteria for the determining of protection zones from the hydrogeological aspects are
surely the most significant part of investigations [7]. Substantially this is the identification
of natural drainage systems, geometry and dynamical functioning of aquifers. All past
criteria were directed towards protection against bacteriological pollutions – maximal 50
days transport. Unfortunately, bacteriological pollutions are not any more the largest
problem. Today the actual problems are hydrocarbons, nitrates and other chemical
contaminants. It would be ideal against chemical contaminants to protect whole karst
catchments, but in this case karst area of Dinarides would be transformed in protection
areas of springs, what practically would disable any urban, infrastructural and industrial
development of south Croatia. Solutions are definition of differently active part of karst
aquifers and selective protection. The basic parameters are groundwater flow velocities,
length of transport, type of infiltration, functioning of unsaturated zones and other natural
parameters, which can diminished natural vulnerability of karst aquifers. In Croatia
separates the 4 zones of different level of protection. From Fig. 8 is visible that under the
protection is nearly half of karst areas in Croatia, and that problems are not so simple,
because the large parts of karst catchments extend in neighbouring countries, and
protection of water resources is the object of common research and management.

5 Conclusion
Republic of Croatia has water resources, which with their quantity and quality present the
significant natural resource for current and future development of the state. Pnnonian area
is rich with surface and underground water, but this in the same time the area of largest
load, because all big towns lie and develop on their own groundwater resources. This is
the area of the largest consumption of potable water, and also the area of smallest
influences of seasonal changes on the natural aquifers, so water quantities because of deep
aquifers are not questionable. Groundwater level decrease during summer dry seasons can
more influence on the technical solutions for pumping stations than on natural lack of
water. Water quality is the largest problem of Pnnonian basin, because the part of aquifer
along Drava river is already burdened by nitrates, but neither aquifers along Sava river
are not out of this influence. Solutions lie in the water exploitations from deep parts of
porous aquifers, where hydraulic characteristics are slightly weaker, but expected water
quality are much better. Research of deep parts of aquifers look for knowledge about new
research methods, which enable better definition of intrinsic aquifers dynamic. For this
moment situation with water in north Croatia is relatively good, but trends direct on the
caution, especially in the zones of big cities and towns. Water in north Croatia is surely
resource, which is indispensable for the development of this part of state.
Commercialization of water in this area can be connected just for smaller users for water
bottling, and that is possible from deep part of aquifers, where there are enough high
quality water.
310

Water resources in karst areas are completely different story. Some catchments are
still completely unused, and some of them just partly. Other great advantage of karst area
is vicinity of the coast and more economic possibilities of water transport. Nevertheless,
in karst areas problems with water are not so simple because of natural characteristics of
the aquifers – combination of low water retaining abilities in karst underground and high
level of natural vulnerability. Solutions of those problems are the background of the
consideration about usage of karst water. Quantities can be solved by accumulating high
water waves, and efficient protection only by good knowledge about natural systems and
the system of exploitation, which will not essentially disturb natural conditions. Karst
water resources surely present comparative advantage in future development of the
country, because quantities overpass the needs of own development, and today’s state of
water quality and regulated protection measures in a way are guarantee for the
maintenance of such conditions in future. Croatian scientists have started with the
preparatory project for the commercialisation of ‘’free’’ part of water reserves in Croatia
for our offer of water to the Mediterranean market, where many countries have more and
more problems with potable water. Part of the project is related on the water supply of
tourist very attractive our islands, which also have big problems in the insurance of
sufficient quantity of potable water. Where does lie solutions? Foremost in the definition
of the ‘’free’’ natural capacity on different karst springs and other water sources along the
coast and in multipurpose planning of water use from existing storages built for the
electricity production, and in planning of construction of new storage basins, what can
essentially increase the existing available reserves of potable water.

References

1. T. Šegota, Sea water level in Holocen and Young Wurmu (on Croatian). Geografski
Glasnik, 30; pp. 15-39, Zagreb (1968).
2. P. Miletić, B. Biondić, F. Fritz and M. Heinrich-Miletić, Novi pristup evidenciji i
gospodarenju rezervama podzemnih voda R. Hrvatske. Geol. Vjesnik 42, pp. 235-
247, Zagreb (1989).
3. P. Miletić, B. Biondić, F. Fritz and M. Heinrich-Miletić, Strateške rezerve
podzemnih voda SR Hrvatske. Vodoprivreda, 33/9, pp. 32-35, Zagreb (1990).
4. B. Biondić, D. Singer, Ž. Brkić and R. Biondić, Razvoj hidrogeološkog
informacijskog sustava Republike Hrvatske. Zbornik radova 1. Hrv. geol. kongres,
knjiga 1, pp. 95-100, Zagreb (1995).
5. D. Ivičić and B. Biondić, Dalmatinski otoci - Prirodni uvjeti, stanje i mogućnost
vodoopskrbe // Voda na hrvatskim otocima / Trninić, Dušan (ur.). Hvar : Hrvatsko
hidrološko društvo, pp. 119-134 (1998).
6. B. Biondić, P. Marinos, et al.: Aquifer Engineering. EU COST 621 action final
report "Groundwater management of coastal karstic aquifers" (ed: L. Tulipano),
Bruxelles, pp. 210-249 (2003).
7. B. Biondić, R. Biondić and F. Dukarić, Protection of Karst Aquifers in Dinarides in
Croatia. Environmental Geology, 34, Springer-Verlag (1998).
 311

8. B. Biondić and A. Pavičić, The Use and Protection of the Strategic Resources of
Potable Water from the Dinaric Karst. Proceedings of IAH Symposium, Las Vegas,
USA (1998).
9. B. Biondić and R. Biondić, Vodni resursi i održivi razvoj krških područja u
Hrvatskoj. Zbornik radova. 3. hrvatska konferencija o vodama "Hrvatske vode u 21.
stoljeću", Osijek 28-31.05.2003., pp. 45-56, Referat po pozivu, Osijek (2003).
10. S. Tedeschi and B. Biondić, Vode i more // Hrvatska i održivi razvitak -
Gospodarstvo - Stanje i procjena mogućnosti / Marija Kaštelan-Macan, Emir Hodžić,
Maja Bogunović (ur.). Zagreb : Republika Hrvatska - Ministarstvo razvitka i obnove,
pp. 39-67 (1998).
11. WATER FRAMEWORK DIRECTIVE EU, WFD 2000/60/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Councile establishing framework for Community action in the
field of water policy of 23. october 2000.
 SUSTAINABLE WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT IN
LITHUANIAN INDUSTRIAL COMPANIES

JOLANTA DVARIONIENE†
Institute of Environmental Engineering (APINI), Kaunas University of Technology
Kaunas, LT-44239, Lithuania

ZANETA STASISKIENE
Institute of Environmental Engineering (APINI), Kaunas University of Technology
Kaunas, LT-44239, Lithuania

Water resources management has become an important operational and environmental issue in
Lithuania. The rinsing costs of dependable water supplies and wastewater disposal have increased
the economic incentive for implementing technologies that are more environment-friendly, and can
ensure efficient use of natural resources. Wastewater reuse potential for Lithuanian industries was
determined and overviewed of the types of industries that could benefit from wastewater reclamation
and reuse was made. The Integrated Water Resources Management model IWRM is designed for
water resources management in the industrial companies and supposes possibilities for process
integration and wastewater reclamation technologies according mathematically formulated efficient
water consumption criteria.

1. Introduction
The demand for water resources is increasing every day in the world [1]. In the past water
was a cheap and abundant resource, the wastewater could be discharged in surface water
or to the sewer system without excessive costs and restrictions. However, the rising costs
of dependable water supplies and wastewater disposal have increased the economic
incentive for implementing technologies that are more environment-friendly, and can
ensure efficient use of natural resources [2]. The key European Directive 61/96
“Integrated Pollution Prevention and Control” (IPPC) now is going to be implemented in
all European countries. The implementation of the Directive is going to be determinant to
sustain and encourage water reuse and recycling application. The purpose of the
Directive is to achieve integrated prevention and control of pollution arising from a large
number of activities listed in its Annex I, leading to a high level of protection of the
environment as a whole [3]. The Best Available Techniques (BAT) will be defined for
several industrial processes with the objective to eliminate or reduce emissions. As far as
the process industries are concerned, it is likely that some of the BATs will implement
water reclamation or closed-loop options for industrial water usage. Implementation of
IPPC is going to be determinant to sustainable and encouraging water reuse and recycling
application in Lithuania as well. The increase of water resources consumption efficiency
is understood as the decrease of water amount, which is used on the released production
(GDP), at the same time not decreasing the quantity of released production and
†
e-mail: [email protected]

312
 313

warranting the environmental requirements [4]. The appropriate wastewater treatment

and recycling is the only way to break the negative impact of human activities on the
environment as well [5].
After analysis of several industrial branches basic water consumption indicators in
different industrial companies of the country are compared with foreign countries
practice. For example, water consumption in different companies of yarn industry (Figure
1) is much more higher compared to water consumption using Best Available Techniques
(BAT).

160

140

120
Water consumption, m3/t

100

80

60

40

20

0
Lithuanian company Lithuanian company Lithuanian company BAT
A B C

Figure 1. Water consumption in yarn producing companies.

Increase of costs for water consumption and wastewater treatment (Figure 2), made
Lithuanian companies looking for new ways of economic effectiveness. Compared to
companies and enterprises of developed European countries, the tendencies for water
consumption and problems with effective use of wastewater are common for most of
industries in the country (textile, pulp and paper, metal processing, food, chemistry,
electronics, etc.).
Lithuania, as all the other countries of previous soviet block, inherited economy with
very ineffective use of water and other different natural resources. Lithuanian economy
consumes several times more of natural resources to produce one unit of GDP than
former EU15 average. This is not so long ago, when Lithuanian enterprises were
achieving the necessary minimal pollution level by diluting waste water at the end of the
pipe. This was the only way to escape huge fines from environmental authorities. Today
this is no longer rational, and also makes huge economical damage against the interests of
the company [6]. On the other hand, the advanced waste water treatment is costly, and
there is a great need in Lithuanian enterprises to start recycling the waste water and
starting different types of systems for the water reuse. In Lithuanian strategy for
sustainable development the attention is paid to raising the ecological effectiveness of
production and services. Actually, there is a lack of clear strategies and models for saving
water resources in the country, and this problem raises new challenges for Lithuanian
science. With regulation getting more stringent, the increase of water consumption
314

efficiency is a relevant problem today not only in Lithuania but also in EU and other
countries of the world.
Various methodologies of systematic evaluation and minimization of water resources
consumption were found in literature for different industrial branches. Process integration
represents an important branch of process engineering. It refers to the system-oriented,
thermodynamics-based, integrated approaches to the analysis, synthesis and retrofit of
process plant. The main goals of process integration (PI) are to integrate the use of
materials and to minimize the generation of wastes. A recent development in pinch
technology that deals with pollution prevention, resource recovery, and waste reduction is
mass-exchange integration [7]. One of them, “Water pinch” analysis is a technology
providing a systematic approach for minimizing the use of fresh water and the
discharging of effluent water without losing sight of the costs [8]. It is a strategic tool for
water management in industry. The fundamental theoretical formulations for the
application of the pinch concept to wastewater problems were amongst others pioneered
by El-Halwagi and co-workers, Linnhoff, Smith and co-workers, Alva-Argáez at al. [9,
10, 11]. The design methodologies and approaches cover a variety of techniques ranging
from the graphical based water pinch analyses, the source-sink graphical methodology to
mathematical optimization based approaches.

4,5
4

3,5
W ater costs, Lt/m3

2,5

1,5

0,5

0
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999
Year

Figure 2. Costs for water supply and wastewater sewerage in Lithuania (1993-1999).

These methodologies all have a range of benefits and drawbacks but the major issue
encountered is the expertise required for the practicing engineer to apply these techniques
successfully [12].
Nowadays membrane technologies are identified and recognized as a most
sustainable and cost effective treatment for water regeneration and reuse of the industrial
wastewaters. Membrane filtration has emerged as a reliable and applicable technology in
the treatment of various industrial process effluent streams. They are compact and
modular in addition to their high selectivity (that can provide substance concentrations as
low as parts per billion) and low energy consumption. Therefore, membrane units can
 315

relatively easily be implemented on existing production sites [13]. Furthermore, modern

membranes present high resistance to heat, to acid and alkaline conditions, to a number of
the other aggressive chemicals and of micro-organisms. The membrane filtration can
imply savings in water resources, chemicals and production time, and also can give large
savings on energy [14, 16].

2 Methodology
The research work of water resources saving in various Lithuanian industrial companies
were performed consequently in several stages. In the beginning of the research the
effectiveness of water consumption in different Lithuanian companies was analyzed and
compared with good practice examples from developed countries in EU and worldwide.
Water saving potential in process industry companies was determined. Detailed analysis
of “Water Pinch” method and experiment of process integration in Textile Company was
performed. The IWRM model methodology was applied in the company for estimation of
economical benefits according the efficient water resources consumption criteria.

2.1. The criteria of efficient water resources consumption

Expenditure of water resources. The main criterion for efficient water use WW is based
on necessity of minimizing water consumption in companies:
WW → min . (1)
At the same time it is important to keep high productivity rate and also meeting the
environmental requirements of EU standards:
N = const ; (2)
Q ≥ Qmin . (3)
In the process industry expenditure of water resources for unit of product EW is the main
criteria (indicator) of efficient water consumption:
EW = N . (4)
This criterion has to be followed by every enterprise, which uses water in its’
technological processes and seeks to minimize water consumption:
EW → min . (5)
Minimizing of water costs. This criterion can be followed in every enterprise’s
calculations of water resources and wastewater treatment expenditures, regardless type of
industry or technological process used in the company:
K = ∑ tWW + rWWW + Wother . (6)
In this case the objective to be achieved is the decrease of costs of water resources
consumption, under conditions (2) and (3):
K → min . (7)
316

3 Results and discussions

Analysis of preventive methods for water resources saving and wastewater minimization
and advanced wastewater regeneration technologies encouraged to create a constitutional
model for integrated water resources management in industrial company. The Integrated
Water Resources Management (IWRM) model enables to analyze process water system
in a static domain, given by a certain time frame, and in a dynamic domain, where time
depending changes can be modeled. The step-by-step procedure and the consistent
relationships between the input-output diagram types allow straightforward set-up
execution of the water saving project.
The Static analysis reveals the structure of the system as flows and processes. A
system optimization is possible based on water and on costs, which calculates and
balances water resources and wastewater in order to point out possible savings. The
diagrams are hierarchal structured on several levels of detail allowing an in-depth
analysis of complex systems with numerous sub-systems. The Dynamic analysis involve
a water analyses technology called “WaterPinch” for analyzing water networks, which
provides a systematic approach for minimizing the use of fresh water and the discharging
of effluent water without losing sight of the costs. Detailed water network analysis
enables to found out the best water recycling solutions.

3.1. Application of IWRM model

There are two main areas for applying IWRM model: 1) technological process in
appropriate equipment, which uses water resources (a simple object) and 2) technological
chain consisting of several technological processes or equipment consuming water (a
complex object). Assessment of technological object relations between these parameters
is stipulated. This process can be viewed as demonstrated in Figure 3.

Disturbances
t1 t2 tn
Input variables

x1 y1
Technological
variables

x2 y2
Output

xn object yn

u1 u2 un

Control parameters

Figure 3. Structural scheme of technological object.

Usually, technological processes are affected by various factors (variables), such as:
 317

• Input variables x1, x2,...xn - which are described by quantitative and qualitative
parameters of water consumption. This can be water resources from different sources
of water supply – supply agent, own bores, and also the information on the water
resources: amount, concentration of separate components, temperature, etc.
• Output variables y1, y2,...yn – these are waste water flows from different
technological processes and pollution concentration as well as temperature. These
values determine the process mode and describe the state of a technological process.
• Disturbances t1, t2,...tn – effects regarding the changes of water quality, resources
limits, changes of legislative requirements.
• Control parameters u1, u2,...un – changing regimes of technological processes and the
compensation of existing interferences.

3.2. Principle of IWRM model operation

The IWRM model operation is based on the optimal solution approach [4]. The optimum
control is a feedback strategy using a combination of the costs of control and system
costs as an objective function, and using the system model as a linear constraint. An
objective function is understood as water resources usage rates per production unit Ew or
minimization of wastewater treatment costs K.
The IWRM model is employed for optimisation of the objective function with regard
to quality and environmental requirements (Figure 4).
Thus generated effluents contain a wide range of contaminants, such as salts, dyes,
surfactants, oil and grease, oxidizing and reducing agents. In environmental terms, these
contaminants mean suspended solids, COD, BOD, as well as high pH and very strong
color. Cotton represents approximately half of all textiles worldwide, and nearly all
cotton today is dyed by reactive dyes [15, 17].

Input Output Estimation

variables variables

System

Disturba Side
nces effects Objective
function - Ew, Kw

Figure 4. Principal operational scheme of IWRM model.

Washing and rinsing are two of the most common operations in reactive dyeing of
cotton and optimization of washing efficiency and can save significant amounts of water
and energy. It is common that the rinse has water consumption above 200 l/kg of textile
or more than 60% of the total water consumption in the whole refinement process.
318

Unfixed dyestuffs and auxiliaries must be removed from the goods in order to get high
quality products and excellent fastness. Washing subsequent to dyeing is mostly done in a
conventional way, which means that the washing process starts at low temperature in
order to remove dyestuff and to prevent staining of the white ground. This washing
process is time consuming and requires a lot of water.
This model makes it possible to keep the system in balance foreseeing the preventive
measures for waste minimisation. When applying the model in a selected enterprise, all
possible ways of water should be systematically assessed, i.e.:
• Implementation of the direct water recycle.
• Water collection and reuse in technological processes.
• Application of regenerative technologies for wastewater treatment.

3.3. The application of IWRM model in industrial companies

The application of theory to practice, the IWRM model (Figure 5) for water resources
saving and wastewater minimization in different industrial companies was applied. The
main of water resources saving experiments using IWRM model were performed in
textile companies. Why the textile companies have been chosen for the experiments? The
textile industry wastewater is a significant pollution source containing high
concentrations of inorganic and organic chemicals and is highly colored from the residual
dyestuffs.
The goods are usually washed too long and too intensively and wastewater drained
directly into the waste water treatment plant without any recycling or cleaning in order to
get the best rubbing and wash fastness. Applying the IWRM model the following steps
were used:
• identification of the machine groups with the largest yearly water consumption;
• evaluation of direct water reuse solutions;
• selection of relevant membranes able to work in the process water from rinsing after
cotton dyeing;
• estimation of the reduction in polluting substances in the reclaimed process water
after membrane filtration;
• determination the applicability of this permeate for reuse as rinsing water in the
dyehouse;
• evaluation economic efficiency of water reclamation by membrane filtration and
reuse in processes.
Carrying out case studies, it became clear that the IWRM model is applicable in various
type of water using production system, especially in large water amounts consuming
production systems. For example, using IWRM model in testified textile company was
achieved 55% fresh water savings, and correctly applied membrane filtration enable to
create closed water loop for textile rinsing process. Integration of “WaterPinch” and
membrane filtration technologies ensure process optimization, can provide financial
 319

savings, conserve natural resources and help to meet present and future environmental
legislation requirement.

Setting goals for

use of IWRM
model

Static analysis
Water resource flow diagram of
technological process

Designing the Flow Water balance

Chart of the whole Input-Output diagram
enterprise
Water costs flow diagram of
technological process
Composition

Specification of water costs

Dynamic analysis
Process integration using
„WaterPinch“ analysis

The diagram of chosen Scenario for sustainable water

technological process resources’ management

Optimizing and modelling

according chosen criteria

Input Output Estimation

variables variables
System
Operation

Distur- Side
bances effects Objective
function - Ew, Kw

Figure 5. The structure of a model for Integrated Water Resources Management (IWRM) in industry.

4 Conclusions
After analyzing the world practice in wastewater reclamation and reuse possibilities, after
calculating various pollution prevention, cleaner production and environmental
management projects, implemented in Lithuanian companies, following conclusion were
made: there is a huge potential for water reuse, water recycling and closed water cycles in
most of companies of different industrial branches. The biggest opportunities for water
320

consumption and wastewater minimization have textile, pulp and paper, chemical, food
and metal processing and power generation industries. Comparing to water usage known
in foreign practice, many Lithuanian companies exceed water consumption several times,
in some cases more than ten times.
The comparative analysis of water resources in industry showed, that the main
criteria for effective water use is an input of water resources used for producing a unit of
the production (m3/t, pcs., m). Comparing these criteria between industrial enterprises of
developed countries followed by BAT recommendations, Lithuanian enterprises use 3-5
(some cases 10) times more water for production unit, especially in textile, pulp and
paper, metal processing, chemistry and food industries.
Applying the IWRM for preserving water resources and minimizing waste water
(without the decrease of production amount) results into saving water resources and
producing less waste water in the range of 52-62 % depending on the type of industry and
type of enterprise. The effect is achieved by creating systems of water reuse, closed water
cycles, by integrating methods of process analysis together with technologies of waste
regeneration.

References

1. P.H. Gleick, The world’s water 2000-2001, The Biennial Report on Freshwater
resources, Island Press, Washington, USA (2001).
2. T. Asano and A.D. Levine, Wastewater Reclamation and Reuse: Past, Present, and
Future, Water Science & Technology, Vol. 33, No. 10, pp.1-14 (1996).
3. Directive 96/61/EC. The European Parliament and of the Council of 24 September
1996 concerning integrated pollution prevention and control// Official Journal of the
European Communities, L 257 of 10.10 (1996).
4. J.K. Staniskis, Z. Stasiskiene and I. Kliopova, Cleaner Production: Systems
approach. Monograph. Kaunas, 366 p. ISBN 9955-09-312-9 (2002).
5. J. Anderson, The environmental benefits of water recycling and reuse// Water
Science and Technology: Water supply., Vol.3, No.4, pp. 1-10 (2003).
6. J. Dvarioniene and Z. Stasiskiene, Water resources saving in Lithuanian industry:
possibility analysis, Environmental Research, Engineering and Management, 1(19),
Kaunas, p 34-42 (2002).
7. M.M. El-Halwagi, Pollution prevention through process integration. Systematic
design Tools. Academic press. 1997, USA, p.262-274.
8. D. Baetens, Water Pinch Analyses: minimization of water and wastewater in the
process industry// Water and resource recovery in industry: Euro Summer school,
Wageningen, The Netherlands (2001).
9. B. Linnhoff, Pinch analysis – State-of-the-Art Overview//Trans IChemE, Vol.71,
Part A (1993).
10. M.M., El-Halwagi and V. Manousiouthakis, Simultaneous synthesis of mass
Exchange and regeneration networks. AlChE, Vol. 24. pp. 633-654 (1990).
11. Y.P. Wang and R. Smith, Wastewater minimization. Chemical Engineering Science,
(1), Vol. 49, No.7, pp. 981-1006 (1994).
 321

12. H. Wenzel and R.F. Dunn, Process integration design methods for water
conservation and wastewater reduction in industry. Part 3: Experience of Industrial
Application// Clean Production and Processes. Vol 5. pp. 217-229 (2002).
13. S.Judd and B. Jefferson, Membranes for Industrial Wastewater Recovery and reuse.
Elsevier Ltd., pp. 14-45 (2003).
14. H.H. Knudsen and H. Wenzel, Environmentally friendly method in reactive dyeing
of cotton.// Wat.Sci.Tech.Vol.33, No.6, pp.17-27 (1996).
15. J. Dvarioniene, Z. Stasiskiene and H.H. Knudsen, Pilot scale membrane filtration
study on water reuse after reactive cotton dyeing// Environmental Research,
Engineering and Management, 3(25). Kaunas, p. 3-10 (2003).
16. J. Staniskis and Z. Stasiskiene Implementation of Cleaner Production in Lithuanian
industry possibility analysis // Environmental Research, Engineering and
Management, , Nr.1 (6), Kaunas, p.58-66 (1998).
17. A. Grobicki and B. Cohen. A flow balance approach to scenarios for water
reclamation// Water Science, Vol. 25, No.4, pp. 473482 (1999).
 DECENTRALIZED WASTEWATER TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY:
A PROMISE FOR THE FUTURE

SHASI K. GUPTA
Waikato Institute of Technology
Hamilton, New Zealand

Centralized system of collection and treatment of liquid wastes has been in vogue for more than a
century now. While this concept has brought general improvement in the hygiene and sanitary
situations in the urban areas, the system as such is costly and poses high demand on fresh water
used for flushing the sewers. Decentralized wastewater systems offer sustainable alternatives to the
centralized systems. These systems make best use of the available technologies and generally
involve low maintenance requirements, and a process for reuse and/or dispersing the treated effluent
nearby through the soil and ground water recharge. This paper gives an overview of the technologies
that have been successfully applied and potentially used, and advocates that decentralized systems
containing these technologies should be produced using modern industrial methods and delivered in
a user friendly state. Further, these should be serviced and maintained by a team of skilled people.

1 Introduction
Man made his early settlements near the rivers so that he could have convenient supply of
fresh water and fish and easy means of communication. Community wastewaters of all
sorts slowly found their way into natural water courses. While the population levels were
small and wastes consisted of small quantities of natural substances, withdrawal of water
and/or the discharge of wastes had no significant impact on river ecology. However, with
the rise in population, increased urbanization and industrialization - large quantities of
wastes of increasing complexities found their way into natural watercourses resulting in
unhealthy conditions and disease outbreaks, necessitating discharge of community wastes
further away from human habitation. Thus centralized system of management of
community wastewater was evolved. In this system sewage from the city is collected,
centrally treated and the effluent is disposed of in natural watercourses. These systems are
designed and managed to cater to specified quality criteria of the receiving body of water.
Over the years, these sewage disposal systems have to be successively upgraded, to keep
up to speed with the stringent discharge requirements in natural water courses. While
these systems have brought about significant improvement in public health situation, they
impose large demand on water needed to transport (and prevent settlement of) sewage
solids in the pipe network, and require approximately A$10,000 per household in initial
cost and A$500 in annual rate per household [1].
The fact that large number of people in the developing world still do not have access
to adequate sanitation is a clear indication that the centralized approach to sanitation is
not adapted to the socio-economic conditions prevailing in most countries of Africa, Asia
and Latin America. Furthermore, the (extra) water used for flushing the centralized

322
 323

systems dilutes the potentially useful substances and nutrients (e.g. phosphorous) in
wastewaters to an extent that these cannot be cost effectively recovered or utilized.
Centralized system, therefore, does not also correspond to basic criteria of sustainability
since it is estimated that the global phosphorous reserve will last only some other 50-100
years if they continue to be depleted at the present rate [2].
However, the good news is that on September 8, 2000 in the fall session of the UN
General assembly 191 Member States reaffirmed their commitment to half, by the year
2015, the proportion of the world’s people who do not have access to safe drinking water
and ensure integration of the principles of sustainable development into country policies
and programs and reverse loss of environmental resources
(www.un.org/millenniumgoals). When assessing the chances to meet these targets, one
must take into account the large amount of money needed to build the infrastructure
needed. According to rough estimates released by the World Bank, up to 180 billion of
US$ need to be spent every year to bring the ‘rest of the world’ to the standards in the
industrialized countries during the past 150 years. While, these cost estimates are based
on the water and wastewater management practices of the past, if we were to come up
with novel technological concepts that are comparably effective but costs much less, the
financial burden would come down lower than that estimated by the World Bank.
Around 80% of the total costs of the overall water supply and wastewater treatment
are attributed to installation, maintenance and repairs of the conveyance/reticulation
system alone. Thus if alternate wastewater management systems could be developed so
that extensive sewer networks would not be needed any more, it would be easier to realize
the UN development goals in the developing country environment, plus advance a
sustainable alternative to the current centralized sanitation system in the developed
countries too.

2 Alternative Approaches to Wastewater Management

2.1. Onsite Treatment

Another approach to wastewater management is the Onsite treatment. This involves
treating and dispersing the wastewater on the site of the building lot. Typically these
systems are privately owned and operated and are often the most practical and cost-
effective solution for wastewater treatment and disposal in small rural and remote
communities, where municipally/centrally managed systems may be costly to build and
maintain. Septic tank is most commonly used. This is basically a holding tank where
natural bacterial action decomposes human waste products into environmentally
acceptable components - the major end-components being water, mixed with some other
components that are not readily consumed by the bacterial action, gases, and undigested
solids. The treated effluent percolates in soil and recharges ground water in the local area.
Approximately 18 million housing units or 25% of all housing units in US manage their
wastewaters using onsite treatment and disposal systems [3]. It has been estimated that
324

only 32% of the total land area in US has soil suitable for conventional onsite systems.
While many of the onsite treatment systems have been designed to take full advantage of
the receiving soil’s ability to treat/assimilate effluent constituents, a review of literature
reveals isolated instances of installation of the dispersal systems on lands that were not
suitable for such systems. Such practices coupled with lack of knowledge at the
individual household level for efficient operation and maintenance of these systems, have
resulted in contamination of wells or nutrient enrichment of lakes especially in the areas
where there was pressure for development. As such, onsite systems have often been
plagued by poor public acceptance and considered temporary method(s) for dealing with
wastewater until the real sewer is constructed, for no fault of the onsite technology.
A review of literature suggests that onsite systems now include a number of
alternatives that surpass the conventional septic tank and drain field systems in their
ability to treat wastewaters. Alternative onsite processes include: dual septic tanks,
intermittent sand filters, recirculating filters, peat filters, extended aeration package
plants, fixed film package plants, denitrification unit preceded by a package aerobic
treatment unit, small wetland systems, and/or disinfection chambers. Leach fields,
soakage trenches, spray irrigation systems, evapo-transpiration beds, and evapo-
transpiration seepage systems have been normally used alongside the treatment units as
soakage systems. Other alternatives include a "mound" system where a suitable soil is
placed above the unsuitable soil, followed by installation of a pragmatic onsite system [4].
The issue of the EPA 2002 ‘Onsite Wastewater Treatment Systems Manual’, as a
supplement to the 1980 design manual, provides a useful resource in supporting the use of
modern technology and methods for installing and maintaining these pre-treatment and
land application systems. Similar protocols have been incorporated following a six-year
period of joint standards development by Australia and New Zealand. The result has been
the introduction of a non-prescriptive approach to design in the AS/NZS 1547:2000 for
‘Onsite Domestic Wastewater Management’.
It has been reported that where onsite systems are managed by a professional,
systems do not fail. Periodic inspection results in any maintenance that is needed being
done in a timely fashion, and also rids the owner of worry that if the system is no longer
working they have to spend a large sum of money to replace them. While it is generally
desired that owners of the onsite systems have a management contract, there has not been
a rigorous procedure for assuring that maintenance of systems is being done. Often times
after a couple of years, owners find that their systems are working and they drop the
maintenance contract. Successful programs of the future should be based upon
performance concepts and should incorporate management programs that provide regular
monitoring and maintenance for these systems. Several State universities in US have set
up field based training centers for raising the educational and practical skills of
practitioners. Education and training of all practicing professionals followed by
certification and licensing programs in future will enhance the output from the onsite
systems.
 325

2.2. Decentralized Treatment

An intermediate system, based on the decentralized or small scale concept, is receiving
attention because of perceived numerous advantages over the other two systems. This
system serves a cluster of buildings grouped in a specified area. Typically a decentralized
system involves treatment of low maintenance requirements, a collection system and a
process for dispersing treated effluent usually through the soil and ground water recharge.
Decentralized systems may incorporate onsite systems as a part of a managed cluster. The
wastewater from each dwelling or business flows into its own interceptor (septic tank).
From this tank, the effluent is able to travel through small diameter, therefore less
expensive, collection pipes (could even be pressure sewers served by grinder pumps at
individual buildings). These pipes are buried at a shallower depth than full sewers and run
relatively short distances to smaller, less maintenance-intensive treatment and disposal
units. These units often use soil absorption fields or effluent recycling rather than
discharging the treated wastewater into surface waters. Decentralized systems can well be
used to take some of the load off centralized wastewater treatment plants by ‘scalping’
wastewater off the sewer mains in the vicinity of parks or other green spaces to recycle
nutrients and the water load. It may be noted that since the final receiving agency in this
case is the soil, treated effluent criteria do not have to be as stringent as in the case of
centralized systems because the ultimate goal here is to make sure that the effluent does
not pose risk to ground water reserve after getting through the soil.
The concept of decentralized system fills the gap between onsite systems and the
conventional centralized system. This approach results in: (a) less environmental
disturbances as the smaller collection pipes are installed at shallower depths that can be
more flexibly routed; (b) encourages the flows at any point to remain small, implying less
environmental damage from any mishap; (c) allows different management strategies to be
employed in various parts of the service area, responding in the most financially efficient
and environmentally responsible manner to each subset of circumstances; (d) encourages
cost effective recovery and reuse of potentially useful substances and nutrients in
wastewaters and (e) encourages industrial wastewater generators to implement their own
in situ treatment methods specific to their wastewater characteristics and reuse
opportunities; (f) allows wastewater management to be broken down to the
neighbourhood level and to serve disaggregates of large urban areas, resulting in
community scale and low cost treatment facilities ranging from a simple septic tank to
modular and compact waste treatment plant, waste stabilization pond, constructed
wetlands, algal ponds, maturation ponds, disinfection units followed by subsoil waste
disposal systems, etc. In the decentralized system - design strategy revolves around to
determine how close to the source of generation it is practical to address treatment and
disposal. This is guided by how the wastewater could be used in a beneficial manner.
Other considerations may include topography, soil conditions, development densities, and
type of land use.
326

3 Decentralized Systems in Urban Areas and Developed Country

Environment
Decentralized wastewater systems have been working satisfactorily around many parts of
the world for up to a population level of 50,000. In 1997 the town of Pegram having a
population of 2000 people, several businesses, bank, and restaurants faced the problem of
failing septic tanks and drain fields that were used for sewage treatment and disposal.
The town leaders initially looked into installing a centralized system to collect and treat
wastewaters and dispose it of in Harpeth River located 10 miles away west of Nashville,
Tennessee. However, not only the costs of sewerage were prohibitive but the plan did not
meet community’s approval that was actively working to protect the local environment
and did not want the treated effluent discharged into the river. Decentralized system using
new watertight septic tanks at each home and business and a watertight collection system
running to a sand-gravel filter treatment, and effluent disposal by subsurface drip
irrigation in a nearby farm pasture was the final choice made and has been working
effectively [5]. Other typical example is the mobile Alabama where central wastewater
authority is actively identifying locations where wastewater could be treated in
decentralized fashion using packed bed filter and then soaked in soil via subsurface drip
irrigation [6].

4 Decentralized Systems in Semi-Urban Areas and Developed Country

Environment
Semi-urban areas in developing countries are characterized by a mixture of land uses
where settlements are generally inhabited by communities of different economic status.
Many industries locate at the edge of the city because the land is cheap and is not
subjected to stringent developmental controls. The infrastructural facilities that are
provided are often inadequate. Majority of settlements in peri-urban areas, particularly
those inhabited by poorer communities, do not have access to adequate water supply and
sanitation facilities often because these communities have ‘poor political contacts’ and
hence given low priority in allocation of resources. In many cases, wastewater is
discharged locally into open ground or vacant plots, creating foul–smelling stagnant
pools. This leads to widespread pollution of surface and ground water and deterioration in
environmental health conditions. At the same time, increasing competition for limited
water resources results in farming communities in these areas to use untreated wastewater
for irrigation and aquaculture. There are potentially serious health consequences for both
those who work, often bare footed, in agriculture and aquaculture and also those who
consume produce which is irrigated with untreated wastewaters. In these situations,
decentralized systems can offer pragmatic solution as these can be designed not only to
treat wastewater locally in low cost units but also encourage reuse of effluents to increase
local agricultural productivity resulting in increased revenue for local producers who then
can be motivated to pay for the improved services.
 327

Nhapi [7] demonstrated how the decentralized treatment concept can be beneficially
used in Zimbabwe conditions to treat and dispose combined or separated wastewater
streams. The less concentrated wastewaters are treated by natural treatment methods like
algal ponds or constructed wetlands with harvesting of protein biomass, and the
concentrated wastewaters are treated in anaerobic ponds followed by disinfection in
maturation ponds and then reused for local agriculture or pasture irrigation or
aquaculture. Sumare City in the State of Sao Paolo, Brazil, has successfully used
decentralized systems comprising of upward flow anaerobic filters, baffled reactors, and
upward flow anaerobic sludge blanket reactors to remove up to 90% of organic load from
its domestic wastewaters [8]. In Khulna, Bangladesh, waste stabilization ponds have been
integrated with pisci-culture (fish farming), where it is a source of income generation for
the local people. Community based groups are responsible for operating and maintaining
these ponds and the local city council is responsible for the management side. Benefits of
the use of decentralized technology have been demonstrated through researches carried
out in Malaysia too but these systems have yet to catch up in the country because people
are still not concerned about the shortage of water resource as Malaysia is still considered
as a water-rich country [9].

5 Public Acceptance of Decentralized Wastewater Treatment

In New Zealand (NZ) all natural and physical resources are managed through a single
piece of legislation, Resource Management Act (RMA), 1991. The Act stresses an
integrated approach for all the resources with the goal of sustainable management. One of
the underlying principles of the RMA is that its decision making process is best left to
those who are directly affected by the results of those decisions. RMA therefore expects
the local community to tell their local councils what they value about their environment,
so that the councils can look after them in the manner they like. Approximately 14% of
the NZ population consists of indigenous (Maori) people. Maori regard water as a
treasure left by ancestors for sustaining use of their descendants. This concept fits well
with the intent of RMA that promotes sustainable use and management of natural
resources. Accordingly, RMA requires resource managers to explicitly take into account
Maori views, culture and traditions on how to manage this important resource.
Maori believe that natural waters have spiritual life force and that’s why the water in
rivers, lakes, ponds, sea, harbour, estuary etc, can support living species. It is believed
that the spiritual life force can be easily harmed by artificial components, such as
chemicals. Maori also believe that addition of chemical(s) would disturb the balance in
natural waters, and the water would then be not able to support living species and this
would adversely affect the food chain. According to Maori culture and values all direct
discharges of wastewaters, whether treated or untreated, should be prohibited into
waterways. Therefore the practice of discharging effluents into rivers, seas, estuaries, etc
is not acceptable to Maori community, particularly where the water is used for traditional
food gathering, e.g. fishing, etc. On the other hand, Maori believe that the earth is the
328

provider of food and shelter. Maori view earth as mother earth, which is saviour. Maori
believe that mother earth can accept all our sins and has tremendous power of
(ritualistically) purifying wastewaters. Accordingly, wastewaters, if disposed in water,
must be routed through land, that has tremendous power of treating wastewaters. Many of
the local bodies in NZ have responded positively to Maori cultural beliefs to discharge
effluent either into water following extensive development of wetland sewage treatment
systems, or disposal directly into soil via seepage.

6 Decentralized Systems Offer Flexibility

So, how does a community decide which management approach is right for its wastewater
treatment? When town leaders face having to plan for wastewater treatment, the first
choice usually is to build a centralized collection and treatment facility. Given the obvious
strengths and potential of the decentralized approach, why is it not more often
implemented by planners and wastewater management agencies? This resistance against
decentralized wastewater management systems has many roots: Institutions involved in
the wastewater sector prefer conventional systems for which they have well established
design standards and operating procedures. Furthermore by selecting familiar solutions
they feel much more comfortable implementing their interventions, given the fact that
many regulations and policies hinder innovative new approaches. Also, there is a general
perception on the part of stakeholders (planners, engineers, and users) that non-
conventional (decentralized) systems offer sub-quality service, which clearly shows that
there is a lack of knowledge for these technologies.
Cost has always been a primary consideration in deciding among wastewater
treatment options. Costs include the money needed to install the system and the annual
cost to operate and maintain it. During the 1970s, 1980s and early 1990s, the federal or
state governments provided direct funding to help build wastewater treatment facilities.
This money more often made its way to larger municipalities, and many smaller towns
never received any of these funds. Consequently, wastewater management problems were
never resolved in many small communities. Today, direct funding to communities is
nearly nonexistent. Communities now must depend on low or no interest source of
funding for installing, repairing, and upgrading wastewater systems. It is argued that while
urban and suburban areas with high population densities (more than three to four
dwellings per acre) would probably be better served by centralized wastewater collection
and treatment, this technology is definitely not the right answer for small towns and rural
and sub-urban areas because: population may be too spread out to make centralized
system cost effective; also this option may not necessarily befit their socio-cultural needs,
and/or not encourage the flexibility of reuse of effluents locally to increase agricultural
productivity resulting in increased revenue for the community [10].
 329

7 What is Needed to Make Decentralized Technology Competitive?

It is obvious that a holistic approach must be taken to offer a sustainable and financially
affordable method of wastewater management. There is never a universal solution to such
problems, but every local situation has to be analyzed, including the financial bearing
capacity of the community, the education status of the people, climatic conditions,
traditions and even religious concerns. Education and continuing information is needed to
bring the local population to the level needed to evaluate alternatives and make proper
decisions.
The main challenge for planners and practitioners not only rests to create awareness
for the community to take informed decision on the appropriate decentralized technology
focusing on improvements in the local environment, but also in making available these
technologies in modular and user friendly state. Further, these should be manufactured
using latest tools, plants and materials under controlled conditions. When mass produced,
the cost for manufacturing such compact plants can be kept at a relatively low level to
offer economy. Educational materials directed to homeowners should explain proper
wastewater disposal and maintenance practices, as well as provide information about the
consequences of system failures. Increased awareness about decentralized systems ought
to help reduce the number of failing systems and the eventual negative effects on ground
and surface water.

8 System Must Be Managed

Management is the key to keeping decentralized treatment systems functioning properly.
Management can encompass planning, design, installation, operation, maintenance, and
monitoring these systems. This involves change of focus of activities, whereby traditional
central agencies take on a different role, focusing on the need for capacity strengthening
to develop new skills to respond to the needs and demands of the communities, thereby
providing technical assistance and coordinating the activities of different stakeholder
groups involved in decentralized wastewater management. Improving skills levels of
practitioners via effective training and information transfer has a significant contribution
to make to achieve the sustainable decentralized wastewater management program. It also
requires that these institutions develop capacities for monitoring and regulation, and put
in place effective systems for enforcing appropriate policies since regular inspection and
maintenance form the basis of any management program.

9 Conclusion
Sustainability considers economic, environmental and social factors in development. For
wastewater treatment, small and decentralized systems provide a better means for
achieving sustainability, compared with centralized collection and treatment system. In
remote and rural areas as also in new urban developments decentralized technology needs
to be practiced to achieve improved sustainability than is currently practiced. Simplified
low cost, modular and compact decentralized plants should be developed using controlled
 330

manufacturing technology to cut costs. Further these systems should be managed by a

team of well qualified and trained persons. Continued effort in research, development and
demonstration at community level is still required for acceptance of this technology.

References

1. G.E. Ho, Technology for Sustainability – the Role of Onsite, Small and Community
Scale Technology, Keynote address 6th Specialist Conference on Small Water and
Wastewater Systems, Perth, 11-13 February, 2004.
2. R. Schertenleib, On the Path to New Strategies in Urban water Management,
EAWAG News No. 48e, Duebendorf, Switzerland, September 2000.
3. P.A. Wilderer and D. Schreff, Decentralized and Centralized Wastewater
Management: A Challenge for Technology Developers, Water Science and
Technology, Vol. 41, No.1, IWA Publishing, pp. 1-8 (2000).
4. C.W. Green, Small Scale Sanitation Technologies, Proceedings of the 6th Specialist
Conference on Small Water and Wastewater Systems, Perth, 11-13 February, 2004.
5. Decentralised Wastewater Treatment, http://www.septic-
info.com/doc/display/12.html, reprinted from Journal of Pipeline, Vol. 11, No. 4
(2000).
6. T. Louden, Management of Onsite wastewater Systems, Michigan State University,
May – June 2001.
7. I. Nhapi, A Frame work for the Decentralised Management of Wastewater in
Zimbabwe, Proceedings of the 6th Specialist Conference on Small Water and
Wastewater Systems, Perth, 11-13 February, 2004.
8. C.A.L. Chernicharo and R.M.G. Machado, Feasibility of tha USAB system for
domestic sewage treatment in developing countries, Water Science and Technology
Vol 38, No 8/9, pp. 325-332 (1998).
9. Z. Ujang and M.R. Salim, Management of small and decentralised wastewater
system: The case of Malaysia, Proceedings of the 6th Specialist Conference on Small
Water and Wastewater Systems, Perth, 11-13 February, 2004.
10. J. Parkinson and K. Taylor, Decentralised Wastewater Management in Peri-urban
Areas in Low-income Countries, Environment and Urbanization, Vol.15, No.1, pp.
75-90 (2003).
 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF WATER MANAGEMENT IN
CROATIA

DRAGUTIN GEREŠ
Croatian Waters, Ulica grada Vukovara 220
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia
and
Faculty of Civil Engineering, University of Osijek
Osijek, 31000, Croatia

Issues related to the concept of sustainability are analyzed in the paper. Water guidelines issued by
the European Union, actually setting the framework for all water related activities, are described.
They are the action plan, instructions and foundations of every reasonable policy of sustainable
development. The water management concept for catchement areas can be regarded as a novel
approach to water management. It is emphasized that water is not a commercial commodity but
rather a heritage that has to be preserved so that civil engineers, and water engineers in particular,
bear a lot of responsible development in this area. Human beings as well as wildlife and ecosystems
need water for survival. Because of climate variability and change, population growth and
development, water scarcity and poor water quality are threatening many regions. In most instances,
scarcity as well as pollution is linked directly to poor water management and missing water
infrastructure. Improved water management requires not only good engineering, but also science-
based analysis, efficient institutions and co-operation among stakeholders.

1 Introduction
The concept of sustainable development of water resources management considers
environmental issues, economic problems and socio-economical implications equally
important. This concept demands that economic actions should not be taken at the cost of
future generations´ freedom to develop (WCED, 1987). Sustainable development
approach to water management is a concept which emphasizes the need to treat long-term
future in a manner similar to the treatment of the present. Sustainable water management
is planned and managed with the aim of achieving present and future goals set by the
society at large, without disturbing ecological, environmental and hydrological integrity.
How can water management be sustainable when the future cannot be forecast with any
level of certainty? We have no positive knowledge about any future impact caused by our
present decisions. Nevertheless, we still have to consider the situation in which the future
generations will be if we develop current water management plans, projects and policies.
Sustainability is closely related to various levels of risk and future uncertainty. Future
development forecasts might be incorrect, thus the need for periodical revisions. The
awareness of the fact that some water management goals will change over time forces us
to consider the flexibility of present planned system. Since sustainability is a combination
of different economic, environmental, ecological, social and physical goals, water
management must definitely include a multi-disciplinary decision-making process.

331
332

The main goals of sustainability in water management can be summarized as follows:

1. On the long-term basis, the quality and quantity of the aquatic resource as an
essential element of life for humans and nature must be guaranteed.
2. The usage of renewable water resources should not surpass their ability to regenerate
themselves.
3. The input of substances in the environment should not surpass the self-purification
capacity of waters.
4. The operating costs of water resource management solutions must be oriented on the
population’s standard of living.
All existing approaches for putting the concept of sustainability into operation serve more
as orientation aids and cannot be implemented as instruments for planning and assessing
concrete measures. The main cause for this is that sustainability describes an ethical
principle which is to guide all future economic activities, rather than a definite condition.
Rules for sustainability can be seen as guard rails. Under these conditions it becomes
obvious that the realization of sustainability can only be achieved by going through a
process of weighting alternatives, that is, by comparing different plans of action using the
same norms.
The complexity of cause and effect in the realm of water resource management, as
well as the demands for transparent and comprehensible decisions in the context of
discussions on the inauguration of sustainability place demands for new ways to prepare
and realize planning processes in the field of water resource management.

1.1. Definition and Significance of Sustainable Management

In 1987, the World Commission on Environment and Development (the Brundtland
Commission), [1], observed that "Humanity has the ability to make development
sustainable - to ensure that it meets the needs of the present without compromising the
future. Similarly, it could be said that sustainable water management is management that
meets current needs without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their
own needs - both for water supplies and for a healthy aquatic environment. You can
delete our sample text and replace it with the text of your own contribution to the
proceedings. However we recommend that you keep an initial version of this file for
reference.
For example, sustainable water management requires approaching the range of water
problems and the variety of types of water bodies (from freshwaters to oceans) in an
integrated way. Recognizing that water management cuts across all uses of water - from
water for drinking and irrigation to aquatic environments that support fishing, tourism and
recreation - planning and interventions must be cross-sectoral. Planning and management
must be predicated on meeting both human needs and the requirements of the aquatic
environment for sustainable supplies of water in adequate quantities and of acceptable
quality. Increasing attention must be placed on demand management as well as supply-
side alternatives [2]. Two main options are available:
 333

1. Improving institutional and financial arrangements that make water services more
tuned to demand, that stimulate conservation and improve cost recovery.
2. Improving integrated planning of water use, and allowing water resources to be
valued properly at the macro- and micro-economic levels, notably by removing open
and hidden subsidies and regulations that distort their market price, prevent
competition and promote wastage.
Both of these options call for actions that are challenging to governments and that will
demand further elaboration and adjustment to local conditions. They are likely to affect a
country's national policies on economics and resource management. They may also shape
the way in which it sets priorities, and organizes local and national decision making, its
civil service, budget, project administration and its educational and research system. Your
manuscript will not be reduced or enlarged when filmed so please ensure that indices and
other small pieces of text are legible.

2 International Conferences Focusing on SDWRM

Several International Conferences have been held in the past ten or more years focusing
on Sustainable development of water management - SDWRM. Here the outcomes of the
four most influential ones are summarised.
Dublin 1992: International Conference on Water and Environment. In January 1992
International Conference on Water and Environment Issues for the 21st Century, was held
in Dublin, Ireland. It served as the preparatory event for the Rio Conference with respect
to water issues. The conference reports sets out recommendations for action at the local,
national and international levels, based on four guiding principles. Current thinking on the
crucial issues in water resources is heavily influenced by the Dublin Principles, which are
[3]:
• Fresh water is a finite, vulnerable and essential resource, which should be managed in
an integrated manner.
• Water development and management should be based on a participatory approach,
involving users, planners and policy-makers at all levels.
• Women play a central role in the provision, management and safeguarding of water.
• Water has an economic value and should be recognized as an economic good, taking
into account affordability and equity criteria.
UN Conference of Environment and Development - Agenda 21 . The Rio Declaration on
Environment and Development, and the Statement of principles for the Sustainable
Management of Forests were adopted by more than 178 Governments at the United
Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED) held in Rio de Janeiro,
Brazil, 3 to 14 June 1992, [4], Agenda 21 is a comprehensive plan of action to be taken
globally, nationally and locally by organizations of the United Nations System,
Governments, and Major Groups in every area in which human impacts on the
environment. The Commission on Sustainable Development (CSD) was created in
December 1992 to ensure effective follow-up of UNCED, to monitor and report on
334

implementation of the agreements at the local, national, regional and international levels.
The full implementation of Agenda 21, the Programme for Further Implementation of
Agenda 21 and the Commitments to the Rio principles, were strongly reaffirmed at the
World Summit on Sustainable Development (WSSD) held in Johannesburg, South Africa
from August 26 to September 4 2002.
The Hague 2000: Second World Water Forum & Ministerial Conference. On 17-22
March 2000, the Second World Water Forum was held in The Hague, Netherlands [6]. In
almost hundred sessions, more than 5700 participants from all over the world discussed
the urgency of the water crisis and debated the steps required to ensure the sufficiency of
clean water for all of us in the future. Privatisation of water–or more precisely, the issue
of public/private partnerships–received a lot of attention during the forum. Water is a
basic human right was another hot topic. The key issues raised in the Second World
Water Forum [7] are:
1. Privatisation: To achieve water security, water must be everybody‘s business but on
the other hand the government monopoly in water management should not be
replaced by a private monopoly.
2. Changing the full cost for water services: Users should in fact be charged the full
cost of the services–with appropriate subsidies made available to the poor.
3. Right to access: Water is not only considered essential for human health, it is also
desperately needed by millions of poor women and men in rural areas for productive
reasons: to grow the family food or generate income. Almost 90 percent of our water
resources are used for agriculture. Right of land and use of water are key
determinates for people‘s potential to break down the poverty trap.
4. Participation: Water can empower people and women in particular, through a
participatory process of water management. Participation implies sharing of power,
democratic participation of citizens in elaborating or implementing water policies and
projects, and in managing water resources.
Bonn 2001: International Conference on Freshwater. In December 2001, International
Conference on Freshwater took place in Bonn, focusing on water as a key to sustainable
development. The Bonn Conference was the major preparatory event in the water field
towards the Johannesburg Summit of 2002. The Conference brought together government
delegates from 118 countries, including 46 ministers, representatives from 47
international organizations and delegates of 73 organizations from major groups and the
civil society.
The conference reviewed the role of water in sustainable development, took stock of
progress in the implementation of Agenda 21 and identified how its implementation can
be improved [8]. It is built on many previous efforts and conferences, which have defined
the challenges, development principles and policies related to water and sustainable
development. There is often a gap between making such policies and putting them into
practice. So the conference focused on practical ideas. The Bonn Keys are listed below
[9]:
 335

1. The first key is to meet the water security needs of the poor.
2. Decentralization is key. The local level is where national policy meets community
needs.
3. The key to better water outreach is new partnerships.
4. The key to long-term harmony with nature and neighbour is cooperative
arrangements at the water basin level, including across waters that touch many
shores. For this reason IWRM is needed to bring all water users to the information
sharing and decision making tables.
5. The essential keys are stronger, better performing governance arrangements.

3 EU Water Framework Directive

For most people in the European Union access to clean water in quite abundant quantities
is taken for granted. Most people do not realise however, that all many human activities
put a burden on water quality and quantity. All polluted water, whether polluted by
households, industry or agriculture, returns back, one way or another, to the environment
and may cause damage to human health or the environment. The Water Framework
Directive - WFD of the European Commission was adopted and finally entered into force
in December 2000 [10, 11]. As opposed to the water protection of the 1990s, the area
covered by this Directive extends to all aquatic systems, surface waters (rivers and lakes),
groundwater and coastal waters. Land eco-systems depending on groundwater are also
included in the protection of the quantity of groundwater. Therefore water resources
should be managed across national boundaries, choosing a co-ordinated approach within
the river catchment areas.
The main target of this Directive is for the "good status" of all waters in the
Community by 2015 whereby there is a differentiation between the ecological and
chemical status of water. The basic thinking behind the term "good ecological status" is
that water can be used by humans as long as the ecological function of the water body is
not significantly impaired. The ecological function is defined by requirements for the
different types of water by the EU. It still has not been specified how to define good
ecological quality and how to carry out the assessment of water. The chemical water
status is to be determined by environmental quality standards for hazardous substances.
Another key point of the Directive is the combination of an emission related
approach with discharge related measures to reduce pollution under the basic obligation
of cost recovery.
The WFD suggests four main fields of action:
1. Development of principles for integrated planning and management of waters.
2. Implementation of regulations concerning the quantitative protection of water
resources.
3. Establishing instruments to control groundwater pollution by non-point sources.
4. Implementing instruments to control groundwater pollution by point sources.
336

4 Sustainable Water Management

Sustainable water management means putting all of the pieces together [12]. Social,
environmental and technical aspects must be considered. Issues of concern include:
providing the forums; reshaping planning processes; coordinating land and water
resources management; recognizing water source and water quality linkages; establishing
protocols for integrated watershed management; addressing institutional challenges;
protecting and restoring natural systems; reformulating existing projects; capturing
society’s views; articulating risk; educating and communicating; uniting technology and
public policy; forming partnerships; and emphasizing preventive measures. The challenge
is to guide water management decision-making into flexible, holistic, and environmentally
sound directions [13, 14, 15]. Water resources professionals must be prepared to offer
credible guidance to those who need it, at the right time, and in a comprehensible form.

4.1. Constraints to be Dealt with

Sustainable water management is conceptually sound. It should certainly be the goal, and
if at all possible, the practice. Conceptualization, however, is easier to accomplish than
implementation. The more comprehensive the management approach, the more tortuous
the path [16, 17, 18]. There are a host of barriers that must be overcome if we are to
successfully engage in truly integrated watershed development and management.
Roadblocks include:
1. The manageability of holistic approaches in a practical sense.
2. Agency, interest group, and political boundaries (boundaries of authority and space).
3. Government, agency, and professional biases and traditions.
4. The lack of effective forums for assembling and retaining stakeholders.
5. The narrow focus, lack of implementation capability, poor public involvement, and
limited coordination attributes of many water resources planning and management
processes.
6. The separation of land and water management, water quantity and water quality
management, surface water and groundwater management, and other direct linkage
actions.
7. Poor coordination and/or collaboration among state and local water-related agencies.
States tend to view water management from a macro scale perspective, while local
governments focus on issues such as storm drainage and wastewater treatment.
8. The gaps in scientific knowledge related to ecosystem functions.
9. Limited ability to value environmental systems on monetary or other scales.
10. The public's perception of risk as opposed to the reality of risk associated with water
management options; Suspicion regarding the formation of partnerships.
11. Poor communications links among planners, managers, stakeholders and others.
 337

5 The Role of Science and Experts in Developing Sustainable Water

Management
Information transfer and education are partners. Informing the public, decision-making
bodies, and others begins with their education as children. The better informed on water-
related issues our citizens are, the more likely they are to demand quality decisions by
their elected representatives. Decisions are based on information [19]. Furthermore, the
better informed the decision maker, the more likely he/she is to make good choices. And
college courses and curricula dealing with water and environmental management should
be expanded to include their total dimensions - legal, social, political, technical, and
environmental.
In addition to the solution of the institutional status and the provision of a stable funding,
to be able to fulfil the social role of water management means that it is necessary to
ensure the inclusion of adequate professional/scientific foundation, which consists of the
three segments:
• Development of data base and establishment of water management information
system.
• Research, studies and project documentation.
• Staff training for water management purposes.
Water management is a very expensive long-term activity, which necessitates quality
research and studies in the first implementation stage of water management plans. A
multi-disciplinary approach is a significant requirement of contemporary efforts in the
field of water management [20]. The speed of changes is much greater than the length of a
person's active life, which implies the need for permanent on-the-job education, so that
necessary knowledge can be gained and optimum solutions produced.
The implementation of the policy of sustainable use of water resources, water protection
and protection from adverse effects of water opens up a number of problems which
cannot be solved without significant activities of researchers in the field of hydraulic
engineering, or specialists in various other scientific disciplines, with the common goal of
achieving research objectives such as:
1. Improvement of measures and development of technologies to produce best possible
effects in water use and protection.
2. Improvement of flood and drought management measures.
3. Improvement and development of wastewater treatment and reuse technologies.
4. Water redistribution and transport within river basins for optimum water use, under
conditions of preservation of natural ecosystems and other space values.
5. Development of agriculture under water saving conditions and reduction of surface
waters, groundwater and soil contamination.
6. Rational groundwater use.
7. Improvement of water resource management system at different levels.
338

8. Rational, sustainable use of water resources and avoidance of potential conflicts of

interests and competences over water resources.
9. Rehabilitation of endangered environment, and thus also water and ecosystems.
There are significant differences among countries with regards to the achieved levels of
research, knowledge and technologies which should support and facilitate optimum
solution to sustainable use of water resources. Positive results of international cooperation
at the level of river basins, regions or international organizations are evident, and are also
catalysts for new international projects [20]. Each segment of planning and water
management presents a challenge to researchers due to the complexity of phenomena
which stem from interaction between natural processes and human activity in the water
sector. The following research is particularly significant for integrated water management:
1. Application of modern technologies and facilities in the processes of measurement,
data collection and processing, planning, management and decision-making. The
main objective of research is the modelling of processes in the simplest, most
accessible manner possible.
2. Improvement of forecasting models, in particular with regards to the integration of
stochastic phenomena and processes. Knowledge and assessment of potential risks in
the water sector are relevant for decision-making.
3. Integration of research of surface water and groundwater quality, particularly from
the standpoint of human impact.
4. Improvement of methods and procedures of control, monitoring of processes and
environmental impact assessment of water management activities.
5. Determination of environmental protection indicators, and thus also of water quality
and aquatic ecosystem, i.e. limit values of sustainable water use.
6. Exploration of river processes, erosion, deposit flow and sedimentation in reservoirs,
and deposit management.
7. Improvement of river basin management methods, starting from physical and socio-
economic limitations.
It can be concluded that without research, i.e. formed scientific and expert teams,
technical equipment, developed information systems, application of modern technologies
and continuous investment and funding of scientific potentials and scientific institutions,
the basic goals of sustainable water resource development policy cannot be achieved.

6 Conclusion
Integrated water management is the paradigm for the 21st century. The true spatial,
environmental and institutional, dimensions of problems must be recognized, and they
must be dealt with accordingly. The status of water management is the result of numerous
factors active during a longer time period. The future requires taking numerous concrete
steps in measure systems, which should ensure improvement of institutional and financial
status of water management. Integrated water resource management sets new objectives,
principles and standards for policy making and the necessary environment for its
implementation. Global and international conventions, especially the EU Water
 339

Framework Directive, represent relevant documents for water management activities.

Introduction of a new policy requires significant changes in the current practice of
planning and water management, institutional organization, legislation, funding, etc.
There is a necessity of strengthening expert and scientific foundations of water
management and integration of institutions in charge of data collection, analysis,
planning, design and water management development and operation. Based on the basic
goals of holistic approach to water resource management, relevant preconditions for its
implementation are defined, with particular emphasis on the roles of scientific research,
strengthening of the information communication technology - ICT support,
comprehensive application of new technologies and international cooperation on the
activities of implementation of integrated water management policy. Water management
issues are presently solved by application of a systematic approach. The distribution of
water resources is spatially and temporally very uneven; the available water is
increasingly a limiting factor in socio-economic development, and thus a relevant factor
in politics as well. Freshwater demands are constantly increasing. Water should,
therefore, be continuously evaluated and preserved by appropriate management. Joint
actions at the local, national and global levels can ensure sustainable development, with
the imperative of water resource management in a sustainable manner.

References

1. WCED - World Commission on Environment and Development, Our Common

Future. Oxford University Press (1987).
2. D. Gereš, Upravljanje potražnjom vode. Građevinar 55 (2003) 6, 329 -338 (2003).
3. ICWE - International Conference on Water and the Environment, Development
Issues for the 21-st Century, January 26-31, 1992, Dublin, ICWE Sec. and WMO,
Switzerland (1992).
4. UNCED - UN Conference of Environment and Development – AGENDA 21
Protection of the Quality and Supply of Freshwater Resources, Application of
Integrated Approches to the Development, Management and Use Water Resources.
UN Geneve (1992).
5. World Summit on Sustainable Development - WSSD
http://www.worldsummit2002.org./ (2002).
6. SWWF - Ministerial Declaration of The Hague on Water Security in the 21st Century.
Second World Water Forum & Ministerial Conference, Hague, 17-22 March. On the
web: www.worldwaterforum.net (2000).
7. World Water Council, World Water Vision (Making Water Everybody’s Business,
Earthscan Publications, London (2000).
8. ICFW - Bonn Recommendations for Action. International Conference on Fresh
Water, Bonn, 3-7 December. On the web: www.water-2001.de (2001).
9. ICFW - The Bonn Keys. International Conference on Fresh Water, Bonn, 3-7
December. On the web: www.water-2001.de (2001).
 340

10. EU - Directive 2000/60/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23

October 2000 establishing a Framework for Community Action in the Field of Water
Policy. Official Journal L 327, 22.12.2000 P.0001 (2000).
11. EC - Water Quality in EU Introduction to the new EU Water Framework Directive.
On the web: http://europa.eu.int/comm/environment/water/water-
framework/overview.html (2000).
12. D. Gereš, Integralno upravljanje vodama, Građevinar, 47, 7, 391-396 (1995.)..
13. R.E. Deyle, Integrated Water Management: Contending With Garbage Can Decision
making In Organized Anarchies, Water Resources Bulletin, American Water
Resources Association, Vol. 31, No. 3, June 1995, pp. 387-398 (1995).
14. M. Lundin, Assessment of the Environmental Sustainability of Urban Water Systems.
Department of Technical Environmental Planning, Chalmers University of
Technology, Göteborg, Sweden (1995).
15. I. Serageldin, Water Resources Management: A new Policy for a Sustainable Future.
Water Resources Development, 11(3):221-231 (1995).
16. E. Smeets and R. Weterings, Environmental Indicators: Typology and Overview.
European Environment Agency, Technical Report No 25, Copenhagen (1999).
17. UNESCO - Susatainability Criteria for Water Resources Systems. Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, UK (1999).
18. F.B. Weigert and C.E.E. Steinberg, Sustainable development-assessment of water
resource management measures. Water Science and Technology, Vol. 46 No 6-7, pp.
55-62 (2002).
19. S.J. Keith, Science/Facts Versus Perception in the PublicDecision-Making Process,
Ground Water, Vol. 24, No. 3, May-June 1986.
20. D. Gereš, Održivi razvoj vodnog gospodarstva. Zbornik radova Sabora hrvatskih
raditelja: Graditelji – nositelji razvojnih projekata Republike Hrvatske. Cavtat, 22.-
24. 4. 2004.
 QUANTITY AND QUALITY CHANGES OF WATER RESOURCES ON
THE LANDSLIDES OF ‘DANUBE TYPE’

ZORANA ZRNIĆ †
Department of Water Management, Faculty of Agriculture,
University of Novi Sad, Trg Dositeja Obradovica 8
Novi Sad, Serbia

MILICA STOJILJKOVIĆ
Department of Water Management, Faculty of Agriculture,
University of Novi Sad, Trg Dositeja Obradovica 8,
Novi Sad, Serbia

DRAGICA STOJILJKOVIĆ
Department of Water Management, Faculty of Agriculture,University of Novi Sad
Novi Sad, Serbia

Territory of the northern slopes of Fruska Gora has characterised with unstable slopes with intensively
moving after intensive rainy periods or under anthropogenic influence. Terrain encircles urban,
industrial, and rural surfaces. It is in the zone of gradual protection of the National Park ‘Fruska Gora’.
Technical methods in protection of natural resources could not been directly recommended. Because of
the complexes hydrogeological processes and mutual relation of natural and anthropogenic factors of
risk, it is very hard to value even if their positive influence on stability of slopes. In that case, the
stationary observations of quantity and quality regime had been set on the paleolandslide ‘Sremski
Karlovci’, which is situated on the watershed of Strazilovo stream. Measuring has been doing monthly
in 16 spots (springs and artesian wells). For now, it has been determined seasonal periodic with little
amplitudes of releasing water. Water was not respond with standards for water supplying because of
high contents of ammonia, iron, manganese, and boron. These components are characteristic for waters
from turbidite and pliocenic aquifers. On the observed spots in the bottom of the landslides,
concentrations are higher than relating concentrations over the edge. In some shallow wells, even hard
metals have shown, which indicators of pollution from surface are. We had foreseen that the
experiments should last three years. This is the first year of monitoring.

1 Introduction
Researching terrain encircles surface of 65 km2 in the watershed of Esikovac stream on the
paleolandslides Sremski Karlovci. Upper part of the spring is in the zone of Eco-park
Fruska Gora, and lower part of Esikovac stream flows through Sremski Karlovci and inflow
into branch of the river Danube. This part also belongs to the Eco Park Fruska Gora as the
native wetland.

†
Work partially supported by grant 2-4570.5 of the Swiss National Science Foundation.

341
342

2 Methods and materials

In the aim of saving the ambient whole of Sremski Karlovci, reconstruction and restorations
of existing public wells and springs are necessary. During the last year, monitoring of
quantity and quality regime of spring water on the paleolandslide Sremski Karlovci have
been organized, as the base for the project of reconstruction, which should be done. The
existing documentation were used for researching: interpreter for the basic geology map,
paper of Novi Sad, in proportion of 1:100000 [1], engineer-geology researching needs for
the general regulatory plan of community Sremski Karlovci, as result of bacteriology and
chemistry frequent control of spring waters corrections. Experiment has been set as part of
M.Sc. Thesis from the student of environment in The Faculty of Agriculture in Novi Sad.
Locations of springs and common wells had chosen according followed criteria:
• Regional distribution.
• Vertical distribution.
• Vertical “artesian” wells (different depth).
Monitoring encircles 16 locations. In the meantime, one public well has aborted. In
continue, monitoring encircle 15 spots. Well capacity and temperature have being measured
one time in month, and short analysis 4 times per year. Laboratory researches of water
sampler include the basic physical parameters: color, odor, taste, stirrness and hardness.
Chemical analysis includes essences anions and cations, microelements, hard metals,
hazard substances of anthropogenic source, so that is totally 44 parameters. Obtained
results, until now, are not sufficient for applying statistical methods on it.

3 Researching results
Formed accumulations of groundwater in the watershed of Esikovac stream are under
dominated influence of geologic basis and engineer- geologic processes alongside right
Danube slopes. According to interpreter for the basic geology card [1], watershed of
Esikovac stream were built up of sedimentary rocks from Triassic, Cretaceous, Miocene
and Pliocene time period. Aeolian sedimentary loess from quaternary time period is
widespread on the surface of terrain and over covers all older rocks with depth in range of
1,00-20,00 m.

3.1. Triassic
It spreads over the wide area outside watershed of Esikovac stream. It shows with
dolomites and sill filled limestone, which are tectonic disturbed. On the terrain, it detects in
the form of horst.

3.2. Upper cretaceous

It has been showing in facials of sandstones, conglomerates, and shales with cyclic
changing which have been characteristic for flysch. These sediments are widespread over
 343

the upper part of watershed of Esikovac stream. There are large series with tectonic
deformations and general fall toward northeast and north, relatively to Sremski Karlovci
and Danube dislocations.

3.3. Miocene sediments

They spread over the lake shallow water facies with coal band. These are showing with
conglomerates, sandstones, clays, and shales. Marine Miocene is regional divided on north
slopes of Fruska Gora and transgressively lays over the older formations. They reformatted
a little bit and fell over north and northeast. In the watershed of Esikovac stream, marine
Miocene is present with mudstones and mudstones clays.

3.4. Pliocene sediments

Pliocene sediments have detected in the lower part of watershed, relatively alongside
Danube dislocation. They are bending over to north and northeast. They are in tectonic
contact with older sediments. In vertical profile sandstones clays, coal clays, and coal band
have been changing alternatively. Gradually they cross into River Lake and torrential
sediments of lower Pleistocene. They have fallen toward regional erosion basis of the river
Danube.

3.5. Quaternary sediments

They are widespread over the surface of terrain in the watershed. They had detected in
sandstone clays and sands in bottom layers, with depth fewer than 30 m. Three loess strata
overlay continual and every of them begin with terrigenous gravel and sands in the bottom
layer, than goes aquatic loess and continental loess.
Landslides alongside right bank of the river Danube appeared because of the slopes of
layers and exchanging of sand-clays sediments. Slopes moving is seasonal and per annual.
Sremski Karlovci situate on one big landslide that layers moves in intensive increase from
time to time. Sediments caught by sliding are sediments of quaternary period and part of
sediments from Pliocene up to decomposition bark. Sliding area overspread under alluvial
sediments in riverbed (under 100 m from right bank), and depth is in the range of 5- 40 m.
Local landslides expressed after spring snow melting, moreover rainy years or intensive
precipitation.

4 Monitoring of quantity and quality regime of water resources

On the terrain of paleolandslide Sremski Karlovci had not been set new observation
network of artesian wells and captured springs. Monitoring had organized on 16 existing
water screen areas as follow: four captured springs and twelve artesian wells (Figure 1).
Captures had been built up in XVIII century (later they were only reconstructed). Water had
distributed with pipes toward urban part of Sremski Karlovci. These captures show the
beginning of water supplying town. More street artesian wells situated in the lower part of
344

landslide had been born during XX century. Today, there are springs for general water
supplying and water supplying network for central water supplying. However, as the
integral part of ambient Sremski Karlovci these springs and street artesian wells are still in
use and inhabitants take care for them.

4.1. Spring quality regime

Monitoring has been doing in equal monthly intervals. Spring flow, water temperature, and
air temperature is measured every month. Monitoring planned to last for the 25-30 months,
with aim for getting time series, which could be statistically prepared. For the period of 8
months, it was consolidated follow (Figure 1):
• Spring No.1. “Mutica” has the changing water capacity and varies from 0.286 l/s up to
0.45l/s, and its outflow is in direct connection with precipitation regime. After
intensive gain of precipitations or snow melting, water from this spring gain muddy.
Water temperature varies in the range of 12.5ºC up to 16ºC, (water is divide with pipes
from water capture to discharge point), because of the influence of temperature regime
of air and land.

Figure 1. Regional map of Sremski Karlovci with monitoring locations.

 345

• Spring No.13. In Micurinova Street is very close to capture. Its capacity varies from
0.077 l/s up to 0.08 l/s. just in July 2004. It has been measured the capacity of 0.11 l/s.
water temperature varies from 15ºC up to 16.8ºC. This capture has one more water
divide (location 14) with constant water discharge of 0.016 l/s, so than total water
capacity of this captured spring is 0.14 l/s.
• Spring No.15. “Doka” is located outside urban area in upper zone of unstable slope. Its
capacity varies in the range of 0.03 l/s up to 0.83 l/s, and water temperature in the
range of 12ºC up to 16ºC. Variety of the regime is in connection with type of spring in
the landslide body (Figure 2).
• Spring No.16 “Devojacki izvor” situated on the road to Novi Sad, in exit of Sremski
Karlovci and discharges on the spot where it had captured with capacity from 0.50 up
to 0.55 l/s, and water temperature varies from 13ºC to 14.5ºC.

Figure 2. Spring in the landslide body.

346

All springs are mostly upward, with low catchments area, shorter staying of infiltrated
precipitations in water permeability geologic area. They discharge on contact of
impermeable Pliocene or Pleistocene sediments and conglomerates and sandstones from
flysch series. Only spring “Doka” represents typical spring in body of landslide [2].

4.2. Artesian well quality regime

Monitoring has been doing in equal monthly intervals on 10 locations. There are bore wells
with different radius of well construction and depth. Sand layers had captured on depth
from 30, 60, and 100 m. Depth of the layers varies from 5 to 10 m. These layers are bended
to north and northeast. Sandy layers located on different depth under 60 m are disturbed
and located in central or lower parts of paleolandslides “Sremski Karlovci” (locations 5, 6)
piezometric level of aquifer is bigger according to layer depth. Well capacity even
depended upon construction radius. Discharge regime are with high amplitudes in
shallower wells, and constant in wells which are collecting water from undisturbed sandy
layers (Pliocene) on depth over 100 m (locations 3, 10). Capacity of artesian wells varies in
the range of 0.025 l/s to 0.37 l/s. water temperature of shallower artesian wells varies from
13ºC to 18ºC, and in deep wells from 19ºC to 20.5ºC.
Quantity regime of springs and artesian street wells show on Figure 3.

Q (l/s)
Q (l/s)
0,60 0,18
0,16
0,50
0,14
0,40 0,12
0,10
0,30
0,08
0,20 0,06
0,04
0,10
0,02
0,00 0,00
jul.04 avg.04 sep.04 okt.04 nov.04 dec.04 jan.05

1 3 4 6 8 9 10 16

2 7 11 12 13 14 15

Figure 3. Discharge regime of spring water on the paleolandslide “Sremski Karlovci”.

Quality regime of water resources on given locations include, besides frequent controls
of chemical water structure for little number of parameters (which could be from
anthropogenic factors) complete chemical analysis of 56 parameters that should be doing 4
times per year. According to important anions and cations all waters could be set into group
of hydrocarbonated-calcic waters. TDS varies from 0.352 g/l in spring waters, up to 0.964
g/l in waters from depth over 100.00 m. Hydrocarbon contents varies in range of 0.390g/l-
0.523 g/l, sulphate contents from 0.011 g/l up to 0.041 g/l and chloride from 0.013 g/l to
0.024 g/l. Dominating cations are calcium (0.076-1.122 g/l), magnesium (0.030-0.080 g/l)
and sodium (0.011-0.022 g/l) [3]. All important anions and cations are under MAC
(maximum allowed concentration) in drinking water. Other parameters that have also
 347

detected in groundwater on the area of Sremski Karlovci are contents of ammonia (0.16-
2.30 mg/l), nitrate (0.69-57.66 mg/l) [3]. There are from anthropogenic influence.
Increasing use of fertilizers from farms and changes in land cultivating are the main factors
of water pollution with nitrates. They stay very long in groundwater that could cause
problems in the future. From micro components, it is constantly high value of boron (1.0-
2.80 mg/l). His origin could be anthropogenic and geologic. Figure 4 show a correlation
between contents of boron and calcium, and it could be seen that the boron is genetically
connected with sedimentary rocks from flysch series.

B (mg/l)
3

2,5

1,5

0,5

0
75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130
Ca (mg/l)

Figure 4. Diagram of dependence boron of calcium contents in groundwater on landslides Sremski Karlovci.

5. Conclusion
In the course of frequent control of spring water quality in Sremski Karlovci, seasonal
appearance of nitrogen triads over the MAC from anthropogenic influence had been set.
That caused the need of urgent reconstruction of existing captures. The main goal is making
the base for project of reconstruction and protection of town ambient whole that lays over
the paleolandslide, during the last year monitoring of the quantity and quality regime of
spring waters in Sremski Karlovci.

References

1. M. Ciculic-Trifunovic, The Basic geologic maps 1:100000 with interpreter, paper Novi
Sad (1986).
2. Z. Zrnic, Monitoring of quantity and quality regime of water resources on the
landslides of “Danube type”,M.Sc. Thesis – field experiment, 2004-2005.
3. Central laboratory of NIS- Naftagas, Chemical analysis of water, Novi Sad (2004).
This page intentionally left blank
WATER DESALINATION AND TREATMENT

349
This page intentionally left blank
 MULTI-EFFECT BOILING SYSTEM MEB:
AN ENERGY VIEWPOINT

MOHAMMAD A. DARWISH
Mechanical Engineering Department, Kuwait University
Kuwait

FAISAL AL JUWAYHEL
Mechanical Engineering Department, Kuwait University
Kuwait

HASSAN KAMAL
Mechanical Engineering Department, Kuwait University
Kuwait

All desalting systems consume energy, either thermal or mechanical or both. In the search for energy
efficient desalting systems, it is clear that the reverse osmosis RO desalting system is more efficient
than the widely used multi stage flash MSF desalting system. For seawater in the Gulf area, as an
example, the RO consumes about 5 kWh/m3 of mechanical work, while the MSF desalting units
consume about 4 kWh/m3 pumping energy, beside thermal energy. The thermal energy input to large
MSF units is in the range of 250-300 kJ/kg, and is usually in the form of slightly superheated steam
extracted from steam turbines at about 2-3 bar. The equivalent work of this thermal energy is in the
range of 17 kWh/m3, [1]. The conventional multi-effect boiling MEB desalting system (simply
called MEB here) uses about half of the MSF pumping energy, and almost the same amount of
thermal energy used by the MSF, if both have the same gain ratio. However, recent trend of using
low temperature MEB, (LTME) allows the use of low temperature (in the range of 70°C) steam as
heat source, and consequently of low exergy and low equivalent work. This can bring the LTME
consumed equivalent mechanical energy close to that consumed by the efficient RO system. In this
paper, the conventional multi-effect desalting system is revisited to show that thermal energy input
to low temperature MEB is low, and can bring the equivalent mechanical energy, and thus the
consumed fuel energy to low values close to that used by the seawater reverse osmosis SWRO
desalting system, mechanical energy, and thus the consumed fuel energy to low values close to that
used by the seawater reverse osmosis SWRO desalting system.

1 Introduction
In practice, the efficiency of distillation desalting systems, in term of consumed energy, is
usually measured by some terms defined by:

1.1. Gain Ratio, GR

The gain ratio is D/S, where D is the distillate output and S is the steam supplied to the
desalting system (both have the same units):
D.
GR =
S

351
352

This rating method does not account for the steam enthalpy difference across the desalting
unit, the supply steam quality (temperature and pressure), or the pumping work.

1.2. Performance Ratio, PR

The performance ratio PR is the amount of desalted water produced by condensing 1 kg
of steam at average temperature corresponding to 2330 kJ/kg latent heat:
D 2330 2330 D 2330 GR ,
PR = = = =
( Qd 2330 ) ( Qd D ) ∆h s Sd ∆h s

where Qd is the heat supplied to desalting unit and ∆hs is the enthalpy difference of the
steam across the unit. When steam is supplied as saturated vapor and leaves as saturated
liquid then
Qd = S Ls,
where Ls is the steam latent heat. Than the PR becomes
2330 D 2330
PR = = (GR) .
Ls S Ls

It is more rational to use PR than GR since it counts for the enthalpy drop of the supplied
steam, but still does not count for the steam availability or the mechanical work used by
the pumps.

1.3. Specific Heat Consumption, Qd/D

The specific heat consumption is the heat energy consumed to produce 1 kg distillate:
Qd 2330
qd = = .
D PR
Although the previous three expressions are widely used, they are not really appropriate
to evaluate the performance of the desalination system for two reasons:
1. The pumping energy W(pump) is not accounted for, and
2. The quality (or the availability) of the used thermal energy is not considered.
As an example, the condensation of 1 kg of saturated steam at 1 MPa (Tsat = 180°C ≅ 453
K) gives 2015.3 kJ/kg heat, while at 40 kPa (Tsat = 76°C = 349 K) gives 2319.2 kJ/kg.
Counting only by the amounts of thermal energy, one can conclude that 1 kg of steam at
40 kPa gives more condensation heat than that at 1 MPa. However, this is not true when
the steam quality (pressure and temperature) is considered. The value of the steam is
measured by its ability to produce work. The reversible (maximum) work wr produced by
1 kg of saturated steam at temperature, Ts, and ambient temperature Te = 300 K is:
 353

 T 
w r = Ls  1 - e 
 Ts 

The term wr is called the specific exergy or the availability:

1. For 1 MPa, wr = 2015.3 [1 - (300/453)] = 680.7 kJ/kg.
2. For 40 kPa, wr = 2318.55[1 - (300/349)] = 325.6 kJ/kg.
This clearly shows that the real value of steam at 1 MPa is almost twice that at 40 kPa.
Other meaningful criteria can be considered in the rating of the desalting systems such as:
1. The specific fuel energy: The amount of fuel energy used to produce the required
thermal energy Qd and mechanical energy W(pump) required to produce 1 kg of
distillate.
2. The specific consumed available energy: The available energy Wr of the supplied
steam plus the pumping work W(pump) required to produce 1 kg of distillate.
3. The equivalent specific mechanical energy: The work Wd equivalent to the thermal
energy and the pumping work W(pump) required to produce 1 of kg distillate.
This paper revisits the multi-effect desalting system through examples from operating
units, and presents its main characteristics. The suggested terms used to evaluate the
efficiency of thermal desalting systems (specific consumed fuel, specific consumed
available energy, and specific equivalent work) are applied to evaluate the real
performance of the multi effect desalting system.

2 Conventional Multi Effect Desalting System

The conventional multi effect desalting system, MEB, is the oldest method used to desalt
seawater in large quantities. It has many variants such as forward feed, Figure 1, parallel
feed Figure 2, mixed feed, and backward feed, Figure 3. In the forward feed, both water

Figure 1: Forward feed multi effect boiling with regenerative feed heaters.
354

Figure 2. Parallel feed multi effect desalting unit with no pre-feed heaters.

Figure 3. Backward feed multi effect desalting system using submerged tube evaporators.

feed and heating vapor to the evaporators flow in the same direction; and hence the least
salinity is at the highest temperature in the first effect. In the backward feed system, where
heating vapor and feed flow opposite to each other, is rarely used in desalination since the
first effect has the highest temperature and salinity.
Early MEB units used submerged tube evaporators as the ones shown in Figure 3. In
these evaporators the heating coils are submerged in pool of boiling seawater; and were
known with low heat rates and high scale formation, [2]. Modern MEB units use falling
film evaporators (either horizontal as in Figure 4 or vertical as in Figure 5) and feed
 355

Figure 4. Horizontal falling film tube evaporator.

Figure 5. Falling film vertical tube evaporator.

356

heaters FH between effects as in Figure 1. Parallel feed is used when partial or no feed
heaters are used between the effects. The evaporators can be placed horizontally next to
each other as in Figure 1, or stacked vertically as in Figure 6, [3]. Falling film evaporators
are characterized by their high overall heat transfer coefficients, (the range of 3.5-
kW/m2°C).
In horizontal tube evaporators HTE, the heating vapor flows and condenses inside the
horizontal tubes. The feed is sprayed by nozzles or perforated trays and flows as film
around the outer surface of the tubes, and evaporated by heat transfer across the tube wall
from the condensing vapor, see Figure 7.
In vertical tube evaporators, the feed flows as a film flowing down next to and
concentric with the inside surface of the vertical tubes; while heating vapor is condensed
on the outer surface of the tubes and its condensate flows down.

Figure 6. Multi effect desalting system with evaporators stacked vertically [3].
 357

Figure 7. Typical arrangement of a sieve tray over a tube bundle.

2.1. Simple Analysis of Forward Feed with Feed Heaters

In forward feed shown in Figure 1, cooling water Mc enters an end condenser at tc to
condense Dn (last effect vapor output) and leaves at tn. Part of the pre-treated Mc becomes
feed F, and is heated successively as it flows in the feed heaters from tn to t1 before
entering the first effect. The balance (Mc - F) is rejected back to the sea.
The supplied steam S to the first effect heats the feed F from t1 to boiling temperature
T1, and boils D1 out of F (D1 is the first effect distillate). The steam condensate returns
back to the steam supply source. If the steam enters the first effect as saturated vapor and
leaves as saturated liquid, then:

SLs = FC (T1 - t1 ) + D1 L . (1)

Vapor D1 enters the first feed heater FH1, preheats F from t2 to t1, and then flows as
heating vapor to the second effect. The process is repeated to the last effect. The vapor
formed in the last effect flows to the end condenser to condense. The condensate leaves
and joins the distillate of other effects.
Brine B1 from the first effect enters the second effect as feed, and brine B2 from
effect 2 is fed to effect 3, and so on to the last effect. Brine Bn from the last effect is
rejected to the sea.
The feed to distillate ratio F/D is determined by the maximum allowable salinity Xb
of Bn and feed salinity Xf by:
F Xb . (2)
=
D (X b - X f )

A simplified analysis, [11], for the MEB system is given here by assuming:
1. Equal vapor generated by boiling in each effect, (other than first effecW '.
2. Equal boiling temperature difference ∆T between effects.
358

3. Equal increase ∆t of the feed F in feed heaters, and ∆T = ∆t.

4. Equal specific heat C for the brine and feed.
5. Equal latent heat L and BPE.

Part of D1 (vapor) equals to FC(t1 - t 2 ) L = yF , where ( y = C ∆T ) is condensed in the

L
first FH as it heats F from t2 to t1, and the balance (D1 – yF) enters the second effect to
boil the same amount. Since vapor boiled in each effect, but the first, is the same and
equal to βD, then:
D1 - yF = βD or D1 = yF + βD . (3)
Brine B1 = F - D1 = (1-y) F - βD becomes the feed for the second effect. Its temperature T1
drops to T2, by flashing yB1, (equal to second effect flashed vapor Df2). So, D2 = βD +
yB1. Then:
B2 = B1 - D 2
B2 = B1 - (β D + yB1 )
B2 = B1 (1 - y) - β D
B2 = (1 - y) ( F(1 - y) - β D ) - β D
βD
B2 = (1 - y)2 F -
y
(1 - (1 - y)2 )

and similarly
βD
Bn = (1 - y) n F -
y
(1 - (1 - y) n ) . (4)

Notice that (1 - (1 - y) ) can be approximated by n y 1 - (n -21) y  for y <<1.
n

  
The vapor generated in the first effect, D1 is condensed partially in FH1 and in the second
effect. Part of condensate D1, equal to y D1, flashes by its temperature drops from Tv1 to
Tv2, and enters FH2 by flash-pot in distillate line. So, vapor inlet to FH2 is equal to: D2 +
yD1 = [βD + y (F - D1)] + yD1 = βD + y F, and vapor exit = βD, after condensing yF to
heat F from t3 to t2. So, boiling vapor to each effect, but effect 1, is βD, and generates the
same amount βD by boiling.
Since
D = F - Bn,
then:
βD
D = F (1 - (1 - y) n ) − (1-(1-y)n )
y
.
 βD 
D = (1 - (1 - y) )  F -
n

 y 
 359

F 1 β
= - .
D (1 - (1 - y) ) y
n

β 1 F
= -
y (1 - (1 - y) ) D
n

Since

(1 - (1 - y) ) = n y 1 - (n -21) y  ; βy =

n 1 F
- ,
  (1 - (1 - y) ) D
n

then:

yF 1
β+ = .
D n (1-(n - 1) y 2 )
And this is practically proportional to 1/n.
The gain ratio is determined from:

SL= FC(T1 - t1 ) + D1L

.
SL= FC(T1 - t1 ) + (yF+β D) L
S yF FC (T1 -t1 ) 1 FC (T1 - t1 )
= β+ + ≅ + . (5)
D D DL n DL
D/S is approximated by:
D n
= . (6)
S (1+ n F C (T1 - t1 ) DL )
This shows that the gain ratio is always less than n, but close to it.

3 Typical Conventional MEB Units

Most of the new MEB units are designed with low T1 (TBT), around 65°C, to minimize
the risk of scale formation and corrosion. Since the brine temperature in the last effect Tn
is in the range of 40°C, (T1-Tn) does not allow the use of large number of effects,
(typically 6 to 8), to have reasonable ∆T = (T1 - Tn)/(n - 1) between effects, typically 4°C.
The decrease of ∆T increases the specific heat transfer area ΣA/D. To keep the MEB
system competitive with the MSF, its ΣA/D should be in the same range of a typical MSF
units, 200-300 m2/(kg/s). One of the main merits of the MEB system is its ability to use
low temperature heat source (steam or water as a heat source) since T1 is relatively low.
360

Table 1 shows samples of MEB plants including two low temperature LT plants: the
Sidem 1 plant, [4], uses saturated steam at 70°C and has 12 effects, and the Ashdod plant,
[5] uses hot water at 62.5°C and has 6 effects. The use of relatively large n = 12, as in the
Sidem1 plant, shown in Figure 8, increases significantly the heat transfer surface areas for
low T1 as shown later.

Figure 8. Forward feed of 12 effects similar to Sidem 1 Plant.

However, some designs of high T1, large n, and high gain ratios utilize energy
sources of high temperatures. As an example, Sidem 2 design [6] in table 1 has 5.5 MIGD
capacity with steam supply at 110°C, 16 effects, T1 = 106°C (TBT), parallel feed, and GR
= 12.4. Another example is the Barge unit, [7] shown in Figure 9, has high TBT = 135°C,
and thus allows large number of effects n = 22. It is worth mentioning here that the use of
TBT higher than 110°C is risky as the reliable high temperature additives allow TBT up
to 110°C.
This barge mounted unit consists of two desalting units, the first is 2-stage MVC
(mechanical vapor compression) unit, and the second is 24-effects MEB unit of GR (gain
ratio) = 22.3. High–Pressure steam of 50 bar, and 505°C drives a steam turbine operating
the MVC unit and a generator, which produces power for the pumps of the desalting units
and other barge requirements. The steam exhausted from the turbine is supplied to the
MEB unit. The total nominal plant output of both MVC and MEB units is 5000 m3/d
(57.87 kg/s). No details were given on the product of each desalting unit. However, the
MVC compressor suction flow rate is given as 6.2 m3/s at 128.8°C saturation temperature,
or mass flow rate of 6.2/0.693 = 8.95 kg/s, (0.693 is the vapor specific volume). Since the
MVC has two stages, its MVC product output is estimated by 17.9 kg/s. So, the MEB
output is 39.97 kg/s, and its steam flow rate is 39.97/22.3 = 1.792 kg/s.
 361

Table 1. Examples of conventional multi effect desalting units.

Location, Ashdod, Sidem 1, Eilat, Barge Sidem 2,
[ref.] [5] [4] [5] unit, [7] [6]

THE-
Evaporator Type THE THE THE THE
stacked

No. of effects 6 12 12 24 16

Capacity, (kg/s) 201 139 N/A 50 290

GR 5.7 9.8 10.1 22.3 12.4

Water 2778 kg/s Steam 14.17 kg/s,

Heat source N/A Steam Steam
63-55.4°C 0.31 bar

Feed TDS (g/l) 42 36 N/A 33.5 50

Feed (kg/s) 611 45.6 N/A N/A 1502

TBT, (°C) 50 64 70 – 74 99 106

Minimum T, (°C) 34.5 37.5 N/A N/A 46.6

Ejector steam,
0.25 kg/s at 6.6 bar 0.7 at 8 bar N/A N/A N/A
m (kg/s), P(bar)

Pump energy
2.2 2 N/A N/A N/A
(kWh/m3)

Equivalent energy
9.1 8.14 N/A N/A N/A
(kWh/m3)

Poly-
Treatment Poly-phosphate N/A Anti-scale N/A
phosphate

The Ashdod MEB unit, in Table 1, uses hot water coming out of a power plant
condenser at 62.5°C as heat source, and the TBT=50°C. Vapor is generated from this hot
water by flashing as it enters a flash chamber upstream the first effect. The same idea can
be used to utilize the hot water produced by the phosphoric acid fuel cells (PAFC) at 60-
65°C as heat source to operate MEB system. The 6-effects Ashdod plant, in table 1, has
GR = 5.7 GR, and the12-effects Eilat plant has GR = 10.1, so, as given before the GR is
directly proportional to the number of effects. The use of feed heaters also affects the
362

product output and the gain ratio GR as will be shown later by examples. The Ashdod
plant has To = 50°C, and Tn = 34.5°C (low), and this gives ∆T = 3.1°C for 6 effects, and if
BPE = 1°C, the potential for heat transfer per effect is ∆Te = ∆T – 1 = 2.1°C is real small
and tends to increase the heat transfer area. The heat transfer area of a typical MSF of 6
MIGD is 86,661 m2, and the specific heat transfer area is 275 m2/(kg/s), and for MEB
system to remain competitive with the MSF, the specific heat transfer area should be in
the same range as the MSF system.

Figure 9. Barge mounted combined MEB of 22 effects and 2-effects MVC section [7].

4 Energy Consumed by MEB System

Calculations of plants similar to Ashdod and Sidem MEB plants are used here as
examples to show the main characteristics of the MEB system, and to calculate roughly its
consumed energy, as well as its feed to distillate ratio F/D, cooling water to distillate ratio
 363

Mc/D, and the specific heat transfer areas. Work energy is used for pumping, and is in the
range of half that used by MSF units.

Example 1
Consider a plant similar to the Sidem 12-effect units of 11 feed heaters shown in Figure
8, and use the assumptions of the given simplified analysis to find:
The temperature and salinity distribution, the gain ratio D/S, feed to distillate ratio F/D,
cooling water to distillate ratio Mc/D, and the specific heat transfer area of effects and
feed heaters if the overall heat transfer coefficient Ue(effect) = 3 kW/ m2 °C, and Uf (in
feed heaters and condenser) = 2.6 kWh/m2 °C. The unit given data are: n (number of
effects) = 12, output D = 500 ton/h (139 kg/s), TBT = 65°C, Tn = 38°C, tc = 28°C, t12
(feed temperature at condenser exit) = 35°C, brine and seawater specific heat C = 4
kJ/kg°C, average latent heat L = 2333 kJ/kg, feed salinity Xf = 46 g/kg, and maximum
salinity Xb = 72 g/kg.

Solution:
For n = 12, ∆T = ∆t = (65 - 38)/11 = 2.45°C, then
t1 = tn + (n - 1)∆t = 35 + 11(2.45) = 62°C,
F/D = Xb/(Xb - Xf ) = 72/(72 - 46) = 2.77, F = 139 × 2.77 = 385 kg/s,
y = C ∆T/L = 0.004,
\ >- (1 - y)n] –)' ' NJV'1 '\) NJV

S = D1 + FC(T1 - t1)/L = 13.83 kg/s, D/S = 10.05.

These calculations were used to establish Table 2 by using:

B 1 = F – D1
D2 '\%1
X2 = X1 F/B1
Di '\%i-1
Xi = Xi-1 Bi-1/Bi

To get Mc, D12 should be known (see Table 2):

D12(L) = Mc(4) (35 - 28), Mc = 935.7 kg/s, Mc/D = 6.73.

The heat transfer areas of the effects are calculated by:

Thermal load = UeAe(∆T - BPE). The 1st effect thermal load = SL, and of all other effect
= Db/   ' The area of each feed heater is calculated by F C ∆t = Uf (Af)
(LMTD), and LMTD = ∆t/ln[(Tvi - ti-1)/(Tvi - ti)]. As example for the first feed heater
Tvi = 65 – 1 = 64°C, ∆t = 2.454°C, ti = 62°C, ti-1 = 59.55°C, and LMTD = 3.065°C,
Af1 = 474.36 m2.

The results for each effect are shown in Table 2.

364

Table 2. Streams temperatures, flow rates, and salinity in MEB unit similar to the Sidem plant of 12 effects and
11 feed heaters, and D=139 kg/s (Db vapor generated by boiling, Df vapor generated by flashing from brine, B
brine, X salinity in g/kg)

Effect # Ti ti F Db Df D B X A Af

1 65.00 62.00 385.03 11.85 0.00 11.85 373.18 47.46 7396.8

2 62.55 59.55 373.18 10.23 1.57 11.80 361.37 49.01 5469.6 474.3

3 60.09 57.09 361.37 10.23 1.52 11.75 349.62 50.66 5469.6 474.3

4 57.64 54.64 349.62 10.23 1.47 11.71 337.91 52.41 5469.6 474.3

5 55.18 52.18 337.91 10.23 1.42 11.66 326.26 54.29 5469.6 474.3

6 52.73 49.73 326.26 10.23 1.37 11.61 314.65 56.29 5469.6 474.3

7 50.27 47.27 314.65 10.23 1.32 11.56 303.09 58.44 5469.6 474.3

8 47.82 44.82 303.09 10.23 1.28 11.51 291.58 60.74 5469.6 474.3

9 45.36 42.36 291.58 10.23 1.23 11.46 280.12 63.23 5469.6 474.3

10 42.91 39.91 280.12 10.23 1.18 11.41 268.71 65.91 5469.6 474.3

11 40.45 37.45 268.71 10.23 1.13 11.36 257.34 68.82 5469.6 474.3

12 38.00 35.00 257.34 10.23 1.08 11.32 246.03 71.99 5469.6 474.3

Total 139 67562.4 5217.3

The results show that the total heat transfer area is 72,779 m2, and the specific heat
transfer area A/D is 523.6 m2/(kg/s), which is 90.4% more than that of the typical MSF
unit, where A/D §P2/(kg/s). The high specific heat transfer area of the MEB can be
tolerated due to two reasons: the heat supply here is at lower availability (has lower value)
compared to the heat source for the MSF units; and the MEB unit has 25% more GR than
the MSF, but A/D is still high. The main reason for this high A/D is the low heat transfer
temperature difference in the evaporator ∆T – BPE = 2.45 –1 = 1.45°C due to the large
number of the used effects, n=12.

4.1. Doubling the output same MEB unit by increasing the heating steam
One of the main advantages of the MEB system is its operation flexibility. As an example,
the Sidem plant output can be more than doubled, if it operates as 6 effects only, but the
gain ratio will drop to almost half the original GR as shown in example 2.
 365

Example 2
Assume that the steam supply to the Sidem MEB unit is increased to increase the unit
output as follows: steam is supplied to evaporators 1 (of area A1 = 7396.8 m2) and 2 (of
area A2 = 5469.6 m2) as the first effect, vapor leaving this effect is supplied to evaporators
3 and 4 (of 5469.6 m2 each) as the second effect, and so on to the last 6th effect consisting
of evaporator 11, and 12. Similarly, feed heaters 1 and 2 (of 474.3 m2 each) serve effect
1, and feed heaters 3 and 4 serve effect 2, and so on, but the condenser size should be
enlarged after considering that feed heater 11 as part of the condenser. Also the feed
should be increased to match the distillate increase. Simply, it is operating as two parallel
units and each has 6 effects with its feed heaters as shown in Figure 9. Consider the
overall heat transfer coefficients and the areas are almost the same as in example 1, find
the new steam supply, distillate output, cooling water, and the gain ratio for the same To =
65°C and Tn = 38°C.

Figure 9. Operation of the Sidem forward feed with regenerative heaters, and 12 evaporators as only 6 effects.

Solution:
To = 65°C and Tn = 38°C. The first effect heat transfer area is 7396.8 + 5469.6 = 12866.4
m2. The temperature difference across each effect is (65 - 38)/5 = 5.4°C. The first effect
thermal load SL = U A (∆T - BPE), and S = (3)(12866.4)(5.4 - 1)/2333 = 72.8 kg/s.
366

By assuming the gain ratio = 5.4, then D (to be checked later) = 393.1 kg/s, and
F = 2.77×D = 1090 kg/s. SL = D1L + F(C)(T1 - t1), for T1 = 65°C, t1 = 62°C, S = 72.8
kg/s, F = 1090 kg/s, D1 = 67.1935 kg/s, D1 = yF + βD, y = C∆T/L = 0.00926, βD = 57.1
kg/s.
Check if the heat transfer area Ae2 of the second effect is enough to carry the new
thermal load. The second effect thermal load β D L = U Ae2 (∆T - BPE) = 57.1× (2333) =
3 (Ae2) (5.4 - 1). The required Ae2 = 10092 m2 is slightly lower than the available area of
the two evaporator 2 × 5469.6 = 10939.2 m2. So, evaporators 3 and 4 can do the job of
the second effect in the new arrangement. The calculations are carried as before and the
results are given in Table 3.

Table 3. Calculations of the streams temperature, flow rate, and salinity for the Sidem plant when operated as 6
effects

Effect # Ti ti F Db Df D B X Ae Af

1 65.0 62.0 1090.0 67.19 0.00 67.19 1022.8 49.0 12866.4

2 59.6 56.6 1022.8 57.10 9.47 66.57 956.2 52.4 10092.0 1901.4

3 54.2 51.2 956.2 57.10 8.85 65.95 890.3 56.3 10092.0 1901.4

4 48.8 45.8 890.3 57.10 8.24 65.34 824.9 60.7 10092.0 1901.4

5 43.4 40.4 824.9 57.10 7.64 64.74 760.2 65.9 10092.0 1901.4

6 38.0 35.0 760.2 57.10 7.04 64.14 696.1 72.0 10092.0 1901.4

Total 352.69 41.24 393.94 63326.4 9507.0

The calculations show that the plant output almost tripled, D = 394 kg/s, but the gain
ratio GR decreased from 10.05 to 5.4 (almost half), and the required heat transfer area is
72,833 m2 is almost the same as the available 72,780. The specific area ΣA/D= 185
m2/(kg/C) is only 35% of the 12 effect case, and 33% lower than the reference MSF unit.
The cooling water requirement if tc = 26°C is calculated by: D6 (L) = Mc C (tn - tc). If tc =
26°C, tn = 35°C, and D6=64.14 kg/s, then Mc = 4157 kg/s, and Mc/D = 10.55 kg/s is 56%
more than in the 12-effect case.
The results show that the required heat transfer area of the effects = 63326.4 m2 is
lower than the available effects area of 67562 m2, but the required feed heaters area is
9507 m2, while the available area is 5217 m2 only. There should be no problem in that as
the effect area can do the job of feed heaters in the effects.

4.2. The Effect of top brine temperature on the heat transfer areay

Example 3
Show the effect of low (To - Tn) as in Ashdod plant on the heat transfer specific area, and
compare it with the Sidem1 plant when operates with the same number of effects n = 6 as
 367

Ashdod plant. The Ashdod plant data are: n=6, To = 50°C, Tn = 34.5°C, D = 201 kg/s, F =
611 kg/s, Xf = 42g/kg.

Solution:
∆T = ∆t = (50 - 34.5)/5 = 3.1°C, then t1 = tn + (n - 1)∆t = 32.5 + 5(3.1) = 48°C,
F/D = 611/201 = 3.04, y = C∆T/L = 0.005322, /y =1/[1 - (1 - y)n] – F/D,  = 0.1514,
D = 30.4326 kg/s, D1 = D + yF = 34kg/s, S = D1 + FC(T1 -t1)/L = 36.09 kg/s,
D/S = 5.57. To get Mc, D6 should be known, see Table 4, D6(L) = Mc(4) (32 - 26),
Mc = 3214 kg/s, Mc/D = 16.
Due to the low To = 50°C, the specific area is 323.26 m2/(kg/s), which is almost 75%
more than that of the Sidem plant (185 m2/(kg/s) when operates as 6 effects at To = 65°C.
Also the decrease of Tn to 34.5°C, and even tc = 26°C, Mc/D = 16, which is very high
compared to the Sidem1 plant of 6 effect, and Tn=38°C. Results are shown in Table 4.

Table 4. Streams flow rate, temperatures, and salinity for Ashdod plant and effects and feed heaters calculated
heat transfer surface areas
Effect
Ti ti F Db Df D B X Ae Af
#
1 50 47.5 611.0 33.95 0.00 33.95 577.1 44.5 11284.5 1053.4

2 46.9 44.4 577.1 30.70 3.07 33.77 543.3 47.2 9474.1 1053.4

3 43.8 41.3 543.3 30.70 2.89 33.59 509.7 50.3 9474.1 1053.4

4 40.7 38.2 509.7 30.70 2.71 33.41 476.3 53.9 9474.1 1053.4

5 37.6 35.1 476.3 30.70 2.53 33.23 443.1 57.9 9474.1 1053.4

6 34.5 32 443.1 30.70 2.35 33.06 410.0 62.6 9474.1 1053.4

201.00 58654.9 6320.4

4.3. The effect of using feed heaters on the gain ratio

Example 4
Consider the Sidem plant but with parallel feeding and only 2 feed heaters; one before the
first effect and another before the second effect as shown in Figure 10. The feed is heated
(in the two feed heaters) by outer heat source (usually the steam coming from steam
ejector used to reject the non-condensable gases of flow rate S2). Other plant data are:
TBT = 65°C, Tn = 38°C, t1 (feed to the 1st effect) = 62°C, t2 (feed to the 2nd effect) =
56.2°C, ti (feed to effects 3 to 12) = 35°C, Xf = 46 g/kg and Xb = 72 g/kg.
Find the temperature and salinity distribution, vapor generated by boiling Db, and by
flashing Df in each effect, and D/S, F/D, and Mc/D.
368

Solution:
Mass, salt, and energy balances are made to all effects. The feed flow rate Fi to effect (i),
is calculated to keep Xb of the brine leaving each effect Xi less than 72 g/kg. Since Xf = 46
g/kg. F1/D1 = X1/(X1-Xf), F1 = 2.77 D1, then for the first effect: SL = D1(L) + F1(C)(T1 -
t1), S = 13.8345, D1 = 13.64 kg/s, F1 = 37.8 kg/s, and B1 = 24.16 kg/s. For the second
effect: D1(L) = D2b(L)+F2(C)(T2 - t2), and Df2 = B1(C)∆T/L = 0.1017 kg/kg, Db2 and Df2
are the vapor generated by boiling and flashing in effect 2 respectively. In effect 2, salt in
F2(Xf) + B1(X1) = salt out B2(X2), or F2(Xf) + B1(X1) = (B1 + F2 - D2)(x2). Since Xb1 = Xb2
= Xb, F2/D2 = Xb2/(Xb2 - Xf), and F2=2.77 D2. D1(L)=(D2 - D2f)L + 2.77D2(C)(T2 - t2), and
D2 = (D1 + D2f)/[1+2.77(C)(T2 - t2)/L]. The last equation is generalized to give: Di = (Di-1 +
Dif)/[1 + 2.77 (C)(Ti - ti)/L].
Table 5 gives the temperature and salinity distribution, feed Fi to each effect, and
distillate generated by boiling Dbi, and by flashing Dfi. The results show that D = 137.86
kg/s and total feed F = 383.53 kg/s. The steam supply to the two feed heaters S2 is
calculated by: S2(L) = (F1 + F2) (C)(t2 - 35) + F1(C)(t2 - t1), S2 = 3.1 kg/s, total S = 16.93
kg/s, and D/S = 7.78, and F/D = 2.784.
This example shows that the use of feed heaters increases the GR 29% (from 7.78 to
10.05) compared to the case when no feed heaters were used.

Figure 10. Parallel feed 12-effects desalting system with only feed heaters

Mass, salt, and energy balances are made to all effects. The feed flow rate Fi to effect
(i), is calculated to keep Xb of the brine leaving each effect Xi less than 72 g/kg. Since Xf
= 46 g/kg. F1/D1 = X1/(X1-Xf), F1 = 2.77 D1, then for the first effect: SL = D1(L) +
F1(C)(T1 - t1), S = 13.8345, D1 = 13.64 kg/s, F1 = 37.8 kg/s, and B1 = 24.16 kg/s.
For the second effect: D1(L) = D2b(L)+F2(C)(T2 - t2), and Df2 = B1(C)∆T/L = 0.1017
kg/kg, Db2 and Df2 are the vapor generated by boiling and flashing in effect 2 respectively.
 369

In effect 2, salt in F2(Xf) + B1(X1) = salt out B2(X2), or F2(Xf) + B1(X1) = (B1 + F2 -
D2)(x2). Since Xb1 = Xb2 = Xb, F2/D2 = Xb2/(Xb2 - Xf), and F2=2.77 D2.
D1(L)=(D2 - D2f)L + 2.77D2(C)(T2 - t2), and D2 = (D1 + D2f)/[1+2.77(C)(T2 - t2)/L].
The last equation is generalized to give: Di = (Di-1 + Dif)/[1 + 2.77 (C)(Ti - ti)/L]
Table 5 gives the temperature and salinity distribution, feed Fi to each effect, and
distillate generated by boiling Dbi, and by flashing Dfi. The results show that D = 137.86
kg/s and total feed F = 383.53 kg/s. The steam supply to the two feed heaters S2 is
calculated by: S2(L) = (F1 + F2) (C)(t2 - 35) + F1(C)(t2 - t1), S2 = 3.1 kg/s, total S = 16.93
kg/s, and D/S = 7.78, and F/D = 2.784.
This example shows that the use of feed heaters increases the GR 29% (from 7.78 to
10.05) compared to the case when no feed heaters were used.

Table 5. Temperature, salinity, feed, distillate by boiling Db, and by flashing Df, and brine from effects of
example 4.
Ti
Effect # Ti Tvi Fi Db Df D Bi Xi
(feed)
1 65.00 64.00 37.80 62.00 13.64 0.00 13.64 24.16 71.97

2 62.55 61.55 37.12 56.20 13.24 0.10 13.40 48.56 71.98

3 60.09 59.09 33.82 35.00 11.95 0.20 12.21 73.47 71.98

4 57.64 56.64 31.44 35.00 10.99 0.31 11.35 95.94 71.98

5 55.18 54.18 29.84 35.00 10.32 0.40 10.77 116.61 71.98

6 52.73 51.73 28.91 35.00 9.90 0.49 10.44 136.02 71.99

7 50.27 49.27 28.56 35.00 9.69 0.57 10.31 154.61 71.99

8 47.82 46.82 28.75 35.00 9.68 0.65 10.38 172.79 71.99

9 45.36 44.36 29.45 35.00 9.85 0.73 10.63 190.91 71.99

10 42.91 41.91 30.67 35.00 10.22 0.80 11.07 209.29 71.99

11 40.45 39.45 32.42 35.00 10.77 0.88 11.71 228.25 71.99

12 38.00 37.00 34.75 35.00 11.53 0.96 12.55 248.13 71.99

Total 383.53 131.76 6.10 137.86 385.99

5 Equivalent Work Consumed by the MEB System

The Sidem 1 unit is designed to operate by low-pressure steam extracted from steam
turbine at 0.3 bar, (saturation temperature of 70°C). The plant capacity is 2.64 MIGD.
The thermal energy consumed by the system according to design is 51 t/h (14.17 kg/s)
steam of 2498 kJ/kg enthalpy and 0.3 bar and the leaving condensate has 294 kJ/kg
enthalpy. The distillate output is 500 t/h (138.89 kg/s), and this gives specific thermal
370

energy of 217.4 kJ/kg distillate. If this MEB unit is combined with one of the steam
power plants in Kuwait, shown in Figure 11, it can be supplied with steam at 70 °C
extracted from the LP steam turbine as heat source. This steam would produce work if it
expands to the condensing pressure in the LP turbine. This work is considered as work
loss due to steam extraction to the desalting unit, or work equivalent to the thermal energy
supplied to the unit.
This work loss is equal to the steam enthalpy difference between the extraction point
(2580 kJ/kg) and at the condenser inlet (2346 kJ/kg), as shown in Figure 12. So, the work
loss due to extraction per kg of steam is equal to 234 kJ/kg. Since the gain ratio calculated
in example 1 is 10.05, then the specific equivalent work is 23.3 kJ/kg distillate. By adding
7 kJ/kg pumping energy, the total specific equivalent work becomes 30.3 kJ/kg distillate
(equivalent to 8.4 kWh/m3 distillate). This is almost 40% of the work equivalent
consumed by a typical MSF system, (about 21 kWh/m3), but still 40 - 60% higher than
that of the very efficient reverse osmosis RO system (about 5 - 6 kWh/m3).
Table 6, [8], shows the enthalpy of steam at the extraction point (at 70°C), at
condenser inlet, the work loss per kg of steam and per kg distillate and the total specific
equivalent work at different power loads of the power plant.

Figure 11. Cogeneration power desalting plant used to supply steam to MSF units, the expected supply to the
MEB from point 10.

The Ashdod plant operates at lower temperature heat source, 62.5°C, and its GR =
5.6, [5], and the work equivalent to the thermal energy supplied to the unit is 7.65
kWh/m3, and the pumping energy is 2.5 kWh/m3, (based on 1800 kW pumping energy), a
total of 10.15 kWh/m3. This is less than half of the work equivalent used by a typical
MSF unit, although its GR is 5.7, and that of MSF is 8.0. This shows that the Ashdod
plant of 5.7 GR is more than 100% efficient than the MSF unit of 8.0 GR.
 371

5 33 58 kJ/kg

31 11 kJ/kg
6

2
307 8.8

29 44 kJ/kg
7

27 27 kJ /kg
12

25 80 kJ/kg
13

23 46 kJ/kg
14

Figure 12. The enthalpy of extracted steam from the cogeneration power desalting plant at different electric
load.

Table 6. Enthalpy of steam extracted from the turbine to the MEB at different load of the turbine and
corresponding equivalent work, and specific fuel energy.

specific Total specific total specific Specific

Load hextraction hcondenser work loss equivalent equivalent equivalent fuel energy
% (kJ/kg) (kJ/kg) (kJ/kg steam) work work work input
(kJ/kg distillate) (kJ/kg distillate) (kWh/m3distillate) kJ/kg

100 2550 2340 210 20.89 27.89 7.75 77.5

80 2550 2335 215 21.39 28.39 7.89 78.9

50 2630 2500 130 12.93 19.93 5.54 55.4

25 NA NA NA NA NA NA
372

Pumping energy is used by the MEB system to move its streams, and is usually about
half that used in the MSF system. The reported specific electric power consumed for three
MEB units operated in St. Thomas (209.4 m3/h capacity), St. Croix (207 m3/h), and St.
Thomas II (213 m3/h) are 1.75, 1.8, and 1.75 kWh/ m3 respectively, while the design
figure for the three units is 2.5 kWh/ m3, [9]. The specific fuel energy can be calculated
by multiplying the specific work equivalent in kWh/m3 by 3.6 to convert to kJ/kg work,
and divided by 0.36 (the typical efficiency of power plant to get the specific fuel energy
in kJ/kg). The available energy of steam supplied at 0.3 bar can be calculated by:
2336.1[1 – (25 + 273)/(69 + 273)] = 300 kJ/kg, where 2336.1 is the latent heat in kJ/kg
for P = 0.3 bar. For GR = 10.05, the specific available energy per kg distillate Ad/Dis
300/10.05 = 29.9 kJ/kg or 8.3 kWh/m3.

6 Conclusion
In conclusion, the conventional MEB has the advantage of using low temperature heat
source (steam or hot water) when it operates at low TBT, and this can give much lower
equivalent work or available consumed energy than the MSF units. The decrease of ∆T to
less than 2°C significantly increases the heat transfer areas. The use of feed heaters
enhances the GR, but adds more complexity, capital cost, and pumping energy. This
system consumes about half the pumping energy of the MSF. The MEB can be arranged
to give much more product when needed, but at lower GR.

References

1. M.A. Darwish, Fuel cost charged to desalters in cogeneration power-desalination

plants, Heat Recovery Systems and CHP 15, (4), 357-368, (1995).
2. M. A. Darwish, et al., The multi effect boiling desalting system and its comparison
with the MSF, Desalination, 251-265 (1986).
3. R. Rautenbach and B. Artz, The performance of high performance distillation plants,
Desalination, 261-275 (1985).
4. Temster and J. Laborie, Dual purpose desalination plant- high efficiency multi effect
evaporator operating with turbine for power production, Proc. IDA World
Conference on Desalination and Water Science, Abu Dhabi, Vol III, 297-308 (1995).
5. U. Fisher, A. Aviram and A. Gendel, Ashdod low temperature multi-effect
desalination plant, Desalination 55, 13-32 (1985).
6. F.M. Franquelin and Temstet, Application of multi-effect process at high temperature
for large seawater, Desalination, 81-92 (1983).
7. B. Ohlemann and D. Emmermann, Advanced Barge mounted VTE/VC seawater
desalting plant, Desalination, 45, 39-47 (1983).
8. M. A. Darwish, F. Al Asfour, and N. Al Najem, Energy consumption in equivalent
work by different desalting methods: case study study for Kuwait, Desalination 152
83-92 (2002).
9. U. Fisher, One year of operation of Israel desalination engineering’s multi effect
distillation U.S. Virgin Island, Desalination 44, 73-84 (1983).
 DESALINATION AS A SUSTAINABLE SOURCE OF FRESH WATER
PROVISION?

LUIS SERRA†
Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Zaragoza, C/ María de Luna 3
Zaragoza, 500018, Spain

JAVIER UCHE
Fundación CIRCE, University of Zaragoza, C/ María de Luna 3
Zaragoza, 500018, Spain

GEMMA RALUY
Fundación CIRCE, University of Zaragoza, C/ María de Luna 3
Zaragoza, 500018, Spain

This paper analyzes the potential role of desalination as a sustainable source of fresh water
provision, starting from the present framework and considering the trends in the desalination
technology. Several aspects have been reviewed: the state of the art of the technology, focusing the
attention on the most widespread desalination technologies; the importance of desalination in the
different regions of the World and the future trends; the economic costs of desalted water and the
uses derived from those costs, the environmental charges provoked by desalination and their
possible corrective measures to be undertaken; future improvements expected for desalination
technology, and their economic consequences. Particular attention is focused to environmental
issues and integration of desalination with other productive processes, particularly with energy
production systems as a mean of dramatically reduce the environmental loads provoked by
desalination systems.

1 Introduction
The rapidly demographic growth, the important economical growth in developing
countries (e.g. GDP in China and India is experiencing a continuous growth of about 9%
and 7% respectively [1]) and the pollution of fresh water resources are identified by UN
as the main causes of the World crisis that humankind will suffer during the next decades,
particularly due to the increasing fresh water scarcity in many regions of the Planet.
Humans are using at present about 4,000 km3/year [2], being the world’s renewable
fresh water resources that can be technically used about 10,000 km3/year [3]. If the
efficiency of fresh water use is not improved in the next years, the picture of fresh water
availability for all the inhabitants in the World is really dark. Figures show that nowadays,
30% of the world’s population is suffering water stress, 3 billion people lack appropriate

†
Work partially supported by the Spanish Ministry of Science and Technology.

373
374

water sanitation and 12% of the world population uses about 85% of the water consumed
[4].
Desalination, which is of continuous increasing importance, represents a possible and
very interesting alternative for increasing them. Particularly if it is taken into account that
more than 70% of World population is living at a distance lower than 70 km from coastal
areas. More than 30-fold increase in global capacity over three decades occurred [5], but
yet desalinated water represents only about 0.2-0.3% of the fresh water used worldwide,
and about 3% of global drinking water.
Nevertheless, desalination is an energy intensive process, which is usually driven by
conventional energy sources (basically fossil fuels). On average, 3.5 liters of oil are
required per cubic meter of desalted seawater. As a consequence, producing the total
amount of desalted water in all of the facilities in the world requires a huge amount of
energy, which is approximately equivalent to the 0.3-0.4% of primary energy in terms of
fossil fuels consumed all over the world [6]. Thus, the future of desalination, is closely
linked to the problem of conventional energy source availability, possible depletion and
cost as well as the environmental impacts (including the trend to minimize CO2 emission
in order to reduce the greenhouse effect).
Furthermore, the associated economic costs of desalination (investment and
operation costs), sometimes higher than conventional water supply techniques, could limit
its expansion in the less-developed countries, and consequently the gap between the First
and the Third World could be enhanced. The present situation demands for imaginative
solutions, for instance process integration or the use of renewable energy sources to
produce desalted water, in order to prevent from more profound economic and social
effects.
In this paper is analyzed, from technological, economic and environmental
viewpoints, the role of desalination in the context of sustainable fresh water provision. It
is presented first the present state of the art of the technology, including a technical and
cost analysis, and how it is used in different parts of the World, followed by a detailed
environmental analysis, applying the Life Cycle Assessment technique that explores the
potential of reducing its environmental impact, including as well suggestions about
possibilities of achieving a more sustainable use of desalination.

2 Most important commercial desalination technologies

A very interesting and comprehensive review of desalination technologies can be found in
reference [7]. Here, most important commercial desalination technologies used nowadays
are reviewed. They are two main groups depending on the energy required: a) thermal
desalination technologies and b) mechanical driven processes.

2.1. Thermal Desalination Technologies

Multi-Stage Flash (MSF) Distillation: Is the most widely form to produce water from
seawater, especially common wherever the temperature, salt content, biological activity or
 375

pollution level of seawater is high, as in the Arabian Gulf Area. This process has been in
large-scale commercial use for over 30 years, mainly coupled to power stations. In
general, MSF plants are more common because they are simple and robust, although their
specific consumption may be higher than other technologies. Other advantage of MSF
plants are their unit size, considered of large scale (more than 50,000 m3/d of capacity per
unit). In the MSF process (see Figure 1), seawater pumped through heat exchanger tubes
installed in the various evaporator stages, is heated to a certain temperature. Final heating
is performed by steam (usually coming from a power station) in a brine heater. The hot
seawater then goes into flash chambers, and part of the brine flashes into vapor and after
passing a demister, it condenses outside the tubes while heating the seawater flowing
through the tubes. The MSF unit contains cells assembled in series, at a different pressure.
Distillate produced is collected in a channel mounted below the tube bundle. Brine
recycle is adopted to reduce seawater needed to produce fresh water. The concentrated
seawater (blowdown) is also removed from the last stage by a pump or by gravity.

Stages
Steam
seawater
Condensation
Distillate
Flash effect
Blowdown
Condensate Condensation/evaporation zones
Brine Heater

Figure 1. Diagram of a typical MSF unit.

Multi-Effect Distillation (MED): Contrary to MSF, in Multi-Effect Distillation (MED)

evaporation takes place on surfaces, by exchanging the latent heat through the heat
transfer surface between condensing vapor on one side and evaporating brine on the
other. The MED plant also has several stages (see Figure 2), each with a heat exchanger
tube bundle. In horizontal-tube disposition, seawater is sprayed onto the tubes and the
condensing heating steam inside the tubes evaporates part of the seawater on the outside.
The steam produced is used as heating steam in the next stage, where it condenses inside
the tubes. Condensate is the water product. Obviously, the boiling temperatures and
pressures in the different evaporators cannot be the same. The first stage is heated by
external steam from a heat recovery steam or a back-pressure steam turbine, but in most
cases, MED plants are equipped with thermal vapor compressors for better efficiency.
Steam produced in the last stage is condensed on the outside of exchanger tubes in a
separate condenser, which is cooled by incoming seawater. The major advantage of MED
with respect to MSF is their productivity (water produced per steam required, Gain
Output Ratio, GOR): MED plants could reach a value of 15 while MSF almost 10, and
includes lower specific power consumption in pumps (< 2 kWh/m3) than MSF (> 3
kWh/m3). Furthermore, GOR does not depend on the steam temperature coming from the
376

turbines as MSF plants, therefore MED plants are the most promising distillation
technologies for desalination. However, at present the unit size of MED plants is up to the
third with respect to MSF units.

vacuum vacuum vacuum

seawater
steam
steam
steam

condensate
Second effect and following brine
First effect
Distillate

Figure 2. Diagram of a MED unit.

2.2. Desalination technologies driven by mechanical or electrical energy

Vapor Compression (VC) distillation. Is similar to multi-effect distillation (MED), but the
main difference is that the vapor produced by the evaporation of the brine inside is not
condensed in a separate condenser: that vapor enters in a centrifugal, single-stage type
designed for high-volumetric flows, and this compressed steam is discharged into the
evaporator onto the outside of the tubes, where it condenses and provide its latent heat
energy to boil seawater inside of the tubes. Note that the process only supplies
thermodynamic losses and then lower energy requirements (up to 9 kWh/m3 of product).
Unfortunately, the VC size is limited by the compressor and it is only about 3.000 m3/d.

Figure 3. Typical one-stage vapor compressor distiller.

 377

Reverse Osmosis (RO). In RO desalination (see Figure 4), seawater (or brackish water in
case of inland territories with saline aquifers) is pretreated to avoid membrane fouling. It
then passes through filter cartridges and is sent by a high-pressure pump through the
membrane modules, and pure water permeates through the membranes and seawater salt
is concentrated (brine). Permeate flows into a storage tank, and pressurized brine is sent
via an energy recovery system (ERS) back into the sea. Seawater RO process (SWRO)
only consumes power (mainly in HP pump), but ERS [8, 9], e.g. Pelton or Francis
turbines, inverse pumps or pressure exchangers, could recover more than the 95% of the
energy stored in the rejected brine. Then, total energy consumption for SWRO could be
3-5 kWh/m3, depending on the feed water salinity and temperature. Its modularity allowed
a rapid expansion in all over the world. Other membrane processes as nanofiltration (NF),
ultrafiltration (UF) and microfiltration (MF) are rapidly growing to be used in brackish
desalination or waste water reuse, with very low energy consumptions (< 1 kWh/m3).

HP p ump
RO mo d u l e Pe r me at e

Feed

Pr e t r e a t me nt Po s t –
t r e a t me n t

En e r g y
Re c o v e r y

Re j e c t

Figure 4. Diagram for a seawater RO unit.

Selective
membranes
Feedwat

_ +
Anode
Cathode
+
+
_
_
_

Product
Brine

Figure 5. Principle of operation of a single ED cell.

378

Electrodyalisis (ED). It demineralizes brackish water by making different ions migrate

through an electric field created by two electrodes. If not constrained, these ions
discharge on the electrodes of opposite sign, and if a set of selective and permeable
membranes is placed between the electrodes, salt concentration decreases in some
compartments of the cell and increases in some others. ED is suitable for desalt waters
with a salt content between 1 to 3 g/l (ED not profitable for seawater) with a very low
power consumption (less than 1 kWh/m3) and a salt rejection of more than 80%.

2.3. Comparison of desalination technologies

Next table include some keys of the previously referred processes, noting that SWRO is
really more convenient than other processes with respect to energy requirements.

Table 1. A comparison between the most widespread desalination processes. (a) Power produced in a
conventional power plant with 30% efficiency. (b) Desalination process in dual plant. (c) Including energy
recovery system in the RO process.
Thermal Processes Mechanical Processes
Desalination Process
MSF MED-TVC VCa ROa EDa
Power consumption
3-5 1-2 8-12 3-6 0.8-1.5
(kWh/m3)
Primary energy consumption 400-500 350-400 70-90
(kJfuel/kgwater) 200-300b 200-250b 100-200 30-50c 10 - 18
Operation temperature (º C) 110 70 70 45 45
Raw water quality (ppm) >50,000 >50,000 >50,000 < 50,000 < 3,000
Product quality (ppm) < 50 < 50 < 50 < 500 < 500
Unit capacity (m3/d) 10,-50,000 5,-20,000 1,-5,000 10,-100,000 1,-10,000
Plant reliability high high-medium low-medium high-medium high
Modularity difficult difficult difficult easy easy

3 Desalination in the world

The information about the state of the art of the world market for all types of desalination
plants can be found in the IDA Worldwide Desalting Plants Inventory, compiled by
Wangnick [5]. This inventory report (No. 18) shows that by the beginning of the year
2004, a world-wide total of 17,348 desalinating units with a total capacity of 37,750,000
m3/d have been installed or are under construction. Seawater plants (SWDP) produced
around the 60% of the total capacity and the remaining 40% are other types of water.
According to that inventory, the proportions of the various processes have been changed
along the time. Now, 47.2% are RO plants and only 36.5% are MSF units, but ten years
ago that proportion was 32.7% and 51.3% respectively. If only seawater desalting plants
are considered, the figures are 61.7% for MSF units and 26.7% for RO plants, but the
ratio was 80% for thermal plants and 20% for membrane plants ten years ago. Next is
presented a summary of the present situation of desalination in diverse worldwide regions.
The Middle East States (ME) are the biggest users of desalination technology with
more than 50% of the total capacity in the world. Thermal processes are preferred
 379

because of the existing good experience in the region, and the difficulty of the gulf
seawaters (high temperature, salinity and amount of biological matter) for using the RO
process since ten years ago, as well as the low cost of energy. The Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia, supported by several MSF units combined with power generation in dual purpose
plants, had in 2004 the 17.4% of the World capacity. The third world producer are the
United Arab Emirates (UAE), with a rank of 14,7 % of the total installed capacity
(desalted seawater per capita reaches 2 m3/day). Kuwait only incorporates MSF distillers
(88) up to the 5.8% of the worldwide capacity (315.6 MGD in 2003) [10]. Some other
ME countries as Qatar, Bahrain (with a capacity of 335,000 m3/d [11]) and Oman
complete a set depending on desalted seawater resources. The majority of installations are
composed by huge dual-purpose power and desalination plants. In reference [12] can be
found a detailed contribution of desalination here. Privatization of water and energy
suppliers is now common in the area, taking into account the continuous growing
demands of water and energy and the constraints that suffer the public financial resources.
USA has the second rank in the world capacity, with 16.2% of the overall score and
more than 3,000 plants [5]. Here, it is only representative desalination of brackish
aquifers or degraded aquifers by seawater intrusion (ED, RO), as well as membrane
softening techniques (MF, NF or UF) which remove bacteria, viruses and ions.
Evaporation techniques are not favored due to its lack of competence with respect to
membrane technologies [13], and ED/EDR can not stop pathogens: RO/NF/UF and MF
will be widely used in big plants (more than 10,000 m3/d) to reduce salinity of brackish
waters or reuse waste water directly. SWRO plants are planned only for big plants in
Texas, California and Florida.
Regarding the region of Latin America and Caribbean [14], only in the Caribbean
desalination is really important to supply water driven by the growing tourism and
decreasing costs. The total installed capacity in the Caribbean is 724,000 m3/d by the year
2000, the most important facilities are settled at the Netherlands Antilles, Virgin Islands
and Trinidad, with more than 110,000 m3/d. In consonance with the Canary Islands, the
Caribbean has been the cradle to prove the technological developments of desalination
along the time: the first SWRO market, the first low-temperature MED units, the
implementation of the BOOT (Build, Own, Operate and Transferred) contracts. The
future in this area is the continuous growth of desalination, the majority of them based on
BOOT contracts till reaching self-sufficient islands, favored by the decreasing trends of
seawater desalinated costs. On the other hand, desalination in Latin America does not
represent an equal weight that in the Caribbean (530.000 m3/d), although the capacity
increase in the recent years is also significant. The two main contributions come from
Chile (131,000 m3/d, mainly for industrial purposes) and Mexico (a capacity of 285,000
m3/d for industrial uses and tourism resorts). The future of desalination here is linked to
remove contamination more than reduce salt content with membranes. SWRO plants will
growth but not significantly for supplying industries and covering new tourist demands.
In Asia, Japan leads the installed capacity in the region with more than 1 Mm3/d and
more than 1,200 units. Only two big plants (40,000 m3/d and 50,000 m3/d) are used for
380

domestic use, but several small plants exist in remote areas such as small islands.
Electronics industry consumes ultra pure water and softening techniques are applied from
pure or river waters in a great scale. In China the majority of desalination plants have
industrial or power generation uses [15] consuming brackish, river, pure or waste waters
in RO processes, and only two municipalities and two tourism facilities exist. Similar
situation can be found in other countries of this area, e.g. Korea, Indonesia, and so on. In
general the future of desalination industry in that area is focused on the industry requiring
ultra pure water, although demand for desalination will occur in some areas of highly
dense population and high income. A great expansion of seawater desalination is not
foreseen for the next future, especially for China and India since big hydraulic were
projected to provide fresh water.
As it is expected, desalination in Europe is focused in the Mediterranean countries,
where climatologic conditions and economic activities (tourism and agriculture) demand
huge water volumes. Spain is the dominating country with almost a 6.4% worldwide
capacity at the end of 2003 [5] representing more than the 8% of the urban consumption.
Desalted water has even irrigated high-profitable crops in the South-East of Spain and the
Canary Islands. Several innovations have been proved, and the future is really promising,
for instance the Hydrologic Plan A.G.U.A. includes 17 new big desalination plants that
will provide up to 621 hm3/year for the Mediterranean area. By far, the second on that list
is Italy with a total capacity of 400,000 m3/d, most of their plants located at the south of
the country and the island territories. The third and fourth places are occupied by two
Mediterranean islands, Malta and Cyprus, it suppose more than 50% of its resources.
Greek islands are quite similar to those ones. Russia only has a reduced capacity of their
desalination plants with a total value of about 100,000 m3/d composed by several old
MED plants located at the Caspian and Black Sea. In Central Europe, Germany, Austria
and Netherlands have several plants to recycle wastewater or produce pure water for
industrial processes including power generation.
Turkey, Jordan and Lebanon are other countries that also have small RO desalination
plants. However, Israel has planned a major program of seawater desalination to provide
new 400 hm3/y in 2002-2010, from series of 6 large plants of 45-100 hm3/y to partly
balance the water scarcity problems in the country [16].
The geographical situation the North Africa (NA) region could be characterized as
similar to the Middle East, but seawater water production is almost negligible with respect
to that area, mainly due to their financial constraints. The estimated cumulative installed
desalination capacity reached 1 Mm3/d at the end of 1995 [17]. More than 625,000 m3/d
are located in Lybia (mostly MSF plants for municipalities), 192,000 m3/d in Algeria
mainly for industrial purposes. Egypt incorporated 95,000 m3/d at the end of 1999, with
small RO plants and MSF/VCD plants, and finally Morocco and Tunisia reported
respectively 64,000 m3/d and 47,000 m3/d of installed capacity at the end of 1995. The
future of desalination in this area is also focused on the tourism locations (Tunisia and
Egypt) that even include brackish water plants, and the increasing applications of the solar
energy in remote and dessert areas for small locations.
 381

4 Desalination Costs
The economics of desalination vary form country to country, depending upon the
opportunity cost of energy and capital as the main factors of production, and the type of
desalination process. In case of dual-purpose plants, in which water and power are two
separate products, energy cost of desalted water could give to controversy. Moreover, the
progressive privatization of the public sectors in the ME Countries allowed under
different contracts the operation and control of new big power and desalination plants or
rehabilitated existing ones: the new independent water and power projects (IWPP)
permits the fulfillment of the continuous growing demand for water.

4.1. Investment costs

Breaking the desalination costs of water, the total costs can be divided in capital costs (up
to 40%) for interest and depreciation due to the plant investment and the rest are
considered running (or operating) costs. The investment costs for seawater desalination
plants have decreased over the years thanks to the technological improvement. Specific
costs close to 1,000 €/(m3d) could be obtained for large distillation units in ME, whereas
in Mediterranean countries SWRO could be constructed below 600 €/(m3d). The next
table shows the expected range for different desalination processes and plant sizes.

Table 2. Investment cost of seawater desalination plants depending on the type of process and expected plant
size [18].
Technology Capacity range (m3/d) Specific investment cost (€/m3·d)
MSF 10,000-50,000 1,680-1,080
MED-TVC 5,000-20,000 1.080-800
VC 1,000-5,000 1,500-1,020
RO 10,000-100,000 900-550

The investment costs of the plant can be broken into the following sub-systems:
• The raw water supply system includes the seawater intake structure. It could suppose
a high percentage if the specific seawater flow is high and the sea shore is very
shallow (up to 30%), but they could be reduced if the water intake is shared with
other plants, as the cooling system of the required power plant or hybrid plant.
• The pre-treatment system is very low for thermal plants and consists of simple
equipment to storage and dose some additives (antiscale, antifoam and sodium
bisulphite). However, in RO plants costs are considerably higher (up to 20%)
because the raw seawater must be carefully treated (chlorination, filtration,
acidification, inhibition by polyphosphates and dechlorination) before entering the
RO racks.
• The desalination system, by far the most expensive system of the plant. For thermal
plants the elevated heat exchange area and fine materials required implies that those
costs contribute to more than the 70% of the investment. The weight of the
membrane costs and the high-pressure pump, as soon as the energy recovery system
for RO plants does not sum up the same contribution (a maximum of 60%).
382

• The brine disposal system for thermal plants could be shared with the cooling water
outfall (seawater) and therefore it is not representative for those plants. However, for
RO brine discharge is almost double concentrated than feed water and specific design
is required to avoid any damage in endemic flora species (the cost of that system
could be increased up to 5-7% of the total investment).
• The post-treatment system applied to the produced water is quite simple but it is
obliged by the purity of desalted seawaters. Usually, desalted water is re-hardened by
adding carbon dioxide and lime, and finally is disinfected with chlorine. In some
cases, caustic soda is also added to increase pH, in order to compensate the effect of
the acid previously dosed. Anyway, its contribution is not significant.
• The storage system of the drinking water produced consists of cylindrical tanks with
a capacity up to 24-48 hours of water production, contributing no more than the 3%
of the total investment required.
• The auxiliary equipment (instrumentation, electrical connections, air and oil systems)
as soon as the civil works required for a desalination plant could suppose up to the
10% of the total investment of the plant.

4.2. Operation costs

The long list of components that contains the operating (or running) costs are:
• Energy cost is usually more than 50% of the total cost of operation, although its
weight depends on the location of the plant. In oil-poor countries, RO is always the
best solution. Note that energy prices trend will raise in the near future due to the
politic instability and the application of the Kyoto Protocol.
• Personnel costs decrease as the plant size grows, except for very small plants in
where personnel are shared with other activities.
• Chemical costs are not important for thermal plants, since only antiscalants and
antifoams are added to raw water, but it is representative for membrane plants: MF or
UF techniques could reduce that operation cost but increase the corresponding
investment. Similarly, cleaning costs (chemical or washing with brine) are higher in
case of membrane plants.
• Membrane replacement in RO plants could suppose an important item if inadequate
cleaning control is given. The rest of consumables are almost economically negligible
in membrane but also for thermal plants.
• Finally, the annual costs for spare parts can be calculated from 1 % to 3 % of the total
investment, depending on the plant size.

4.3. Total costs

Summarizing, the total (investment + operating) costs for a typical thermal and membrane
plant (RO) could reach to 0.7 and 0.45 $/m3 respectively. Note that costs could vary from
country to country, as we can see for the present RO projects presenter under BOOT
contracts (see Table 3).
 383

Table 3. Large desalination plants projected or under construction with BOOT projects (*) A normalized cost
of energy (0,04 c$/kWh) has been used. [20]
SWDP Tampa bay Trinidad Larnaca Dhekelia Singapore Askhelon Algeirs
Capacity (m3/d) 95,000 135,000 40,000 40,000 136,000 274,000 200,000
Feedwater salinity (ppm) 26,000 38,000 40,000 40,000 40,000 40,000
Contract Year 2000 1996 2002 2002 2003
Years of contract 30 23 10 10 20 25 25
1st year price* 0.46 0.71 0.73 1.09 0.45 0.52 0.818

It is important to remark that technological developments have consistently reduced the

costs of desalted water: for instance, in Spain, 20 years ago the cost of desalination was
around 2.0-2.1 €/m3 (with old MSF units) and now that cost is four times less [18].

5 Environmental Assessment
The environmental charges associated to the desalination processes differ from each
process and location. However, two major cases could be identified, taking into account
the geography and the dominant technology involved: a) The Arabian Gulf Area, in which
distillation processes are mainly installed in relatively closed seas suffering dessert
climate, and b) the rest of the World with RO as the dominant technology installed in big
oceans or seas. In both cases, two effects should mainly be studied: the energy
consumption of the desalination plant and the brine discharges of plant, as soon as some
other minor consequences derived from the chemical treatments and cleaning systems and
the noise provoked.
In the Middle East zone, and particularly the Arabian Gulf, the long list or large
distillation plants (MSF) is provoking a serious environmental impact in that area where
the economic growth of new formed countries is jeopardizing its sustainable development
[21]. In this area, distillation plants discharge brine with a concentration of about 60,000-
65,000 ppm starting from raw seawaters of 40,000-45,000 ppm, therefore salt dilution in
the sea is not very problematic, taking into account the scarce flora of the Gulf soils.
Thermal pollution is an additional impact associated to distillation plants since brine is
usually discharged from 5 to 7º C above the raw seawater temperature. Furthermore, those
plants, which are driven by fossil fuels have therefore a very important primary energy
consumption (see Table 1) and as a consequence the associated emissions of pollutant
gases as CO2 and NOx (see Table 4) are very significant as well.

Table 4. Relevant airborne emissions produced by different desalination technologies applying the Life Cycle
Assessment technique [23].
MSF MED RO (4 kWh/m3) RO (3 kWh/m3) RO (2 kWh/m3)
3
kg. CO2 / m 23.41 18.05 1.78 1.73 1.20
g. NOx / m3 28.30 21.43 4.05 3.92 2.74
g. NMVOC / m3 8.20 6.10 1.15 0.76 0.52
3
g. SOx / m 28.1 26.31 11.13 11.86 9.08
384

The situation in the other countries is less dramatic than in Arabic countries. The
primary energy consumption of RO plants is really lower than that one consumed by
distillation plants (about 5 or 6 times, see Table 1) and consequently their derived CO2
and NOx emissions. Table 4 presents the airborne emissions provoked by different
desalination technologies, revealing the gap between thermal and membrane techniques.
These results have been obtained from a comparative Life Cycle Assessment (LCA), an
environmental methodology which includes the entire life cycle of each technology,
encompassing: extraction and processing raw materials, manufacturing, transportation and
distribution, operation and final waste disposal, of most widespread commercial
desalination technologies [22-24].
On the other hand, the effects on marine flora provoked by the RO brine disposal
could be important in some places. For instance, in the case of the Mediterranean Sea and
especially in the Spanish Levante, endemic specie called “Posidonia Oceanica” is strongly
protected by the UE. It has been demonstrated that it is very sensitive to brine increments
[25], and compensatory measures have to be taken by increasing the cost of the brine
disposal system [26]. However, brine disposal from brackish waters, despite of its lower
costs, could even degrade more and more the aquifer quality if it is not properly designed.

5.1. Desalination vs. conventional fresh water provision solutions

There are several regions in the Planet with enough fresh water resources in average but
irregularly distributed, both geographically and along the time. This is the case of Spain,
and some other Mediterranean countries, with water scarce areas created upon tourist or
irrigation pressure. In this context, the next question arises: What is the best solution since
an environmental view-point: conventional solutions based on the water conveyance from
“wet” to “dry” regions, or new and innovative solutions mainly based on SWRO?
It is clear that each particular comparison will give to diverse results, but just as an
illustration, is presented here a comparative LCA of the water transfer of 1,050 hm3/y
from the Ebro River (ERWT) to the Spanish coastal Mediterranean areas, and the
production of the same amount of maximum diverted water applying the Reverse Osmosis
(RO) desalination technology (further details can be found in [24]). The LCA analysis of
ERWT presented in this paper is based on the basic documentation contained in the
Transfer Project and its Environmental Impact Study [27,28] describing the proposed
hydraulic infrastructures. In order to obtain as much as possible rigorous conclusions
three different impact assessment methods have been applied (see table 5). SimaPro [29]
is the software used to perform that complex LCA study, which includes the
environmental loads associated to the construction and assembly of the installations, their
operation and the final disposal once their useful life is finished.
The average energy consumption considered for the ERWT was 2.5 kWh/m3 [24] in
the operation phase of its life cycle, whereas RO consumed from 4 to 2 kWh/m3,
considering its decreasing trend of energy consumption. From results in Table 5 it can be
concluded that with the present state of the art of both technologies, RO is slightly more
 385

pollutant than the ERWT. In both options, particularly in RO desalination as shown in

Figure 6, the operation phase, in which the energy consumption is the most important
factor, provokes the highest impact. Anyway, the weight of the ERWT construction is
quite important with respect to the same phase for RO plants, a factor which is usually not
considered for other environmental assessment techniques. The final disposal of both
alternatives does not represent any significant contribution in any case.

Table 5. Overall LCA scores for different energy consumptions of RO and the Ebro River Water Transfer
(25 and 50 years of amortization). [25].
RO RO RO Transfer Transfer
Unit
(4 kWh/m3) (3 kWh/m3) (2 kWh/m3) (50 years) (25 years)
Eco-
GPts 2.62 2.04 1.46 1.86 2.20
indicator 99
Ecopoints 97 GPts 43,400 34,200 25,100 29,900 35,900
CML 2
- 0.546 0.414 0.283 0.362 0.378
baseline

Dismantle
ERWT phase: 0%

operation
construction

RO

Figure 6. Map and LCA phase analysis of the Ebro River Water Transfer vs. the equivalent RO desalination
production in Spain.

Although some minor impacts could not be evaluated by the LCA software (brine
discharges in RO units, for instance), the global results present a very optimistic future for
desalination (especially for RO) with respect to conventional hydraulic projects, since:
• Technologic improvements could reduce energy consumption, which is the most
important environmental impact in the case of desalination. On the contrary,
hydraulic projects are a mature technology.
• By integrating desalination with energy production systems, a very important
reduction of the environmental charges of desalination could be obtained [30].
386

• Further, the gradual inclusion of renewable energies favors RO desalination more

than conventional water supply techniques [24].

5.2. Desalination integrated with different energy production systems

Here, huge potential to reduce the impact provoked by desalination technologies,
particularly distillation when integrated with diverse energy production systems. A
detailed analysis can be found in [30].
Table 6. Airborne emissions considering different integration arrangements of thermal desalination and
RO (4 kWh/m3) with energy systems [33]: (TC: Thermal Consumption; CB: Conventional Boiler; CCC:
Cogeneration Combined Cycle; DWH: Driven Waste Heat; SC: Steam Cycle; ICE: Internal Combustion
Engine; CC: Combined Cycle; EM: European Model).
Kg. CO2/m3 produced water g. NOx/m3 g. NMVOC/m3 g. SOx/m3
MSF (TC-CB-EM) 23.41 28.30 8.20 28.01
MSF (CCC-EM) 9.41 10.88 3.13 11.34
MSF (DWH-EM) 1.98 4.46 1.27 14.96
MED (TC-EM) 18.05 21.43 6.10 26.31
MED (CCC-EM) 7.01 8.16 2.25 15.74
MED (DWH-EM) 1.19 2.53 0.62 19.59
RO (EM, 4 kWh/m3) 1.78 4.05 1.15 11.13
RO (SC) 2.79 3.38 0.93 3.25
RO (ICE) 2.13 2.61 0.65 2.86
RO (CC) 1.75 2.05 0.59 2.79

The results have shown in table 6 the importance, since an environmental viewpoint,
of an appropriate water and energy systems integration. It shows the airborne emissions
evaluated in the inventory phase of the LCA corresponding to diverse scenarios of
integration for MSF, MED: from heat provided by a conventional boiler to a fully
integrated one with residual heat, passing by combined cycle integration. Thus, the
highest emissions correspond to the non-integrated case, decreasing as the efficiency of
the overall system increases. Emissions associated to RO are significantly lower to those
corresponding to thermal desalination but even an integration analysis can also be
performed: as it was expected, there is a slightly, compared with thermal desalination, but
non-negligible decrease in airborne emissions (up to 35%) when the energy production
system is more efficient.

5.3. Desalination driven by renewable energies

The use of renewable energy systems (RES) for producing desalted water is not
developed yet at a major scale, but it could be a very interesting solution for remote and
lowly populated areas, where no other alternatives are available at affordable costs. The
use of solar direct heating onto a glass surfaces collecting evaporated seawater only
produces up to 4 l/m2d; and the use of parabolic through collectors (PTC) concentrating
the solar energy consumed in small MSF or MED units can improve that productivity up
to 10 l/m2d [31]. Photovoltaic solar cells connected to small RO units are quite affordable
for isolated locations (see [32]) if a storage system and/or batteries are also included in
 387

the design project. But the most promising renewable energy for connecting RO desalting
units is wind: the integration with pumping systems allowing the storage of water in small
dams which produce power continuously for the RO unit with their associated waterfall,
seems to be one of the promising future line for desalination in a low-medium scale (see
[33] for the El Hierro Island experience).

Table 7. Airborne emissions for different integration arrangement of RO (EM: European Model; WE: Wind
Energy; PE: Photovoltaic Energy; HPE: Hydro-power Energy; NM: Norwegian Model; S: Switzerland; SP:
Spain).
Kg. CO2/m3 produced g. NOx/m3 g. NMVOC/m3 g. SOx/m3
water
RO (EM, 4 kWh/m3) 1.78 4.05 1.15 11.13
RO (WE, 150 kW) 0.170 0.412 0.22 2.05
RO (WE, 2 MW) 0.117 0.429 0.079 1.80
RO (PE-S. 100 kWp) 0.900 2.105 0.726 7.809
RO (PE-SP, 100 kWp) 0.483 1.151 0.382 4.731
RO (PE-S, 500 kWp) 0,626 1.816 0.697 16.155
RO (PE-SP, 500 kWp) 0.347 1.005 0.368 8.904
RO (HPE) 0.082 0.24 0.05 1.68
RO (NM) 0.08 0.23 0.06 1.73

Table 7 shows the results of main emissions to atmosphere corresponding to the LCA
for RO coupled with diverse RES, although the analysis has also been performed for
distillers [34]. CO2 emissions suffer the highest reduction, an average of 80%, and the
SOx emissions the lowest one, about 60%. The solar photovoltaic (PE) energy is the
integration that provokes the highest emissions to atmosphere (about 55% of decrease).
Hydro-power is the best integration, with a decrease about 92% in the airborne emissions,
and wind power obtains medium results (about 75% of decrease).
Solar thermal technology was not considered in the analysis, but new developments would
provide lower environmental loads than conventional PE panels:
• Direct Steam Generators (DSG) [35], by which it is possible to produce high-
pressure, high-temperature steam (100 bar/400º C) directly in the absorber tubes of
the PTC, and that can be applied to the production of electricity as well as to
desalination processes [36,37]. The efficiency of this technology is about 15%.
• Solar power systems based on improving the Stirling engine [38]. The Solar Dish
(SD) electric systems provide net solar-to-electric conversion efficiencies close to
30%, and consist of a solar concentrator, a cavity receiver, Stirling heat engine, and
an electric generator located at the dish focus.

5.4. Reducing environmental impacts

To reduce the environmental impacts of desalination plants, starting from the present
situation, some guidelines are suggested here:
• First, it is essential to reduce the energy consumption for all technologies, and
integrate them with energy production systems, particularly with those driven by
388

RES. Provision of water but also energy, heat and cold is an efficient manner to
reduce primary energy consumptions and therefore emissions [39,40].
• Reduce or even, impede the corrosion of materials, and use sound-insulation ones.
• Reduce chemical addition and use the less aggressive ones to the environment.
• Avoid (whenever possible) the use of chlorine by investigating new affordable
disinfection methods, in order to prevent the formation of trihalomethanes [19].
• Reduce thermal contamination by immersing cooling exchangers in distillers.
• Increase the investment required for enlarging the brine discharge pipes, also for
inland territories to collect saline waters from brackish plants.
• Finally, it would be highly desirable to apply the Environmental Impact Assessment
(EIA) for new facilities, and specially strategic EIA for the cumulative impacts form
several plants in one region [41].

6 Future Innovations
Several future research lines are open, some of them are presented here:
• The research oriented to the integration of water and energy systems, is essential to
reduce the costs of water and energy in dual-purpose plants. Up to now, water and
energy production were managed independently but a combined management and the
appropriate tools as for instance Thermoeconomic Analysis [42] (permits an in-depth
knowledge of both plants and their interactions) are the appropriated guidelines.
• The use of hybrid systems (RO + MSF/MED units), in which RO only operates under
low power demand periods, usually in winter season for the Gulf Countries. Aquifer
storage could also be combined in those periods [43].
• The use of experienced designers, consultants and operators, as soon as high
qualified personnel and materials resistant to corrosion is also essential to increase
plant availability, particularly for thermal plants [19].
• In the MSF process, UF/MF membranes increase their productivity since they avoid
scaling in tubes [44]. And the required surface area for evaporators/condensers could
be reduced in heat transfer is improved [19]. Even for low temperature operation in
MED units, aluminums or plastic materials would be introduced.
• For membrane processes, one of the prominent lines is the search for a more
simplified scheme in the pretreatment system. And RO membranes are yet
susceptible for major improvements [45]: flow through membranes could be
increased (or alternatively the pressure required to produce the same flow could be
reduced). Specific costs of membranes should also be reduced (competency).
• The inclusion of ERS for large RO plants (pressure exchanger) substituting Pelton
turbines could reduce up to 1 kWh/m3 the specific energy consumption, reaching a
total consumption (intake pumping + RO process + permeate pumping to storage
system) of less than 3 kWh/m3 nowadays [46].
All these measurements could reduce the costs of desalted water in the next future but not
as recent decades: this is mainly due to the compensation produced by the expected
increasing prices of energy, taking into account for the political situation and the
environmental charges that will be associated to energy.
 389

7 Closure
As it has been argued in this paper, desalination represents nowadays a reliable potable
water supply with a great potential of technological improvement by means of improving
its energy efficiency, through an appropriate integration, and therefore reducing their
environmental load. It is particularly interesting for providing safe freshwater to big
coastal cities. In some cases, desalination could be the dominant source for balancing
water demands of a region (see [47]), but it should not as a general solution for
everywhere. The reasons for that assumption are, among others, briefly explained here.

Integrated Water Resources Management (IWRM)

• Desalination should always be the last solution to avoid water availability problems:
water “demand” strategies as efficient irrigation methods, reduction of losses in water
networks, water saving devices in households, water markets in drought periods, and
the intensive use of reused water should be strengthened previously. A paradigmatic
example of that inadequate projection is Malta Island [41]: when leakage losses were
reduced, desalination plants had overcapacity.
• Desalination should be the selected water “supply” alternative when it provokes less
economic, environmental charges and climatic uncertainties than conventional
alternatives for supplying water.

Costs
• At present, only 3% of global drinking water is supplied through desalination, but it
is concentrated in developed countries and in the Arab Gulf countries (remember that
2.7 billion people live on less than 2 $ per day) [41].
• Costs have fallen to affordable levels for many communities (up to 0.5 €/m3), but in
the future they will continue to fall but not as fast as previously, since no major
breakthroughs are envisaged in the immediate future.
• The use of desalted water for agriculture should be studied carefully: usually, the
economic rationality of this solution is not justified, and the use of subsidies is quite
extended. Moreover, in water scarce areas desalination for urban supply should not
be applied to free up water for irrigation.

Environmental impact
• Desalination provokes local impacts but they can be mitigated, usually at low or
moderate costs, which obviously must be charged to the users. And in most cases,
they can be outweighed by the benefits.
• However, it has a serious global impact derived from its energy consumption.
Remember that the thermodynamic limit for desalting seawater is about 0.8 kWh/m3,
i.e. the minimum realistic consumption for the complete plant would be estimated in
1.5 kWh/m3, equivalent to a groundwater pumped out from a well at about 400
meters-depth. Therefore, seawater desalination will be always an energy intensive
process and, as a consequence, it will not be the definite solution for water scarce
areas till renewable energies would be massively introduced.
 390

References

1. L.R. Brown, Learning from China. Why the Western Economic Model will not Work
for the World. Earth Policy Institute. http://www.earth-policy.org/Updates/2005/
Update46.htm (2005).
2. World Water Council, World Water Vision, Making Water Everybody’s Business.
Earthscan, London (2000).
3. V. Shiklomanov, World Water Resources. A New Appraisal and Assessment for the
21st Century, UNESCO, Paris (1998).
4. Freshwater Action Network NGO Guide to the Water-Dome, the World Summit on
Sustainable Development and International Water Policy. World Summit on
Sustainable Development, Johannesburg (2002).
5. K. Wangnick, Desalination business “stabilised on a high level” – IDA report. The
International Desalination & Water Reuse Quarterly 14 (2), pp. 14-17 (2004).
6. L.A. Herrero, L. Serra, J. Uche, A. Valero, J.A. Turégano, and C. Torres, Integrated
Analysis and Simulation of Water and Energy Systems. In: 2nd International
Conference on Sustainable Development of Energy, Water and Environment
Systems. Dubrovnik, Croatia, June 15-20 (2003).
7. N. Lior, Water Demand and Water Desalination Technologies. In: International
Conference on Sustainable Development of Energy, Water and Environment
Systems. Dubrovnik, Croatia, June 2-7 (2000).
8. J. A. Medina, Desalación de aguas salobres y de mar. Ósmosis Inversa. Ed. Mundi-
Prensa (2000).
9. M. Fariñas, Ósmosis Inversa. Fundamentos, Tecnología y Aplicaciones. Ed. McGraw
Hill, Madrid (1999).
10. K.M. Al-Fraij, A.A. Al-Adwani and M.K. Al Romh, The Future of Seawater
Desalination in Kuwait. IDA 2003 Conference, Paradise Island (Bahamas) (2003).
11. A. Khalaf, The Effective Unit Cost of Electricity & Water in the Kingdom of
Bahrain. IDA 2003 Conference, Paradise Island, Bahamas (2003).
12. R. Al-Weshah, The role of UNESCO in Sustainable Water Resources Management
in the Arab World. Desalination 152, pp. 1-13 (2002).
13. J. Birkett, Desalination in North America. A Regional Review. IDA 2002
Conference, Manama (Bahrain) (2002).
14. W.T. Andrews and V. Verbeek, Regional Report on Desalination-Latin America &
Caribbean. IDA 2002 Conference, Manama (Bahrain) (2002).
15. T. Goto, Water Problems in East and South Asia. IDA 2002 Conference, Manama
(Bahrain) (2002).
16. U. Shamir, Review and Evaluation of Certain Aspects of the Spanish National
Hydrological Plan. Reports of International Experts required by the Government of
Aragón (2003).
17. A.A. Abufayed, M.K.A. Elghuel, and M. Rashed, Desalination: a Viable
Supplemental Source of Water for the Arid States of North Africa. Desalination 152,
pp. 75-82 (2002).
18. J. Uche, A. Valero, and L. Serra, La desalación y reutilización como recursos
alternativos. Administrative document printed by the Government of Aragón (2002).
 391

19. K. Wangnick, A Global Overview of Water Desalination Technology and the

Perspectives. International Conference Spanish Hydrological Plan and Sustainable
Water Management, Zaragoza (2001).
20. R. Morris, Technological Trends in Desalination and Their Impact on Costs and the
Environment. World Bank Water Week, Washington (2004).
21. D.M.K. Al-Gobaisi, Sustainability of Desalination Systems – an Essential
Consideration for the Future. Integrated power and desalination plants, pp. 597-622.
Edited by EOLSS publishers Ltd. (2003).
22. R. G. Raluy, L. Serra and J. Uche, Life Cycle Assessment of MSF, MED and RO
Desalination Technologies. Second Conference on Sustainable Development of
Energy, Water and Environment Systems, Dubrovnik, Croatia (2003).
23. R. G. Raluy, L. Serra and J. Uche, Life Cycle Assessment of Water Production
Technologies. Part I: Life Cycle Assessment of Different Commercial Desalination
Technologies (MSF, MED, RO). International Journal of Life Cycle Assessment 10,
No. 4, pp. 285-293 (2004).
24. R.G. Raluy, L. Serra, J. Uche, and A. Valero, Life Cycle Assessment of Water
Production Technologies. Part II: Reverse Osmosis Desalination versus the Ebro
River Water Transfer. International Journal of Life Cycle Assessment 10, No. 5, pp.
346-354 (2004).
25. J.L. Buceta,, E. Gacia, J. Mas, J. Romero, J. Ruiz, A. Ruiz-Mateo and J.L. Sanchez,
Estudio de los incrementos de salinidad sobre la fanerógama marina Posidonia
Oceanica y su ecosistema, con el fin de prever y minimizar los impactos que
pudieran causar los vertidos de agua de rechazo de plantas desaladoras. Final report
and recommendations, (private communication) (2003).
26. F. Correa, Fundamentos de la evaluación del impacto ambiental en plantas
desaladoras, In: International Conference and Exhibition on Desalination,
Hermosillo, México (2002).
27. Trasagua. Memoria del proyecto de las Transferencias autorizadas por el artículo 13
de la ley 10/2001 de 5 de Julio (Plan Hidrológico Nacional) y su Estudio de Impacto
Ambiental. Madrid (2003).
28. Ministerio de Medio Ambiente. Documentos del Anteproyecto del Plan Hidrológico
Nacional. Madrid: MIMAM (2000).
29. PRé Consultants, Database Manual SimaPro, General Introduction, The Netherlands
(2001).
30. R.G. Raluy, L. Serra, J. Uche and A. Valero, Life Cycle Assessment of Desalination
Technologies integrated with Energy Production Systems. Desalination 167, 445-
458 (2004).
31. L. Garcia, A. I. Palmero and C. Gómez, Application of Direct Steam Generation into
a Solar Parabolic Trough Collector to Multieffect Distillation. Desalination 125, pp.
139-145 (1999).
32. T. Espino, B. Peñate, and G. Piernavieja, Proyecto Dessol: experiencia piloto de
desalación de agua de mar por ósmosis inversa alimentada con energía solar
fotovoltaica. Una opción de abastecimiento para zonas costeras. AEDyR 3rd Annual
Congress, Málaga Spain, (2002).
33. European Commission. El Hierro, towards a 100% renewable energy supply. Project
founded by the DGTren (7 UE partners).
 392

34. R.G. Raluy, L. Serra and J. Uche, Life Cycle Assessment of Desalination
Technologies integrated with Renewable Energies. Desalination 183, 597-609
(2005).
35. L. Valenzuela, E. Zarza, M. Berenguel and E.F. Camacho, Direct Steam Generation
in Solar Boilers. IEEE Control Systems Magazine, 15-29 (2004).
36. L. García-Rodriguez, A. Palmero and C. Gómez-Camacho, Perspectives of Solar-
assisted Desalination. Desalination 136 (1-3), 213-218 (2001).
37. L. García-Rodriguez, A. Palmero and C. Gómez-Camacho, Comparison of Solar
Termal Technologies ofr Applications to Seawater Desalination. Desalination, 142
(2), 135-142 (2002).
38. T. Tsoutsos, V. Gekas and K. Marketaki, Technical and economical evaluation of
solar thermal power generation. Renewable Energy 28 (6), 873-886 (2003).
39. J. Uche, L. Serra, A. Sanz, Integration of Desalination with Cold-Heat-Power
production in the Agro-Food Industry. Desalination 166, 379-391 (2004).
40. C. Foronda, L. Serra, J. Uche, V. Verda and A. Valero, Integration of Reverse
Osmosis Desalination with Cold-Heat-Power Production in the Tertiary Sector In:
Proceedings of IMECE’03. 2003 ASME International Mechanical Engineering
Congress & Exposition. Washington D.C. November 17-21 (2003).
41. M. Schiffler, Desalination: Recent Trends and the Role of the World Bank, Presented
in: Water week, 24-26 February, Washington D.C. (2004).
42. J. Uche, Thermoeconomic Analysis and Optimization of a Dual-Purpose Power and
Desalination plant. Ph. D. Thesis, Department of Mechanical Engineering, University
of Zaragoza (2000).
43. L. Awerbuch, Vision for Desalination - Challenges and Opportunities. IDA 2002
Conference, Manama, Bahrain (2002).
44. G. Ejjeh, Desalination, a Reliable Source of New Water. International Conference
Spanish Hydrological Plan and Sustainable Water Management, Zaragoza (2001).
45. M. Fariñas, Novedades tecnológicas en la desalación por ósmosis inversa.
International Conference Spanish Hydrological Plan and Sustainable Water
Management, Zaragoza (2001).
46. J. MacHarg, Exchange tests verify 2.0 kWh/m3 SWRO energy use. International
Desalination & Water Reuse Quarterly, 11/1: 1-3 (2001).
47. I. Bremere, M. Kennedy, A. Stikker, and J. Schippers, How Water Scarcity will
Effect the Growth in the Desalination Market in the Coming 25 years. Desalination
138, pp. 7-15 (2001).
REMOVAL OF CHLOROBENZENES FROM GROUNDWATER USING
A COMBINED SOLAR PHOTOCATALYTIC/STRIPPING REACTOR

GYÖRGY MINK , LÁSZLÓ HORVÁTH

Institute of Materials and Environmental Chemistry, CRC HAS, Pusztaszeri út 59-65,
Budapest, H-1025, HUNGARY

GYÖRGY MÉDER
NÖV-KÖR Co. Ltd., Külterület 1204
Hidas, H-7696, HUNGARY

KÁROLY WELTHER
Palladin Co. Ltd., Dugovics u. 22
Veszprém, H-8200, HUNGARY

IMRE HÁZI
Sol Oriens Deposit Co., Szilágyi u. 54/c
Szigetszentmiklós, H-2310, HUNGARY

FRANCESCO FLORIS
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Cagliari University
Cagliari, ITALY

PIERRO MULAS
ECOS S.R.L.
Cagliari, 09131, ITALY

Several decades ago serious contamination of the soil and groundwater occurred in Hidas, Hungary,
due to the non-proper deposition of large amount of chlorobenzene wastes. To defend the drinking
water basin of the area a depression method is used and the groundwater pumped up is purified by a
UV oxidation lamp reactor, which operates at its full capacity. To make possible to increase the load
on the lamp reactor, the development of a pre-purification system, a combined solar
photocatalytic/stripping reactor has been developed on pilot plant scale for testing and optimization.
The main features of this reactor are: (i) Daytime, in the presence of anatase-TiO2 catalyst, it
operates as a solar photocatalytic reactor utilizing the solar UV radiation for the mineralization of
chlorbenzenes, (ii) The integrated stripper works day and night and serves for the removal of
chlobenzenes by air purging. Air flows counter-currently with the water film, and chlorbenzenes
removed by the air flow are oxidized in a catalytic air cleaning reactor, and (iii) Daytime the reactor
functions also as a solar collector to heat water and thus, to accelerate the stripping process.

393
394

1 Introduction
Chlorobenzenes are persistent, poisoning, biologically non-degradable or hardly
degradable materials. Their half-life in air is about one year, and their partly oxidized
products like chlorophenols are extremely poisoning.
Two decades ago 16,000 tons of mixed poly-chlorobenzene waste, an industrial
residue had been deposited in 72,000 metal barrels on open company fields first in Hidas,
Cf., Figure 1, and then nearby Garé, Hungary. Due to the corrosion of the barrels, most of
the waste (a solid material in winter and a viscous liquid in the summer period) leaked
out, resulting in serious contamination of the soil and the groundwater.

Figure 1. Deposition of 72 000 barrels of mixed chlorobenzene waste.

To hinder the migration of contaminated water towards the drinking water basin of
the areas, a “depression method” is used that means continuous pumping of groundwater
from the contaminated area, Cf., Figure 2.

PRODUCING 500
WELLS (29) m3/d UV
Oxidation
OBSERVATION PLANT
WELLS CONTAMINATED
(ANALYSIS) AREA

CREEK
SOIL

GROUNDWATER

IMPERMEABLE LAYER

Figure 2. The scheme of the hydraulic depression method and the UV oxidation plant.
 395

The water pumped up from the 29 wells presently contains about 0.1 - 1 mg/L
impurity with a weighed average of about 0.2 mg/L. The impurity consists of isomers of
di-, tri-, and tetrachlorobenzene isomers together with penta- and hexachlorobenzene.
Contaminated water is purified to about 0.02 mg/L concentration in a 500 m3/d capacity
UV-oxidation lamp reactor, and then, by active carbon adsorbers to achieve the
environmental limit of about 0.001 mg/L.
In spite of the continuous pumping, according to hydro geological research modeling
the migration of impurities [1], there is an urgent need to increase both the number of
pumps and the plant capacity [1]. To solve the problem on a most economic way, the
development of a compatible, 1000 m3/d capacity pre-purification system has been
envisaged to make possible to increase the load on the present UV-oxidation reactor up to
1000 m3/d. As a first step, the development of a combined, energy saving technology on
50 m3/d scale has been started in 2004 [2]. Based upon our previous results [1], the new
project applies solar photocatalytic oxidation, and parallel or alternatively to this, water
purification by stripping.

2 Theoretical bases of the new technology

2.1. UV oxidation of chlorobenzenes

It is well known that the molecules can be activated not only by thermal treatment, but
also by irradiation with photons, provided that the molecule is able to absorb the photon
at the given wavelength. If the energy of the absorbed photon equals to or it is higher than
the bond energy between the atoms, the molecule can dissociate to free atoms and radicals
that have extremely high reactivity, and in the presence of oxidizing agents (O2, H2O2, O3,
etc.) total mineralization of the molecule to CO2 and HCl can be achieved.
Chlorobenzenes are very stable molecules with high bond energies, Cf., Table 1.
Table 1. Bond energies and the corresponding photon wavelengths.
BOND EDISS, kJ/mol EDISS, eV λphoton, nm
Aromatic C-C 502 5.21 238
Aromatic C-H 461 4.78 259.1
Aromatic C-Cl 335 3.47 357
HO-OH 214 2.21 560

As mentioned, the rupture of a chemical bond occurs only if the molecule is able to
absorb the photons of the given (or higher) photon energy. The UV adsorption bands of
chlorobenzenes are narrow band structures in the region of 245-301 nm wavelengths [3].
Unfortunately, this region is practically absent in the terrestrial solar spectrum. (Due to
the UV absorption by ozone layer, solar radiation colliding the Earth’s surface contains
only negligible amount of UV components below 300 nm, and nothing below 280 nm).
Therefore, efficient activation of chlorobenzenes occurs only by using deep UV
range photons of the (mercury) lamp reactors. This is the reason why the rate of the
oxidation of chlorobenzenes in the air is so slow, and their lifetime (half-life, t1/2) is so
396

long, it is in the range of one year. In the presence of appropriate catalysts, however, the
rate of solar UV oxidation can be increased by a factor of several thousands. The process
is called as solar photocatalytic oxidation.

2.2. Solar photocatalytic oxidation of chlorobenzenes

Metal oxides, mostly SrTiO3 and TiO2 have been used since a long time as photo-
catalysts in photochemical synthesis, and for the destruction of biologically non-
degradable contaminants. The advantages of the use of photocatalysts are:
• In lamp reactors they are able to utilize the near UV radiation of the lamps that
otherwise can not initiate a reaction.
• They make possible solar water detoxification in such cases when the photon
energy of the terrestrial UV radiation itself is insufficient to initiate a reaction.

UV Photocatalysts

Anatase-TiO2 catalysts that have the highest photocatalytic detoxification efficiency are
the most widely used ones. From these, high surface area catalysts very stable suspensions
can be produced. To all probability, the most important application of TiO2 catalysts is
related to the oxidative mineralization of biologically non-degradable (hardly degradable)
materials such as halogenated aliphatic and aromatic compounds in water [4-8].
The mechanism of photocatalysis is the following: TiO2 is semiconductor with a wide
band gap (EG ≈ 3.2 eV, referring to about 385 nm photon wavelength) between the
valence band and the conduction band. Only light below 385 nm is absorbed and capable
of forming a pair of e- and h+ hole on the catalyst. Then, since in water the surface of TiO2
is hydrated, the h+ hole can react with hydroxyl ion, adsorbed water or hydrated proton,
depending on the pH. In all cases an adsorbed OH-radical is formed, which is far more
the strongest oxidation agent with the highest oxidation potential, and therefore, it is able
to react with such persistent molecules like chlorobenzenes, PCBs, etc.
Summarizing the foregoing, with the use of TiO2 catalysts, a great fraction of the
terrestrial UV radiation can be utilized for water detoxification. Quite natural, the
quantum efficiency depends also on the concentrations and the recombination rate of the
e- and h+ pairs. In other words, in the presence of a photocatalysts a new reaction pathway
opens, which is able to utilize solar UV radiation for the mineralization of high stability
organic impurities.

The kinetics of the solar photocatalytic oxidation

Static systems. We consider that at constant UV radiation intensity and constant catalyst’s
concentration the reaction is closely first order in chlorobenzenes, since the concentration
of the oxidizing agent (in our case dissolved oxygen) is in very large excess. The
differential equation is:
- dC/dt ≈ k1 IUV ΘChloroB, (1)
 397

where are: k - the rate constant of the reaction; ΘChloroB - the surface coverage of TiO2 by
chlorobenzene, and IUV - the solar UV radiation intensity.
At very low concentrations (in our case in the micromole/L range) the initial section of
every adsorption isotherm is closely linear:
ΘChloroB ≈ const. C. (2)
Introducing Eq. (2) into Eq. (1) we have:
- dC/dt ≈ k1 IUV const. C. (3)
Integration with boundary conditions t = 0, C = Co:
C ≈ Co e-k1 IUV const. t.. (4)

Flow systems. In this case time t should be replaced by the residence time tR, which is
tR = VWater /vwater. (5)
Here vwater is the flow rate of water, and VWater is the stationary volume of the 1 mm thick
water layer present in the reactor. The concentration of chlorobenzene in the pre-purified
water exiting the reactor is:
Cout ≈ Co e-k1 IUV const. VWater /vWater. (6)
From Eq. (6) the pre-purification efficiency (conversion) φ = (Co – Cout) /Co) is:
φ ≈ 1 – exp - (k1 IUV const VWater /vWater). (7)
It is seen that under fixed reaction conditions the conversion is independent of the
initial concentration, which is a unique feature of the first order reactions. Naturally, in
the case of mixed chlorobenzenes the case is not so simple, since the reactivity of the
different components may differ significantly from each other. This difference, however,
especially in the case of the main components of the contaminated groundwater is not so
high, and therefore, both in closed and flow reactors in all cases closely first order
kinetics has been obtained for the variation of the total chlorobenzene concentration with
time or residence time.

2.3. Removal of chlorobenzenes by stripping

In spite of their low concentration and very low vapour pressure, chlorobenzenes easily
evaporate from water. Their half-lifetime in water is in the range of several hours or days,
depending on the depth and state (static, moving, stirred) of the water bed. The
explanation is that chlorobenzenes form non-ideal solutions with water. As recognized
earlier [1, 2], the equilibrium vapour pressure in aqueous solution is:
pPolychlorobenzene = poPolychlorobenzene c/csat. (8)
398

It means that in saturated solutions the vapour pressure of chlorobenzenes Equals to

that of the pure component, irrespective of the fact that the molar fraction of
chlorobenzenes at saturation is far not unity, it is only 10-7 - 10-9. In such cases the
Equilibrium vapour pressure of the dissolved impurity will be 7 to 9 magnitudes higher
than in the case of ideal solutions, which explains the easy evaporation of chlorobenzenes
from water.
Static systems. The kinetic Equation of water purification in a static reactor is:
c = co exp – [(ρ* po) / csat] (vAir / VWater) t. (9)
where are: c - the concentration of the given chlorobenzene in mg/L; co - the initial
concentration of the given chlorobenzene in mg/L; csat - the solubility of the given
chlorobenzene in water in mg/L; ρ* - the vapour density of the given chlorobenzene at T
temperature and 1 Pa pressure; ρ* = 0.1203 M/T in g/m3/Pa (M is the molecular weight
in g/mol and T is the temperature of stripping in K); po - the vapour pressure of the given
chlorobenzene in Pa at the temperature of stripping; vAir - the flow rate of air in m3/s;
VWater - the volume of the water in the stripping reactor in m3 and t - the time of the
stripping in s.
For kinetic calculations solubility data were collected from different handbooks. The
temperature dependence of the vapour pressure of all chlorobenzenes was determined by
extrapolation of the log P – 1/T diagrams that were created from literature data [9].
Stripping in flow reactor. The kinetic Equation for flow systems is obtained by replacing
time t with the residence time tR in Eq. (9). The residence time tR = VWater /vwater as before:
COut = Co exp - [(ρ* po / CSat) (vAir / vwater )]. (10)
The conversion can be given as:
φ = 1 - exp - [(ρ* po / CSat) (vAir / vwater )]. (11)
It is seen again that the conversion does not depend on the initial concentration.

3 Design and Construction

3.1. The main directives of system design

The criteria concerning the design of the solar photocatalytic reactor were:
• The system should utilize efficiently the solar UV radiation for the mineralization of
chlorobenzenes in the presence of photocatalyst and oxidizing agent (O2, H2O2, etc.).
• The system should be a closed one to avoid the escape of chlorobenzenes to air.
• The system should be supplied with a stripper that can operate day and night.
• Both in its solar photocatalytic and stripping reactor functions the reactor should be a
continuous flow reactor.
• During stripping the water flow and air flow should be in counter-current.
 399

• The reactor should be able to operate also as a solar collector to heat water by the
visible and near IR radiation of the sun to accelerate the stripping process.
• The outlet air containing chlorobenzenes should be directed to an air purification
system and purified air should be recycled to the stripping process.
• The system should be transportable on public road, to utilize it for future tasks on
another spot.
Postulates
1. The targeted capacity of the pilot plant is 2 m3/h.
2. The total concentration of chlorobenzenes coming from different wells is 0.1 < 1
mg/m3, with a weighed average of about 0.2 mg/m3. The main components are:
Trichlorobenzenes (< 0.2 mg/L), Tetrachlorobenzenes (< 0.4 mg/L),
Pentachlorobenzene (< 0.2 mg/L), Hexachlorobenzene (< 0.1 mg/L).
3. The temperature of water entering the reactor is 12 oC = 285 K, i.e., it equals to the
temperature of groundwater.
Determination of the required air flow rate
Assume the case when thin layer of water flows counter-currently with air, and the
equilibrium is almost perfectly achieved. Assume the partial pressure in the exiting air is
only 80 % of the equilibrium value. Then it can be written:
pPolychlorobenzene = 0.8 poPolychlorobenzene c/csat. (12)
To determine the required air flow rate, assume the removal of pentachlorobenzene
(one of the main components of the impurity with low vapour pressure) from water
considering the least favourable conditions referring to winter season in the night: T =
285 K (12 oC), that equals to the temperature of groundwater; cPENTA = 0.2 mg/kg, that is
slightly higher than the average value. From literature data the solubility, cPENTA, sat = 0.83
mg/L. The vapour pressure extrapolated to 285 K: poPENTA, 285 K = 0.27 Pa. From Eq. (3),
its partial pressure in the exiting air pPENTA, AIR OUT = 0.052 Pa.
The vapour density of pentachlorobenzene at 285 K ρ*PENTA, 285 K = 0.0903 g/m3/Pa,
and its concentration in the exiting air CPENTA, AIR OUT = 0.052 (Pa) x 0.0903 (g/m3/Pa) =
0.0047 g/m3. Since the targeted water flow is 2 m3/h, the mass flow rate of
pentachlorobenzene entering the stripper is 0.4 g/h. The removal of such amount of
pentachlorobenzene requires an air flow of vAIR = 0.4 g/h / 0.0047 g/m3 = 85.1 m3/h,
which, with a margin of safety is vAIR = 100 m3/h.
Type of the photocatalytic/stripping reactor. A thin rectangular tray-type reactor with
transparent glass glazing had been selected. This allows the use of high air flow rates,
provides intense contact between the thin layer liquid and air. The cover exhibits the
evaporation of chlorobenzenes to the atmosphere; it is transparent for solar radiation,
including also, to a less extent, the UV radiation of the sun.
The transparent cover. The cover is a medium quality, 4 mm table glass fixed upon the
tray. According to experiments, it withstands to pressure fluctuations occurring 100 m3/h
400

air flow rate. Its UV transmittance in the terrestrial solar UV region as determined by
spectrophotometer is shown in Figure 3.

INTENS ITY, TRANS MITTED UV

W/m2 / nm INCIDENT UV
1

0,8

0,6
0,4
0,2
0
300

320

340

360

380

400
WAVELENGHTH, nm

Figure 3. The smoothed terrestrial solar UV radiation (summer, peak hours) and its transmission through 4 mm
glass pane.

In spite of the wide absorption band of the glass at 325 nm, below 385 nm about 60
% of the terrestrial solar UV radiation is transmitted by the glass cover.
Required photocatalytic reactor area. Based upon kinetic evaluation of our previous
results obtained by a 4.5 m2 area solar photocatalytic reactor [1,2], 32 m2 reactor area has
been chosen, since using such an area, in an average summer day about 2 m3 water could
be purified to the required level in one hour, without stripping. Considering that the usual
size of the metal plates is 1m x 2m, four parallel units, each of 2m x 4m size and 8 m2
area has been designed.
Rim of the trays. The tray’s rim was designed as 0.02 m. With such a rim and at 100 m3/h
(0.0278 m3/s) air flow rate the fluid-mechanical characteristics of the reactor are:
• The linear velocity of air, vAIR, LIN = 0.174 m/s, with no foam formation inside the
tray.
• The Reynolds number, Re = D(e) v ρ / µ = 417, i.e., the flow is laminar.
• The friction coefficient λTray = 64/Re = 0.153.
• Sum of the local resistances inside the tray ΣξTray = 0
• The pressure drop inside the tray∆PTray = 0.28 Pa, i.e., it is negligible.
For determining the Reynolds number ρ = 1.2 kg/m3 air density and µ = 0.00002 Ns/m2
viscosity was considered. The pressure drop is calculated for 4 m reactor length.
Reactor. The schematic diagram of one module of the reactor is shown in Figure 4. It is
fixed onto a „self-carrying” metal frame, to make possible the transportation and easy
installation of the ready modules. The weight of such a module with glass cover is 252 kg.
 401

100
Air in

Air out
Glass cover
Water in
100
25

Water out Glass textile

4000

Figure 4. Scheme of one module of the integrated photocatalytic/stripping reactor.

In both ends the trays are supplied with 2 m long, 0.1 m wide and 0.1 m high
chambers that serve for gas and liquid distribution and collection, Cf., Figure 1. The fluid
mechanical features of air at reactor inlet and outlet are:
• Inlet tube diameter, D = 0.06 m.
• Cross sectional area in the tube, A1 = 0.0028 m2.
• Cross sectional area in the distributor, A2 = 0.2 m2.
• Linear velocity of air in the tube, vTube, lin = 2.46 m/s
• Reynolds number, ReTube = D v ρ /µ, ReTube = 8820 (turbulent)
• Friction coefficient (from handbooks) λTube = 0.032
• Local resistance due to sudden widening Σξ = 0.5
• Pressure drop due to sudden widening∆P = 0.06 Pa
Similar pressure drop appears at the reactor outlet. Altogether the pressure drop is
marginal. It means that the integration of the reactor into the tubing system dos not effect
the hydrodynamic properties of the system. Much care has to be devoted, however, to
design the tubing, the catalytic oxidation reactor and the pump system to achieve closely
atmospheric pressure inside the reactor during operation.
Operation of the reactor. The parallel units are moderately tilted towards the water exit.
Water containing suspended TiO2 is fed by variable speed water pump connected to the
PC. Water is distributed in each unit and flows down by gravity, forming about one mm
thick moving layer. From the reactor water flows by gravity to a collection tank and after
micro filtering that serves for the removal of TiO2 particles for reuse, it is pumped into the
purified water tank.
The bottom of the tray is lined with a glass textile sheet. One of its functions is to
distribute water inside the tray. Its other function is to fix TiO2 particles that precipitated
from water. Thus, the bottom of the reactor tray is always covered with TiO2. Air is also
distributed and flows counter-currently with water, to achieve the highest efficiency in
stripping. Inside the reactor both the air flow and the water flow are laminar.
Solar collector function of the reactor. To decrease heat losses the reactor modules are
back insulated with 5 mm thick plastic foam. Though the absorber (metal plate covered
402

by TiO2 in glass textile matrix and water layer) is far not ideal, detailed calculations
supported by experimental data [2] have shown that the collector efficiency in winter and
summer is 30 % and 70 %, respectively.

3.2. Technological scheme of the pilot plant

The technological scheme of the pilot plant is shown in Figure 5.

T (amb)
T8
Catalytic Heat
Reactor Echanger
Air Flow Meter
(Air cleaner) and control
Adsorber

T6

T5 Condenser Adsorber Air

Pump

T4

Strippind and Photocatalytic Water Flow

Oxidation Reactors T1 Meter &
control
T2,3
Purified Raw Filtered
water Water Raw
Filter Tank Tank Filter Water
+ TiO2

Figure 5. The flow sheet of the pilot plant of 2 m3/d capacity.

Water line. From the raw water tank, with the use of a level-controlled pump, the raw
water passes trough a micro filter to remove solid particles and enters the filtered raw
water tank. Here, with the addition of TiO2 and with permanent stirring a suspension is
created. From this tank a controlled flow of the TiO2-water suspension is pumped up and
distributed to 4 Equal flows to feed the 4 reactors. In each reactor the suspension is
distributed alongside the unit. In the reactors water is purified either by stripping or by
catalytic photooxidation, or both. Purified water-TiO2 suspension exiting the reactors
flows by gravity into a tank. From here, with the use of a level-controlled pump, it is
pumped through a micro filter to separate and recycle TiO2 particles. The filtered water is
lead into the purified water tank for analysis (and then, if the concentrations are below the
limit, it is lead into a creek).
Air line. Air exiting the reactor enters a condenser where its excess water content is
removed. Then, chlorobenzenes are captured in one of the two active carbon adsorbers
and purified air is recycled for stripping. Parallel to this the other adsorber is regenerated
with a much lower air flow at 300-320 oC, and chlorobenzenes swept by the hot air flow
are oxidized in a catalytic oxidation reactor to CO2, H2O and HCl, and the effluent gas is
 403

directed into the raw water tank where HCl is neutralized by hydro carbonates that are
present in raw water in large excess.

3.3. Construction and installation of the pilot plant

The 4 modules of the reactor were designed and constructed by IMEC CRC HAS. Then,
the modules were transported to the company field of Növ-Kör Co. Ltd. in Hidas.
Installation of the pilot plant was designed and made by Növ-Kör Co. Ltd. Besides its 3
functions (photocatalysis, stripping and solar collector) the reactor got a further function:
The roof of the pilot plant was constructed from the 4 trays, Cf., Figure 6. In the two
„rooms” (each of 16 m2 area) the additional machines and units (Catalytic air cleaner,
Condenser, Adsorbers, Pumps, Flow meters, Liquid tanks, Filter systems, Data collection
and process control system had been placed.

Air out Air in Air in Air out

Water Water
in Collector 1 Collector 3 in
Water
Collector 2 out Collector 4

Purified
Water
2500

LABOUR room 1 LABOUR room 2

Tank 00
40

4000 2000 4000

Figure 6. The schematic view of the pilot plant.

3.4. Data acquisition, process control

The pilot plant is supplied with a data acquisition and process control system. Fluid
streams are monitored and controlled, the relevant temperatures, the solar radiation
intensity, the solar UV radiation intensity are monitored.

3.5. Determination of the required pre-purification level

UV oxidation in the 500 m3/d capacity lamp reactor is also (pseudo) first order in
chlorobenzenes, since the water flow rate and the UV radiation intensity is constant and
the concentration of the oxidizing agents (dissolved oxygen and H2O2 additive) is order(s)
of magnitude higher than the oxygen demand of the photooxidation. Kinetic calculations
have shown [2], that using raw water with the average, ≈200 microgram/L initial
concentration, at least 66.5 % pre-purification level is required for increasing the load to
1000 m3/d without compromising the quality of the purified water, Cf., Table 2.
404

Table 2. Required pre-purification levels at different initial concentrations for 1000

m3/h loading
Initial raw water Required concentration Required pre-purification
concentration for 1000 m3/h loading efficiency
300 µg/L Max. 67 µg/L Min. 77,6 %
250 µg/L Max. 67 µg/L Min. 73,2 %
200 µg/L* Max. 67 µg/L Min. 66,5 %
150 µg/L Max. 67 µg/L Min. 55,3 %

4 Results

4.1. Trial of the system

Using strongly contaminated water with 494 µg/litre total initial concentration, the first
trial was made in a clear sunny day in 3 operational modes at vWater = 2 m3/h loading:
• Purification by stripping (vAir = 100 m3/h, the mean reactor temperature Tm = 285 K).
• Purification only in solar photocatalytic operational mode (the global solar radiation
G = 670 W/m2, the solar UV radiation IUV = 34 W/m2, Tmean = 291 K, TiO2 = 1 g/L).
• Purification by solar photocatalysis + stripping. (vAir = 100 m3/h, G = 610 W/m2, IUV
= 28 W/m2, Tmean = 289 K, catalyst = 1 g/L). The results are given in Table 3.

Table 3. Impurity concentrations in µg/litre before and after purification

MAIN COMPONENTS In raw Case (a): after Case (b): after Case (c): after
water stripping photocatalysis photocatalysis
+ stripping
1,4- dichloroB 4.3 1.5 1.7 0.8
1,2,4-trichloroB 103 28 26 12
1,3,5-trichloroB 11 3,8 3.1 1.7
1,2,3,4-tetrachloroB 291 73 67 31
1,2,3,5-tetrachloroB 18 5.1 6.3 2.5
1,2,4,5-tetrachloroB 4.0 1.6 1.8 0.9
Pentachlorobenzene 63 19 17 7.6
Hexachlorobenzene 3.7 0.8 0.9 0.3
TOTAL 494 132.8 123.8 56.8
Pre-purification level 0% 73.2 % 74.9 % 88.5 %

As Table 3 shows, in the first two cases the concentration of the pre-purified water
could not be suppressed below 66.5 µg/litre total concentration, which is the main criterion
for increasing the load on the existing lamp reactor. On the other hand, in all cases higher
then than 66.5 % pre-purification level has been achieved, which is quite satisfactory in our
case when the average concentration is only 200 microgram/litre, Cf. Table 2.

4.2. Optimization of the system

After the trial the work was focused on system optimization both in terms of system
performance and economic feasibility. The most successful modification was the
 405

reconstruction of the water distribution to achieve complete and equable wetting of the
reactor’s bottom. Results obtained by the optimized system are shown in Figure 7 and
Figure 8.

100

80
Efficiency, %

60

40

20

0
0,0 10,0 20,0 30,0 40,0
UV intensity, W/m2

Figure 7. Solar photocatalytic oxidation of chlorobenzenes before (diamond) and after optimization (squares).
Horizontal line is the required limit. (vWATER = 2 m3/h, vAIR = 100 m3/h, catalyst’s concentration = 1 g/L).

100
90
80
Eficiency, %

70
60 TEST, 2m3/h
50
40 Limit
30
20
10
0
0,0 10,0 20,0 30,0 40,0
UV Intensity, W/m 2

Figure 8. Solar photocatalytic oxidation combined with stripping. Diamond – test result before optimization,
squares – after optimization. (vWATER = 2 m3/h, vAIR = 100 m3/h, catalyst’s concentration = 1 g/L).

Based upon the results the technological plans of a scaled-up, 1000 m3/d capacity
pre-purification plant has been elaborated. Though the technology discussed above is
energy saving and economic, the energy need of the pumps to filter off TiO2 from its
suspensions is not negligible. Now the work is focused on the development of such a
system in which the catalyst is fixed upon the inner surface of the combined reactor.

Acknowledgments
This research was supported by the Hungarian Ministry of Education, Project No:
OMFB-00317-321/2004, and the Hungarian-Italian Cooperation in Science &
Technology, Project No. I-20/2003.
406

Nomenclature
C, c - the concentration of the given chlorobenzene, mg/L;
Co, co - the initial concentration of the given chlorobenzene, mg/L;
Csat - the solubility of the given chlorobenzene, mg/L;
D(e) - Equivalent diameter, m;
IUV - the terrestrial solar UV radiation intensity on horizontal surface, W/m2;
M - molecular weight of the given chlorobenzene, g/mol;
p - the partial pressure of the given chlorobenzene, Pa;
po - the vapour pressure of the given chlorobenzene in Pa at the temperature of stripping;
∆PTray - the pressure drop inside the tray, Pa;
Re - the Reynolds number, -;
t - the time of the stripping or photocatalytic oxidation in static systems, s;
tR - the residence time in flow systems, s;
T - the temperature of stripping, K;
vAir - the flow rate of air, m3/s;
vAir, lin - the linear velocity of air, m/s;
vwater - the flow rate of water, m3/s;
VWater - stationary volume of the water in the stripping reactor, m3;
λTray - the friction coefficient, -;
ρ* = 0.1203 M/T, the vapour density of chlorobenzene at 1 Pa pressure, g/m3/Pa;
ΣξTray - the sum of the local resistances inside the tray, -;
ΘChloroB - the surface coverage of TiO2 by chlorobenzenes, -;

References

1. G. Házi, G. Mink, K. Méder, K. Welther and F. Henézi, Final Report to the

Hungarian Ministry of Education, Project No: OMFB-00919/2002 (2003).
2. G. Mink, L. Horváth, G. Méder, K. Welther, I. Házi and F. Henézi, Final Report to
the Hungarian Ministry of Education, Project No: OMFB-00317-321/2004 (2005).
3. Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 60th Edition, CRC Press Inc., Boca Raton,
Florida, pp. C – 81-548 (1980).
4. N. Serpone, R. Terzian, C. Minero and E. Pelizetti, Adv. Chem. Series 238, 281
(1993).
5. D. F. Ollis, E. Pelizetti and N. Serpone, Environm. Sci. & Technol. 25 (9), 1522
(1991).
6. W. H. Glaze, J. F. Kenneke and J. L. Ferry, Environm. Sci. & Technol. 27, 177
(1993).
7. C. S. Turchi and D. F. Ollis, J. Catal. 122, 178 (1990)
8. G. Mills and R. Hoffman, Environm. Sci. & Technol. 27, 1681 (1993).
9. Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 60th Edition, pp. D-203-220 (1980).
RELIABLE TRANSPORT OF SEWAGE WATER WITH CENTRIFUGAL
PUMPS – ALL TECHNICAL PROBLEMS SOLVED?

FRIEDRICH-KARL BENRA
Department of Turbomachinery, Institute of Energy and Environmental Engineering,
University of Duisburg-Essen, Lotharstr. 1
Duisburg, 47048, Germany

The supply of purified drinking water is indispensable in most inhabited areas of the earth and is
therefore regarded in many areas as urgent task. In contrast, in many countries a central effluent
disposal is realised only in closely inhabited areas so far. Since the emergence of waste water is
extremely different in special regions such as cities, villages or rural areas, the collection and
transport must be aligned to the special conditions. The hydraulic conveyance of waste water by
centrifugal pumps provides some technical problems. Due the composition of the sewage water no
conventional centrifugal pump can be used for the transportation of sewage water. The technical
problems of the waste water transport by centrifugal pumps can be attributed predominantly to the
pollution of the water and to the therefore necessary special pump geometry. Experience has shown,
that pumps which are equipped with a single-blade impeller, show the smallest risk of clogging and
still have relatively good efficiencies. However these pumps show the disadvantage that their
operational behaviour is coined by enormous flow forces. These hydrodynamic forces provide high
mechanical loads for the pump construction units (shaft, bearings, seals, etc.) and they are
responsible for the transmission of vibrations to the environment. Beside clogging of the pumps,
which can be caused by solids such as paper, textiles, wood, fibrous materials, sand of different
granulation and particularly biologically degradable components, substantial vibrations as well as
corrosion and abrasion effects are produced in sewage water pumps. In this contribution the
problems arising during the conveyance of polluted water by centrifugal pumps are represented,
analysed and paths to their solution are pointed out. Finally some examples for an ideal sewage
water transport are discussed. For these examples the described technical problems in the field of
pump technology are eliminated in the majority of cases. Thus the sewage transport, which is
automated to a large extent is very reliable.

1 Introduction
A study of [1] shows that there is about 1.38 billions km3 of water on the planet earth. But
only 36 million km3, which is about 2.6%, is sweet water and only 10% of this sweet
water can be used as drinking water. The supply of purified drinking water therefore is
indispensable in most inhabited areas of the earth and is therefore regarded in many areas
as the most urgent task. In Europe the supply of drinking water is assured. In Figure 1 the
usage of drinking water of several European countries is shown. The consume of drinking
water in Europe is between 120 litres per resident (Belgium) and 260 litres per resident
(Norway) for a day.
Because of the different use of water (personal hygiene, washing, flush, dish washing,
and so on), with this water consumption the discharge of particular substances is aligned.
So the drinking water becomes waste water, which has to be treated separately. The water,
which has become waste water by the use of human beings can contain the an-organic
ingredients and organic ingredients. A discharge of the waste water without purification

407
408

leads to a distribution of harmful substances, which can already be inserted into the cycle
of food. This is the reason that waste water must be processed and purified. The self-
cleaning effect of watercourses (rivers, lakes, oceans) is limited because the
decomposition of organic compounds by micro-organisms is limited by the oxygen
content in the water. So waste water must be regarded as part of the elemental hydrologic
cycle and could be treated as a renewable resource.

Figure 1. Usage of drinking water per resident and day for some European countries [1].

To purify the waste water it has to be transported from the location of its emergence
(pollution) to the location, where it can be processed (purification). The total volume of
waste water can be assembled from the following portions: domestic sewage, municipal
waste water, agricultural sewage, industrial waste water, rainwater, infiltration water.
In Germany the amount of municipal waste water is about 25 million m3 per day.
After [2] the amount of waste water for different regions obviously is strong variable
during the day. Figure 2 shows the amount of sewage water for a region, which is
predominantly a residential area and a region which has a strong influence of industry.
Both figures show that the variation from an average volume of waste water is very strong
during the day and during the night.

Figure 2. Emergence of sewage water: left diagram: residential area, right diagram: industrial area.
 409

The transport of the sewage water to the location where it can be purified must be
designed for all cases. Where it is possible due to the characteristics of the terrain the
waste water can be transported by a sewer, which is open (at the surface) or closed
(underground). There are several sewer systems which are used in different regions. One
is the combined sewer system, where sewage water together with rainwater is transported.
The second is the separate sewer system where sewage water and rainwater are
transported by different systems. Very often the transport of waste water by downward
slope is not feasible. For these cases other techniques must be established. As an example
the waste water transport by a pressure line can be mentioned. In this cases the sewage
water is transported by pumps through pipes. Finally sewage water must be transported by
pumps, to bring it to a treatment plant.
In ancient times waste water has already been conveyed through a canalisation.
Sewer systems are known from the 6th millennium before Christ from Turkey. In the 5th
century Anno Domini sewage water systems have been built in Rome. When the
industrialisation leads to a strong rise of urban population, the problems concerning the
hygiene and disposal of excrements increased. The invention of the water closet had also
a strong influence on the emergence of sewage water. So the construction of sewage water
systems started again in the 19th century, because of some cases of epidemic.
In the last 150 years the waste water treatment developed from chemical treatment to
the mechanical biological treatment. In Figure 3 the sources of sewage water are shown
for a residential area. About 28% of all waste water is domestic sewage. Nearly 60%
comes from rainwater and about 10% from industry. The whole waste water is collected
by a canalisation and conveyed to a treatment plant. After purification the water can be
given back to the natural cycle. Already today most of the waste water throughout the
world stays untreated and is guided without purification into rivers, lakes and oceans.
Only a small part of it is purified until now. The amount of purification differs very strong
from region to region. In Germany one can assume a nearly complete treatment of all
incidental waste water (about 85 % biological treatment). In contrast, in many countries a
complete waste water treatment is realised only in closely inhabited areas. In the next
decade in other countries of the European Union a fundamental step will be done to a
substantial treatment of the waste water. Poland for example is planning the installation of
980 water treatment stations up to the year 2015. In other non-European countries the
treatment of waste water is only at the beginning. In China for example only about 10% of
the incident sewage water is purified at this time (preferably in the cities). In Africa the
portion of waste water which is conveyed to a treatment is yet noticeable smaller. Since
the emergence of effluent is extremely different in special regions such as towns, villages
or rural areas, the collection and transport must be aligned to the special conditions.
Anyway a sustainable waste water management should include the treatment of all waste
water. A substantial reason for the only partial collection and treatment of waste water is
definitely the transport of the raw sewage water, which is much more complex compared
to the transport of purified water. The hydraulic conveyance of waste water by centrifugal
pumps provides substantially larger technical problems. Due to its composition, which
410

represents frequently a mixture from domestic sewage water, industrial waste water, local
waste water and water, which is drained off from the surface during rain, no conventional
centrifugal pump can be used for the transportation of sewage water. Only pumps, whose
lay out and design is particularly aligned with the conveyance of raw sewage water, are
suitable for a trouble-free automated sewage transport.

Figure 3. Way of the water.

This paper is addressed to the technical problems which are associated to the
transport of sewage water with centrifugal pumps. The technical problems of the waste
water transport by centrifugal pumps can be attributed predominantly to the pollution of
the water. Some of the problems arising during the conveyance of polluted water by
centrifugal pumps are discussed, analysed and paths to their solution are pointed out.
Finally some examples for an ideal sewage water transport are discussed. Additionally
some applications are shown, which contain also different sewage transport concepts. For
these examples the described technical problems in the field of pump technology have
been eliminated in the majority of cases. Thus the sewage transport, which is automated
to a large extent is very reliable.

2 Waste Water Pumping Stations

The waste water which has been collected by a sewer system finally reaches a pump
sump. This sump is part of a pumping station from which the waste water is transported to
the sewage treatment plant. Normally pumps of different sizes are installed in a pumping
station to allow the operating company to follow the sewage water emergence by
switching pumps on and off as the need arises. By this method a redundant operating
method is also ensured. Pumps can be installed in two different ways: one is the wet
installation, where a submersible pump is installed in the pump sump. An example for this
kind of installation can be seen in Figure 4.a.
 411

1 Ventilation
2 Fitting slot
3 gate valve
4 drain path
5 non-return valve
6 shifting
7 cable protection
8 mount for liquid level switch
9 collecting sewer
10 guide tube
11 discharge pipe
12 inflow chamber
13 inlet pipe
14 submersible pump
15 level switch
16 concrete pump sump
17 pump base

Figure 4.a. Wet installation of a sewage water pump [3].

In this case the pump is installed in vertical arrangement. That means the shaft of the
pump impeller and of the electric submersible motor is in vertical direction. Figure 4.b in
contrary shows a dry installation of a sewage water pump. The shaft of the pump impeller
is in horizontal direction and the pump is driven from the electric motor by a belt. The
installation room of the pump is separated from the pump sump and the pump is sucking
in the flow by an intake manifold which goes through the wall into the pump sump. The
building for a pumping station with dry installed pumps is somewhat more expensive than
for a pumping station with wet installed pumps but it has the advantage that the room for
the pumps is clean and the pumps can be inspected by the field service personnel every
time. For this kind of pump installation several designs of centrifugal pumps have been
realised in the past.

Figure 4.b. Dry installation of a sewage water pump.

412

Figure 5 gives an overview of the most common types of construction. The bloc
pump is directly coupled to the electric drive and the impeller is mounted at the shaft of
the motor. This kind of pump type can be installed both in vertical and in horizontal
direction. Its design is very compact and saves a lot of room in the building. The next
example shows a pump which is coupled to the electric drive by a clutch. This kind of
pump arrangement can also be installed horizontal and vertical but takes more room than
the bloc pump. The third and last example of the direct driven pumps shows a pump
which is driven by a power train. Not direct powered pumps can be driven by belts, chains
or gears. For more information see reference [4].

Figure 5. Different design of sewage water pumps.

Figure 6 shows a view into a pumping station with a couple of dry installed pumps.
Only two of the total number of pumps are shown. Both pumps are direct coupled bloc
pumps and the larger one (DN 400) is arranged vertical while the smaller one (DN 150) is
arranged horizontal. So the available space can be used very economical.

3 Special Design of Pumps for Transport of Sewage Water

As has been explained in the introduction chapter, waste water can be composed from
different sources. Normally several components are mixed to clean water: mechanical
pollution like slurry, sand of different granulation, paper, textiles, wood, fibrous materials
and biologically degradable components. All of these components can cause clogging of
the pumps. To decrease the risk of clogging, a special design is necessary for a pump
which is selected for the transport of sewage water. In Figure 4.b a gap of width s is
shown at the suction mouth of the pump. All solids which are sucked in at this intake
should be delivered by the pump without clogging. This requirement demands a special
 413

impeller geometry. To choose the optimal impeller geometry, in Figure 7 all emerging
fluids which contain strong parts of water are divided into four classes of pollution [4].

Figure 6. View into a pumping station [5].

Figure 7. Classification of water by the degree of pollution.

The cleanest water we can imagine is the drinking water. This water is without any
pollution and can be conveyed by any normal pump impeller, which has a certain number
of blades. The next category is process water, which is lightly polluted but mechanical
treated. This water can also be pumped by normal pump impellers, but sometimes
impellers with small numbers of blades are used. For the third and the fourth category,
414

which contain all the waste water with a considerable amount of solids, no impellers with
more than 3 blades should be used. Especially for the raw sewage water, like domestic
sewage, municipal sewage or industrial sewage, impellers with very small blade numbers
should be used. With decreasing blade number the risk of clogging reduces tremendously,
but can not be avoided at all.
Every existing leading edge of an impeller blade can collect fibrous material like
textiles, paper and so forth. As the minimum blade number is one, normally pumps with a
single blade impeller show the smallest trend for collecting fibres and they can also
transport the largest solids due to the large flow path, which is built by the impeller and
the casing. Experience has shown, that pumps which are equipped with a single-blade
impeller, show the smallest risk of clogging and still have relative good efficiencies.
However these pumps show the disadvantage that their operational behaviour is coined by
enormous flow forces. These hydrodynamic forces provide high mechanical loads for all
pump construction units (shaft, bearings, seals, etc.) and they are responsible for the
transmission of vibrations to the environment. This often leads to a pump failure or to
damages at the attached pipes or other equipment.
The choice of the right impeller for a sewage water pump is not very easy because of
the composition of the sewage water, which sometimes is not known. So all manufacturers
prepare their sewage water pumps to be equipped with different impellers. Figure 8 shows
a section throughout a sewage water pump which can be provided with a single-blade
impeller, a double-blade impeller and a free flow impeller. For pumps of bigger sizes
normally also three bladed impellers can be used.

Single-blade impeller
(sewage water with
fibrous materials and
solids)
Double-blade impeller
(sewage water which
contains solids and slurry)
Acknowledgments
multiblade
This is impeller
where one
(sewage water with small
acknowledge funding
solids but no fibres)
bodies etc. Note that
free flow numbers
section impeller are not
(sewage
requiredwater with solids,for
fibres and gas fraction)
Acknowledgments, or

Figure 8. Single stage sewage water pump for different impellers [6].
 415

4 Technical Problems of Pumps for Sewage Water Transport

4.1. Clogging of Pumps

The use of sewage water pumps with their special design, can avoid some of the problems
which appear during operation. First of all the transport of raw sewage water covers a big
risk of clogging. In Figure 9.a a view through the suction pipe into the mouth of an
impeller is shown. This pump is completely clogged by papers, textiles and some other
fibrous material. If this happens the pump does not deliver fluid anymore and must be
shut down for safety. The system must be opened and cleaned manually. This kind of
work is very nauseating and can lead to conveyance of divers diseases. Such clogging can
not be avoided in full but the choice of the right impeller will strongly decrease the risk of
clogging. So the reliability of all impellers can be classified by a so called “free ball
passage”. That means, a solid which has the shape of a sphere with a certain diameter
must be transported by the impeller without clogging. In Figure 9.b this situation is shown
for a 3 bladed pump impeller. During the development process of a sewage pump a big
free ball passage must be achieved by optimising the design of the impeller and the
casing.

Figure 9.a. Clogged sewage pump [7].

Figure 9.b. Free ball passage of a 3 bladed impeller.

416

4.2. Vibration and Mechanical Stress

Generally the largest free ball passages can be obtained for single-blade impellers. Due to
their uneven distribution of mass around the circumference, which gives a strong
mechanical unbalance, those impellers can only be utilised up to a certain size. Beside the
mechanical unbalance, which gives a constant centrifugal force enormous hydrodynamic
forces appear during operation because of the also uneven pressure distribution around
the blade. As the hydrodynamic forces are not constant during the impeller revolution
they can not be balanced by attaching of a balancing weight. These forces lead to a strong
stimulation of vibrations which gives high mechanical stress for the pump construction
units like shaft, bearings, seals, and so on.
In Figure 10 a statistical data collection of measured vibration velocities for sewage
pumps of different sizes is presented. To avoid mechanical problems the vibration
behaviour of the pumps are evaluated by [8]. With this valuation standard only very few
pumps are in the range of “o.k.” Most of them we can find in the range “usable” but a lot
of pumps can not be accepted because of too strong vibrations, which can cause severe
damages at the pump or at attached pipes. This figure shows that vibrations of sewage
pumps is a severe problem, which is already under investigation [9,10].
In Figure 11 measurements of static pressure in the casing of a single-blade pump are
shown for several operating points at nominal speed of rotation. For shut down condition
the highest pressure level can be recognised. With increasing volume flow rate the
pressure level is strongly decreasing. The pressure difference between maximum and
minimum pressure for one impeller revolution is about one bar for the shut down
condition. With increasing flow rate the pressure difference is decreasing and reaches a
value of ∆p ≈ 0,5 bar at the maximum flow rate. The pressure distribution around the
impeller is acting at the impeller surface during operation and leads to a recurrent stress.
The result is a strong bending of the rotor shaft, which gives a deflection of the impeller.
This impeller deflection has been measured by [11]. In Figure 12 the measured orbit
curves of the single-blade sewage water pump are presented for the design speed of
rotation. As the attacking angle of the hydrodynamic forces varies only little during one
impeller revolution [12], the exciting forces rotate with the impeller. Depending on the
change in magnitude of the forces during one impeller revolution the orbit curves become
nearly circular or elliptic.
With increasing impeller turning angle the rotor orbit curves rotate counter-
clockwise. The impeller is also rotating in counter-clockwise direction. So the rotation of
the shaft orbit corresponds to the orbit rotation. Measurements at smaller speeds of
rotation show smaller impeller deflections. The results show that for all speeds of rotation
the deflections increase with increasing volume flow rate. The largest deflections have
been measured for the highest and the smallest deflections for the lowest speed of
rotation.
 417

Figure 10. Statistical evaluation of vibration measurements.

Figure 11. Measured static pressure inside the pump casing.

Figure 12. Measured rotor orbit curves of a single-blade pump.

418

Beside the oscillations of the rotor the exciting hydrodynamic forces generate also
structural vibrations of the pump. The effects of the stimulating forces can be shown very
clear by measuring the vibration properties at the outside of the pump casing. Therefore
measurements of the vibration accelerations in radial and in axial direction were
accomplished at the same time. In Figures 13.a,b the frequency spectra obtained by Fast
Fourier Transformation are shown for several flow rates at nominal speed of rotation. All
amplitude spectra show the first significant amplitude at the rotor turning frequency ( ≈ 24
Hz). The next strong amplitude appears at a frequency twice the rotor turning frequency.
At the third mode the amplitudes are considerably smaller but anyway noticeable. No
significant frequencies appear beyond the frequency of the 3rd mode.

Figure 13.a. Frequency spectra of radial accelerations (n = 1440 min-1).

Figure 13.b. Frequency spectra of axial accelerations (n = 1440 min-1).

 419

4.3. Materials of Pump Components

To prevent the abrasion and corrosion effects of waste water special materials for
construction of impellers and casings are required. For neutral waste water (pH-values >
6,5) like municipal sewage water or rainwater normally grey cast iron (GG-25) is used.
For highly abrasive fluids which contain a strong portion of sand and solids a wear-
resistant white iron (NORIHARD) can be used. The material belongs to the so-called
white iron alloy group and its hardness and wear resistant properties come close to those
of pure metallic oxides, metal carbides (hard metals) and hard-plating materials. Table 1
shows some properties of materials which are often used for construction of pump
components. If the pump is provided for transport of chemical aggressive sewage water a
cast ferritic-austenitic stainless steel (NORIDUR) is a good choice. This material
exhibits a very good resistance to uniform corrosion in a wide range of acidic media of all
kinds. Also the combination of stainless steel and synthetic material can be used for
pumps which have to resist chemicals and should not rust. The hydraulic components are
made of high grade synthetic material moulded into shape so that no machining is
required.

Table 1: Features of some materials for pump construction

Application Material data Features

Neutral sewage water Grey cast iron, GG-25 Cost-efficient, acceptable lifetime
sand<1g/l; pH>6,5
Sewage treatment NORIHARD Wear resistant,
(effluent with high sand content) G-X 250 CrMo 15 3 small abrasion rates during tests
Chemical aggressive effluent NORIDUR Resistance to corrosion reducing acids and to
(pH=1…12) G-X 3 CrNiMoCu 24 6 localised corrosion attack
All sewage water BaydurGS, Polyurethane High impact strength and chem. durability

5 Examples for a Reliable Sewage Water Transport

A sustainable effluent disposal should include the treatment of all waste water. Nowadays
in Germany the waste water treatment has reached a very good estate. In Figure 14 the
development of public sewage water processing is shown for the last 50 years. In the year
1957 only 40% of all sewage water has been treated mechanical or biological and 60%
stayed already untreated. In the next 35 years the method of biological treatment
increased up to about 90% in the old countries of Germany. In the year 1991 a first
statistical evaluation of the new countries showed that there existed a sewage water
treatment of only 57% (mechanical and biological). That means for the combined old and
new countries a waste water processing of only 85% which again increased up to now to
more than 90%. Only for about 3,5% of all effluent there is no purification. In the
following two examples of an exemplary sewage water management will be discussed.
The first is a small island which is located in the new countries of Germany and the
second is a big industrial region in the old countries.
420

Figure 14. Development of public waste water treatment in Germany [13].

5.1. Pressure Flow Sewer System for a Small Island

A good example of a reliable sewage water transport can be shown for a small German
island, which is named Hiddensee and which is located in the Baltic sea near the famous
island Rügen. Figure 15 shows a map of the island which is very small and the settlement
is scattered into four different communities. It has an area of about 18,6 km2 and due to a
lot of tourism the meanwhile completed solution with one central treatment plant has been
designed for large seasonal variability of inflow. The most important data of the treatment
plant and the water collecting system are shown in Table 2.

Baltic
Sea

Figure 15. German Baltic Sea Island Hiddensee.

 421

Table 2. Data of Hiddensee treatment plant and

pressure flow system [14].
Treatment plant
Capacity 7000 EW
Max. water amount 720 m3/d or 72 m3/h
Pressure flow system
Degree of connection 100 %
City pipelines 23,3 km
Transmission pipeline 6,4 km
pumping stations 347
Main pumping stations 3

The island is very flat and the terrain has no downward slope, hence a sustainable
sewage water collection makes only sense, when the water is transported by pressure
pipes. So the waste water is collected in every community with a pressure flow system. In
sum about 350 waste water pumping stations have been installed. The complete
underground piping system, which has a cumulative length of 30 km was manufactured of
thermoplastic material (HPDE). Figure 16 shows an example for a pressure flow system
of a single building and the complete network of pressure pipes for a community. To
overcome the attitude between the domestic sewage system and the main pressure line
centrifugal pumps are used.

Figure 16. Pressure flow system for waste water.

5.2. Closely Inhabited Industrial Area

The second example is shown for a region in the middle west of Germany. In the mid of
the 19th century the region east of the river Rhine, between Dortmund and Duisburg was
only sparsely populated. Beginning at about 1850 a strong industrialisation commenced.
422

Beside the establishment of the heavy industry a considerable mining of mineral coal has
been practised. Due to the extensive subsidence caused by this mining polder areas arose
which had no elemental drain. In these sinks the surface water and the effluent of
communities, mines and industry was collected. The river Emscher and a lot of small
feeders lost their elemental outflow by mining. As this problem of de-watering only could
be treated sustained from the affected region jointly, in the year 1899 the companionship
Emschergenossenschaft has been founded from the communities, the industry and the
mining companies.
First of all the river Emscher was straightened, deepened, banked and where the
topological circumstances could not provide the necessary downward slope for the drain,
pumping stations were built up to convey the waste water from lower territories into the
river Emscher. At present the Emschergenossenschaft is operating 137 pumping stations
which have a cumulative volume flow of 645 m3/s and an electrical connected load of
133 MW. In Figure 17 the whole territory is presented with all its pumping stations. In
this manner the river Emscher and its feeders have been used for a long time as an open
sewer system. Because of the strong subsidence caused by mining there was no chance to
construct underground canals. This river and all its feeders has been polluted in this way
and animals had nearly no chance to survive. When the pollution of the river Rhine
achieved also a critical amount, the companionship Emschergenossenschaft started a
biological treatment of all water which was transported by the Emscher. From 1965 to
1997 several sewage treatment plants were built up along the river Emscher, which purify
all the effluent emerging from the complete territory. The treatment plant
Emschermündung, which has a design capacity of 5 million EW is the biggest one. This
treatment plant is purifying all the water of the Emscher river before it is conveyed into
the Rhine.

Figure 17. Installed pumping stations in the Emscher region [1].

 423

For a fairly long time people are trying to reverse the process described above and to
rebuild the river and its vicinity. As the mining moved north no more subsidence must be
expected in the Emscher territory which now makes underground sewers feasible without
worrying about breaking of pipelines. The rebuilding of the Emscher river territory will
take place in the following manner: From the spring to the river mouth subterranean
canals will be passed parallel to the river and its feeders and the waste water will be
conveyed from the old river bed into the new channels. The new underground canal is
going to grab all the effluent which has been conveyed into the river Emscher before. The
construction started already in 2002 and will be finished in 2014. Therewith a unique
effluent disposal system will be created, which comprises an area of about 865 km2 with
about 2,5 million residents. In Table 3 the most important data of the Emscher-canal
which will carry the sewage water and the rainwater of the cities Bochum, Herne,
Gelsenkirchen, Essen, Bottrop, Oberhausen and their surrounding area are presented.

Table 3. Important data of the new Emscher-canal.

Emscher - canal
Length 55 km
Attitude Up to 40 m
Maximum pipe diameter 3,8 m
Planned completion 2014
Expenses for the canal 2,0 billions of Euro
Investment for the project 4,4 billions of Euro
Emscher-rebuilding

This sewer will be constructed in several sections. Due to its attitude it requires a
considerable amount of pumping stations to overcome the attitude differences and to give
the sewage water the required downward slope. The locations of the three already
operating waste water treatment plants are shown in Figure 18.

Figure 18. Waste water treatment plants at the river Emscher [15].
424

6 Conclusions
During the past decades the aiming at high technical reliability, economical design and
cost-saving operation of waste water pumping stations motivated both manufacturers and
owners of pumping stations to realise new findings for the construction and the technical
equipment of pumping stations. Basic design features for optimum planning of sewage
water pumping stations have been elaborated for important sewage water pump types. As
a result of this work, today the sewage water transport by centrifugal pumps, which is
much more complicated than the conveyance of clean water is no problem anymore, if the
lay out and the design of the pumps is particularly aligned to the kind of water which has
to be transported. There are some remaining technical problems which can be attributed
to the special impeller geometry. In case of single-blade impellers often substantial flow
forces occur, which provide high mechanical loads and strong vibrations for the pump
components. Sometimes this causes a pump failure or even damages at the attached pipes.
But it is shown by the described examples that a reliable sewage water transport by
centrifugal pumps is possible nowadays.

References

1. Emschergenossenschaft/Lippeverband: Fliessgewässer zwischen Natur und Technik

am Beispiel von Emscher und Lippe, Essen (2000).
2. K. Imhoff, Taschenbuch der Stadtentwässerung, Oldenbourg-Verlag (1999).
3. ABS Pumpen GmbH: Abwasser-Fäkalien-Pumpen Baureihe AFP, 2.4000D4.94
4. F.-K. Benra, Abwassertransport mit kompakten, verstopfungsfreien Kreiselpumpen
Wasser, Luft und Boden, WLB 9/(1992).
5. Paul Pleiger Maschinenfabrik: Pleiger Umwelttechnik, Kreiselpumpen PKR (1992).
6. Ritz-Pumpen GmbH: Kanalradpumpen, Baureihe AS, K 002132 KB AS/5.00
7. Hirschberger,M., Ruhrpumpen GmbH: Private communication (2005).
8. VDI-Richtlinie 2056: Beurteilungsmassstäbe für mechanische Schwingungen von
Maschinen, VDI-Verlag Düsseldorf (1964).
9. F.-K.Benra, Über das Schwingungsverhalten radialer Kreiselpumpen für Abwasser
Beitrag B 6-2, Pumpentagung Karlsruhe (1996).
10. F.-K. Benra, H.J. Dohmen and O. Schneider, Calculation of Flow Induced Vibration
Amplitudes of Radial Sewage Water Pumps, Proceedings of the 7th International
Symposium on Emerging Technologies for Fluids, Structures and Fluid-Structure
Interactions, ASME Pressure Vessels and Piping, Conference, PVP-Vol. 460, Paper
PVP2003-1947, Cleveland, USA (2003).
11. F.-K. Benra, H.J. Dohmen and O. Schneider, Experimental Investigation of Flow
Induced Rotor Oscillations in a Centrifugal Sewage Water Pump, ASME Heat
Transfer/Fluids Eng. Summer Conference, Charlotte, North Carolina, USA (2004).
12. F.-K. Benra, H.J. Dohmen and O. Schneider, Investigation on the Unsteady Flow in
Radial Waste Water Pumps to Determine the Hydrodynamic Forces, Proceedings of
the 5th European Conference on Turbomachinery, Prag, Tschechien (2003).
 425

13. Statistisches Bundesamt/BMU: Entwicklung der öffentlichen Abwasserbeseitigung in

Deutschland
14. R. Schröder and D. Wittenberg, New sewer system and treatment plant on Hiddensee
Island, Presentation of Krüger-Hölter Wassertechnik GmbH, Essen (1996).
15. Internet presentation of Stein & Partner GmbH: An der blauen Emscher – Vom
Abwasserkanal zur Flusslandschaft, http://www.stein.de/html_de/gutachten (2001).
This page intentionally left blank
ENVIRONMENT ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION

427
This page intentionally left blank
 IMPROVEMENT OF REGIONAL SUSTAINABILITY ASSESSMENTS:
AN ECOLOGICAL-ECONOMIC FRAMEWORK INTEGRATING
TRADE AND MULTI-MEDIA POLLUTANTS TRANSFERS∗

FRIOT DAMIEN**
Life Cycle System Group – GECOS, Ecole Polytechnique Fédérale de Lausanne,
Lausanne, Switzerland

BLANC ISABELLE, OLIVIER JOLLIET

Life Cycle System Group – GECOS, Ecole Polytechnique Fédérale de Lausanne,
Lausanne, Switzerland

A large number of sustainability accounting systems is currently developed: interdependences

between sustainability dimensions and between regions are usually poorly addressed. A more
realistic understanding of the consequences of a region’s lifestyle is provided when including
economic and environmental interrelations by linking multiples Input-Output tables and by
assessing, in parallel, the transfers of long-range pollutant through environmental media. An
ecological-economic framework is proposed and illustrated by a case study of Austria and Germany
SO2 exchanges, either embodied in trade or transferred through the air.

1 Introduction
The search for alternative measures of development has increased in parallel to the
interest in the sustainable development paradigm. A large number of sustainability
accounting systems is currently developed but they are usually grouping together
conceptually very different types of indicators and poorly addressing the
interdependences between sustainability dimensions and between regions. The EPSILONa
project (Environmental Policy via Sustainability Indicators on a European-wide NUTS III
level) proposes to reduce these limitations by developing consistent new solutions.
Sustainability assessments usually draw on administrative or political boundaries as
limits of the studied system. Assessing regional sustainability within these limits is
however only a rough assessment of a regional situation. A European region (NUTS2/3)
is not an isolated unit but is part of a larger system, the Nation, itself part of the European
Union, political unit on Earth. In our highly interconnected society, where connections are
multiple and interdependencies with other units are growing, looking at regional
sustainability is therefore not to determine if regions are autonomous or on a path to

∗
This work is supported by the European Commission, Directorate General Information
Society, 5th Research Framework, EC Contract IST-2001-32389
**
Corresponding author. Email address: [email protected]
a
www.sustainability4europe.org

429
430

sustainability on their own territory only. Interactions between regions have to be

included to get a more realistic understanding of the consequences of a region’s lifestyle
since very few regions are self-sufficient. The calculus of “footprints” [1], for example, is
extremely relevant at this scale.
EPSILON proposes to assess regional sustainability based on an ecological-economic
framework that extend boundaries and integrate linkages between regions in two ways.
First it suggests including exchanges of goods through trade to account for the growing
specialization within Europe, and the stronger differentiation between production and
consumption patterns. Second, it suggests considering the bio-physical realities of the
local environment and including transfers of long-range pollutant through environmental
media.
This proposal is illustrated by a case study, at the national level, on Austrian and
German SO2 exchanges, either embodied in trade or transferred through the air. It shows
how relevant it is to consider interactions, the interest to adopt a consumer perspective
and the similarity, in term of magnitude, of economic and environmental relations.
Conclusions can be applied to the regional level as well.

2 A consumer-based ecological-economic framework

The ecological-economic framework is based on Life Cycle Thinking and is consumer-
focused. This means looking at the total impacts linked to consumption and attributing the
emissions from the production, consumption and disposal stage to the consumer,
separating direct emissions (by the consumer) from indirect ones (up and downstream)
[2]. Emissions linked to the production should therefore be included wherever they occur,
locally or in other countries.
Most of the studies on consumption – Australia [3], Denmark [4], except one more
detailed, in the Netherlands [5] - are however only rough evaluations regarding this issue.
They do not really assess impacts outside the country but assume that foreign production
has the same impacts as the national ones. This clearly reduces data needs but provide
high uncertainties, due to the different economic and technological structures. Trade is
not realistically considered and this prevents to relate the current consumption to any
producing country. These consumption studies usually focus, in addition, on global
issues, like energy and/or CO2, and do not include local pollutants e.g. SO2, heavy metals
or dioxin while they are of primary importance for some goods and for some regions.
A regional assessment framework should however deal with these local emissions and
depositions since there is a high degree of variability between regional concentrations of
pollutants. It should, in addition, provide information about the interrelations of a region
with the rest of the world and therefore about the potential trans-boundary impacts of its
inhabitants’ lifestyle. The following questions should be answered:
• What are the emissions induced by local consumers?
• Where do the related impacts take place?
• Is there equilibrium between trade partners in term of environmental damages linked
to exchanges?
 431

• Does a region assume more than its share of the environmental burden?
This local sustainability perspective can be given through a joint evaluation of the impacts
from current goods exchanges (trade) based on interlinked extended Input-Output tables
and the parallel assessment of the transfer of long-range pollutants based on a pollution
dispersion model.

3 Extended Input-Output Analysis

An extended input-output analysis joins in the same framework economic and
environmental information. These frameworks are widely used for analyzing the
environmental impacts of consumption patterns or for understanding how structural
changes will affect the economic and environmental performance.

3.1. Economic component

An input-output table is a description of the flows of goods and services through an
economy in financial terms. This descriptive framework is part of the System of National
Account (SNA) [6] and consists of four quadrants: the first quadrant is the matrix of
intermediate deliveries between the production sectors, the second represents the final
uses i.e. deliveries to consumers and public institutions, investments and exports, the third
one describes the other inputs of a sector i.e. added-value and imports and the last
contains the primary inputs of the final demand. National input-output tables can be
linked together providing that data on imports and exports is available at the sector level,
both at origin and destination.
An input-output table makes therefore explicit the links between the production
structure, the imports, the quantity of goods delivered to consumers and exported for each
sector as well as the creation of wealth (added-value) by each of them.

3.2. Environmental load

These tables can be extended by using environmental accounting data, e.g. Nameas or
other emissions data, resulting in an extended input-output table with a new quadrant, the
emissions factors per sector (CO2 emitted per € of total output, for example).
Data on this environmental load per sector is being standardized in Europe. Two
main sources are available: some statistical offices publish yearly data for the main air
pollutants e.g. CO2, CH4, SO2 and the European Union provides data (Nameas), trough
EUROSTAT in collaboration with EU members States.
“Namea” stands for National Accounting Matrix including Environmental Accounts
[7]. It is a broadening of the scope of the conventional System of National Accounts. The
core of the framework is a national accounting matrix (NAM), The environmental
accounts (EA) present the environmental requirements of the economy, e.g. the material
inputs (natural resources, energy) and the output (emissions to air and water, waste). They
are denominated in physical units. The current preliminary version (2004) includes
432

outputs to air: emissions of SO2, NOx, NMVOC, CH4, CO, CO2, N2O, NH3 from
industries, services and households. This framework is presenting data in a different way
than in traditional emissions statistics (e.g. Corinair), since it includes only national
economic activities: it does not cover natural emissions or anthropogenic emissions from
other sources than national ones.

3.3. Analytical framework

The first strength of extended input-output approaches is to allow a comparison of
countries on the basis of the direct emission intensities of their production sectors. This is
however only a partial picture, since different production structures e.g. the reliance on
more imported goods, logically results in different emissions intensities. The emissions
along the upstream chain of production have therefore to be accounted for. These indirect
emissions have to be emitted to allow for the current economic activity i.e. extraction and
treatment of raw materials, production of goods and infrastructures used in the production
process, transport and administrative activities. Input-Output tables can be transformed
for this analytical purpose into a Leontief Inverse. [8]

4 Transfer of long-range trans-boundary pollutants

Pollution dispersion models describe the fate of a pollutant within the environment. They
model the transport and deposition of pollutants according to the place of emission, the
atmospheric and meteorology conditions as well as chemistry and land use.
Some models propose estimates of the destination of a pollutant according to its
place of emission as well as estimates of the origin of a pollution deposited in a specific
area. The EMEP model [9] results have been used in the case study.

5 Case study objectives

This case study concentrates on the exchanges between Germany and Austria, countries
with good public data availability and using SO2 as a test substance. It illustrates how
benchmarking of sustainability between countries increase in meaning when including
economic relations (in terms of pollutant embodied in traded goods) and environmental
relations (pollutant transfer through the air). How to account for emissions occurring in
another area? Are transfers through the environment relevant and how do they compare to
the pollutant content of exchanged goods?

6 Methodology
Three different steps, related to different data and issues, are required for performing this
evaluation. They are described below.
 433

6.1. Calculus of embodied emissions of traded goods

The calculus of embodied emissions of traded goods is based on linked Inverse matrices
of Leontief. The concept of embodiment represents the emissions emitted for the
production of a good and not only the pollutants incorporated in this good. All emissions
(direct and indirect) are attributed to the final demand. Direct emissions from the
production of a good A, consumed by a final user, are completed by the emissions
occurring during the production of the intermediary goods (B & C) required to produce
this good A.
Since SNA is based on the residence principle further modifications have however to
be applied for accounting for the proper location of emissions. The residence principle
means that the emissions considered relate to the national economic activities rather than
to the activities on the national territory. Corrections mainly relate to tourists and
transport activities.
When adding the impacts occurring during the use and the elimination phase, it is
then possible to know the real burden of items consumed by residents and non-residents
in a country. Emissions from the use phase are the emissions emitted directly by the
consumer e.g. CO2 while driving a car.
For each traded good, it is therefore possible to define the embodied SO2 content, at
the sector level, by building a two-country model for the assessment of the bilateral
exchanges.

6.2. Assessment of Environmental transfers

The calculus of SO2 transfer is based on source-receptors relationships from EMEP [10].
They are linking changes in air concentrations or depositions resulting from a change in
emissions in an emitter country. The assumed causality between an emission in a country
and the resulting deposition in another area is therefore estimation.

6.3. Joint assessment and indicators elaboration

Different types of indicators could be elaborated. Some are purely based on Input-Output,
like the environmental balance of trade, comparing the embodied content of imports and
exports. We will here compare the magnitude of environmental transfers with embodied
emissions linked to trade.

7 Data sources
Official statistics from the statistical offices of Germany [11] and Austria [12] have been
used for the economic Input-Output tables and the SO2 emission for calculating the
environmental load per sector. Environmental data has been completed with a preliminary
version of the Nameas [13] and official data provided by the countries to UNECE [14]. A
combination of sources has been necessary to account for the direct emissions from
consumers and for attributing emissions to residents outside the country and to non-
434

residents within the country. Trade data is from the OECD STAN bilateral trade database
[15].
The data for SO2 transfer between countries is taken from the EMEP model. The
main objective of the EMEP programme is to regularly provide governments and
subsidiary bodies under the CLRTAP (The cooperative programme for monitoring and
evaluation of the long-range transmission of air pollutants in Europe, linked to the
Convention on Long-range Trans-boundary Air Pollution) with qualified scientific
information to support the development and further evaluation of the international
protocols on emission reductions negotiated within the convention. EMEP provides trans-
boundary pollution data for SO2, Heavy Metals and Persistent Organic Pollutants. These
data include emissions, modeling and measurement data.

8 Assessing exchanges between Austria and Germany

8.1. Attributions of SO2 emissions in Austria

Changing the attribution scheme of emissions from a direct causality to a consumer
perspective is the key to allocate emissions between different areas. It also provides a
different vision of the potential responsibilities related to sustainability. The following
example shows the two different allocation methods, considering Austria as a close
economy. Direct emissions of SO2 in Austria (Figure 1) are clearly dominated by the
industry. Allocating embodied emissions to the sector providing the final goods to the
consumer (Figure 2) shows that the activities of the service sectors are linked to more
than 30% of emissions. Consumer emissions represent direct emissions and are therefore
the same in both cases.

1
Consumer F,T,P Industries
C Ch Ma Utilities S
0%

0%
10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%

100%
100%

Figure 1. Distribution of direct emissions (SO2) in Austria.

1
Consumer Industries U T HServices
T F PS
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

0% 100%
Figure 2. Distribution of embodied Austrian emissions (SO2) to the sector providing the goods & services to
the consumer.
 435

8.2. Fate of Austrian SO2 emissions and origin of Austrian concentrations

Figure 3 and 4 illustrate how crucial it is to account for trans-regional pressures when
assessing regional sustainability and how incorrect it is to look only at the local
environmental Pressures from local socio-economic activities. The SO2 Austrian
emissions (Figure 3) are widely dispersed and only 26% stay in the country. Germany
receives 6% of these emissions.

Austria
Czech R.
26%
Russia
40% MED
Poland
Germany
8% Other

7%
6% 7%
6%

Figure 3. Seven main receptor areas from Austrian SO2 emissions (in %) (source: EMEP [16])

Depositions in Austria are also from diverse origins (Figure 4). The oxidized sulfur
deposition in Austria is, for more than 80% originating outside the country. 14% is
originating from Germany.

14% Germany
Italy
Austria
45% 14% NAT
Slovenia
Poland
9%
Others
7%
5% 6%

Figure 4. Oxidized Sulfur deposition in Austria (in %) (source: EMEP)

436

8.3. Comparison of economic exchanges and environmental transfers

From a monetary point of view, Austrian and German economies are tightly integrated
since 43% of Austrian imports are coming from Germany and 30% of Austrian exports
are going to this country. From the point of view of embodied SO2 in trade, the numbers
are quite similar. From the total emissions of SO2 in Austria, which amount to 35Gg for
the year 2000, household consumption in Austria amount for 56% and 44% (14.5 Gg) are
exported. Among the exports, 30% is sent to Germany either for domestic consumption or
incorporation into the production system. In the other direction, 11 Gg of SO2 are emitted
in Germany for the goods transiting trough Austria or for the Austrian consumption.
In comparison, environmental transfers amount for 16 Gg of SO2 from Germany to
Austria and 2 Gg of SO2 in the opposite direction. This shows that embodied SO2 in
exchanged goods and SO2 transports in air between these countries are of the same order
of magnitude. Both have therefore to be both considered for a proper assessment of the
sustainability and environmental pressures between the two countries. For example, the
sole attribution, through embodied pollution in traded goods, of foreign pollution (emitted
in country A) to a local consumption (in country B) would not be accurate if the majority
of the pollution transfers, then trough the air, from A to B and is therefore already
assumed by the consumer.

9 Conclusion and discussion

Preliminary results show that there is a real interest for a combined assessment since
countries are interlinked both at the economic and environmental level and that linkages
are of the same order of magnitude. This is even a necessity when environmental transfers
are important.
This proposal can form the basis for a more complete assessment within sets of
indicators: through the development of indicators comparing, e.g. the local emissions to
the embodied emissions of local consumption or the environmental balance of trade.
Such illustration, performed at the national level, is however only a first step. It is
perfectly valid and would be even more relevant at the regional scale since the smaller an
area is, the larger are the potential interactions with the rest of the system. An extension of
this proposal at the regional level would however have to deal with two other issues. First,
uncertainties regarding pollution diffusion will be higher and threshold of confidence
should be established. Second, the Input-Output tables have to be regionalized which is a
controversial issue. Mathematical methods are apparently not sufficient and need to be
completed with regional trade data. Some European countries like the Netherlands have
already developed regional tables and their experience could be used for this purpose.
Further extensions are also possible in the assessment of a wider range of substances.
 437

References

1. J. Loh, M. Wackernagel, (ed.), 2004 Living Planet Report 2004, World-Wide Fund
for Nature International (WWF), Global Footprint Network, UNEP World
Conservation Monitoring Centre, Switzerland (2004).
2. J. Känzig and O. Jolliet, Consommation respectueuse de l’environnement. Décisions
et acteurs clés, modèles de consommation, Office Fédéral de l’Environnement,
Suisse (2006).
3. M. Lenzen, Energy and greenhouse gas cost of living for Australia during 1993/94,
Energy 23, pp. 497-516 (1998).
4. J. Munksgaard, K.A. Pederson and M. Wier, Impact of Household Comsumption on
CO2 emissions, Energy Economics 22, pp. 423-440 (2000).
5. D.S. Nijdam and H.C. Wilting, Milieudruk consumptie in beeld, Dataverweking en
resultaten, RIVM rapport 77404004/2003 (2003).
6. United Nations, International Monetary Fund, Commission of the European
Communities–Eurostat, Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development,
World Bank, System of National Accounts 1993, New York (1993).
7. EUROSTAT, Nameas for air emissions, Results of pilot studies, European
communities, (2001).
8. R.E. Miller and P.D. Blair, Input-Output analysis : foundations and extensions,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey : Prentice-Hall ; cop. (1985).
9. D. Simpson, H. Fagerli, J.E. Jonson, S. Tsyro and P. Wind, Transboundary
Acidification, Eutrophication and Ground Level Ozone in Europe, Part 1, Unified
EMEP Model Description, EMEP Report 1/2003 (2003).
10. L. Tarrasón, Transboundary acidification, eutrophication and ground level ozone in
Europe, Status report 1/2004, EMEP (2004).
11. http://www.destatis.de/d_home.htm
12. Statistic Office, Austria, Input-output tabelle (2004).
13. EUROSTAT.
14. M. Wieser, S. Poupa and M. Anderl, Austria’s informative inventory report 2003,
submission under the UNECE Convention on Long-range Transboundary Air
pollution, BE-229, Umweltbundesamt Austria (2003).
15. OECD, STAN Bilateral Trade Database (Edition 2004), Economic analysis and
statistics division, Directorate for science, technology and industry, (2004).
16. H. Klein, P. Wind and M. van Loon, Transboundary air pollution by main pollutants
(S, N, O3) and PM, Austria, EMEP/MSC-W, MSC-W Data Note 1/2004 (2004).
 CORPORATE ATTITUDES TO ENVIRONMENTAL AND
SUSTAINABLE TECHNOLOGY STRATEGIES

MARGARET GOLLAGHER
Institute for Sustainability and Technology Policy, Murdoch University, Murdoch
Perth, WA 6150, Australia

DORA MARINOVA
Institute for Sustainability and Technology Policy, Murdoch University, Murdoch
Perth, WA 6150, Australia

Corporations hold a position of central importance in today’s global political economy. Many
observers therefore maintain that these iconic institutions must bear the main burden of
responsibility for ensuring that development takes a more sustainable trajectory. This assertion is
hotly disputed by those who harbour reservations about Big Businesses’ intent and capacity in
regards to such matters. The analysis of the changes in corporate behaviour since the 1960s reveals
that despite beginning to reset the business compass to some extent, issues of sustainability are
becoming more pressing and industry seems unable to keep pace with them.

1 Introduction
Corporations hold a position of central importance in today’s global political economy.
Many observers therefore maintain that these iconic institutions must bear the main
burden of responsibility for ensuring that development takes a more sustainable trajectory
[1]. [2], [3], [4]. This assertion is hotly disputed by those who harbour reservations about
Big Businesses’ intent and capacity in regards to matters beyond their conventional
bottom line. Strategic corporate responses to calls to promote positive environmental and
social outcomes as they pursue profits have ranged over time and between companies
from outright denial to the development of management perspectives that go beyond
‘doing things differently’ towards ‘doing different things’. Even more radical proponents
of sustainability argue for ‘being different things’.
Corporate attitudes have changed first to the environmentalism in the 1960s and later
to sustainability. They have varied over time and amongst different business sectors in
regards to the depth and character of corporate understandings of environmentalism and
sustainability, including the use of technologies. This has resulted in changes in
management strategies, but has the progress in these areas been satisfactory?

2 Corporations and Environmentalism

Evolving trends in the transformation of business attitudes to environmentalism have been
noted [1], [5], [6]. The existence of such transitional stages raises interesting questions:
how and why did this transformation of industry occur? How radical have the changes
been – are they profound alterations to institutional outlook or do they simply amount to

438
 439

‘greenwashing’ in an attempt to deflect attention [5]? Hoffman [5] notes that to answer
the ‘how’ questions, a historical review is needed: “How corporate activities were
perceived in the 1960s, 1970s, 1980s and 1990s is a subjective reflection of the historical
context in which they were observed. In point of fact, no corporate activity is objectively
defined. Whether it is a smokestack, an environmental accident, or a corporate
environmental strategy, each action or issue is conceptualized based on the context at its
inception” (p 6). This means that changes in corporate responses to environmentalism
should not be portrayed as following a Darwinian progression from naïve to superior
attitudes. The prevailing attitudes of any given moment must be regarded in their proper
context – that is in relation to the beliefs and circumstances of the time. If we are to
criticise corporations for peddling the eschatological myths of progress in order to
promote their own agenda, it would be a strategic error to underestimate their capabilities
and understandings. It is not entirely within corporations’ discretion to determine what
environmentalism or sustainability means or should mean to them, as the growing debate
about the importance of stakeholders demonstrates.
Since the environmental movement of the 1960s began, corporations have faced the
scrutiny of critics concerned about the environmental and social effects of business
operations. The corporate response to this attention has ranged from initial widespread
denial to increasing preparedness to engage with environmentalism and sustainability to a
degree that ultimately re-orientates business ethos. The prognosis for corporate attention
to environmental issues has not always been encouraging. Downs [7], for instance,
predicted that a form of public mental exhaustion would eventually erode the importance
of environmental issues within society. He thought that public interest in
environmentalism would decline after its initial infamy; the general enthusiasm for the
cause would wane as the difficulties and costs of attempting to alleviate ecological issues
became clear, and another issue would take centre stage. However, this does not appear to
have been the case.
Environmental issues are a potential source of cost and liabilities for businesses,
particularly when mishandled, but they also provide financial opportunities for business.
Various programs and policies have been implemented by management in order to ‘green’
corporations [6], underpinned by changing interpretations of environmentalism. Issues
such as pollution, waste and water usage, pertaining to most corporations have been the
subject of highest level of scrutiny and regulations.
The dynamic interaction between corporations and environmentalism continues to
play out in various manifestations. Theorists have noted sequential shifts in corporate
attitudes towards environmentalism that do not seem to have reached a final resolution as
yet. Jamison, for instance, notes that corporations’ fundamentally oppositional stance of
the late 1960s to early 1970s gradually yielded to a 1990s’ concern with attuning
modernisation more carefully to ecology ([8], pp 123-124).
Hoffman [5] brackets these businesses’ concern with environmentalism into four distinct
stages:
440

1. Industrial environmentalism (1960 - 1970);

2. Regulatory environmentalism (1970 – 1982);
3. Environmentalism as social responsibility (1982 - 1988), and
4. Strategic environmentalism (1988 – 1993) ([5], pp 12-13).
Hoffman refers to the 1988 – 1993 period as ‘strategic environmentalism’. He suggests
that a more equal balance of power developed between corporations, government and
civil society, which prompted industry to move proactively. The focus remained on
industry’s ability to deal with issues itself. The firm’s organisational boundaries were
increasingly interpreted as being flexible. External pressures therefore had a more direct
impact than in previous times. This demonstrates that companies are social products
rather than rational inevitabilities. The firm’s license to operate depends to a large extent
on the subjective social evaluation of its activities, rather than simply the pursuit of profit.
It also highlights the fact that firms are dynamic, complex networks with multiple social
influences. They are not monolithic. “In the end”, says Hoffman [5], “the firm is a
reflection of the society of which it is a part – not directly, but as mediated and filtered
through its institutional environment” (pp 13-14).
Corporate responses to environmental issues are understandably linked to the desire
to enhance competitiveness in order to increase profitability ([6], p 16). This can be
achieved in various ways, including: improved product quality, increased staff
commitment, improved safety record, reduced risk exposure, lower finance costs,
improved public relations record, assured present and future compliance, reduced waste
management costs, better utilisation of by-products, reduced downtime, improved
materials and energy efficiency, enhanced yields, new management techniques and
establishment of new pattern of company behaviour. There is abundant evidence attention
to environmental issues leads to profitable results for business, and that managers should
therefore be interested in investing in environmental strategies which either deliver
positive returns or minimise risk.
Corporations with a history of creating environmental or social damage face the
prospect of having to deal with lawsuits or conforming to legal requirements to clean up
contaminations. This has been the case in the US in particular but it is becoming more
prevalent elsewhere in the world. Firms respond to these threats and opportunities in
different ways and rates. The variation between businesses and sectors can be partly
understood by considering the way managers deal with uncertainty when making
decisions. Managers may not be confident that they have sufficient or accurate
information about the likely costs and benefits of environmental management; they may
be unsure about how well new technologies are likely to perform; the transaction costs
involved may be beyond the scope of the firm to cover; and/or managers may not fully
appreciate the advantages to be gained by getting to grips with environmental issues [6].
Rhee and Lee [9] looked at two case studies of Korean companies to determine
whether differences existed between rhetoric and reality, and whether they play different
roles. They identify “gaps between the rhetoric and reality of (corporate) environmental
strategy” and note that “rhetoric changes faster than reality” (p 187).
 441

Some major changes in the last few decades gave raise to the understanding that
sustainable development can only be achieved through the use of sustainable
technologies. What are they and how can countries and companies position themselves
against this trend?

3 Beyond Environmentalism: The Challenges of Sustainability

Hoffman [5] suggests that corporate attention to sustainability differs from the earlier
meeting with pure environmentalism in that industry is now an active contributor to the
framing of the sustainability debate. He contrasts this with the resistance to environmental
regulation typical of American oil and chemical companies of the 1970s (p 222).
However, drawing on its knowledge of environmental management, industry tends to
focus primarily on the ecological aspects of sustainability rather than the social ones ([5],
p 222).
The first sentence of the first chapter in the World Business Council for Sustainable
Development (WBCSD) book Eco-efficiency: the Business Link to Sustainability, clearly
illustrates the point: “(i)ndustry has a next century vision,” says Edgar Woolard, in his
capacity as CEO of DuPont, “of integrated environmental performance” (DeSimone and
Popoff [10], p 1). The ambition may be ‘21st century’ but the habit of conflating
sustainability with environmental performance is very much ‘last century’. Woolard also
allocates responsibility for the practical ‘performance’ part of environmentalism to
industrial corporations: “(t)he green economies and lifestyles of the twenty-first century
may be conceptualised by environmental thinkers, but they can only be actualised by
industrial corporations” ([10], p 1; our emphasis). The WBCSD summarises the business
responsibilities for sustainability as:
• Taking account of the entire life cycle of goods and services – design and
engineering, purchasing and materials management, production, marketing,
distribution, use, and waste management.
• Applying the principles of eco-efficiency to create increased value for customers
through the sustainable use of resources.
• In its role as consumer, procuring and requesting products and services that have less
environmental impact.
• Making accurate, scientifically sound environmental information available to
customers and the public so that they can make informed decisions about purchasing,
use, and disposal ([10], 15-16).
The failure to appreciate socio-cultural issues as essential foci of sustainability extends
not only to stakeholders surrounding business, but to the nature of business itself.
Springett [11], believes that: “(t)he discourse of the ‘greening’ of business generally fails
to address the profound change in the social role and nature of business and other
institutions that is generally called for by the radical political and democratic goals
attributed to sustainable development” (p 2).
442

4 Eco-Efficiency
Business’s central platform to date has revolved around eco-efficiency [2]. Eco-efficiency
is a management philosophy that fits comfortably with the dictum ‘what gets measured
gets managed’ and the implication that sustainability, like the environment, is something
to be ‘managed’. Stigson, executive director of WBCSD states: “(e)co-efficiency catches
at a glance the balance business strives toward: sound ecology and profitable operations.
Quite simply, it is about doing more with less, and being environmentally responsible”
([10], p xiii).
Within this framework, goals are set that and progress towards them can be
accurately measured. Some targets (eg ‘zero emissions’) are proposed in the full
knowledge that they are theoretically impossible but represent a sensible general direction
to head in. Eco-efficiency itself is more a process than a destination, making it unlikely
that final targets will be agreed upon and reached once and for all [10], [12].
The ‘eco’ in eco-efficiency is designed to refer to both ecological and economic
concerns, in terms of the need to “make optimal use of both” ([10], p 2). As a strategy, it
is hoped that eco-efficiency will provide sustainable growth, based on a qualitative
change in the nature of business growth [10]. Quantitative concerns retain primacy,
supported by qualitative changes.
There are other approaches concerned with resource productivity, such as Cleaner
Production (a UNEP initiative), total quality management and design for environment,
including life cycle analysis (LCA). While eco-efficiency has much in common with these
systems, it has distinctive features including: an emphasis on value creation; on stretching,
long-term, targets for improvement; on linking environmental excellence with business
excellence; and consideration of the need for both sustainable consumption patterns and
production patterns ([10], p 11). The goal of promoting sustainability by improving eco-
efficiency is a potentially lucrative one for corporations, and one that is not at odds with
their conventional directives. This is illustrated in the way the Dow Jones Sustainability
Index (DJSI) regularly outperforms the Dow Jones. Between 1995 and 2001, the DJSI
posted an annualized return of 15.8% in comparison to the Dow Jones’ 12.5% [13]. The
Dow Jones is not intended to be an absolute measure of companies’ contribution to
sustainability; it aims to highlight best-of-sector performances. In fact, the people behind
the DJSI admit that there are no sustaining companies as yet [14]. At this stage therefore,
it primarily demonstrates that attention to sustainability issues can enhance business
performance. It does not prove that it is actually possible to have ‘sustaining’
corporations.
Eco-efficiency strategies do not constitute a fundamental challenge to corporate
identity. What has occurred, as Stigson notes, is that the concept of eco-efficiency has
sparked a shift from merely increasing ‘resource productivity’ towards genuine
innovation, from producing goods to offering services and from a focus on the individual
corporation as actor to sectoral accountability ([10], p xiii). Pollution and resource use
have been thought about in novel ways, for example: ‘source reduction approaches such
 443

as pollution prevention and design for environment are increasingly preferred to “end-of-
pipe” methods that are expensive and simply transfer pollution from one medium to
another’ ([10], p 1).
For example, LCA is an important component of eco-efficiency strategies. It involves
looking at a product’s entire life cycle, from resource to waste – ‘cradle-to-grave’ – in
order to identify and minimise overall inefficiencies. In this way companies ensure that
their best efforts to promote eco-efficiencies are not simply undermined by failures
elsewhere in the chain of production and consumption [10], [14]. Systems approaches
such as this are essential to sustainability. The EU governments work together with
business to encourage LCA. The Integrated Product Policy was developed in an attempt
to move beyond policies that focus on point sources of pollution and degradation and to
encourage LCAs instead [15]. It is the result of collaboration between a range of
stakeholders who wished to promote sustainability and simultaneously enhance business
competitiveness.
Companies now are frequently seeking to develop shared values and stakeholder
engagement with customers, suppliers, and stakeholder organisations that are brought into
the sort of strategic collaboration “that many management theorists are now advocating”
([10], p 11). These aspects of eco-efficiency demonstrate the sense in which it is an
innovative management philosophy. The theme of needing to produce more using fewer
resources is a common one amongst business and sustainability theorists. There are
several renowned examples, including Factor Four, Natural Capitalism, and The Natural
Step. Müller and Koechlin [16] point out that efficiency, and as a corollary eco-efficiency
should be obvious foci of management science: “Even without ecological pressure a good
management will seek to improve its efficiency on purely financial grounds. However, the
parameters of efficiency are subject to change, i.e. environmental resources that were
previously free will be taxed and thus have a price tagged to them. This means that the
managerial concept of efficiency becomes increasingly an ecological one. True efficiency
will in the long run never be incompatible with ecology” (p 36).
While business endorses eco-efficiency, others prefer notions such as sufficiency,
consistency or eco-effectiveness. Voices from certain non-government organisations
(NGOs) dedicated to ecological issues promote the idea of sufficiency, that is, “self-
limitation of material needs, withdrawal from the world-market economy and an
egalitarian distribution of the remaining scarce resources” ([12], p 269). Huber suggests
that even in combination these two concepts are inadequate. He argues that consistency is
needed, which in practical terms might be achieved via industrial ecology, which “aims at
an industrial metabolism that is consistent with nature’s metabolism” and represents more
than an incremental shift in strategy ([12], p 269). McDonough and Braungart [17] prefer
the notion of eco-effectiveness to eco-efficiency, arguing that in nature excess is often
produced but that it is not wasted as a rule. They recommend the cradle-to-cradle style of
design which involves conceptualising products in a closed loop where materials are
reused again and again.
444

5 Framework Conditions and Voluntary Initiatives

Business groups such as the WBCSD and many businesses themselves acknowledge the
need for ‘framework conditions’ such as regulation to complement voluntary initiatives
[10]. One argument put forward by companies concerned about the costs of activities such
as greening the supply chain, for instance, is that they might suffer competitive
disadvantage if they attempt it while others do not. They therefore argue for government
regulation to level the playing field [18]. Kolk ([19], p 290) observes that “(t)he existence
of legislation, originating primarily from Europe and perhaps Japan, contributes to
maintain a certain level of sustainability reporting, both in quality and quantity.
Moreover, there are a number of companies where reporting, either compulsory or
voluntary, has been accompanied by the routine collection and/or calculation of
environmental data, thus becoming part of regular processes”.
While it is argued that while regulation might be needed to discipline recalcitrant
companies which resist improving their environmental or social records, it can also
impact positively on the conventional bottom line. Porter [20] concludes that rather than
being an unreasonable burden, regulation stimulates the pursuit of efficiency which
enhances competitiveness.
An alternative to legislative pressure is industry pressure from within through
voluntary initiatives. It is now common practice for corporations to have Environmental
Management Strategies (EMS) in place and to engage in corporate environmental
reporting [21]. The number of firms which also use voluntary standards such as ISO
14001 or ISO 9001 as part of their EMS is constantly growing (see Figure 1 for registered
ISO 14001 sites). The worldwide number of ISO 14001 certified sites has exceeded
100,000 in January 2006 (see Figure 1).
Many transnational corporations however consider their own EMS to be superior to
ISO 14001. Some businesses are interested in selectively, incorporating aspects of ISO
14001 that they feel might enhance their own EMS, but are less convinced of the benefits
of investing time and effort in order to gain certification. Some managers feel that it is
likely that ISO 14001 might become a base-line market condition, as ISO 9001 did, so
that corporations might have to adopt higher standards of their own to hold a competitive
advantage [18]. ISO 14001 intersects with other strategies as well. The Natural Step and
ISO 14001 can be usefully integrated, for example.
Supply chain management, or ‘greening the supply chain’, is another emerging
strategy. According to the United States-Asia Environmental Partnership, supply chain
management “represents perhaps the greatest opportunity for raising industrial
environmental performance on a global basis” ([18], p 6). Companies may work with
government or non-government organisations to establish suitable guidelines for supply
chain management. Starbucks’ CEO, Orin Smith, asserts that “(g)lobal coffee production
can only be sustainable if it is economically viable, socially responsible and
environmentally sensitive at all levels of the supply chain” ([22], p 1). Starbucks worked
 445

with Conservation International to develop guidelines to prompt suppliers to conform to

rigorous sustainability-enhancing standards [22].
Supply chain management is a natural theoretical adjunct of EMS, but in practice it is
not always implemented even where EMSs are in place. This may be because the
relevance of supply chains has escaped the attention of the public. Companies operating
in Europe are often more proactive in terms of greening the supply chain than others,
particularly where there are legal requirements to take back products once they are no
longer useful. This is true of the automobile and electronics sectors, for example [18].

120000
103583
100000

80000 74004
61175
60000
46973

40000
27459
20842
20000

0
Oct-01

Oct-02

Oct-03

Oct-04

Oct-05
Apr-01

Apr-02

Apr-03

Apr-04

Apr-05
Jul-01

Jul-02

Jul-03

Jul-04

Jul-05
Jan-01

Jan-02

Jan-03

Jan-04

Jan-05

Jan-06
Figure 1. ISO 14001 certified sites worldwide
(Source: Compiled from http://www.ecology.or.jp/isoworld/english/analy14k.htm).

6 Reporting Sustainability
Increasing numbers of businesses are making the effort of producing reports and
improving their accountability. Kolk [19] notes that corporate sustainability reporting has
increased dramatically since 1998: “(f)or the largest Fortune 250 companies, it has overall
risen from 35 to 45%.” (p 281). He also observes that the largest, most visible
multinationals are the most active in disclosing information on their environmental and
social activities. The Coalition for Environmentally Responsible Economies developed
the Global Reporting Initiative which “provide(s) globally applicable guidelines for
economic, environmental, and social reporting’ that many companies utilise [23]. The
WBCSD instigated Sustainable Development Reporting in 2001 to assist companies with
their reporting practices [23]. Many companies, eg Rio Tinto, Interface, ABB, IKEA and
the Body Shop, now produce sustainability reports.
Another significant international initiative is the Global Compact. This is a voluntary,
multistakeholder initiative launched by the United Nations in 2000, which Kofi Annan
challenged business leaders around the world to ‘embrace and enact’ [24]. It is an
446

“international corporate citizenship network initiated to support the participation of both

the private sector and other social actors to advance responsible corporate citizenship and
universal social and environmental principles to meet the challenges of globalisation”
([24], n.p.). It is built around ten principles:
• Human Rights
o The support and respect of the protection of international human rights;
o The refusal to participate or condone human rights abuses.
• Labour
o The support of freedom of association and the recognition of the right to collective
bargaining;
o The abolition of compulsory labour;
o The abolition of child labour;
o The elimination of discrimination in employment and occupation.
• Environment
o The implementation of a precautionary and effective program to environmental
issues;
o Initiatives that demonstrate environmental responsibility;
o The promotion of the diffusion of environmentally friendly technologies.
• Anti-Corruption
o The promotion and adoption of initiatives to counter all forms of corruption,
including extortion and bribery [24].
There is some acceptance within the business community of the value of using triple
bottom line (TBL) analyses as an accounting method of considering all three areas of
sustainability. The triple bottom line focuses ‘on economic prosperity, environmental
quality and – the element which business had preferred to overlook – social justice’ ([25],
70). For example, Soupata, CEO of UPS, supports the need for TBL accounting because
he considers that: “(t)here is a responsibility that comes with being a global firm.
Companies need to have a positive impact, both short and long term, on the communities
they do business in” ([26], 18). The notion of ‘value’ is increasingly being used in relation
to sustainability issues, and it is a familiar notion in business – the primary aim of
companies is to create and deliver value [27].
The assertion that corporations have social responsibilities beyond that catered for by
the pursuit of profit is often met with indignant rebuttal, however. Zadek comments that:
“making business logic out of a deeper sense of corporate responsibility requires
courageous leadership – in particular, civil leadership – insightful learning, and a
grounded process for organisational innovation ([28], p 132).

7 Conclusion
This business orientation towards efficiency in relation to the use of environmental
resources and in production methods as the key strategy for sustainability is referred to as
‘ecological modernisation’ or ‘eco-modernisation’ [6], [8]. Eco-modernisation “tries to
understand the ways in which institutions, like business, integrate environmental and
 447

economic objectives as part of an overall process of social change” ([6], p 23). The social
objectives are missing in this equation – the process of ‘greening’ business is often
informed by the familiar territory of environmental management than the more complex
and challenging sustainability objectives. Eco-modernisation is the theoretical expression
of the wish to perpetuate industrial society by simultaneously encouraging economic
growth and environmental responsibility. Robbins says that this aim is a product of the
efforts in the 1980s and 1990s to decouple, integrate and converge environmental and
economic concerns that were viewed as contradictory in the 1960s and 1970s ([6], p 25).
In this way, eco-modernity tames the radical by enclosing it in acceptable language and
institutionalising it. Critics fear that as a result of this process environmentalism and/or
sustainability are being ‘hijacked’ and rendered impotent [29]. Jamison remarks that
“(w)hether we see it as cooperation or cooption, as seeking greater influence or simply
selling out, there can be little denying the fact that much of what was once a movement
comprised primarily of voluntary activists has gone to market” ([8], p 124).
Although business action in regards to sustainability has been commendable it is
insufficient, since the “industry leaders (in this field) are outnumbered by the laggards”
[30]. Furthermore, gains in sustainability have been offset by economic growth and rising
consumer demand. The result is that ‘(b)usiness efforts to reduce environmental impact
are not keeping pace with the worsening state of the planet’ ([30], n.p.).
In general, a trend is observed for businesses to gradually change from initial
resistance to external criticism and pressure in regards to environmental and social issues
to more positive engagement. Increasing numbers of corporations are now providing
sustainability reports for public scrutiny. Additionally, researchers have noted a widening
range of vision from a management focus on issues within a single company, to an
appreciation of the importance of understanding and actively engaging in networks and
collaborations with a range of stakeholders. Along the way, there is much discussion
about what Big Business’s role in society should be – themes such as corporate social
responsibility are highly debatable.
While many initiatives are applauded, critics fear that corporations are essentially
‘hijacking’ sustainability and unhelpfully distorting its core themes. The eco-modernist
tendencies of the business response to sustainability – such as the reliance on eco-
efficiency – are controversial. Some doubt whether the culturally specific promises of
modernity suitably uphold sustainability’s global ambitions concerning cultural and
ecological diversity. It is important to note that variations in corporate attitudes to
environmentalism and sustainability over time should not be interpreted as a Darwinian
progression from naivety to sophistication. They are responses to the changing social
understandings and contexts in which corporations are embedded. While it is necessary to
critically analyse the sincerity and suitability of corporate responses to environmentalism,
it is also important to avoid treating them in a patronising manner emanating from a
Darwinian perspective.
The journey continues and may eventually come to involve a profound
transformation of corporate identity and function. The meeting between business and
448

sustainability is an inevitable and desirable step. Whether it will provide the sort of
outcomes activists might have wished for is yet to be determined. The existing
paradigmatic version of corporate identity has stretched to accommodate eco-
modernisation, but it is possible that in future, devotion to sustainability will catalyse a
shift to a new model of doing business within a new system. Despite beginning to reset
the business compass to some extent, issues of sustainability are becoming more pressing
and industry seems unable to keep pace with them.

Acknowledgement
The second author acknowledges the financial support of the Australian Research Council.

References
1. S. Benn and D. Dunphy, Can Democracy Handle Corporate Sustainability?
Constructing a Path Forward, in Innovation: Management, Policy and Practice, A.
Griffiths (ed.), Vol. 6, 141-155 (2004).
2. S. Schmidheiny, Changing Course: A Global Business Perspective on Development and
the Environment, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts and London, England
(1992).
3. C.O. Holliday Jr, S. Schmidheiny and P. Watts, Walking the Talk: The Business Case for
Sustainable Development, Greenleaf Publishing, Sheffield, UK (2002).
4. S. Hart, Beyond Greening: Strategies for a Sustainable World, Harvard Business
Review, Jan-Feb, 67-76 (1997).
5. A.J. Hoffman, From Heresy to Dogma: An Institutional History of Corporate
Environmentalism, Stanford Business Books, an Imprint of Stanford University Press:
California (2001).
6. P.T. Robbins, Greening the Corporation: Management Strategy and the Environmental
Challenge, Earthscan, London (2001).
7. A. Downs, Up and Down with Ecology: The Issue-Attention Cycle, Public Interest, 28:
38-50 (1972).
8. A. Jamison, The Making of Green Knowledge: Environmental Politics and Cultural
Transformations, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (2001).
9. S.-K. Rhee and S.-Y. Lee, Dynamic Change of Corporate Environmental Strategy:
Rhetoric and Reality, Business Strategy and the Environment, 12: 175-190 (2003).
10. L.D. DeSimone and F. Popoff, Eco-efficiency: the Business Link to Sustainable
Development, The MIT Press, London (1998).
11. D. Springett, An ‘Incitement to Discourse’: Benchmarking as a Springboard to
Sustainable Development’, Business Strategy and the Environment, 12: 1-11 (2003).
12. J. Huber, Towards Industrial Ecology: Sustainable Development as a Concept of
Ecological Modernisation, Journal of Environmental Policy and Planning, 2: 269-285
(2000).
13. Anon. Sustainability index shows it pays off, Australian Financial Review, March 1,
(2002), afr.com/specialreports/report2/2002/02/27/FFXQDUVP1YC.html (accessed
10/04/2005).
 449

14. J. Elkington, The ‘Triple Bottom Line for 21st Century Business, The Earthscan Reader
in Business and Sustainable Development, R. Starkey and R. Welford (eds), Earthscan
Publications, London, 20-43 (2001).
15. European Commission, Integrated Product Policy, (2005),
europa.eu.int/comm/environment/ipp/integratedpp.htm (accessed 14/02/2005).
16. K. Müller and D. Koechlin (eds), Green Business Opportunities: The Profit Potential,
Pitman Publishing, London (1993).
17. W. McDonaugh and M. Braungart, Cradle to Cradle: Remaking the Way We Make
Things, North Point Press, New York (2002).
18. United States – Asia Environmental Partnership (USAEP), Candid Views of Fortune 500
Companies (2002), www.usaep.org/gem/report.htm (accessed 2/08/2002).
19. A. Kolk, Trends in Sustainability Reporting by the Fortune Global 250, Business
Strategy and the Environment, 12: 279-291 (2003).
20. M. Porter, On Strategy, Harvard Business School Press, Harvard (1998).
21. D. Annandale, A. Morrison-Saunders and G. Bouma, The Impact of Voluntary
Environmental Protection Instruments on Company Environmental Performance,
Business Strategy and the Environment, 13: 1-12 (2004).
22. B. Nattrass and M. Altomare, The Natural Step for Business: Wealth, Ecology and the
Evolutionary Corporation, New Society Publishers, Gabriola Island (1999).
23. GreenBiz, Starbucks Announces Coffee Sourcing Guidelines (2001),
www.greenbiz.com/news/news_third.cfm?NewsID=18504 (accessed 10/04/2005).
24. United Nations Procurement Service, The Global Compact (2004),
www.un.org/Depts/ptd/global.htm (accessed 14/02/2005).
25. J. Elkington, Cannibals with Forks: The Triple Bottom Line of 21st Century Business,
Capstone, Oxford (1999).
26. L. Soupata, Sustainable Development is Good Global Business, Canadian HR Reporter,
17(5): 18, March 8 (2004).
27. M. Charter, Sustainable Value, Proceedings of the 10th International Conference of the
Greening of Industry Network, June 23-26, Göteborg, Sweden (2002),
www.informtryket.se/gin2002sq1/pdf/01011Charter.pdf (accessed 18/07/2002).
28. S. Zadek, The Path to Corporate Social Responsibility, Harvard Business Review,
December, 125-132 (2004).
29. R. Welford, Hijacking Environmentalism: Corporate Responses to Sustainable
Development, Earthscan Publications Ltd, London (1997).
30. R. Kendall, Business Greening Too Slow Warns UNEP, Ethical Investor (2002),
www.ethicalinvestor.com.au/news/story.asp?Story_ID=422, (accessed 6/06/2002).
 ABOUT THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT OF BUILDINGS:
ANALYSIS OF BUILDINGS USE INCIDENCE IN THE ENERGY
CONSUMPTION

FABIAN LÓPEZ PLAZAS*

Environmental Plan Office Technical University of Catalonia (UPC)
Barcelona, Spain

ALBERT CUCHÍ BURGOS

School of Architecture of Vallès Technical University of Catalonia (UPC)
Barcelona, Spain

The consideration of the use, as one of the factors of greater incidence in the final energy
consumption in the buildings, is the initial approach of this work that proposes a methodology to
quantify, to value and to analyze this influence. Understanding, that the use is not only referred to
the activities that are developed into a building, but also to the energy resources that utilizes to carry
out these activities and to satisfy the comfort needs of users, the total consumption of energy will be
related to the different energy uses in the building. Taking as premise that for each energy use the
consumption should be related to the systems and available machines in the building, its
performance and the use that be done of them, if we consider each one of these factors as a variable
to know, the energy consumption would be defined according to the solution of the following
equation: EC = IP * P * U, Eq. (1), where are: EC - energy consumption, IP - installed power, P -
performance/efficiency of systems, U – use and * - variables operator (to define). The analysis and
the resolution of this equation suppose the initial approach to verify by the study of some UPC
buildings within a PhD thesis investigation, in the framework of different research projects promoted
from Environmental Plan Office at UPC.

1. Problem Definition
For some energy uses (electrical appliance uses, f. exam) the variables of proposal
equation corresponds to fixed values relatively easy to identify because are not associates
to “external factors” that can modify them. In other energy uses as the artificial lighting
or the HVAC systems these variables can have a great variation in function of these
factors that influence in the definition of each one of them. In the case of the HVAC
systems, for example, the first variable (IP) is related to factors as: the comfort
parameters, the building type, the constructive and architectural characteristics, the
climate in which be located, and the use or uses that be given. In this case the concept of
“Installed power” will be changed to “the energy needs of the building” (Demand).
For the “Use” variable is necessary to distinguish between the use of buildings
space’s, and the energy resources use, because other type of factors would affect. Respect
to the use of the different spaces of building would be considered the singularities and
habits of the users (hours of not predict use, unexpected volume of users, etc.) and

*
Corresponding author

450
 451

respect to the use of energy resources with the consideration that from the design of the
systems installed into the building to attend the energy demand (finally, the energy
consumers) a typified use is assumed and probably is not the final real use and can have
a great influence in the performance of the systems (P). Assuming those considerations
the Use variable probably need to be considered as the Use management variable that
include it. Taking in account as it exposed, the equation initially presented for the energy
uses, in the case of HVAC uses would be modified in the following way:

EC = D * P * U m , (2)

where are: EC - energy consumption, D - energy demand, P - performance of systems, Um -

use management and * - variables operator (to define).
It is easy to deduce that the use has a great incidence, not only into the Use
management variable, but in greater or smaller measure in all variables of this equation.
The solution of this equation intends to identify and to quantify, if it’s possible, this
incidence.
Understanding that the approach would be able to adapt to the singularities of each
energy use, this work is focused into the analysis of the energy consumption for the
HVAC needs because as the possibles energy uses into a building has the major role in
the final consumption (between 40-60% according to the building type) and supposes the
greater architecture, and architect as the designer, incidence.

2 Achieving Data
The analysis of initial approach was developed studying the energy behaviour and the
characteristics of some buildings with differences and similarities respect to the factors
that would influence the energy consumption: The Location, The building characteristics,
and the Use. Taking as a premise that a university campus can offer different typologies
of buildings, 6 UPC buildings were selected with the following characteristics (Table 1).

Table 1. Selected buildings.

Campus Buildings Autonomous Buildings

• C-3 Building: (Mix use :Offices, Labs, • EUPB. (Technical University School of
Classrooms) Barcelona).
• D-4 Building: (Mix use :Offices, Labs, • ETSAB. (Technical School of Architecture of
Classrooms) Barcelona)
• A-6 Building:(Specialized use: • ETSAV.(Technical School Superior of
Classrooms) Architecture of Sant Cugat del Vallès .25 Km
from Barcelona)

The buildings were splitted into 2 groups according to its characteristics: buildings in
campus and autonomous buildings (That have all the uses to function with autonomy).
The work was developed according to “Energy Audit” methodology [1] by in the first
452

step collecting data related to the characteristics of each building, its use and the energy
consumption. (Figure 1).

Figure 1. Energy Audits Methodology.

The monitoring of the energy consumption was carried out in periods of 1

“Reference week” by month, taking data reports of consumption each 30 minutes, 24
hours al day. In the same “Reference week” was selected a day in which was carried out a
detailed monitoring of the activity in the building counting the number of users in
aleatory visits, in order to obtain a reference of the building occupation along the
characteristic day. On the other hand, weather data of each period were registered, to
establish and to analyze the energy needs of the buildings.
The data obtained were classified in 2 ways. On one hand, the “Statics” data referred
to the building characteristics (architectural, constructive, etc.), the use typology, the
sources and energy uses that are utilized. These data are translated in a series of
indicators that permit to quantify the different aspects analyzed. On the other hand, there
is a series “dynamics” data, related to the monitoring of the use and the energy
consumption that are translated in graphics and reference data bases.The static data are
associates to buildings characteristics, that allow to carry out economic investments to
modify them, and the dynamic data are associates to aspects that can improve only with
an adequate management.
 453

3 Variable Analysis

3.1. HVAC Demand

The first variable to analyze is the energy needs for heating and cooling (HVAC
demand). Actually, exists different types of methodologies and tools to evaluate the
energy HVAC demand of buildings, according to the type of analysis that carry out (uni-
zone or multi-zone) or with the heat transfer state that consider (stationary or transient).
The following tools have been selected to evaluate the HVAC energy demand of the
buildings (Table 2).

Table 2. Evaluation tools.

Zoning type Heat transfer state
TOOL
Uni-zone Multi-zone Stationary Transient

Simply degree days analysis [1] X X

ARCHISUN tool [2] X X

BALANÇ ENERGÈTIC tool [3] X X

LIDER Software [4] X X

The results for each group of analyzed buildings are represented in Figures 2 and 3.

Heating and Cooling annual demand- Autonomous buildings

800.000 Kwh

700.000 Kwh

600.000 Kwh

500.000 Kwh

400.000 Kwh

300.000 Kwh

200.000 Kwh

100.000 Kwh

0 Kwh
Calefacción Refrigeración Total Calefacción Refrigeración Total Calefacción Refrigeración Total

EPSEB ETSAB ETSAV

Degree days Archisun Balanç Energétic LIDER

Figure 2. Autonomous building HVAC demand.

454

Heating and Cooling annual demand - Campus buildings

120.000 Kw h

100.000 Kw h

80.000 Kw h

60.000 Kw h

40.000 Kw h

20.000 Kw h

0 Kw h
Calefacción Refrigeración Total Calefacción Refrigeración Total Calefacción Refrigeración Total

C-3 D-4 A-6

Degree days Archisun Balanç Energetic LIDER

Figure 3. Campus Buildings HVAC Demand.

The analysis of the results permits to identify that the transient multi-zone methods are
more detailed and exact in their analysis and permit a better simulation of the buildings
singularities. This characteristic is very significant especially in case of complex
geometry buildings because with simplified geometry buildings (Buildings in campus in
our case) the results with respect to the uni-zone and stationary methods do not represent
large differences.

3.2. Systems Performance

Taking as a premise, that the energy to generate the indoor building climate has different
phases until its final utilization, for evaluate the overall systems performance will be
necessary to evaluate the performance of each phases.
Considering the characteristics of the systems of HVAC employed in each building it's
necessary to solve this equation:
ή = ήg x ήd x ήc, (3)
where are: ή - overall performance, ήg - performance in generation of energy, ήd -
distribution of system performance and ήc - control/regulation performance.
The evaluation of each performance supposes to know the quality of the installations,
the characteristics of systems and the management and maintenance level that has. With the
buildings raised information was possible to carry out this evaluation, qualifying between 0-
100% the conditions of each aspect.
 455

But also it is possible to utilize software to evaluate the performance of the systems
according to its energy performance, by the simulation of the systems management and uses
that qualify the global performance comparing with a reference building that has same
characteristics and demand. In the Spanish context, nowadays is working in the
development of the CALENER software [4] selected to be used in this work.
The results of the performance evaluation through the qualification of the individual
performances and the global qualification with CALENER are presented in Table 3.

Table 3. System performance (*A 0.74 performance value suppose a P equation

coefficient of 1.26 for example).

Performance by phases Performance by software

BUILDING
ή: ήg X ήd X ήr tool CALENER
Heating Cooling Heating Cooling
Autonomous

74% 190% 79% 200%

Buildings

EPSEB *
ETSAB 68% 200% 62% 190%

ETSAV 65% 200% 72% 210%

C-3 76% 220% 78% 180%

Buildings
Campus

D-4 75% 220% 79% 220%

A-6 80% - 83% -

According to the results, it is observed that some buildings have centralized installations
with low global performance as a result of a wrong system design (zoning) and a minimum
level of control and maintenance (autonomous buildings).

3.3. Use Analysis

In the case of the variable Use is necessary to distinguish between the use related to the
energy resources used in the building, better defined as the management of resources, and the
use related with the utilization of the building spaces.
In the case of the management of energetic resources, the interest is to know if the
energy consumed in the building really attends the users comfort needs, or if is supplying
energy (cold or heat) in the moments or in the quantities that are not needed, that would be
translated in an inefficiency of the system. To know this inefficiency value will be necessary
identify which is the incidence of the energy supply to the confort level of the building for a
specific time period , or in the same way; which is the behavior of the indoor confort when is
delivered the energy that the building consumes.
To carry out this analysis will be necessary to do the energy balance of the building for a
specific period (a day for example in 1 hour fractions), that includes the real values of:
buildings use according to the monitoring of use (number of persons by hour) the heat or
cold energy really supply (according to the energy monitoring) to verify the variation of the
indoor temperature in the same period.
456

According to the indoor temperature behaviour between defined comfort parameters

will be able to establish if the delivered energy is adequate or if the building is unbalanced in
this period. (Figure 4).

Energy management analysis Tº

500.000 30º

450.000 28º

25º
400.000
23º
350.000
20º
300.000 18º
250.000 15º

200.000 13º

10º
150.000
8º
100.000
5º
50.000 3º
Kwh 0 0º
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Real consumption Real Tº "Comfort low er" Comfort Upper

Figure 4. Incidence of delivered energy into indoor comfort behavior.

When the building be not maintained inside of defined comfort parameters should be
verified if is possible to maintain it inside with less energy of the one that is consumed, and
the difference between the energy that theoretically should consume (Ct) respect to which
really consumes (Cr) would permit to establish the Use management inefficiency degree
(Figure 5).

Energy management analysis Tº

500.000 30º

450.000 28º

25º
400.000
23º
350.000
20º
300.000 18º

250.000 15º

200.000 13º
10º
150.000
8º
100.000
5º
50.000 3º
Kwh 0 0º
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Teorethical Consumption Real consumption Teorethical Tº
Real Tº "Comfort low er" Comfort Upper

Figure 5. Possibilities to balance the indoor comfort behavior.

 457

In mathematical terms, this would be translated like the difference between the surface
of 2 represented graphics, or what is the same thing, the relation between the 2 integral
functions (∫Ct / ∫ Cr) for a day period that should permit us to obtain an a dimensional value
(between 0-1) which would indicate the Use management inefficiency degree (Um):
24

∫C
0
t
. (4)
Um = 24

∫C
0
r

Obtaining a Um = 0,80 value would suppose that the 20% of the used energy for heating
or cooling are unnecessary and suppose a deficient management. The quantity of energy that
this signifies in Kwh, Mj, Btu, etc. will come determined by the energy consumption of
analyzed period.
To carry out this analysis would should be able to utilize any energy demand evaluation
tool that allow to visualize the variations of comfort parameters (hour to hour as less) during
a day type in order to extrapolate the behavior in the same way that was carried out with the
values of demand for the annual, monthly, and weekly building period.
For the studied buildings, the summer period analysis reflects (save in the case of the C-
3 campus building that possesses centralized cooling system) that the buildings have
individual cooling systems to satisfy the needs of a minimum part of the spaces of each
building (according to UPC cooling policies) with negative results of Um that will not be
considered in the global analysis of Use management, because would suppose that have to
consume more resources than it can consume for the machines that have.
The obtained results for each building are presented in Table 4.

Table 4. Management analysis results.

Um values winter period

Building
January February November December Average
EPSEB 0.72 0.69 0.72 0.89 0.75
ETSAB 0.71 0.90 0.76 0.69 0.77
ETSAV 0.44 0.43 0.45 0.42 0.44
C-3 0.79 0.72 0.75 0.88 0.78
D-4 0.91 0.80 0.65 0.72 0.77
A-6 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.80 0.90

4 Analysis of Propossed Equation

For each building, separated values were obtained of each equation variables; the following
step will be to define the interaction between the factors.
Initially, the resolution of the equation would permit to know the energy consumption
for a determined energy use (HVAC in this case) expressed in Kwh, Mj, Btu, etc. The first
analyzed factor is the heating and cooling needs (demand) in terms of annual energy, if we
458

consider that the values of demand had a greater or smaller variation for each analyzed
building according to the tool of evaluation that be utilized and take into account that any
evaluation tools can offers to us all the exact information of the demand, for this analysis will
be estimated the average value of the demand obtained for each building with the different
tools utilized, despising the upper and lower values in order to obtaining an adequate
reference.
The obtained results for each building are presented in Table 5.

Table 5. Heating and cooling energy demand.

HVAC Total
Building Heating Cooling
demand
EPSEB 535.271 kWh 145.449 kWh 680.719 kWh

ETSAB 410.745 kWh 138.493 kWh 549.238 kWh

ETSAV 263.637 kWh 99.242 kWh 362.879 kWh

Módulo C-3 61.575 kWh 37.600 kWh 99.175 kWh

Módulo D-4 56.727 kWh 25.714 kWh 82.441 kWh

Módulo A-6 61.456 kWh 31.556 kWh 93.012 kWh

The performance and the management values are considered considered as

denominators with respect to the obtained demand. Therefore, for the solution of this
equation, only would be necessary divide the demand value of each building by the values of
performance and management to obtain the value of theoretical consumption, that if we
compare with known values of real consumption from buildings monitoring, we would be
able to establish a first analysis of the energy behaviour (Table 6).
 459

Table 6. Theoretical energy consumption.

D
EC =
P ×U m
Building
Energy
D Kwh/year P Um EC Real consumption
Difference
Use Kwh/year Kwh/year
EPSEB Heating 535.271 KWh 0.72 0.75 992.704 KWh 751.265 KWh -32.14%
Cooling 145.449 KWh 2.00 1.00 72.724 KWh 37.864 KWh -92.07%
Total 680.719 KWh 1.065.428 KWh 789.130 KWh -35.01%
ETSAB Heating 410.745 KWh 0.65 0.77 822.658 KWh 626.412 KWh -31.33%
Cooling 138.493 KWh 2.00 1.00 69.246 KWh 27.335 KWh -153.32%
Total 549.238 KWh 891.905 KWh 653.747 KWh -36.43%
ETSAV Heating 263.637 KWh 0.60 0.44 997.130 KWh 1.024.448 KWh 2.67%
Cooling 99.242 KWh 2.00 1.00 49.621 KWh 8.658 KWh -473.09%
Total 362.879 KWh 1.046.751 KWh 1.033.106 KWh -1.32%

C-3 Heating 61.575 KWh 0.75 0.78 105.026 KWh 96.891 KWh -8.40%
Cooling 37.600 KWh 1.30 0.94 30.802 KWh 23.850 KWh -29.15%
Total 99.175 KWh 135.828 KWh 120.741 KWh -12.50%
D-4 Heating 56.727 KWh 0.69 0.77 106.867 KWh 123.321 KWh 13.34%
Cooling 25.714 KWh 2.00 1.00 12.857 KWh 8.189 KWh -57.01%
Total 82.441 KWh 119.724 KWh 131.510 KWh 8.96%
A-6 Heating 61.456 KWh 0.72 0.90 94.460 KWh 108.465 KWh 12.91%
Cooling 31.556 KWh 1.00 1.00 31.556 KWh 0 KWh 315.00%
Total 93.012 KWh 0.72 126.015 KWh 108.465 KWh -16.18%

The theoretical energy consumption obtained reflects the consumption that each
building should have according to its characteristics of building, the quality of its systems
and with the management observed. The difference of the obtained values with the reality of
the energy consumption would indicate that the quantity of energy that supposes the real
consumption respect to the theoretical needs.
But in the same way, that is possible to obtain a theoretical consumption to compare
with the real consumption, if by the energy audit we would know the real energy
consumption, the performance of the installations and the management, the proposed
equation would be able to know the value of the real attended demand into the building (Dr),
or what is the same thing, the quantity of energy that really is delivered into the building.
The initial equation presented would be transformed in the following way:
Dr = EC × P × U m . (5)
460

The comparison of the demand obtained resolving this equation with the values of
theoretical demand obtained with the tools of evaluation (Table 7) would permit to establish
the percentage of energy needs that are been attended with the delivered energy and in
consequence, the efficiency in the consumption of resources of the buildings analyzed.

Table 7. Energy demand /delivered energy.

Theoretical Real delivered

Difference
Building Energy Use Demand Energy
%
(Kwh/year) Dr (Kwh/year)

EPSEB Heating 535.271 KWh 405.086 KWh 75.68%

Cooling 145.449 KWh 75.728 KWh 52.07%
Total 680.719 KWh 480.814 KWh 70.63%
ETSAB Heating 410.745 KWh 312.761 KWh 76.14%
Cooling 138.493 KWh 54.670 KWh 39.48%
Total 549.238 KWh 367.431 KWh 66.90%
ETSAV Heating 263.637 KWh 270.860 KWh 102.74%
Cooling 99.242 KWh 17.317 KWh 17.45%
Total 362.879 KWh 288.177 KWh 79.41%
C-3 Heating 61.575 KWh 56.805 KWh 92.25%
Cooling 37.600 KWh 29.114 KWh 77.43%
Total 99.175 KWh 85.919 KWh 86.63%
D-4 Heating 56.727 KWh 65.461 KWh 115.40%
Cooling 25.714 KWh 16.377 KWh 63.69%
Total 82.441 KWh 81.838 KWh 99.27%
A-6 Heating 61.456 KWh 70.568 KWh 114.83%
Cooling 31.556 KWh 0 KWh 0.00%
Total 93.012 KWh 70.568 KWh 75.87%

The proposed equation solution and the knowledge of the quantity of energy
really delivered into the buildings, allow to carry out an appraisal of the weight for
each variable in the consumption, (Figure 6), that offers an overall vision of how is
consumed the energy in each case.
 461

Figure 6. Weight of each variable into the energy consumption.

5 Conclusions
• The development of the work and the solution of the proposed equation permit to
establish that; of the factors that influences the different variables, the Use has a
greater incident in the total consumption of energy, because is the common factor to
all the variables and fundamentally because conditions the variability from the
values that can be obtained, measured and to simulated and the reality of the
consumption:

EC = D * P * U
Building: Real USE:
Shape Systems: Building :
Materials Design Quantity
Installations Control
Location:
Intensity
Associated Maintenance
Climate
factors Emplacement Systems :
Systems USE Quantity
Building USE Quantity Intensity
Quantity Intensity (Management)
Intensity

EC = f [D( B , L , U ) P( S , U )U ( U ) ] m

EC= f [ U]
principal
462

• The principal conclusion of this work is that the energy consumption of a building is
function mainly of the use as determinant factor (6).
• The estimation of the Use management variable of a building allow to identify the
really delivered energy in a building for a specific energy use, to evaluate the
efficiency in the use of the energy resources to promote energy efficiency actions
and reduction of the associated impact
• The proposed methodology does not condition the tools to utilize or the depth level
of the analysis. The proposed equation that shows the initial approach has been
studied and analyzed utilizing some of the available tools to carry out this type of
analysis. The selection of a determined tool will condition the level and the certainty
of the analysis, and according to the availability and the quality of the information
obtained the analysis will be more or less certain.
• The need to define an energy strategy for each building is evidenced. This strategy
should define from the consideration of all phases of the cycle of life, the better form
in which the energy needs of a building with the maximum performance will be
attended and the best possible management that guarantee the minimum consume of
energy resources.

References

1. Diputació de Barcelona. Departament de Medi Ambient. Auditories Energètics II,

Instal·lacions i Edificis. Barcelona (1986).
2. R. Serra, School of Architecture of Barcelona, Technical University of Catalonia
(UPC), THERMIE program with the collaboration of Catalan Energy Institut,
Politécnico de Milán, Italy, University of Hannover, and Tombazis and Ass., from
Greek. ARCHISUN software (1983).
3. A. De Bobes, Technology section. E.T.S Architecture Vallès – UPC . Balanç Energètic
tool© (1999-2003).
4. J.L. Molina, S. Álvarez and R. Velásquez, Grupo de Termotecnia. Escuela Superior de
Ingenieros de Sevilla. CALENER and LIDER software (2003-2005).
 IMPLEMENTATION OF KYOTO PROTOCOL AND
EMISSIONS TRADING

ANA ĆURKOVIĆ
Žurići i partneri
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

IVAN ANDROČEC
Hrvatska elektroprivreda d.d.
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

ANTE ĆURKOVIĆ
Hrvatska elektroprivreda d.d.
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

Environmental problems that are a consequence of intensive development, competitive market,

increased living standards, and energy costs have been brought into the focus of energy policy both
in the European Union and in Croatia. This is especially pronounced in the Kyoto Protocol and in
the energy sector liberalization processes. In this paper we discuss the possible domestic policies for
the implementation of the Kyoto Protocol and their compliance with the energy market liberalisation
as well as with global trading rules. Croatia as Annex I party has still not ratified the Kyoto Protocol
because of the specific Croatian circumstances with respect to determination of the baseline
emissions of greenhouse gases. This paper also explores the impacts of emerging environmental
markets such as EU emissions trading scheme on energy sector in Croatia in line with Kyoto
Protocol requirements. Directive 2003/87/EC establishing a scheme for greenhouse gases emissions
allowances trading within the European Union has launched the biggest emissions trading scheme in
the world. The goal is to give efficient economical measure for reducing greenhouse gases emissions
in achieving Kyoto targets. Deficit with regard to allowances will be punished, and surplus can be
sold or kept for further usage. Buying or selling emission allowances will have great impact on
competitiveness of production facilities. With introduction of the Linking Directive 2004/101/EC
with regards to Kyoto Protocol project mechanisms (Joint Implementation, Clean Development
Mechanism) for emission trading EU ETS, energy utilities have a possibility to increase their
emission allowances and plant production. In the paper we are considering requirements for the
implementation of Kyoto Protocol, advantages and disadvantages, development of emissions trading
in Europe, the influence of the same to Croatia, analysing impact of emissions trading on energy
sector and business behaviour.

1 Introduction
The Kyoto Protocol [1] to the 1992 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate
Change (UNFCCC), agreed in 1997, an international agreement with the aim to reduce
greenhouse gases emissions world wide, entered into force on 16 February 2005. The
targets cover emissions of the six main greenhouse gases (GHG): Carbon dioxide (CO2),
Methane (CH4), Nitrous oxide (N2O), Hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs), Perfluorocarbons
(PFCs), and Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6). CO2 emissions cover around 80% of all GHG

463
464

emissions. The maximum amount of emissions (measured as the equivalent in carbon

dioxide) that a Party can emit over the commitment period (2008-2012) in order to
comply with its emissions reduction target is known as a 'Party’s assigned amount'. Due to
the fact that the implementation of Kyoto Protocol is very demanding for national
economy, there were and still are many negotiations how Kyoto Protocol is going to be
applied. The main consequence of Kyoto protocol negotiations on Conferences of Parties
connected with implementation, was adopting Kyoto flexible mechanisms (joint
implementation, clean development mechanism, emission trading) on the seventh
Conference of Parties (COP7) in Marrakesh in 2001.
Currently, four signatory states have not ratified Kyoto Protocol: USA (25% of all
world CO2 emissions) [3], Australia, Kazakhstan and Croatia. European Union has taken
the leading position in ratifying Kyoto Protocol process and in the environmental
protection. In 2002 the European Union has ratified Kyoto Protocol and has committed to
achieve an 8% reduction in emissions of greenhouse gases compared to 1990 levels in the
period 2008-2012 [17]. One of the answers to how to achieve that commitment was
creation of Directive 2003/87/EC establishing a scheme for greenhouse gas emission
allowance trading within the Community [4]. Because of the wish for linking Joint
Implementation (JI) and Clean Development Mechanism (CDM) with European emission
trading scheme (EU ETS) with a goal of increasing emissions quotas, the Directive
2004/101/EC [5] establishing a scheme for greenhouse gas emission allowance trading
within the Community, in respect of the Kyoto Protocol's project mechanisms, was
adopted (27 October 2004). European emission trading scheme has started on 1 January
2005 – all plants covered by this scheme have received quotas according to the National
Allocation Plans and they must monitor and report on progress made by this scheme
every year.
Croatia is the Annex I Party to Kyoto Protocol. However due to specific reasons
Croatia has still not ratified the Protocol. Namely, the baseline emissions year is 1990 (or
earlier years), and in 1990 Croatia has had very low level of emissions due, in particular,
to the fact that the emissions calculation did not include the emissions from the electricity
plants located in the territory of other ex-Yugoslavia republics from which Croatia was
supplied. Therefore it would be hard, if not impossible, for Croatia to reduce the 1990
emissions level by 5%.
Because of this situation Croatia has in Marrakech in 2001 proposed to the
Conference of the parties to the UNFCCC (COP7) that baseline emissions for Croatia be
stated at a higher level. However, this proposal has not yet been decided, and the
Conference of the Parties in Buenos Aires in 2004 has decided that the decision will be
prolonged to the next session in June 2005.
With the goal of joining the European Union, Croatia will soon have to ratify the
Protocol and deal with its obligations.
In this paper we are considering the development of Kyoto Protocol and emissions
trading scheme in the European Union and the influence of the same on Croatia, as well
 465

as the possibilities of the Protocol implementation by Croatia and the effect of it to the
Croatian economy, in particular to the electricity sector.

2 Policies and Measures for the Implementation of the Kyoto Protocol

To achieve their targets, Annex I Parties must put in place domestic policies and
measures. Parties may offset their emissions by increasing the amount of greenhouse
gases removed from the atmosphere by so-called carbon “sinks” in the land use, land-use
change and forestry (LULUCF) sector (forestation, reforestation, deforestation, forest and
cropland management, grazing land management and revegetation). Greenhouse gases
removed from the atmosphere through eligible sink activities generate credits are known
as removal units (RMUs). European Union has already identified possible 42 measures to
reduce EU GHG emissions by 664-765 Mt CO2eq at cost below € 20/t [7].
The Marrakech Accords (2001) define guidelines, modalities and rules for the
implementation of the market-based Kyoto protocol mechanisms to minimise the cost of
making the required GHG emissions reductions: International Emissions Trading (IET),
Joint Implementation (JI) and Clean Development Mechanism (CDM). Parties must
establish and maintain a national registry to track and record transactions under these
mechanisms to provide evidence that their use of the mechanisms is “supplemental to
domestic action”, which must constitute “a significant element” of their efforts in meeting
their commitments. The Protocol rulebook sets out detailed procedures for considering
cases of potential non-compliance, along with an expedited procedure for reviewing cases
concerning eligibility to participate in the mechanisms.
Under the joint implementation (JI), an Annex I Party may implement a project that
reduces emissions (e.g. an energy efficiency scheme) or increases removals by sinks (e.g.
a reforestation project) in the territory of another Annex I Party, and count the resulting
emission reduction units (ERUs) against its own target. In practice, joint implementation
projects are most likely to take place where there tends to be more scope for cutting
emissions at low cost. Croatia has signed a Letter of intent with the Netherlands on
financing energy project of renewables implementation on the island Hvar.

Figure 1. Joint implementation.

Under the clean development mechanism (CDM), Annex I Parties may implement
projects in non-Annex I Parties that reduce emissions and use the resulting certified
emissions reductions (CERs) to help meet their own targets. The CDM also aims to help
non-Annex I Parties achieve sustainable development and contribute to the ultimate
objective of the Convention. There are 35 different methodologies of CDM
466

implementation, but the COP adopted only the rules of procedure of the CDM Executive
Board and the simplified modalities and procedures for small-scale CDM project
activities. The first CDM project has been registered in November 2004 - the project will
reduce emissions of methane from a landfill in the state of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. A
successful CDM energy project can, for example, earn certified emission reductions
(CERs) during a minimum of seven and a maximum of 21 years. Total Assigned Amount
for Annex I countries is increased (see next figure). Croatia can, for instance, invest in
cogeneration project i.e. invest in gas power plant instead of planned coal power plant in
Bosnia and Herzegovina – total emission reduction can be included in total assigned
amount for Croatia.

Figure 2. Clean Development Mechanism.

The idea of emissions trading system was a new approach to the problem of climate
change. The Kyoto international emissions trading system was introduced based on the
US's 'very positive experience with permit trading in the acid rain program, which
reduced costs by 50% form what was expected, yet fully serving our environmental
goals'.[20] Under the international emissions trading (IET), an Annex I Party may transfer
some of the emissions under its assigned amount, known as assigned amount units
(AAUs), to another Annex I Party that finds it relatively more difficult to meet its
emissions target. Total Assigned Amount for Annex I countries is constant (see next
figure). The Protocol rulebook requires Annex I Parties to hold a minimum level of
AAUs, CERs, ERUs and/or RMUs in a commitment period reserve that cannot be traded.
Tradable commodities in the emerging emissions trading markets are either GHG
emission allowances (cap-and-trade system) or verified GHG emission reductions or
credits (baseline-and-credit system) - these systems may be combined. Allowances and
reductions are traded in various international, national and intra-company emissions
trading schemes. Trading may be either voluntary or based on a mandatory regime.
An adaptation fund was established by the Marrakech Accords to manage the funds
raised by the adaptation levy on the CDM, as well as contributions from other sources.
The fund is administered by the GEF, as the operating entity of the Convention and Kyoto
Protocol’s financial mechanism.
 467

Figure 3. International emission trading.

3 Implementation of Kyoto Protocol in EU Emissions Trading and Impact on

Energy Sector
EU climate change policy before Kyoto involved a strong reliance on regulation, e belief
in the need to prevent hypothetical future risks caused by CO2 emissions, a commitment
to international leadership in the policy area and an internal and less-publicized
realization that regulations alone were insufficient to fight climate change. [19]
“…the key to getting the incentives right through free market environmentalism is to
establish property rights that are well defined, enforced, and transferable.’’[22]
In January 2005 the European Union Emission Trading Scheme (EU ETS)
commenced operation as the largest multi-country, multi-sector Greenhouse Gas (CO2)
emission trading scheme world-wide. The scheme is based on Directive 2003/87/EC,
which entered into force on 25 October 2003. The aim is to help EU Member States
achieve least cost compliance with their commitments under the Kyoto Protocol by letting
participating companies to buy or sell emission allowances.
The description of such tradable emissions allowances and their purpose can be
generally summarized in the following:
“ Tradable permits … represent a right granted by a government to the permit holder
to emit a specified quantity of gases. By issuing only a limited number of permits
governments can control the total quantity of gas emitted… Because permits are usually
limited to a quantity that is less than the amount of gas that would normally be emitted,
the right to emit becomes a valuable commodity. If trading of permits is allowed, than a
market price will be established. Those wishing to emit the specified gases beyond
permitted levels must either reduce their emissions or purchase permits to emit. Polluters
able to reduce their emissions relatively cheap will do so, rather than purchase permits.
Those polluters who face higher abatement costs will tend to buy permits to satisfy
government requirements. In this way, reductions in emissions are made by those
polluters who can do so at least cost, being compensated by polluters who face higher
costs of abatement.’’[21]
468

By EU ETS emissions allowances will be allocated to approximately 12.700

installations or about 6.000 companies in the 25 EU Member States, such as refineries,
power stations (units above 20 MW), paper, pulp, metal and mineral plants. Total
volumes of 2.1 billion tons CO2 per year is allocated, accounting for around 45% of the
EU’s total CO2 emissions [17].

Emission targets of EU- Emission reduction commitments of

EU-15 member states
according to burden sharing agreement new EU member states according to
Kyoto-Protocol2)
the Kyoto-

EU-
EU-15: GB
-12,5%
-8% IRL DK ES
+13% -21% -8%
NL S FIN
-6% +4% +0% LV
D -8%
B -21% L LT
-7.5% -28% PL -8%
P F CZ -6%
+27% +0% A
-13% GR -8% SK
E +25% -8%
+15% I SLO HUN
-6.5% -8% -6%

%-change of greenhouse gas emissions %-change of greenhouse gas emissions

between 1990 and 2008-2012 between 19881) or 1990 and 2008-2012
1) Poland and Hungary have adopted 1988 as base year according to which their emission reduction will be measured
2) Malta and Cyprus did not commit to emission reductions under the Kyoto protocol and are thus omitted here

EU-
EU-15 total New members total
-83.5 Gap: Mio. t of Excess -72.9
~ 74% CO2- equivalent reduction
-319.6
~300% -307.2

Figure 4. Kyoto protocol commitments in “old” and “new” EU Member States.

The scheme is based on six fundamental principles: It is a ‘cap-and-trade’ system -

allocation of maximum amount of emissions rights (cap) to participants through National
Allocation Plans (NAPs). Implementation will take place in phases, with periodic reviews
and opportunities for expansion to other gases and sectors - two trading periods (2005-
2007 and 2008-2012). Allocation plans for emission allowances are decided periodically.
It includes a strong compliance framework. The market is EU-wide but taps emission
reduction opportunities in the rest of the world through the use of CDM and JI, and
provides for links with compatible schemes in third countries.
Recent EU Commission studies conclude that Kyoto targets can be achieved at an
annual cost of €2.9 to €3.7 billion, which is less than 0.1 % of GDP in the EU. One of
these studies concluded that without the Emissions Trading Scheme costs could reach €
6.8 billion [7]. Costs have to be seen in relation to the opportunities arising for suppliers
of clean, low-carbon technologies in Europe and beyond and the medium-term advantage
for European industry in the transition to a low-carbon global economy.
 469

The recently adopted “Linking Directive” [5] will further lower the costs and protect
the competitiveness of EU businesses. It will create a link between the Flexible
Mechanisms of the Kyoto Protocol - Joint Implementation (JI) and the Clean
Development Mechanism (CDM) - and the EU emissions trading scheme. In principle,
companies which carry out emission reduction projects outside the EU through JI or
CDM will be able to convert the credits they earn from those projects into allowances that
can be used for compliance under the EU Emissions Trading Scheme – received credits
will be equivalent (1 EUA = 1 CER = 1 ERU) and allow them to be traded under the
scheme. This are additional incentives for businesses to invest in emission-reduction
projects elsewhere, for example in Russia and developing countries. Credits from nuclear
facilities and land-use, land-use change and forestry activities will not be accepted. A
review will be triggered once the number of credits converted for use in the EU emissions
trading scheme reaches 6 per cent of the total quantity of allowances allocated by the
Member States for the 2008-2012 period. At the end of 2003, the European Investment
Bank created a Dedicated Financing Facility of € 500 million to provide finance for
prospective emission reduction projects. Likewise, Germany’s KfW set up a Carbon Fund
in June 2004, and other leading European banks are considering similar initiatives.
National Allocation Plans (NAP) determine the total quantity of CO2 emissions that
Member States will grant to their companies, which can then be sold or bought by the
companies themselves. This means each Member State must ex-ante decide how many
allowances to allocate in total for the first trading period 2005 to 2007 and how many
each plant covered by the Emissions Trading Scheme will receive. Quantities are not
allocated to nuclear and renewables. Most allowances are allocated to installations free of
charge – at least 95% during the initial phase and at least 90% in the second phase from
2008 to 2012. Though only plants covered by the scheme are given allowances, anyone
else – individuals, institutions, nongovernmental organisations or whoever – will be free
to buy and sell in the market in the same way as companies. Allocations to installations
must take account of their potential for reducing emissions from each of their activities,
and must not be higher than the installations are likely to need. Those that have not
produced enough allowances to cover their emissions will have to pay a dissuasive fine
for each excess tonne emitted. In the initial phase the penalty will be € 40 per tonne, but
from 2008 it will rise to € 100. Operators will also have to obtain allowances to make up
the shortfall in the following year, and they will be “named and shamed” by having their
names published. Each installation in the ETS must have a permit from its competent
authority - the permit sets out the emissions monitoring and reporting requirements for an
installation, whereas allowances are the scheme’s tradable unit. Installations must report
their CO2 emissions after each calendar year.
One allowance (1 EUA) represents the right to emit 1 tonne of CO2. Companies that
keep their emissions below the level of their allowances will be able to sell their excess
allowances at a price determined by supply and demand at that time. Those facing
difficulty in remaining within their emissions limit will have a choice between taking
measures to reduce their emissions, such as investing in more efficient new technologies
470

or using a less carbon-intensive energy source, buying the extra allowances they need at
the market rate, or a combination of the two, whichever is cheapest. This ensures that
emissions are reduced in the most cost-effective way.

Figure 5. National Allocation Plan and Carbon Dioxyde Emissions per kWh.

Around 55% of emissions covered by EU ETS are allocated to power plants. 10

biggest power companies (RWE, Vattenfall, EoN) are controling 30% of all CO2
emissions covered by EU ETS [9]. The main influence on energy sector will be through
electricity price and new approach with respect to the change of generation costs of peak
and baseload units. Prices of electricity in the liberalised power market are increasingly
complex and difficult to predict, however CO2 will now be one of the price factors.
The presence of CO2 in the electricity price will probably accelerate the tendency for
gas to become the preferred fuel in power generation. However, gas production in Europe
is not expected to grow as strongly as gas demand in the region. With growing reliance on
gas imports, the access to such supply in the long term at attractive conditions is also
crucial. However, increased demand would imply increased prices. Most of the potential
future gas supply is projected to come from sources located in technically challenging and
 471

politically risky environments. The development of new gas supplies and the
infrastructure to deliver the commodity to the market will therefore require substantial
investments, so the gas consumers would face the prospect of having to pay significantly
higher gas prices. Another reason why gas prices might increase is related to the way the
gas prices are fixed in long term contracts. Coal and lignite emit twice the amount of CO2
than gas, which gives additional value to gas. Therefore, because of the new carbon
emission constraint, gas suppliers might be inclined to claim the value attributed to the
difference in CO2 emissions between gas and coal. Gas suppliers might include at least
part of this additional CO2 emission value in their gas contracts, thereby increasing their
gas prices.

100
Minimum Peak
demand demand
90

80
Oil
70
SRMC (EURO/MWH)

60
Pump
50 storage
Coal
40
Gas
30
Hydro Nuclear
20
Wind
10

0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
Cumulative available installed capacity (GW)

no ETS ETS @ €10/tCO2

Figure 6. Impact of EU ETS on scheduling of power generation and electricity price.

The carbon “emission allowance” will increase the variable costs for fossil-fuelled
power plants and thus its short-run marginal costs since an emission allowance will be
needed for each unit of CO2 produced. Coal accounts for approximately 30% of EU
power generation. New technologies that will be developed for zero emission fossil fuel
power plants will be CO2 capture and storage (CCS). The EU Commission has a target
472

cost of capture and storage of below € 20/tonne CO2. At this price coal plant with CCS
and combined cycle gas turbine plant (without CCS) are the cheapest options for
producing power. New power plants with CCS technology can be developed by 2015-
2020 as well as increased plant efficiency [13].
A whole range of new businesses is emerging in Europe as a result of the EU carbon
market: carbon funds, carbon traders, carbon finance specialists, carbon management
specialists, carbon auditors and verifiers. Companies and other participants in the market
may trade directly with each other or buy and sell via a broker, exchange or any other
type of market intermediary that may spring up to take advantage of a new market of
significant size. The success of the American SO2/NOx markets is without doubt due to
the technology push it created, stimulating the timely introduction of new low emitting
technologies. The cost of reducing SO2 emissions under the US scheme, for example, was
forecast at from $700 to $1,500 a ton, yet the final market price of rights reflected a
reduction cost of $350 a ton [14]. This will also probably be the case with EU ETS. EEX
is one of several exchange projects launching emissions contracts. Nordic power
exchange Nord Pool has been running futures contracts. A joint venture of IPE and the
Chicago Climate Change, ECX, France's Powernext and Austria's EXAA are also
planning contracts.
What about new installations? In the first case, Member States may choose to let new
entrants buy allowances on the market – in that case, there is no need to reduce the total
allocated quantities as set in the preceding step to provide for new entrants. In the second
option, Member States could choose to build a reserve of allowances for new entrants. Up
to the amount of allowances in the reserve, new entrants would be given a free allocation.

4 Croatian Case and Impacts on Energy Sector

Croatia became a Party to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change
(UNFCCC) in 1996 [23], and has signed Kyoto Protocol in 1999. However, due to the
specific circumstances Croatia has still not ratified the Protocol.
The main problem regarding the Protocol ratification for Croatia is a very low
emissions level in the base year 1990. Namely, according to Kyoto Protocol Croatia has
the GHG emissions reduction obligation of 5% below 1990 level in the period 2008 -
2012. The GHG emissions of Croatia in 1990 amount to less than 0,2% of the Protocol
Annex I Parties emissions, and the GHG emission per capita amounts to 6.55 MteqCO2
which is one of the lowest among Annex I Parties. This is due because of the great portion
of the use of renewable resources in energy production. Namely, 40-60% of electric
energy is produced by hydro-plants, 15% of electricity is produced by cogeneration, 15%
of electricity needs is covered by nuclear power plant Krško, Slovenia, and the coal is
used in only 10% of the electricity production. [24]
The Croatian particular problem raises in the fact that the base year emissions were
low because Croatia has been supplied with the energy from the power plants situated in
the other ex-Yugoslavia republics, since those republics and Croatia were parts of the
 473

same federal state (until 1991 22% of the electricity needs were covered this way) [24].
However, since those power plants are not situated in the territory of Croatia, the
emissions from those plants have not been taken into consideration within the baseline
determination.
It should be noted as well, that due to the special circumstances during the Homeland
War (when overall decrease of economic activities and energy consumption occurred) and
the transition to the market economy (which led to the downsizing or abolishment of
some, even though there were no many to begin with, energy intensive industries) the
GHG emissions have fallen for about 45% in the period 1990-1995. [24]
In the following period the situation changed, and between 1995 and 2001 the GHG
emissions rose on average by 3.2% per year. With this pace Kyoto quota will be exceeded
in 2005.
Here it is important to stress that one of the main principles of the UNFCCC and
Kyoto Protocol is the principle of common but differentiated responsibility of the parties
and according to this principle the specific situations and circumstances of a certain party
should be evaluated and taken into account.
Based on the above principle and on the fact of very low emissions, for the purpose
of baseline determination very unfavourable structure of the emissions source (namely,
high portion of renewable energy sources) and of the dependence on the energy import,
Croatia is negotiating the increase of the base year emissions level within the UNFCCC
implementation authority. In order for Croatia to be able to successfully implement Kyoto
Protocol the base year emissions level should be increased by 4,46 million tons eq-CO2.
In addition to the above Croatia is also ‘counting’ on the CO2 sinks inclusion into the
emissions calculation. Namely, Croatia is covered by forests in 36% of the territory.
According to the UNFCCC CO2 sinks are to be accounted, namely, taken off the total
emissions. The amount to be accounted has not yet been decided for Croatia – this will
also play an important role for Croatia’s Protocol implementation possibility.
Further negotiations and decision taking on the Croatian issues above is expected on
the next session of the UNFCCC implementation authority in June 2005.
One of the reasons why the decision regarding baseline emissions for Croatia was not
taken in COP10 in Buenos Aires in December 2004 was that the EU representatives
promoted Croatian abandonment of the request and the solving of the matter with the
European Commission.
It is possible that this matter be solved within Croatia and EU, and the new EU ETS,
if the Commission would grant Croatia to issue as many emissions allowances as would
cover the requested and necessary baseline emissions level for Croatia. In this case,
Croatia might be able not to exceed Kyoto quota and to participate in EU ETS.
When evaluating the impact of the Kyoto Protocol implementation and emissions
trading on Croatian energy sector the basic interest of energy security in Croatia should be
taken into account.
474

In order to ensure electricity supply in Croatia, it is necessary to construct another

2500 MW production facilities until 2020 and to invest into the transmission and
distribution facilities.
Strategically it is important to dispose of the electricity production units on ones own
territory, as could have been seen in the examples of the recent electricity supply
disorders in Europe and North America.
Currently Croatia disposes of 30 power plants in the its territory (21 hydro power
plants and 9 thermal power plants) and of 50% of the nuclear power plant Krško in the
territory of Slovenia. This means that 2063MW hydro power plant with the average
production of 5800 GWh per year and 1956 MW thermal power plants are situated in the
territory of Croatia.
The question raises what power production plants are to be built in Croatia having in
mind the EU accession and Kyoto Protocol implementation, but also the security of
supply needs and general economic situation in the country.
The main advantage of the gas power plants is in rather low investment expenses for
the combine gas thermo power plant and in relatively acceptable environmental influence.
However, there is a negative side of the gas power plants coin, and that is unsafe long
term supply, impossible diversification of the supply route and uncertainty and risk
connected to prices in long term.
All negative aspects of the gas come as a positive once regarding coal. Namely the
advantages of the coal as a power plant fuel raise in the good conditions regarding long
term supply, possibility of a diversification of the supply route and long term stability of
the price.
Nuclear fuel is acceptable from the environmental and price point of view. However
the nuclear power plants are expensive in construction, and also attract negative public
opinion which makes them rather unattractive.
The most attractive possibility are renewables. They are environment friendly,
popular and form a firm goal of many energy strategies, as well as Croatian. However,
due to rather small capacity and noneconmic features, renewables cannot be accounted for
salving of the electricity supply in general.

5 Conclusion
The European Emissions Trading Scheme introduced a business side into the national
emissions reduction goals. EU ETS has created a possibility for the installations –
companies to actively participate in the trade of CO2 emissions allowances. Corporate
strategy of CO2 management will include the management of energy, emissions, and of
the emissions allowances trade. The sooner the company adjusts and starts participating in
the new market the more will it be able to influence the future development of the
company in this market. For the electricity undertakings this adjustment includes the
change of fuels in power plants.
 475

The first phase of EU ETS will show the liquidity of the European emissions market
and will determine the strategy for the second phase for the period from 2007 onwards.
However, emissions trading is to be only a part of the general emissions management –
energy efficiency support and development of renewable energy resources also form part
of this strategy. Other Kyoto Protocol implementation mechanisms, namely joint
implementation and clean development mechanism, give additional possibilities to
corporate management. These mechanisms also give more options for Croatian possibility
of active participation in EU ETS market.
Europe’s plan to control greenhouse gases emissions responsible for global warming
will probably lead to higher energy prices and greatly accelerate the shift from coal
(including lignite) to gas as the primary fuel used in power plants. The power industry has
to respond to the both objectives of energy security and low GHG emissions. Emission
trading, and flexible mechanisms, can play useful and essential roles to realise these
objectives, if they are based on a well thought and realistic planning of new technology
introduction. The option to trade encourages companies to explore innovations that might
reduce their emissions. If a company can cut its emissions for a cost lower than the market
price for emissions rights, it has an incentive to do so and to sell its excess rights. Since
other companies can then buy those rights, their market price falls to the cheapest cost of
reducing emissions.
The case of Croatia within the EU ETS needs to be viewed within the special
Croatian circumstances discussed in this paper. Croatia is expecting that the baseline
emissions level be raised and that CO2 sinks will play significant role within the emissions
reduction requirements for Croatia. It is also expected that the EU Commission will note
and evaluate the above circumstances and the important objective of energy security when
deciding about the emissions allowances being granted to Croatia and the inclusion of
Croatia into the EU emissions market.
Without the change in the baseline emissions level and the treatment by the EU
Commission taking into consideration Croatian special situation and very low GHG
emissions level, it would be very hard, if not impossible for Croatia to comply with Kyoto
Protocol requirements.
In the end it should be noted that by Kyoto Protocol we are fighting climate change
and preserving environment under the umbrella of sustainable development.
As the president of the European Commission Jose Manuel Barosso in his concluding
speech to the Stakeholder Forum on Sustainable Development in Brussels on 15 April
2005 stated:
“...The recently relaunched Lisbon reform strategy and the Sustainable Development
Strategy form key elements in the partnership for prosperity, solidarity and security that is
at the heart of the EU's strategic priorities ...Our is an integrated vision – encompassing
the economic, social and environmental dimensions of the Union’’ [25]
In the preamble (5) of the 2003/87/EC Directive it is stated that ''This Directive aims
to contribute to fulfilling the commitments of the European Community and its Member
States more effectively, through an efficient European market in greenhouse gas emission
 476

allowances, with the least possible diminution of economic development and

employment.''[4]
We believe that Croatia and its installations which will obtain emissions allowances
should be given equal opportunities in sustainable development as the other members to
the EU ETS. For this it is essential that, having in mind the UNFCCC principle of joint
but differentiated responsibility and the aim of the EC Directive on GHG emissions
trading to, the special circumstances affecting Croatia be awarded special treatment.

References

1. Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change.

2. Ministry of Environmental Protection and Physical Planning: The First National
Communication of the Republic of Croatia to the United Nations Framework
Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), Zagreb (2001).
3. Internet web page: http://unfccc.int/
4. DIRECTIVE 2003/87/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE
COUNCIL of 13 October 2003 establishing a scheme for greenhouse gas emission
allowance trading within the Community and amending Council Directive 96/61/EC.
5. DIRECTIVE 2004/101/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE
COUNCIL of 27 October 2004 amending Directive 2003/87/EC establishing a
scheme for greenhouse gas emission allowance trading within the Community, in
respect of the Kyoto Protocol’s project mechanisms.
6. COMMISSION DECISION of 29 January 2004 establishing guidelines for the
monitoring and reporting of greenhouse gas emissions pursuant to Directive
2003/87/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (notified under document
number C(2004) 130).
7. Reuters Business Insight: Corporate Carbon Strategies – Opportunities in the
European emissions trade market, Datamonitor, London (2003).
8. Internet web page: http://www.eex.de .
9. IEA: EMISSIONS TRADING AND ITS POSSIBLE IMPACTS ON INVESTMENT
DECISIONS IN THE POWER SECTOR, Paris (2004).
10. ECON Report 2004-081: EU Emission Trading Scheme and the effect on the price of
electricity, Stockholm (2004).
11. Risø National Laboratory: CO2-Emission Trading and Green Markets for Renewable
Electricity WILMAR - Deliverable 4.1, Roskilde; Denmark, June 2004.
12. EURELECTRIC: GETS 3 - GREENHOUSE GAS AND ENERGY TRADING
SIMULATIONS (2002).
13. Power in Europe/Issue 449/25 April 2005: “CCS will be viable at € 20/tonne CO2».
14. A.D. Ellerman, P.L. Joskow, R. Schmalensee, J.P. Montero and E.M. Bailey,
Markets for Clean Air: The US Acid Rain Program, New York: Cambridge
University Press (2000).
15. J. Hauff and B. Fratzke-Weiss, The Start of CO2 Emissions Trading In The EU:
Policy update and current challenges for power generators in old and new member
countries. A.T. Kearney, Warsaw & Stuttgart, Powergen Europe 2004.
 477

16. J. Pype and C. Holemans, POWER UTILITIES AND KYOTO: EROS AND
THANATOS ,TRACTEBEL Engineering, Power-Gen Europe, Barcelona, 25 May
2004.
17. European Commision: EU Emission Trading - An Open Scheme Promoting Global
Innovation to Combat Climate Change, Belgium (2004).
18. K. Keats Martinez and K. Neuhoff, Allocation of Carbon Emission Certificates in the
Power Sector: How generators profit from grandfathered rights, Cambridge Working
Papers in Economics, 2004.
19. C. Damaro and P. Luaces-Mendez, The Kyoto Protocol's Emissions Trading System:
An EU-US Environmental Flip-Flop, Internet source: Eur-lex
20. S. Eizenstat, Statement before the Senate Foreign Relations Committee, Washington,
DC, February 11. State Department web page archive (www.state.gov), printed
January 23, 2001; in Chad Damaro and Pilar Luaces-Mendez, The Kyoto Protocol's
Emissions Trading System: An EU-US Environmental Flip-Flop, p. 2, Internet
source: Eur-lex (1998).
21. L. Dobes, Kyoto: Tradable Greenhouse Emission Permits in the Transport Sector',
Transport Review 19(1):81-97; in Chad Damaro and Pilar Luaces-Mendez, The
Kyoto Protocol's Emissions Trading System: An EU-US Environmental Flip-Flop, p.
2, Internet source: Eur-lex (1999).
22. T.L. Anderson and D.R. Leal, Rethinking the Way We Think, from T.L. Anderson
and D.R. Leal, Free Market Environmentalism, revised ed. (London: Palgrave 2001),
9-26; in J.S. Dryzek and D. Scholseberg, 'Debating the Earth, The Environmental
Politics Reader, 2nd ed., Oxford, Oxford University Press, 2005, 211-228, p.223.
23. The decision of the Croatian Parliament about the ratification of the United Nations
Framework Convention on Climate Change, Official Gazette of the Republic of
Croatia – International Treaties no. 2/96
24. Data from the official web site of the Ministry of environmental protection, physical
planning and construction of the Republic of Croatia, www.mzopu.hr .
25. J.M. Barroso, Sustainable development: a strategy to do more and better, concluding
speech to the Stakeholder on Sustainable Development, Brussels, 15 April 2005;
from the official site of the European Commission, http://europa.eu.int/comm .
 REGULATING ANIMAL MANURE TO REDUCE POLLUTION AND
ENSURE SUSTAINABLE PRACTICES∗

TERENCE J. CENTNER
Department of Agricultural and Applied Economics, The University of Georgia
Athens, GA 30602, USA

Economies of scale have led to the production of animals at large facilities concentrated in selected
regions. Due in part to this concentration, water contamination by animal manure has become a
major issue. In the United States, regulatory provisions are being employed to reduce potential
contamination problems. One limitation of the regulations is that they tend to give minimal
encouragement for using manure as a production input. This paper suggests three strategies to
encourage sustainability by more careful use of manure for production inputs rather than disposing
it as a waste product.

1 Introduction
Concerns about water pollution in the United States from animal feeding operations that
confine animals has led to renewed governmental efforts to regulate animal production
under the U.S. Clean Water Act. In 2003, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) adopted new regulations for concentrated animal feeding operations (CAFOs), the
largest producers whose manure production might be expected to create an environmental
problem [1]. An operation meeting the definition of a CAFO with a discharge of
pollutants needs to secure a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System permit [1].
As livestock production continues to shift to larger operations [2], more CAFOs will be
regulated under federal law and there should be less water pollution from these
operations.
However, only about 4.5 percent of animal feeding operations are CAFOs with
discharges regulated under federal law. The U.S. Department of Agriculture reports that
over 234,000 animal operations are not regulated by the federal provisions [2]. Moreover,
approximately 200 million tons manure produced at animal feeding operations are not
regulated under our federal point-source permitting regulations [2]. Nonpoint-source
pollution is the leading cause of the impairment of assessed rivers and lakes with
agriculture being the most wide-spread source [3].
Producers and regulatory agencies are pursuing actions to forestall environmental
damage. Three major governmental strategies can be identified that address mechanisms
for treating manure and animal waste as a production input rather than a production
byproduct for disposal. The first involves agronomic rate application regulations for
nitrogen and phosphorus. State regulations may impose mandatory guidelines limiting the

∗
This research is based on work supported by the U.S. Department of Agriculture’s
Cooperative State Research, Education, and Extension Service Project No. GEO00890.

478
 479

amounts of animal manure that may be applied to lands. The second strategy involves
directives that enhance the absorption of manure into the ground for use by crops.
Directives on the timing and method of application of manure to fields can affect the
usability of nutrients. Lagoon design and use of nutrients offer a third strategy to enhance
production by addressing nutrient losses through seepage or lagoon failure.

2 The Regulation of CAFOs

Under the U.S. Clean Water Act, the federal EPA has the authority to regulate discharges
of animal wastes from point sources. Effluent guidelines for “Feedlots Point Source
Category” are enumerated in the Code of Federal Regulations for large animal operations
[4]. The EPA is authorized to oversee the permit program in each state in the absence of
an approved state program. However, most states have been delegated authority to
implement and administer the federal permit provisions so that state regulatory agencies
are responsible for issuing permits.
All CAFOs with discharges need permits [5], unless the discharge from a field falls
within the definition of an agricultural stormwater discharge. The Clean Water Act
expressly defines point sources to exclude agricultural stormwater [6]. Agricultural
stormwater is defined by federal rules as any “precipitation-related discharge of manure,
litter, or process wastewater from land areas under the control of a CAFO” where the
manure, litter or process wastewater has otherwise been applied in accordance with site
specific nutrient management practices that ensure appropriate agricultural utilization [4].
Thus, agricultural stormwater is not regulated by the act.
Separate federal regulatory provisions exist for four categories of animals: horses and
sheep; ducks; dairy cows and cattle other than veal calves; and swine, poultry, and veal
calves [4]. Different technological requirements are set for CAFO production areas,
CAFO land application areas, and for new sources.

2.1. Pollutants
Four categories of pollutants are discussed in the regulations: manure, litter, process
wastewater, and overflows. Under the CAFO regulations, permits apply to all manure,
litter, and process wastewater generated by animals or the production of animals at an
operation. Manure is defined to cover the expected wastes and bedding materials. Litter
is not defined but means poultry droppings mixed with shavings or other absorbent
material. Process wastewater includes spillage or overflow from watering systems,
washing, cleaning, or flushing pens, barns, manure pits and any water that comes into
contact with any raw materials, products, or byproducts [4]. By defining process
wastewater to cover these uses of water and placing process wastewater within the
regulated pollutants, the CAFO regulations govern waters used at a CAFO in the same
manner as animal waste.
Overflow is defined to cover the discharge of manure or process wastewater due to
the inability of a storage structure to contain the material. Overflow exceptions based on
480

chronic or catastrophic rainfall events allow discharges in limited situations. For example,
CAFOs with dairy cows or beef cattle cannot have any discharge of manure, litter, or
process wastewater pollutants from the production area. However, if precipitation from an
unusual rainfall event causes an overflow of manure, litter, or process wastewater,
pollutants in the overflow may be discharged into U.S. waters provided certain conditions
are met.

2.2. Production and Land Application Areas

The permit requirements for discharges from CAFOs apply with respect to animals in
confinement at a facility and all manure, litter, and process wastewater generated by those
animals or the production of those animals. The federal regulations define production
areas to include animal confinement areas, manure storage areas, raw materials storage
areas, and waste containment areas. Further provisions define each of the four enumerated
areas. Production areas include feed silos, silage bunkers, bedding materials, berms, egg
washing, egg processing, and mortality areas.
A separate definition is prescribed for a land application area. It is defined as land
under the control of an animal feeding operation owner or operator to which manure,
litter, or process wastewater from the production area is or may be applied. Thus, land
application areas are treated differently from production areas. Whereas permit
requirements apply to the physical areas of production, they also apply to unauthorized
discharges occurring at land application areas. The regulations provide that except for
agricultural stormwater, discharges of manure, litter, or process wastewater on lands
under the control of a CAFO are subject to permit requirements.

2.3. Field Applications of Wastes

For large CAFOs that apply manure, litter, and process wastewater to fields, special land
application guidelines apply [4]. These CAFOs are required to prepare and implement
nutrient management plans based upon a field-specific assessment of the potential for
nitrogen and phosphorus transport from the field. Permittees must use technical standards
in determining application rates for manure, litter, and process wastewater applied to land
that minimize the movement of nitrogen and phosphorus to surface waters.
The regulatory guidelines also establish setback requirements for the application of
manure, litter, and process wastewater to minimize opportunities for discharges that
would impair water quality. Regulated CAFOs cannot apply these materials within 100
feet of any down-gradient surface waters, open tile line intake structures, sinkholes,
agricultural well heads, or other conduits to surface waters An alternative compliance
measure using a 35-foot vegetated buffer is possible [4]. For other situations, a CAFO
may be able to demonstrate to the permitting authority that a setback or vegetated buffer
can be reduced or even is unnecessary.
 481

2.4. Insufficient Nutrient Management Oversight

The U.S. Department of Agriculture considered applying nutrient management standards
to all animal feeding operations and estimated it would impose costs of more than $2
billion on the livestock industry [2]. Because of these costs, the final federal regulations
omitted a requirement that nutrient management plans be included in permits. In
Waterkeeper Allliance, Inc. v. EPA [5], a U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals has found that
this omission is in error. The court has vacated selected provisions of the federal CAFO
regulations and remanded other aspects to the EPA for further clarification and analysis.
The Waterkeeper Alliance decision affects the permitting of CAFOs. The finding by
the court that nutrient management plans are part of an NPDES permit application
increases the need for state administrative oversight. The court’s ruling that there is no
duty for an owner or operator of a CAFO to apply for a permit if the CAFO does not
discharge pollutants is expected to reduce the numbers of CAFOs that must submit permit
applications. The decision that the EPA can regulate land application discharges by
CAFOs, except those qualifying as agricultural stormwater discharges, means that CAFOs
need to be concerned about runoff from the application of manure, litter, and process
wastewater.

3. Moving to Sustainable Practices

Limitations with the regulation of CAFOs and the fact that the federal CAFO regulations
do not regulate much of the manure being produced by animals suggests that additional
efforts to provide protection to water resources are needed [7]. Governments might offer
more encouragement for the use of manure as a production input rather than treating it as
a production byproduct. The distinction is that current regulations tend to view the
disposal of manure as a waste byproduct, omitting consideration of ways to enhance its
use as a fertilizer for crop production.
Manure supplies nutrients and organic matter, augments the water-holding capacity,
and increases a soil’s fertility [8]. A few states have legislation that provide for the
application of manure to land as a recommended agronomic practice [9]. These regulatory
provisions delineate criteria to advance sustainability. By incorporating sustainable ideas
in regulations governing animal wastes, further encouragement might be given to help
producers recycle nutrients from manure as a production input [10].
Three major objectives can be incorporated into nutrient and manure management
programs: (1) to help protect water quality, (2) to reduce conflicts with others, and (3) to
enhance crop performance. While governmental regulations often address the first two
objectives and provide operators discretion in developing practices and implementing
technology to reduce nutrient contamination, further efforts to enhance crop performance
through the application of agronomic practices are possible. Both excessive quantities of
animal wastes from CAFOs and large quantities of unregulated manure suggest that
governments can advance the more careful use of this byproduct.
482

3.1. Rate Application Regulations

Problems with the overapplication of manure and the application of liquid manure
through irrigation systems are propelling states to regulate these activities. Animal manure
placed on fields or applied as spray irrigation may percolate through soils to contaminate
underlying aquifers. A survey of hog farmers in North Carolina revealed that only 40%
had tested the content of their waste before applying it to the land [11]. After investigating
1,595 drinking water wells located on property next to hog and poultry production
facilities, 10.2% of the wells were found to have nitrate levels above the current drinking
water standard of 10 parts per million. These wells thereby show an environmental
problem.
In an attempt to reduce pollution from manure applications, 34 states have enacted
regulations requiring wastes from CAFOs be applied to land at agronomic rates [12]. To
comply with the application requirements, farmers employ a nutrient and manure
management program. Farmers calculate the nutrients in the manure and in the soil to
ascertain a crop’s need for additional nutrients. The regulations prohibit the application of
manure to fields where amounts of the listed nutrient are already present in sufficient
quantities for the crop being grown. Nitrogen may be the only listed nutrient, or a state
regulation may list both nitrogen and phosphorus.
More widespread application of rate regulations is possible [6]. There is a need to use
new technology in more accurately calculating and measuring the amount of nitrogen in
manure applications that will be available to plants. Although soil and manure testing can
provide rough calculations regarding amounts of nitrogen, they do not reflect the
mineralization of nitrogen nor atmospheric losses. When a government has a rate
regulation, farmers are required to forego applying excessive amounts of listed nutrients
that can contribute to unnecessary water contamination. What this usually means for the
application of manure is that a farmer can only apply a quantity required to reach the
recommended amount of phosphorus. For nitrogen requirements, an appropriate
commercial fertilizer should be used to alleviate the deficiencies and provide for optimal
crop production.

3.2. Enhancing Absorption of Nutrients

Considerable efforts have been made to assist CAFO owners and operators in taking
appropriate actions to avoid the overapplication of surplus nutrients from animal waste.
State extension services have helped farmers by making information available to them on
nutrient management plans and in providing testing services. One important development
has been recognition that training is required for persons in charge of disposing of
manure. State legislatures have adopted provisions requiring training for animal waste
management system operators [13]. Yet training efforts may need to be augmented to
address the coordination of reliable sampling and testing results with nutrient
applications. Many farmers need more training on how to understand and evaluate
nutrient testing results.
 483

Some state nutrient and manure management provisions delineate practices that foster
the use of nutrients for crop production. Several ideas may be highlighted. Minnesota
enunciates a general prohibition against application of manure that would cause
contaminated runoff [14]. On lands prone to flooding, manure application through
injection or incorporation into the soil may be required. Similar provisions may apply to
steeply sloping cropland. To minimize runoff of manure, some northern states limit the
application of manure on snow-covered ground [8]. Another provision may prohibit
manure application in road ditches [14].
Obviously, CAFO producers would prefer there be no regulations. However, because
of widespread pollution of surface waters, both regulatory and voluntary efforts may be
needed. Greater care needs to coordinate rate applications with absorption.

3.3. Lagoons
Contamination of waters by lagoon collapses has spurred greater regulations of lagoon
design and maintenance [15]. Recently, design requirements have been added by many
states. Because lagoons have gotten larger, corresponding to larger animal production
operations, governments have mandated design specifications so that lagoons are less
likely to fail. Moreover, lagoons are also being precluded from flood plains and
environmentally sensitive locations [13]. Governments are incorporating scientific
information into lagoon regulations to help safeguard water quality.
Governmental requirements that lagoons be designed by professionals are important.
Another regulatory feature involves detailed rules prescribing liner requirements [16].
Other requirements may require a lagoon capacity determined by analyzing the volume
expected to be generated over a designated number of days [16].
For larger operators and operators using spray irrigation fields for liquid animal
wastes, the installation of groundwater monitoring wells might provide greater assurance
that there is not a contamination problem. In Georgia, the rules on monitoring wells apply
to swine CAFOs with 1001—3000 animal units [13]. The Illinois regulations require at
least three monitoring wells for some lagoons [8]. Other responses address the location of
lagoons, including a prohibition in flood plains. While the 100-year flood plain delineated
by a Georgia rule may be unduly restrictive, the 10-year flood plain restriction in Illinois
may not provide the protection desired.
Another state regulatory response to lagoons is the delineation of provisions
concerning inspection. Two types of inspection are important: inspection of the
construction of a lagoon and inspection of subsequent operations. Regulations can require
the inspection of new lagoons at least once during preconstruction, construction, or a
post-construction phase, as provided by an Illinois regulation [16]. Other provisions
regarding the professional specifications for lagoons may incorporate inspection
requirements for new lagoons.
A weightier question may involve the inspection of existing lagoons. Inferior design
standards and opportunities for maintenance lapses mean that there is a need to inspect
484

older lagoons. Most animal waste lagoons that fail and cause significant environmental
damages were constructed prior to the design standards in use today. The most practical
way to address the potential shortcomings of these older lagoons is embarking on a state
monitoring program involving inspections.
With lagoon design being regulated, another issue involves the use of the liquid and
solid wastes from the lagoon. Application of these materials can be governed by the rate
application regulations and the ideas for enhancing absorption of nutrients.

4 Conclusion
In the United States, federal and state governments have enacted new legislation and
regulatory provisions to respond to problems created by concentrated animal production,
with an emphasis on eliminating water pollution. Individual state governments in the U.S.
have enacted additional provisions to address public concerns about water pollution from
animal manure. Regulatory provisions concerning the certification of operators and
facilities, design and inspection of lagoons, and accountability requirements delineate
practices being employed to reduce potential contamination problems.
However, agricultural producers and governments might do more to safeguard water
quality. Encouragement of practices that use animal waste as production inputs can help
eliminate pollution. Because preventing pollutants from entering waters involves costs,
governments enact legislative and regulatory provisions to preclude contamination.
Regulations governing animal feeding operations in the United States show mechanisms
that can encourage sustainability and diminish pollution.

References
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, National pollutant discharge elimination
system permit regulation and effluent limitations guidelines and standards for
concentrated animal feeding operations, Federal Register 68, 7176-7274 (2003).
2. M. Ribaudo et al., Manure management for water quality: Costs to animal feeding
operations of applying manure nutrients to land, U.S. Department of Agriculture,
Economic Research Service, Washington, D.C. (July 2003) [online at:
http://www.ers.usda.gov/publications/aer824/, retrieved June 9, 2006].
3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Management Measures to Control
Nonpoint Source Pollution from Agriculture, EPA Office of Water, No. 841-B-03-
004, Washington, D.C. (2003) [online at http://www.epa.gov/owow/nps/agmm/,
retrieved June 9, 2006].
4. U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, title 40, parts 122 & 412 (2004).
5. Waterkeeper Alliance, Inc. v. Environmental Protection Agency, Federal Reporter
Third 399, 486-524 (2005).
6. U.S. Code, title 33, sec. 1362 (2000).
7. T.J. Centner, Developing institutions to encourage the use of animal wastes as
production inputs, Agriculture and Human Values, vol. 20, pp 367-375 (2004).
8. A.A. Araji, Z.O. Abdo and P. Joyce, Efficient use of animal manure on cropland:
Economic analysis, Bioresource Technology 79, 179-191 (2001).
 485

9. Illinois Compiled Statutes Annotated, chapter 510, secs. 77/15, 77/17, & 77/20
(2003).
10. R. Fleming, B.A. Babcock and E. Wang, Resource or waste? The economics of
swine manure storage and management, Review of Agricultural Economics 20, 96-
113 (1998).
11. Natural Resource Defense Council, America’s Animal Factories: How States Fail to
Prevent Pollution from Livestock Waste, North Carolina Report (1998) [online at
http://www.nrdc.org/water/pollution/factor/aafinx.asp, retrieved June 9, 2006].
12 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, State Compendium: Programs and
Regulatory Activities Related to Animal Feeding Operations, Office of Wastewater
Management, Washington, D.C. (2001).
13. Georgia Compiled Rules and Regulations, rules 391-3-6-.20 & 391-3-6-.21 (2004).
14. Minnesota Rules, chapter 7020 (2000).
15. C.W. Schmidt, Lessons from the flood: Will Floyd change livestock farming,
Environmental Health Perspectives 180, A74-A77 (2000).
16. Illinois Administrative Code, title 35, subtitle E, part 506 (2001).
 HEATING PLANT AIR POLLUTION REDUCTION: THE CASE OF
KRAGUJEVAC TOWN

PREDRAG RADOVANOVIĆ, MARINA JOVANOVIĆ, MILIĆ ERIĆ

Research Group in the Laboratory for Thermal Engineering and Energy,
‘Vinča’ Institute of Nuclear Sciences, P.O.Box 522
Belgrade, Serbia

DEJAN MILOŠEVIĆ, BILJANA STEFANOVIĆ

Engineers from Heating Plant “Zastava Energetika’’
Kragujevac, Serbia

Industrial production processes still account for a considerable share of the overall pollution and
have serious negative impact on the environment. This paper describes the air pollution problems in
Kragujevac and its surroundings that come from coal-fired heating plant placed in the vicinity of the
downtown area and represents potentially the largest atmospheric pollutant for the town and its
surroundings. In the assessment of ambient air quality, the levels of harmful air pollutants (emission
and imission of the sulphur dioxide, nitrogen dioxide) and settling of fine ash particles are analyzed.
The wind rouses map of the potential endangered areas for Kragujevac and its surroundings are
presented in this paper. The aim of this research is propose the necessary measures for reduction of
air pollution in the town of Kragujevac and its surroundings on the basis of the obtained results.

1 Introduction
Depending on used fuel type, heat production in the heating plant, the industrial power-
plant and the thermal power-plant influence more or less on the environmental pollution.
Emission of the harmful (polluting) substances from the thermal power-plant includes
following items: flue gases, dust, slag, ash and wastewater. The coal-fired power plant
and heating–plant represent the largest atmospheric pollutants in urban areas and it’s
surroundings and the special attention would be paid to protection and maintenance of the
air quality from the following harmful substances: SO2, NOx and solid particles of ash.
The influences of the thermal-power plant and the heating-plant are multiple, with
intensive and more or less negative influence to ecological system as well as reflection of
bad influence far from the area of the industrial objects.
In our case the heating-plant is placed in the vicinity of the down-town area and
represents potentially the largest atmospheric pollutant for the town and its surroundings.
It’s a real threat to the local public health.
It has been noted that this paper is occupied with the air pollutant problems,
establishment of the limit value emission of the effluents (SO2, NOx) and settling of the
fine ash particles for the town and it’s surroundings. Dispersion of these pollutants
depends on the following parameters: quality of the heating plant burned fuel, state of the

486
 487

equipment and leading of the process in the boiler, useful climatic data, stack height and
kinetics energy of the outlet stack flue gases.

2 The basic technical characteristics of the plant

The heating-plant is situated in the central zone of the town of Kragujevac and represents
the largest part of the resident district heating with 306 MW of the total installed power.
The plant produced of the heating power consists of the five boiler units that are
connected in the system (K1, K2, K3, K4 and K5). They have different constructions,
capacities and different prime (power) fuels. The gas and coal as prime fuel are used. The
basic technical parameters of the boiler units are shown in the Table 1.

Table 1. The basic technical parameters of the boiler units (aestimate value).

Installed Designed parameters Working parameters Efficiency Prime

Boiler power of the steam of the steam fuel
(МW) pp tp mp pr tr mr ηp ηra - -
bar °C t bar °C t - - - -
K1 31.5 37 450 - 30 450 - 0.95 ≈0.9 gas
K2 31.5 37 450 - 30 450 - 0.95 ≈0.9 gas
K3 63.5 37 450 80 30 450 80 0.85 ≈0.8 coal
K4 63.5 37 450 80 30 450 80 0.85 ≈0.8 coal
K5 115 37 450 150 25 450 80 0.85 - coal

3 Calculate of imission SO2, Nox (in form of NO2) and particle of fly ashes

3.1. Meteorological conditions

Meteorological date needed for calculation are obtained from the Serbian Republic
Hydro-Meteorological Bureau [1, 2]. The date are consisted of the following results:
measuring of temperature per hour, velocity and direction of wind (16 meteorological
directions) as well as values of daily insolation, cloudiness and precipitation for
determined time period.
Collected measuring date show on average wind velocity in an hour. The directions
wind blowing is determined by angle of incidence of 22.5°; the angle that belongs to each
of 16 directions (360°/16=22.5°). The axis of spreading effluents out of stack is placed in
wind direction and in certain angle of the direction (22.5°) with the vertex in source of
emission (top the stack).
The heating period in Serbia lasts from the middle of October to the middle of April
and the heating-plant works 15 hours daily (from 6 to 21 hour), so statistical analysis of
obtained date for working hours of heating-plant per month and in heating period of
2002/2003 is realized. The winds are grouped according to the directions of blowing (16
directions) and the velocity intervals (in ranges of 1 m/s), too. The hours of wind blowing
488

by directions and by intensity of wind during the work of the heating-plant in each month
are also summarized. In that way the date that are used for calculating the particular
monthly wind rouses map have influence to the directing and spreading of effluents from
stack of the heating-plant.
In this paper, particular wind rouses map for December 2002. is presented
graphically, that is potential endangered areas by hours of wind blow in certain direction
are shown in the topographic map of Kragujevac and it’s surroundings (Figure 1). Based
on the graph, Figure1, the south-east wind was the most influence in December 2002. The
wind endangered the north-west area of town in regard to the heating plant. However, the
west winds were hazardous for the east part of downtown.

Figure 1. Wind rouses map for December 2002, λ= 1.55.

 489

3.2. Calculation of effluent imissions

Diffusion of gaseous effluents (SO2, and NO2) is determined on basis Gaussian equation
of spreading. The equation, according to equal possibilities of plum axis position in the
range of the angle 22.5° for the ground level concentrations gets following form:
q = [Q/ (πσyσzU)] exp [-0,5 (H/σz)2], (1)
where are: q – concentration of gas in the area of town – imission in mg/m3; Q – gas
emission in the source in mg/s, H – real stack height in m and U – average wind velocity
in m/s.
Real stack height is the sum of the stack height and height of the plume rise. The
height of the plume rise is calculated on the basis of velocity and temperature of outlet
gases, wind velocity and stability class. The diffusion parameters depend on distance
downwind and stability class. Since the heating-plant with two stacks is placed in
downtown (near by center of urban area), Mc Elroy’s correlation for an urban location
with the sampling time of 1 hour is used in calculation of plum spreading and imission as
well as in determination of diffusion parameters [3].
The imission calculation of SO2, NOx (in form of NO2) and particles of fly ashes in
the areas from the source down the wind (stacks 1 and 2 of the heating plant) is realized
for each wind direction in particulate mouth of the heating period 2002/2003. All velocity
ranges and corresponding stability class, occurred in that direction for defined duration,
are used in the calculation. Imissions on the positions e.t (that is) on defined distances
from the stack to down the wind are determined by superposition of imission produced in
imissions of the both stack. The imissions of graduate increasing of distance of initial spot
(mean distance of stack axes), downwind in particular direction, with permanent
comparation imission with the critical values of imission (according to regulations), are
calculated by verified math model in the Institute property [4, 5].
If the calculated value of imission at certain distance from the source exceed the
critical value, that distance would be remembered as the first limited value in the area
with the increased concentration. In additional calculation, the second further limited
value is determined. This is the value when the imission stop to be higher than the critical
concentration value. Every meteorological situation (wind velocity and appropriate
stability class) that is occurred in some direction for a particular hours (duration) when
the excess of a critical concentration values in the limited area is happened, contribute to
determination of exceed concentration area in the certain direction with more than 20, 40,
60 hours etc. The calculations are done for each month of heating-plant work in the
heating period 2002/2003, and for excess air coefficients in boilers λ= 1.25, λ= 1.55, λ=
2.0.
The values of critical concentration for SO2 correspond to the hourly means regulated
limitations:
• 0.35 mg/m3 for urban areas, and
• 0.15 mg/m3 for rural areas and rarely populated areas.
490

The values of critical concentration for NO2 correspond to the hourly means regulated
limitations:
• 0.15 mg/m3 for urban areas,
• 0.085 mg/m3 for rural areas and rarely populated areas.
The calculations are carried out for SO2 and NO2 and for the both critical values of
concentrations with the aim to determine whether that exceeds of higher limited values
(for urban areas) are happened or the lower limited values (for rural area) are almost
exceeded.
In Figures 2 and 3, the topographic map of Kragujevac, the areas with imission of
SO2 and NO2 over of 20, 40, and 60 hours above the permit limited value (KI), for
calculated air excess value of λ= 1.55, are shown for December 2002.

Figure 2. The areas with imission of SO2 above the lower permitted critical value (KI>0.15 mg/m3).

On the basis of calculating values for imission of SO2 (Figure 2) in December 2002.,
the area with increased concentration of SO2, over of 60 hours, and above lower permitted
critical value (KI>0.15 mg/m3), covered north-west part of urban zone. The polluted area
with over of 20 hours is located the east and north part of town.
 491

Figure 3. The areas with imission of NO2 above the lower permitted critical value (KI>0.15 mg/m3).

On the basis of calculating values for imission of NO2 (Figure 3) in December 2002.,
the most endangered area is situated on the north-west of the heating-plant (over of lower
permitted critical value (KI) more than 60 hours). Also, endangered areas (more than 20
hours over the KI) were in north-east and south–west part of town.
For calculation of fly ashes particles spreading out of heating plant stack it should
proceed from the date that electrostatics precipitators of unit boilers (K3, K4, K5) have
efficiency between 92.2-92.5%.
The particles that are lived the stack with the velocity of outlet effluent and by the
influence of wind, turn to direction of wind blow while they are falling down toward the
ground under the gravitation with velocity which depends on particle diameter, it’s
density and viscosity of ambient air (Stokes low). For the particles with the density more
than two times of the water density, velocity of settling is:
V(m/s) = 0,605 D2/104. (2)
Starting of source particulates rate at the outlet of stack, percented interval of particle
diameters in total imission and wind velocity, boundaries of settling area are determined.
Critical values particle ash concentration correspond to regulated limitations:
• 450 mg/m2/day for urban areas, and
• 300 mg/m2/day for rural areas.
492

Figure 4. The areas in the town with settling of ash particles.

In Figure 4, the topographic map of Kragujevac the areas of ash particles settling are
presented for December 2002, and λ= 1.55. The calculation of ash particles spreading
shows that the town was endangered by the particles settling in three directions: maximum
in the rarely populated area around the industrial zone of the heating-plant, in east and
south-east part of downtown.

4 Conclusions
Spreading of harmful substances in the vicinity of the heating plant in Kragujevac is
determined. It has done for basic polluters (SO2, and NO2 and fly ash particles) and every
month of the heating period (2002/2003 year), based on the technical data of the heating-
plant, composition and quality of used fuel and meteorological data by the usage of
verified math model. Results of calculation for December 2002 and excess air value of
λ=1.55 are presented in this paper. On the basis of the results of calculation, following
conclusion could be drawn:
1. The areas with increased concentration of SO2 for over of 20 hours, above lower
permitted critical value (KI>0.15 mg/m3) in low (grounded) layers of air, but not
exceeded the upper permitted critical value (KI>0.35 mg/m3) are existed. With
increase of excess air value in boilers and with increase of the outlet stack effluents
velocity, number and range of the endangered areas (with periodical concentration
above 0.15 mg/m3) decrease to certain degree. However, increase of the excess air
value in boiler has negative influence on efficiency of the boiler and decrease the
electrostatic precipitators work.
2. The areas with NO2 concentrations above regulated limitations and with more hours
in low layers of air occur frequently (in comparison with SO2 pollution) at lower
values of excess air. It happened because the nitrogen oxides appeared as the result
 493

of combustion in all boilers and regulated limitations are stricter for NO2 imission
(0.085 mg/m3 to 0.15 mg/m3). All that above mentioned about excess air in boiler
could be also applied for consideration of NO2, but the higher values of excess air
reduce the temperature in furnace and, therefore emission NO2 is reduced.
3. The areas in the town with settling of ashes particles above the regulated limitations,
when the electrostatic precipitator of unit boiler efficiency is over 99.2% and
estimated grain size distribution of the different diameter ashes (2.5% of particles
with diameters range of 20 µm and 50 µm) do not exist.

References

1. P. Radovanović, Expiriences in Work of Study by the Financier of the European

Agency for Reconstruction: Pre-Feasibility Study for Emission control for Coal-
Fired power Plants (in Serbia), Phase I Report, RWE Innogy, Swindon UK,
December (2003)
2. Serbian Republic Hydro-Meteorological Bureau, Meteorological data for
Kragujevac and its surroundings, Beograd (2004).
3. IAEA: Atmospheric Dispersion in Nuclear Power Plant Sitting, Safety Series
No. 50-SG-S3, IAEA, Vienna, (1980).
4. A. Vehauc, Journal of Heat Transfer Engineers, I (12), 45-53 (1986).
5. A. Vehauc, Different math model packages for spreading of harmul substances
from power plants stacks, Vinča, (1985-2004).
This page intentionally left blank
ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT

495
This page intentionally left blank
 ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY MEASURED THROUGH
SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY

MANUELA SARMENTO
Management Department, Military Academy, Rua João Dias, 17
Lisboa, 1400-219, Portugal

DIAMANTINO DURÃO
Lusíada University Rua da Junqueira, 188
Lisboa, 1349-001, Portugal

MANUELA DUARTE
Superior Institute of Accounting and Administration, Av. Miguel Bombarda, 20
Lisboa, 1200, Portugal

This paper has the objective of analyzing the environmental behaviour of one hundred and fifty
three potentially polluting Portuguese industries, through an empirical approach based on a market
research. An inquiry with twenty two questions is the basis of the research, which methodology
applies statistic methods, such as descriptive and factor analysis to find out the strategic factors of
environmental responsibility that measures and contributes to sustainability. There are five strategic
factors or dimensions: ethics and human resources, marketing, financial, quality, and production.

1 Introduction
Globalization created new chances and challenges to companies, but also increased their
organizational complexity. In fact, sustainability depends on managers’ decisions that are
based on strategic planning and managerial resources.
An ecological accident is easier to be accepted by the shareholders of the company
than by the members of the community that suffered the effects of the environmental
accident. Sustainability is correlated with environmental and social responsibility, which
is demonstrated through the internalization of externalities, meaning the registration of
environmental facts on the financial statements.
At present companies live in competitive markets, where the importance of their
image and reputation has an increasing prominent role, due to the social and
environmental pressures. People that suffers the bad influence of environmental pollution,
divulge it. However, these effects should be reported in the company financial statements
according to international accounting standards [1-3]. Environmental challenges are
changing from being purely technical or financial oriented to encompass a spectrum of

497
498

new laws and directives, which are influenced by public opinion and ecological lobbies.
Actually, the environmental considerations transcend the perspective of the corporate
policy, since stakeholders (customers, suppliers, local and central government) play also
an important role [4-6].
Several factors contribute to the company’s evolution on the conception of its social and
environmental responsibility, such as [2-6]:
• Citizens, consumers, public authorities and investors have new concerns and
expectations facing the environment.
• The social criteria that influences strongly and increasingly the individual and
institutional decisions on environmental investment.
• The increasing concern facing the damages caused on environment, namely by
industrial activities.
• The transparency in company activities is due not only to the media but also to
information and communication technologies [7,8].
Company’s social responsibility implies an ethic management to stakeholders, especially
to workers and families, suppliers, customers and consumers, investors, community and
society.
The present research was based on an inquiry with twenty two questions addressed to
580 Portuguese companies belonging to potentially polluting activity sectors. This
research intends to evaluate and analyse the environmental strategies implemented by
companies, which are the foundation for their environmental responsibility and
consequently to measure the environmental sustainability.

2 Market Study on Potentially Polluting Portuguese Companies

The inquiry aims to evaluate the environmental responsibility of Portuguese companies
that belong to several activity sectors. The survey’s questions are based on the field
experience that the authors have as consultants and researchers in this area and on the
results obtained during a brainstorming session. The panel had ten top managers that
worked in industrial companies. They decided about the four company characteristics and
the eighteen questions on environmental strategies. The same panel validated the survey
questionnaire before sending it by mail and e-mail, to 580 top managers of potentially
polluting Portuguese industries, in January 2005 [9]. Special attention was given to the
total number of questions, in order to maximize the number of answers without affecting
the global information to gather.
In order to calculate the size (n) of the adequate sample of a finite population that
guarantees a confidence level (λ) and a precision level (D) for the population proportion
(p), the following expression was used [7,10]:

p×( 1- p)
n= . (1)
 D /( z ) 2 +  p×(1- p ) / N
 α /2   
 499

For a precision level D=±5% and a confidence level λ=95%, the normal distribution
has the value zα/2=1.96. In the most pessimist hypothesis, where the dispersion is
maximum, the proportion is p=0.5. For this value the sample size should be n=150
surveys, however 161 answers were received and 153 were valid. The database built with
the valid information was analyzed through the Statistical Program for Social Sciences -
SPSS 13.0, using statistic methods, such as descriptive analysis and factor analysis
(principal components).
The company characteristics under research are seven for the activity, three for the
size, six for the location, and two for the head office nationality. Table 1 shows the
characteristics of companies in percentage.
Table 1. Characteristics of companies.
Characteristics of companies %
Oil 4
Paint, ink, polish, lacquer 12
Plastic 16
Activity Paper 12
Tanning 30
Cement 2
Cattle 24
Large enterprise 12
Size Medium enterprise 32
Small enterprise 56
North 26
Centre 20
Lisbon & Tagus Valley 42
Location
Alentejo 6
Algarve 6
Madeira & Açores 0
Portuguese 78
Head Office Nationality
Other country 22

Thus, 54% are tanning and cattle companies, 56% are small companies, 42% are
located in Lisbon and Tagus Valley region, and 78% are Portuguese companies.
Table 2 presents the mean value (xm) and standard deviation (s) for the following
environmental strategies, using the Likert scale with five levels (1: never, 2: seldom, 3:
sometimes, 4: often and 5: always).
The environmental strategy “company has environmental concerns” (xm=4.4, s=0.5)
has the maximum mean value, being followed by “company implements environmental
responsibility” (xm=3.8, s=1.0).
However, “company has anti-pollution production processes” (xm=1.5, s=0.8) and
“company has provisions for future environmental risks” (xm=1.5, s=1.0), both get the
minimum mean value, being followed by “company has environmental investments”
(xm=2.1, s=1.4) and “company discloses environmental facts in balance sheet” (xm=2.1,
s=1.4).
500

Table 2. Descriptive statistics of environmental strategies.

Mean Std.
Environmental strategies
(xm) Dv. (s)
1 Company has environmental concerns 4.4 0.5
2 Company implements environmental responsibility 3.8 1.0
3 Environmental responsibility is due to influence of stakeholders 3.1 0,7
4 Environmental responsibility is a competitive advantage 3.0 1.1
5 Environmental responsibility improves company’s image 3.0 1.0
6 Company has concerns with environmental workers’ training 3.3 1.4
7 Company’s performance depends on environmental training 3.5 1.3
8 Company has anti-pollution production processes 1.5 0.8
9 Company has environmental insurances 3.6 1.3
10 Company does not cause polluting accidents 3.3 1.4
11 Company is certified according to ISO 14000 2.5 1.1
12 Company has environmental investments 2.1 1.4
13 Company produces green products 2.5 1.5
14 ISO 14000 certification signifies environmental responsibility 2.2 1.7
15 Company discloses environmental facts in balance sheet 2.1 1.4
16 Company discloses environmental facts in the annex of balance sheet 2.4 1.4
17 Company has provisions for future environmental risks 1.5 1.0
18 The annual management report has references of environmental facts 2.7 1.6
Mean value 2.8 1.2

The maximum standard deviation appears on “ISO 14000 certification signifies

environmental responsibility” (xm=2.2, s=1.7) and it signifies that the answers are not
consensual. “The annual management report has references of environmental facts”
(xm=2.7, s=1.6) has also answers with large variations.
On the other hand, the consensus is relevant in “company has environmental
concerns” (xm=4.4, s=0.5) and is followed by “environmental responsibility is due to
influence of stakeholders” (xm=3.1, s=0.7). Analysing the data, among the 18
environmental strategies, 9 have mean values xm≥3, meaning that mean values less than 3
are also 9. The mean value of all environmental strategies (xm=2.8, s=1.2) demonstrates
that companies have moderate concerns regarding environmental responsibility.
Figure 1 shows the profile of environmental strategies by increasing order.
Figure 1 shows that mean values of environmental strategies between 1≤xm<2 are
only two, meaning a very low level of application of strategies 8 and 17. With 2≤xm<3
there are seven strategies (15, 12, 14, 16, 13, 11, and 18), that are being implemented in a
low to moderate level. On the other hand, mean values between 3≤xm<4 are eight
environmental strategies (5, 4, 3, 10, 6, 7, 9, and 2) that are implemented in a moderate to
 501

Company has provisions for future

1.5
17

environmental risks
Company has anti-pollution production
1.5
8

processes
Company releases environmental facts in
2.1
15

balance sheet
Company has environmental investments 2.1
12

ISO 14000 certification signifies

2.2
14

environmental responsibility
Company releases environmental facts in
2.4
16

the annex of balance sheet

Company produces green products 2.5
13

Company is certified according to ISO

2.5
11

14000
The annual management report has
2.7
MV 18

references of environmental facts

Mean value 2.8
Environmental responsibility improves
3.0
5

company’s image
Environmental responsibility is a
3.0
4

competitive advantage
Environmental responsibility is due to
3.1
3

influence of stakeholders
Company does not cause polluting
3.3
10

accidents
Company has concerns with environmental
3.3
6

workers’ training
Company’s performance depends on
3.5
7

environmental training
Company has environmental insurances 3.6
9

Company implements environmental

3.8
2

responsibility
Company has environmental concerns 4.4
1

Figure 1. Profile of environmental strategies.

high level. Only one environmental strategy 4≤xm<5 has a very high level of
implementation (1).
Table 3 registers the percentage of the frequencies for each environmental strategy,
considering the Likert scale from 1: never to 5: Always.
“Company has environmental concerns” is the unique strategy that has not answers in
levels 1 and 2, denoting that all companies are concerned with environment, which is a
public good and should be preserved, in order that future generations can have a healthy
and sustainable life.
502

Table 3. Percentage of frequencies for each environmental strategy.

Environmental strategies 1 2 3 4 5
(%) Never Seldom Sometimes Often Always
1 Company has environmental concerns - - 10.4 43.8 45.8
2 Company implements environmental 5.3 3.9 17.6 52.3 20.9
responsibility
3 Environmental responsibility is due to 10.5 17.6 27.5 37.9 6.5
influence of stakeholders
4 Environmental responsibility is a 10.4 21.6 31.4 28.8 7.8
competitive advantage
5 Environmental responsibility improves 10.4 18.3 37.3 30.1 3.9
company’s image
6 Companies has concerns with 17.0 11.1 18.3 30.7 22.9
environmental workers’ training
7 Company’s performance depends on 11.7 9.8 15.7 37.3 25.5
environmental training
8 Company has anti-pollution production 68.6 22.9 6.5 0.7 1.3
processes
9 Company has environmental 10.5 7.8 20.3 32.0 29.4
insurances
10 Company does not cause polluting 18.3 13.1 15.0 29.4 24.2
accidents
11 Company is certified according to ISO 58.2 - 5.9 1.3 34.6
14000
12 Company has environmental 64.8 5.2 3.9 3.9 22.2
investments
13 Company produces green products 39.2 12.4 17.0 17.0 14.4
14 ISO 14000 certification signifies 52.9 9.8 13.7 14.4 9.2
environmental responsibility
15 Company discloses environmental facts 50.3 12.4 18.3 10.5 8.5
in balance sheet
16 Company discloses environmental facts 41.8 13.7 18.3 14.4 11.8
in the annex of balance sheet
17 Company has provisions for future 77.2 7.2 6.5 7.8 1.3
environmental risks
18 The annual management report has 41.2 9.8 11.8 15.7 21.6
references of environmental facts

77.2% of companies say that they never made provisions for future environmental
risks, and 68.6% of them have anti-pollution production processes what is in accordance
with the fact that 64.8% of companies never made environmental investments. The
strategies 8, 12, and 17 have the highest percentage levels in all inquiry.
52.3% of companies often implement environmental responsibility and 45.8% of
companies have always environmental concerns. The strategies 11 ”company is certified
 503

according to ISO 14000“ has one levels with zero frequency. The strategy 8 “company
has anti-pollution production processes” has the lowest non-zero percentage in all inquiry
and shows that only 0.7% of companies have often anti-pollution production processes.
The strategy 10 “company does not cause polluting accidents” obtained answers with
similar percentages in the five levels.
This set of strategies demonstrates that companies are not yet putting into practice
environmental strategies, although they agree with the need to implement them.

3 Strategic Factors on Environmental Responsibility

Factor analysis attempts to identify underlying variables or factors that explain the pattern
of correlations within a set of observed variables. Factor analysis is often used in data
reduction to identify a small number of factors that explain most of the observed variance
in a much larger number of variables.
With factor analysis, it is possible to investigate the number of underlying factors and, in
many cases, to identify the conceptual representation of each factor [7,10].
The method used for extraction of factors was the principal components analysis that
should be validated through Kaiser - Meyer - Olkin (KMO) statistics and Bartlett´s test
(BT) [7].
Since KMO=0.804 and considering the usual interpretation 0.80<KMO<0.90, the
application of the principal components analysis is valid and the results are good [7,10].
On the other hand, for a confidence level λ=95%, the value of BT=11420.038 was
high, and the associated significance level was null α=0.000, thus the factors are linear
combinations of variables.
To determinate the principal components there are various rules, namely the Kaiser
and the total variance explained criteria [7]. The Kaiser criterion excludes the
components, with eigenvalues less than 1.
Thus, there are five principal components to retain, since the fifth and the sixth
principal components have respectively eigenvalues equal to 1.019 and 0.813. These five
principal components explain, according to the Kaiser criterion 74.0% of cumulative total
variance explained. For a better identification of the variables that compose the factor, the
rotation method Varimax with Kaiser normalization was applied [7,10].
Hence, for a confidence level λ=95%, and using the principal components method one
concludes that environmental responsibility has five strategic factors (or dimensions), that
contributes to measure environmental sustainability that is outlined in Figure 2, and are:
• Ethics and human resources dimension with five environmental strategies.
• Marketing dimension with four environmental strategies.
• Financial dimension with four environmental strategies.
• Quality dimension with two environmental strategies.
• Production dimension with three environmental strategies.
504

s
n rce
en es nd
M ens

sio ou
m R a
dim
ar

di an hics
ke ion
tin

um Et
g

H
Company’s Company’s
Quality
environmental Measures environmental
dimension
responsibility sustainability
Pr men
sio l
en ia

od sio
di
n
m nc
di ina

uc
tio n
F

Figure 2. Five dimensions of environmental responsibility that measure environmental sustainability.

Table 4 displays the strategic factors (dimensions) of environmental responsibility.

Their designation was carefully studied and nominated by the authors of the present
paper. It is also registered the environmental responsibility variables, which compose the
strategic factors and their loadings. These loadings mean the contribution of the variable
for the strategic factors. The interpretation of the strategic factors of environmental
responsibility is also author’s evaluation.
The loadings of the environmental strategies that belong to a strategic factor (dimension)
are different. Thus, the highest levels of loadings, for the five dimensions are as follows:
• “Environmental responsibility improves company's image” has the highest
contribution (loading=0.843) in the marketing dimension.
• “Company discloses environmental facts in balance sheet” has the highest
contribution (loading=0.812) in the financial dimension.
• “Company has environmental insurances” has the highest contribution
(loading=0.768) in the ethics and human resources dimensions.
• “Company is certified according to ISO 14000” has the highest contribution
(loading=0.744) in the quality dimension.
• “Company has anti-pollution production processes” has the highest contribution
(loading=0.731) in the production dimension.
 505

Table 4. Five strategic factors (dimensions) of environmental responsibility.

Strategic factors Interpretation of strategic
Environmental responsibility
of environmental Loadings factors of environmental
variables
responsibility responsibility
Ethics and human Company has environmental .768 Company has environmental
resources insurances insurances, does not cause
dimensions Company does not cause polluting .766 polluting accidents. Its
accidents performance depends on
Company's performance depends .684 environmental training,
on environmental training having globally
Companies has concerns with .662 environmental concerns.
environmental workers' training
Company has environmental .602
concerns
Marketing Environmental responsibility .843 Company implements
dimension improves company's image environmental responsibility,
Environmental responsibility is a .823 because it improves its
competitive advantage image, is a competitive
Environmental responsibility is .620 advantage and is due to
due to influence of stakeholders influence of stakeholders.
Company implements .582
environmental responsibility
Financial Company discloses environmental .812 The annual management
dimension facts in balance sheet report has references of
Company discloses environmental .691 environmental facts and they
facts in the annex of balance sheet are registered in balance
Company has provisions for future .574 sheet or in annexes.
environmental risks Company have provisions for
The annual management report has .551 future environmental risks.
references of environmental facts
Quality Company is certified according to .744 Company is certified
dimension ISO 14000 according to ISO 14000
ISO 14000 certification signifies .703 and it signifies environ-
environmental responsibility mental responsibility.
Production Company has anti-pollution .731 Company has environmental
dimension production processes investments, due to anti-
pollution production
Company has environmental .674
processes
investments
and green products.
Company produces green products .549

However, considering all the dimensions of environmental responsibility the

lowest contribution is “company produces green products” (loading=0.549) and the
highest contribution is “environmental responsibility improves company's image”
(loading=0.843).

4 Conclusions

Nowadays companies live in a constant change and face a global market where
competition is very strong and ecological and social lobbies play an important role in
business. Therefore, companies should be conscious that social and environmental
responsibilities have a direct economic value.
506

The present research intends to measure environmental sustainability through

environmental responsibility. Thus, a market study addressed to potentially polluting
Portuguese companies was done. It is based on a survey that had 153 valid answers,
which were processed using the statistical software package SPSS 13.0.
During the presentation of the statistical results, some conclusions were already
mentioned. However the data analysis also revealed that:
• For Portuguese companies, the environmental responsibility is moderate, due to
influence of stakeholders (xm=3.1).
• Beyond the environmental concerns with very high level (xm=4.4), companies have
environmental training programs in a moderate/high level (xm=3.5).
• The certification of environmental management systems, using ISO 14000 is
low/moderate (xm=2.5) and companies consider, in a low level, that they have an
environmental responsibility (xm=2.2).
• The number of companies that release environmental facts in the balance sheet
(xm=2.1) is low, and are almost the same that do it in the annex of the balance sheet
(xm=2.4).
• The annual management report has moderate references of environmental facts
(xm=2.7).
• Portuguese companies are moderately accepting environmental responsibility in a
full perspective (xm=2.8).
The five environmental dimensions - ethics and human resources, marketing, financial,
quality and production, are the factors of environmental responsibility. In fact, a company
to be sustainable should be responsible not only in internal environmental strategies but
also in external, meaning a direct dependency between environmental responsibility and
environmental sustainability.
Thus, a company to win the challenge of a highly competitive global market has to pursue
these five dimensions of environmental responsibility that measure the company’s
capacity to be environmentally sustainable. The main environmental variables of the five
dimensions to take into account are
• “Environmental responsibility improves company's image”.
• “Company discloses environmental facts in balance sheet.
• “Company has environmental insurances”.
• “Company is certified according to ISO 14000”.
• “Company has anti-pollution production processes”.
In spite of the first company’s objective be the profit, social and environmental
responsibility should be integrated in strategic planning, in order to lead company to
environmental sustainability.

References
1. M. Sarmento and M. Duarte, Environmental Strategies of Polluting Industries,
Global Nest International Journal, 6, 1, 21-30 (2004).
 507

2. M. Sarmento, D. Durão and M. Duarte, Qualitative Aspects of Sustainability in a

Green Society, Energy, Elsevier, 31, 13, 1997-2004 (2006).
3. M. Sarmento, D. Durão and M. Duarte, Green Products and Clean Environment
Opportunities for Companies in: Naim Afgan, Zeljko Bogdan, Neven Duic and
Zvonimir Guzovic (eds.), Sustainable Development of Energy, Water and
Environment Systems II, Zagreb: Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval
Architecture, 357-364 (2005).
4. K. Brockhoff, A. K. Chakrabart and M. Kirchgeorg, Corporate strategies in
environmental management. Journal of Research Technology Management July-
August:26-30 (1999) .
5. European Commission. Application of the polluter-payer principle in the member-
states beneficiary of cohesion funds. EC, Brussels (2000).
6. European Commission. Europe’s environment: what directions for the future. The
global assessment of the European Community programme of policy and action in
relation to the environment and sustainable development, ‘towards sustainability’.
com(99)543, Brussels (2000).
7. M. Sarmento, Total Quality Management, Escolar Editora, Lisbon (2003).
8. M. Sarmento, D. Durão and M. Duarte, Study of Environmental Sustainability,
Energy, Elsevier, 30, 8, 1247-1257 (2005).
9. National Institute of Statistics. Statistics of enterprises. Ed. INE, Lisbon (2004).
10. P. Newbold, Statistics for Business and Economics, 4ª ed. Prentice Hall, New Jersey
(1995).
 SIMULATION OF SOOT FORMATION AND ANALYSIS OF THE
"ADVANCED SOOT MODEL" PARAMETERS IN AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE

MARKO BAN
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval Architecture, University of Zagreb
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

ETER PRIESCHING
AVL – AST, Hans List Platz 1
Graz, Austria

NEVEN DUIC
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval Architecture, University of Zagreb
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

Environment issues have been in the public focus for decades, resulting in various steps to prevent
or minimize dangerous combustion emissions. With the general traffic (transformation of the
chemical energy into mechanical) being the main source of the emissions discussed here, main issue
in this paper will consider a possible way to minimize emissions in this region. Lately, development
of computer based simulations led to new mathematical models and approaches to combustion
modelling. Along the usual conventional combustion models which assume certain premises to
simplify the problem, new and advanced models that include complex chemical kinetics are being
developed. This paper focuses on the soot formation process and the possibilities of its prediction
and minimization, if possible. Based on a heavy-duty diesel engine cylinder geometry, a series of
calculations were performed using a CFD software package "CFD Workflow Manager" and
compared to measurements at five different load points. Variations of the mathematical soot model
parameters showed certain patterns which are also described. Also, a description of the rezone
meshing strategy that was used for numerical stability is given.

1 Introduction
Lately, development of computer based simulations led to new mathematical models and
approaches to combustion modelling. Along the usual conventional combustion models
which assume certain premises to simplify the problem, new and advanced models that
include complex chemical kinetics are being developed. These are still very much limited
with current computer resources, and as such enable inclusion of relatively small number
of chemical reactions.
Soot, although welcome in furnace combustion processes contributing greatly to
radiation heat transfer, is a dangerous product of combustion processes found in internal
combustion engines.
Soot creation mechanism still isn't chemically, and especially mathematically,
described, but it is known that it includes hundreds of chemical reactions and species.

508
 509

Therefore, in simulations of soot creation statistical and other empirical based models are
used.
Since the heavy-duty engine was used for simulations, a 3d cylinder model,
representing 1/8 of a real cylinder, was made in "Imagine" module of the "CFD Workflow
Manager" package. Dozens of calculations were performed varying several engine
parameters as well as soot model parameters.

2 Engine Parameters and 3d Modelling

Engine used for simulations was a HD (heavy-duty) diesel engine usually found in trucks
and buses. Geometrical parameters of the engine are:
• bore – 130 mm;
• stroke – 150 mm;
• swept volume 1.99 l;
• connecting rod length – 263.8 mm.
The following temperatures were used for setting the boundary conditions:
• head temperature – 500 K;
• liner temperature – 410 K;
• piston temperature – 510 K.
The calculations were performed for five different load points varying load (the amount
of injected fuel), speed (in rpm), and the moment of fuel injection. The different loads
were at 25%, 50% and 75%, speeds were at 1130 rpm, 1420 and 1710 rpm. The injection
times were at top dead centre (TDC) or 0 °CA (crank angle degrees), and -4 °CA (four
degrees before reaching TDC). Variations are denominated according to ESC (European
stationary cycle) standard [1], and are:
• A_25_A_0 (low speed, low load, injection at 0 °CA);
• A_75_A_0 (low speed, high load, injection at 0 °CA);
• A_75_A_-4 (low speed, high load, injection at -4 °CA);
• B_50_A_0 (medium speed, medium load, injection at 0 °CA);
• C_25_A_0 (high speed, low load, injection at 0 °CA).
Discrete volume mesh was created representing 1/8 of the cylinder, gradually deforming
from 247 °CA to 360 °CA (compression stroke) and then back to 470 °CA (expansion
stroke). When this cell deformation takes place the cell layers are being squished to near
zero height. Therefore, to avoid any numerical disturbances, a rezone strategy is being
used to change the layer distribution along the deforming part of the mesh. Also, rezone is
performed in expansion stroke to increase the number of cell to get the best results. In this
case rezone action is performed at following time steps: 300 °CA, 340 °CA, 370 °CA,
380 °CA and 420 °CA. Figures 1 and 2 show the results of a rezone procedure at 300
°CA or 420 °CA (symmetrical in respect to TDC). In the case of 420 °CA Figure 2
shows the mesh before rezone.
510

Figure 1. Mesh before rezone

Figure 2. Mesh after rezone.

3 Theoretical Background (Mathematical Models Used In Calculations)

3.1. Turbulent Flow

Turbulent flow inside a cylinder was in this case simulated using k-ε turbulence model.
This model is one of the most used turbulence models in industrial computations because
of its proven robustness and accuracy in acceptable boundaries and is implemented in
most of the CFD software. Turbulent kinetic energy is represented with a symbol k, and ε
is a turbulent dissipation of the kinetic energy (Eq. 1) [2]:
~
k2
ε~ε (1)
lt
 511

Turbulent viscosity coefficient is calculated according to Eq. 2 (Cµ is an empirical

constant) [2]:

k! 2
µ t = ρ Cµ (2)
ε!

Transport equations for k and ε are then derived from Navier-Stokes equations.

3.2. Combustion
Considering the extremely wide scope of the whole field of combustion theory, only the
specific models that are used according to the problem will be regarded here –
combustion of fuel spray and droplet combustion.
Liquid fuel combustion is usually achieved by injecting the liquid through a certain
opening into the gaseous combustion chamber domain. This jet is then dispersed into the
dens cloud of fuel droplets that penetrate the combustion region. Heat transfer onto each
of the droplets raises the vapour pressure to the final combustion of the gas phase
Spray was simulated in "CFD Workflow manager" using mathematical models called
WAVE (for dispersion), and WALLJET (for spray-wall interaction).
Type of flame that we meet while discussing combustion in an IC engine cylinder is
referred to as turbulent nonpremixed flame. The main characteristic of these flames, as
their name suggest, is the separate introduction of fuel and oxidizer to the combustion
chamber. Since the modelling of turbulent nonpremixed flames is based on many
statistical assumptions, using probability density functions and flamelet models is more
than welcome. First approach defines a probability function representing a probability of
a certain physical property appearing in specific intervals [3].
Flamelet model of nonpremixed flames describes turbulent flame as a laminar
premixed flame imbedded in a turbulent flow field. One of basic empirical model called
Eddy-breakup model was used in these simulations. This model assumes the time scale of
chemistry being much smaller than the turbulent time scale and the reactants being
contained in different eddies. Breakup and mixing of these eddies determines the reaction
rate [4].

3.3. Soot
Soot is usually formed during combustion when the equivalence ratio is greater than 1.
Investigation of premixed flames showed that the fuel molecules are broken down to
radicals, mostly acetylene. In time, these radicals grow in two dimensions by chemical
reactions, H abstraction and acetylene addition. These processes form large aromatic
rings out of aliphatic species. In further stages molecules become three-dimensional and
form carbonaceous particles by coagulation. The most important influences during the
soot formation process come from local fuel-air ratio (C/H and C/O ratios), temperature,
pressure, and residence time [4].
512

The "Advanced soot model" developed by Lund LTH University, calculates the
volume fractions of the soot source, integrated over the mixture fraction (Eq. 3)
probability density function:
mu + mb
Z= (3)
mtot
Soot source consists out of four parts: particle inception, surface growth,
fragmentation and oxidation. Different sources can be adjusted to each problem. Four
scaling parameters are, therefore, introduced. For each of the soot source part there is one
scaling parameter which is then multiplied with the integral surface of the different
elements to qualitatively define the influence of each source on the final volume soot
source [4].

4 Calculation Results

4.1. Pressure and Temperature

Figure 3 shows good agreement comparing calculated and measured pressure during
compression and combustion. Only discrepancy is seen at the beginning of the
combustion due to the fast chemistry assumed when using Eddy-breakup combustion
model.

120
B_50_A_0 pressure

100 Calculated
Measured
mean pressure [bar]

80

60

40

20

0
240 290 340 390 440 490
CA [°]

Figure 3. Mean pressure in B_50_A_0 case.

Since no experimental data was available for temperature comparison, Figure 4 shows
temperature comparison for each calculated case. This chart can be used to discuss the
temperature influence on soot formation.
 513

1800
B_50_A_0 Mean tem peratures
1600 A_75_A_m4
A_25_A_0
1400
mean temperature [K] C_25_A_0

1200 A_75_A_0

1000

800

600

400

200
240 290 340 390 440 490
CA [°]

Figure 4. Mean temperature in all cases.

4.2. Particle Inception Parameter Variations

As seen in Figures 5 and 6, variations of this parameter produced strictly linear
dependence of soot mass at the end of combustion on this parameter. This kind of
dependence carries low physical value, but can be used to adjust the tendencies acquired
by setting other parameters.

3,00E-03
Particle Inception parameter (A_75_A_0)

2,50E-03 PI = 1
PI = 5
PI = 10
2,00E-03
mean soot mass [g]

1,50E-03

1,00E-03

5,00E-04

0,00E+00
360 380 400 420 440 460 480
CA [°]

Figure 5. Particle inception parameter variations

4.3. Oxidation Parameter Variations

Since the oxidation part of the soot source has a negative sign (thus representing the sink),
the increase of the resulting soot mass occurs when lowering the oxidation scaling
parameter. When its value comes close to zero, which could represent the total lack of the
514

2,50E-04 A_75_A_0

mean soot mass @ 470 °KV [g]

2,00E-04

1,50E-04

1,00E-04

5,00E-05

0,00E+00
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Particle Inception parameter

Figure 6. Soot mass dependence on particle inception parameter.

2,50E-08 Soot - oxidation parameter

(A_25_A_0)

2,00E-08
mean soot mass

1,50E-08 so = 1
so = 0,00005
so = 0.005
1,00E-08 so = 0.4

5,00E-09

0,00E+00
360 380 400 420 440 460 480
CA

Figure 7. Oxidation parameter variations.

1,70E-04 A_25_A_0

1,50E-04
mean soot mass @ 470°CA [g]

1,30E-04

1,10E-04

9,00E-05

7,00E-05

5,00E-05

3,00E-05

1,00E-05
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2
Oksidation param eter

Figure 8. Soot mass dependence on oxidation parameter.

 515

oxidation in the soot formation process, the final soot mass values are stabilized at a
certain level dependant on the fuel amount (or load) and other parameters (pressure,
temperature, other soot model parameter values). Increasing the parameter values over 1,
the soot values would be decreased close to zero, since the oxidation is in that case a
dominant process.

4.4. Surface Growth Parameter Variations

In Figure 10 which is showing the final soot mass dependence on the surface growth
parameter, one can see that it is almost exponential. Setting the greater values of this
parameter the soot concentration (or the soot mass) increases, which cannot be effectively
eliminated with the oxidation in the latter part of the combustion process (this could, of
course, be regulated by the adequate oxidation parameter).

SUrface growth parameter (B_50_A_0)

1,20E-03

1,00E-03
mean soot mass [g]

8,00E-04
SGR = 1
SGR = 4
6,00E-04 SGR = 6
SGR = 8

4,00E-04

2,00E-04

0,00E+00
360 380 400 420 440 460 480
CA [°]

Figure 9. Surface growth parameter variations.

8,00E-04
B_50_A_0
7,00E-04
mean soot mass @ 470 °CA [g]

6,00E-04

5,00E-04

4,00E-04

3,00E-04

2,00E-04

1,00E-04

0,00E+00
0 2 4 6 8 10
Surface Growth parameter

Figure 10. Soot mass dependence on surface growth parameter.

516

4.5. Fragmentation Parameter Variations

As shown in Figures 11 and 12, varying this parameter show vary small deviations from
the initial ones acquired using the default parameter value (1).

1,00E-04
Fragmentation parameter (C_25_A_0)
9,00E-05

8,00E-05

FRG = 0.8
7,00E-05
FRG = 0.5
mean soot mass [g]

6,00E-05 FRG = 0.2

FRG = 0.1
5,00E-05
FRG = 0.005
4,00E-05

3,00E-05

2,00E-05

1,00E-05

0,00E+00
360 380 400 420 440 460 480
CA °]

Figure 11. Fragmentation parameter variations.

2,00E-05
C_25_A_0
1,80E-05
mean soot mass @ 470 °CA [g]

1,60E-05
1,40E-05
1,20E-05
1,00E-05
8,00E-06
6,00E-06
4,00E-06
2,00E-06
0,00E+00
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2
Fragmentation parameter

Figure 12. Soot mass dependence on fragmentation parameter.

4.6. Optimized parameter set?

Since the really significant results were obtained varying the oxidation and surface growth
parameters, their values were set to 2 (surface growth) and 0.9 (oxidation), while leaving
the other two parameters (fragmentation and particle inception) at their default values of
1. Calculation results (shown in Figure 13) show relatively good agreement (and
tendencies) at the last time-step in the high-load cases (A_75_A_0, A_75_A_-4 and
B_50_A_0), while the calculation results for the low-load cases are much underestimated
according to the measured values. This is especially evident in the A_25_A_0 case (low
 517

load and low rotational speed), in which the calculated values are about ten times lower
than the measured ones. Looking at these results, one can conclude that the final soot
mass calculated by this mathematical model is heavily dependant on the amount of the
injected fuel, thus giving the higher values at high-load, and lower values at low-load
cases, which isn’t realistic.

4,00E-04
B_50_A_0 - 3.67E-5 @ 470°CA
3,50E-04 A_75_A_0 - 3.86E-5 @ 470°CA
A_75_A_-4 - 2.15E-5 @ 470°CA
C_25_A_0 - 2.32E-5 @ 470°CA
3,00E-04 A_25_A_0 - 2,16E-5 @ 470°CA
mean soot mass [g]

2,50E-04

2,00E-04

1,50E-04

1,00E-04

5,00E-05

0,00E+00
360 380 400 420 440 460 480

CA [°]

Figure 13. Mean soot mass comparison for a single parameter set on all cases.

5 Conclusion
These results have shown that using the advanced soot model, one gets the soot
production mostly dependant on the mass of the injected fuel (or the load), what makes it
hard to define a single set of optimized parameters for all the load cases. Also, two of the
four soot model parameters have show little physical significance, one (particle inception)
not giving realistic results, and the other (fragmentation) making practically no influence
on the resulting values. This has shown the dominant influence of the other two
parameters, oxidation and surface growth. Since only the measured values at the exhaust
(last time-step) were available, it wasn’t possible to assess the quality of the model during
the entire soot formation process, but, as seen in the high load cases, has shown pretty
good tendencies when changing the start time of the injection.

References
1. DieselNet, European Stationary Cycle (ESC), published on:
http://www.dieselnet.com/standards/cycles/esc.html [12/05/2004].
2. D. R. Schneider, Istraživanje mogućnosti redukcije SO3 pri izgaranju teškog loživog
ulja, doktorska disertacija, Fakultet strojarstva i brodogradnje, Sveučilište u Zagrebu
(2002).
3. J. Warnatz, U. Mauss and R. W. Dibble, Combustion, Springer-Verlag (1996).
4. AVL, AVL FIRE, CFD Solver v3.2, Fire version 8, Combustion (2002).
 EXERGY ANALYSE OF CHP PLANT TE-TO ZRENJANIN

PREDRAG RAŠKOVIĆ*
Faculty of Technology, University of Niš, Bulevar Oslobođenja 124
Leskovac, 16000, Serbia

SVETISLAV CVETKOVIĆ
Faculty of Technology, University of Niš, Bulevar Oslobođenja 124
Leskovac, 16000, Serbia

SRETEN STOILJKOVIĆ
Municipality of Kosovska Mitrovica
Kosovska Mitrovica, Serbia

Energy savings and environmental issues, related to power generation, have prompted both
researchers and industries to find high efficiency and low emission solutions. In this paper the
existing CHP plant in Zrenjanin, Serbia, was analyzed. Proper modeling of the plant, by the selection
of energy system’s functional parameters, obtained from technical documentation and the long term
measurements, was done. Mathematical model, according to the rules of energy system engineering
and mass and energy balance, was the background for creating the sequential simulation software
tool-EXCHP (software include the water/steam simulator). Techno economic consideration of
possible CHP energy system improvements was carried out by the rules of exergy analyses as the
part of an exergoeconomic optimization. The results confirmed the proposed mathematical model of
plant and better energy performance of operating regime with combined production of power and
heat, vs. separate production of heat and power. Energy performance of operating parameters is
considered as the function of some important operating conditions, too. The subsystem for
condensing and preheating of the condensed steam, as well as condenser, are pointed as the part and
process unit with lowest exergetic efficiency.

1 Introduction
Energy savings and environmental issues, related to power generation, have prompted
both researchers and industries to find high efficiency and low emission solutions. The
concept of combined cycle power plants – CHP Plants, could be considered as a suitable
tool for obtaining higher plant’s energy efficiency than efficiency of the traditional
technologies based on separate producing of heat and power. In this paper the techno
economic consideration of possible improvements on CHP plant TE TO Zrenjanin, in
Serbia is presented. The research was done by the use of the software tool for basic
simulation model, EXCHP, developed on the Microsoft Excel programming platform. In
order to identify the location and the magnitude of true thermodynamic inefficiencies, the
performance of the plant is evaluated through exergy analysis which mathematical model
is incorporated in EXCHP. The result of research is executed in two modes. First, design
mode, analyze plant performance of existing operating conditions and regimes; the

*
Corresponding author Rašković Predrag

518
 519

second, rating mode give the predictions under varying different inputs and demands.
Since this is the primal investigation, analysis presented in this paper was obtained by the
use of design mode. The provided information can be used as a guide for reducing the
thermodynamic inefficiencies of plants and for improving their performance.

2 Brief energy system description of TE TO Zrenjanin

The reference plant, TE TO Zrenjanin (Figure 1), is the cogeneration plant for combined
production of electrical and district heating energy and could be classified as CHP with
steam cycle and extraction condensing turbine. Plant is located in the industrial zone of
the city, near the existing industrial power plant Servo Mihalj, which is actually its
substitute and supplier of steam during the start up period. The plant primary fuel is a
natural gas from the near-by oil fields and the substitute fuel, in the case of accident, is
heavy fuel oil.

Figure 1. Technology scheme of TE-TO Zrenjanin.

520

The mean source for heat and energy production in the plant are two identical boiler
units (BU), with maximum permanent steam production of 91,66 kg/sa per unit. The
steam turbine set is equipped with seven extraction ports; the 1-3 ports (STR 1, 2, 3) are
on the low pressure turbine (LPT) and the 4-7 ports (STR4, 5, 6, 7) are on the high
pressure turbine (HPT). The extraction ports numbered 1 and 4 are controlled, with the
possibility of regulating the pressure, while all the rest are uncontrolled.

Table 1. Steam parameters in extraction ports.

Extraction port pmax (MPa) tmax (°C)

1. controlled 0,156 120
2. uncontrolled 0,245 198
3. uncontrolled 0,392 239
4. controlled 0,676 295
5. uncontrolled 2,215 321
6. uncontrolled 3,5 378
7. uncontrolled 6,411 462

The exhaust steam from low pressure turbine is completely condensed in the surface
condenser (CN)b. Preheating of the condensed steam is done by in the low pressure
preheating part of the plant which includes: the steam cooler from labyrinth seals (SCL),
seal steam cooler (SCS) and two low pressure heaters (LPH1, LPH2). The mentioned
devices are supplied with heating steam from the labyrinth seals and from the extraction
ports numbered 1 and 2 respectively. Depending on the operation mode, the output
temperature of the condensed steam from this part is in the ranges t=101°C to t=121°C.
Removing the no condensable gases from the steam cycle is realizing by the two-
stage deaerators (DA1, DA2), situated on the mutual low pressure feed reservoir. In
operating modes with the power output, the low pressure deaerators are supplied with
steam from the third extraction port; otherwise deaerators are supplied with the steam
from the steam reduction station (SRS). Heating up the boiler feed water from the
temperature in the feed reservoir (t=175°C), to the final stage at the input of the boiler
(ranges t=180°C to t=210°C), is done by high pressure regenerative heater (HPH).
The part of the plant for district heating utility covers all the required functions as the
source for heating the city of Zrenjanin. This subsystem comprises the equipment for
water heating and circulation, through pumps which overcome the resistance in district
heat distribution network, The target district heating water temperature is reached by
three-stage heating devices. The first two, base heaters (HT1, HT2), heating up the water
to t=110°C, while the third, top heater (HT3) is used for additional heating up. The base
heaters HT1 is supplied by the steam only from extraction port numbered 1. In the case of
operating mode with electrical power output the base heaters HT2 and the top heaterHT3

a
Final steam parameters are p=11,77 MPa and t=540°C
b
The steam from the vacuum expander, the steam/air mixture from the vacuum devices
and additional demineralised water are also bringing into the condenser
 521

are supplied by the steam from extraction ports numbered 2 and 4 respectively, otherwise
necessary steam for these two devices is ensured by the steam pressure reduction stations.

3 EXCHP - software tool for basic simulation model

After identifying and analyzing the main components of the reference system, the
creating of the appropriate physical modelc (Figure 2) was the follow step in simulation
software tool building. The model is defined as the network of inter-connected modules:
turbines, heat exchangers, pumps…, as well as the new generated component of streams
splitting and mixing. Model has the modular structure in order of its quickly adopting on
various plant configurations.
Differently to the previous drawing (Figure 1), inside the control region, delimited
by specific boundaries, the four subsystems were definedd:
• Subsystem of turbine aggregate; (Turbine set),
• Subsystem for district heating utility; (Set 1),
• Subsystem for condensing and preheating of the condensed steam; (Set 2),
• Subsystem for deariating and boiler feed water preparing; (Set 3).
For simulation mathematical model a flowsheeting problem formulation, as a type of
steady state simulatione, is chosen. Flowsheeting formulation (given all input
information, determine all output information) was developed by applying the
conservation laws for mass and energy on each component, subsystems and the whole
system. Their behavior was presented by balance equations of mass and energy balance:

∑ m
j∈IN ( i , j )
j − ∑ m j
j∈OUT ( i , j )
= 0 , ∀i ∈ I , (1)

∑ m h ∑ m h
. .
j j − j j − Wi + Qi = 0 , ∀i ∈ I (2)
j∈IN ( i , j ) j∈OUT ( i , j )

Qi = 0, ∀i ∈ {LPT, HPT,CN, SCL, SCS, LPH k , HPH, HTk , DAk , Pmk , M k , SPk }
In this phase, some simplifications are included:
• Processes in all component are adiabatic,
• Streams are the ideal mixtures,
• Influence of the stream heat loses are negligible in overall heat balance,

c
This kind of model is typically a flowsheet of the system
d
The subsystem of Boiler Unit is excluded due to incomplete data in available
documentation
e
This kind of energy system simulation (the simplest) was chosen because it was the first
attempt for connecting the real system of plant with specialized software.
522

• The plant auxiliariesf were calculated based on the data from available tech.
documentation.

Figure 2. Physical model flowsheet of TE-TO Zrenjanin.

f
These include the power consumption for the boiler feed pumps, the circulating water
pumps, the steam turbine auxiliary.
 523

Numerical integration, as the final phase of simulation, was developed on Microsoft

Excel programming platform, by the sequential modular approach. The software is named
EXCHP, and its flowchart is presented on Figure 3.

Figure 3. Flowchart of EXCHP.

Software includes the water/steam properties simulator, settled in the Excel Add-in
component. Water/steam properties simulator is based on IAPWS Industrial Formulation
1997, and consists of a set of equations for different regions (Figure 4). From these
fundamental equations by using the appropriate relations all thermodynamic properties of
water/steam can then be calculated.

4 Exergy Analyse of Reference plant

The performance of reference plant “TE TO Zrenjanin” is evaluated through exergy
analysis. The purpose of an exergy analysis is generally to identify the location, the
source, and the magnitude of true thermodynamic inefficiencies in plants. Moreover, the
results from an exergy analysis constitute a unique base for exergoeconomics.
Exergy is defined as the maximum work obtainable while the system communicates
with environment reversibly. For a steady state system, the exergy balance equation could
524

Figure 4. IAPWS regions for water/steam properties.

be presented in mathematical form asg:

∑ m e ∑ m e
. . T0 .
j j − j j − Wi + Qi ( 1 − ) − E L ,i = 0 , ∀i ∈ I (3)
j∈IN ( i , j ) j∈OUT ( i , j )
T

These equations are incorporated in the mathematical model of EXCHP.

The key variable resulting from exergy analysis is the exergetic efficiency, which
gives an unambiguous criterion for judging the performance of a plant and its
components, from the thermodynamic viewpoint. For the reference plant analysis, the
simple exergetic efficiencyh is incorporated as the function in simulation software.

5 Results and discusion

The analysis presented in this paper is based on the major parameters of six
operating regimes presented in Table 2. Coupling the parameters of primal steam input,
power production and condenser pressure (Figure 5); the advantage of operating regimes
with higher power production (steam input) and lower condenser pressure is obvious in
manner of exergetic efficiency. Second conclusion is that the plant higher exergetic
efficiency of regimes with combined productioni, signify its better energy performance
vs. performance of separate production of heat and power.

g
In mathematical model of presented software only physical part of exergy is
counted(Appendix)
h
The simplest form of exergetic efficiency; present the ratio of the total outgoing exergy
flow to the total incoming exergy flow.
i
From the six investigated regimes only Winter regimes 1 and 4 are combined regimes,
other are power production only.
 525

Table 2. Major parameters of researched operating regimes.

Power Primary Heat transfer Mass flow in Condenser
Operating regime production steam input in DHS condenser pressure
[MW] [kg/s] [MW] [kg/s] [bar]
Winter regime 1 (WR1) 109.8 173.611 151.04 5.5562 0.0339
Winter regime 2 (WR2) 125.5 173.611 0 45.0784 0.0857
Winter regime 3 (WR3) 53.2 59.084 0 45.8343 0.104
Winter regime 4 (WR4) 117.0 173.813 97.12 5.5561 0.0337
Summer regime 1 (SR1) 87.0 113.276 0 45.8345 0.142
Summer regime 2 (SR2) 32.4 58.695 0 18.6121 0.118

Figure 5. Plant exergetic efficiency as the function of major operating parameters.

Next step was the locating the worst exergetic efficiency indicators of the parts and
the plant components. From diagram (Figure 6) it can be clearly seen, that Set 2
(Subsystem for condensing and preheating of the condensed steam) has the lowest values
of exergetic efficiency, so the following research will be applied on them.
The influence, of condenser mass flow rate and its pressure, on Set 2 exergetic
efficiency are presented on Figure 7. Obviously the minimization of mass flow rate and
condenser pressure is the way for getting better energy performance of this subsystem
(the whole plant too).
The origin of exergy losses was presented in Figure 8. As it could be expected the
main part of losses are concentrated in condenser (except for Winter regime 1 and 4
where the duty of LPH1 is bigger then the duty of condenser). The influence of mass
flow rate and pressure in condenser presented in Figure 9, led to the same conclusion as
in the case of subsystem for condensing and preheating of the condensed steam.
526

Figure 6. Subsystems exergetic efficiency as the function of major operating parameters.

Figure 7. Exergetic efficiency of Set 2 as the function of condenser mass flow rate and pressure.
 527

Figure 8. Exergy losses in Set 2.

Figure 9. Condenser exergetic efficiency as the function of its mass flow rate and pressure.

6 Conclusion
Despite the widespread use of energy analysis in techno economic consideration of
industrial systems, energy analysis alone can frequently give an incomplete and
misleading picture of process efficiency and the opportunities for its improvements.
Exergy analysis provides more rational criteria for design, evaluation, improvement, and
comparison of power plants or their components from the thermodynamic point of view.
The implementation of this method in software tool for basic simulation – EXCHP,
528

identifies the sources and the magnitude of true thermodynamic inefficiencies in

reference plant TE TO Zrenjanin.
This part of research was done by design mode, in order, firstly to confirm the
proposed mathematical model of plant, and than to analyze the current six operating
regime in plant. First analyses verify the better energy performance of operating regime
with combined production of power and heat, vs. separate production of heat and power.
Next, the energy performance of operating regimes is considered as the function of some
important operating conditions. Last analyses signify that, subsystem for condensing and
preheating of the condensed steam, as well as condenser process unit, are the parts with
lowest efficiency.
The way for possible improvements could be done by choosing the optimal thermo
physical stream parameters, with previously explained rate mode of software tool
EXCHP, which will be presented in followed papers.

Nomenclature

Variables
m - mass flow rate, kg/s
h. - specific enthalpy, J/kg
W. - work flow (power), W
Q - heat flow, W
e. - specific exergy, J/kg
E - exergy flow, W
T - temperature, K
t- temperature, °C
p- pressure, Pa

Indexes
0- environmental state
IN- inlet
OUT- outlet
L- loss
I = {}
i - process units
J = { j} - process streams
 529

Appendix
Flow identification and streams parameters (Winter Regime 1).
530

References

1. A. Bejan, G. Tsatsaronis and M. Moran, Thermal Design and Optimization: Wiley,

New York (1996).
2. N. Priljeva, P. Rašković and S. Stojiljković, Software Tool for Exergy Analyses of
Energy system TE-TO Zrenjanin, Proceedings Elektrane 2004, Vrnjačka Banja,
Serbia (2004).
3. M. Laković, P. Rašković and P. Živković, Exergy Analyzing Method in Process
Integration-Theoretical Background", Energy Forum 2002, Varna, Bulgaria (2002).
4. G. Tsatsaronis and M. Winhold, Exergoeconomic Analysis and Evaluation of
Energy-Conversion Plants. 1. A New General Methodology, Energy, Vol. 10, N° 1
(1985).
 DEVELOPMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES
FOR THE REGION OF WESTERN BALKANS

DIMITRIOS SANOPOULOS
Centre for Research and Technology Hellas-CERTH
Thessalonica, Greece

NEVEN DUIĆ
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Naval Architecture, University of Zagreb
Zagreb, 10000, Croatia

It is well known that a severe environmental damage in the area of the Western Balkan Countries
was caused by the recent war. Moreover, in some countries the transition process to the market
economy amplified these effects. Furthermore, serious environmental concerns were raised about the
release of toxic chemical factories and oil refineries, potential impacts to biodiversity, the damage of
the natural habitat and the historical heritage, the destruction of existing wastewater plants and the
contamination of air, soil, vegetation and water. At the moment, Western Balkan countries find
themselves in a difficult economic situation and the environment is not considered to be a high
priority. WEB ENV is a project aiming to address issues related to the making good of the
consequences of the war in the environment through the extraction of conclusions for a number of
common environmental problems related to Western Balkan countries in specific matters.
Furthermore, the Project will examine these problems and will evaluate them while it will
recommend the appropriate solutions. It will also support in particular the Community’s external
relations and development aid policies such as EU Water Initiative, the Commitment towards the
Millennium Development Goals and the Action Plan for R&D Cooperation between EU and the
Balkan Countries. More specifically, the main objective of WEB-ENV project is the development of
general environmental guidelines concerning the region of Western Balkan Countries, with a
particular focus on water resources, renewable energy and use of recycled materials. These
guidelines could be useful for the formation of a generalized approach for the management of major
environmental problems and natural resources as well. This will be reached by the following:
• Extended mapping exercise to identify these problems
• Development of evaluation criteria permitting the selection of the most significant problems in
terms of water resources planning and policy, wastewater treatment and reuse technologies, use
of recycled material, renewable energy and hybrid systems, taking into account the socio-
economic and human health impacts
• Assessment of innovative low-cost remediation technologies
• Review of the existing legislation of each country in comparison with the EU Environmental
legislation and EU environmental directives.
The development of general environmental guidelines is expected to contribute to the formation of a
common environmental policy and sustainable management of natural resources in the region, to
arise peoples’ sensitivity in crucial environmental problems, to contribute to the economic
development of the region and to provide assistance to all the stakeholders involved with the
enhancement of the political and social situation in Western Balkans.

1 WEB-ENV Project Content

WEB –ENV Project’s realization will lead to the development of general environmental
guidelines concerning all the region of Western Balkan Countries that could be usesful for

531
532

the formation of a generalised approach for the management of environmental problems

of great significance of the region and natural resources. To achieve this:
An extended mapping exercise will be carried out in each country, for the
identification and evaluation of important environmental problems of the Western Balkan
region, with particular focus in problems related to water resources planning and policy,
wastewater treatment and reuse technologies, use of recycled material, renewable energy
and hybrid systems. The duration of the mapping exercise is estimated to one year.
A reliable environmental map of the region will be developed, depicting the areas
with significant environmental problems and recording the rehabilitation needs for each
case will be based on the mapping exercise. In this map, it will be implemented a
selection of the most important cases of these problems taking into account subjects such
as the impact on human health and social and economic impact and it will be included
extensive summaries with the already existed proposed solutions, other extensive relative
reports and also technoeconomical data for each case.
A limited number of environmental problems will be defined and will be studied as
“case studies”.
Low cost innovative technologies will be identified and assessed, in order to be
implied for the remediation of the identified environmental problems.
The existing legislation on the Western Balkan Countries’ environmental issues
will be reviewed and disseminated
4 techno economical preliminary feasibility studies of cases of great significance
(one for each participating country from the Western Balkan region) will be carried out.
Environmental guidelines will be prepared, taking into account socio- and techno-
economic parametres for each country and for the region of Western Balkans as well,
encouraging the transnational research, technological and scientific colaboration.
A web-portal will be developed as an effective support tool to be utilised within the
project and will provide reliable and up-to-date information on issues such as:
• Water resources planning and policy.
• Wastewater treatment and reuse technologies.
• Flood / drought prevention and control.
• Use of recycled material.
• Renewable energy and hybrid systems.
• Legislation of the Western Balkan Countries related to aforementioned issues.
• Directories of open programmes and funding mechanisms.
• Innovative low-cost technologies for substantial energy savings.
In addition, WEB-ENV portal will provide information about open programmes and
funding mechanisms and hopefully it will be a useful awareness mean providing
information on opportunities offered by international organizations (e.g. European Union,
United Nations, UNESCO, International Bank, European Investment Bank, European
Agency for Reconstruction etc.), the financing of projects designed for the solution of
environmental problems of the region:
 533

• Encouragement of the cooperation between scientific, research and industry world

with expected multiplying effects that will satisfy existing information needs of both
scientists and business people and will enhance a regional sustainable socio-
economic development.
• Effective public awareness, arising people’s sensitivity in crucial environmental
problems and sustainable socio-economic development of the region.
• Encouragement of the transboundary collaboration between the countries of the
region.
• Worldwide publicity of the research activity carried out in the Western Balkan
Countries to the rest of the world.
• Help researchers and research organizations to have easy access to knowledge and
expertise not available until now.
• Stabilization and reinforcement Research Potential of the Western Balkan Countries.
• Help in the solution of global environmental problems e.g. the global water crisis and
work towards the objectives of the EU Water Initiative and Millennium Development
Goals.
The potential impact of WEB-ENV Project is expected to contribute significantly to
efforts carrying out in the region now or in the near future aiming to offer solutions in
major environmental problems, and therefore to the economic development of the
Western Balkan Countries. The assistance that will be provided could be helpful to all the
stakeholders involved with the enhancement of the political and social situation in the
Western Balkan region.
It should also be mentioned that WEB-ENV will work towards European Union’s
environmental policy by developing general guidelines for major environmental problems
for the Western Balkan region.
Additionally, the project will encourage the collaboration between scientific groups,
research organizations and industry partners from the Western Balkan Countries and will
strengthen local and national capacities on environmental management.

2 Strategic Impact and Contribution to Others EU’s Policies

Additionally, to the above mentioned, WEB-ENV Project is in full accordance to certain
EU’ s Policies such as:
• EU Water Initiative, which aims to achieve a secure water future for all. The water
global crisis is a threat to the environment, to economic development, to poverty
reduction, to peace and security. Solving water problems means environmental,
economic and social progress. WEB-ENV project is going to work towards this
objective and provide information about integrated management of regional water
resources. This can be assured by the participation in the project of partners with
significant experience, infrastructure, and equipment in relative issues and especially
the Hydro-engineering Institute in Sarajevo, which specializes in water management,
hydro-engineering and environmental engineering.
• The Millennium Development Goals, which are accepted by the international
community including the European Commission. Specifically, there will be
534

contribution to the assurance of environmental sustainability, which is one of the

Millennium Development Goals, by proposing suitable solutions for major
environmental problems of the region.
• Other European’s Union’s policies, by supporting the external relations and
encouraging trans regional partnerships and international cooperation, as the project
involves collaboration between organizations of the Western Balkan Countries.
• Action Plan for S&T Cooperation between EU and the Balkan Countries, adopted
during the EU-Balkan Countries Ministerial Conference held in Thessaloniki, on
June 27, 2003, promoting the general goal of this Action Plan, in the Western Balkan
Region. Namely:
1. Creation of atmosphere of understanding of EU RTD policies and strategies.
2. Creation of general conditions for integration into EU RTD activities.
3. Creation of potentials and capabilities for full participation in ERA, FP6 and other
European programmes, in the future.
4. Particularly, concerning the goal of the Cooperation related to Environment
(monitoring, improvement, water management), the project will develop a clear
regional concept on decentralized water management based on innovative
technologies.

3 Exploitation and Dissemination Plan

Results can be exploited by all the stakeholders involved with the development of a
common environmental policy and administration of natural resources and specifically:
• Optimum energy management
• Optimum water resources exploitation.
• Effective wastewater treatment and reuse technologies.
• Application of innovative, clean and low-cost technologies.
• Effective prevention and control flood / drought.
• Better use of recycled materials.
• Arising people’s sensitivity in crucial environmental problems
• Improvement of the environment, the quality of life and long-term prosperity.
The environmental map and the portal in general of the Western Balkan Countries’ can
provide a better image of the region, and can be useful tools to stimulate international
funding organizations as the European Union, the United Nations, UNESCO, the
International Bank, the European Investment Bank, etc., to grant new projects in the
region.
WEB-ENV project’s results can be exploited as well for the transregional co-
operation between the countries of the Western Balkan Countries, in common
environmental problems and in addition for the co-operation between the aforementioned
countries and the European Union.
To facilitate the results dissemination, the design of an effective dissemination /
awareness campaign is necessary. The main objective of this dissemination plan will be
to increase the awareness of special target groups such as governmental organizations,
 535

research institutions, universities, research centres, environmental organizations, industry,

general public etc. In order to attain this target, the following activities will be carried out:
1. Mapping exercise of the existing environmental problems.
2. Evaluation of these problems by the Groups of experts and adoption by the Steering
Committee of a limited number of cases of major importance
3. Presentation of the results from the mapping exercise and the evaluation process in
the workshops
4. Distribution of questionnaires related to these presentations during the workshops.
Additionally, these questionnaires will be mailed to the main stakeholders
(Government, Local Authorities, Academia, Private sector/Industry). The study of the
feedback from the questionnaires will be the basis related to develop the
environmental guidelines for WBC.

4 Conclusion
In conclusion, the most important impact of the WEB-ENV project, will be the
contribution to the development of an environmental policy with consequences the
improvement of the environment, the quality of life and the sustainable development of
the Western Balkan region by the recommendation of solutions for the prevention or
remediation of most important environmental problems.
HIGH EFFICIENCY HEAT AND MATERIAL RECOVERY OF PLASTIC
WASTE INCLUDING POLYVINYL CHLORIDE BY USING SUMITOMO
METALS’ WASTE GASIFICATION AND SMELTING SYSTEM

TAKAIKU YAMAMOTO
Sumitomo Metal Industries LTD., 16-1 Sunayama Kamisu
City Ibaraki-Pref., Japan

HIROTAKA SATO
Sumitomo Metal Industries LTD., 16-1 Sunayama Kamisu
City Ibaraki-Pref., Japan

YOSHINORI MATSUKURA
Sumitomo Metal Industries LTD., 16-1 Sunayama Kamisu
City Ibaraki-Pref., Japan

ATSUYA KASAI
Sumitomo Metal Industries LTD., 16-1 Sunayama Kamisu
City Ibaraki-Pref., Japan

YUTAKA UJISAWA
Sumitomo Metal Industries LTD., 16-1 Sunayama Kamisu
City Ibaraki-Pref., Japan

HIROAKI ISHIDA
Sumitomo Metal Industries LTD., 8-11 Harumi 1-Chome Chuo-ku
Tokyo., Japan

RYUNOSUKE KIKUCHI
ESAC-Polytechnic Institute of Coimbra, Bencanta
Coimbra, 3040-316, Portugal

Ordinary waste treatment systems have problems caused by low heat and material recovery, such as
the emission of dioxin and heavy metals. To promote heat and material recovery, a new type of waste
gasification and smelting system, using iron-making and steel-making technologies based on
high-temperature metallurgy, has been developed for much kind of wastes. This system can steadily
gasify and smelt municipal waste and industrial waste such as plastic waste including polyvinyl
chloride, automobile shredder residue, soil and so on. As a result of steady operation in the high
temperature reduction atmosphere, dioxin-free high calorie purified gas and heavy metal-free high
quality slag were produced. Three commercial plants which have capacities of 132tons/day (2 units of
66tons/day) based on municipal waste in Tosu, Japan and 100tons /day (1 units of 100tons/day) based
on industrial waste in Yamaguchi and Kashima, Japan have been operating at full capacity.

536
 537

1 Introduction
In Japan, waste incineration and landfilling of bottom ash have been adopted for waste
treatment, but ordinary waste treatment systems have problems caused by low heat and
material recovery, such as the emission of dioxin and heavy metals. As might be suspected,
this is a global concern as well as a Japanese one. In Europe, thermal treatment of waste is
one of the options prescribed by the European Commission in its waste management
protocol: prevention, material recycle, energy recovery and landfill [1]. A major change
has been considered necessary since the European waste directive called for a 30%
reduction of the amount of waste sent to landfill by 2010. To promote heat and material
recovery, a new type of gasification and smelting system, using iron-making and
steel-making technologies based on high-temperature metallurgy, has been developed for
municipal waste [2]. This system, Sumitomo Metals’ waste gasification and smelting
system can produce dioxin-free high calorie purified gas, which can be used for high
efficiency power generating system using a gas engine or turbine. And ash components in
the municipal waste are smelted in a high temperature reduction atmosphere and the heavy
metal-free high quality slag is produced. Furthermore, this system will be applied for high
heat and material recovery of not only for municipal waste and also industrial waste such
as plastic waste including polyvinyl chloride (herein after as “PVC”), automobile shredder
residue and other treatment-resistant waste [3], because the temperature in the furnace can
easily be controlled by using top and sideways blow oxygen lances. There will be high heat
and mass recovery, production of dioxin-free high calorie gas and heavy metal-free high
quality slag, and recovery of chlorine. In this paper, gasification and smelting test results
using municipal and industrial wastes were described.

2 Basic Concepts
Figure 1 shows the basic concepts of Sumitomo Metals’ waste gasification and smelting
system.

Top blowing oxygen High temperature gas

≧ 1343K

Mist spray
Furnace
Gas quencher
Waste
＜473K

Dioxin-free gas
Oxygen
Small gas volume
Coke-free High-quality slag High-calorie gas

Figure 1. Basic concepts of the Sumitomo Metals’ gasification and smelting system.
538

The furnace is a shaft type in which waste is gasified and smelted in one process.
Waste-packed bed is formed in the lower half section of the furnace. The sideways blow
oxygen lances are provided in the packed bed area and a top blow lance is placed at the top
of the furnace. The basic concepts of this system are steady operation by using top and
sideways blow oxygen lances, production of dioxin-free high calorie purified gas and
production of high quality slag. These concepts were clarified by a 2ton/day-bench furnace
test using dried municipal waste. The explanations of the concepts are as follows.

2.1. Steady Operation by Using the Top Blow Lance

Figure 2 and Figure 3 show effects of top blowing oxygen. By using top blow lance
together with the sideways oxygen lances, the top gas composition was stabilized because
uniform gas flow will be produced in the top part of the furnace. And coarse dust flying
(particle size is over 0.1mm) was prevented by using top blowing oxygen. Figure 4 shows
inside wall of the furnace after the gasification and smelting test. Melting dust was

50 　 : W aste Charging
40
CO
CO, CO 2 (%)

30

20
CO2
10
Without top blowing With top blowing
0
0 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 6.0 7.2
Time (ks)

Figure 2. Effect of top blowing on stability of top gas composition.

15
with to p b lo wing
Coarse dust(kg / ton-MW)

witho ut to p b lo wing
C oa rs e dust ≧ φ 0.1m m
10

0
0 .7 0 .8 0 .9 1
T o p g as ve lo c ity(m / s )

Figure 3. Effect of top blowing oxygen on coarse dust dispersion.

 539

Non dust-
coating layer
Uniform dust-
coating layer
With top blowing Without top blowing
Figure 4. Formation of dust-coating layer on the inside wall of the furnace.

uniformly coated on the inner wall of the furnace with top blowing oxygen as shown in
Figure 4. Namely dust was trapped on the inside wall and coarse dust dispersion was
prevented. Formation of the dust-coating layer on the inside wall of the furnace will not
only prevent dust flying but also protect the inside wall. The coated dust will go down the
inside wall and become slag. Furthermore, molten slag is steadily produced by top blowing
oxygen because the high temperature zone is concentrated toward the centre of the furnace.
As a result of using the top blow lance, this system can be steadily operated over long term.

2.2. Production of dioxin-free gas

For reduction of dioxin emission, waste is gasified in high temperature reduction
atmosphere of over 1343K and the off gas is rapidly quenched to about 443K by a mist
spray type quencher. In the gasification and smelting test using municipal waste, the
concentration of dioxins after gas treatment was less than 0.01ng-TEQ/Nm3.

2.3. Reduction of off gas volume and production of high calorie gas
The off gas volume will be theoretically reduced to about 25% by combining oxygen
blowing and waste drying in comparison with a conventional process, which used
municipal waste that was not dried and air blowing for combustion. Furthermore, waste
drying and oxygen blowing produced high-calorie gas, which contained a large quantity of
CO and H2. The high calorie gas will be used for high efficiency power generating system
using a gas engine or turbine.

2.4. Production of high quality slag

Ash components in the waste are smelted in the high-temperature reduction atmosphere to
produce heavy metal–free high quality slag. Heavy metals easily become volatile and
concentrated in the generated gas or dust. As the absolute quantity of heavy metals
contained in the slag is very little, the produced slag can be used for roadbed material.
540

3 Basic Flow
Basic flow of Sumitomo Metals’ gasification and smelting system was constructed based
on the above-mentioned basic concepts. Figure 5 shows the basic flow of this system.
Municipal waste is charged into the furnace after shredding and drying. A shaft-type
furnace is equipped with a top and sideways blow lance to supply oxygen into the furnace
for waste gasification and smelting. The exhaust gas from the furnace was maintained at
1343K or more, and it is rapidly quenched though the gas quencher for reduction of dioxin
emission. After gas quenching, dust and chlorine in the exhaust gas is removed at
bag-filter, and hydrogen sulfide is removed at a wet desulfurization reactor. The chlorine in
the exhaust gas is removed by slaked lime injection into bag-filter. And the purified
exhausted gas is used for high efficiency power generating system using a gas engine or
turbine. In the gasification and smelting of plastic waste including PVC, exhausted gas
temperature after gas quenching is maintained at over 413K for prevention of the corrosion
from hydrogen chloride produce from PVC. And collecting system of hydrogen chloride
will be installed after gas quenching or bag-filtering process in a commercial plant.

Waste
Stack
Shredder
Condensed Water

Gas quencher Power

Dryer Oxygen
Lime Power generator
Lime
Bag Desulfurization
Gasification and reactor
smelting furnace filter
Press
Oxygen
Water bath
Slag & Metal Heavy metal
stabilizer

Figure 5. Basic flows of Sumitomo Metals’ gasification and smelting system.

4 Gasification and Smelting Test Results

4.1. Materials and Methods

The gasification and smelting test using municipal and industrial wastes was conducted by
using a 2ton/day-bench furnace system. Table 1 shows the technical analysis value of
waste samples. Refuse Paper and Plastic Fuel (hereinafter refer to “RPF”), actual plastic
waste, PVC, housing waste, automobile shredder residue (hereinafter refer to “ASR”) and
simulated plastics, which are mixtures of RPF and PVC were used. Concentrations of
volatile matters in the RPF, plastic waste, PVC and housing waste are much larger than that
 541

in dried municipal waste and ASR. And concentration of ash in ASR is much larger than
that in other sample wastes. Table 2 shows the chemical compositions of the waste
samples. Chlorine content in PVC and housing waste are greater in comparison with other
wastes. In this test, mixing ratio of RPF and PVC is changed to clarify influence of chlorine
content for dioxin emission.

Table 1. Technical analysis values of waste samples.

Dried
Plastic Housing
Municipal RPF PVC ASR
Waste Waste
Waste
Volatile Matter (wt %) 62.2 90.5 92.3 84.4 88.6 51.8
Fixed Carbon (wt %) 19.0 1.1 2.6 11.9 10.2 5.9
Ash (wt %) 9.8 7.5 4.6 3.5 1.02 33.9
Moisture (wt %) 9.0 0.9 0.5 0.2 0.2 8.4
Bulk Density (ton/m3) 0.1 0.35 0.30 0.59 0.45 0.4
Low Calorific Value (kJ/kg) 15873 36879 35418 19172 19574 18799

Table 2. Chemical compositions of waste samples.

Dried
Plastic Housing
Municipal RPF PVC ASR
Waste Waste
Waste
Combustible C 40.0 71.2 76.0 37.6 38.5 39.5
(wt %) H 6.3 10.9 9.0 4.7 4.8 4.7
O 32.2 7.8 6.4 6.2 22.4 9.5
N 0.9 1.0 0.36 0.0 0.03 1.1
S 0.12 0.11 0.03 0.08 0.04 0.30
T-Cl 1.7 0.53 3.15 47.75 33.06 2.5
Ash (wt%) 9.8 7.5 4.6 3.5 1.02 33.9
Moisture (wt%) 9.0 0.9 0.5 0.2 0.2 8.4
Heavy Cd 1 <1 2 5 20 6
Metals Cr < 10 < 10 < 10 < 10 < 10 167
(ppm) Hg < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 0.02 < 0.01
Pb 39 50 10 < 10 19200 3380
As <1 <1 <1 4 93 5
Se < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50

4.2. Operation Stability

Table 3 shows overall results of the furnace operation. The 2 ton/day-bench furnace system
can steadily gasify and smelt RPF, 100% PVC, 100% actual plastic waste, mixture of RPF
and PVC, housing waste and ASR the same as dried municipal waste. The main
components of the product gas are CO and hydrogen. Top gas temperature was maintained
at over 1373K and residence time of the product gas in the furnace is more than 2 seconds.
The high temperature gas was rapidly quenched to 443K at mist spray type gas quencher
for reduction of dioxin emission.
542

Table 3. Overall results of 2ton-MW/day-bench furnace operation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Sample Dried Municipal Waste 70 0 0 0 0 0 0
(kg/hr) RPF 0 70 61.4 0 0 0 0
PVC 0 0 8.6 70 0 0 0
Plastic Waste 0 0 0 0 70 0 0
Housing Waste 0 0 0 0 0 50 0
ASR 0 0 0 0 0 0 70
Total Charge (kg/hr) 70 70 70 70 70 50 70
Coke (kg/hr) 0 0 0 12 0 16 4
Auxiliary fuel
LPG (Nm3/hr) 3.2 2.5 2.9 3.0 3.3 2.6 2.5
Oxygen Blowing (Nm3/hr) 52.1 65 62.9 64 65.8 54 48
Top Gas Volume (dry-Nm3/hr) 136 190 174 168 195 149 140
Top Gas Temperature (K) 1423 1476 1518 1479 1504 1472 1483
CO 22 30 28 27 35 38 29
Top Gas Composition (%) CO2 25 9 10 19 9 22 12
(except HCl) H2 12 31 27 24 26 12 22
N2 41 30 35 30 30 28 37
Slag Tapping Rate (kg/hr) 7.5 3.6 4.0 1.9 1.1 0.5 29.0

4.3. Dioxin Emission

Figure 6 shows influence of chlorine content in waste samples for dioxin emission. As a
result of gasification in the high temperature reduction atmosphere and rapid gas
quenching, the concentrations of dioxins of the off gas after gas treatment were kept under
0.01ng-TEQ/Nm3 nevertheless plastic waste including polyvinyl chloride contain much
chlorine which is one of constitutive element of dioxins.

0.1 ：RPF- PVC

：Plastic Waste
) 0.08 ：Housing Waste
3
m
N
sn / 0.06 ：A S R
ix Q
ioD ET
-g 0.04
n(
0.02

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Cl in Waste (%)

Figure 6. Influence of chlorine content for dioxin emission.

4.4. Chlorine Recovery

Figure 7 shows conversion ratio of chlorine into hydrogen chloride. Most of the chlorine in
wastes converted into hydrogen chloride. The produced hydrogen chloride will be
 543

collected as hydrochloric acid and recycled in the case of using plastic waste including
much PVC. Test to collect hydrochloric acid and to refine the collected hydrochloric acid
were conducted. These results were introduced later.

100
)
％
( 80
oti
ar 60
noi
sr 40
ev
no
C 20
0
RPF- RPF- RPF- RPF- 100%PVC Plastic Housing
12%PVC 25%PVC 50%PVC 75%PVC Waste Waste

Figure 7. Conversion ratio of chlorine into hydrogen chloride.

4.5. High-calorie Gas

The main components of the product gas are CO and H2 as shown in Table 3. Therefore,
this system can produced high calorie gas. Product gas calorie of commercial furnace will
be higher than that of the 2ton/day bench furnace because heat loss ratio will be decreased.
Figure 8 shows calculation results of the product gas composition and gas calorie in the

CO, H2, CO2, N2

RPF100% 11352 kJ/Nm3

RPF- 12%PVC 11357 kJ/Nm3

RPF- 25%PVC 11365 kJ/Nm3

RPF- 50%PVC 11378 kJ/Nm3

RPF- 75%PVC 11403 kJ/Nm3

100%PVC 11453 kJ/Nm3

Plastic Waste 11578 kJ/Nm3

Housing Waste 10017 kJ/Nm3

0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%

Figure 8. Product gas compositions in 50 ton/day furnace except HCl.
544

furnace with capacity of 50 tons/day. The gas calorie will be higher than 10000kJ/Nm3.
Figure 9 shows heat balance in 50 ton/day-commercial size furnace. The conversion ratio
of waste calorie into energy gas (=Product gas energy / Input energy) will be 78% in the
case of using actual plastic waste. This indicates that efficiency of heat recovery is very
high. The produced energy gas can be recycled for high-efficiency power generating
system by using a gas engine or turbine.
80000
78 %
Energy gas (78%)
70000

60000
Calorie (MJ/hr)

50000
Sensible heat of gas
40000

30000

20000 Sensible heat of slag

10000

0
Heat loss
Input Output

Figure 9. Heat balance in 50 ton/day furnace.

Table 4. Slag leaching test results (mg/L).

Dried
Plastic Housing Standard
Municipal 100% PVC ASR
Waste waste Value
Waste

Cd < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
+6
Cr < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05
T-Hg < 0.0005 < 0.0005 < 0.0005 < 0.0005 < 0.0005 < 0.0005
Pb < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
As < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
Se < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01

4.6. High Quality Slag

Main components in produced slag are CaO, SiO2 and Al2O3, and there is very little
chlorine content. The amounts of heavy metals in the slag are very little because the heavy
metals such as Cd, Hg, Pb, As and Se easily become volatile and concentrated in the
generated gas or dust as a result of the smelting in the condition of a high temperature and
reduction atmosphere. Thus the ratio of such heavy metals moving into slag is very small.
Therefore, the heavy metals in the slag satisfy all of the Japanese standards for the leaching
test as shown in Table 4 and the safety of the slag to be used for roadbed is very high.
 545

Furthermore, heavy metals moving into dust can be used for raw materials of non-ferrous
metals.

4.7. Refining Test of Crude Hydrochloric Acid

Conversion ratio of chlorine in wastes into hydrogen chloride was achieved to 90% or
more as shown in Figure 7. To clarify possibility of chlorine recycling, a system to collect
hydrochloric acid was installed. In this system, the hydrogen chloride was cooled by
sprinkle water and collected as crude hydrochloric acid. However, impurities such as F,
SO42-, PO43-, Zn, Ca, Sn and Pb were contained in the collected hydrochloric acid. Test to
refine the crude hydrochloric acid was conducted. Five kinds of simulated hydrochloric
acid solutions were prepared. The simulated hydrochloric acid solutions contain impurities
such as metal, F, SO42-, PO43- as shown in Table 5. A system to refine the hydrochloric acid
separated these impurities. Table 6 shows refining test results. The impurities in the refined
hydrochloric acid satisfy all of the permissible level.

5 Design of Commercial Plant

This system was accepted for three commercial plants which have capacity of 132 tons/day
(2 units of 66 tons/day) based on municipal waste in Tosu, Japan and 100 tons/day based
on industrial waste in Yamaguchi and Kashima, Japan. The commercial plants were
designed by using a 3-dimensional mathematical simulation model. The above-mentioned
commercial plants have been operating at full capacity after start-up operation in 2004.

Table 5. Impurity contents in simulated hydrochloric acid solutions (25wt% HCl).

1 2 3 4 5
Metal F SO 4 2- PO 4 3- F & Metal
mg/L - 160 170
F
mg/kg-HCl - 615 654
mg/L - 4800
SO 4 2-
mg/kg-HCl - 18462
mg/L - 2300
PO 4 3-
mg/kg-HCl - 8846
mg/L 620 660
Zn
mg/kg-HCl 2385 2538
mg/L 2200 2300
Ca
mg/kg-HCl 8462 8846
mg/L 79 84
Sn
mg/kg-HCl 304 323
mg/L 2100 2300
Pb
mg/kg-HCl 8077 8846
546

Table 6. Impurity contents in crude and refined hydrochloric acid (mg/kg-HCl).

1 2 3 4 5 Permissible
Metal F SO 4 2- PO 4 3- F & Metal Level
Crude - 615 - - 654 -
F
Refined - 1.1 - - < 0.5 <1-5
Crude - - 18462 - - -
SO 4 2-
Refined - - 0.29 - - <1-5
Crude - - - 8846 - -
PO 4 3-
Refined - - - < 0.5 - <1-5
Crude 2385 - - - 2538 -
Zn
Refined < 0.03 - - - < 0.03 <1
Crude 8462 - - - 8846 -
Ca
Refined 0.43 - - - 0.78 <1
Crude 304 - - - 323 -
Sn
Refined < 0.03 - - - < 0.03 <1
Crude 8077 - - - 8846 -
Pb
Refined < 0.06 - - - < 0.06 <1

6 Conclusions
More than 3,000 million tons of waste is generated in Europe every year, and total waste
quantities are continuing to increase in most European countries [4]. PVC waste accounts
for a total of about 15% of all plastic waste in the European Union (EU) [5], and PVC
production is increasing, confronting future generation with rising amounts of PVC waste
[6]. The number of scrapped cars in Europe is increasing, and the quantity of waste from
scrapped cars is estimated at about 10 million tons [6]. A total increase of 124% in the
number of scrapped cars is projected between 2000 and 2015 [4].
The Sumitomo Metals’ gasification and smelting system using iron-making and
steel-making technologies can steadily gasify and smelt industrial waste such as plastic
waste including polyvinyl chloride, automobile shredder residue, soil and so on the same
as municipal waste. In this system, strong smelting ability and strong separation ability can
produce dioxin-free high-calorie purified gas and heavy metal-free high quality slag.
Furthermore, most of the chlorine in the plastic waste including PVC was converted into
hydrogen chloride that is recovered as chlorine and hydrochloric acid. There will be high
heat and mass recovery, production of dioxin-free high calorie purified gas, and heavy
metal-free high quality slag, and recovery of chlorine.

References

1. Silva, C. Ciência e Politica em Rota de Colisão, Industria e Ambiente, 26, 4(2002)

2. T. Yamamoto, K. Isaka, H. Sato, Y. Matsukura and H. Ishida, ISIJ International. 40,
260 (2000)
3. T. Yamamoto, H. Sato, Y. Matsukura, Y. Ujisawa, H. Ishida, S. Sasaki and Y. Hata,
Journal of Material Cycles and Waste Management. 6, 6 (2004)
 547

4. European Environment Agency, Europe’s environment, Environmental assessment

report No.10, Copenhagen (2003)
5. SOFRES. Elements for a cost-effective plastic waste management, Counsel for the
Commission DGXI, Environment DG Information Centre, Brussels (1996).
6. European Topic Center on Waste, Waste generation and management, European
Environment Agency, Copenhagen (1999).
 THE STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF HUMAN
BEING — ENVIRONMENT RELATION

DANIELA-EMANUELA DĂNĂCICĂ
Department of Economics, “Constantin Brancusi” University of Tg-Jiu
Tg-Jiu, Romania

A very concerning factor is that at the beginning of the XX-th century the economy destroys its
support system using the main natural funds. However, the economical system is partially “blind”.
The system focuses on very different things regarding demand and supply, but is totally subjective,
even ignorant, in the appreciation of the value of some other things such as pure water, fresh air or
the beauty of mountains. In the present paper the author approaches some of the classical methods
used in statistics for the analysis of human being-environment relation and proposes new ways of
current analysis required for adopting optimal economical patterns and strategies. The main issues
presented in this article are those related to: the impact of population over the environment, the
statistical modulation of the human being-environment relation and the mathematical and statistical
modulation of the relation between economical development and pollution.

1 The Impact of Population over the Environment

The concept of “population” includes elements such as persons’ spatial affiliation, their
demographic rate and medium hope of life, relationship between genders, welfare, health
and education. The term of “eco-development” was imposed, like a complex relationship
between the economical development and the environment, because the economical
development takes place within some ecological systems. Technology gave to man the
possibility to change the environment in order to achieve his aims. The irrational
exploitation of natural resources and their use without responsibility can lead to disastrous
consequences for the ecological balance. There was a big concern of a great deal of
economists for the needs of a population that quickly grows and the impact over the
environment determined by their satisfaction. All the people agree that natural resources
represent an important part of a developed economy, but the attention bestowed to these
is insufficient. Even in present, in the official economical research, we will not find a
higher preoccupation for environmental problems or the population growth in the
undeveloped areas, from the economical point of view, such as The Indian sub-
continental and The Sub-Saharan Africa, two regions where live in present about 2
millions people, from which more than 20% have an income less than $1/ person.
This neglect of the environment is strange, because most of the people from the poor
countries are farmers or shepherds. The population of rural area is 65% from the total
population, in countries classified by Banca Mondiala like countries with very low
incomes. The rate of agriculture is 30% in the internal growth product, in these countries.
The poor countries are, to a great extent, countries with a subsistence economy where the
persons with a low living standard assure their living with products got directly from the

548
 549

environment. The natural resources for these persons have an overwhelming importance.
The countries strongly industrialized are to the opposite pole, where the main risk is the
super-pollution. Industry spreads in the atmosphere and discharges in water big quantities
of residua that deteriorates the structure of troposphere and continentals water. Residua
and garbage stored on the ground are added to these, which reach to water. Synthetic
detergents, insecticides or noxious substances that, through infiltrations, reach to the
ground water-bearing bed, negatively modifying the composition of drinking water, spoil
the water quality. Seas and oceans pollution endangers not only the own biological
balance but also the life of living organisms including the humans. The life quality, that is
an operational concept for checking the life conditions of human needs, has a big
importance. As a result, prevention and control of the environment pollution are “sine-
qua-non” conditions for a good health of population maintenance. The rate of agriculture
is 30% in the internal growth product, in these countries. The poor countries are, to a
great extent, countries with a subsistence economy where the persons with a low living
standard assure their living with products got directly from the environment. The natural
resources for these persons have an overwhelming importance. The countries strongly
industrialized are to the opposite pole, where the main risk is the super-pollution. Industry
spreads in the atmosphere and discharges in water big quantities of residua that
deteriorate the structure of troposphere and continentals water. Residua and garbage
stored on the ground are added to these, which reach to water. Synthetic detergents,
insecticides or noxious substances that, through infiltrations, reach to the ground water-
bearing bed, negatively modifying the composition of drinking water, spoil the water
quality. Seas and oceans pollution endangers not only the own biological balance but also
the life of living organisms including the humans. The life quality, that is an operational
concept for checking the life conditions of human needs, has a big importance. As a
result, prevention and control of the environment pollution are “sine-qua-non” conditions
for a good health of population maintenance.

2 Statistical Methods in Analyzing the Relationship Human-Environment

2.1. Method of Structural Coefficients in Analyzing the Relationship Human-

Environment
We will focus our attention on the analysis of variable “expenses for environmental
protection”. We will note: Ct - total expenses for environmental protection; Cc - current
expenses for environmental protection, and Ci - investments expenses for environmental
protection. The total expenses are given by the relation:

Ct = Cc + Ci (1)

The structural coefficients of the two components of total expenses will have the
following formula:
550

Cc C
K1 = ; K 2 = i ; K1 + K 2 = 1 . (2)
Ct Ct
Analyzing in progress the value of total expenses, we will use the following notation:
C t0 − value of total expenses in year “0”, and C t1 − value of total expenses in current
year “1”. The dynamics index is:
Ct1 C c1 + Ci1
i Ct 1 / 0 = = , (3)
C t0 C c0 + Ci0

and the rhythm of dynamics:

Ct1 − Ct0
100 = (i −1)100 .
Ct1/ 0 Ct1/ 0
r = (4)
Ct 0

The contribution of each structural element to the general dynamics of total expenses will
be:
C c1 − C c0
A Cc 1 / 0 = ⋅ 100 (5)
Ct
C i1 − C i0
A Ci 1 / 0 = ⋅ 100 (6)
Ct

r Ct 1 / 0 = A C c 1 / 0 + A C i 1 / 0 (7)
These indicators, as relative measures of structure, can be used in determining the
proportion of contributions within the rhythm of the value:
C
A c1/ 0
PC c = C c 100 (8)
r 1/ 0
C
A i1/ 0
PC i = C 100 (9)
r i1/ 0
PC c + PC i = 100% (10)

This method can be used for each type of indicators that characterize the relationship
human- environment.
 551

2.2. Method of the matrix calculation in the statistical analysis of the relationship
human- environment
We suppose that we have, for the same indicator-total expenses for the environmental
protection- the following informational table (see Table 1).

Table 1. Total expenses for the environmental protection.

Total expenses for:

Field: The prevention Research- General
Environmenta …………
and control of development- environmental
l protection …
pollution training management
Agriculture c11 c12 c13 c14 c1m
Forestry c 21 c 22 c 23 c 24 c2m
Extractive
industry
c31 c32 c33 c34 c3m
Processing
industry
c 41 c 42 c 43 c 44 c4m
Waste recovery ….. …… …… ….. …...
Electric energy ….. ..…. ……… ……. ……..
Gas and water ….. ….. .….. ….. …..
Transport and
….. ….. .….. ….. …..
storage
Public
….. ….. .….. ….. …..
administration
Drain ….. ….. ….. ….. …..
Scavenging ….. …… …… …… …..
Scientific research …… …… …… …… ……
Other activities ….. ….. …… ….. …..
………… c n1 cn 2 cn3 cn 4 c nm

We note with C t = (cij ) n×m , i = 1, n , j = 1, m , the matrix of total expenses, i

representing the categories of expenses for environmental protection, j- the fields. The
matrix of the averages on lines, that will illustrate total averages on fields, is:

 ∑ c1 j ∑c ..... ∑c   c 1 c1 ..... c1 
 1j
 
1j

1  ∑ c2 j ∑c 2j ..... ∑c 2j   
= (11)
m  ..... ..... ..... .....  
 
 ∑c  c .... .... c 
 ij ∑ cij ..... ∑ ij   1
c 
n

The matrix of the averages on columns that point out the average of each category of
expenses, for all the fields is:
552

 ∑ ci1 ∑c ..... ∑c   c1' c2' ..... cm' 

 i2
 im

1  ∑ ci1 ∑c i2 ..... ∑c im   .... ..... ..... .... 
= (12)
n  ..... ..... ..... .....   ..... ..... ..... ..... 
 
  c ' .... .... c ' 
 ∑ i1 ∑ ci 2 ∑ im   1
 c ..... c n 

The deviations on lines dl (deviations of the total expenses from their average on
fields) are given by the difference:

 c11 c12 ... c1m   c 1 c1 ... c1   d11l d12l ... d1lm 

     l l

 c21 c22 ... c2 m   ... ... ... ...   d 21 d 22 ... d 2l m 
− = . (13)
 ... ... ... ...   ... ... ... ...   ... ... ... ... 
    
c ... cnm   c1 .. cn   d nl 1 d nl 2 l 
 n1 cn 2 ... ... d nm 
The deviations on columns dc (deviations on components of the total expenses from
their average for all the fields) are given by the difference:

 c11 c12 ... c1m   c1' c2' ... cm'   d11c d12c ... d1cm 
     c c

 c21 c22 ... c2 m   ... ... ... ...   d 21 d 22 ... d 2cm 
− = . (14)
 ... ... ... ...   ... ... ... ...   ... ... ... ... 
  
c ... cnm   c1' .. cm'   d nc1 d nc2 c 
 n1 cn 2 ... ... d nm 
The matrix of the square of deviations on lines is:

 (d11l ) 2 (d12l ) 2 ... (d1lm ) 2 

 l 2 l 2

 (d 21 ) (d 22 ) ... (d 2l m ) 2 
 ... . (15)
 ... ... ... 
 (d l ) 2 (d nl 2 ) 2 l
... (d nm ) 2 
 n1
The matrix of the square of deviations on columns is:

 (d11c ) 2 (d12c ) 2 ... (d1cm ) 2 

 c 2 c 2

 (d 21 ) (d 22 ) ... (d 2cm ) 2 
 ... . (16)
 ... ... ... 
 (d c ) 2 (d nc2 ) 2 c 2
... (d nm ) 
 n1
The sum of the square of deviations on lines is:
 553

 m l 2
 ∑ (d 1 j ) 
 j =1 
 2
 ∑ (d 2 j ) 
l

. . (17)
 
. 
. 
 
 ∑ (d l nj ) 2 
 
The sum of the square of deviations on columns is:

 n 
 ∑ (d c i1 ) 2 , ∑ (d c
12 ) 2 .... ∑ (d c
im )2  . (18)
 i =1 
The dispersion on lines:

 m l 2
 ∑ (d 1 j )   σ 21 σ 21 ...... σ 21 
 j =1   
 2 σ 2 2 σ 2 2 ...... σ 2 2 
 ∑ (d 2 j )   1 1
l
1  . (19)
.   , .....,  =  . 
 m m m
. 
.   2 
.  σ n σ 2 n ...... σ 2 n 
  
 ∑ (d l nj ) 2 
 
The dispersion on columns:

1
 
 n  σ ' 21 σ ' 2 2 ... σ ' 2 m 

 1  . 
∑ (d im )  n  =  .
2 
 n .
 ∑ (d c i1 ) 2 , ∑ (d c
12 ) 2 .... c (20)
 i =1    

 .   . 2 
 .  σ ' 1 σ ' 2 ... σ ' m 
2 2

 
1
n
 
 
554

The matrix analysis can be continued with the construction of chronological series on
the basis of these indicators, analysis of their dynamics as well as parameters estimation
of regression equation, determination of the anticipated horizon and determination of the
correlation coefficient and can be applied to other indicators, such as current expenses
indicator for environment, investments expenses.

2.3. Orders Correlation in Analyzing the Relationship Human-Environment

We can determine the existence, the type and the intensity of the possible correlations
between environment indicators and demographic indicators by means of coefficients of
orders correlation. We suppose that we have the following data regarding 10 counties
where there was registered an exceed of the maximum admissible concentrations of
pollutant substances in the air and the death at the age of 1 year old to 1000 living born,
in the same towns.

Table 2. Comparison between maximum available concentration frequency- powders in suspension and
death at the age of less than 1 year at 1000 living born.
Maximum Maximum
Death at the Death at the
available available
age of less age of less
concentration concentratio
County than 1 year at County than 1 year at
frequency- n frequency-
1000 living 1000 living
powders in powders in
born born
suspension suspension
Arad 61,80 17,6 Iaşi 33,9 21,3
Bistriţa Năsăud 26,31 13,8 Olt 22,2 14,7
Braşov 31,04 15,9 Timiş 26,57 17,9
Caraş-Severin 19,48 12,7 Vrancea 42 15,3
Constanţa 33.3 25,6 Galaţi 17,59 16,6

Using Spearman’s coefficient will analyze the possible correlation between the two
variables: deaths at the age of less than 1 year for 100 living born- resultant variable,
maximum available concentration frequency- powders in suspension- factorial variable.
The calculation is:

6∑ d 2 i
CS = 1 − . (21)
n(n 2 − 1)
The data necessary for calculation are systematized in Table 3.
So we have C S = 1 − 0,45 = 0,55 >0, direct correlation and enough intense. We
showed that there is a direct relation between the pollution degree of a geographical area
and the number of deaths at an age of less than 1 year in that place. The parametric
correlation and the regression for determining the connections between different
indicators such as concentration of pollutant substances in the water of certain
geographical areas, afforested areas and the child death rate for the respective
geographical areas. The informational contribution is obvious.
 555

Table 3. The data necessary for calculation.

Y Rx Ry d i = Rx − R y d 2i
X
17,59 16,6 1 6 -5 25
19,48 12,7 2 1 1 1
22,2 14,7 3 3 0 0
26,31 13,8 4 2 2 4
26,57 17,9 5 8 -3 9
31,04 15,9 6 5 1 1
33,3 25,6 7 10 -3 9
33,9 21,3 8 9 1 1
42 15,3 9 4 5 25
61,8 17,6 10 7 3 9

3 Statistical and Mathematical Pattern-Making of the Relationship

Economical Development-Pollution
Victor Platon [4] presents the following alternative of mathematical pattern- making of
the relationship economical development- pollution. It starts from the production
function:

Q = f ( K , L) , (22)

where are: K- the capital and L- the labor forces.

The volume of pollutant emissions depends on the consumption level and production
level by means of some specific coefficients, so we have:

E p = q (Q − B ) + p ⋅ Q , (23)

where is: B – the economic benefit.

These specific coefficients indicate the intensity of pollution when a certain good or
service is produced. These can be expressed in tons or kilograms for a certain value of the
production in lei or dollars. The density of the polluted persons from the environment,
noted by D, will depend on the level of pollutant emissions, the dispersion volume or
surface of pollutants V, the absorption capacity of the environment m, the existence of
anti-pollution equipments k and the capacity of anti-pollution equipment to retain the
pollutant emissions h:

Ep
D = − h ⋅ kr − m . (24)
V

If the density of the pollutants from the environment is constant then the quality of
environment is optimal:

dD . (25)
=0
dt
556

The author supposes that, at that moment, there is no pollution or pollutant

equipments and nor economical benefits. In this case the maximal production that can be
realized without the modification of environmental quality is:
V
Qmax = (m + h ⋅ K r ) , (26)
q+ p
where is: K r - the assets due to anti-pollutant-equipments.
Supposing that this time there is pollution, pollutant equipments and economical
benefits, we note: C- expenses generated by the anti-pollution actions, B- economical
benefits as a result of the actions for the environmental production, P- economical and
social losses as a result of the pollution. The expenses will increase as one goes along, an
improvement of environmental quality will be obtained, these expenses determining a
consumption of fixed and net current assets:

C = f ( Kr , D) . (27)

The total expenses will increase up to a certain extent and then will diminish. The
diminishing is due to the fact that the reduction of factor D at quality superior levels of
environment generates small reductions of pollutant effects and small increases of
benefits. The economical benefits resulted from anti-pollutant actions will increase with
the same value the economical losses were reduced, P, provoked by pollution. Factor D
has to be diminished up to the moment where the economical and social losses
determined by the pollution not annihilated disappeared. It is observed that the optimum
B
value is obtained when the report → max im or B − C - maxim. The maximum
C
difference is when B ' = C ' .
The economical units have to respect the legal standards regarding the environmental
protection. This fact demands current expenses (for the purification stations, consumption
of raw material, consumption of energy, fuel, and damping) and investments expenses.
The relation that does the equating of all the expenses is:

C n = Cc + I ⋅ q , (28)

where are: Cc- annual anti-pollutant current expenses, q- standardized coefficient of

efficiency and I - total investments for anti-pollutant actions.
In the anticipated analyses we have to take into account that:

Bn − ∑ [ B − C ] → max im ,
n

where are: B - the total net benefits as a result of the anti-pollutant actions, B- the
n
economic benefit as a result of anti-pollutant actions, at the level of economical unit and
 557

C n - the expenses for environmental protection equivalent as nature. For the calculation
of total benefits as a result of pollution reduction, the benefits resulted from the
quantitative, qualitative and in the same time quantitative-qualitative improvement of the
production and environment factors. We will have:

Bt = B +B +B ,
∆q ∆c ∆q⋅∆c
where are: B - the total benefits as a result of pollution reduction for one production or
t
environment factor and B benefit obtained through the quantitative and qualitative
∆q⋅∆c
increase, in the same time, of the analyzed factor.
The pattern making of the relationship between economical development and
pollution can be extended through determination equations of the balance by maintenance
of environmental quality, taking into consideration the effect of politics over the
equilibrium point, the influence of the anti-pollutant equipments fir establishing the
maximum productive level, enlargement of analysis field and its elaboration through
systematical correlation of information. This is necessary for politics proved scientifically
for protecting the environment.

4 Conclusion
The very fast development of technical and scientific revolution both in the industrialized
countries and in the developing ones, determined big concerns caused by the problems of
the century we live in, such as 5 billions of persons whose annual rate of growth is 83
millions, population that together with the technological progress provoked
unprecedented ecological modifications motivated by the people’s desire for a high living
standard and for satisfaction of more various and more higher needs. The protection of
environment and the quantitative measurement of environmental modifications have to be
one of the major contemporary concerns. The paper presents some methods of statistical
and mathematical pattern making of the relationship human- environment, without
completely dealing with this issue.

References

1. S. Barret, Economic Development and Environmental Policy, FAO (1996).

2. B.D. Ostro, The effects of the Air Pollution on Work Loss and Morbidity, Journal of
Environmental Economics and Management, 10 (1983).
3. D. Pearce and R.K. Turner, Economics of Natural Resources and Environmental,
John Hopkins University Press, Baltimore (1990).
4. V. Platon, Environmental Protection and Economical Development, E.D.P.B.,
Bucharest (1977).
5. The Statistical Annual of Romania, www.insse.ro , (2002).
 PHYTOREMEDIATION NEW TECHNOLOGY FOR SUSTAINABLE
DEVELOPMENT∗

MARA VLAJKOVIC
Institute for Public Health Protection of Serbia, "Dr Milan Jovanovic Batut", Dr Subotica 5
Belgrade, 11000, Serbia

BOJKA BLAGOJEVIC†
University of Nis, Faculty of Occupational Safety, Carnojeviceva 10a
Nis, 18000, Serbia

Phytoremedation is the technology in which we use green plants with an aim to remove polluting
substances from human environment and to transform them into harmless forms. Phytoremediation
of lead contaminated soil is Authors research. For Phytoremediation contaminated soil we used
phytoaccumulator plant (Brassica juncea). Experiments have proved that usage of synthetic chelates
in the phytoremediation process increased lead (heavy metals) uptake by plants.Phytoremediation is
innovative cleanup technology for Sustainable Development which cleans contaminated soil using
hyperaccumulator plants .

1 Introduction

1.1. The Concept Sustainable Development

Concept of Sustainable Development is social development of human race in accordance
with economic development and environmental protection. The Rio Earth Summit in
1992 resulted in a global plan for action for sustainable development – Agenda 21;
Recommendations have been set for developed and developing nations regarding to
sustainable development strategies in various areas, such as clean air and water, water
supply, energy, land use, housing, waste treatment, transportation, and health care.
Orientation for the concept of the Sustainable Development is participation the
Republic of Serbia in process “Environment for Europe”.The future generations are
dependent on nowadays. Sustainable development in future means reduction of use of the
fossile fuel, such as coal, oil and gas with necessarily effort for environmental protection.
On the global and local plan we need technologies for decreasing greenhouse gas
emission and enviroment revitalization. We propose alteration for decrease environmental
damage and exchange the fossile fuels with restorable energetically resources (wind or
solar energy) in future and development our society in sustainable direction.

∗
Work partially supported by grant Projekat N0 BTR.5.01.0542.B of the Ministry of
Science and Environmental R. Serbia
†
On this work cooautors were Jasminka Djordjevic Miloradovic and Mirjana Stupar

558
 559

1.2. Description of the problem

Anthropogenic activities-generate pollutations.For many years, human activities
connected to industry, energy production, mineral exploitation and distribution and
traffic, etc caused, and still causing, production and storage of dangerous polluting
substances. Pollutations come to air, water, soil. Pollutations from the air, gaseous or
aerosol like, in time mostly come to soil and after that to underground and ground waters.
Soil is being irreversibly lost and degraded as a result of increasing and often conflicting
demands from nearly all economic sectors. The main problems are irreversible losses due
to soil sealing and erosion, continuing contamination from local and diffuse sources,
acidification, salinization, compaction and desertification. We support the use of market
based and economic instruments, but promotion of economic growth and environmental
protection through improving efficiency and sustainability in the use of resources and
production processes.
Connected to human’s and animal’s health pollutations could be toxical,
cancerogenic, teratogenic, allergogenic, mutatogenic, bio-accumulative. In time,
depending to substratum, in wich pollutations are, polluting materials are degradated by
different speed.
Soil pollutations, as researches on territory of the Republic of Serbia show, include:
heavy metals, pesticides, PCBs, PAHs, radio-nuclides, acid rains, wasted waters, particles
of dust, coal, minerals, pathologenic organisms, etc. Under influence of pollutations, soil
does self-purification, until it losses that ability, by destruction of the soil or furthermore
to temporary or permanent expulsion from use. In that way comes up reduction of healthy
drinking water, reduction of territory convenient for agricultural use, reduction of terrain
convenient for production healthy and safe food.
If we do not pay attention on degradation of the soil, especially on contamination by
heavy metals, pesticides, radio-nuclides, and other dangerous materials from different
sources, it could be possible, very soon, to have “chemical time bomb”, compared with
appearance of cancer metastasis in human organism [1].
Heavy metals like cadmium, mercury, nicle, lead, uranium, copper, iron, manganese,
zinc, etc. are toxically substances wich include in food chain, and perform high risk for
biodiversity in long term period. Risk could be different: deteriorated human’s, animal’s
and plant’s health, object damage, or structures on the ground, contamination of
underground and ground waters wich are connected with the soil.
Influence of toxic metals dependes on their conditions and shapes, which causes
theirs behavior in soil. For example As and Se are more mobile in alkal pH while Hg, Pb,
Cd and Zn are more mobile in acid pH of soil [2]. Influence of the soil pH on the radio-
nuclides and organic compounds is relatively specific. Answer of the scientists on
problems connected to soil contamination and wasted waters are solutions for the
decontamination. In that way, the natural processes connected to capability of higher
plants, are used for remediation-cleaning up the soil and wasted waters. Processes in the
higher plants, caused by presence of pollutations, on the observed terrain, point to high
560

potential for cleaning up through plants. These plants Phytoremediators, wich are able to
accumulate metals and radio-nuclides in the above ground part of the plant, realizes the
possibility for soil and technogenic pollutations decontamination.
After the use of plants to clean-up the terrain, decontaminated soil could be used in
agriculture. Phytoremediation is new technology based on the use of higher plants for
cleanup process of contaminated environment.Fundamental and applied researches have
unequivocally demonstrated that selected plant species have potential to remove, degrade,
metabolize, or immobilize a wide range of contaminants [3]. Phytoremediation, as well as
the Sustainable Development is based on the implementation of three fundamental
components: environmental protection, economic growth and social equality.
Phytoremediation for Sustainable Development is based on the reduction of the
contaminated terrains.
Phytoremediation in the Republic of Serbia is support to Sustainable Development in
the reduction of the pollution, and cleaning-up places contaminated with waste materials
is subject-matter of researches done by author of this work.Necessity for decontamination
of the terrain-places contaminated by waste materials in R. Serbia exists. Solution
through use of the Phytoremediation is intruded, as the alternative to expensive and
aggressive processes for environmental decontamination. By application of the
Phytoremediation, we achieved:
1. Reduction of the risks from heavy metals in the soil.
2. Reduction of risks for water resources.
3. Reduction of human’s health risks.
Menagers of Occupation Battery Factory Sombor, which is surrounded by soil
contaminated by lead and heavy metals., decided that contaminated soil, should be
cleaned up [4]. Fundamental and applied research have unequivocally demonstrated that
selected plant species possess the genetic potential to remove, degrade, metabolize, or
immobilize a wide range of contaminants including lead and others heavy metals.
Through the Phytoremediation, [5], extracted arsenic, from ash deposit of Kostolac
thermo electrical power plants, by using the fern, in 2002. Adoption of arsenic by plants
grown on the Kostolac thermo electrical power plants ash. We investigated quantity of
arsenic in bottom coal ash from thermo electrical power plant Kostolac, and uptake of
arsenic in plants (Calamagrostis epigeios), (Tusilago fanfara), (Sysibrium orintale), in
coal ash area Kostolac.
To avoid propagation of weedy species, crops are in general preferred although some
crops may be too palatable and pose a risk to grazing animals. Reduce the risks to human
health through pollution prevention and control [6]. To start inducted, by using plants
phytoaccumulators and helath reagents, phytoaccumulations of toxic metals (Pb, Cu, Zn,
Cr , Mn), from soil, ex situ 2000.- 2001. In that way, effects and possibility for
decontamination by the Phytoremediation were strengthened. Used helathy reagents: citric
acid and EDTA increased lead accumulation by several tenth times.
 561

Team [7] applied Phytoextraction for Cleaning-up Uranium- contaminated soil.

Phytoextaction as their specially form, establishes on the hyperaccumulative capability of
plants. The oil rape (Brassica napus var Banacanka) demonstrated hyperaccumulative
capability.
We came to know that soil pH has large influence on accumulation and translocation
of uranium from the soil. By reduction of pH on the amount of 5, uranium accumulation is
intensived by 14 times. Helath factors as citric acid, acetiqum acid, EDTA and HEDTA
increase uranium accumulation by several hundreds times.
Sanitary Ecology Society of Belgrade, [8] (2004/2005.) applied Phytoremediation
for Cleaning of heavy metals from the soil on terrain around Foundry Livnica Rakovica,
Belgrade, R.Serbia. Part of the project is introduction of new ways of sustainable usage of
the soil and water in the interaction of the plants, by the Publishera.

2 Implementation of the Phytoremediation

The Model Researching:

• Environmental identification of the area.
• Chemical analysis of the soil before application of the phytoremediation.
• Sowing the plants phytoaccumulators.
• Usage of agricultural and technical measures and inspection of vegetative
development (Usage of helath factors).
• Picking up and drying the plants.
• Chemical analysis of soil after finishing Phytoremediation.
• Chemical analysis of green leaves of plants.
• Determination of coefficient of concentracion CF of plants.
Gathered material is dried in shadow and draft without sun light presence. After sample
preparation content of heavy metals is determined by AAS atomic absorption
spectrophotometry.
Important factors as starting basis for successful application of the Phytoremediation are:
• Observation of the orographic and climate factors of the area.
• Correct plant selection.
• Chemical characteristics of the soil.
• Determination of pH value.
• Determination the humus content.
Identification of the area, to determinate parameters of the soil and heavy toxic metals.
Phytoremediation of lead from the soil – The parallel researches: Research (1 ) and The
Research (2). Inducted phytoextraction is understood as course of with the induction
(addition of helath factors citric acid 1%). During 2000-2001, research of inducted or
guided Phytoremediation ex situ on the soil from contaminated terrain, has been lead end
a
http://www.rec.org/sector/default.html
http://www.saneko98.com /files/project
562

heavy metals by application of the plants from sp. Brassicacea- (Brassica juncea).The
Research (2) Continual Phytoextraction is understood as course of the applied of the
automatic Phytoremediation, without induction. Researchings were led on the
contaminated soil in situ, during 2001. The Phytoaccumulation of lead and heavy metals
from the soil (without addition of helath factors). Lead and heavy metals adoption from
the soil by plant (Brassica juncea) is expressioned in mg/kg of dry matter. Results are
represented as the lead contents in the parts of examined plant (Brassica juncea), after the
Phytoremediation.

3 Results
The tables show results of Phytoremediation of lead from the contaminated soil, as the
lead contents in the parts of examined plant (Brassica juncea) and lead contend in the
plants after use of inductors of phytoextraction., lead content in the soil before and after
phytoremediation, the lead content after application of continual phytoextraction.
Research ( 1. ) - Inducted phytoextraction, is shown in Table 1.

Table 1. The lead contents in the plants

(Brassica juncea) (mg/kg), when helath
factors were used.
Plants lead method
leaf 4888,72 AAS
stalk 4303,44 AAS
root 150,46 AAS
total 9342,62 AAS

Lead adoption from the contaminated soil by tested plant (Brassica juncea),
expressioned in mg/kg, showes that (Brassica juncea) has accumulated lead in all its
parts, totally 9342,62 (mg/kg).
The lead content in the soil,after application of the Phytoremediation in one harvest
season, is reducted, compared to content before the Phytoremediation,is shown in
Table 2.

Table 2. The Parallel review for the lead in soil before

and after applied of the Inducted Phytoextraction.
Content of the lead mg/kg
Content in the soil before 972,31
Content in the soil after 105,52

The lead content in the soil is reduced for more than 9 times, the Phytoremediation
with using of induction (helath factors). Confirmation was got that high concentrations of
accumulated lead in the plant had been achieved by application the citric acid 1%. Heavy
metals and metalloids from the soil before the Phytoremediation (copper, zinc,
 563

manganese, chrome, nicle, arsenic, cadmium and mercury etc ), are shown in Tables 3
and 4.
The total content of heavy metals and metalloids including Fe, in the soil 24399,17
(mg/kg). Phytoaccumulation of lead and toxic metals from the soil in situ, during 2001.
The Research (2), Continual phytoextraction is shown in Table 5 and 6.
Total content of phytoaccomulated heavy metals, on the plants 897,77 (mg/kg)
(Brassica juncea) -mostly translocated in the green leaves.
The lead content in the soil,after application of the Phytoremediation in one harvest
season, is reducted, compared to content before the Phytoremediation, shown in Table 7.

Table 3. The content of heavy metals, in soil expressioned in (mg/kg).

metal Pb Cu Zn Cr
amount 1051,46 86,57 218,19 36,69
MAC.a 100 100 300 100

Table 4. The content of metals and metalloids, in soil expressioned in

(mg/kg).
Mn Ni As Cd Hg
458,71 41,79 20,55 1,33 6,06
- 50 25 3 2

Table 5. The lead, mercury, zinc contents in the plants (Brassica

juncea) (mg/kg), Continual Phytoextraction.
Plants lead mercury zinc method
leaf 1113,97 3,65 28,35 AAS
flower 26,19 7,35 44,35 AAS
root 7,16 3,54 25,55 AAS
stalk 7,37 4,02 25,22 AAS
total 154,69 18,56 123,47

Table 6. The chrome, manganese, iron contents in the plants (mg/kg),

Continual Phytoextraction.
Plants chrome manganese iron method
leaf 2,41 50,93 192,88 AAS
flower 2,21 18,61 127,29 AAS
root 0,99 6,29 134,31 AAS
stalk 5,77 6,43 60,09 AAS
total 11,38 82,26 514,57

Table 7. The Parallel review for the lead in soil before

and after applied of the Continual Phytoextraction.
Content of the lead mg/kg
Content in the soil before 972,31
Content in the soil after 328,69

a
Maximum permited concentrration
564

The lead content in the soil is reduced 3 times, the Phytoremediation with Continual
phytoextraction. In these way of using of the Phytoremediation for lead adoption from the
soil by plants, process haveto be repeated.
The Phytoremediation of lead from contaminated soil, is shown as the lead contents
in the disposition of the parts of examined plant (Brassica juncea), after using Inducted
Phytoextraction. The most of the lead Brassica juncea has accumulated and translocated
in the green leaves, stalk and root, see Figure 1.

10000 lead

8000

6000

4000 lead

2000

0
leaf stalk root total

Figure 1. Disposition of the adopted lead in the plant phytoaccumulator.

The lead content in the soil is reduced for more than 9 times,after application of the
inducted Phytoremediation (helath factors).The lead content in the soil, after application
of the Phytoremediation in one harvest season, is reduced, compared to content before the
Phytoremediation, see Figure 2.

1200

1000

800

600 Series1

400

200

0
before after

Figure 2. The lead content in the soil before and after of the Phytoremediation.
 565

Heavy metals from the soil before the Phytoremediation (copper, zinc, manganese,
chrome, nicle, arsenic, cadmium and mercury etc ). The lead and mercury are higher than
MAC.a , see Figure 3.

1200
1000
800
amount
600
MAC
400
200
0
Pb Cu Zn Cr Hg

Figure 3. Heavy metalls from the soil ( lead, copper, zinc, chrome, mercury).

Determinatet content of heavy metals and metaloids from the soil shows that this was
contaminated soil, by lead and mercury before the Phytoremediation. The lead content in
the soil is reduced for more than 9 times, when Phytoremediation was with induction (
helath factors), see Figure 4.

30000
25000
20000
15000 Series1
10000
5000
0
content in content in
the soil the plants

Figure 4. Reduced lead from the contaminated soil.

The lead content in the soil,after application of the Phytoremediation in one harvest
season, is reduced, compared to content before the Phytoremediation.

a
Maximum permited concentrration
566

4 Estimate and modeling from experiments

Results obtained from researchings could be used for determination of the coefficient of
plant's concentration by using the next equation.
CF – (1.) plant's concentration factor:

CL( Pb)
CF =
CZ( Pb)

C L( Pb )
-lead concentration in dry matter of biomass in plant remainders, at the and of the
Research (1.) = 9342,62 mg/kg.
C Z ( Pb )
-initial concentration of lead Research (1.) = 972,31mg/kg.
CF (1.) =9342,62 /972,31 = 9,61.
According to data from literature from Salt et.al. [9], CF plants concentration factor
for lead for (Brassica juncea) is between one and ten.
Plants the Phytoremediators could be used on different environmental bases:for
cleaning up the air, ground waters, waste waters, soil. For the decontamination was used
plant sp. Brassica juncea. Also, researchings were performed with other plants the
Phytoremediators (Brassica napus, Helianthus annus, Clamagrostis epigeios, Tussilago
farfara, Sysimbrium orientale) on contaminated terrains.
According to the results of the researchings, application of the Phytoremediat on
territory of R. of Serbia on areas new biotechnology could be recommended for further
application in practice. Researchings led to knowledge that Brassica juncea possess
ability for natural adaptation on the explored territory. In Serbia ex situ researchings of
inducted Phytoremediation, for lead from the soil, tested plant Brassica juncea has shown
excellent results.

References

1. P. Sekulic, R. Kastori and V. Hadzic, Soil protection from the degradation, Sciences
Institute for Agranomy, Novi Sad, Serbia, pp. 28-29 (2003).
2. D.C. Adriano, D.I. Chlopecka, H. Kaplan. Clijsters, and J. Vangronsveld, Soil
contamination and remediation: Philosophy, science, and technology, pp. 465-504, In
R. Prost (ed.) Contaminated Soils 3rd Int. Conf. on the Biogeochemistry Trace
Elements, Paris. (15-19 ),INRA Press, Paris (1995).
3. B.Blagojević, Đorđević A., E.Jovanović, M.Vlajković, S.Dedić, Usage of the green
plants for cleaning up the lead from the soil- Phytoremediation, Medicinal Plant
Report, Vol. 10, No 10, pp. 64- 69, Novi Sad (2003).
4. M. Vlajkovic, Fitoremediation of the soil contaminated by lead, Research 2001-
2003, Faculty of Occupational Protection , pp. 57-58, Nis, Serbia ( 2004).
 567

5. J. Đorđević - Miloradović, M. Miloradović and M. Vlajković, Phytoremediation-

new technology for cleaning up the rare elements and metals from the ash,
ELEKTRA II – ISO 14000, Tara, pp. 197-201 (2002).
6. M. Vlajković, B. Blagojević, J. Đorđević – Miloradović and D. Đarmati, Possibilities
for decontamination of the soil contaminated by toxic metals CHYMICUS II, Tara ,
pp. 148- 151 (2003).
7. J. Đorđević - Miloradović, M. Vlajković and M. Martić, Phytoremediation of the soil
contaminated by uranium: ex situ, phytoextraction of uranium by using (Brassica
Napus ), Conference for flora Souterh Eneast Srbije and relatd areas, Dimitrovgrad,
pp. 106 - 107 (2002).
8. R. Filcak, T. Schenk and R. Atkinson, Sustainability in Action: Initiatives for
Sustainable Development in the Western Balkans, pp. 69-70 (2006).
9. D.E. Salt , R.D. Smith and I. Raskin, Phytoremediation, Annu Rev. Plant Physiol.
Plant Mol., pp. 643-668 (1998).
 DETERMINATION OF LUBRICANT OIL QUALITY IN VEHICLES
USING NEURAL NETWORK FOR ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES∗

SITI NORUL HUDA SHEIKH ABDULLAH, KHAIRUDDIN OMAR, MOHAMMAD SYARIF

AFRIANSYAH, LEE CHIN SIN, NORSALINA HARUN, KAMSURIAH AHMAD, MOHD
ZAKREE AHMAD NAZRI, MOHAMAD FAIDZUL NASRUDIN,
ABDUL SAHLI FAKHRUDIN†
Faculty of Information Science and Technology,
Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, 43600 UKM Bangi
Selangor, Malaysia

SITI ROZAIMAH SHEIKH ABDULLAH, CHE HASSAN CHE HARON

Faculty of Engineering, Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, 43600 UKM Bangi
Selangor, Malaysia

MOHD ESA BARUJI

National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health, 43650 Bandar Baru Bangi
Selangor, Malaysia

Lubricant oil consisting of petroleum, mineral and synthetic based will change its characteristics
based on temperature and pH value that gradually downgrades its quality. For those reasons,
maintaining lubricant viscosity can guarantee maximum ability in machine functions particularly in
reducing friction, protecting as well as cleaning the engines. Currently, measuring vehicle’s mileage
and duration or either one does maintain lubricant viscosity. Unfortunately, these judgments are
inaccurate because there are many other factors like pressure, shear stress, humidity and
conductivity that may affect viscosity quality. In addition, improper treatment of used lubricant oil
will greatly pollute the environment. This paper proposed one theory of determining viscosity
quality with Neural Network (NN) modeling by introducing temperature, shear stress and pressure
effects. One deterministic objective will be highlighted that is to develop NN modeling based on
those three factors. NN modeling, an off-line system is explicitly designed with Backpropagation
Algorithm and Multilayer Feedforward Network for learning process while its weight is calculated
based on Nguyen Widrow number and Genetic Algorithm. There are 310 sample data, which
divided into two sets; 149 data for training while 161 data for testing. The application performance
has achieved up to 85.91% approaching real viscosity value. This research, as guidance for future
research, aims to produce a user-friendly hardware for academic purposes and fulfill the needs of
community. Finally, vehicle users will get real-time information from lubricant consumed for their
vehicle.

1 Introduction
Lubricant oils are used in vehicles is particularly for reducing frictions and wears, and
protecting as well as cleaning the engines. This research was conducted on a vehicle
∗
This work is supported by Ministry of Science, Technology and Innovation, Malaysia.
†
Work fully supported under RMK8 04-0202-0012-EA012 grant of the Intensified
Research in Priority Areas (IRPA).

568
 569

lubricant to investigate the effects it has on vehicle engines. A way of preventing the
breakdown of an engine due to vehicle lubricant problems is to use a suitable lubricant
that suits the engine requirements. This research† is an effort to study the vehicle
lubricant and to further improves its quality by using a data identification method that can
recognize the viscosity value of the lubricant and the substances it contains.

2 Research Background

2.1. Lubricant Oil

A lubricant is a blend of base oils and performance-enhancing additives as required by
engines, gear box and other application areas. At the refinery plants, the crude oil is
refined into gasoline, diesel, kerosene, LPG, naphtha and base stocks (Lube). This base
stock is further processed, blended and strengthened with required properties to make
different kind of lubricants [1]. The main purpose of lubricants is to lubricate moving
parts of the vehicle to reduce friction, wear and tear by providing smoothing, and trouble
free performance for increased length of time.
Currently, there is yet any equipment, which is capable to detect the quality of
lubricant oil using NN especially in car engine. Lubricant oil should always be replaced at
the intervals recommended by the maintenance manual as described by a manufacturer.
These days the drain life of an engine oil is anywhere between 5000 to 15000 km (or even
more) or six months to one year, whichever is first. In this paper, attention will be given
on developing a sensor which is capable to detect the quality of lubricant oil based on the
data given by user such as specification of oil, manufacturer, and periods of usages, by
transferring all these data into computer and generate the result for the quality of lubricant
oil [2].

2.2. Oil Specification

For satisfactory lubrication of the engine, the oil should possess some functional
properties of which viscosity of oil is one of the most important properties, as it brings out
the oil’s capacity to lubricate. Viscosity is the measure of oil’s resistance to flow. The oil
viscosity is identified by its SAE’s (Society for Automotive Engineer’s) number. The
thinner the oil, the lower its number, e.g. SAE 10 [1]. The numerical relates to viscosity at
particular temperature and the alphabet ‘W’, indicates the oil’s suitability for colder
temperature. With the viscosity index improves, the viscosity increases at higher
temperature and at lower temperature it does not increase significantly, thus achieving
optimum viscosity at lower and higher temperature. Such oils are called multi-grade oils,
for instance ‘20 W40’ shows thinness at low temperature and thickness at higher
temperature. However, there is other service classification of oil apart from viscosity,
developed by API- (American Petroleum Institute), which indicates service
characteristics. It is graded on a scale from SA (the lowest) to SL (the highest) [3].
570

2.3. Environmental Issues

The development of this user-friendly detector in contributing for optimization of
lubricant oil used was indicated by a signal generated from computer. Significantly, this
will optimize consumption of lubricant oil in vehicles and industrial machinery, save the
cost of purchasing lubricant oil, lengthen the life span of lubricant oil reduce the
operational cost of lubricant oil waste treatment, generate reusability of lubricant oil and
hence, it is expected to reduce pollution caused by lubricant oil, and accomplished a clean
and non-polluted environment.

3 Objectives
This research paper has two main objectives: First, is to propose a new car engine design
with real-time viscosity data and secondly is to clarify results of NN in conjunction to
three inputs of temperature, shear stress and pressure.

4 Methodologies

4.1. Proposed design of car engine

In order to gather the real-time viscosity data, this research was subjected to install a
viscometer and a conductivity sensor to detect the viscosity and conductivity of lubricant
oil on-line in car. Additional part of retrieved lubricant oil from car on the engine was
built to connect the oil sample from engine to the viscometer. Collection of oil samples
from engine was important, since obtaining a representative sample is one of the most
prominent parts on scheduled oil analysis program. If a sample does not represent the true
condition of the lubricant and component at the time of sampling, the reliability of both
test results and its interpretation will be affected. The following points in Figure 1
indicate the location of detector to be installed.

Figure 1. Proposed points retrieving sampling oil.

 571

The connection from viscometer to computer involved an analog to digital converter.

This converter will transfer the analog signal generate by viscometer and convert it into
the digital form to be read by a computer. The 4-20 mA output is capable to generate the
current which direct proportional to both parameters previously stated. These current
represented the true condition of oil being detected. The transform of current into digital
signal to be recognized by computer requires an interface of analog to digital converter.
Figure 2 illustrates the connection of sensor to computer [4].

4-20mA
Sensor Interface point
and wiring RS232 cable
and interface
bus

A/D Converter

Figure 2. Connection Sensor to computer.

4.2. NN Methodologies
From the research background, it was concluded that the input data for the system consist
of the parameters that can influence the lubricant quality, namely pressure, temperature
and shear stress, while the output data produced by the system is the lubricant viscosity
value. The outcome of the information gathered from literature reviews can be seen from
the pre-processing section in Figure 3, which shows how the factors affecting the
lubricant quality are arranged into a set of data starting from a lubricant condition data.
Furthermore, previous observations and analysis performed on lubricants have yielded
some correlations that can relate the input data with the output data.
The set of data found must be normalised to get a continuous range of viscosity
values so that each can be classified according to its own viscosity value. Normalization
of data is performed in this section using log values of the obtained viscosities [5].

5 NN Mathematical Model and Algorithms

Mui et al. [6] presents two important characteristics in NN: learning and generalization.
Learning process associates with network architecture that will change the connection
structure between units and signal strength in the connection structure. Generalization
correlates insensitive system feedback with many kinds of input. One of the NN
paradigms is known as Multi-Layer Feed Forward (MFF). MFF architecture is an
572

extension from the single layer perceptron by Rosenblatt [17] in mid 1950’s. Hagan et al.
[7] proposes a multi-input processing model as depicted in Figure 3.

Figure 3. NN Multi-input processing.

Every input, x1, x2,…, xn with weight w1,1, w1,2, …, w1,n from weight matrix w. This
neuron has bias b that will be accumulated with clean input to produce total neuron input
value:
n
Total Neuron Input = ∑ w1,i xi + b (1)
i =1

Total neuron input value is used in the activation function f, and produces one scaled
output neuron a which can be represented by:
n
a = f (∑ w1,i xi + b) (2)
i =1

An output value depends on the activation function used. Basically there are two
types of activation functions: linear and non-linear. Activation function, which is suitable
with the type of problem solving and desired output range, shall be applied onto the
network. According to Khairuddin [8], there are usually three kinds of activation function:
Binary sigmoid, Bi-polar sigmoid, and Hiperbolic tangent.

5.1. MFF Network

As explained above, MFF is an extension of single layer perceptron [9]. MFF is popularly
associated with backpropagation as a learning algorithm and with sigmoid function as an
activation function. The architecture of MFF could be arranged according to layers and
stated as below:
IxHxO (3)
where are: I - numbers of node at input layer, H - numbers of node at hidden layer and O -
numbers of node at output layer.
 573

5.2. Backpropagation (BP) Training

BP is a downward slope method used to train weights in MFF for supervised learning. It
is also known as generalized delta rules [10]. BP is a frequently used method in NN
application. According to McCluskey [11], BP is the most popular algorithm and has
been applied extensively.

5.3. Weight Control

Different initial weight is needed in delta generalization. According to Rumelhart et al.
[12], if all weights are initialized with the same value, and if the solution needs weights
that are developed with different values, the system will not learn. An effect from random
weight control is a fast slope search because generated weight set is better than the other
set. However, according to Refenes et al. [13], this situation will not give any great
impact to the most optimum slope search.
Hence, this research had tested on a variety of weight control methods because this
will give more speed to the system application. Three weight control methods were used:
Random (R), Nguyen-Widrow (N-W) and Genetic Algorithm (GA). However, this paper
will only concentrate on NW and GA Control.

5.3.1. NW Weight Control

This method could be used to initialize the weight value and the bias. It is said that it
could focus faster than the common random weight control [4]. In this method, there will
be minor adjustments to the error propagation that is based on geometrical analysis. This
is performed to monitor feedbacks between neurons at hidden layer starting with one
input and it will then be expanded to several input units.
Weights for layers between hidden unit and input unit are initialized with values in
the range of –0.5 to 0.5, while weights for layers between hidden unit and output unit are
modified so that they can enhance the capability of the learning process. Below are the
variables and function used:

β = 0.7( p )
1
n (4)

with: n - numbers of input unit, p - numbers of hidden layer, and β - scale factor.

5.3.2. GA Weight Control

According to Tsoi and Anderson [15], the GA method based on DNA forming process
where a member of one binary series set competes to get a place in a new series set.
Reunion can be accomplished by choosing two successful members in the population to
be the parent generation. The new series, which is invented by splicing each main gene,
will be produced to replace the old set and any unused set will be eliminated. There are
four basic DNA forming processes:
1. Initialization - gives initial value to all individuals in the population.
574

2. Evaluation - counts fitness survival value of every individual in the population.

3. Selection - selecting new individuals with the highest fitness value.
4. Reproduction - chosen individual at the selection process will structure a new
generation by using three forming techniques: cloning, crossover and mutation.
Therefore, GA also applied those four basic DNA forming processes for controlling
weights. Below is a portion of GA algorithm that has been applied.

5.3.2.1. Weight Control at GA

An individual for this method consists of a set of weights known as a weight vector (WV).
WV contains all the information needed to define a neuron, which consists of one or more
inputs to the neuron and its threshold. A neuron with I input is defined to gain (I+1)
weights. (I+1) weights will be set with a random value. This means the weight value is
random and is set at a certain range. The range chosen in this research is –0.5 to 0.5
according to Fausett’s [14] suggestion. Subsequently, a population with N members in
WV will be formed. The number of members in a population is a parameter from GA and
it could be set according to the network size (Figure 4).

v1 v2 v3 v4 ............. vi-1 vi
1 0.4568 0.3886 -0.4002 -0.1001 ............. 0.4563 0.2345
2 0.0008 -0.4928 -0.2110 0.2481 ............. 0.0023 -0.2411
Population members

3 -0.3218 0.1141 0.4565 -0.0086 ............. 0.3711 0.2342

......
......

0.3300 0.0045 0.1114 0.2168 0.1121 -0.2132

N

Figure 4. Weight vector population members.

Every weight is stored with fixed-point real number. Mathematically, WV could be

represented as:

 I 
y = f  ∑ wi xi  (5)
 i =0 
with: y - output for neuron, I - numbers of input, xi - input value for neuron (i=1,2,…, I),
wi - synaptic weights connecting input xi with neuron (i=1,2,…, I), and f(.) - non-linear
function.
A non-linear f(α) is chosen:
0 → if α < 0 (6)
f (α ) = 
1 → if α ≥ 0
 575

Generally, this process has the same process definition to one neuron on MFF.
However the importance of choosing non-linear functions is that this function will help
the application of GA in the network [15].

5.3.2.2. Evaluation on GA
Fitness evaluation is the most crucial process in GA [16] compared to other processes.
Fitness evaluation (Eq. (7)) is accomplished after counting the output size of each neuron
at the first hidden layer by using every pair of weight in a population. The purpose of this
process is to monitor a member’s fitness or capability in a population to classify output
compared to other population members.
Fitness function used:
T
Fitness = ∑ α i (7)
i =1

where: α =  0 if VP wrongly classify i training vector ,

 Bias (n i ) if VP correctly classify i training vector
i

and T - sum of vector in training set, and ni - sum of WV that classify training vector
precisely.
Bias (ni) is a monotonic reduction function for ni>0. Generally, it could be selected
by using this equation:
1 (8)
Bias (ni ) =
(ni ) β

with: β - numbers of non-negative integers.

A neuron will classify a training vector correctly when it matches the real output at
the training vector and the bias Eq. (8) gives effective classification to the output. Fitness
evaluation process for each N individual in weight population is applied continuously to
every pair of training data until the sum fitness value is obtained. Only individual with the
best fitness value will survive such as 1.83 and the rest are left unused such as 0.83, 0,
0.33 (Figure 5).

1 2 3 N Correct action
Pattern pair

1 0.5 0 0.5 .......... 0 2

sets

2 0 0 1 .......... 0 1

T 0.33 0 0.33 0.33 3

Correct action 2 0 3 .......... 1

Fitness 0.83 0 1.83 0.33 0.1121

Figure 5. Fitness Evaluation for each population members.

576

5.3.2.3. Selection in GA
Selection process is based on fitness of each member in the population. Membership with
high fitness value will have a higher probability of survival than the other members.
Membership probability in a population can be determined by using this function:
ri (9)
Membership Probability VPi =
N ( N + 1)

where are: VPi - weight vector to I from current population, N - sum of population, and ri
- member’s position in a population.
None of the two members in a population should have the same position. Conversely,
if two populations are discovered to have the same fitness value, random selection will be
carried out to get a membership with the higher position.

5.3.2.4. Reproduction in GA
In reproduction, there are three forming techniques to shape the new generations: cloning,
crossing and mutation [15], [16], [17]. While selection between these techniques is being
performed by calculating the probability for each technique desired. Though, according to
De et al. [18], mutation could slow down the focusing process as it changes the most
important byte at an individual.
Crossing and mutation will change an individual fitness value for the generation that
will be formed. Yet, mutation does not have a big probability in a population [15] until
attention is paid to cloning.
In the application that is being developed, crossing is accomplished by byte crossing
between two individuals. A pair of parent individual will produce two members of a new
generation, a male and female offspring (Figure 6).

v1 v2 v3 v4
Chromosome X Y
Father 0.4568 0.3886 -0.4002 -0.1001

Chromosome X Y
Mother 0.0008 -0.4928 -0.2110 0.2481

Daughter 0.0008 -0.4928 0.4568 0.3886

Son -0.2110 0.2481 -0.4002 -0.1001

Figure 6. Crossing Process.

Crossing the fathers’ chromosomes will determine whether the new generation will
produce male or female offspring.
 577

5.4. Application Data Structure for Data Pre-processing using Along Channel
Normalization with or without Logarithm
According to Anastasakis and Mort [19], in a preprocessing part, input vector
normalization is very important. Meanwhile Robinson [20] said that normalization is
significant especially when variables have different range or the value does not give any
influence to output. Azoff [21] suggested many kinds of normalization such as: along,
across, mixed, and external channel. In this research Along Channel normalization was
applied because it allows only one normalized input without influencing another input.
Below is normalization algorithm that had adapted before NN model was applied.

5.5. Network Architecture

According to Tsoi and Anderson [21], the network architecture can be adjusted to attain a
reasonable architectural form especially to choose the total nodes at a hidden layer. There
are two ways of how the total nodes at hidden layer can be applied: Firstly, if it is
appropriate or enough for the network, a small number of nodes is started or else, the
node number is increased. Secondly, start with a large number of nodes with assurance
that they focus or diverge. Clipping or pruning any unimportant hidden nodes
accomplishes this method.
Based on the explanation above, several network scheme forms will be selected and
used in the testing. Scheme 3-3-1 means the network architecture is in the form of 3 input
units, one hidden layer with 3 neurons and 1 output unit. Forms selected are (Table 1).

Table 1. Selected network scheme

Number of schemes Scheme
1 3-3-1
2 3-5-1
3 3-7-1

Testing was accomplished by using a 3, 5 and 7-neuron unit hidden layer at a 10000-
epoch iteration. At G control, a population with 20 and 40 individual was applied. Least
error value for the NW method was found at the 10000th iteration while 291, 395 and 491
second where needed for 3 learning scheme respectively. Meanwhile, the GA method
with 20 population (GA20) members needs 306, 410 and 514 seconds for each learning
scheme respectively and the minimum error was detected at iteration 626, 5514 and 89
while when population members increased to 40 individuals (GA40), learning time was
raised to 319, 425 and 533 seconds respectively. However, its (GA40) minimum error
given had decreased from 1.5865 to 0.3620 (Table 2). From these results, the scheme 3-
network learning showed that NW weight control method produced reasonable results.
However the results were not enough to choose scheme 3 because the third learning
performance declined, compared to the other two learning scheme. Neuron increment was
not needed because it did not increase the network performance. The chosen architecture
in testing was scheme 1 and scheme 3.
578

Table 2. Performance Comparison for 3 Kinds of Control at Scheme 1, 2, and 3

Learning.

Least Error Run

Scheme Control type time
Error Value No of epoch (sec)
NW 0.30859499449758 10000 291
1 GA (G20) 1.51475829851637 626 306
GA (G40) 1.58653829233683 1443 319
NW 0.308580680820816 9096 395
2 GA (G20) 1.90694704657125 5514 410
GA (G40) 0.81481255966569 6406 425
NW 0.297888632273415 7013 491
3 GA (G20) 1.49286989158451 89 514
GA (G40) 0.362062821688018 131 533

6 Data Testing
As mentioned earlier, sample data used in the testing was divided into two parts. The first
part contained 149 data and the second part contained 161 data. For the first test, the first
part of the sample was used as the learning data and the second part as the testing data. At
second testing, this condition was reversed (vice versa).

6.1. Test Performance Calculation

Test performance was based on the difference in the value between the application output
and the real output. This error was compared to the real output until the percentage was
gained. Error value (EV) must be calculated as logarithmic value because the output
given by the application was a logarithmic value (Table 3 and 4). EPV desired was
divided into two parts, EPV < = 5% and EPV < = 10%. EPV with smaller value or equal
error value gives the right result (Table 3 and 4).

6.2. First and Second Sample Data Testing

Testing was carried out by using the first part of sample data (i.e. for 161 learning data
and 149 testing data). Scheme 1 , 2 and scheme 3 were used as the network architecture.
Learning rate and momentum used in the network is 0.2 and 1.0 respectively.
The best error value for testing by using the first sample data was given by Scheme 3
(3-7-1) with the NW weight control. Overall output in this testing produced satisfying
result because average EPV given was below 10% (Table 3). The best EPV for the
second sample data test was given by Scheme 3 (3-7-1) with the NW weight control. This
test produced an EPV value above 10%, which was inadequate (Table 3) because the data
pattern was too hard for the application to be identified the output logarithmic value.
The best test result using the first sample data was found at Scheme 3 (3-7-1) with
the R weight control (Table 3). In this test, 69.57% generalization produced a value close
 579

to the value of the real viscosity. The GA control did not produce good generalization
result because fewer individuals in the population were obtained. However, when the
numbers of individuals were increased, the network required more than 10% from the
overall time (Table 4).

Table 3. Output Error Percent Value (EPV) Compared to Real Output.

App. EPV
Actual
output EPV
EV output
(Log) (%)
(Log) <= 5% <= 10 %

1 0.31846 6.43965 6.75811 4.7 correct correct

2 0.27501 6.18207 6.45708 4.3 correct correct

3 0.27546 7.07961 7.35507 3.7 correct correct

4 0.27894 6.77510 7.05404 4.0 correct correct

5 0.23781 7.65689 7.89470 3.0 correct correct

6 0.25796 7.33571 7.59367 3.4 correct correct

7 0.24801 8.14169 8.38970 3.0 correct correct

8 0.25580 7.83287 8.08867 3.2 correct correct

9 0.27633 4.52529 4.24896 6.5 incorrect correct

10 0.53102 4.47895 3.94793 13.5 incorrect incorrect

Table 4. NN Performance and Average EPV with First and Second Sample Data
Sample
Weight
data NN Performance (%) EPV Average (%)
Control
Type
Scheme 1 Scheme 2 Scheme 3 Scheme 1 Scheme 2 Scheme 3
First NW 69.57 68.32 69.57 8.02 8.60 8.00
G (20) 37.27 27.33 40.99 18.00 23.30 17.70
G (40) 31.68 53.42 67.08 22.40 10.90 8.90
Second NW 74.50 83.89 85.91 16.9 15.1 15.2
G (20) 33.56 76.51 75.17 27.2 16.1 16.7
G (40) 32.89 50.34 36.24 29.6 20.0 31.9

7 Conclusion
Based on literature reviews, there is yet any research that uses NN capability on lubricant
condition monitoring. Nowadays, a lubricant condition monitoring system is required
because it can reduce costs (early lubricant replacement), protect engines from damages
(overdue oil replacement), and avoids hazard such as engine suddenly stops due to
enlarging pistons that may be caused by the lubricant. Discussions on the research
background, objectives, methodology and NN application are also mentioned in this
paper. The application of NN with scheme 3-7-1 gave the best results of 85.91% accuracy
in predicting the lubricant quality based on input data of temperature, pressure and sheer
stress.
580

From the results in the implementation and testing, it is known that the most suitable
NN characteristics in lubricant condition monitoring is Scheme 3 (3-7-1), because it
produced the best performance either using the first or second sample data. However, it is
also justified that from the test that data used was difficult to recognize by BP. But, when
the output is not changed into a logarithmic value, normalization will not succeed because
the range found at viscosity was too big (0 to 109). Along channel cannot normalize this
range. Until then, modifying the output into a logarithmic value was the best decision.
Increasing the number of learning data can increase the network performance. This
can be seen in the comparison between the second test result (161 pairs) and the first test
(149 pairs). The second test performance leads with 16% more than the first test, even
though it only has 12 pairs of additional data in its learning data.

References

1. J.W. George, Lubrication Fundamentals. New York, Marcel Dekker (1980).

2. Castrol. Oil Lifecyle. On line http://www.castrol.com/castrol/life_Print.html. 8
January 2002 (2001).
3. O. Khairuddin, Pembangunan Alat Pengesan Kualiti Minyak Pelincir, Faculty of
Technology and Information Sciences, Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia (2002).
4. M.D. Seyer, RS 232 Made Easy Connecting Computer, Printer, Terminal and
Modem. Prentice Hall (1984).
5. M.A. Syarif. Penentuan Kualiti Minyak Hitam Pada Kenderaan Bermotor
Menggunakan Rangkaian Neural Perambatan Balik. Masters Thesis. Universiti
Kebangsaan Malaysia (2002).
6. L. Mui, A. Agrarwal, A. Gupta and P.S.P. Wang, An Adaptive Modular Neural
Network with Application to Unconstrained Character Recognition. In Document
Image Analysis, H. Bunke, P.S.P. Wang & H.S. Baird, World Scientific, 1189-1203
(1994).
7. M.T. Hagan, H.B. Demuth and M. Beale, Neural Network Design. Boston: PWA
Publishing Company (1996).
8. O. Khairuddin, Rangkaian Neural Rambatan Kehadapan Multi-Aras: Isu-isu Dalam
Pengelas Perambat Balik. Technical Report of Faculty of Technology and
Information Sciences/September 1999/LT81. Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.
(1999).
9. F. Rossenblatt, The Perceptron: A Probabilistic Model for Information Storage and
Organization in the Brain. Psychological Review. 65, 386-408 (1958).
10. D.W. Ruck, S.K. Rogers, M. Kabrisky, P.S. Maybeck and M.E. Oxley,
Comparatives Analysis of Backpropagation & Extended Kalman Filter for Training
Multilayer Perceptrons. IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine
Intelligence. 9(6), 686-691 (1992).
11. P.C. McCluskey, Feedforward and Recurrent Neural Networks and Genetic
Programs for Stock Market and Time Series Forecasting. Masters Thesis, Brown
University (1993).
 581

12. D.E. Rumelhart, J. L. McClelland and PDP Research Group. Parallel Distributed
Processing. MIT Press. 1(8), (1986).
13. A.N. Refenes, A.D. Zapranis and Y. Bentz, Modelling Stock Returns With Neural
Network. Proceedings of 1995 Conference on Computational Intelligence for
Financial Engineering (CIFEr), 39-50 (1994).
14. L. Fausett, Fundamental of Neural Networks: Architechtures, Algortihms, &
Applications. New Jersey: Prentice Hall (1994).
15. A.C. Tsoi and H. C. A. Andersen, Constructive Algortihm for the Training of a
Multilayer Perceptron Based on the Genetic Algortihm. Department of Electrical
Engineering, University of Quensland (1994).
16. O. Khairuddin, M. Ramlan and S. Md. Nasir, Rangkaian Neural Genetik Aplikasi
dalam Pengecaman Aksara Jawi. Neural Network Genetic Application in
recognizing Jawi characters, Pertanika J. Sci. & Technol. 8(2), 241-252 (1996).
17. D. Rogers, Whether Prediction Using A Genetic Memory. Neural Networks:
Concepts, Applications, and Implementations. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. 4, 275-
289 (1994).
18. S. De, A. Ghosh, and S.K. Pal, Fitness Evaluation in Genetic Algorithms with
Ancestors’ Influence. S.K. Pal and P.P. Wang, (eds.). Genetic Algortihms for
Pattern Recoignition, Boca Raton, Florida: CRC Press (1996).
19. L. Anastasakis, and N. Mort, Neural Network-Based Prediction of The USD/GBP
Exchange Rate: The Utilisation of Data Compression Techniques for Input
Dimension Reduction, Dept. of Automatic Control & Systems Engineering,
University of Sheffield, 4 (2002).
20. C. Robinson, Multi-Objective Optimisation of polynomial Models for Time Series
Prediction Using Algorithms and Neural Networks, Dept. of Automatic Control &
Systems Engineering, University of Sheffield, (1998).
21. E.M. Azoff, Neural Network Time Series Forecasting of Financial Markets Wiley
Finance. Chichester: John Wiley & Sons (1994).
 AIR QUALITY CONTROL IN BOR

VIŠA TASIû∗
Department for Industrial informatics, Copper Institute, Zeleni bulevar 35
Bor, 19210, Serbia

'5$*$150,/,92-(9,û

Department for Industrial informatics, Copper Institute, Zeleni bulevar 35

Bor, 19210, Serbia

NOVICA MILOâ(9,û
Department for Chemical Control, Copper Institute, Zeleni bulevar 35
Bor, 19210, Serbia

This paper briefly describes renewed part of the system for air quality monitoring in Bor. Some
specific details of hardware and software installation where specially noted. Second part of paper
shows gathered experiences during system usage, with presentation of different types of reports for
public.

1 Introduction
Bor is industrial town situated at southeast of Republic of Serbia. Town area, with
population of more than 50000 inhabitants, is in constant influence of air pollution as a
consequence of technological processes in Copper Smelting Plant. In Copper Institute,
Department for Chemical and Technical Control, more than 20 years exists section for
measuring of meteo parameters and air quality control. Most of the systems for air quality
monitoring in Western European countries work on real time bases. Present state of air
quality control in almost all industrial centres in SCG based on taking samples one or few
times per day, which means that there is no information about time distribution of
polluted materials intensity during day. That is the main failure of such control, having in
mind often changes of meteo conditions. To prevent air pollution we have to provide real
time monitoring of all polluted materials at proper locations by using distributed
monitoring system on real time bases. For the aim of better measuring efficiency,
engineers from Copper Institute, Department for Industrial Informatics, developed,
produced and put into operation automatic measuring station [1]. That station has been
working 24 hours per day since 1997. On the bases of positive experience in work with
automatic station we have unsuccessfully tried to enlarge and expand air quality
monitoring system. We insisted on system enlargement with equipment for waste gas

∗
9LãD7DVLü&RSSHU,QVWLWXWH=HOHQLEXOHYDU%RU6UELMDWHO

582
 583

concentration monitoring (first of all for SO2). For that purpose all required projects were
created [2]. Finally, by UNEP (United Nations Environment Protection) donation, two
fixed stations for SO2 monitoring (Environnement SA), mobile station for dust
concentration monitoring (PM10), and dust sampler for heavy metal concentration
analyses have arrived in Bor during summer 2003.

2 Choosing locations for fixed stations

One the bases of meteorological data which has been collected for more then 20 years
proper locations for taking samples was established. Those locations are chosen after air
pollution imission modelling [3]. The most important parameters that have to be taken in
account for air pollution imission modelling are of course: wind speed, wind direction,
pressure, temperature gradient and topography. Table 1 shows average values of
temperature, humidity and pressure in Bor town area. Table 2 shows average values of
wind appearance and wind speed. Figure 1 shows wind rose created from data given in
Table 2.

Table 1. Average values of temperature, humidity and pressure in Bor (1984- 2004).
Month/
I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII
parameter
t0 C -0.7 1.8 6.5 11.4 16.2 19.2 22.2 22.6 16.4 11.4 4.6 0.8
Humidity
82 74 68 67 67 63 62 57 70 78 85 77
%
P
974 971 971 969 969 972 970 972 969 977 974 974
mbar

Table 2. Average values of wind appearance and wind speed in Bor (1984- 2004).
N NNE NE ENE E ESE SE SSE
% 1.0 0.4 0.4 4.6 4.2 0.7 0.3 0.2
m/s 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.6 1.6 0.8 0.9 1.0

S SSW SW WSW W WNW NW NNW

% 2.7 0.6 0.3 0.7 4.8 6.8 9.8 1.3
m/s 1.5 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.8 2.3 2.4 1.8

One fixed station for SO2 concentration monitoring was situated in Town Park, other
at Jugopetrol warehouse (see Figure 2). The station in Town Park is equipped with meteo
sensors. Meteorological parameters are also measured at Copper Institute by automatic
fixed station. Figure 1 also shows suitable locations for mobile station. Measuring
concentrations of flying particles (dust monitoring), at those locations, happens
occasionally, which depends on wind direction and other meteo conditions.
584

Figure 1. Wind rose (based on data from Table 2).

Figure 2. Locations for taking samples and placing measuring stations.

3 Fixed stations
Measuring stations for SO2 monitoring are microprocessor-controlled devices with local
displays and function keyboards. Every station has auto calibration function, and
possibility for local or remote user define adjustment of measuring parameters, average,
and storage intervals, as well as diagnostic and auto calibration. As communication
interface each station has RS 232 ports. Stations are situated in proper air-conditioned
container, equipped with unbreakable power supply (UPS).
Classical switched telephone lines are used for communications between fixed
stations for SO2 monitoring and PC (which is situated at control centre in Copper
Institute). There is one asynchronous modem per each station. On the PC in control
centre (Windows XP) has been installed program Contact for interactive work with fixed
 585

stations. By the aid of this program, after establishing connection, one may attach and use
all set of function on remote place like it does locally. On the same PC has been installed
program WinLoad for data transfer of measuring results from fixed stations. Measuring
results being stored in text files (one file per station). The Copper Institute’s fixed
automatic meteo/eco station is also a part of new monitoring system. As we noted this
station has own PC in control centre since 1997. Now it’s connected in local area network
(LAN) with PC for SO2 monitoring. Figure 3 shows new configuration of real time air
quality monitoring system.

Figure 3. New configuration of air quality monitoring system.

4 Mobile station
Mobile station (made by Turnkey Instruments Ltd.) are able for continuous, simultaneous,
on site measurement of TSP, PM10 and PM 1. Downloading results from mobile stations
to PC is controlled by program AirQ32. That program, beside data transfer options,
provides other useful tools for graphical presentations, exporting data and creating
reports. In case of no AC power source on site, station has own DC battery for several
hours’ continuous work.

5 Way of operation
Data transfer from fixed stations to PC occurs periodically, fully programmed and
controlled by PC. Mobile station uses (periodically) direct connection with PC for data
downloading. For the real time monitoring of air quality some special tasks were created
(for data transferring, extracting and importing into Excel worksheets) which runs on
every xx minutes. Graphic data presentation occurs with control of Visual Basic modules
in Excel, so new data values appears in worksheets, and charts on every xx minutes.
586

Figure 4 shows one example of chart with SO2 concentration provide by monitoring
system.

6 Presentation of measuring results

On the bases of long-term experiences in air quality control, and often consultations with
UNEP experts, the way of operation, forms and contents of reports were established. It
was agreed that average values from fixed stations has to be transferred to PC (situated at
control centre in Copper Institute) on every 15 minutes. Copper Institute monitoring team,
besides of creating appropriate program solutions, has an obligation to define, organize
and maximally simplify all system operating procedures. Real time air monitoring
program on PC include data comparison with limit values, visual and sound alarms.

Figure 4. An example of chart with SO2 concentrations provide by monitoring system.

As well as, almost all procedures for off-line reporting (weekly, monthly, quarterly or
annually) were completely automated. Those reports are for public use by the means of
local media (TV, radio or news boards). Weekly and monthly reports consists of tables
with statistical presentations of air quality on each measure point, ‘rose of winds’ for time
interval of concern, as well as graphic comparison of production of SO2 in RTB Bor
plants, and concentrations of those gas at measure points in town (Figures 5, 6).

7 Conclusion
In the process of installation, testing and system calibration there was a lot of troubles.
Quite unexpected, organization problems was much stronger than technical. After few
months of experimental work, monitoring system was put into operation. Until this days
system has shown good stability and repeatability. Comparisons of system results (Table
3) with others obtained by classical methods shows good agreement.
 587

Figure 5. Part of monthly report with graphic presentations of production and measured values of SO2 in town.

Figure 6. Part of monthly report with graphic presentations of flying particles (PM10).

Table 3. Part of monthly report with tabular presentation of heavy metal concentrations.
Measuring Pb Cu Ni As Cd Hg
Point µg/m3 µg/m3 ng/m3 ng/m3 µg/m3 µg/m3
Jugopetrol
0,25 1,6 47,1 159 0,006 0,007
30.01-17.02.04.
NGC
0,09 2,4 0 51,6 0,005 0,04
19.02-25.02.04.
Institut
0,07 1,1 0 53,5 0,001 0,04
26.02-29.02.04.
Limit
1 - 2,5 2,5 0,010 1
(GVI)
588

References

1. V. 7DVLü ' 0LOLYRMHYLü and N. 0LORãHYLü $XWRPDWLF 0HDVXULQJ 6WDWLRQ Annual

Journal of Copper Institute for 1997 No. XII. pp. 187-191 (1997).
2. Group of authors, Main Project of Computer System for Air Pollution Monitoring in
Bor Town Area, Copper Institute Bor, Serbia, July 2002 (2002).
3. D. 0LOLYRMHYLü 9 7DVLü 0 5DGRMNRYLü * -RMLü-%ODJRMHYLü and S. /DORYLü
Computer Network for Real Time Monitoring of Meteorological and Ecologic
Parameters, Proceedings of Conference YUINFO′98, Kopaonik, March, 23-27, 1998,
pp. 712-714 (1998).
 AUTHOR INDEX

Abdullah, S. N. H. S. 568 Evans, R. L. 105

Abdullah, S. R. S. 568 Fakhrudin, A. S. 568
Abe, F. 93 Fernandes, C. M. 175
Afgan, N. H. 3 Floris, F. 393
Afriansyah, M. S. 568 Gallagher, C. 115
Ahmad, K. 568 Gereš, D. 331
Al Juwayhel, F. 351 Gollagher, M. 438
Albiac, J. 247 Gupta, S. K. 322
Alves, L. M. 79 Haddad, B. M. 270
Andročec, I. 463 Haron, C. H. C. 568
AsghariPour, M. 55 Harun, N. 568
Ban, M. 508 Hazi, I. 393
Barbir, F. 143 Horváth, L. 393
Baruji, M. E. 568 Imanishi, H. 133
Bekteshi, S. 16 Isabelle, B. 429
Benra, F.-K. 407 Ishida, H. 536
Biondić, B. 296 Jamnejad, G. 115
Biondić, R. 296 Jolliet, O. 429
Blagojevic, B. 558 Josipović, J. 124
Blarke, M. B. 69 Jovanović, M. 486
Blinc, R. 16 Kabashi, S. 16
Bruno, G. 282 Kamal, H. 351
Burgos, A. C. 450 Kanayama, K. 93, 133
Cardona, E. 221 Kasai, A. 536
Cardona, F. 221 Kikuchi, R. 536
Carneiro, S. 33 Kocheki, A. 55
Carvalho, M. G. 3 Lacković, V. 186
Centner, T. 478 Lund, H. 69
Chinese, D. 206 Luttenberger, L. R. 45
Cunha, J. S. 79 Maiolo, M. 282
Ćurković, A. 463 Mammanaa, A. P. 233
Cvetković, S. 518 Marcelo, D. 155
da Graça Carvalho, M. 79 Marinova, D. 22, 438
Damien, F. 429 Martirano, G. 282
Dănăcică, D.-E. 548 Matsukura, Y. 536
Darwish, M. A. 351 Méder, G. 393
Duarte, M. 497 Mema, M. 247
Duić, N. 508 Milošević, D. 486
Duić, N. 531 Milošević, N. 583
Durão, D. 497 Milovojević, D. R. 583
Dvarioniene, J. 312 Mink, G. 393
Erić, M. 486 Monteiro, E. 197
Estevan, A. 261 Moreira, A. 33
Moreira, N. A. 197

589
590

Morrone, P. 282 Schneider, D. R. 167

Mulas, P. 393 Serra, L. 373
Najdovskij, D. 16 Simeoni, P. 206
Nardin, G. 206 Sin, L. C. 568
Nasrudin, M. F. 568 Šlaus, I. 16
Nazri, M. Z. A. 568 Stasiskiene, Z. 312
Novosel, D. 233 Stefanović, B. 486
Nunes, C. P. 175 Stoiljković, S. 518
Obata, Y. 93 Stojiljković, D. 341
Omar, K. 568 Stojiljković, M. 341
Orecchini, F. 155 Sviderek, S. 124
Pantusa, D. 282 Takeuchi, K. 93
Piacentino, A. 221 Tasić, V. 583
Pires, A. C. 175 Teixeira, M. A. 79
Plazas, F. L. 450 Tuković, Z. 124, 233
Prat, N. 261 Uche, J. 373
Priesching, E. 508 Ujisawa, Y. 536
Radovanović, P. 486 Vlajkovic, M. 558
Raluy, G. 373 Vukić, R. 186
Rašković, P. 518 Welther, K. 393
Sanopoulos, D. 531 Yamamoto, T. 536
Santos, M. Y. 33 Yamashita, O. 133
Santos, S. T. 79 Yokochi, H. 133
Sarmento, M. 497 Zidanšek, A. 16
Sato, H. 536 Zrnić, Z. 341

590